SURFCAMmanual PDF

Welcome to SURFCAM
Welcome to
How to Use the Acrobat Reader

SURFCAM 2002 Product Notes
The SURFCAM Manual
SURFCAM Solids Tutorials
SURFCAM TUTORIALS Beginners Tutorial: Part Drawing to NC Code
Display, Color Scheme, and Dimension Tips
Design a part with SURFCAM
Machine the part
A complete project
Hole Processing Tutorial
HOW TO USE THE ACROBAT READER

Press CTRL+P to print this chapter. Use page range 2 to 4.
Use the Adobe Acrobat Reader to read the SURFCAM online manual.
Following are some of the common methods to accomplish tasks. Click the blue crossreference link.
OPEN the Manual
MOVE the pointer
PRINT
EXIT
MAGNIFY
OPEN the Manual

FROM SURFCAM
1.
2.
3.
SEARCH
COPY text to the clipboard.
SEE the page and the bookmarks
GET More Help
FROM THE START BUTTON
Run SURFCAM.
Click Help.
Click Manual/Tutorials.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click the Start button.

Point to Programs.
Point to SURFCAM.
Click SURFCAM Manual.
MOVE the pointer

A. Use the scroll bar.
B. Use the toolbar buttons to go to the first, previous, next, or last
page.
C. Use the Home, End, Page Up, or Page Down keys
D. Use the bookmarks
E. Make sure that the hand button is selected. Right-click and choose an
command that will allow you to go back.
F. Click a cross reference link. Blue, underlined text indicates a cross-reference
link.
PRINT
1.
Press CTRL+P.
2.
Make sure to select the current page or a range of pages.
EXIT
Click Exit on the File menu.
Copyright 2002 by Surfware, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
MAGNIFY
A. Click the Zoom In button on the toolbar. Click in the document.
B. Click the down-arrow button next to the current scale to see the
Zoom To dialog box to indicate a magnification.
SEARCH
1.
Press CTRL+F.
2.
Enter the word.
3.
Press CTRL+G to repeat the search.
COPY text to the clipboard.

1.
Click the Text Select button on the toolbar.
2.
Select the text.
3.
Press CTRL+C.
SEE the page and the bookmarks

The bookmarks in the navigation pane
are the Table of Contents for the manual.
Click a
to see an additional division of
a subject.
Click a bookmark to move to that
subject.
Navigation Pane
Tip
Click the Show/Hide Navigation pane button to switch between a

one-pane screen and a two-pane screen.
GET More Help

1.
Click Help on the Adobe Acrobat Reader menu.
2.
Click Reader Guide.
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Press CTRL+P to print the Table of Contents.
Use page range 5 to 28.
THE SURFCAM MANUAL

Get Started
Chapter 1 Introduction to SURFCAM
Welcome to SURFCAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
About SURFCAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
The Product Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
The Software Interface Module (SIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
The License File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Start SURFCAM and SURFCAM Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SURFCAM User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
The Main menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
The SURFCAM toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
The Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
The Online Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Manual conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SURFCAM Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Use the help file for a reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table of Contents Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Video Clip example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Index Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Use the context-sensitive help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Close the help file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Chapter 2 How To Use SURFCAM

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Create the part design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Use the SURFCAM Solids program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Use the SURFCAM Create menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Use the designs from other programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Create the toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Open the DSN file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Identify the part geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Assign the toolpath parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
The Tool Information tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
SURFCAM Table of Contents
The Cut Control tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

The Options tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Create and display the toolpath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Manage the toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Verify the toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Edit the toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Create the CNC code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Communicate with the NC machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Chapter 3 The SURFCAM Tutorial

Part 1: Display, Color Scheme, and Dimension Tips
The SURFCAM display buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Work with colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Edit a Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Create a new element in a new color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Work with the Color Schemes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Open a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Change the color scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Create a new color scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Edit a color scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Create the dimensions on a design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Open a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Linear dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Create a radius dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Create some additional dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Part 2: Design a Part with SURFCAM

Create a 2D part design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Create the geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Create a rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Create a circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Edit the geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Save the file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Create a cross section surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Open a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Create the surface through the cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Create a drive curve surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Open a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Create the surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Create 2 fillet surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Open a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Constant fillet radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Variable fillet radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Two challenge designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Part 3: Machine the Part

Single surface machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Open a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Create a cut toolpath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Multiple surface machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Open a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Create a planar toolpath. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Z Rough machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Open a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Create the toolpath. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
NC Operations Manager tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Open a lathe file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Set the View Indicator for a lathe operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Set the tool speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Open the NC Operations Manager dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Display the toolpath. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Edit the toolpath information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Display the other lathe toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Set the View Indicator for mill operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Set the tool speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Part 4: A Complete Project

A 2D NC project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Open a file and create a new setup section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Select the machining mode and identify the geometry to cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Create the toolpath. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Verify the toolpath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Create the NC code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Transfer the NC code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Design
Chapter 4 Menus and Dialog Boxes
Part 1: Menus
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Common Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
The Select Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
The Select Chain Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Where Chaining is Encountered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Chaining Closed Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Branch Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
The Select Point Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

The Vector Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Part 2: Dialog Boxes

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
The Basic Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
The Status Bar Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
The Views Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
The Layers Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Coordinates Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
The Mask Selection Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
The Depth Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Chapter 5 Create the Designs

Use the SURFCAM Solids program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Use the designs from other programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Use the SURFCAM Create menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Circle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Chapter 6 Create the Surfaces

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Special Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Surface Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Analyzing Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Cross Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Synchronize Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Synchronize With Connecting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Four Curve Surface Using Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Drive Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Cross Section Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
2D Cross Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
3D Cross Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Chaining Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Attachment Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
2D Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
3D Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Directing Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Tilt with 2D Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Tilt with 3D Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Cross Section Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Cone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Torus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Cuboid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Blend Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Blending Two Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Blending Four Surfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Blend Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Trim Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Chapter 7 Design Utilities

Create Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Text/Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
The Analyze menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Min/Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Tangency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Surface Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
The Display menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
The Shade Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
The Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
10
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
NC Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Snap & Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
The General Pointers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
The Pencil Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Snap & Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
The File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
New. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Send To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Special Design Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Gear Data Files (*.gr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Involute Data Files (*.inv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
CAM Profile Data Files (*.cm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Chapter 8 Edit the Designs

Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Flip Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Trim/Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Trim/Break Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Trim/Break Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Extensions of elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Projection of an element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Trim/Break lines, splines, and arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Trim/Break lines, splines, and arcs to a location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Trim/Break a surface to a line, a spline, a surface edge or an arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Trim/Break a surface to another surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Trim/Break a surface to a location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Trimming with Keep Segment and Delete Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Trimming with AutoTrim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Breaking with Auto Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
11
Increment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Splines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Tangency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Join . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Text/Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
The Transform Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Rotate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Scale XYZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
To View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Offsetting Lines, Arcs and Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Offsetting Chained Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Offsetting Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Transform Copy Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
The Delete Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Single, Within, Intersect, Visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Duplicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Undelete Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Undelete All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
NC Machining
Chapter 9 Common NC Parameters
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Tool Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Tool Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
The Select Tool functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
The Select Tool dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Edit or Add a Tool with SURFCAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Edit or Add a Tool with Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
The Convert / Open Database dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Add a Tool Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
The Material Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Select Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
12
Edit or Add a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485

Inline Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
The Cut Control tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Leadin/Leadout Parameters for 3, 4 and 5 Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Plunge Parameters for 2, 3, 4 and 5 Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
The Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Chapter 10 Common NC Operations

Mill/Turn Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Tool Information Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
The Cut Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Drill and Hole Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Prepare the drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
The drill operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Mask Selection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
The Hole Processing menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
The Hole Processing toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
The Process tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
The Locations tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Begin The Project Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Complete The Project Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Tool Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Cut Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Tool Containment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
The Patch Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
The Spline Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
A single closed spline defines the area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
A set of closed splines defines the area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
A single open spline defines the area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
A set of separate open splines defines the area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
The Both Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
An Example with an Intersect Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Pattern Slicing with the Z Range filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Chapter 11 2 Axis
2 Axis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
The Tool Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Leadin and Leadout Parameters for 2 Axis Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Leadin and Leadout Parameters for the Face Mill Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
13
Material Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

The Options Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Use Pocket To Remove The Material Near the Material Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
The Pocket Cut Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Pocketing Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Remove the Material Near and Up to the Material Boundary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Open and Closed Boundary Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Contour Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Contour 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Pilot Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Face Mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Rest Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Thread Mill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
Tool Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Cut Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
2 Axis Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Advanced Procedures 2 Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Tapered Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Multiple Island Depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Construction View Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Chapter 12 3 Axis
3 Axis Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
The Tool Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
The Cut Control Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
The Options Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Z Rough. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Tool Information Tab Z Rough. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Cut Control Tab Z Rough. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Z Rough Pocket Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
3 Axis Options Tab Z Rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Z Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Tool Information Tab Z Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Cut Control Tab Z Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
Z Finish Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
3 Axis Options Tab Z Finish. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
Planar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
14
Tool Information Tab Planar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664

Cut Control Tab Planar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
3 Axis Options Tab Planar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Contour 3D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Pilot Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Auto Rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Tool Information Tab Auto Rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Control Tab Auto Rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
3 Axis Options Tab Auto Rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
REST Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
Pencil Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
Tool Information Tab Pencil Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
Cut Control Tab Pencil Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
3 Axis Options Tab Pencil Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Plunge Rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Tool Information Tab Plunge Rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Cut Control Tab Plunge Rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
3 Axis Options Tab Plunge Rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Chapter 13 4 Axis and 5 Axis

4 and 5 Axis Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .699
The Tool Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .699
The Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
The Cut Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
Begin the Cut Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
The Cut Tool Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704
The Cut Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704
Complete the Cut Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704
The Project Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704
The Swarf Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
Begin the Swarf Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
The Swarf Tool Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
The Swarf Cut Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
The Swarf Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
Complete the Swarf Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
The Contour Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
Begin the Contour Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712
The Contour Tool Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712
15
The Contour Cut Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712

The Contour Options Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Complete the Contour Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Four Axis Contour Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
5 Axis Contour Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
The Trim Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Begin the Trim Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
The Trim Tool Information Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
The Trim Cut Control Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
The Trim Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Complete the Trim Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
The Drill Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
The Set Axis Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
NC 4 Axis Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Set Axis for 4 Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Rotary Axis Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Indexing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Simultaneous Axis Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
NC 5 Axis Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Set Axis for 5 Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
The Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Graphic Tool Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Chapter 14 Lathe
Lathe Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Configure the Lathe View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Tool Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Select a Lathe Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Edit or Add a Lathe Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Select a Lathe Drill Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Edit or Add a Lathe Drill Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
The Turn Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Lathe Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760
Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Face. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Face Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Groove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Partoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
16
Chapter 15 Wire EDM

Wire EDM Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .789
2 Axis XY (EDM Contour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .789
Cut Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .795
Skim Cut Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800
EDM Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
4 Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .805
Select an EDM Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .809
Edit or Add an EDM Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .810
EDM Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .815
4 Axis UV Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .815
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .818
Chapter 16 NC Operations Manager

NC Operations Manager dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .819
NC Operations tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .821
Edit an operation name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .822
Edit an operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .823
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .823
Edit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .824
Regenerate Toolpath and Reselect Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .824
Regenerate Toolpath with Original Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .825
Edit a merged operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .827
Edit a transformed operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828
Edit a project or a setup section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .830
Information tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .830
Stock and Fixture tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .831
NC Operations Manager toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .834
Customize the toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .835
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .837
Add, Split, Create, and Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .838
General Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .840
Create Setup Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .841
Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .844
Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .845
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .846
Scale Uniform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .848
Scale XYZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .849
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .850
17
Rectangular Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

Circular Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Indexed Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
Wrap Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Edit NC Toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Select the Instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
View Toolpath. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
ICD Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871
Import Files or Convert Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872
NC Post list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
NC Filter list box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
NCD Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Reference
Chapter 17 Configuration Tools
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Temporary Override of Default Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Change Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
The System Options Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
The Display Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
The NC Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
The Plotter Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
The File Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
The System Files Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
The Default Paths Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
The Tolerances Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
The NC Default Paths Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
The Input Device Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Utilities

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Set Default Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
INC2APT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
FaroArm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
Setting Up FARO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
FARO Digitizer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
18
Definition Dialog Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .927

Define Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .927
Define Plane Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .928
Digitize Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .929
Digitize Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .930
Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .933
Digtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .933
SpaceBall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .933
SpaceMouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .933
Chapter 19 SURFCAM Verify

Part 1: Integrated Verify
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .935
Wireframe Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .936
Verify Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .937
Verify Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .938
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .938
Model Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .939
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .942
Verify Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .943
u Inspect Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .945
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .946
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .947
Verify Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .947
Part 2: Stand-alone SURFCAM Verify

Stand-alone Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .950
CMS (Common Model Structure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .950
Machining Simulation & Modeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .950
Animation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .951
Solid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .951
Animation + Solid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .952
Turbo Solid Modeling for 3-axis Surface Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .952
Machine Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .953
Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .953
Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .953
CNC Program Translators and Reverse Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .954
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .954
Start SURFCAM Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .954
Screen Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .955
View Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .955
Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .956
19
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956

Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
File Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Edit Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958
Process Bar (VCR Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959
View Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
Inspection Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962
Tool (Panel) Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963
Status Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
CNC Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
Process Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
Inspection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
Windows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Help Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Preferences and Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972
Machine Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Creating a machine definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Machine Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
Machine Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
Axis Travel Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
Machine Setup: Control Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
Machine Setup: Travels Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Machine Setup: Time Params 1 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984
Machine Setup: Time Params 2 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
Machine Setup: Rotary Axis Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985
Job Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
Open Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
NC Program Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
Machine Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994
Stock Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
Shape & Size Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
Location Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Origin Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
Rotation Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Verify Settings Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
Tool Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Tool Definition Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
20
Tool Shank Tab (Milling Tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1013

Tool Holder Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1014
Tool Turret Tab (Lathe Tools Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1015
NTG Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1016
Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1018
Visual Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1018
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1019
Tool, Stock & Fixture Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1020
Translucent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1021
Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1021
Zoom Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1021
2D/3D Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1022
3/4 Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1022
Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1022
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1023
Comparison with Design Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1025
STL Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1026
Comparing STL file with Solid or Turbo Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1027
Error Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1027
Tooling Collisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1028
Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1029
Sample Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1029
MILL.JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1029
Open File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1029
Set Up and Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1030
Viewing Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1032
Inspect the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1032
Check Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1033
Rotating and Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1035
Cross Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1035
SURF.JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1035
Set Up and Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1036
Inspect the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1036
STL Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1037
TOMBSTON.JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1039
BLADE.JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1040
LATHE.JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1041
STL Fix Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1041
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1041
Installation and Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1043
Screen Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1043
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1044
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1044
21
Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
Help Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
Part 3: Reverse Post
Chapter 20 Editor
Part 1: Editor Defaults
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
Set Default Version UtilityDefault Explorer Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
Verify Program Default Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
PST WizardDefault Post Processing Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
Part 2: Predator Editor

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
PEditor Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
Start the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
From the Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
Command Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
Multiple Command Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056
Add a Command Line Option to the Windows Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
When Starting Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
Start the Editor and Automatically Open a CNC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
Screen Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Editor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Save All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
Find File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
Summary Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
Backplot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
22
Backplot Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1079

Backplot Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1081
Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1085
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1086
List of Last Files Opened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1086
Exit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1086
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1087
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1087
Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1087
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1087
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1088
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1089
Select Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1089
Select To Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1089
Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1089
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1089
Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1090
Continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1091
Goto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1091
Jump to Bookmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1092
Insert Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1092
ASCII Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1092
Block Skips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1092
Bookmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1093
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1093
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1093
End Of Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1093
Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1094
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1096
Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1096
Spaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1097
Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1097
Delete Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1098
Block Skip Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1098
Truncate Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1098
End of Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1099
Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1099
Spaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1099
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1100
Truncate Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1100
NC Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1100
Next Tool Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1100
Previous Tool Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1101
Change Feed Rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1101
23
Change Spindle Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102

Resequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Math Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
DNC Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
DNC Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
Send to CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
Receive from CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
RS-232 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
Background Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
Text Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
Window Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
DNC Setup and Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
RS-232 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits and Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
Cable Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
Hardware Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
Cable Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
DNC RS-232 Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
DNC Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
Anilam Crusader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
Bridgeport BOSS 3, 4, 5 and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
Bridgeport BOSS 8, 9 and 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
Centurion 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
Decitek Tape Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
DSI Tape Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
Dyna Mechtronics 2200 - 4400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
Dynapath Delta 20 and 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
Facit Tape Punch 4046 - 4047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Fadal CNC 88, HS and MP-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Fanuc 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146
Fanuc 3 / GN 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Fanuc 6 and 9 / GN 6 and 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
Fanuc 10, 11, 12, and 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
24
Fanuc 16, 18, 160 and 180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1154

Haas Mill and Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1158
Heidenhain 145 - 412 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1160
Maho 432 - 532 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1163
Mazak M-32 and T-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1164
Mazak M2 and T2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1166
Okuma OSP 500 - 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1167
Siemens 810 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1169
Yasnac LX-1, MX-1 and MX-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1171
Yasnac LX-3 and MX-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1173
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1176
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1177
Math Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1177
G and M Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1179
CNC Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1183
BTR Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1190
Editor Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1193
ASCII Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1194
Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1195
Part 3: SURFCAM NC Editor

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1198
Using the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1198
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1199
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1199
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1201
Search Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1205
Global Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1206
Calcs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1214
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1220
Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1231
Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1239
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1239
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1239
Shortcut Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1240
File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1240
UNIX Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1240
Other File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1241
Chapter 21 SURFCAM DNC

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1243
SURFCAM DNC Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1243
Step 1 - Gather information Regarding the Machine Tool Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . .1243
25
Step 2 - Add the Machine to the SURFCAM DNC Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
Step 3 - Configure the Machine Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
Files Specifications Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
Communication Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
Data Specifications Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249
Filters Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251
Step 4 - Download an NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
SURFCAM DNC Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1254
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
Communicate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
SURFCAM DNC II Dialog Box Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
SURFCAM DNC II Status and Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
SURFCAM DNC Other Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
Configuration Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
Hardware Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
Control Character List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264
ASCII to EIA Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265
Post Processor
Chapter 22 Post Processor
Part 1: Introduction
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1267
Post Processor Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
The Spost Post Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1268
Creating Spost Posts and FIL Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1268
Running an Spost Post Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1268
Operations Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1269
Post List Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1270
Starting Post Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1270
Post Processing Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
Summary Spost Post Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272
Part 2: MPost
The MPOST Post Processor Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1274
Creating an MPost Post File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274
Running an MPOST Post Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
The SURFCAM.PST File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1278
PST BeginPost Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1278
PST PostItem Subsections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1279
PST File Commands, Variables and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1280
26
Special PST File Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1282

Modify the PST File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1282
Post Menu Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1282
Change the Default Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1282
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1283
Tool Path Smoother with the ArcFltr feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1284
ArcFltrMx Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1284
NURB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1285
ZRange Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1287
The Post Processor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1287
Inc Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1290
POSTFORM Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1290
NC Code Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1291
Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1291
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1291
Case Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1292
Entry Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1292
Structured Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1292
IF, ELSE, and ENDIF Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1293
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1293
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1293
The Set Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1294
Word Address Formats: Mill, Lathe, EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1295
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1309
Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1334
Standard and Optional Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1336
Canned Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1347
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1364
Global Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1366
Prompted Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1389
Tool Comment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1392
4 Axis Wire EDM Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1393
English / Metric Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1394
INC File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1394
Word Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1394
Inch/MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1395
Unitmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1395
POSTFORM Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1395
Incremental Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1397
Abs/Inc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1398
Mult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1398
Sub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1398
Incremental? Mill, Lathe, EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1399
27
Inc/Abs Mill, Lathe, EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399

Incmode Mill, Lathe, EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
Subprogram Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1403
RenumSubs? Mill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
Subs1st? Mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
SubStart Mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
SubEnd Mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
SubCall Mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1404
Between Mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Sub Mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Subline Mill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406
Times Mill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407
Block Number Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1408
Word Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1408
Commands Mill, Lathe, EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1410
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414
Suppressing Block Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1415
Configuring the Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1418
Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
SURFCAM.LOG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418
Foreign Language Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
Machine Specific Output Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
PST File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
POSTFORM File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
Accessing the Post Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420
Adding Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
SURFCAM File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422
POST Sample Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1422
Generic.M3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
Generic.L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
Generic.E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
Part 3: Spost
Spost Fil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
Spost Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1445
28
Table of Contents
The SURFCAM Manual

Get Started
The SURFCAM Manual

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO SURFCAM

1.1
WELCOME TO SURFCAM
Use the Get Started manual for the Standard version, the Demo version, and the
Educational version of SURFCAM. See SURFCAM versions, page 31.
Get started in SURFCAM with one of the following methods.
1.
Read Chapters 1 and 2. Then do the tutorial.

Chapter 1 has the Product Notes information, installation procedures, and
descriptions of the User Interface, the help file, and the online manual.
Chapter 2 has the basic information about SURFCAM CAD/CAM
procedures.
2.
Start with Chapter 3, The SURFCAM Tutorial. Use Chapters 1 and 2 for
reference.
Tip
Read the Get Started online manual instead of the printed manual. Then you
can click any blue, underlined cross-reference link to move immediately to that
topic.
1.2
ABOUT SURFCAM
Surfware, Inc. developed the SURFCAM CAD/CAM program for the Microsoft
Windows operating systems.
When you receive your SURFCAM program, you receive the following items.
1. A Compact Disk (CD)
Programs
A. The SURFCAM program
B. The SURFCAM Solids program
C. The SURFCAM Verify program
D. The Direct Numerical Control (DNC) programs
E. The editor programs
F. The configuration programs
30
G. The FARO Digitizer program

H. The Adobe Acrobat Reader program
I. The translation programs that import and translate many Computer Aided
Design (CAD) files that were not created in SURFCAM
Neutral format files
APT, CDL, DXF, for example
Sample files
Part files, custom tools, posts for the mill, lathe, and EDM post processors
Documentation
The complete online manual, the video clips, and the Help topics
Product Notes
See The Product Notes section below.
2. A Software Interface Module (SIM)
Surfware sends a SIM with the first purchase of the standard version or the educational
version of SURFCAM. See The Software Interface Module (SIM), page 32.
3. The Get Started manual
The Get Started manual is in printed form. The complete manual, which includes a copy
of the Get Started manual, is online. The online manual contains a Table of Contents, an
Index and Cross references to other parts of the manual.
1.3
THE PRODUCT NOTES
The Product Notes file indicates the required hardware and memory, the Microsoft
Windows operating systems now supported, the new features and enhancements.
Click the SURFCAM 2002 Product Notes if you read the online manual, or use the
following procedure.
1.
2.
Point to the Programs command.
3.
Point to the SURFCAM command.
4.
Click the SURFCAM Product Notes command.
1.4
31
INSTALLATION
SURFCAM versions
SURFCAM has a Standard version, a Demo version, and an Educational version.
These versions have the same 2D and 3D wireframe design features and the same
surface design features.
The Standard version saves the designs with a .dsn file extension. The Demo and
Educational versions save the designs with a .dem file extension.
The Standard version cannot read a file with a .dem extension. The Demo and the
Educational versions can read a file with either a .dsn or a .dem extension.
You can create a temporary toolpath and display it on the screen with the Demo
version. You cannot save this toolpath.
Uninstall
To uninstall a previous version of SURFCAM, use the following procedure.
1.
2.
Point to the Settings command.
3.
Click the Control Panel command.
4.
Double-click the Add/Remove Programs option. A dialog box appears.
5.
Make sure that the Install/Uninstall tab is visible. Double-click the SURFCAM
version that you need uninstalled.
6.
The InstallShield Wizard appears. The process starts like the installation
process. Follow the directions on the screen.
7.
Select the option to Modify/Repair/Uninstall.
8.
Click the Next button.
9.
Select the option to Remove and click the Next button.
Install
Insert the SURFCAM CD. The CD runs automatically. A screen appears with the
options to install SURFCAM and SURFCAM Solids.
SURFCAM
If you update from a previous version of SURFCAM and select the same folder, a
BackUp folder is created. The BackUp folder contains an exact copy of the
configuration files of the earlier version. These configuration files are then updated
to the new version and put in their correct folders.
You can install one SURFCAM 2002 program but you can open many copies of
the program.
32
SURFCAM Solids
1. Click the Install SURFCAM Solids command.
2.
Select one of the other commands.

A. Install SURFCAM Solids Tutorials to the hard disk.
B. Open SURFCAM Solids Tutorials from the CD.
Tip for Demo version

The SURFCAM Solids program is available in the Demo version for only 60
days after the day that it is installed. The license cannot be renewed. If you plan
to use SURFCAM Solids after you learn about SURFCAM, install the
SURFCAM Solids program at a later date.
You can still open and read the tutorials from the CD if you do not install the
program.
1.4.1
The Software Interface Module (SIM)
You must have a Software Interface Module (SIM) to run the standard and the
educational versions of SURFCAM.
The SIM is a small device that connects to the parallel-printer port. Connect the SIM
first. Then connect the printer cable to the SIM.
Surfware recommends that you insure the SIM for the cost of the SURFCAM system.
You will have to purchase a full SURFCAM system to replace a SIM.
1.4.2
The License File
When you install a higher level of SURFCAM, you upgrade SURFCAM and need a
License File. When you upgrade a 3 Axis product to a 5 Axis product, for example,
you need a License File.
The License File has a time limit.
Surfware sends a timed License File with each new standard version of
SURFCAM. The license is normally timed for 60 days or until a new license file that
is not timed is created.
The license for an Educational version of SURFCAM is timed for one year. A new
license file is required each year.
SURFCAM daily displays a warning message on your screen when a license is
about to expire. Each day SURFCAM indicates the number of days that are left
before the expiration date. Your dealer can give you the information about an
extension.
33
See the Product Notes for additional information. To open the Product Notes, see The
Product Notes, page 30.
1.5
START SURFCAM AND SURFCAM SOLIDS
From your desktop, double-click the SURFCAM icon. You can run several copies
of SURFCAM at the same time. Your computer system can limit the number.
Double-click the SURFCAM Solids icon on the desktop to run SURFCAM Solids.
See Use the SURFCAM Solids program, page 53.
34
1.6
SURFCAM USER INTERFACE

1
4
5
8
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1. The Windows Control menu

Click the SURFCAM icon for the Windows operations that Restore, Move, Size,
Minimize or Maximize a window, or Close the program.
35
2. The Windows title bar

The title bar shows the SURFCAM icon, the name SURFCAM, and the name of the
current file.
3. The Windows buttons to minimize, maximize or close
Click the minimize button to decrease the SURFCAM window to an icon, not
close the SURFCAM program. Click the maximize button to open the window
to a full-screen display. Click the button on the right to close the SURFCAM program.
4. The Main menu bar, page 38
5. The SURFCAM toolbar, page 38
The buttons on the SURFCAM toolbar are shortcuts for many commands.
6. The Status bar, page 39
The buttons on the status bar display the current values of the SURFCAM parameters.
Click a button to change its value.
7. The Submenu bar
When you click some menu commands, a submenu menu bar is displayed.
If there are many commands on the submenu bar, the Next

button and the Previous button appear. Use the Next and
Previous buttons to see all of the commands.
8. Customize the display
Right-click the toolbar, the status bar, or the submenu bar to display a menu.
36
Use Small or Large Icons

Click Small Icons or Large Icons. SURFCAM displays your
selection on all three bars.
Use No Text Labels

Click the No Text Labels command to toggle between the
display of icons only or icons with the text.
If the pointer was on the status bar, the changes are in that bar. If the pointer was on
the submenu bar, the changes are in that bar.
When you close SURFCAM and start again, these settings remain.
Restore Toolbar Defaults

You can change the arrangement of toolbars.
Point to the vertical bar at the left of the toolbar, the status bar, or the submenu
bar. You can drag any of these bars to a different bar.
When you close SURFCAM and start again, these settings remain.
Click the Restore Toolbar Defaults command to restore these bars to their original
positions.
9. The workspace
The workspace is the largest part of the screen. Use the workspace to create the
geometry and the toolpaths. Then you can analyze and edit these items.
You can change the background color of the workspace and the colors of the entities.
See Work with the Color Schemes, page 74.
10. The SURFCAM pointers
SURFCAM uses several different pointers for different conditions. The cross hair
pointer is the default pointer.
When you click the Sketch command, the pointer changes from a cross hair
pointer to a pencil pointer. See The General Pointers in the online Design Utilities
chapter.
11. A right-click menu
When the pointer is in the workspace, right-click to display a menu.
The sketch mode
See the information in the Help file or see Snap & Grid in the
online Design Utilities chapter.
37
Not in the sketch mode

Fit, Rotate, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Pan, Last
View, Next View and Repaint
The SURFCAM display buttons, page 66.
Views
View, page 40.
Delete
The Delete Menu in the online Edit the
Designs chapter.
Transform
The Transform Menu in the online Edit the
Designs chapter.
Operations Manager
The Operations Manager Button, page 39.
12. The CView Indicator
The CView Indicator (Construction View Indicator) displays the X, Y, and Z axes of the
current CView. See CView, page 42.
You can display or not display the CView Indicator. See The Display Options dialog box,
page 111.
13. The View Indicator
The View Indicator displays the X, Y, and Z axes of the World Coordinate System. While
you rotate the image in the workspace, the orientation of the View Indicator is changed.
The colors of the axes change when you rotate the image. See View, page 40.
14. The prompt line
The prompt line, at the bottom of the screen, displays instructions or additional
information about menu commands. SURFCAM will prompt you for the actions you must
take and show the other important information.
15. The pointer coordinates
The coordinates of the current location of the pointer are displayed.
16. The graphics card
The OpenGL graphics card in the online Configuration Tools chapter.
38
1.6.1
The Main menu bar
See The SURFCAM Tutorial, page 65 for some examples of the commands on the
Main menu.
See the indicated chapter for a full description of the command.

File
The File menu in the online Design Utilities chapter.
Create
the online Create the Designs chapter.
Edit
the online Edit the Designs chapter.
Display
The Display menu in the online Design Utilities chapter.
NC
2 Axis
the online 2 Axis chapter.
3 Axis
the online 3 Axis chapter.
4 and 5 Axis the online 4 Axis and 5 Axis chapter.

SRM
SRM is a SURFCAM add-on product. If you have purchased SRM,

click the link to open the online Step Reduction Milling (SRM)
document.
Lathe
the online Lathe chapter.
Wire EDM
the online Wire EDM chapter.
Mill/Turn
Mill/Turn Machining in the online Common NC Operations chapter.
Analyze
The Analyze menu in the online Design Utilities chapter.
Options
The Options menu in the online Design Utilities chapter.
Help
SURFCAM Help, page 47.
1.6.2
The SURFCAM toolbar
The file buttons

The first three buttons on the toolbar are the standard Windows
buttons. Use these buttons to create a new file, open a file, or save
a file.
Tip
A red figure on the Save button indicates that you have not saved
the changes that you made in the file.
39
The Display buttons

The display buttons appear next to the file
buttons on the toolbar. Change the display of the
screen objects with one of the following options.
1.
The SURFCAM display buttons, page 66.
2.
The Display menu in the online Design Utilities chapter.
The Delete button

Four methods to display the Delete menu follow.
1.
Click the Delete button.
2.
Click the Edit > Delete command.
3.
Press CTRL+D.
4.
Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
The Transform Button

Two methods to Copy or Move an object follow.
1.
Click the Transform button.
2.
Click the Edit > Transform command.
The Operations Manager Button

Three methods to open the NC Operations Manager follow.
1.
Click the NC Operations Manager button.
2.
Press CTRL+N.
3.
Right-click in the workspace and click the Operations Manager command on

the menu that is displayed.
The NC Operations Manager is a device that helps you manage a project. See
Open the NC Operations Manager dialog box, page 112.
1.6.3
The Status bar
The status bar is displayed below the toolbar. The buttons show the parameters and
their current values. See Use No Text Labels, page 36 to display only the icons. The
following pages display the toolbar buttons with no text labels.
40
Click a button on the status bar to change its value.

Color
The box on the Color button shows the color
SURFCAM uses to draw the elements.
Click the Color button or press CTRL+O to change the
color for new elements.
The Color Selection table is displayed. This table
shows the available element colors in the current
SURFCAM color scheme. See Work with the Color
Schemes, page 74.
Click a color. The box closes. The new color appears on
the button.
Note
This Color Selection table shows the colors

that are used for the Blue Background
Scheme.
See also Work with colors, page 71.
View
Click the View button or press CTRL+V to change your view of the
geometry.
Eight standard Views and CViews are part of any drawing.
Shortcut keys for Standard Views

Press CTRL+1 through CTRL+8 to change to views 1 through 8.
See Change the view, page 66 and The Views Dialog Box in the online Menus and
Dialog Boxes chapter.
Note
The broken lines in the following graphic indicate the lines that are not
seen if the part is a solid.
Standard views
View 1. Top View
View 2. Front View
View 3. Back view
View 4. Bottom view
View 5. Right side view
View 6. Left side view
View 7. Isometric view
View 8. Axonometric view

The Standard Views
41
42
CView
Click the CView button or press CTRL+C to change the view that
SURFCAM has of the geometry. See Select a Construction View, page
84 and The Views Dialog Box in the online Menus and Dialog Boxes
chapter.
Layer
You can place elements of a drawing on a maximum of 256 layers. The
number on the button indicates the layer for the elements you create.
Click the Layers button or press CTRL+L to open the Layers dialog box. The
example shows the dialog box for the Fork part in the ..\DSN\Samples folder.
The names and the numbers of the layers are shown. You can see if a layer is
visible and selectable. See The Layers Dialog Box in the online Menus and Dialog
Boxes chapter.
43
Shade
Click the Shade button or press CTRL+A to shade the surfaces in the workspace.
The Shade button and the shortcut are toggle operations.
Shade On Button
Shade Off Button
See The Shade Menu in the online Design Utilities chapter.

Coord
The Coord button toggles between World and View. Your selection indicates
which dialog box is displayed when you need to enter the coordinates of a point.
World
View
Mask
By its definition, a masked element is an element that is visible on the screen, but
you cannot select the element.
Click the arrow or press CTRL+M to display the Mask Selection Settings
dialog box.
44
Clear the check box to mask that item.

The Mask On button
If the Mask On button is displayed on the toolbar, the items and the
colors that are not checked are masked. You cannot select those items or
colors.
The Mask Off button
If the Mask Off button is displayed on the toolbar, you can select any
element and any color.
Click the Mask button on the toolbar to change the display on the button. See The
Mask Selection Settings Dialog Box in the online Menus and Dialog Boxes
chapter.
Depth
The Depth button displays the Z coordinate of an element that is
created in the sketch mode. Change this value to create an
element at a different level.
See The Depth Dialog Box in the online Menus and Dialog Boxes chapter.
45
Scale
Click the Scale button to change the size of the image on the
screen.
SURFCAM shows the Display Scale dialog box for you to enter a value. Select a
larger number for a larger image, a smaller number for a smaller image.
Click the OK button. SURFCAM repaints the screen according to your selection.
1.7
THE ONLINE MANUAL
The SURFCAM manual is a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. If necessary,

SURFCAM installs the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. Use this program to see the
manual on your screen or to print any part of the manual.
To learn to use the Adobe Acrobat Reader program, see How to Use the
Acrobat Reader in the online manual.
Tip
Open the manual from the Start button

1.
Click
2.
Point to
3.
Point to
4.
Click
Open the manual from the SURFCAM program.

1.
Click the Help command on the main menu.
2.
Click the Manual/Tutorials command.
1.7.1
Manual conventions
The manual uses shortcuts to refer to SURFCAM commands.

Click the Create > Line > Rectangle command is a shortcut for the following
procedure.
1.
Click the Create command on the main menu bar.
46
2.
Click the Line command on the Create menu.
3.
Click the Rectangle command on the Create > Line menu.
Tip
Normally the last step in a SURFCAM procedure is the instruction to click

the OK button. This step is easy to see and is not included in the description
of some procedures.
Tip
All commands start from the main menu bar. The main command is not
included in any shortcut for that reason.
1.7.2
Cross references
The cross references in the Get Started manual normally indicate a page number
when the topic is in the Get Started manual. The cross references to the topics that
are only in the online manual do not indicate a page number.
Tip
If you read the Get Started manual online, you can see that the crossreference links are displayed in blue and underlined. You can click any
cross-reference link to move immediately to that topic, even in the online
manual.
1.7.3
Shortcut keys
See the last page of the printed manual for the Shortcut Keys.
1.8
47
SURFCAM HELP
The Help file in SURFCAM is separate from the online manual. Click the Help command
on the main menu.
Contents
Click the Contents command to display the main SURFCAM
help file and the table of contents.
Manual/Tutorials
Click the Manual/Tutorials command to open the SURFCAM
manual, learn to use the Acrobat Reader, and open tutorials.
About SURFCAM
Click About SURFCAM to see a window with the following information.
1.
The current version
2.
Copyright information
3.
A Surfware web site button
4.
The licensee
5.
The maintenance expiration date

Note
6.
This date is not the expiration date for a timed license.
The additional product purchases

SURFCAM installs the following items. These items are not displayed in the list.
A. Lathe for SURFCAM 3 Axis and better
B. 5 Axis Trim for SURFCAM 3 Axis Plus and better
C. Parasolids translator
D. SAT translator
7.
The SIM number
48
1.8.1
Use the help file for a reference
Click the Help > Contents command.
1
2
Buttons
A. The Help Topics, Back, Print and Browse buttons are the standard buttons
on help screens in many software applications.
Tip
The Help Topics button is a toggle button. You can

toggle between a two-pane window and a one-pane
window.
B. The Main button only appears on the screens of the help files
in SURFCAM. There are many help files in SURFCAM. Click
this button or press the underlined character. The main SURFCAM help file
opens with the main Table of Contents and the main Index.
49
C. The Open Online Manual button only appears on the

screens of the help files in SURFCAM. Click this button
or press the underlined character. The online manual opens. Use the Index
or press CTRL+F to search for additional information about a topic.
2
The Contents, Index, and Search tabs are standard Windows tabs.
The topic information is displayed on the right pane.
1.8.1.1
Table of Contents Example

Click the Contents tab to make sure that you can see the Table of
Contents in the left pane.
1.
Double-click the book Look at the SURFCAM Menus to open the book.
2.
Click the page SURFCAM Menus. SURFCAM displays the main menu bar
on the right pane.
50
3.
The main menu descriptions contain the information about other SURFCAM
menus. Move the pointer to a word with green color and an underline to see
a hand appear. The word is a hot spot.
4.
Click the hot spot to see a pop-up window or a new screen with the
information about the topic.
5.
When a pop-up window is displayed, click in any position to close the

window.
6.
When a new screen is displayed, click the Back button to return

to the previous screen.
1.8.1.2
Video Clip example

The video clips, which are Audio Video Interleave (AVI) files, are screen
captures of a series of steps in SURFCAM.
During the installation of SURFCAM, you can install the video clips on the
hard disk of your computer.
If you do not install the video clips on the hard disk, you must use
the CD to see the video clips.
1.
Double-click the book Video Clips on the contents tab.
2.
Click the first page to see the names of all video clips.
3.
Click the video clip button by a name to see that video clip.
1.8.1.3
51
Index Example
Click the Index tab to make sure that you can see the index on the left
pane. Then use one of the following options.
1.
Click any item in the index to display the information.
2.
Enter a word in the box above the index to move to that word in the index.
Then click the word to display the information.
Tip
1.8.2
If you cannot find a word, look in a different index.

Click the Main button to open the main SURFCAM
help file. Then repeat your search.
Use the context-sensitive help
F1 key on the keyboard

When a menu or a dialog box is visible on the screen, press the F1 key to see the
help screen.
Note
When a dialog box is visible on the screen, you can click the Help button
on the dialog box.
If a dialog box has a Whats This button, click the button and then
click in a field to see a description.
1.8.3
Close the help file
Press the ESC key to close the help file.
52
CHAPTER 2 HOW TO USE SURFCAM

2.1
INTRODUCTION
SURFCAM is a Computer Aided Design (CAD) program and a Computer Aided

Manufacturing (CAM) program. You can design a part and create the toolpath code. A
Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machine uses the code to cut the part.
This chapter describes the steps to create the CNC code.
1.
Create the part design
2.
Create the toolpaths
3.
Manage the toolpaths

A. Verify the toolpaths
B. Edit the toolpaths
4.
Create the CNC code
5.
Communicate with the NC machine
2.2
CREATE THE PART DESIGN
The following sections describe three methods to create a part design.
2.2.1
Use the SURFCAM Solids program
Applied 3D Science (A3DS) uses its ParaLogix program to create the SURFCAM
Solids program.
SURFCAM Solids is a step-by-step design system that helps you create and edit 3dimensional drawings. SURFCAM Solids decreases the number of steps to create
the solid designs. If any part of the design is changed after a design is created, the
other parts automatically change.
Use the SURFCAM Solids program to create a solid design.
When the design is complete, click the SURFCAM button on the SURFCAM
Solids toolbar to load the design into SURFCAM.
Tip
The SURFCAM Solids Help menu has a link to the SURFCAM

Solids Tutorials.
54
you can open the tutorials from the installation disk if you did not install the
program.
Click the SURFCAM Solids Tutorials link if you did install the program.
2.2.2
Use the SURFCAM Create menu
Use the CAD part of the SURFCAM program to create and save a part design.
SURFCAM saves the file with the DSN (design) file extension.
Use the commands on the Create menu to create the points, lines, arcs and splines
of your 2D and 3D wireframe geometry. Use the Fillet and Chamfer commands to
adjust your wireframe geometry.
Click the Create > Surface command to create several types of surfaces. Some
difficult shapes are easy to make with the Surface menu commands.
Click the Create > Text/Dimension command to create the text and the dimensions
on your drawing.
See the online Create the Designs chapter and the online Create the Surfaces
chapter.
2.2.3
Use the designs from other programs
Use another CAD program to create and save a design file. Open that file with the
SURFCAM File > Open command. See Open in the online Design Utilities chapter.
Click the SURFCAM File > Save As command to save the file with a .dsn file
extension or use the shortcut CTRL+S.
You can load a file with digitized information that was taken from an existing part with
a digitizer.
2.3
CREATE THE TOOLPATHS
When the design is complete, the CAM part of the process begins.
Use the machining mode options on the NC menu to create the toolpaths. Then you need
to put the toolpaths in the correct sequence, make needed changes and check the
accuracy of the toolpaths. You can manage these functions with the NC Operations
Manager.
2.3.1
55
Open the DSN file
Open the design (DSN) file for the part.

Most Recently Used (MRU) files
The names of the most recently used files appear near the
bottom of the File menu. Click a name to open the file.
If the part you need is not in the list, click the Open
button or the File > Open command.
If necessary, open the folder that has the DSN file you need.
Double-click the file or highlight it and click the Open button.
You can select the Preview option in the Open dialog box to see the part before you
open the file. If the image is not available, the file was saved in a previous version of
SURFCAM before this option was available.
Tip
To save a new image, you must use the File > Save As command. CTRL+S
is the shortcut to open the Save As dialog box in SURFCAM.
SURFCAM stores the image of the current workspace in the DSN file. The
image is saved in GIF format. The size of the image is 238 X 178 pixels.
If you click the Save button or the Save command, the image is not updated.
56
When the file is opened, the part design is displayed in the

drawing window. Click the NC command on the main menu
bar to select a machining mode.
When you select a machining mode, its toolpath

commands are displayed on the submenu bar.
2 Axis Menu
3 Axis Menu
4 Axis Menu and 5 Axis Menu
Lathe Menu
Wire EDM Menu
2.3.2
Identify the part geometry
Before you create the toolpaths, you must identify the part geometry that you will cut.
See the prompt line for the directions to select the geometry. The menus you need to
make these selections are displayed.
2.3.3
57
Assign the toolpath parameter values
When the part geometry is selected, SURFCAM displays a dialog box for you to enter
the values for the toolpath parameters. Each operation in each machining mode has
a different dialog box. Normally these dialog boxes have the following three tabs.
Note
The name of the drill operation for 2, 3, 4 and 5 Axis machining is Hole
Processing. See Drill and Hole Processing in the online Common NC
Operations chapter.
See Drill in the online Lathe chapter for the lathe drill operations.
1.
The Tool Information tab

Use the Tool Information tab to select the tool and the material for the mill,
lathe, and wire EDM operations.
When these selections are made, the feed rates, plunge rates, and speeds are
calculated. These values are then displayed in the boxes on the tab. You can
change these calculated values if necessary. Some of these changes cause
the other values to change.
See Tool Information Tab in the online Common NC Parameters chapter.
2.
The Cut Control tab

This tab contains the parameters that control how the material is cut.
See The Cut Control tab in the online Common NC Parameters chapter.
3.
The Options tab

This tab contains the cut mode parameters. A cut mode refers to the type of
CNC machine that can use the toolpath, like 3 Axis.
The parameters on the Options tab are the same for all the toolpath operations
in that mode. Normally you do not need to change these values.
See The Options Tab in the online Common NC Parameters chapter.
58
2.3.3.1
The Tool Information tab
2.3.3.2
The Cut Control tab
59
60
2.3.3.3
The Options tab
2.3.4
61
Create and display the toolpath
After you set the correct machining parameters, SURFCAM automatically creates the
toolpath data.
After the toolpath data is created, SURFCAM draws the toolpath on the screen.
During the drawing, the tool moves along the toolpath.
1.
You can change the speed of the drawing.
2.
You can show or hide the tool during the drawing.
3.
You can draw the toolpath step by step.
See Tool Display, page 102.

When the toolpath and the drawing are completed, SURFCAM displays the Keep
Operation dialog box.
62
Click the Accept button to keep the toolpaths. The new toolpath is automatically given
a name by the SURFCAM program. You can change that name at a later time.
A new icon with that name is added to the NC Operations Tree in the NC Operations
Manager dialog box.
2.4
MANAGE THE TOOLPATHS
The NC Operations Manager helps you manage the toolpaths after they are created. You
can make any changes in the toolpaths if necessary.
Note
See the online NC Operations Manager chapter for additional information.

Click the button on the SURFCAM toolbar to open the NC Operations Manager
dialog box.
The names of the toolpaths are displayed in an Operations Tree in a group that is called
a setup section. You can change the name of a toolpath on the screen.
The names appear in the sequence that you created the toolpaths. SURFCAM cuts the
toolpaths in this sequence.
To change the sequence, click on a toolpath icon and drag the icon to a different position.
You can create more setup sections if necessary. Then you can click on a toolpath icon
and drag the icon to a different setup section. The toolpaths in one setup section are
done in the same machine setup.
2.4.1
63
Verify the toolpaths
After the toolpaths are created, click the Verify button on the NC Operations
Manager toolbar. The Integrated Verify program will begin in the SURFCAM
window.
You can test the accuracy of the toolpaths. This program can simulate the creation of
a solid block or cylinder of material around the part. Then you see a simulated tool
remove the material from around the part.
Integrated Verify
Integrated Verify runs in the SURFCAM window. This program is an abbreviated
version of the full SURFCAM Verify program which runs in a separate window.
See Integrated Verify in the online SURFCAM Verify chapter.
Click the SURFCAM Verify button on the Integrated Verify toolbar to start
the full SURFCAM Verify program.
SURFCAM Verify
The full SURFCAM Verify program has more
features than the Integrated Verify program. The
Virtual CNCTM program and the Editor with DNC
Communication functions from Predator
Software, Inc., are included.
You can select more views of the part.
During the simulated machining, you can display the G Code.
You can compare the cut model with the original design.
See Stand-alone SURFCAM Verify in the online SURFCAM Verify chapter.
SURFCAM Verify PLUS
The SURFCAM Verify PLUS program is an optional upgrade that includes all the
functions of the SURFCAM Verify version. This program adds the features for a
true solid display of the part.
The SURFCAM Verify PLUS product has many view options, NC optimize options,
and identification methods. SURFCAM Verify PLUS also contains a turbo mode
that can process 1000s of NC blocks per second with a wide range of tools.
2.4.2
Edit the toolpaths

Click the icon of a single operation in the Operations Tree and then click
the Edit NC Operation button.
64
SURFCAM displays the Edit NC menu. The toolpath for the NC operation is drawn.
The first record in the toolpath file is printed on the prompt line. Use the arrow keys
on your keyboard to move to the line to edit.
Use the Edit NC submenu bar to edit a toolpath on the screen.
See Edit NC Toolpaths in the online NC Operations Manager chapter.
2.5
CREATE THE CNC CODE
A machine needs the correct CNC code to cut a part. The SURFCAM post processor
systems have the machine configuration programs that are required to create the code.
SURFCAM has a large library of posts for a number of different machines.
The post processor uses the toolpath information and the machine information in the
post file to create the CNC code. This code is saved in a file with an NCC extension. See
the online Post Processor chapter.
After the NCC file is created, use a SURFCAM Editor to make any adjustments to the file
that are necessary.
2.6
COMMUNICATE WITH THE NC MACHINE
Before a machine can cut a part, you must transfer the contents of the NCC file to the
machine. One method of transfer is called Direct Numerical Control (DNC)
communications. The computer with the NCC file is connected to the controller of the
machine with an RS-232 connection.
SURFCAM includes a program to transfer the NCC files to a machine controller.
See the online SURFCAM DNC chapter.
Note
The RS-232 connections can have errors. Before SURFCAM dealers can help
with the DNC program, the RS-232 connection must operate free of errors. If
necessary, see your computer dealer and the machine tool dealer to get the
RS-232 connection to operate free of errors.
CHAPTER 3 THE SURFCAM TUTORIAL

Use this tutorial to get an introduction to some of the basic features of SURFCAM.
Display, Color Scheme, and Dimension Tips

1.
The SURFCAM display buttons, page 66
2.
Work with colors, page 71
3.
Work with the Color Schemes, page 74
4.
Create the dimensions on a design, page 79
Design a part with SURFCAM Solids

See Use the SURFCAM Solids program, page 53.
Tip for Demo version users
The SURFCAM Solids program is available in the Demo version for only 60 days
after the day that it is installed. Open the tutorials from the installation disk if you
did not install the program. Click the link if you did install the program, SURFCAM
Solids Tutorials.
Design a part with SURFCAM

5.
Create a 2D part design, page 84
6.
Create a cross section surface, page 88
7.
Create a drive curve surface, page 90
8.
Create 2 fillet surfaces, page 93
9.
Two challenge designs, page 98
Machine the part

10.
Single surface machining, page 99
11.
Multiple surface machining, page 103
12.
Z Rough machining, page 107
13.
NC Operations Manager tools, page 110
A complete project
14.
A 2D NC project, page 117
66
PART 1: DISPLAY, COLOR SCHEME, AND DIMENSION TIPS
3.1
THE SURFCAM DISPLAY BUTTONS
Double-click the SURFCAM icon on your desktop to start SURFCAM.

Open the Valve.dsn file, which is in the Samples folder.
Change the view
Use the following procedure or press CTRL+7 to change to the Isometric view.
1.
Click the View button on the status bar.
2.
67
Double-click the Isometric view.
Valve.dsn in Isometric View
The display buttons

The numbers indicate the order for the following examples.
3
See The SURFCAM toolbar, page 38 for additional information about the other buttons
on the SURFCAM toolbar.
68
Zoom Out
To decrease the image by one half, click the Zoom Out button or press
CTRL+U.
Zoom In
To expand an image, use a box that is called a rubber-band box.
1.
Click the Zoom In button or press CTRL+Z.
2.
Point to a location that is left of the element and above the element, for
example. Then click the mouse button. SURFCAM holds one corner of a
rubber-band box at that location.
3.
Move the mouse to a point opposite the first point. The rubber-band box
stretches in the direction that you move the mouse.
4.
When all elements to expand are within the rubber-band box, click the mouse
button. SURFCAM expands the image. Only the area that was in the rubberband box appears on the screen.
Tip
If you double-click the Zoom In button, you can continue to zoom in until you
press the ESC key or click another button.
Fit
To fit this image to the workspace, click the Fit button or press CTRL+F.
69
Your screen will match the figure Valve.dsn in Isometric View, page 67.
Pan
To move the image, click the Pan button or press CTRL+P. Press and hold
the mouse button while you move the mouse.
Tip
If you double-click the Pan button, you can continue to pan until you press
the ESC key or click another button.
Rotate
To rotate the image, click the Rotate button or press CTRL+R. Press and
hold the mouse button while you move the mouse.
Tip
If you double-click the Rotate button, you can continue to rotate until you
press the ESC key or click another button.
Note
SURFCAM also rotates the View Indicator to show you the new orientation.
Press CTRL+7 to return to the Isometric View.

70
Last View
To display a maximum of 20 previous screen images, continue to click the
Last View button.
Next View
To display a maximum of 20 screen images forward from the current screen,
continue to click the Next View button.
Repaint
To update the image in the workspace, click the Repaint button or press
CTRL+Q. Then you can see all active elements for the visible layers.
Use this button after you delete any elements, for example.
3.2
71
WORK WITH COLORS
Three methods to work with colors follow.

1.
Click the Edit > Color command to change the colors of the elements that are
visible on the screen. See Edit a Color below.
2.
Use the color button on the status bar to change the color of the
new elements that you create. See Create a new element in a new
color, page 72.
3.
Click the Options > Colors command to work with color schemes. See Work with
the Color Schemes, page 74.
3.2.1
Edit a Color
1.
Open the 2dstar.dsn file.
Note
2.
SURFCAM displays a dialog box if there is a part on the screen that

you have not saved. You can save any changes before you open the
new file.
Click the Edit > Color command.
72
3.
The Color Selection dialog box is displayed. Click the

black color box.
4.
The Select menu is displayed on the submenu bar. Click

the Single command.
5.
SURFCAM prompts you to select the elements to edit.
6.
Select 3 of the arcs in the star to change their color to

black.
3.2.2
Create a new element in a new color
The box on the Color button on the status bar displays the color
SURFCAM uses to draw new elements.
First use the following steps to create a point on the star in the current color.
1.
Click the Create > Point command.
2.
The Select Point menu is displayed. Click the Center

command.
3.
73
Click the arc at the center of the star. A point is created in the center of the star
in the same color that is displayed on the color button.
Now use the following steps to create some points on the star in a new color.
1.
Click the Color button on the status bar. The Color Selection
dialog box is displayed.
2.
Click the purple color box.
3.
Click the Create > Point command.
4.
The Select Point menu is displayed. Click the Center

command.
5.
Click the smaller arcs in the Star to create purple points.
74
3.2.3
Work with the Color Schemes
A Color Scheme is a set of colors for the elements that you create and for the user
interface entities. SURFCAM has four defined color schemes. You can create any
additional color schemes that you need.
Note
The defined color schemes have Background in their names because they
have background screens with the different colors.
3.2.3.1
Open a file
Open the valve.dsn file and press CTRL+7 to see the part in Isometric view.
3.2.3.2
Change the color scheme
When you first run SURFCAM, the default color scheme is the Blue Background
Scheme. Change the color scheme to the White Background Scheme.
1.
Click the Options > Colors command.
2.
SURFCAM displays the Colors dialog box.

The Current parameter displays the name of the color scheme.
75
3.
Click the arrow on the Current parameter to see the other color schemes.
4.
Select the White Background Scheme.

SURFCAM now operates in a new color scheme with a white background.
76
3.2.3.3
Create a new color scheme
1.
Click the Options > Colors command to display the Colors dialog box.
2.
Click the Entities tab to show the 16 display entities and their colors in the
current color scheme.
3.
Click the color box for the Background. The Color Selection dialog box is
displayed.
4.
Click the bright green color.

Tip
5.
Be careful when you select the colors on this tab. If you select
cyan, for example, you cannot see the part.
The Background color on the Entities tab changes to bright green.

The Current parameter changes to <Untitled>.
6.
Click the OK button. SURFCAM displays a Warning box.
7.
If you click the No button, the color scheme changes are temporary.
77
Click the Yes button to name and save a new color scheme. The Save Color
Scheme dialog box is displayed.
8.
Enter Bright Green for the name of the new color scheme and click the OK
button. The screen immediately changes to the new background color. The
name of the new color scheme is added to the list of options for the Current
parameter.
When you change a background color, change the entity colors if
necessary.
Tip
3.2.3.4
Edit a color scheme
You can edit any color scheme that you create. You cannot edit the original
SURFCAM color schemes.
This example shows how to change the color of a surface arrow.
1.
If the surface arrow is not visible, click the Edit > Surfaces > Arrow > Visible
command.
78
Note
The graphic uses colors that are easy to see in print. These colors
are different from the colors you see on your screen.
2.
Click the Options > Colors command to display the Colors dialog box.
3.
Click the arrow to display the color schemes and select Bright Green.
3
4
4.
Click the Entities tab.
5.
Click the color for the Surface Arrow. The Color Selection dialog box is
displayed.
6.
Select a magenta, for example. When you finish, the surface arrow is
changed to this new color.
79
Make the surface arrow match the surface

Select the color of the first box on the Color Selection
dialog box. The color of that box is not important.
After you click the OK button, the color of the surface
arrows always match the color of the surface.
See the instructions in Edit a Color, page 71 so that you
can test the arrow color.
3.3
3.3.1
CREATE THE DIMENSIONS ON A DESIGN

Open a file
Open the 2dribs.dsn file.
To make sure the image is in Top view, press CTRL+1.

Click the Zoom Out button on the toolbar to decrease the size of the drawing
by one half. Now there is enough space to create the text and the dimensions.
80
3.3.2
Linear dimensions
1.
Click the Create > Text/Dimension command to see the menu below.
2.
If the StyleText command appears on the menu, click the command to toggle it
to the MouseText command.
3.
Click the Linear command to display the horizontal or the vertical distance
between two points.
4.
Click the Center command on the Select Point menu. You can select the center
of an arc or a circle or the midpoint of a line.
5.
Click the circles

with the dots.
Note
SURFCAM is now in the Sketch mode. See Sketch in the online

Menus and Dialog Boxes chapter.
6.
Before you click the mouse button, point to the location to display the
dimension. Then click the mouse button.
7.
Select some other circles to create more dimensions.
Optional
1. Change the arrow height and width.
Click the Style button on the Create > Text/Dimension menu.
Click the Geometry button.
Click the Arrow Heads tab.
Change the size of the Arrow Height field and the Arrow Width field.
Click the OK button on the Arrow Heads tab.
2.
Change the height of the text.

Click the Text Button.
Change the value in the Text Height field.
Click the OK button on the Dimension Style Text dialog box.
81
82
3.3.3
Create a radius dimension
1.
Click the Create > Text/Dimension > Radius command.
2.
SURFCAM prompts you to select an arc to dimension. Select the lower left drill
hole.
3.
The dimension appears on the screen. Before you click the mouse button, point
to the location to display the dimension. Then click the mouse button.
Note
If you select the outside arc, instead of the hole, the radius is 0.2000
instead of 0.1000.
3.3.4
83
Create some additional dimensions
Use the Align, Diameter, Angular, Leader, and Text commands to create more
dimensions or text.
Tips
1.
Remember to follow the directions on the prompt line to select the elements.
2.
Press the F1 key for any help with a menu or a dialog box.
3.
The Text/Dimension menu remains on the submenu bar after you create a
Radius, Diameter, or Angular dimension.
4.
When you create a Leader, a Text, or an Align dimension, click the Back
command to see the Text/Dimension menu.
5.
Use the Select Point menu to indicate the method to select the points for
Linear or Align dimensions.
When you finish with the additional dimensions, press the ESC key.
84
PART 2: DESIGN A PART WITH SURFCAM
3.4
CREATE A 2D PART DESIGN
Before you create a part, you must clear the screen and select a construction view.
Clear the screen

1.
If you have geometry on the screen, click the New button to clear the
workspace.
2.
SURFCAM displays a dialog box to tell you if you need to save any changes.
Select a Construction View

SURFCAM is a three dimensional design environment and you must select the
correct construction view (CView) before you begin to create the geometry.
When you create 2D geometry, a Top or Plan view is normally used. When you clear
the screen, SURFCAM automatically sets the View and the CView to the Top View.
3.4.1
Create the geometry
Follow the step-by-step instructions to create this 2D part.
3.4.1.1
1.
Create a rectangle
Click the Create > Line > Rectangle command.

See Manual conventions, page 45 if necessary.
85
2.
The Create Line Rectangle dialog box is displayed. Click the OK button to
accept the default option.
Tip
Normally the last step in a SURFCAM procedure is the instruction to

Click the OK button. This step is easy to see and is not included in the
description of some procedures.
3.
Click the Keyboard command on the Select Point menu.
4.
SURFCAM displays the World dialog box.

Define the lower left corner first. X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 0.
5.
The Select Point menu remains on the screen. Click the Keyboard
command again.
6.
Define the upper right corner. X = 7, Y = 5, Z = 0.
86
7.
Click the Fit button on the toolbar to fit the geometry into the
workspace.
3.4.1.2
Create a circle
Create a circle with its center on the lower left corner of the rectangle.
1.
Click the Create > Circle > Center/Diameter command.
2.
Type 7 for the diameter on the Create Circle dialog box.
3.
SURFCAM prompts you to select the center point.

Click the Keyboard command on the Select Point menu to display the World
dialog box.
4.
Define the coordinates of the center.

X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 0.
Note
If you cannot see the complete

circle, click the Fit button on the
toolbar.
3.4.2
87
Edit the geometry
The design requires a fillet at each corner.

1.
Click the Create > Fillet command.
2.
The prompt line displays the current radius. If necessary, click the Change
Radius command to enter a radius value of .5.
3.
Select two elements to create a fillet. The elements for this part are either two
lines or one line and the circle.
Click each pair of elements that intersect. You will have five pairs. Make sure
that you click on the side to keep in your design.
If you make an error, you can click the Undo command.
Tip
Click the Other command to see the different options.
See the figure for an example of one pair of elements to select.
After you select the five pairs of elements, your design is complete.
3.4.3
Save the file
1.
Click the Save button on the toolbar.
2.
SURFCAM displays the Save As dialog box because you have not
saved this file. Double-click the Samples folder if it is not open.
Enter Part1 in the File name box. Click the Save button.
88
3.
3.5
SURFCAM displays the NCPost dialog box. Click Yes.
CREATE A CROSS SECTION SURFACE
Use the Cross Section command on the Surface menu to create a surface through
multiple cross sections.
3.5.1
1.
2.
Open a file
Open the Blade.dsn file.
Press CTRL+7 to change to Isometric view.
3.5.2
Create the surface through the cross sections
1.
Click the Create > Surface > Cross Section > Sections command.
2.
SURFCAM displays the Select menu. Make sure the Single command is
displayed.
3.
SURFCAM prompts you to select the contours to chain. Select each cross
section.
First Cross Section
4.
When you finish, click the Done command.
89
90
The Cross Section Surface
Optional
Click the Shade button on the status bar or press CTRL+A to shade the surface.
The Shade button and the shortcut are toggle operations.
3.6
CREATE A DRIVE CURVE SURFACE
Use the Drive Curve command to move a section along a curve to create a surface.
3.6.1
1.
2.
Open a file
Open the Swept.dsn file.
3.6.2
91
Create the surface
1.
Click the Create > Surface > Drive Curve command.
2.
SURFCAM displays a Select Chain menu. Make sure the Chain command is
displayed.
3.
SURFCAM prompts you to select the first element of the drive curve.
Select a point on the curve near the intersection of the curve with the cross
section.
Start Point
4.
SURFCAM prompts you to select the last element on the drive curve.
Click the Close command on the menu to let SURFCAM automatically make
the selection.
5.
SURFCAM displays a Select Chain menu and prompts you to select the first
element of cross section 1.
Click the Single command.
92
6.
Click any point on the cross section.
7.
SURFCAM displays the Select Point menu and prompts you to select the
attachment point on the drive curve.
Select Point > End Point
Click the End Point command.

8.
Now click near the intersection of the drive curve and the cross section.
9.
Click the Done command on the Select Chain menu.
Drive Curve Surface
3.7
CREATE 2 FILLET SURFACES
Create a surface with a constant fillet radius or a variable fillet radius.
3.7.1
1.
2.
3.7.2
1.
Open a file
Open the Fillet.dsn file.
Constant fillet radius

Click the Create > Surface > Fillet command.
93
94
2.
Set the Variable Radius option to No in the Fillet Options dialog box.
3.
Enter .5 for the Fillet Radius.
4.
Click the OK button to accept the other default values.
5.
Click the plane to select the first surface.
6.
Click the cylinder to select the second surface.
7.
SURFCAM creates the surface.
Fillet Surface - Constant Radius

3.7.3
Variable fillet radius
1.
Open the original Fillet.dsn file.
2.
3.
Click the Create > Surface > Fillet command.
4.
Set the Variable Radius option to Yes in the Fillet Options dialog box.
5.
Click the OK button to accept the other default values.
6.
Click the plane to select the first surface.
7.
Click the cylinder to select the second surface.
95
96
8.
Click the blue curve for the reference curve.
9.
SURFCAM displays the Select Point menu for you to define the locations of the
changes in the radii. Click the Point command.
10.
97
Click each point that is indicated on the curve in the following drawing. Then
enter its radius into the Variable Fillet Radius dialog box.
.125
.375
.375
.500
11.
After the each radius is entered, click the Done command on the Select Point
menu.
98
12.
Click the OK button to accept the defaults on the Variable Fillet Information
dialog box.
13.
SURFCAM creates the surface.
Fillet Surface - Variable Radius
3.8
TWO CHALLENGE DESIGNS
If you read the Get Started manual online, click the following link for two challenge
designs. Two Challenge Design Tutorials
99
PART 3: MACHINE THE PART
3.9
SINGLE SURFACE MACHINING
Machining Modes
The machining modes are 2 Axis, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, 5 Axis, Lathe, Wire EDM, and Mill/
Turn.
Machining Methods
SURFCAM can machine a single surface or many surfaces in one step.
The following procedure shows how to machine a single surface.
3.9.1
1.
2.
3.9.2
Open a file
Open the Valve.dsn file.
Create a cut toolpath
1.
Click the NC > 3 Axis > Cut command.
2.
Click the surface to select the surface.
3.
SURFCAM displays the 3 Axis Cut dialog box.
100
Click the Select Tool button on the Tool Information tab.
4.
101
SURFCAM displays a Select Mill Tool dialog box.
Select Mill Tool dialog box
Scroll through the available tools in the list or click a button on the toolbar to see
a different tool library.
5.
Click the arrow next to the Tables box

to see the other tables.
6.
Click the first button on the toolbar to

select a Ballmill tool.
7.
Select the .5 diameter 2 flute Ball tool.
8.
Click the OK button on the Select Mill Tool dialog box.
9.
Now click the Select Material button on the Tool Information

tab.
102
10.
SURFCAM displays a Select Material dialog box.

Select Material dialog box
Scroll through the available materials to see the options. Select any material.
11.
Click the OK button on the Select Material dialog box.

Tool Display
When SURFCAM draws the toolpath, there are three options for the tool
display. Try the toolpath shortcut keys after you click the OK button in the
next step.
The Tab key
1st press of the tab key
Display the tool holder with the tool.
2nd press of the tab key
No display of the tool or the holder. (Fastest method of display.)
3rd press of the tab key
Display the tool without the holder.
The Number Keys
Change the speed of the tool display. 0 is fastest speed. 9 is slowest
speed.
The Enter Key
Toggle between start the tool motion and stop the tool motion if the tool
is visible.
The Space bar
Move the tool one step at a time after the tool motion is stopped.
12.
Click the OK button on the 3 Axis Cut dialog box.
13.
SURFCAM creates the toolpath. When the Keep Operation dialog box is
displayed, click the Accept button.
3.10
MULTIPLE SURFACE MACHINING
Machine multiple surfaces in one step.
3.10.1
1.
2.
Open a file
Open the Phone1.dsn file.
103
104
3.10.2
Create a planar toolpath
1.
Click the NC > 3 Axis > Planar > Visible command.
2.
SURFCAM displays the 3 Axis Planar dialog box.
Click the Select Tool Button.

See the Select Mill Tool dialog box, page 101.
3.
Click the first button on the toolbar to select a Ballmill tool.
4.
Select the .5 diameter 2 flute Ball tool.
5.
6.
Click the Select Material button. See Select Material dialog

box, page 102.
7.
Select any material.
8.
9.
Click the OK button on the 3 Axis Planar dialog box.
10.
Click the End Point command on the Select Point menu.
11.
See the following figure.

A. Select point A to begin the toolpath.
B. Select point B to indicate the direction of the cut.
C. Click the offset side C to indicate the side to machine.
B
A
105
106
The Planar Toolpath
12.
When SURFCAM displays the Keep Operation dialog box, click the Accept
button.
3.11
Z ROUGH MACHINING
Use the Z Rough operation to remove any large amounts of material from around
multiple surfaces. This operation is a preparation for a finish cut.
3.11.1
1.
2.
Open a file
Open the Phone1.dsn file.
Press CTRL+7 to change to Isometric View.
3.11.2
Create the toolpath
1.
Click the NC > 3 Axis > Z Rough command to display the Select menu.
2.
Click the Visible command to select the surfaces to rough cut.
3.
SURFCAM displays the Material Information dialog box.
107
108
Select the Bottom Profile option for the Material Type.

Enter 3.5 in the Material Height box to indicate the height of the material above
the bottom profile.
4.
SURFCAM displays a Select Chain menu and prompts you to select the first
element. Use the Chain command to identify the bottom profile.
Select Chain > Chain
A. Select a side of the bottom profile near a corner.
Identify the bottom profile
B. Select the next side of the bottom profile by the same corner.
5.
SURFCAM chains the bottom profile and displays the 3 Axis Z Rough dialog
box.
Click the Select Tool button.

6.
Click the third button on the toolbar to select an Endmill tool.
7.
Select the .5 diameter 2 flute Endmill tool.
8.
109
110
9.
Click the Select Material button.
10.
Select a material.
11.
12.
Click the OK button on the 3 Axis Z Rough dialog box. SURFCAM creates the
toolpath.
13.
Click the Accept button when the Keep Operation dialog box is displayed.
3.12
NC OPERATIONS MANAGER TOOLS
3.12.1
1.
2.
Open a lathe file

Open the Lathe1.dsn file.
Press CTRL+1 to make sure you see the part from the Top View.
3.12.2
Set the View Indicator for a lathe operation
The View Indicator is the coordinate system in the

lower left corner of the drawing screen.
When you create any lathe toolpaths, you can
display XZ or DZ coordinates.
3.12.3
111
Set the tool speed
Click the Options > Display command to see the Display Options dialog box.
The Display Options dialog box
Use the Tool animation wait parameter to change the speed of the tool display when
a toolpath is drawn.
Enter 0 for the fastest speed. Enter 9 for the slowest speed.
Enter 2 now.
112
Tip
You can check the Show CView Indicator box to display the CView Indicator
on your drawing.
3.12.4
Open the NC Operations Manager dialog box
1.
Click the NC Operations Manager button on the SURFCAM toolbar to

display the dialog box.
2.
Drag the dialog box to the bottom of the screen.
3.12.4.1
113
Display the toolpath
Click the Lathe Turn - Rough icon in the operations tree.

This toolpath is for an outside diameter (OD) Turn operation. The operation is a
rough cut operation because a large amount of material is removed from around
the part. There is one finish pass made at the end of the toolpath.
Backplot the toolpath
Click the Backplot Toolpath button to draw the toolpath for this operation.
You can see the toolpath and the tool.
Open the NC Operations Manager dialog box again.

Hide the toolpath
Click the Hide Toolpath button. Now the toolpath is not visible.
Show the toolpath
Click the Show Toolpath button to draw the toolpath. You can see the
toolpath, but not the tool.
3.12.4.2
Edit the toolpath information
You can edit the toolpath parameters, regenerate the toolpath, and save the
toolpath with the Standard or Educational Versions of SURFCAM.
Click the NC Operations Manager button on the SURFCAM toolbar to open
the NC Operations Manager dialog box.
114
Right-click the Lathe Turn - Rough icon to see this menu.

Properties
Click the Properties command to
edit the name and the description
of the toolpath.
Edit Parameters
Click the Edit Parameters command to change the toolpath parameters, but not
regenerate the toolpath.
115
Regenerate Toolpath and Reselect Geometry

Click the Regenerate Toolpath and Reselect Geometry command to change
the toolpath parameters, select new chains, and regenerate the toolpath.
Regenerate Toolpath with Original Geometry

The Regenerate Toolpath with Original Geometry command is not available for
the lathe operations.
This command is available for the 2 Axis Pocket, Contour, and Face Mill
operations. You can change the toolpath parameters and regenerate the
116
toolpath in those operations. The selection of new chains is not required. Use
the original chains.
3.12.4.3
Display the other lathe toolpaths
1.
Open the NC Operations Manager dialog box if necessary.
2.
Highlight the other toolpath icons in the operation tree to show, hide
or backplot the toolpath.
Show the Toolpath
3.12.5
Hide the Toolpath
Backplot the Toolpath
Set the View Indicator for mill operations
Set the View Indicator for the mill toolpaths. Click Options > Axis > Mill Axis.
3.12.6
Set the tool speed
Set the Tool animation wait back to 0. See Set the tool speed, page 116.
117
PART 4: A COMPLETE PROJECT
3.13
A 2D NC PROJECT
1.
Open a file and create a new Setup Section.
2.
Create a pocket.
3.
Create the toolpath.
4.
Verify the toolpath.
5.
Create the NC code.
6.
Transfer the NC code to the machine.
3.13.1
Open a file and create a new setup section
1.
Open the original 2dribs.dsn file.
Tip
If you saved the dimensions you created in Create the dimensions on

a design, page 79, press the delete key then click on each dimension
to delete the dimensions.
118
2.
3.

4.
Click the Add a new setup section to the project button on the toolbar of the NC
Operations Manager dialog box.
5.
Enter the name Setup Section Two.
6.
Highlight Setup Section Two in the NC Operations Tree and click the Done
button.
3.13.2
119
Select the machining mode and identify the geometry to cut
1.
Click the NC > 2 Axis > Pocket command.
2.
SURFCAM displays the NC > 2 Axis > Select Chain menu and prompts you to
select the element to begin.
Note
Use the chain process to define the boundary on the part for the
removal of material. The boundary defines the pocket.
There are a number of different methods to chain the geometry to cut
the pocket. Use the Auto command for the fastest method.
Click the Select Chain > Auto command.
120
3.
Click the Select > Visible command.
4.
After the geometry is highlighted, click the Select > Done command.
5.
Click the Select Chain > Done command.
3.13.3
Create the toolpath
After the geometry is identified, SURFCAM displays the 2 Axis Pocket dialog box.
1.
Click the Select Tool Button.
2.
Click the third button on the toolbar to select an Endmill tool.
3.
Select the .5 diameter 2 Flute Endmill tool.
4.
5.
Click the Select Material button.
6.
Select a material.
7.
8.
Now click the Cut Control tab to define a depth to cut the pocket toolpath.
Pocket Depth
Increment
The values in the On Sides column refer to movements in the X and Y

directions.
The values in the In Z column refer to movements in the Z direction.
121
122
9.
Enter the Pocket Depth of 0.5 and enter the Increment Value of 0.25 for equal
passes as shown in the previous figure.
10.
Click the Plunge button.
11.
Select the Helical option for the Plunge Type.
12.
Click the OK button on the 2 Axis Pocket dialog box.
13.
A prompt tells you to click the inside of a pocket. Click the inside of any one of
the pockets.
Tip
SURFCAM draws the toolpath in all pockets that the .5 diameter 2

Flute Endmill tool can fit in because you clicked the Select Chain >
Auto > Visible command.
123
14.
SURFCAM creates the toolpath. You can see that the tool was not the correct
size to cut the smallest pocket.
15.
When the Keep Operation dialog box is displayed, click the Accept button.
Demo Version Reminder

You cannot save a toolpath in the Demo Version of SURFCAM.
124
3.13.4
Verify the toolpath
1.

2.
You cannot save a toolpath in the Demo version.

Highlight the Pocket operation Setup Section One so that the example is
correct for any version of SURFCAM that you use.
Note
The toolpath that you created is displayed in bold print because that
toolpath is visible on your screen.
Optional
Highlight the toolpath that you created in Setup Section Two.
Click the Hide Toolpath button. The toolpath is no longer visible.
Highlight again the Pocket operation in Setup Section One.
125
3.
Click the Run SURFCAM Verify button.
4.
The Integrated Verify menu is displayed. Click the Add Model button.
5.
The Add/Modify Model dialog box is displayed. Click the Use Bounding Box
button.
6.
Click the Add button.
7.
Click the Verify button.
126
8.
The part is now contained in a solid box of material.
9.
10.
SURFCAM simulates the cut of the part. See the Slider Bar in the graphic.
Move the tab to the left or to the right any time during the verification.
Move the tab to the right for a faster verification. Move the tab to the
left for a slower verification so that you can get a better view of a section.
11.
Exit the Verify program when the verification is complete.

3.13.5
Create the NC code
1.
Open the NC Operation Manager dialog box.
2.
Make sure that the 2 Axis Pocket toolpath is

highlighted in the NC Operations Tree.
3.
Select a machine from the list on the right of the dialog box.
4.
Click the Post button.
5.
SURFCAM displays the NC code in the NC Editor program.
After you edit this file, you can transfer the code to the machine. Keep the editor
window open for the next section.
127
128
3.13.6
Transfer the NC code
You can use the SURFCAM DNC (SDNC) program to transfer the NC code to the
machine.
1.
Click the SDNC button on the NC Editor toolbar. The SDNC II dialog box
is displayed.
2.
Click the Communicate > Download > To: Sample Machine command.
3.
Click the Connect button.
129
4.
Click the Transmit button.
5.
Note the number of Characters that were transmitted and the Time Elapsed.
6.
See the online SURFCAM DNC chapter for complete information about SDNC.
130
Design
CHAPTER 4 MENUS AND DIALOG BOXES

PART 1: MENUS
4.1
INTRODUCTION
When you run SURFCAM, the Main menu bar is displayed.
The File menu, page 362

Create
Create the Designs, page 161
Create the Surfaces, page 217
NC
2 Axis, page 567
3 Axis, page 635
4 Axis and 5 Axis, page 699
Lathe, page 737
Wire EDM, page 789
Edit the Designs, page 405
The Analyze menu, page 325
The Display menu, page 339
The Options menu, page 343

SURFCAM Help, page 47
4.2
COMMON MENUS
Many SURFCAM commands require that you use one of the following menus.
The Select Menu, page 132
The Select Chain Menu, page 134
The Select Point Menu, page 140
The Vector Menu, page 145
132
Chapter 4 Menus and Dialog Boxes, Part 1: Menus
4.2.1
The Select Menu
Sample Select menus
Done
After you select the elements, click the Done button to continue.
Single
Select a single element.
1.
Make sure that the Single command is highlighted.
2.
Make sure the MultSelOff is displayed on the menu.
3.
Move the pointer to an element and press the left mouse button. SURFCAM
will select the element closest to the point indicated by the pointer and
process the element accordingly.
4.
Point to an element and click on that element. SURFCAM selects the

element nearest to the element indicated.
Note
A surface can be selected either by clicking any of its curves or by

clicking the attached arrow.
Within
Select one or more elements enclosed completely within a rubber-band box.
1.
If the Within command is not highlighted, click Within.
2.
Press the left mouse button after positioning the pointer at the desired
location for one corner of the rubber-band box. SURFCAM will anchor one
corner of the rubber-band box.
3.
Drag the mouse to a point diagonally opposite the first point until all
elements to process are entirely within the rubber-band box. The box will
stretch in the direction you move the mouse.
4.
Press the left mouse button. SURFCAM will select the elements that are
completely enclosed within the box and process the elements accordingly.
Intersect
Select one or more elements that are inside or touching a rubber-band box.
1.
If Intersect is not highlighted, click Intersect.
133
2.
Press the left mouse button after positioning the pointer at the location for
one corner of the rubber-band box. SURFCAM will anchor one corner of the
box.
3.
Drag the mouse to a point diagonally opposite the first point until all
elements to process are at least partially within, or touching, the rubberband box. The box will stretch in the direction you move the mouse.
4.
Press the left mouse button. SURFCAM will select all elements that are
partially or totally enclosed with the box and execute the command.
Visible
If Visible is not highlighted, click Visible.
When additional information is required to complete the operation, SURFCAM will
display the appropriate dialog boxes for your entries.
When no other information is required, SURFCAM will select everything that
appears in the current work space.
Chain
Use the Chain command to select many elements at one time along a contour that
has a number of connected elements.
When you click the Chain command, The Select Chain Menu is displayed. Use the
Select Chain menu to chain the needed elements in the contour.
After you click the Done command on the Select Chain menu, the current
SURFCAM operation is done to the chained elements.
MultSelOn
In most cases, clicking this command toggles between MultSelOn and MultSelOff.
If MultSelOff is displayed, SURFCAM will move to the next menu after selecting
geometry. If MultSelOn is displayed, the Select menu will remain available and
Done will appear as a command on the menu.
1.
Select individual elements, with the same procedures as the Single method,
until all the elements have been selected. SURFCAM will change the colors
of the elements one by one, as they are selected.
2.
After selecting all the elements, click Done on the Select menu. SURFCAM
will process the selected elements accordingly.
SelMode/DeselMode
In most cases, the SelMode commanda toggle with DeselModewill be
displayed when the MultSelOn command is displayed on the menu. With
SelMode you can select elements. With DeselMode you can un-select
elements that you previously selected.
134
4.2.2
The Select Chain Menu
Sample Chain Menus
Chaining is a procedure in which elements are linked together end-to-end to produce

a chain of elements. Whenever SURFCAM requires a chain of elements, SURFCAM
will display the Select Chain menu and you will be prompted to select a beginning
element.
Done
After the elements are chained, click the Done button to continue.
Single
Select a single element or a series of single elements. This option avoids extra
steps in the selection process. If several elements are selected, they are not
chained together. After you make your selections and click Done, each separate
element you have selected is acted upon by the SURFCAM feature that is using
the chaining menu.
Chain
Chain several connected elements together. To use Chain, select a point near the
beginning of the first element followed by a point near the end of the last of the
connected elements you wish to chain. After selecting the beginning point, the
Single, Chain, and Done buttons will not appear on the menu, but a Close button
will appear.
Another chaining method is to use Close to chain all of a set of connected
elements together after first selecting a point near the beginning of the first
element. An alternate way to chain all the connected elements together is to click
the beginning point a second time.
In some situations SURFCAM encounters Branch Points, page 138 and cannot
determine the next element to chain. When this occurs, SURFCAM will display the
Chain End menu and prompt you to select the next element or click end to finish.
Chain End menu
135
Vector
The vector chaining method identifies profiles that have a vector attached to them.
Click Vector on the chaining menu. SURFCAM will then display the Select menu
and prompt you to Select vector(s) to pick the chains, then Done. Use any one
of the selection options to select the vectors representing the profiles to chain.
SURFCAM will highlight the profiles. Click Done when all of the desired profiles
have been highlighted. Click Done again to proceed.
See The Vector Menu, page 145.
Auto
When you click Auto, SURFCAM will display The Select Menu and you will be
prompt you to select the contours(s) to be chained.
Plunge
Use this option to specify plunge locations. SURFCAM will automatically move the
tool to the closest user-defined plunge point and feed to the cutting depth, then to
the beginning point of the cycle's pass. If plunge points are not specified, plunge
positions will be automatically calculated. SURFCAM disregards any Z axis
coordinate since the cycle determines the depth to plunge.
To define a plunge point, click Plunge. SURFCAM will display the Select Point
menu to define the plunge point coordinate. See The Select Point Menu, page 140.
Select the appropriate locations and click Done. Click Done again to proceed.
Note
This can be done before or after a cycle has been defined.
Material / Part
The Material and Part buttons appear only on the Select Chain menus for Pocket
and Contour. They are used to switch back and forth between the Part chaining
mode and the Material chaining mode until you finally click Done.
Material
Material is used to chain the material boundary when you want to remove
material from between the part and the material boundary. When you click
Material, you will be prompted to Select beginning element of material
boundary. Chain the material boundary. You can then click Part to chain
contours on the part.
Part
Part is used when you chain pockets and contours on the part. It is the default
chaining mode. When you click Part, you will be prompted to Select beginning
element. Chain a pocket or contour on the part.
Thread / Start Point
These buttons are available on the EDM > Select Chain menu that is displayed for
a 2 Axis XY Wire EDM toolpath. Use these buttons to select the thread point and
the start point of the cut.
136
Thread
When you click the Thread button, the Select Point menu is displayed. The
prompt line reads Select thread points, then 'Done'. Select the thread point for
the wire and click the Done button.
Start Point
The Start Point button is active after you chain the contour. When you click the
Start Point button, the Select Point menu is displayed. The prompt line reads
Select glue start points on the curve, then 'Done'. Select the start point for the
cut and click the Done button.
Chain Option
SURFCAM will display the Chain Options dialog box.
Chain Planar Elements

When this option is set to No, the system will chain in any direction. When set
to Yes, the system maintains the chaining direction along the plane defined by
the first entity chosen.
Limit Tangent Angle
You can constrain the chaining of two elements within an angular tolerance. If
Limit Tangent Angle is set to No, SURFCAM will chain two elements that come
together at any angle. If set to Yes, SURFCAM will chain only elements that
meet at an angle less than you specify in the Angle Tolerance parameter.
Angle Tolerance
This is the angular tolerance discussed above and is available only if Limit
Tangent Angle has been set to Yes.
Done
Clicking Done completes the chaining session and signals SURFCAM to proceed
to the next step in its current processing.
4.2.2.1
137
Where Chaining is Encountered
Following are some of the cases that require a chain of elements when selecting
geometry:
1.
2 axis contouring and pocketing, turning and facing, and wire EDM.
2.
3, 4, and 5 axis contouring.
3.
When describing intersect bounds on a surface to be cut.*
* When chaining elements for these uses, there are some additional options
available.
4.2.2.2
Chaining Closed Curves
A curve or contour is called closed when it starts and ends at the same location,
that is, it encloses an area. The closed curve has an inside and an outside.
It is important when chaining a closed curve to indicate the chaining direction, and
the end point from which the chain is to start. Not doing so when creating surfaces
could result in the surface being quite different from what is desired.
The chaining start point and direction are determined by the location you click
when selecting the beginning element of the chain. The start of the chain will be
the end point of an element nearest the click point. The chaining direction is toward
the opposite end point of that element.
In the Chaining Example figure, the small crosses indicate the end points of the
elements that make up a closed curve to be chained. Any one of them can be the
start point of the chain. The small circles indicate locations that could be selected
as the beginning element of the chain if the curve is to be chained in a clockwise
direction from the nearest end point. If locations near the small squares are
selected, the chaining will be in a counterclockwise direction from the nearest end
point.
138
Chaining Example
4.2.2.3
Branch Points
After you have started the chaining procedure by selecting the first element in the
chain, you might encounter a branch pointthat is, the ends of more than two
elements might meet at the same place. This location is called a branch point
because the chaining can branch to any one of these elements at this point. If this
should occur, SURFCAM requires that you indicate which of the eligible elements
to use as the next element.
In The Intersecting Curves figure there are two curves, each made of arcs and
lines. These curves intersect at a point that is the end point of four line segments.
If a chain is needed from the top end of the top curve down to its end on the left
side of the drawing, that top end is selected as the beginning element. SURFCAM
then searches down the elements one by one until it comes to the junction.
139
The Intersecting Curves
Since there are three different directions to continue the chaining, SURFCAM will
place a small box at the junction, and will prompt you to select the next element or
End to finish. At this point, you would select the line to chain next. This example
uses the line toward the bottom left.
Branch point
When this is done, SURFCAM will automatically chain the remaining elements
since there are no more branch points. If you had chosen End, the chain would
stop at the branch point.
When you are prompted to Select beginning element, proceed as follows to
describe the chain:
1.
Select the beginning of the first element in the chain with the mouse. The
word Close will appear on the menu, and you are prompted to select the
ending element.
140
2.
If there are no more elements to chain, click Close. Otherwise select the
trailing end of the last element to be chained. The elements are sequentially
selected, the colors of the elements will change, until a branch point or the
end of the chain is reached. If the end of the chain is reached, the chain is
finished, otherwise SURFCAM will place a small box at the branch point and
will prompt you to select next or end.
3.
Select the element neighboring the branch point for the next element in the
chain. SURFCAM responds as in the step above.
Repeat step 3 for each branch point encountered.
4.2.3
The Select Point Menu
When you perform certain NC operations or create certain geometric entities, you are
required to select one or more points before you can complete the task. In such a
situation SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu on the Secondary menu bar
and a message prompting you to select a point will be displayed on the Prompt line.
For example, when you perform the 3 Axis Planar operation you will be prompted to
Select point to begin and Select point in direction of cut. Or, when you create a line
using end points you will be prompted to select the starting point and select the
ending point.
Sketch
The operation of the Sketch command depends on whether or not the Snap & Grid
mode has been disabled. It is always enabled when you start SURFCAM. See
Points on a User Defined Grid, page 359 for information on how to disable or
enable the Snap mode.
Sketch With Snap Disabled
When Snap is disabled, the pointer will stay as a cross hair when Sketch is
clicked. When you click the mouse, a point will be located whose XY
coordinates are those of the cross hair and whose Z coordinate is the value of
Depth on the Status menu. See The Depth Dialog Box, page 160.
This version of the Sketch mode relies entirely on using the mouse to pick
locations, and is usually not used when precise locations are required, as in the
creation of a commercial design. However, it can be useful when performing
demonstrations and experiments or when learning SURFCAM.
141
Sketch With Snap Enabled

If Snap is enabled, the pointer will become a pencil when Sketch is clicked.
When you click the mouse, a point will be located precisely if it is one of twelve
specific types of Snap points.
A Snap point is an easily identified point on, or associated with, an existing line,
arc or circle (but not a spline or a surface). Examples of Snap points are end
points, midpoints, the foot of perpendiculars, points of intersection, centers of
arcs and circles, and any point on a line, an arc, or a circle.
See The Pencil Pointers, page 357 for a description of the Snap mode and its
Snap points.
The precision of the Snap mode is due to the nature of the Snap function. If you
click the mouse when the pencil pointeror its projectionis within a
predetermined distance from a Snap point, SURFCAM will select the Snap
point rather than the actual location of the pointer, as in the previously
described Sketch mode. SURFCAM is said to snap to the Snap point. Note
that because the projection of the pointer is used, the Z coordinate of the
selected point is not affected by the value of Depth as it is with the other Sketch
mode.
However, if you click the mouse when the pencil pointeror its projectionis
not within the predetermined snap distance, the Snap-Sketch mode acts like
the other Sketch mode in that the Z coordinate of the selected point will equal
the value of the Depth parameter on the Status menu.
Note
With the following commands on the Select Point menu, the pointer must be
within a predetermined pick distance in order for the applicable point to be
selected.
Point
Locate a position at the XYZ coordinate of a point that already exists.
End Point
Locate a position at the XYZ coordinate of an end point on the element you select.
SURFCAM will select the end point nearest the position you clicked.
142
Center
Locate the center of an arc, the center of a circle, or the midpoint of a line.
Arc Center
Midpoint
Locate the midpoint of an arc or a line.
Arc Midpoint
Intersect
Locate a position at the XYZ coordinate of the element selected and its
intersection with another element.
143
It is not necessary for the two elements to physically or graphically intersect. When
the two elements are located on different planes, the intersection is projected
based on the current CView and the location is found on the first element chosen.
You can indicate the location of the intersection of two non-surface elements, any
combination of two lines, points, arcs, or splines.
Note
When indicating a location that is an intersection of two elements, there

is a possibility that there is not a true intersection between them, but only
the appearance of one. If you choose two elements that do not truly
intersect, SURFCAM will attempt to find the location where the elements
appear to intersect looking from the construction view. If this is the case,
SURFCAM will display a message that there is No true intersection, and
will specify the location that is in the plane of the first element selected.
1.
If Intersect is not highlighted, click Intersect. SURFCAM will prompt you to

select the first element to intersect.
2.
Move the pointer in the workspace to the first element of the intersecting pair
and press the left mouse button. SURFCAM will prompt you to select the
second element to intersect.
3.
Move the pointer to the second element of the intersecting pair and press
the left mouse button. SURFCAM will mark the location of the intersection
with a small square.
Relative
Locate a position that is a relative distance from a known location which you select.
When you click Relative, the World dialog box will be displayed and you will be
prompted to Enter the relative values.
Coord System
Cartesian
The X, Y, and Z values that you enter will be the distances from a location
you will later select to the new position you are locating.
144
Polar
Radius
This is the linear distance along the defined angle from a point you will
later select to the new position you are locating.
Angle
This is the angle located in standard position with vertex at a point you
select later, along whose terminal side will be the new position you are
locating at a distance equal to the radius.
When the relative Cartesian or Polar coordinate values are entered and you click
OK, an abbreviated version of the Select Point menu (without Relative) will be
displayed. Select the known location from which the relative measurements will be
made to the new location.
To use the Relative command to choose a new location:
1.
Click Relative on the Select Point menu. SURFCAM will display the World
dialog box and prompt you to Enter the relative values.
2.
Select Cartesian or Polar coordinates. Enter the relative Cartesian or Polar

coordinate values into the dialog box and click OK.
3.
SURFCAM will display a modified Select Point menu and prompt you to
Pick the relative point. Use the appropriate command from the menu to
pick the relative point. SURFCAM will then measure from this location using
the relative coordinates to find the new location and mark it with a small
square.
145
Keyboard
SURFCAM will display the World dialog box.
Enter any X, Y, and Z coordinates in 3D space. This location is based on WORLD

or VIEW coordinates as set on the Status bar.
Note
When Coord is set to VIEW, the coordinates will use the current
construction view.
Note
When Lathe is selected, SURFCAM uses X and Z, or D and Z

coordinates.
Quadrant
Select one of four points on a circle. These points are 90 apart starting at the 3
oclock position. To select one of these four points, click on any point of the circle
that is within 45 of the point you want. You can also select any of the same four
points associated with an arc if they are within 45 of an end point of the arc.
4.2.4
The Vector Menu
The Vector menu is used when you need to create a vector on your drawing or when
you need to indicate a direction when creating a surface of revolution or an extruded
surface. Click Create > Vector or Create > Surface > Extrude (or Revolution) to
display one of the following vector menus.
Tool Path
Create a vector by chaining a profile. You will be prompted to Select contour(s) to
be chained, then Done. Next you will be prompted to Click inside a pocket. The
vector will be created pointing to the side of the contour you click.
146
Keyboard
SURFCAM will display the Vector Keyin dialog box so you can specify a vector.
X, Y, or Z Axis
If you choose the X, Y, or Z Axis, the origin (0,0,0) will be the end point of the
vector and the positive X, Y, or Z direction will be the vector direction.
Define
If you click Define, the Vector X, Y, Z Value boxes become active.
Vector X, Y, or Z Value
The vector end point will be the origin (0,0,0). The direction of the vector will be
determined by the X, Y, and Z components that you enter here.
2 Points
Select two points. The first point is the starting point; the second defines the
direction.
Element
Select a single geometric entity for the vector. If a line is chosen, the nearest end
point becomes the starting location and the opposite end defines the direction. If
you choose an arc or a circle, the nearest end point becomes the starting location
and the direction is the tangent at the end point.
Point/Angle
If you click Point/Angle, SURFCAM displays the Select Point menu and you will be
prompted to select the start point for the vector. SURFCAM will display a dialog
box for you to enter an angle. The vertex of this angle is the vector start point you
selected. The initial side of the angle is parallel to, and in the same direction as,
the positive part of the horizontal axis of the current CView. The terminal side of
the angle will be rotated in a clockwise (negative angle value) or counterclockwise
(positive angle value) direction from the initial side and be on the plane of the
current CView. This terminal side is the vector you are creating.
147
Perp. Element
Define a vector by using a selected end point of an entity such as a curve or
another vector as the vector end point. The vector direction is defined by a
perpendicular to the plane of the entity. You will first be prompted to select the end
point of a curve or vector. Then you will be prompted to select a side of the curve.
Clicking on one side or the other of the curve or vector will determine the direction
of the vector you are creating.
148
Chapter 4 Menus and Dialog Boxes, Part 2: Dialog Boxes
PART 2: DIALOG BOXES
4.3
INTRODUCTION
This section discusses the basics of working with dialog boxes. Normally specific dialog
boxes will be discussed in their context.
See The Status Bar Dialog Boxes, page 150.
4.4
THE BASIC DIALOG BOXES
When SURFCAM requires that you enter information, a dialog box will be displayed for
you to enter numerical data or text information, or to select from available options.
Text Information
Type the information on the line provided. While entering text, you can use all the
standard editing keys to move the cursor and edit the information on that line.
Typical dialog box
Backspace
Delete the character to the left of the cursor.
Insert
Insert characters without typing over others. The Insert key toggles between the
insert mode and the overtype mode.
149
Delete
Delete the currently highlighted characters. If no characters are highlighted,
deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
Home
Place the cursor at the beginning of the field.
End
Place the cursor at the end of the field.
Arrow keys
Move the cursor left/right in the field.
You can also use the mouse to position the cursor by clicking at the desired
location.
Numerical Values
Enter numbers in the same way as text information (including the use of the editing
keys and the mouse).
Mathematical equations can be used in fields. Add, subtract, multiply or divide using
the symbols +, -, * or /, respectively. The calculation will be made and the result will
be displayed in the field when you move to another field.
Note
When the = key is pressed, SURFCAM will display the result but leave the
cursor in the same field.
Figure 1: Before Math Operation
150
After Math Operation
Choices
Options are often displayed in a box with an arrow next to itfor example, the
Plunge Type field in the Typical dialog box figure.
To select an option:
1.
Click the arrow to display the list of choices. Then click on your choice, or
2.
Place the cursor in the field and use the up/down arrow on the keyboard to
scroll through the options.
Use the Tab key or Shift/Tab key combination to accept the information in the
current field and move the cursor to the next or the previous field, respectively.
You can accept the information at any time by clicking OK. Or click Cancel to
ignore all changes and close the dialog box.
4.5
THE STATUS BAR DIALOG BOXES
See The Status bar, page 39 for an introduction. The following sections describe the
dialog boxes that are opened when some of the Status Bar buttons are clicked.
4.5.1
The Views Dialog Box

The View button on the Status Bar shows the number of the
current display view. The View is your view of the drawing on
the screen.
The CView button on the Status Bar shows the number of the
construction view. The CView is the view SURFCAM uses
when you create new elements. When you start SURFCAM, the
CView number is 0. Any element you create is created in the current View. If you
151
change the CView number, new elements are created in the new CView and no
longer in the display View.
Eight Standard views and CViews are part of any drawing.
When you click the View or CView buttons, the Views dialog box is displayed. If you
need to change a view or create a new view, you can use this dialog box.
Note
You can use the shortcut keys, Ctrl+1 through Ctrl+8, to change the View to
a standard View.
Views dialog box
The list of the eight standard views are displayed in this box. The other views that you
create are also included. The features of these views are displayed in four columns.
Columns: #, V (View), C (CView), View Name
Click the # button or the View Name button to sort the entries in that column. Click
again to sort in the opposite order.
The letter V appears in the V column of the row that is the current View. Click the
V button to put that row at the top of the list. Click V again to display the row at the
bottom.
Like the V, the letter C appears in the C column of the row that is the current
CView.
Select a view
Click a view number or a view name to select a view.
Change the number of a view (but not a standard view)
Click a number or a view name two times (do not double-click) to change the value
of the view number.
152
Change either the View or CView

Double-click a # or a view name to change the View or the CView. The view that
is changed is the view on the button that was clicked to display the Views dialog
box. The Views dialog box closes and the view is changed. An example is click the
CView button to display the Views dialog box. Double-click 4 or the words Bottom
view to close the dialog box and change the CView on the Status menu to 4.
Change one or both the View and CView
Click a view number or view name. Then click the View button or the CView button
on the Views dialog box or both. When you click OK, the View or CView button on
the Status bar, or both will change. Another option is enter a number in the View
box, the CView box, or both and click the OK.
Create a New View
Click the New button to display the View dialog box. Enter a name with less than
79 characters. Assign a reference number that is greater than 8.
View dialog box
Check the first box to make this new view be the current View. Check the second
box to make this view be the current CView. Select the World Coord or View Coord
option.
When you click OK, the View menu is displayed and a prompt tells you to create
a new view. The new view is created like it is done on the Create > View menu p.
297.
Delete
Select a view and click the Delete button to delete that view. Shift-click to select a
range of views. Ctrl-click to select another single view.
153
Rename
Highlight a view and click the Rename button. SURFCAM will display the Change
View Name dialog box for you to change the view name.
4.5.2
The Layers Dialog Box
Click the Layer button on the Status bar to display the Layers
dialog box which contains the list of layers that have been
created for the current drawing.
Layers dialog box
The default layer number is 1. When SURFCAM is first run, Layer 1 will be created
and will be active. All the parts of a new drawing will be placed on layer 1 until another
layer has been created and made active. Only one layer is active at a time and newly
created elements are always stored on the active layer. The active layer number is
always shown on the button on the Status bar.
With the Layers dialog box you can organize a drawing so its parts can be placed on
up to 256 layers (numbered zero through 255). Placing parts of a drawing on different
layers is useful when the drawing is detailed and complex.
154
The following tables describe procedures and buttons.

FUNCTION
PROCEDURE
Set Default Layer

Name and Number
To change the default layer, use the Configuration Tools

program. See The System Options Tab, page 881 and The
Default Layer Number / Name, page 883.
Select Layer(s)
For a Single Layer

To select a single layer, click the layer number once to
highlight it and select that layer.
For a Range of Adjacent Layers
To select a range of layers, click on the first layer. Hold
down the shift key and click on the last layer of the range
you want.
For Non-adjacent Layers
To select non-adjacent layers, click on the first layer. Hold
down the Control key and click on the next layer you want.
Change
Current Layer
Change
Layer Number
1.
Click in the C column to the left of the Layer Name, or
2.
Highlight a layer number and click Current or press

<Alt> C, or
3.
Double-click a number to select that layer as current

and close the dialog box.
Click twice (not double-click) on a layer number to change it.
FUNCTION
Make Layer(s)
Selectable or
Unselectable
155
PROCEDURE
For a Single Layer

Click on the S or the U for that layer.
For One or More Layers
Highlight the layer(s) and
1.
Press the <Alt> key as well as S or U to make the

highlighted layer(s) selectable or unselectable,
respectively, or
2.
Click the Select or Unselect buttons located at the

top of the dialog box.
For ALL Layers

Click the Swap Sel button to toggle the selectability of all
layers.
Make Layers
Visible or Invisible
For a Single Layer

Click on the V or the I for that layer.
For One or More Layers
Highlight the layer(s) and
1.
Press the <Alt> key as well as V or I to make the

highlighted layer(s) visible or invisible, or
2.
Click the Visible or Invisible buttons located at the

top of the dialog box.
For ALL Layers

Click the Swap Vis button to toggle the visibility of all layers.
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Make highlighted layer(s) visible.

Hide highlighted layer(s).
Make highlighted layer(s) Selectable.
Make highlighted layer(s) Unselectable.
Display the layers in either ascending or descending numerical
order.
156
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Display the current layer either first or last in the list.

List the layers in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
Display either the visible or the invisible layers first.
Display either the selectable or the unselectable layers first.
Close the dialog box and make specified changes.
Close the dialog box without saving changes.
Make the highlighted layer number the current layer.
<Alt>+C
<Alt>+N
Create a new layer. SURFCAM will display the Layer dialog

box.
The name can be up to 79 characters. The reference number

can be any number up to 255.
Make Layer Current
Check the box to make the new layer the current layer.
Delete the highlighted layer number. Deleting a layer also
deletes all of the elements on that layer. If you change your
mind, click Cancel.
BUTTON
157
FUNCTION
Move elements in a drawing from one layer to another. The

layer on which the elements currently reside must be both
visible and selectable.
Procedure:
1.
Select the layer to which the elements will be moved by

clicking its number once.
2.
Click the Move Geom button, or press <Alt> M.
3.
SURFCAM will display the Select menu. Select the

elements to be moved. As you select them, they will
disappear from their former layer and be moved to the
new layer.
Change all visible layers to invisible layers and vice versa.

<Alt>+W
<Alt>+L
Change all selectable layers to unselectable layers and vice

versa.
Rename highlighted layer.
<Alt>+R
Display the help topic for this dialog box.
4.5.3
Coordinates Dialog Box
World coordinates are the X, Y, and Z axes as defined in 3D

space. World coordinates are similar to absolute coordinates on
an NC machine. They are always measured from the origin (X0
Y0 Z0) point.
View coordinates use the construction view. Using View
coordinates gives you the option to measure from the origin as it is
seen from a particular view.
If the View is set to 5a right side viewand you create a point using view
coordinates X1 Y0 Z0, the resulting point will have the absolute (world coordinate)
values of X0 Y1 Z0. This is caused because the right side view is rotated such that
the view X axis coincides with the world Y axis.
158
The origin of the eight predefined views is set at the world X0, Y0, Z0 location. User
defined views can be created with the origin at any location. This can be used to
create a Local Coordinate System. This view origin is used when using any CView.
When in CView 1, the view coordinates are exactly the same as the world
coordinates.
Note
When using view coordinates, be sure that the view coordinate system in
use is the one specified by the CView parameter. Reset the CView to zero
for the view coordinates to match your current view.
Note
When the Depth parameter is set to a non-zero number, it changes the Z

depth of the CView plane used for sketching. For example, using CView 5
again, a point sketched in view coordinates with the Depth set to 1 will now
end up with a world X coordinate of 1. Changing the Depth shifted the
resulting location by an X value of 1 inch because in the case of view 5, the
view Z direction coincides with the world X direction.
4.5.4
The Mask Selection Settings Dialog Box
If ON is displayed on the Mask button on the status bar, the masking command is
operating. That is, some elements are masked from being selected. If OFF is
displayed, elements are NOT being masked. All elements are selectable.
Click the mask button to toggle between the two settings.
Click the arrow next to the Mask button on the Status bar to
display the Mask Selection Settings dialog box.
Note
You can use shortcut keys: Ctrl+M.
159
Notice that there are check marks on the color squares and in the boxes at the left of
the element types. Check marks indicate that the corresponding colors and elements
are selectable, that is NOT masked.
For a color to be selectable, there must be a check mark on the color. For an element
to be selectable, there must be a check mark in the box beside the element type.
Click No Colors and No Elements to mask all colors and all elements. Click All Colors
and All Elements to make all colors and all elements selectable.
Generally you would first mask all colors and elements and then identify which color
and type of element you want to select by choosing them individuallyclick the color
itself and click the box to the left of an element type.
REMEMBER that a check mark means selectable; no check mark means masked or
not selectable.
When you click OK, SURFCAM enables the masking function and sets the mask
parameter in the Status bar to ON. You can independently turn masking on and off by
clicking the mask parameter to toggle it between ON and OFF.
160
Note
If you return to the Main menu bar and select any command, the mask
parameter on the Status bar will be set to OFF. You will need to click it to
turn it ON again if you still want it with the same selections.
Note
If you want to use the default types and colors, you dont need to click the
arrow, but you do need to turn ON masking manually by clicking the Mask
button.
Example: To mask any bright green element so it cannot be selected:

1.
Click the arrow at the right of the Mask button to display the dialog box.
2.
Click All Elements to make all types of elements selectable.
3.
Click All Colors to make all colors selectable.
4.
Click the check on the bright green color to remove that check.
5.
Click OK. SURFCAM will set the Mask parameter to ON.
6.
If you return to the Main menu bar, click the Mask button to set it to ON.
Now if you attempt to delete a bright green element, you won't be able to since it is
masked.
4.5.5
The Depth Dialog Box
The Depth parameter tells SURFCAM the Z coordinate of entities created using the
Sketch command on the Select Point menu.
Click the Depth button on the status bar to display the Depth
dialog box. SURFCAM prompts you to specify the construction
view depth.
Depth From Selected Location

Check this box to make the value of the Depth parameter equal to the depth of a
point on the drawing that you select. SURFCAM displays the Select Point menu.
Depth
If this box is left unchecked, you can enter the Depth at which you want elements
created.
CHAPTER 5 CREATE THE DESIGNS

The following sections describe three methods to create a part design.
5.1
USE THE SURFCAM SOLIDS PROGRAM
To create a solid design, run the SURFCAM Solids program. Then click the
SURFCAM button on the toolbar of SURFCAM Solids to load the design into the
SURFCAM program.
Note
Applied 3D Science (A3DS) uses its ParaLogix program to create the

SURFCAM Solids program.
SURFCAM Solids is a step-by-step design system that helps you to create and edit 3dimensional drawings. You can create a part design and easily edit the design.
SURFCAM Solids decreases the number of steps to create the solid designs. If any part
of the design is changed after a design is created, the other parts automatically change.
Tip
See the SURFCAM Solids Tutorials. There is a link to the tutorials from the Help
menu of the SURFCAM Solids program.
5.2
USE THE DESIGNS FROM OTHER PROGRAMS
Use another CAD program to create and save a design file. Open that file with the
SURFCAM File > Open command. See Open, page 363.
Save the file with the SURFCAM File > Save As command to save the file with a .dsn file
extension.
You can load a file with digitized information that was taken from an existing part with a
digitizer.Click a command on the Create menu to display a secondary menu bar that lists
methods to create each element.
5.3
USE THE SURFCAM CREATE MENU
Use the CAD part of the SURFCAM program to create and save a part design.
SURFCAM saves the file with the DSN (design) file extension.
Use the commands on the Create menu to create the points, lines, arcs and splines of
your 2D and 3D wireframe geometry. Use the fillet and chamfer commands to adjust your
wireframe geometry.
162
Click the Create > Surface command to create several types of surfaces. Some difficult
shapes are easy to make with the Surface menu commands.
Click the Create > Text / Dimension command to create the text and the dimensions on
your drawing.
Point, page 164
Points, page 165
Line, page 171
Arc, page 177
Circle, page 181
Fillet, page 183
Chamfer, page 186
Spline, page 187
Create the Surfaces, page 217
View, page 297
Text/Dimension, page 300.
Vector, page 325
The Pointers That Are Used in the Create Mode

Cross Hair Pointer
SURFCAM displays the cross hair pointer for you to select the elements in a
drawing. See the Cross Hair Pointer, page 887 to select a different pointer.
Pencil Pointer p. 357
SURFCAM displays the pencil pointer to select the points when the Snap mode is
active. The Snap mode is active when you use the Sketch command on the Select
Point menu. See Snap & Grid, page 360.
Pick Distance
When you select existing elements in SURFCAM, you only need to place the pointer
within a pre-determined pick distance from an element in order to select it. This pick
distance is defined by the dimensions of a non-visible square that always surrounds
the pointer. The pointer is located at the center of this invisible square. The screen
dimensions of this square are approximately equal to the length of three of the point
symbolsthe + symbolSURFCAM uses to mark the location of a point you have
created. SURFCAM will select an element if it is intersecting the interior of this square
when you click the mouse.
163
Selecting existing elements occurs when you use the Single command on the Select
menu or the Point, End Point, Center, Midpoint, Intersect, or Quadrant commands on
the Select Point menu.
Rubber Banding
Rubber banding is a graphical pointer enhancement techniqueused in the creation
of lines, arcs, and circlesthat makes your selection of points easier and more
accurate. When you create a line, an arc, or a circle, you must first select an initial
point. SURFCAM will enclose that point in a small square and enter the Rubber
Banding mode.
In this mode a line, an arc, or a circledepending on what is being createdwill be
displayed on the screen and appear to be attached to the pointer as it is moved
around the work space. The line, arc, or circle will change in size as the pointer is
moved.
Also, the dimensions of the entity (length, radius, angle measure) will be dynamically
displayed as the pointer moves. With the entity and its dimensions being displayed,
you can more accurately locate the next point required in the creation of the entity.
Linear
Create a Line using 2 points
Arc End
Create > Arc > 3 points
Examples of Rubber Banding Modes
164
Arc Start
Create > Arc > Center/Start/End
Select the start of the arc.
Arc Angle
Create > Arc > Center/Start/End
Select the end of the arc.
Align
Circle Third Point
Create > Text/Dimension > Align
Create > Circle > 3 Points
Select the third point.
Examples of Rubber Banding Modes (Continued)
5.3.1
Point
Click the Create > Point command to create a single point. SURFCAM displays the
Select Point menu. Then click a command and follow the directions to create a point.
5.3.2
165
Points
Click the Create > Points command to create a set of points. The Create Points menu
is displayed.
Nodes
Click the Nodes command to create points at the nodes of a selected spline. After
you select a spline, a point is created at each node on the spline.
The Points at the nodes of a spline
Error
Click the Error command to create a set of points at controlled positions along a
spline. SURFCAM displays the Maximum Deviation dialog box that contains the
parameter for the Maximum Deviation Error.
SURFCAM creates a point at each end of the spline. The Maximum Deviation
Error controls the location and the number of the remaining points.
To determine the location of a point, a line that is drawn from that point to the
previous point is analyzed. No point on that line can be a greater distance from the
spline than the value of the Error parameter.
The number of points on a linear section of the spline is less than the number of
points on curve like sections. The smaller the Maximum Deviation Error, the more
points that are drawn.
166
Points that were created along a spline with the error command
Distance
Use the Distance command to create a set of points along a chain of elements.
Any point in this set is a fixed distance from the next point or the previous point.
1.
Click the Distance command to display the Create Points Distance dialog
box.
2.
Enter a value for the distance between the points.
3.
SURFCAM displays the Create > Points > Select Chain menu for you can
chain the elements.
4.
After you complete the chain, the points are drawn along the chain at the
indicated distance.
Points that are created along a spline at an indicated distance.
Project
Click the Project command to create points on splines or surfaces and create
some vectors that are attached to these points. The points that are created are
projected from other points. You can project normal to the surface or spline or
perpendicular to the construction view. The vectors that are created have end
points that are these projected points.
Click the Project command. The prompt tells you to select a spline or a surface.
If you select a spline, the Project On Curve dialog box is displayed. If you select a
surface, the Project On Surface dialog box is displayed.
The options for a surface are like the options for a spline.
Note
167
The vectors that you create with these options are created in the U or the
V direction of the surface flow curves.
Method
Individually
Use this option to select a single point at a time. The Select Point menu is
displayed.
Multiple
Use this option to select the multiple points. The Select menu is displayed.
Project Direction
Construction View
Use this option to project normal to the construction view plane.
168
Normal
Use this option to project normal to the spline or surface.
Geometry
Create Normal Vector
Create Tangent
Select these options to create a vector that is normal or tangent to the spline
or surface at the projected point. Set the vector length in the Vector Length
field.
Create Curvature
This option creates a vector with a length equal to the radius of an arc that
fits the curve. The midpoint of the arc is the projected point.
Create First Derivative
Create Second Derivative
These options create a vectors with a length equal to the first or second
derivative of the curve at the point.
Create Projected Point
Select this option to create and display a projected point on a spline or
surface.
Create Point at End of Line / Vector
Select this option to create a point at the other end of a vector.
Vector Length
Enter the length for the Tangent or Normal Vector.
Rectangular
Use this command to create points in the shape of a rectangle. Define the array
along the X and Y axes.
169
Number Of Points
Define the total number of points to create along each axis.
Distance
Enter a value for the distance between the points that are along each axis.
Angle
Indicate the angle from the standard position to set the point array orientation.
Make Circles Centered At Points
Check this box to create a circle around each point in the array.
Circle Radius
The radius of the circles around the points in the array.
After you click OK, the Select Point menu is displayed and a prompt tells you to
select the lower left corner of the array.
No Circles
Circles around the points

Rectangle Array Patterns
170
Circular
Use this command to create a set of points around an arc.
Number Of Points
Define the total number of points to create.
Radius
Enter the radius of the circle.
Total Angle
Enter a value for the angle between the first and last point. Use a positive value
to create the points in the counterclockwise direction, a negative value for a
clockwise direction.
Start Angle
Enter the angle from the standard position to the position of the first point to
create.
Make Circles Centered At Points
Check this box to create a circle around each point.
Circle Radius
The radius of the circles around the points.
Click the OK button. The Select Point menu is displayed. Use this menu to select
the center of the circle.
171
Circles around the Points
No Circles
Circular Arrays
5.3.3
Line
Create > Line menu
Tangent
Click Tangent to create a line tangent to elements or locations. Then select the
elements (or locations).
SURFCAM will draw a line connecting the elements selected and display the
command on the menu if there are more possibilities. Each time you click Other,
SURFCAM will draw another possible line.
The Undo command will also be displayed which you can click to remove the line.
The circles in the figure were both selected toward the top. Click the Other
command to see different tangent lines.
172
End Points
Click End Points on the Line menu to display the Select Point menu. You will be
prompted to select the starting point and the ending point. The first location will be
marked with a small square. SURFCAM will display the line after the second end
point is selected.
String
Create a set of line segments connected end to end. These segments can be
created as separate entities or as a single entity called a polyline.
Create Line Elements

Create a set of separate line segments connected to each other. SURFCAM
will display the Select Point menu and you will be prompted to select the
starting and ending points.
Create A Polyline
Create a set of connected line segments that form a single entity, a polyline.
The point where neighboring segments meet is called a node.
Polyline created by selecting the points in the numbered order
Horizontal, Vertical, or Both

These commands are used to create lines that are oriented horizontally or
vertically in the current CView. If you click Both, you can create both a horizontal
line and a vertical line by indicating a single location.
173
Be aware that when creating lines in this manner, SURFCAM trims the lines to the
edges of your screen. Therefore, if the location you specify for the line(s) is not on
the screen, the line(s) will not be created.
To prevent this, it is advisable that the location specified be visible on the screen
before you enter it. Use the Zoom In (Zoom) command on the Display menu (or
click the Zoom In button) to accomplish this.
Angle
Click Angle to display the Create > Line > Angle menu. You will be prompted to
Select an element or location. Angle = 0.000, Length = 1.00000.
The first step is to click the Info Change button and change the values for Angle
and Length.
Info Change
SURFCAM will display the Create Line At Angle dialog box for you to enter new
values for the Angle and the Length of line.
Location
Click Location to display the Select Point menu so you can indicate where to
create the line.
There are three ways to create a line using Angle.
1.
Select an existing point or click the Location button and use the Select Point
menu to indicate a location. SURFCAM will draw the line from that point at
the indicated angle to the horizontal.
174
1 Line Created at 30 angle

from horizontal, from an existing point
2.
Select an arc (or a circle). SURFCAM will draw the line at the indicated angle
to the horizontal and tangent to the arc, or its extension, on the side closest
to the pick point.
1 Line Created at 30 angle

from horizontal, tangent to the extension of an arc
3.
Select a line. SURFCAM will then prompt you to Select a location through
which the offset line will pass. Use the Select Point menu to locate a point
from which the line will be drawn at the indicated angle from the previous
line you selected.
175
1.
The original line
2.
1 Line Created at a 30 angle

from the extension of original line
Cross Product
A Cross Product is a line one unit long that is perpendicular to a plane (or a set of
parallel planes) determined by two non-parallel lines.
Note
Two intersecting lines lie on exactly one plane and therefore determine
that plane. Also, two non-intersecting non-parallel lines in 3D space
determine a set of planes that are each parallel to both lines and
therefore parallel to each other. Two parallel lines also determine a plane
but parallel lines are not used by SURFCAM to create a line with the
Cross Product command.
Click Cross Product. In response to prompts, select the two lines that will define
the plane from which the cross product line will be created.
SURFCAM will then prompt you for the location of the cross product line end point.
After you select the location, SURFCAM will create a line 1 unit long at the location
specified and display the Other command on the menu. You can select the other
direction for the line. The line will be rotated 180 using the same end point.
Offset
Click Offset to create a line offset from an existing line. SURFCAM will display the
Offset menu. See Offset, page 450. The new line can be offset to either side of the
existing line.
The Offset command can produce a line that:
1.
is a user-selected Distance from a given line,
2.
passes through a user-selected Location, or
3.
is tangent to a user-selected arc or circle.
176
Possible offsets at a fixed

Distance from the line
Line to offset
Offset through a
Location
Location
Possible offsets
Tangent to a circle
Circle
Offset lines
Note
In the figure, the Location offset does not contain the location point and
the Tangent offsets do not intersect the circle. This is usually the case
when using the Offset command to create a line.
Rectangle
Click Rectangle to display the Create Line Rectangle dialog box.
Select Two Corner Points

Mark this option to create a rectangle by selecting two points that will be
diagonally opposite corners of the rectangle. SURFCAM will display the Select
Point menu so you can select each point.
One Corner-Length-Width
Mark this option if you want to create a rectangle by selecting the starting point
and specifying the length and width of the rectangle.
177
Length / Width
Specify the length and width of the rectangle. A side is drawn in the negative
direction if a negative value is entered.
Fillet Radius
Specify the radius of the fillet if you want a fillet to be created at each corner.
Location
When Tangent is clicked, you will be prompted to Select first tangent element or
location and the Location command will be displayed on the menu. Click Location
to display the Select Point menu so you can select a first and second tangent
element. SURFCAM will draw a line that is tangent to the two elements you select.
Undo
Click Undo to delete the last element created.
5.3.4
Arc
3 Points
Create an arc using three points.
SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu. Choose a location command to
select each of three points.
The first two locations will be marked with small squares. SURFCAM will display
the arc when the last location is indicated.
Center/Radius
SURFCAM will display the Create Arc dialog box.
178
Enter values for Radius, Start Angle, End Angle and Direction of arc. Then click
OK. SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu for you to select the arc center
location.
Center/Diameter
This command works the same as the Center/Radius command except that
SURFCAM will prompt you for the diameter instead of the radius.
2 Points/Diameter
Create an arc of 180 by specifying the two end points of the diameter. SURFCAM
will display the Select Point menu so you can select the two points. The 180 arc
will be created from the first point to the second in the counterclockwise direction.
Center/Start/End
Create an arc by specifying the center of the arc, the start point of the arc, and a
point defining the angle of the arc. SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu
for you to select the required locations.
The distance between the center point and the start point that you specify is the
radius of the arc.
The second point that you select will not usually be the end point of the arc. It will
determine the central angle for the arc, that is, the degree measure of the arc itself.
The arc will be created in the counterclockwise direction from the start point of the
arc.
Tangent 2
Create an arc tangent to two elements. SURFCAM will display a submenu and will
prompt you to select the two tangent entities.
Click the Create > Arc > Tangent 2 command to display the Create > Arc > Fillet menu.
Change Radius
The radius will be displayed on the prompt line. If you want to change it, click
the Change Radius command.
Trim
Indicate the number of elements neighboring the new arc that are to be
trimmed. Select 0, 1, or 2. (Click the button to toggle from Trim 0 to Trim 1 to
Trim 2.)
0 Create the arc without trimming any of the elements.
1 The first element selected is trimmed to the arc. The other element is not
trimmed.
2 Both elements are trimmed to the arc.
179
Sweep<180
Change the sweep of the arc from less than 180 to greater than 180.
Location
Use if you want to create an arc tangent to an element and passing through a
given point. SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu so you can select the
point.
Flip Arc
Flip an existing arc from less than 180 to greater than 180 or vice versa.
The following commands will be displayed ONLY after the arc has been created.
Other
Display other tangent possibilities.
Reverse
Reverse the trimming or reverse (flip) the arc itself.
Undo
Return the elements to the original configuration and remove the created arc.
All elements will be untrimmed to the original size.
Note
An arc can be created tangent to two points (or locations) that you
specify. The Sweep command determines the size of the arc (that is
less than or greater than 180). Use the Flip arc command to display
the complementary arc. Two arcs, of the same size, can be drawn
between two points. The position of the pointer, when you select the
second point, determines which of the two arcs is drawn. Use the
Other command to display the other arc.
Tangent 3
Create an arc tangent to three elements. You will be prompted to select the three
elements. The elements selected are restricted to points, lines, arcs and circles.
The arc with tangent points closest to the locations selected, when selecting the
three elements, will be created. Use the Other command to select a different
possibility, or Undo to delete the created arc.
Offset
Click Offset to create an arc offset from an existing arc. SURFCAM will display the
Offset menu. See Offset, page 450.
The new arc can be offset to the exterior or interior of the existing arc. It cannot,
however, be offset to the interior a distance greater than the radius of the arc.
From Spline
Creating toolpaths that follow the contour of splines can result in the creation of
more linear moves in the final G-code than is desirable. The From Spline
180
command is used to create a new entity that approximates the original spline, but
which can be machined more efficiently. The new entity is a series of connected
arcs, each of which approximates a section of the spline. After using the From
Spline command, both entities will exist in your drawing.
HINT: It will be helpful to create the arcs on a different layer from the spline.
Tolerance
Tolerance is the maximum allowable chordal deviationthe maximum
distance between the spline segments being approximated and the calculated
arc.
Minimum Radius
This is the smallest allowed arc radius. An arc with a smaller radius will be
replaced with a line segment.
Maximum Radius
This is the largest allowed arc radius. An arc with a larger radius will be
replaced with a line segment.
Check Points Per Span
The Knots of a NURB spline divide the spline into a number of spans. Each
span will be evaluated at the number of points specified by this parameter. One
or more arcs may result from this evaluation.
Fit Area Least Squares
Use Area Least Squares (ALS) Arc fitting function instead of the default Total
Least Squares (TLS) fit. ALS fit is much faster if you have a very large tool path,
but may not be quite as accurate a fit to the arcs. ALS method may also not
produce quite as much optimization as the TLS method.
5.3.5
181
Circle
In SURFCAM a circle element is the same as an arc with a 360 sweep. Most
methods for creating a circle are the same as for creating an arc.
A circle is created with the start and end point at the three o'clock position on the circle
in the view that it was created. The three oclock position is the end point of the circle.
Note
The end point of a circle will rotate into another position when the Rotate
command to move or copy the circle(s) is used.
3 Points
Create a circle by specifying three points. These three points are selected using
the Select Point menu. Each point can be selected using a different command on
the Select Point menu.
The first two locations will be marked temporarily with small squares. When the
third location is selected, SURFCAM will display the circle.
Center/Radius
SURFCAM will display a dialog box for you to enter the radius, then the Select
Point menu so you can select the center of the circle.
Center/Diameter
SURFCAM will display a dialog box for you to enter the diameter, then the Select
Point menu so you can select the center of the circle.
2 Points Radius
Create a circle by specifying two points defining the radius of the circle. Select the
points using the Select Point menu. Each point can be selected using a different
command on the Select Point menu. The first point selected defines the center of
the circle. The distance between the selected points defines the radius of the
circle.
2 Points Diameter
Create a circle by specifying two points defining the diameter of the circle. Select
the points using the Select Point menu. Each point can be selected using a
different command on the Select Point menu. The first point selected defines the
center of the circle. The distance between the selected points defines the diameter
of the circle.
182
Tangent 2
Create a circle tangent to two elements. When you click Tangent 2, SURFCAM will
display a second Circle menu.
Click the Create > Circle > Tangent 2 command to display the Create > Circle > Fillet menu.
Change Radius
Change the radius of the circle.
Trim
Indicate the number of elements neighboring the new circle that are to be
trimmed. You can select 0, 1, or 2. This command toggles among the choices
when you click it.
0 Create the circle without trimming any elements.
1 The first element selected is trimmed to the circle. The other element is not
trimmed.
2 Both elements are trimmed to the circle.
Location
Use this command if you want to create a circle tangent to an element and
passing through a given point. SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu so
you can select the point.
The following commands will be displayed ONLY after the circle has been created.
Other
Display other tangent possibilities.
Reverse
Reverse the trimming of the elements. This command is only displayed when
either Trim 1 or Trim 2 is clicked.
Undo
Return the elements to the original configuration and remove the created circle.
All elements will then be untrimmed to the original size.
Note
The circle can be created tangent to specific locations which you

select. This is useful to create a circle tangent to two points.
The circle closest to the selected location will be displayed. Use the Other
command to select a different possibility.
Tangent 3
Create a circle tangent to three elements (points, lines, arcs and circles). You will
be prompted to select the three elements.
183
The circle with the tangent points closest to the selected location will be created.
Use the Other command to select a different possibility.
Offset
Click Offset to create a circle offset from an existing circle. SURFCAM will display
the Offset menu. See Offset, page 450.
The new circle can be offset to the exterior or interior of the circle. It cannot,
however, be offset to the interior a distance greater than the radius of the circle.
5.3.6
Fillet
A fillet is an arc or spline that is tangent to two other elements. Some of these other
elements are arcs, lines, splines or points that exist any place in 3D space. These
elements do not need to intersect.
A spline fillet has some of the features of an arc. A spline fillet is in the shape of an
arc when it is drawn on a plane. A spline fillet is not in the shape of an arc when it is
drawn in 3D space. The fillet appears like an arc when it is seen from the same CView
used in its construction.
All fillets have a radius. Indicate the radius and select the fillet type in the Fillet dialog
box.
If the elements that the fillet connects are on the same plane, the fillet can be an arc
or a spline. If the two elements exist in 3D space, the fillet must be a spline. A spline
is required to connect the two elements and be a tangent to both elements.
If an Arc is used for a 3D fillet, an arc is created tangent to the first element you select.
This arc is on a plane that is parallel to the CView plane. An arc like this normally does
not intersect the second element and is never tangent to the second element.
When you create a fillet, you can trim the elements at the point of intersection with the
fillet. You can trim one or both elements or not trim either.
Click the Create > Fillet command to create a fillet between two elements.
The prompt line displays the radius of the fillet. A prompt tells you to select the tangent
elements.
Change Radius
Click Change Radius to display the Fillet dialog box.
184
Fillet Radius
Enter the radius of the fillet.
Create Element(s)
The fillets that are created can be either Arcs or Splines.
If the Both option is selected, there are two possible results. If you use the
Chain command to create several fillets, the fillets that are created are arcs. If
you create a single fillet without the Chain command, an Arc and a Spline are
created between the same two lines.
Trim
You can trim 0, 1, or 2 of the elements that intersect the fillet. Click this button to
toggle to a different number.
0 Neither of the two elements is trimmed.
1 The first of the two elements that are selected is trimmed to the fillet. The other
element is not trimmed.
2 The two elements are trimmed to the fillet.
Sweep
One arc is the complement of another arc if the total of their measures is 360.
Normally the arc of a fillet has measure that is less than 180. You can have
SURFCAM create fillets with an arc with measure greater than 180. When the
button displays Sweep>180, the fillet arc is greater than 180.
The Sweep button toggles between Sweep<180 and Sweep>180. When the
button displays Sweep<180, the fillet arc is less than 180. When the button
displays Sweep>180, the fillet arc is greater than 180.
Location
You can use the Location command to select the elements to which the fillet is
attached. SURFCAM displays the Select Point menu. Use one of its commands to
select the tangent elements.
185
After you click the second element, one of the possible fillets is displayed. The fillet
that is first displayed depends on where you click the elements and the sequence
you click the elements.
Flip Arc
Click the Flip Arc command to turn a fillet arc into its complement. See Sweep,
page 184. You can not use this command on fillets that are splines. A prompt tells
you to select an arc or a vector.
Chain
Use the Chain command to create many fillets at one time along a contour that has
a number of elements.
When you click the Chain command, The Select Chain Menu is displayed. Use the
Select Chain menu to chain the contour from one point to another point.
After you click the Done button, a fillet is created between each pair of elements
along the contour that was chained. Each element is trimmed. The Trim 0 and Trim
1 buttons have no control over the trim. If the Create Element(s) parameter on the
Fillet dialog box is set to the Both, the fillets are arcs.
Note
The Fillet Chaining method supports the creation of fillet arcs and fillet
splines, but not both.
The following commands are added to the menu after the fillet is displayed. These
commands are used to display the other possible fillets, the other possible trims or to
cancel the fillet creation. The Reverse command is only displayed when the Trim
command is set to 1 or 2.
Other
Click this button to display the other possible tangent fillets. The number of the
other fillet is displayed on the button. Click the button again to see the next fillet.
You can click the Sweep button also to display more possible fillets.
Reverse
The Reverse button is only displayed when the Trim button is set to 1 or 2. The
fillet must be an arc. This command reverses the trim on the elements or changes
the Sweep of the fillet.
Click the Reverse button. Then click an element that was trimmed. The
complement of the trimmed element is displayed. Always click the Reverse button
before you click an element to reverse.
Undo
Click Undo to cancel the creation of the fillet.
186
5.3.7
Chamfer
Click the Create > Chamfer command to display the Create > Chamfer menu.
A chamfer is a line segment that is drawn between two elements. The elements can
be two lines, two points or a point and a line. Two lines can either intersect or not
intersect.
When the elements are lines that intersect, the chamfer is drawn between two points
that are given distances from the intersection. The given distances are called Trim
Values.
When the Create > Chamfer menu is displayed, the current Trim Values and a prompt
to select an element are displayed. You can select two lines and draw a chamfer
immediately or you can select a menu item.
Change Chamfer
SURFCAM displays the Chamfer dialog box for you to enter the First and Second
Trim Values.
Trim
You can trim the lines that are connected to the chamfer.
0 Neither of the lines is trimmed.
1 The line that was first selected is trimmed to the chamfer. The other line is not
trimmed.
2 The two lines are trimmed to the chamfer.
Chain
The Chain command can create many chamfers at one time along a contour that
is made of a number of lines. Click the Chain command to display The Select
Chain Menu.
187
Chain the contour from one point to another point. After you click the Done button,
a chamfer is created between each pair of lines along the contour that was
chained. Each line is trimmed. The Trim 0 and Trim 1 buttons have no control over
the trim.
After you create a chamfer, the Undo and Other commands are added to the menu.
Undo
Click Undo to delete the Chamfer you created and return to the Chamfer menu.
Other
You can click this command to display the other possible chamfers between the
two lines.
When a chamfer is drawn between two non-intersecting and non-parallel lines, the
lines are extended until they intersect. The results are like those that you get when
you create a chamfer between two lines that intersect.
A chamfer between a point and a line connects the point to a point on the line. The
point on the line will be a Trim Value distance from one of the ends of the line. Two
possible chamfers exist.
A chamfer that is drawn between two points connects the points.
5.3.8
Spline
Create > Spline menu
Note
You can also use the Transform > Offset command to create splines. See
Offsetting Splines, page 455.
188
Points
Click Create > Spline > Points to create a natural cubic spline (the curvature is zero
at its ends) by indicating the locations of the node points.
Points or Polyline
If you click either Points or Polyline, SURFCAM will display the NURB Curve
dialog box.
Construction Method
Interpolate
Create a NURB curve that passes through the points. This is done by
creating new control points.
A spline created by interpolating points
Control Points
Create a NURB curve that uses the chosen points as control points.
When this option is chosen, the Knots and Degree parameters become
available.
Least Squares
Create a curve using the chosen points as control points and a Least
Squares method for fitting the spline to the points.
189
Knots
NURB splines are composed of distinct spans. Each span is defined by a
single mathematical equation. Knots are the transition points between
spans.
Knots are of three types: Bezier, Uniform, and Non-Uniform. Non-uniform
knots will usually give the smoothest results. Use the others only if you have
a specific need.
Uniform Knots
All spans are of equal length. You can have an unlimited number of
spans.
Uniform Knots
Bezier Knots
There is only one span (two knots).
Bezier Knots
Non-Uniform Knots
Spans are different lengths. The length is calculated from the control
points so as to keep the speed of the curve as uniform as possible. You
can have an unlimited number of spans.
Non-Uniform Knots
Degree
Interpolated splines are always degree 3.
If control points are specified and the NURB spline uses Uniform or NonUniform knots, then the degree field can be used to control the degree of the
190
spline. The maximum degree is 20 and the minimum degree is 1. The

minimum number of control points in a Uniform NURB spline is the degree
of the NURB spline plus one.
If the NURB spline uses Bezier knots, then the degree is automatically the
number of points in the controlling polygon minus one, and this value is
ignored. Since the maximum degree is 20, the largest Bezier spline that can
be created will contain 21 control points.
This specifies the complexity of the equations defining the NURB spline.
The number of points that can be interpolated by a single segment
increases with an equation of higher degree. Also, with a higher degree the
spline tends to stay away from the control polygon (considered smoother).
Higher degree splines have problems of different kinds (numerical instability
and oscillations). Even numbers are worse than odd. Time to work with a
spline is inversely relative to the degree. In general, many geometric
modeling applications limit the degree of the splines to be 3, although
degrees of 5 through 8 are not uncommon. SURFCAM limits the degree of
a NURB spline to 20.
A NURB surface has two degrees: one along the U direction and the other
along the V direction.
The degree of a NURB spline must be at least one less than the number of
control points. In the case of a NURB surface, the degree in each direction
must be at least one less than the number of control points in that direction.
A NURB spline of degree 1 can be used to represent lines and polylines.
SURFCAM splines can be accurately represented by NURB splines of
degree 3.
Degree = 1
Splines Created with Different Degrees
191
Degree = 3
Degree = 6 (one less than the total number of points)

Splines Created with Different Degrees
The Knots of a NURB spline divide the spline into a number of spans. Each
span will be evaluated at the number of points specified by this parameter.
Optimize Deviation
This is the maximum allowable chordal deviation of the spline from the lines
drawn between the chosen points.
Show Polygon
Check to display the controlling polygons.
NURB splines are defined by a set of points in space. Unlike splines where
the spline passes through the points that define the spline, the points
defining the NURB spline (except the first and last) do not usually lie on the
spline. Sometimes they are called puppet points, as each controls a piece
of the spline and moving one point causes a portion of the spline to move in
that direction.
A NURB surface is defined by a rectangular mesh of control points.
192
Interpolated Spline with the Control Polygon Visible
Polyline
If you click Polyline on the Points submenu, the same options will be available
to you as when you click Points. However, SURFCAM will use an existing
polyline for the points. See String, page 172 for information on how polylines
are created.
Interpolated spline through a polyline
Uniform spline through a polyline with a degree of 3
193
Elements
Click Elements on the Create > Spline menu to create a spline from a series of
chained lines, arcs, and even other splines.
Optimize
Create an optimized spline by duplicating an existing spline, then removing the
unneeded nodes from it. The new spline created will only use the nodes that are
needed to hold a tolerance, which you specify, to the original spline, reducing the
amount of data and time that is required to represent curves and surfaces.
When working with digitized data, you are given many extra node points on a
spline that are unnecessary. A small number of nodes may be required to
accurately define the shape of the spline. SURFCAM's Optimize command can
drastically reduce the amount of RAM needed, and more importantly, the amount
of time required to process a spline. This time savings is greatly amplified when a
surface is constructed from an optimized spline.
Example:
Eleven splines are used as cross sections to create a surface in SURFCAM.
Suppose these splines are originally defined by an average of 101 nodes each,
whereas an average of only 21 nodes each are required if the splines are
optimized. A surface created with the non-optimized splines would consist of
about 1000 patches (100 nodes times 10 splines), whereas a surface created
with the optimized splines would consist of about 200 patches (20 nodes times
10 splines). The patches created with optimized splines would take about one
fifth the RAM to store and close to one fifth the time to construct. On more
complex surfaces these savings are even more dramatic.
Note
Since the new spline will be almost identical to the old one, it is highly
recommended that before a spline is optimized, you set both the color
and layer parameters (in the Status menu) to settings different from
those in the original spline so you can distinguish easily between the new
spline and the original spline.
Ellipse
Click Create > Spline > Ellipse to create an elliptical spline.
Center
Create an ellipse whose major axis is a specified angle from horizontal.
SURFCAM will display the Ellipse dialog box.
194
Major/Minor Diameter
Enter the length of the diameters along the major and minor axes of the
ellipse.
Angle
Enter a value for the angle you want the major axis to make with the
horizontal.
SURFCAM displays the Select Point menu. Select the center of the ellipse.
Axis
SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu for you to select the center of the
ellipse and points at the end of the major and minor axes. The point for the
minor axis will be projected to the true minor axis.
Spiral Helix
Create a spiral spline, a helical spline, or a helical spiral spline. SURFCAM will
display the Spline Spiral/Helix dialog box.
195
Type
Click Spiral, Helix, or Both.
Start Radius
The radius of the spline at the start point location.
Start Angle
The angle from the 3 oclock position to the start point of the spline.
End Radius
The radius of the spline at the end point. This parameter is not used when Helix
is selected for the Type.
Radial Pitch
The amount of change in the radius for every 360 when you choose either
Spiral or Both.
Helical Pitch
The height change in the spline for every 360 when you choose either Helix or
Both.
Helical Length
The overall height of the spline when you choose either Helix or Both.
Axial Direction
The direction to apply the helical length. This direction is based on the current
construction view.
Towards
The direction of the positive Z axis in the current construction view.
Away
The direction of the negative Z axis of the current construction view.
Rotation Direction
The direction of the spline. Click CCW for counterclockwise or CW for
clockwise.
Use the Select Point menu to select the center point of the spiral or helix.
Surface Spline
The Surface Spline command is used to create splines associated with surfaces.
In some cases the surface spline will be created on (but separate from) a surface.
In other cases the spline is created by following features of a surface but is not
created on the surface. In most cases these splines will be used as either
boundary curves or flow surface curves.
These splines remain separate from their associated surfaces. Boundary curves,
however, do have surface associative properties that enable them to be used for
things like surface trimming.
196
Click Create > Spline > Surface Spline to display the Create Curve dialog box.
Create Curve dialog box: Boundary Curves tab and Flow Curves tab
Boundary Curves
A Boundary Curve is one that follows the edge of a surface. It can be used as
a trim boundary for another surface.
Creation Choice
Select Create As Single Curve to create one single curve that follows the
boundary of the selected surface(s).
Select Broken Into Multiple to create multiple curves along the edge of the
selected surface(s).
197
Boundary Choice
Select All Boundary to create a curve around all of the boundary of the
selected surface(s).
Select Boundary Picked to create a curve along the boundary edge that is
picked.
Select Segment Picked to create a curve along a segment that is picked on
a boundary edge.
Flow Curves
A Flow Curve is a curve that follows the U or V flow of the surface at a given
location. See the figure Flow Curve Examples, page 198.
Flow Type
Single
Create splines on a surface through a point that is the projection of a
point you will choose. That projection can be either normal to the surface
or parallel to the construction view.
Increment Length
Create splines a specified distance apart (starting along the edge
farthest from the surface arrow).
Number Of Splines
Create a number of evenly spaced splines (including along the surface
edges).
Edges
Create splines along the surface edges.
Knot Lines
Create splines at the natural knots of the surface.
Direction
There are three different options to define the direction of the curve on the
surface. The shape of the curve is always iso-parametric. This means that
it will follow the shape or flow of the surface. It is not sectional.
Major
The direction in which the surface arrow is pointing.
Minor
The direction that is roughly perpendicular to the direction the surface
arrow is pointing.
Both
Curves will be drawn in both major and minor directions.
198
Increment
When the Flow Type is set to Increment Length, the value entered in this
field sets the distance between the curves to be created.
Note: When it is necessary to create splines on the surface edges, enter an
increment value larger than the size of the surface.
Number Of Splines
When Flow Type is set to Number Of Splines, the value entered in this field
sets the number of curves to create.
Project Direction
Project Direction becomes active when Flow Type is set to Single.
Normal
Create splines on the surface that pass through a point at the foot of a
normal projection of a selected point.
Construction View
Create splines on the surface that pass through a point at the foot of a
projection (of a selected point) parallel to the current construction view.
Flow Curve Examples
Original Surface
Flow Type = Single

Direction = Minor
Flow Type = Increment Length

Direction = Both, Increment = .5
199
200
Flow Type = Number of Splines

Direction = Both, Splines = 4
Flow Type = Edges
201
Flow Type = Knot Lines
Rest Curves
Select Rest Curves to create curves that are offset from those that follow the
boundary of material left by previously performed 3 Axis operations. Such
curves are also produced during the 3 Axis Rest Material operation to guide the
creation of tool paths.
Rest Curves must be created in Top CView. They are drawn on the Z0 plane,
not the surface.
202
Rest Curves tab
Tolerances
Comparison
If the distances measured in the comparison of the part and the rest
material are less than this number, SURFCAM will not treat the material
in that area as rest material and will not remove it. The smaller this
number, the more rest material that will be removed.
Surface
Surface cutting moves are linear moves along chords between two
points on the surface. The length of these chordal moves is adjusted so
that no point on the surface, beneath a chord, is a greater distance from
the chord than the value of Surface.
Resolution
To determine the location of rest material on the surface of the part, a
temporary mesh (not displayed) is created to cover the surface.
Resolution sets the size of the cells in the mesh. The smaller the cells,
the more of the rest material that will be identified.
203
Choose one of these options to control the size of the mesh cell: Coarse,
Medium, Fine, and Automatic.
Curve Smoothness
Choose one of these options (None, Average or Very Smooth) to control
the smoothness of the rest material boundary curve and its
corresponding offset curve.
Overlap
This is the distance you want the tool to move beyond the edge of the
rest material to insure complete removal.
Save Curves
Original Undercut Boundaries
SURFCAM will determine the edges of the material (the rest material)
that was not removed by the previous operations in the selected Setup
Section and create boundary curves along these edges. Select this
option to display the Original Undercut Boundaries along with the
toolpath and save them on the currently active layer. It is best to save it
on a layer other than the one containing your drawing.
Intermediate Offset Curves
SURFCAM will determine boundary curves that are offset from the
Original Rest Boundaries. Select this option to display the Intermediate
Offset Curves and save them on the currently active layer.
Normals Used For Tool Offset
SURFCAM will display and save normals used to determine the tool
offset.
Final Offset Curves
SURFCAM will project the Intermediate Offset Curves onto the 0 Z level
plane. The Final Offset Curves are used to guide the creation of the rest
machining toolpath. Select this option to display the final offset curves
and save them on the currently active layer.
Steep/Shallow Curves
Select Steep/Shallow Curves to create the same boundary curves ordinarily
created to guide toolpath creation when Steep/Shallow cutting is done in 3 Axis
Z Finish or Planar operations.
204
Steep/Shallow Curves tab
Minimum Angle, Maximum Angle, Grid Tolerance, OverLap

Steep Curves
Steep Cutting Options, page 658
Shallow Curves
Shallow Cutting Options, page 668
Stock To Leave, page 647
Surface Tolerance, page 490
205
Pencil Curves
Select Pencil Curves to create the same curves created when 3 Axis Pencil Cut
is used to remove material along the concave intersection of two surfaces.
Pencil Curves tab
Stock To Leave, page 647

Curve Tolerance
SURFCAM will break all contour moves along a spline into linear moves
along chords connecting two points on the spline. When driving the tool
along a spline curve, SURFCAM will adjust the length of the chordal moves
to make sure that no point on the spline, beneath the chord, is a greater
distance from the chord than the value of the Curve Tolerance.
Threshold Angle
The Threshold Angle parameter is concerned with the value of the angle at
which two surfaces intersect. The size of that intersect angle can vary along
the intersection. The size of the intersect angle will affect the amount of
material that is left un-cut after any particular cutting operation. The smaller
the angle, the more material that will be left.
The larger the angle, the more material that will be cut by an operation.
Thus, less material will need to be removed by a later clean-up operation like
Pencil Cut. Because of this fact, it is more efficient to have SURFCAM
generate pencil curves only in those regions of the intersection that involve
small angles of intersection.
Threshold Angle is a parameter that tells SURFCAM when to generate a
pencil curve, based on the angle between the two intersecting surfaces.
Threshold Angle is a value that will be compared to the supplement of the
angle of intersection between the two surfaces. SURFCAM will generate a
206
pencil curve in those regions along the intersection of two surfaces where
the supplement of the angle of intersection is larger than the value of
Threshold Angle.
When the angle of intersection between the two surfaces gets large enough
for its supplement to be less than the value of Threshold Angle, SURFCAM
will not generate a pencil curve. If any resulting breaks in the pencil curve
are smaller than a set value, SURFCAM will connect the separate pieces of
the pencil curve so that a smooth and continuous toolpath will be maintained
along the intersection.
Cross Section
The cross section spline is created by slicing surfaces (single, multiple, or
composite) at defined intervals relative to the CView. The plane of the sections is
perpendicular to the CView. When the CView is set to zero, the current view is
used.
To create cross section splines:
1.
Click Create > Spline > Cross Section. SURFCAM will prompt you to Select
surfaces to project across.
2.
Select the surface on which to create the cross section splines. SURFCAM
will display the Create Cross Sections Splines dialog box.
3.
Enter the Increment distance between the splines created, the Spline
Tolerance, and click OK. You will be prompted to Select Point menu to
begin. SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu for you to select this
point.
4.
Select the point on the surface on which you want the cross sections to
begin. You will then be prompted to Select Point menu in direction of cut.
Select a point in the direction for the cross section. SURFCAM will prompt
you to Select the offset side to start. After you do so, the splines will be
created along the defined direction on the side selected.
207
Surface and the cross section splines created

at an angle in the top view using Sketch from Select Point menu.
Note
When it is necessary to create a single cross section, enter an increment

value larger than the size of the surface.
Note
Requires SURFCAM 2 Axis Plus system or greater.

208
Surface Intersect
Click Surface Intersect to create a spline along the intersection of two surfaces.
SURFCAM will prompt you to select the surfaces, then will analyze both surfaces
to find the points of intersection and display the intersect spline.
Note
If SURFCAM cannot find the intersection, select the surfaces in the

opposite order or increase the number of display curves. When there are
multiple intersections, SURFCAM will attempt to find all existing
intersections.
Two intersecting surfaces and the surface intersect splines created
209
Two intersecting surfaces and the surface intersect splines created
Note
Requires SURFCAM 2 Axis Plus system or greater.
Cutter Intersect
A cutter intersect spline is an intersect spline that is offset from the intersection of
two surfaces by a distance that is calculated using the Tool Diameter and Tool Tip
Radius of a selected mill tool and a value for Stock To Leave that you enter.
Cutter intersect splines are useful for creating boundaries used during a cutting
routine to limit the area of the surface being cut. Typically, they are used to contain
the tool to avoid cutting an adjacent surface.
The splines are created on the surface arrow sides of the intersecting surfaces.
Click the Edit > Surfaces > Side command to move a surface arrow to the opposite
side of a surface. See Surfaces, page 428.
Click Cutter Intersect to display the Select Mill Tool dialog box.
210
Tool, Tool Diameter, Tool Tip Radius

Click the Tool button to open the tool library. You can then select a tool whose
values for Tool Diameter and Tip Radius will be entered into the dialog box.
Select the tool you will be using when you cut near the two surfaces. See The
Select Tool functions, page 471.
You can also enter your own values for Tool Diameter and Tool Tip Radius.
Stock To Leave
If you enter a non-zero value for Stock To Leave, it will be added to half the Tool
Diameter (the tool radius) and to the Tool Tip Radius to get values for Total
Radius and Tip Radius that are used to locate the cutter intersect spline. When
you later analyze the spline using the Analyze > Elements command, you will
see the values for Total Radius and Tip Radius.
After you click OK, you will be prompted to Select first surface. Select a surface.
You will then be prompted to Select second surface. SURFCAM will then create
the cutter intersect spline.
Note
If SURFCAM cannot find the intersection, select the surfaces in the

opposite order or increase the number of display curves. When there are
multiple intersections, SURFCAM will attempt to find all existing
intersections.
Two intersecting surfaces

and the cutter intersect spline created using a .25 ball end mill
211
Two intersecting surfaces

and the cutter intersect spline created using a .25 ball end mill
Project
Project a spline onto a surface. The spline must be located in space relative to the
location of the surface. The projection will be accomplished either normal to the
surface or through the construction view.
Maximum Error
Set the deviation from the original spline shape.
Project Direction
Set to Construction View or Normal.
After you follow the prompts and make appropriate selections, the spline will be
created contoured to the shape of the surface.
212
A surface and spline
The spline projected onto the surface
Blend
Create a smooth spline between any two wireframe entities. Click Create > Spline
> Blend. Then select ends of blending spline to display the Create Spline Blend
dialog box.
213
First End / Second End Fullness

Enter the fullness factor for the spline ends. The fullness factors determine the
final blended spline shape.
Part Line
A parting line is a curve on the horizon of the surface. This is most commonly used
to create a parting edge or surface.
To create a parting line surface, click Part Line on the Create > Spline menu then
select the surfaces on which to create a parting curve. The parting curve will follow
the horizon of each surface. This is done relative to the current construction view.
Model with a Parting Curve
214
Wrap Curve
A wrap curve is a spline created by wrapping a set of chained elements (or curve)
around a cylinder. You will define the cylinder by entering values for its radius and
the orientation of its major axis. You will then map a base point on the chained
elements (or curve) onto a reference point on the surface of the cylinder. You can
elect to display a portion of the cylinder to aid in visualization. You can also control
the angular orientation of the curve on the cylinder surface as viewed from a
perpendicular to the cylinder.
Note
The Wrap Curve example was created using the sample program
2dstar.dsn and trimming after the creation.
To create a wrap curve, click Create > Spline > Wrap Curve. SURFCAM will
display The Select Chain Menu. You will be prompted to select the beginning and
ending elements. After you complete the chaining and click Done, SURFCAM will
display the Input wrapping information dialog box.
215
Radius of the cylinder

Enter the radius of the cylinder.
Reference point
The reference point is a point on the surface of the cylinder. A corresponding
base point on the curve, to be wrapped, will be mapped onto this reference
point. The way the remaining points on the curve will be mapped onto
corresponding points on the cylinder is controlled by mapping the tangent to the
curve being wrapped, at the base point, onto the tangent to the cylinder at the
reference point.
There are two ways to locate the reference point on the cylinder.
Specified by coordinates
The reference point will be identified by the coordinates that you will later be
prompted to enter.
Specified by angle
The reference point will be rotated (around the circumference of the
cylinder) through the angle you enter here starting from the point whose
coordinates you will later be prompted to enter.
Angle at the reference point
The image of the wrapped curve, as viewed from a normal to the cylinder, will
be tilted at this angle at the reference point on the surface of the cylinder.
216
Tolerance
A value that controls how closely the wrapped curve will adhere to the
circumference of the cylinder, as viewed in a cross section of the cylinder.
Do you want to display the cylinder?
Select Yes to display a portion of the cylinder.
When you click OK, SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu and you will be
prompted to Input the center of the cylinder and Input another point to specify
the direction of the cylinder. After you enter these two values, a portion of the
cylinder will be displayed if you selected that option.
You will then be prompted to Pick a point on the curve. This base point will be
mapped onto the reference point on the surface of the cylinder. You will next be
prompted to Pick the corresponding position on the cylinder. Use commands on
the Select Point menu to pick this reference point. The wrap curve will then be
drawn on the surface of the cylinder.
CHAPTER 6 CREATE THE SURFACES

6.1
INTRODUCTION
A surface is a mathematical representation of a part's outer or inner shape. Surfaces

have a positive and a negative side to them, typically indicated by a surface arrow. The
direction of the surface arrow indicates the side and the cutter path direction of the
surface to be machined. A surface will be displayed using U and V splines. The area
bounded by the U and V splines is a surface patch, and the splines are the patch
boundaries.
With SURFCAM you can create both free form and primitive 3 dimensional surfaces. You
use geometric entitieslike points, lines, arcs, and splineswith SURFCAM surface
creating operations to produce free form surfaces. To create primitive surfaceslike
planes, cones, spheres, and cylindersuse SURFCAMs special Primitives command.
You can use existing surfaces to produce other surfaces between them. Finally, you can
join existing surfaces together to form a single composite surface.
Create > Surface menu
Points, page 219
Primitives, page 268
Cross Section, page 223
Revolution, page 279
Drive Curve, page 232
Extrude, page 281
Offset, page 257
Blend, page 283
Fillet, page 258
Trim Plane, page 290
Composite, page 265
Options, page 292
The commands in the Create > Surface menu are described in detail in this chapter. Most
of these construction methods make use of one or more special menus to provide
information and to input values.
The most common of the special data input menus are the Select Point, Vector, Chain,
and Select menus.
218
6.1.1
Special Menus
The Select Point Menu, page 140

The Select Point Menu is used in most of the surface construction methods. It will
be displayed whenever a construction method prompts you to locate a point
related to the construction of a surface.
The Vector Menu, page 145

SURFCAM will display the Vector menu whenever a location and a direction are
required in constructing a surface.
The Select Chain Menu, page 134

Chain menus are used throughout SURFCAM. In surfacing they are commonly
used to identify profiles consisting of a number of entities. Since the majority of the
surface construction features use these menus, it is important to understand their
function.
The Select Menu, page 132

In many situations SURFCAM will display the Select menu to provide you with
several commands to select one or more elements.
6.1.2
Surface Editing
In addition to the surface construction commands discussed in this chapter,

SURFCAM provides several editing commands that are helpful in the surface creation
process. To access these surface editing commands, click Edit on the Main menu.
SURFCAM will display the Edit menu.
The Trim/Break, Surfaces, Tangency, Join, Extend and Control points commands are
applicable to surface editing. See Edit the Designs, page 405.
The Surfaces command of the Edit menu has functions that are specifically applicable
to surface editing. Click Edit > Surfaces, page 428.
Note
Five of the editing commands in the Surface menu (Align, Arrow, Corner,
Direction, and Side) deal with making changes in the arrows associated with
a surface. Surface arrows are important because of their relation to the
cutting process when the surface is machined. Surface arrows determine
where cutting begins, the direction of the cutting and the side of the surface
to be cut.
6.1.3
219
Analyzing Surfaces
The ability to analyze and measure the physical attributes of surfaces and related
features is critical to the surface construction process. SURFCAM provides several
analyzing commands. To access them click Analyze on the Main menu. SURFCAM
will display The Analyze menu, page 325.
6.2
POINTS
The Points command is used to create a surface using either an array of points or a "line
mesh."
A line mesh is a grid-like set of connected line segments that form a single entity. As
with polylines, the points where segments intersect are called nodes. Currently, a line
mesh must be created elsewhere and imported into SURFCAM.
Click Create > Surface > Points to display the following menu.
Points
Click Points to create a surface using an array of points. SURFCAM will display the
NURB Surface dialog box.
Construction Method
Interpolate
Use Interpolate when the points in the array are to be contained on a 3rd
degree surface.
220
Control Points
Use this parameter when the points in the array are to be used as surface
defining control points.
Rows
The number of rows of points used to define the surface.
Columns
The number of points in each row. There must be an equal number of points in
each row.
Knots U, V
Knots U and V are available when you select Control Points for Construction
Method. Knots, page 189 can be Uniform, Non-Uniform or Bezier.
Degree U, V
Degree U and V are available when Knots is set to Uniform or Non-Uniform (not to
Bezier). See Degree, page 189. Degree U cannot exceed the number of Columns
minus 1 and Degree V cannot exceed the number of Rows minus 1.
The original set of points
Surface created using Control Points
221
Surface created using Interpolated Points
Line Mesh
Click Line Mesh to create a surface using a line mesh you have imported into
SURFCAM. SURFCAM will display the NURB Surface Line Mesh dialog box. The
nodes in the line mesh are used to create a surface much like the points in an array
are used with the Points option.
The Construction Method, Knots and Degree options are the same as the
corresponding options in the NURB Surface dialog box.
222
The original line mesh
Surface created through the line mesh with Control Points

223
Surface created through the line mesh using Interpolated Points
6.3
CROSS SECTION
Click Create > Surface > Cross Section to display the following menu.
Use this menu to create cross section surfaces of two types: Sections and Grid.
A cross section surface is one that is constructed so that it contains a set of two or more
cross sections that control the flow or shape of the surface. A cross section is a contour
made up of a single element (line, spline, arc or circle) or two or more chained elements.
Sections
Use Sections to create a surface when you want to select one set of two or more,
approximately parallel, cross sections to control the surface flow in the major direction
of the surface. Synchronization of cross section points is often a concern with
Sections surfaces. See Synchronize Elements, page 228.
224
A Sections type cross section surface developed through ten cross sections.
Grid
Use Grid to create a surface when two sets of two or more cross sections are needed
to control the surface flow in both the major and minor directions of the surface. The
two sets of cross sections establish a natural synchronization of cross section points.
225
Cross Sections in Opposite Directions
Resulting Grid Cross Section Surface
Auto / Manual
Before you select either Sections or Grid, you must select the type of chaining method
you will use to select the cross sections.
Auto
SURFCAM will display the Select menu and you will be prompted to Select
contour(s) to be chained, then Done. Use the Auto chaining method when the
arrangement of the cross sections lends itself to the simplified selections offered
226
by the Select menu and when it lends itself to automatic sorting according to a
logical flow of the surface being created.
Manual
SURFCAM will display the Select Chain menu and you will be prompted to Select
beginning / ending element of cross section in Major / Minor direction, or press
done. Use the Manual chaining method when the arrangement of the cross
sections is such that a more careful selection is required to identify them.
Cross Section Options
Click Options to display the Cross Sections Options dialog box.
Constant Between Similar Cross Sections

When creating a surface through the cross sections, SURFCAM will change the
shape to smoothly transition between the sections. If two sections are identical,
choose Yes to cause SURFCAM to maintain the shape between the two
identical sections.
Maximum Gap Between Intersecting Splines
When creating a surface through sections that cross each other, SURFCAM
requires a tolerance to develop a surface. This value defines the maximum
distance between intersecting sections. If the distance is larger than the
tolerance, an error will occur.
227
Sections Auto Chain Options / Grid Auto Chain Options

Chain Planar Elements
This option locks the chaining plane to the current construction view. Any
intersecting geometry that does not lie within this view is disregarded.
Limit Tangent Angle
This option affects how the system chains cross sections. Since SURFCAM
can automatically create a surface out of cross sections traveling in different
directions, it is faced with circumstancesprimarily in cornersin which a U
section ends and a V section begins.
If some ambiguity exists in this regard, choose Yes. This will activate the Angle
Tolerance parameter.
Angle Tolerance
SURFCAM relies on this angular tolerance to evaluate situations in which
sections change direction abruptly.
Auto Chaining Ambiguous Case
When using the Auto chaining method, SURFCAM will not be able to detect the
difference between a U cross section and a V cross section as it chains the
geometry. In this example the entire outside profile would be identified as a
single section.
To avoid this, you should enter an angle in the Angle Tolerance field that is
larger than the angular difference at each corner.
228
Use the Tangency command on the Analyze menu to determine the angular
difference between the two sections at a corner. Then enter a larger angle.
Note
6.3.1
The Auto chaining command will not always work. There are too many
variables to affect the systems ability to determine what is a U
section and a V section. If the system fails to create a surface, it will
be necessary for you to use the Manual method.
Synchronize Elements
When you use Sections to create a surface from cross sections that contain the same
number of elements or nodes, SURFCAM will prompt you to synchronize the
elements. Synchronizing causes each cross section element or node to be matched
with a corresponding cross section element or node.
SURFCAM will display the Synchronize dialog box only when it is applicable. For
example, if the section consisted of two separate arcs, SURFCAM would not display
the Synchronize dialog box due to the fact that there is only one element per section.
The dialog box will not be displayed if sections traveling both directions are chained.
None
SURFCAM will not match any of the entities from one section to another.
Nodes
When SURFCAM recognizes splines, it will match each node together. If any
single spline in a chain has a different number of nodes, this option will not be
available. If the sections contain both splines and elements, the system will
provide an option to synchronize the elements only, the nodes only, or none.
229
Elements
SURFCAM matches each element to the corresponding element in each cross
section. If the sections contain both splines and elements, SURFCAM will provide
an option to synchronize the elements.
Synchronized Surface
Non-Synchronized Surface
Synchronizing the cross sections results in a significantly different surface.
230
6.3.2
Synchronize With Connecting Lines
When you use Sections to create a surface from two cross sections with connecting
lines, you can elect to have the synchronization controlled by those connecting lines.
If, after you have selected the two cross sections, SURFCAM detects one or more
connecting lines (other than lines connecting end points), it will display the Ruled Surf
Options dialog box.
This will often occur when you create surfaces defined by top and bottom profile.
Check the Use Connecting Lines box to create a surface synchronized by its
connecting lines.
Surface Created with Synchronized Connecting Lines
231
Surface Created with Synchronized Connecting Lines
6.3.3
Four Curve Surface Using Grid
You can use Grid to create a cross section surface by chaining (with Manual or Auto)
four boundary curves that describe the edges of the surface.
When the chaining is completed, SURFCAM will display the Method dialog box giving
you two methods of blending the adjacent curves.
Linear
The Linear method of blending produces a surface with a linear transition between
the curves.
Bicubic
The Bicubic method of blending produces a surface with a splined cubic transition
between the curves and has more curvature than the Linear blend.
232
Four Curve Surface Created Using Grid
6.4
DRIVE CURVE
Use the Drive Curve command to create a surface by driving (sweeping) one or more
cross sections along a 2D or 3D curve. First, click Create > Surface > Options to display
the Create Surface Options dialog box. A portion of that dialog boxthe Drive Curve
Optionswill be discussed here. See Options, page 292.
233
When the Cross Section Orientation parameter is set to 2D, the cross sections must be
created in the Top View. When 3D (the default) is selected, the cross sections should be
connected to the drive curve in 3D space and oriented in the proper plane.
234
2D Cross Section
3D Cross Section
Cross Section Orientation
235
Surface
Cross Section Orientation (Continued)
Note
The distance from the attachment point of a cross section to the edge of the
cross section that will go around an inside radius on a drive curve must be
less than any inside radius of the drive curve. If this distance is exceeded,
the surface may have loops.
6.4.1
Cross Section Geometry
Cross sections can be drawn in the Top View or in 3D space. As explained earlier,
the geometry used is determined by the Cross Section Orientation parameter in the
Create Surface Options dialog box. The default setting for this parameter is 3D. The
surface must be created using only one of the cross section types.
236
6.4.1.1
2D Cross Section
This geometry must be created in the Top View (View 1). Entities created along
the Y axis are translated along the Z axis. The X axis entities are translated
perpendicular to the curve geometry. The cross sections are attached to the drive
curve perpendicular to the curve geometry at the attachment point.
2
View 1
1. Drive Curve
2. Cross Section
Created Using 2D Geometry Construction and a Normal Surface
237
Isometric view
Created Using 2D Geometry Construction and a Normal Surface
6.4.1.2
3D Cross Section
Cross sections can be drawn in 3D space also. These must be placed at the
proper location and orientation and must be created perpendicular to the drive
curve geometry for a normal surface. They can be created at any angle to the
curve geometry to direct the surface. The cross sections are driven along the curve
at the attached angle. It is not necessary for the cross sections to be attached to
the drive curve, just oriented properly.
Cross sections created in 3D space cannot be rotated or twisted with a directing
curve (discussed later). When 3D construction is used, the surface is created
through the existing cross sections.
238
Drive Curve
Cross Section
Isometric view
Isometric view
Surface created using previous cross section and drive curve
the cross section is attached perpendicular to the curve geometry
239
Drive Curve
Cross Section
Top view
The same drive curve as pictured in previous drawing, but the cross section is not oriented normal
to the curve. SURFCAM maintains the section orientation relative to the curve.
240
Top view
The same drive curve as pictured in previous drawing, but the cross section is not oriented normal
to the curve. SURFCAM maintains the section orientation relative to the curve.
In the first Top View drawing above, the cross section is rotated 45 away from
being normal to the curve. This angle is maintained relative to the curve as the
surface is built.
6.4.2
Chaining Direction
The chaining direction of the drive curve determines the direction of the surface
created when using 2D cross sections.
When 3D cross section geometry is used, the surface is constructed the same,
regardless of the chaining direction.
SURFCAM orients the cross section based on the chaining direction. The positive X
axis direction on the cross section will always be to the right of the chaining direction.
This axis is based on SURFCAMs WORLD axis.
241
The cross section geometry can be chained in either direction for 2D or 3D elements.
The surface is created the same for either chaining direction.
Drive Curve
Cross Section
Section chained counterclockwise
Result
242
Drive Curve
Cross Section
Section chained clockwise
Result
Given the same drive curve and cross section,
the drive curve surface differs based on the chaining direction.
6.4.3
243
Attachment Points
SURFCAM creates the drive curve surface based on the cross section and drive
curve attachment point. The cross sections are driven along the drive curve by this
attachment point. This attachment point determines the cross section location relative
to the drive curve.
6.4.3.1
2D Cross Sections
When using a 2D cross section, SURFCAM requires two locations to define the
attachment point. The first is a location on the cross section itself. This is
necessary in 2D since the section is not oriented in the proper plane and location
relative to the curve. The second is the location on the drive curve to which the
cross section should be connected.
Attachment Points
Defined Attachment Points In 2D

2D Cross Section Attachment Points
244
The attachment point for the cross section does not have to be an actual location
on the cross section itself. It can be a location relative to it such as a point in the
center of an arc on the cross section.
6.4.3.2
3D Cross Sections
When using a 3D cross section, SURFCAM requires only one location to define
the attachment point.
Attachment Point
Defined Attachment Point In 3D

245
Result
As in 2D, a 3D attachment point does not have to be a location on the cross section
itself. It can be a location relative to it such as a point in the interior of an arc on
the cross section.
Attachment Point
Attachment point on curve

A surface built using a 3D cross section that is not connected to the curve itself
246
Result
A surface built using a 3D cross section that is not connected to the curve itself
6.4.4
Directing Curves
A directing curve is an additional curve that can affect the tilt and rotation of the cross
section. It acts as a magnet. The results will vary depending on whether the cross
section orientation is 2D or 3D.
To use a directing curve, click Create > Surface > Options. SURFCAM will display the
Create Surface Options dialog box p. 292. Click Yes for Directing Curve Selection.
After the directing curve and
cross section(s) have been
identified, SURFCAM will
display the Drive Curve
Surface dialog box.
6.4.4.1
Tilt with 2D Cross Sections
With 2D cross sections the directing curve rotates the cross sections around the
drive curve, placing the Y axis of the cross section parallel to a line connecting the
drive curve and directing curve.
247
When the tilt is normal, the cross section is attached perpendicular to the drive
curve. When the tilt is directed, the cross section X axis is parallel to a line
connecting the drive and directing curves.
When the surface is built, the system tilts the plane of the 2D cross section
perpendicular to the drive curve. The directing curve has no affect on the surface.
Directing Curve
Cross Section
Drive Curve
Drive Curve With Directing Curve

A Surface Built Using Normal Tilt
248
Cross Section Tilted Normal

A Surface Built Using Normal Tilt
Directing Curve
Cross Section
Drive Curve
Drive Curve With Directing Curve

A Surface Built Using Directed Tilt
249
Cross Section Tilted Directed

A Surface Built Using Directed Tilt
To further illustrate the difference the following pictures view the previously built
surfaces from a right side view.
Directing Curve
Drive Curve
2D Cross Section
The Surface Built Using the Normal Tilt
250
Cross section normal to drive curve

The Surface Built Using the Normal Tilt
Directing Curve
Drive Curve
2D Cross Section
The Surface Built Using The Directed Tilt
251
Cross section tilted towards directing curve

The Surface Built Using The Directed Tilt
6.4.4.2
Tilt with 3D Cross Sections
Cross sections created in 3D space are not directed or tilted if the directing curve
is in the same plane as the drive curve.
Directing Curve
Drive Curve
3D Cross Section
Surface built using directing curve that lies in the same place as the drive curve
252
Surface built using directing curve that lies in the same place as the drive curve
The resulting surface shows how the plane of the cross section and the cross
section itself were not affected by the directing curve. To better visualize how the
surface is built, consider the following diagrams which are taken from different
perspectives.
Directing Curve
Drive Curve
3D Cross Section
From this view you can see how the cross section plane
is maintained along the drive curve.
253
Resulting surface
From this view you can see how the cross section plane
is maintained along the drive curve.
When a directing curve is not in the same plane as the drive curve, the cross
section will be affected. The system will maintain the cross section plane relative
to the directing curve and rotate the cross section itself within its plane.
254
Directing Curve
Drive Curve
3D Cross Section
Resulting surface
A surface built using
a directing curve that does not lie within the same plane as the drive curve
6.4.5
255
Cross Section Blending
When creating a drive curve surface between two consecutive identical cross
sections, SURFCAM can either maintain the same shape between the two cross
sections or create a changing shape that blends the shapes of the preceding or
following cross sections. You control which is done by setting the Constant Between
Similar Sections parameter in the Create Surface Options dialog box. See Options,
page 292 for additional information.
Notice that the surface only changes between dissimilar sections and maintains the
shape between similar ones.
256
Drive Curve
Result
Constant between similar cross sections set to No
In this example the surface changes gradually through the sections instead of
between the sections.
6.5
257
OFFSET
This command is used to create a surface that is offset from an existing surface.
Click Create > Surface > Offset to display the Select menu. You will be prompted to
Select surfaces to offset.
Note
Creating a surface with an offset value that is greater than any inside radius on
the original surface will cause the resultant surface to loop and render those
regions of the surface unusable.
Select one or more surfaces. SURFCAM will then display the Offset dialog box.
Offset Distance
This value defines the offset distance normal to the surface.
Offset Side
Towards Arrow
The new offset surface will be generated on the side toward which the arrow is
pointing.
Away From Arrow
The new offset surface will be generated opposite the side toward which the arrow
is pointing.
After you click OK, SURFCAM will display the Transform Copy dialog box.
258
Copy to Color
Select the color for the offset surface(s). You can choose the color or the original
surface or the current color.
Copy to Layer
Choose the same layer as the original surface, the current layer, or another layer.
Other Layer
If you chose to copy to another layer, specify that layer number here.
Click OK and SURFCAM will create the offset surface(s).
Before Offset
Surface offset
a specified distance away from the arrow
Surface and Surface Offset
6.6
FILLET
See Create 2 fillet surfaces, page 93 for 2 examples.

The Fillet command is used to create a surface, called a fillet surface (or fillet), which is
tangent to two existing surfaces. In general, the cross section of a fillet is an arc.
Therefore, at any point along its length, a fillet has a radius.
A fillet is always attached to another surface on the same side that surfaces surface
arrow is attached. The drawings below illustrate how fillet surfaces are attached to other
surfaces.
Different fillet surfaces based on the arrow side (Arrows are circled.)
259
260
Different fillet surfaces based on the arrow side (Arrows are circled.)
Before creating a fillet between two surfaces you may have to change the side on which
their surface arrows are attached. See Direction, page 429.
261
With SURFCAM, you can create three types of fillets between two surfaces; normal,
rolling ball and variable radius. You can also trim one or both of those surfaces at their
intersection with the fillet surface.
With a normal fillet surface the tangency and a constant radius are maintained
throughout its entire length. However, it is possible for a normal fillet surface to have gaps
along its length where no surface is created. This will occur along any section where the
width of one of the two surfaces is less than the fillet radius. No surface will be drawn
because the tangency cannot be maintained along that section.
A rolling ball fillet surface is the same as a normal fillet except along those sections
where the tangency cannot be maintained. In those sections a surface will be created
that is tangent to only one of the two surfaces.
A variable radius fillet surface has different radius values at different locations along its
length. Below, the drawing on the right illustrates the concept of a variable radius.
Reference
Curve
Two intersecting surfaces (with a reference curve) and a variable radius fillet surface
created between them. The radius of the fillet varies from .125 to .875.
262
.875 rad
.125 rad
Two intersecting surfaces (with a reference curve) and a variable radius fillet surface
created between them. The radius of the fillet varies from .125 to .875.
To create a variable radius fillet, you must first create a reference curve that passes
along the area to be filleted. Arcs with user defined radii will be located along the
reference curve at user defined locations. These arcs are used to create the fillet. The
reference curve should be created as a cutter intersect spline between the two surfaces.
See Cutter Intersect, page 209. The Tool total radius value on the Cutter Intersect Tool
Information dialog box should be set equal to the largest radius used in creating the fillet.
Note
A partial variable radius fillet surface can be created by trimming the

reference curve.
When you create a fillet surface between two other surfaces, you can trim those other
surfaces using the Trim Surface option on the Fillet Options dialog box that appears after
you click the Fillet command. If you dont use the Trim Surface option here, you can trim
these surfaces later with the Edit > Trim/Break command. See Trim/Break, page 406.
Click Create > Surface > Fillet to display the Fillet Options dialog box.
263
Fillet Options dialog box

Click Create > Surface > Fillet to display this dialog box.
To create a normal fillet surface leave the Rolling Ball and Variable Radius options set
to No.
Rolling Ball
No
A rolling ball fillet will not be created.
Yes
A surface will be created along those sections of the fillet where the tangency
cannot be maintained.
Variable Radius
No
Select No to create a constant radius fillet. For an example, see Constant fillet
radius, page 93.
Yes
For an example, see Variable fillet radius, page 95.
Set this option to Yes only if you have previously created the required reference
curve between the two surfaces.
264
The Variable Fillet Radius dialog box will then be displayed. Enter the fillet radius
to be used at that reference point.
After you enter a value and click OK, this step will be repeated. When the last
radius is selected, click OK on the Select Point Menu.
SURFCAM will display the Variable Fillet Information dialog box so you can set the
blend types that affect the change of the radius at the ends of the fillet surface.
Start/End
Blended
The Blended option keeps a constant radius at the end of the fillet and is the
recommended choice for closed reference curves. These are curves that
start and end at the same location. This helps match the two ends of the fillet
surface.
Linear
The Linear option uses a constant rate of change in radius at the ends of the
reference curve and generally yields better results in fillet surfaces that are
not closed.
Note
SURFCAM automatically determines Blended or Linear default

parameters.
Constant Between Same Radius

When there are more than two reference points along the reference curve and
the fillet has the same radius at two consecutive reference points, this
parameter determines the change in fillet radius between the two points.
265
If you check this box, the fillet will maintain a constant radius between the two
points.
Otherwise, the fillet radius will increase or decrease, so as to maintain the
blending with the radii of the other reference points.
Fillet Radius
If your response to Variable Radius was No, define the constant radius value here.
Note
Be sure that the fillet radius specified is smaller than any inside curvature on
the surfaces in the area that is to be filleted. When the fillet surface radius is
larger, the surface may be unusable.
Trim Surface
With Trim Surface you can create a fillet between two surfaces and trim one or both
of the surfaces in the same operation. The trimming takes place at the intersection of
the fillet and the surface. Trim Surface works with all three surface fillet types: normal,
rolling ball, and variable radius.
None
Click None to create a fillet without trimming either surface.
Both
Click Both to trim both surfaces.
First
Click First to have the first surface you select be trimmed.
Second
Click Second to have the second surface you select be trimmed.
After you click OK, you will be prompted to select a first and second surface. Each
surface will be divided into two parts by the fillet. Click on the part of each surface that
you want to retain. SURFCAM will create the fillet surface and trim the surfaces you
indicated.
Create Edge Splines
Select Yes to have separate edge splines created along the edges of the fillet. If the
fillet is later deleted, these edge splines will remain.
6.7
COMPOSITE
The Composite command is the old method of trimming intersecting surfaces. It was
used prior to the release of version 7.1. It is provided here for convenience. There are
more straight forward methods available.
In the process of creating a fillet surface, you can trim one or both of the surfaces
between which the fillet is created. See Fillet, page 258 and Trim/Break, page 406.
266
In the process of performing trimming, the Composite command gives the appearance
of linking the trimmed intersecting surfaces together, forming a single composite
surface. Thus the name Composite for this command. In fact, no new geometry is
created. The parts of this composite surface remain separate surfaces and only appear
to be joined.
Before Using Composite

The surfaces on which the Composite command operates will be trimmed, one at a
time, to fillet edge splines, surface intersection splines, projected splines, or cutter
intersection splines. Before Composite can be used, these splines must already have
been created. Fillet edge splines are created as a by-product of creating a fillet
surface. See Fillet, page 258. Surface and cutter intersection splines are created with
the Surface Intersect and Cutter Intersect commands on the Create > Spline menu.
Splines created by projecting lines, arcs, and splines onto a surface are created with
the Create > Spline > Project command. See Spline, page 187. The surface trimming
can proceed once these splines have been created on the surfaces.
Notes:
Undo
The Back command can be used at any time during the creation of a composite
surface as an Undo command. Each time Back is clicked, the previously trimmed
surface will be returned to its untrimmed state.
Splines
Splines that have been used to create a composite surface cannot be trimmed,
broken or optimized. This limitation preserves the integrity of the composite
surface. Prior to creating a composite, splines can be trimmed or broken to
establish the correct trim boundary.
Single Entity
Once a composite surface has been created, it is a single entity. When you delete
any element that belongs to the composite, the entire composite will be deleted.
This preserves the integrity of the composite surface.
Add/Remove
You can add or remove additional surfaces by clicking Composite on the Create >
Surface menu and picking the existing composite surface. Either add more
surfaces or remove the last surface by clicking Untrim on the Edit > Surfaces
menu.
The following example trims three surfaces together as a composite surface. A fillet
surface was created between two intersecting surfaces. (Fillet surface creation is
described later.)
267
Three Surfaces Before the Composite Process
Composite Example
Before using the Composite command to trim two intersecting surfaces, you must first
create one of the splines described in Before Using Composite, page 266. To trim the
two surfaces, follow this procedure.
1.
Click Composite on the Create > Surface menu. SURFCAM will prompt you to
select a surface.
2.
Select either of the two intersecting surfaces. The system will then prompt you
to select the beginning element of the boundary curve.
3.
Select the boundary spline you previously created by clicking on one of its
ends.
4.
Click Close on the menu or click the spline again to chain the entire spline. The
system will prompt you for the side of the surface to use after trimming.
5.
Click the side of the surface to remain after trimming is accomplished.
6.
Click Done. The first surface selected is trimmed to the boundary spline.
7.
Repeat this procedure for the other intersecting surface.
268
8.
Click Done again to trim the second surface to the boundary spline.
SURFCAM will then return to the Surface menu.
The Composite Surface
6.8
PRIMITIVES
Click Create > Surface > Primitives to display the following menu containing commands
used to construct seven primitive surfaces.
Create > Surface > Primitives menu
Primitive surfaces are simple geometric shapes commonly found in CAD drawings.
The Primitive menu commands enable you to immediately construct surfaces that would
ordinarily require many additional steps using other surface construction methods.
Notes:
Surfaces of Revolution
Five commands on the Primitives menu produce surfaces of revolution: Cylinder,
Cone, Sphere, Torus, and Wedge. These surfaces are created by revolving line
segments, arcs, or circles around an axis of revolution.
269
A revolution of 360 produces a full surface. A revolution of less than 360

produces a partial surface. The number of degrees in a revolution is determined
by values you enter for a Start angle and an End angle. If the Start angle is 0 and
the End angle is 360, you will create a full surface of revolution. If the Start angle
is -30 and the End angle is 330, you will also create a full surface. If, however,
the Start angle is 30 and the End angle is 180, you will create a 150 partial
surface of revolution.
Each surface of revolution has a center, located on its axis of revolution, from
which either a height or a radius of a surface feature is measured.
When a SURFCAM surface of revolution is created, its axis of revolution is always
parallel to the Z axis of the current CView. The 0 measurement for the Start and
End angles of revolution around this axis is along the positive X axis of the current
CView. Counterclockwise is the positive angular direction.
When you create a surface of revolution, you must identify its orientation as being
either CView or Specify. Select CView to create the surface in the current CView.
Set the CView from the Status menu. To best visualize the construction, set the
View to be the same as the CView.
If you want the surface created in an orientation that is different from an existing
CView, you must select Specify. After you have identified the center of the surface,
SURFCAM will display the Vector menu and you will be prompted to select the Z
axis and the X axis of the special CView in which to create the surface of
revolution.
Planar Primitive Surfaces
Two commands on the Primitives menu produce planar surfaces: Cuboid and
Plane. A cuboid has length, width and height. A plane has length and width.
When a SURFCAM planar primitive surface is created, its length is parallel to the
X axis of the current CView and its width is parallel to the current CView Y axis.
The height of a cuboid is parallel to the Z axis of the current CView.
270
6.8.1
Cylinder
Click Cylinder to create a cylindrical surface. SURFCAM will display the Cylinder
dialog box.
Orientation
Orientation is used to identify the primitives axis of revolution and the location of
0 for the Start and End angles of revolution.
CView
The axis of revolution will be parallel to the Z axis of the current existing CView
shown on the Status bar. If the Start Angle is set to 0, the direction will be that
of the positive X axis of the current CView.
Specify
Click Specify to identify a temporary CView. SURFCAM will prompt you to
select the Z and X axes of this view.
Height
This is the dimension of the primitive in the direction parallel to the Z axis of the
CView identified by Orientation.
Radius
This is the radius from the axis of revolution.
Start/End Angles
These angles control the degree of revolution.
Click OK to display the Select Point Menu. You will be prompted to Select center.
Do so.
If you previously selected CView for Orientation, SURFCAM will draw the cylinder.
271
If you selected Specify for Orientation SURFCAM will display the Vector menu and
prompt you to Select Z axis and then Select X axis. See The Vector Menu, page
145. After you specify the Z and X axes SURFCAM will draw the cylinder.
In either case after the cylinder is drawn, you will again be prompted to Select
center. You can select the center for another cylinder or click Back to return to the
Primitives menu.
6.8.2
Cone
Click Cone to create a conical surface. SURFCAM will display the Cone dialog box.
Orientation
CView
Specify
Height
Major Radius
This is the radius at the base of the cone.
Minor Radius
This is the radius at the top of the cone.
272
Start/End Angles
After you click OK, SURFCAM will display the Select Point Menu and prompt you to
Select center. Do so.
If you previously selected CView for Orientation, SURFCAM will draw the cone.
If you selected Specify for Orientation, SURFCAM will display the Vector menu and
145. After you specify the Z and X axes, SURFCAM will draw the cone.
In either case, after the cone is drawn you will again be prompted to Select center.
You can select the center for another cone or click Back to return to the Primitives
menu.
6.8.3
Sphere
A full sphere is created by rotating an arc of 180 around the axis of revolution a full
360. A partial sphere is created when the revolution is less than 360 or the arc is
less than 180 or both. The rotation around the axis of revolution is said to be in the
Major Direction. The size of the arc being rotated is controlled by a Start and End
angle that is measured in the Minor Direction. Click Sphere to display the Sphere
dialog box.
Orientation
CView
273
Specify
Radius
This is the radius of the sphere.
Start/End Angles In Major Direction
These angles control the degree of revolution of an arc around the Z axis. The 0
position is the positive X axis.
Start/End Angles In Minor Direction
These angles control the size of the arc being rotated around the Z axis.
If you previously selected CView for Orientation, SURFCAM will draw the sphere.
145. After you specify the Z and X axes, SURFCAM will draw the sphere.
In either case, after the sphere is drawn you will again be prompted to Select center.
You can select the center for another sphere or click Back to return to the Primitives
menu.
6.8.4
Torus
A full Torus is created by rotating a full arc (circle) around an axis of revolution a full
360. The circle must lie on the same plane as the axis. The radius of the circle is
usually smaller than the distance between the center of the circle and the axis. A
partial Torus is created when the revolution is less than 360, or the arc is less than
360, or both. The rotation around the axis of revolution is said to be in the Major
Direction. The size of the arc being rotated is controlled by a Start and End angle that
is measured in the Minor Direction. Click Torus to display the Torus dialog box.
274
Orientation
CView
Specify
Major Radius
This is the distance from the center of the torus (on the axis of revolution) to the
center of the arc being rotated.
Minor Radius
This is the radius of the arc being rotated.
Start/End Angles In Major Direction
These angles control the degree of revolution around the axis of revolution. The
0 position is the positive X axis.
Start/End Angle In Minor Direction
These angles control the size of the arc. The 0 position is determined by the plane
containing the center of the torus and all the center points of the torus cross
section.
If you previously selected CView for Orientation, SURFCAM will draw the sphere.
275
145. After you specify the Z and X axes, SURFCAM will draw the sphere.
In either case, after the sphere is drawn you will again be prompted to Select center.
You can select the center for another torus or click Back to return to the Primitives
menu.
6.8.5
Wedge
A wedge is created by rotating, around an axis of revolution, a cross section

consisting of two equal length parallel lines connected at their corresponding end
points by a perpendicular line. The length of the two parallel lines is the Radius of the
wedge. The length of the connecting perpendicular line is the Height of the wedge.
Click Wedge to display the Wedge dialog box.
Orientation
CView
Specify
Height
276
Radius
This is the radius of the wedge.
Start/End Angles
If you previously selected CView for Orientation, SURFCAM will draw the wedge.
145. After you specify the Z and X axes, SURFCAM will draw the Wedge.
In either case, after the wedge is drawn you will again be prompted to Select center.
You can select the center for another wedge or click Back to return to the Primitives
menu.
6.8.6
Cuboid
Click Cuboid to create a box-like surface. SURFCAM will display the Cuboid dialog
box.
Cuboids are rectangular and have Length, Width and Height. When created, the
height of a cuboid is always parallel to the Z axis of the current CView. Cuboids have
an Angle associated with them. It is the angle which the Length and Width of the
cuboid make with the X and Y axes of the existing CView when the cuboid is created.
When this Angle is set to 0, the Length and Width of the cuboid will be parallel to the
X and Y axes of the current CView. One corner acts as an origin.
Orientation
Orientation identifies the axis to which the cuboid height will be parallel.
CView
The cuboid height will be parallel to the Z axis of the current existing CView
shown on the Status bar.
277
Specify
Angle
This is the angle that the length and width of the primitive will make with the X and
Y axes of the CView identified by Orientation.
Length, Width, Height
Length, Width, and Height are the dimensions of the primitive in the directions
parallel to the X, Y, and Z axes, respectively, of the CView identified by
Orientation.
If you previously selected CView for Orientation, SURFCAM will draw the Cuboid.
145. After you specify the Z and X axes, SURFCAM will draw the Cuboid.
In either case, after the Cuboid is drawn you will again be prompted to Select origin.
You can select the origin for another cuboid or click Back to return to the Primitives
menu.
6.8.7
Plane
Click Plane to create a surface that can be defined as perpendicular to any axis.
SURFCAM will display the Plane dialog box.
A primitive Plane is rectangular and has Length and Width. Planes have an Angle
associated with them. It is the angle which the Length and Width of the plane make
with the X and Y axes of the existing CView when the plane is created. When this
Angle is set to 0, the Length and Width of the plane will be parallel to the X and Y
axes of the current CView. One corner of the plane acts as an origin.
278
Orientation
Orientation is used to identify the plane on which the primitive Plane will lie.
CView
The primitive Plane will lie on the plane of the current existing CView shown on
the Status bar.
Specify
Angle
This is the angle that the length and width of the primitive will make with the X and
Y axes of the CView identified by Orientation.
Length
This is the dimension of the plane parallel to the X axis of the Orientation CView.
Width
This is the dimension of the plane parallel to the Y axis of the Orientation CView.
If you previously selected CView for Orientation, SURFCAM will draw the primitive
Plane.
145. After you specify the Z and X axes SURFCAM will draw the Plane.
In either case, after the Plane is drawn you will continue to be prompted to Select
origin. You can select the origin for another Plane or click Back to return to the
Primitives menu.
6.9
279
REVOLUTION
In SURFCAM you can create a surface of revolution by causing a cross section to rotate
around an axis by a certain number of degrees.
A Cross Section and a Line Segment
280
Surface of Revolution Created

Rotate a Cross Section 180 around a Segment
To create a surface of revolution, click Create > Surface > Revolution. SURFCAM will
display the Vector menu and you will be prompted to Select the rotation axis.
Note
A rotation axis is not necessarily an existing geometric entity. It is defined by

any vector you create with the Vector menu. The vector can correspond to an
existing entity, have some geometric relationship (for example, parallel or
perpendicular) to an existing entity or be a totally independent entity.
After you create a vector defining the axis of revolution, SURFCAM will display a
Revolution chaining menu and prompt you to Select beginning element of the cross
section for revolved surface.
Note
The cross section can be any element or chain of elements. It can be created
in 3D space. It should be created along the rotation axis and not pass through
it. Otherwise, an unusable surface may be created.
After you select the beginning element of the cross section, SURFCAM will display the
Surface Of Revolution dialog box.
Note
281
The entries for Start angle and End angle will determine the number of degrees
the cross section will be rotated around the rotation axis in a counterclockwise
direction. Both positive and negative values for these angles can be entered
provided that the End angle value minus the Start angle value is in the range
from zero to +360.
Enter values for the Start and End Angles and click OK. SURFCAM will create and
display the surface of revolution.
6.10
EXTRUDE
With the Extrude command you can create a surface that is extruded from a profile of
connected elements. You have the option of making the extrusion a drafted surface, that
is created at an angle with the perpendicular. Drafted extruded surfaces are useful in
mold making.
A surface created by extruding a profile

282
A surface created by extruding a profile

To use the Extrude command, a profile must already be available.
Click Create > Surface> Extrude. SURFCAM will display the Create > Surface > Vector
menu and you will be prompted to Select vector for extrusion.
Create > Surface > Vector menu
The vector you define with this menu tells SURFCAM the direction in which to perform
the extrusion. See The Vector Menu, page 145. After you have selected the vector,
SURFCAM will display the Surface of Extrusion dialog box.
Extrude Length
Enter the length of the extrusion.
283
Cap Surface
You can automatically create cap surfaces at the positions indicated.
Start
A cap will be created at the original geometry profile position.
End
A cap will be created at the position to which the original profile is extruded.
Both
This will cap both ends.
None
No cap will be created.
Drafted Surface
Check the box to create a drafted surface whose sides are not perpendicular, but are
created at an angle to the perpendicular.
Draft Angle
This is the angle, to the perpendicular, at which the drafted surface will be created.
After you enter a length and click a Cap option, click OK. SURFCAM will display The
Select Chain Menu, page 134 menu and prompt you to Select beginning element of the
profile to extrude.
Create > Surface > Select Chain menu
If you choose Auto, SURFCAM will display The Select Menu, page 132 and prompt you
to select the contours to be chained.
6.11
BLEND
The Blend command creates a surface blended between 2 surfaces or curves. It can also
blend among three or four surfaces or curves. SURFCAM attempts to maintain a
tangent, or smooth, connection to the selected surfaces. In some circumstances a
tangent condition cannot be calculated. When this occurs, SURFCAM automatically
provides the option to apply an angular tolerance.
With the Blend dialog box options you can control the effect of the surface tangencies on
the blended surface.
284
Two surfaces before a Blended Surface has been created
6.11.1
Blend Options
When exactly 2, or exactly 4 surfaces are selected, SURFCAM will display different
dialog boxes.
6.11.1.1
285
Blending Two Surfaces
When only two surfaces are selected, SURFCAM will display the Create Surface
Blend dialog box.
Create Surface Blend dialog box
Type
Create the blended surface using a tolerance when exact tangency is not
possible.
<= Tolerance
Define the angular tolerance for blending the surface. A tolerance is
required when there is not enough distance between the two surfaces in
which curvature can be created. A common circumstance occurs when the
edges of the surfaces touch.
Exact
This option uses the tangency of the surfaces selected.
286
Ruled
This creates a flat/ruled surface between two surface edges.
Before
After
A Surface Blend Using the Ruled Option
Note
SURFCAM automatically recommends the best Type.

287
Angle Tolerance
This option is only available when the Type option is set to <= Tolerance. Enter
the angular tolerance to create the surface.
Fullness
These two optionsFirst Edge and Second Edgedetermine the effect of the
two surfaces tangencies on the blended surface. When these two are the same
value, the blended surface is affected equally by each surface's tangency.
When they are not the same, the larger value affects the blended surface's
tangency more.
Fullness 200
288
Fullness 100
Note
6.11.1.2
This option is not available for 3 or 4 surface edges or curves.
Blending Four Surfaces
SURFCAM will display the

Method dialog box if you select
four curves.
Both Bicubic and Linear see the
blending function used to create
the surface and not the resultant
surface itself. The degree is
inherited from the original
surface.
Method dialog box for blending four surfaces
6.11.2
289
Blend Example
To create a blended surface:

1.
Click Blend on the Create > Surface menu. SURFCAM will prompt you to select
the first surface or curve.
2.
Select the first surface or curve. The system will then prompt you to select the
second surface or curve.
3.
Continue to select additional surfaces or curves or click OK.
The Blended Surface
4.
If only two entities are chosen, SURFCAM will display the Method dialog box
for the blend options.
5.
After the options are selected, the blended surface is created.
290
6.12
TRIM PLANE
The Trim Plane command creates a composite planar surface at the edge of another
surface, along a single curve, along a chain of elements, or within a closed curve.
Create > Surface > Trim Plane menu
Cap
The Cap command will create a planar surface at the edge of another surface or along
a curve. When you click Cap, you will be prompted to Select a curve or a surface
edge to cap. Select a curve such as a circle, an arc, or a spline, or select the edge
of a surface.
A plane surface along the

edge of the surface or along the curve
Chain
Click Chain to create a trim plane along a series of separate, but connected elements.
SURFCAM will display a modified Select Chain menu.
Single
Create a trim plane along a single curve similar to the Cap command.
Chain
Click to chain a series of separate curves, creating a single curve, and
automatically creating a trim plane along its edge. See the Trim Plane figure in
which a line, an arc, and a spline were chained. A trim plane was created along
the resulting curve.
291
Trim Plane
Chain Option
Click Chain Option to create trim planes along curves or surface edges you will
chain with the restrictions you impose using the Chain Options dialog box. See
Chain Option, page 136.
Auto
Click Auto to automatically create trim planes along all contours you select using
the Select menu. You will be prompted to Select contour(s) to be chained, then
Done. See The Select Chain Menu, page 134.
A design that was extruded and capped automatically
292
Chain Option
See Chain Option above.
If you attempt to create a trim plane by selecting curves or surface edges that are
not planar, SURFCAM will inform you by displaying an error box.
Curve/Surface Edge Error dialog box
6.13
OPTIONS
Click Create > Surface > Options to display the Create Surface Options dialog box.
293
Display Options
Display Curves In U (Major) Direction
The number of surface flow curves to display in the U direction. The default value
is set in the SURFCAM.INI file.
Display Curves In V (Minor) Direction
The number of surface flow curves to display in the V direction. The default value
is set in the SURFCAM.INI file.
Surface Generation Tolerance
Surface Parametric Tolerance
This option is used only for the Cross Section, Drive Curve, and Blend types of
surface generation. Use this option to define the maximum number of surface
patches generated across a surface. This number is the increment of the cross
sections along the curve. The default value is 0.00100 inches. Elements smaller
(shorter) than this value in the cross sections are discarded.
In the following drawings, the surface was constructed using 2 cross sections,
which are curved splines along the top and bottom of the surfaces. The smaller
tolerance of the left surface requires the surface to follow the cross sections more
accurately.
Surface Parametric Tolerance of 0.00100

294
Surface Parametric Tolerance of 2.50 inches
Drive Curve Options

Cross Section Orientation
You can select either 2D or 3D orientation for the cross sections used for drive
curve surfaces.
Directing Curve Selection
You can deactivate the prompt for a directing curve when creating a drive curve
surface.
Constant Between Similar Sections
This option affects how the surface blends through similar cross sections. If set to
Yes, the system will maintain the shape of the surface between similar cross
sections before changing shape to a different section. If you click No, SURFCAM
will allow the surface to change its shape as it blends through all cross sections.
Tolerance to check similarity
This parameter is the tolerance SURFCAM uses to check if two sections of a curve
have the same shape.
See also
1.
Cross Section Options, page 226

2.
Drive Curve, page 232
3.
Cross Section Blending, page 255
295
296
CHAPTER 7 DESIGN UTILITIES

The following design functions from the main menu bar are included in this chapter.
Create Menu
View, page 297
Text/Dimension, page 300
Vector, page 325
The Analyze menu, page 325
The Shade Menu, page 340
The Options menu, page 343
The File menu, page 362
Special Design Programs, page 389
7.1
7.1.1
CREATE MENU
View
You can define a specific screen orientation as a view. This makes it possible for you
to quickly return to that orientation. It also makes it possible for you to create geometry
and to machine in that orientation.
Because a view is a line of sight down a normal or perpendicular to a plane (the
viewing plane) a view can be defined by describing the viewing plane. Planes can be
defined by three points, a line and a point not on the line and by two intersecting lines.
SURFCAM enables you to create views using each of these methods.
Before SURFCAM can display a view, its local origin must be known. Consequently,
identifying a local origin is always part of creating a new view.
Create > View menu
Select any command on the Create > View menu. Follow the prompts. SURFCAM
displays the Create View dialog box. You can create and change the view from this
dialog box.
298
Note
A description of the menu commands follows this discussion of the Create

View dialog box.
View Name
Enter a name. You can use a maximum of 29 characters.
Reference Number
Accept the displayed number or assign a new number. Do not use the
numbers from 1 to 8, which are assigned to the predefined views.
Change current view to this new view
Select this option to make the new view be the current View.
Change current CView to this new view
Select this option to make the new view be the current CView.
World Coord, View Coord
Select World Coord or View Coord.
3 Points
Create a view by selecting three points.
1.
Click Create > View > 3 Points.
2.
SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu and prompt you to select the
first location on the X axis. Select a point.
3.
SURFCAM will mark the location of the point and prompt you to select the
second location on the X positive axis. This point defines the positive X axis
direction. Select the second point.
4.
SURFCAM will prompt you to select a location in the Y positive direction.

This point defines the positive Y axis direction. Select the Y axis point.
5.
299
SURFCAM will prompt you to select a location for the local origin. Select the
location for the local origin (the X0, Y0, Z0 point for the local coordinate
system). This also determines the point through which the view plane will
pass.
SURFCAM displays the View Name.

Point/Line
Create a view by using an existing line and a point.
1.
Click the Create > View > Point/Line command.
2.
SURFCAM prompts you to select a line that describes the X axis. Select a
line.
3.
SURFCAM displays the Select Point menu. SURFCAM will prompt you to
select a location in the direction of the Y axis. Specify the location.
4.
You will be prompted to select a location for the local origin. Indicate the
location for the local origin (X0, Y0, Z0 point for the local coordinate system).
This also determines the location through which the view plane will pass.
SURFCAM displays View Name.

Normal
Create a view using the X and Z axes. The view is created with the same method
as 3 points. The difference is the axis orientation. The first two points specify the
direction along the Z axis, and the third point orients the X axis. As with the 3 points
command, SURFCAM will prompt you for the location of the origin and a view
name and number.
Current
Used to save the current screen orientation as a view. Click Current to display the
Select Point menu and the prompt Select a location for the local origin.
Use a command on the Select Point menu to identify the local origin (X0, Y0, Z0
point for the local coordinate system). This also determines the location through
which the view plane will pass.
300
7.1.2
Text/Dimension
A Sample Part Displaying Various Dimensions
An understanding of the following concepts will be helpful in learning to use the Text/
Dimension command.
Dimension
A dimension is a single entity consisting of text, dimension lines, and extension
lines. The text for linear measurements consists of numbers only. Arc radius
measurements are preceded by the letter R. Arc diameter measurements are
preceded by the symbol . Angular measurement contains degree, minute and
second symbols. Dimensions for arc measurement also contain a mark showing
the center of the arc. Since these features form a single entity, if you attempt to
delete one feature, you will delete the entire dimension.
Text
In addition to the numeric text in a dimension, SURFCAM provides two commands
to annotate your drawing with textual material. One command, called Leader,
produces text that is connected to a line pointing to a specific entity in your
301
drawing. The other command, called Text, produces straight line or curved text
that can be used for notes in the drawing or changed into a geometric entity that
can be machined.
Coordinates
Depending on the dimension command you choose, SURFCAM will display the
Select Point menu or prompt for selection of a specific entity.
Placing the Dimension
When placing the dimension, you can click any one of the display buttons on the
toolbar to reposition the image.
Rubber-banding
The dimension display can be dragged to its location by rubber-banding it to
the desired location. Exact placement is possible since the actual dimension is
always visible.
Drag the
entire
dimension
Centering
When you create a dimension, SURFCAM will recognize when the text is
centered between the extension lines. As you move the mouse to locate the
dimension on the drawing, the text color will change when the text becomes
centered between the extension lines. This makes consistent placement
possible when detailing and provides a better looking design.
302
Centering a Dimension
Construction Views
SURFCAM treats dimensions like other geometric types. Dimensions that you
create are placed on the plane of the current CView (construction view).
Dimensioning in Multiple Construction Views
To create a dimension, click Create > Text/Dimension.

303
If MouseTexta toggle command with StyleTextappears on the Dimension menu,

you have the option of placing the dimension display in various locations. Move the
mouse until the dimension is in the desired location and then click the left mouse
button. See MouseText / StyleText, page 325.
Linear
Click Linear to measure and display the horizontal or the vertical distance between
points.
When you click Linear and select two points, the linear dimension will be
displayed. Position the dimension by moving the mouse and clicking the left button
or by using one of the other Select Point menu commands.
If the points are not on a horizontal or a vertical line, as you move the mouse to
different locations, SURFCAM automatically switches between the appropriate
horizontal and vertical measurements.
Horizontal and Vertical Linear Dimensions
Linear dimension between points not on a vertical or a horizontal line

304
Align
Measure and display the straight-line distance between two points.
When you click Align, SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu. Select two
points and the align dimension will be displayed. Position the dimension with the
mouse or with one of the Select Point menu commands.
Aligned Dimension
Radius
When you click Radius, you will be prompted to Select an arc to dimension.
When you select the arc, the radius dimension will be displayed as well as the
Select Point menu. Position the dimension with the mouse or the Select Point
menu commands. Once you have set the location of the radius dimension, the
center of the arc will be marked.
In the drawing note that SURFCAM extends an arc to the appropriate quadrant
when the inside is chosen.
305
Radial Dimension
Diameter
Measure the diameter of any circle or arc.
The procedure for creating a diameter dimension is similar to that for creating a
radius dimension except that the result will be an arc diameter measurement.
Angular
Measure the angle between two lines or the angle of an arc.
306
Angular Dimension
When you click Angular, you will be prompted to pick an arc or a line for angular
dimensioning. If you choose an arc, its angular dimension will be displayed as well
as the Select Point menu. Position the dimension with the mouse or the Select
Point menu commands.
If you pick a line, you will be prompted to pick the second line. The angular
dimension between the two lines will then be displayed as well as the Select Point
menu. Position the dimension with the mouse or the Select Point menu
commands.
Leader
Create a line with an annotation. The line often has an arrowhead pointing to a
specific entity. When you click Leader, SURFCAM will display a text entry dialog
box. Enter your text and click OK.
307
Select the start point for the leader using the mouse or the Select Point menu
commands. This is where the point of the arrow will be placed. Once the point is
clicked, the leader and text will be displayed.
You can now move the mouse and thereby move the display of the leader. The
prompt line indicates that if you click the right mouse button (RM), you can insert
intermediate points in the line of the leader. Click the left mouse button (LM) when
you are satisfied with the location of the display.
Text
Click Text to display the Input Text dialog box. It is used to enter text to be used
for notes in a drawing or to be exploded for machining. See Explode, page 444.
Text can take two different forms: straight line and curved. Straight line text lies on
a line that can be oriented at any angle. Curved text lies along a curve. The top or
the bottom of curved text characters can be placed along any curve at a
predetermined distance.
After you enter the text and click OK, you will be prompted to locate the text on the
drawing.
Straight line text will appear on the screen with a pointer located at the top or the
bottom of the first character in the text. You can move the text around before
placing it at a location, either by clicking or using the Select Point menu. You can
continue placing the text at different locations until you click Back on the Select
Point menu.
When the text is curved you will be prompted to identify the curve, along which the
text will be displayed, and the location on the curve where the text display will
begin.
308
Text
Use this box to enter text. This text box has the wrap around feature. When
more than five lines are entered the scroll box is displayed between the scroll
arrows. The keyboard Page Up/Down keys scroll up and down four lines. The
Home and End keys move the pointer to the beginning and end of lines.
Font Type
You can select StrokeFont or TrueType Font. When Font Type is StrokeFont
the Font box is active. When Font Type is TrueType, both the Font and Font
Style boxes are active and a Sample box will be displayed.
Font
Displays the available fonts, like Arial or Times New Roman.
Sample
If you choose TrueType font, the Sample box will be displayed.
Font Style
Displays the font styles Bold, Bold Italic, Italic and Regular.
309
Text Shape
Straight Line
The text is normal lookingappearing on a straight line.
Angle
Enter the angle at which Straight
Line text will be displayed. It is
measured counterclockwise from
the horizontal.
Mouse As
After you click OK, the Straight Line
text will be displayed with the pointer
at the bottom or top of the first
character of the text, depending on
your selection of Bottom or Top.
Angle = 45
Curve
The text is wrapped around a curve.
Offset
Enter the distance away from the curve that you want the wrapped text
to be placed.
Create Text
When text is wrapped around a curve, it is placed above the curve or
below the curve depending on your choice of Overline or Underline,
respectively.
Before placing curved text, you will be prompted to select the beginning
element of the curve, then the ending element. The beginning element is
treated as the beginning of the line (or curve) on which the text is placed.
310
You will then be prompted to indicate the point along the curve where you
want the text to begin.
The selection of Create Text and the order of the selection of the curve end
points determine how the text appears on the curve. Experiment with these
two concepts to get an understanding of how they work together in placing
the text along the curve.
Text Height
Text Height determines the size of the text characters.
Block Spacing
This option affects the spacing between characters. When set to No the default
spacing for the chosen font is used. When set to Yes, the Block Spacing box
will be available for you to enter the value of the distance between the
characters.
Top Line: No Block Spacing

Second Line: Block Spacing, Set at .1
After you have entered the text and chosen the various options, click OK.
SURFCAM will then display the Select Point menu and prompt you to Choose
upper left position for the text. Select the appropriate option and place the text.
Style
Make changes in the Default Style or create and name new styles. A style consists
of all the characteristics of a dimension formattext size, dimension line color,
arrow size, etc. Any new style you create will only be available during the current
work session on the current design file. When you save the design file, the styles
you created during this work session will be saved with it. But the styles will not be
transferred to the next work session on the next design file. Also, keep in mind that
the Style command is not used to change from one style to another. The Change
Style command is used for that.
311
Default Style
Click the Default Style button to have a list of the available styles displayed.
When a particular style is chosen, the parameters in the dialog boxes reflect
that style. The style can be chosen by typing its number or selecting it with the
mouse.
Note that selecting a style here does not make it the current working style.
New
Click New to create a new style. Type a new name and the reference number
you wish to use. Then click OK.
Geometry
Click Geometry to display the Dimension Style Geometry dialog box.
312
Scale Tab
Dimension Scale
Change the display size. For example, a dimension scale of two will
double the size of the display of the dimension.
Dimension Lines Tab
313
Extension lines are lines extending from points on the drawing indicating the
distance being measured. Dimension lines are the lines that point to
extension lines. The one pointing at the extension line of the point selected
first is considered the first dimension line. Dimension lines also point to arcs
and angles being measured.
Suppress First and Second Dimension Lines
Check the box to suppress the display of the first or second dimension
line. Leaving unchecked causes the corresponding dimension line to be
displayed.
314
Suppress the first dimension line
Force Line Inside

Check to display a continuous line between the extension lines. Use
when the dimension text is placed outside of the extension line.
Force Line Inside = Yes
Force Line Inside = No
315
Lead Length
This is the horizontal length of a dimension line. If the entire dimension
line is horizontal, this is the distance from the dimension text to the
extension line. If there is an elbow in the dimension line, this is the length
of only the horizontal part of the dimension line.
Color
The default color for the dimension line is set to Inherit which makes the
dimension lines the same color as the entity being measured.
Select the Color option. Then click
the button at the end of the line to
display a color chart so you can
change the color.
Extension Lines Tab
316
Suppress Extension Lines

To suppress extension lines, follow the same procedure used to
suppress dimension lines.
Suppress the First Extension Line
A common application for displaying dimensions without extension lines

occurs when the Align command is used to measure a wall thickness.
Origin Gap
The distance between the extension lines and the corresponding point.
Extension
The distance the extension line extends beyond the dimension line.
Origin Gap
317
Extension
Color
The value for the extension line color. See Color, page 315.
Arrow Heads Tab
The arrow heads point toward the measured entity or toward the extension
lines.
318
Draw Arrow Head

Click Yes or No to display an arrow head or not.
Arrow Height
The length of the arrow head measured along the dimension line.
Arrow Width
The width of the arrow head.
Center Mark Tab
The center of the arc being measured.
Draw Center Mark

Select None for no mark. Select Mark to draw a point at the center of the
arc. Select Line to draw a line in each quadrant extending from the
center.
None
Mark
Line
Mark Length
The size of the mark drawn in the center of the arc.
Text
Modify various text properties.
319
320
Dimension Line Gap

Specify the distance between text and dimension line. See the Dimension
Line Gap figure.
Text Alignment
Horizontal
Text will be displayed horizontally regardless of the dimension line
direction.
Align with Dimension Line
The text will be displayed along the dimension line.
Dimension Line Gap

Alignment = Horizontal
321
Alignment =
With Dimension Line
Text Position With Respect To

Extension Line
Chosen By User
SURFCAM will place the text midway between the extension lines. If
MouseTexta toggle command with StyleTextis displayed on the
menu, you have the option of placing the dimension display in a different
location. Move the mouse until the dimension is in the desired location
and then click the left mouse button.
See MouseText / StyleText, page 325 for an explanation of StyleText
and MouseText.
Outside Extension Lines
Place the text outside one of the extension lines. You can modify the
placement of the display if MouseText is chosen.
322
Dimension Line
You can modify the following placement by moving the mouse until the text
is at the desired location. Then click the left mouse button.
Note that the Away from Defining Point option places the text on the
opposite side of the dimension line from the two points concerned. The top
end points of the two lines were chosen to display a linear dimension.
Centered Between
Above
Away from Defining Point
Vertical Gap
This option is available only if you have chosen either Above dimension line
or Away from defining point. The value you enter defines the distance
between the text and dimension line.
Text Height, Block Spacing, Color
Text Height, page 310
Block Spacing, page 310
Colors, page 342.
Text Font
Click the Text Font button to display the Font dialog box.
323
Annotation
Click the Annotation button to modify display properties.
Dimension Style Annotation dialog box

Click Create > Text/Dimension > Style > Annotation to display this dialog box.
Dimension Units
Dimension Precision/Angle Precision
The number of places to the right of the decimal point.
Closest Round Off
The number of places to the right of the decimal point for rounding purposes.
The measured distance will always be a multiple of this value.
VALUE
OUTPUT
.0001
.0005
.0000
.0005
.0008
.0010
Angle Format
Measure angles in decimal values or in degrees and minutes.
324
Dimension Tolerance
Tolerances
Choose None to allow no tolerance. To display the same tolerance value
above and below, choose Symmetrical. To allow for a different tolerance
above and below, choose Deviation.
None
Symmetrical
Deviation
Default Upper and Lower Tolerances

Define tolerance values above (+) or below (-).
Text Height Factor
The size of the tolerance text relative to the size of the dimension text. A
scale factor of .5 would make the tolerance texts half the size of the
dimension text.
Tolerance Precision
The number of places to the right of the decimal.
Vertical Justification
Top
Dimension text is at the top of the tolerance display.
Middle
Dimension text is at the center of the tolerance display.
Bottom
Dimension text is at the bottom of the tolerance display.
325
Change Style
When you click Change Style, SURFCAM will display a dialog box listing the
available styles.
MouseText / StyleText
Click this button to toggle between two ways of displaying dimensions. With
MouseText, you can move the mouse and click the location where you want the
dimension displayed. With StyleText, you depend on the current style to place the
dimension.
7.1.3
Vector
The Vector command is used to define the offset side when creating a tool path in 2D.
Click Create > Vector to display The Vector Menu.
7.2
THE ANALYZE MENU
Use the Analyze menu to display physical information about

elements, locations and distances.
Distances and locations will be displayed in pop-up windows using
the current coordinate system. When the Coord parameter is set to
VIEW in the Status menu, the locations and distances displayed are
relative to the current construction coordinate system.
When you analyze an entity, you do not generally need to close the
resulting pop-up window before choosing to analyze another entity.
You can even choose another command from the Analyze menu and
continue to analyze other entities without closing the pop-up window.
You can also select certain commands from the Main menu and keep the Analyze dialog
box open for subsequent copy and paste functions.
Copy Data
The measurements that are displayed in the pop-up windows described in this section
can be copied and pasted into parameter boxes on other dialog boxes.
Copy a Single Value
To copy a single measurement, highlight it and press CTRL+C. Place the cursor
in the data entry box where you want the value to appear and press CTRL+V to
paste it into that box.
326
Copy a Several Values

To copy more than one value, highlight the complete message and press
CTRL+C. Open a plain text editor. Press CTRL+V to paste the message to the
editor.
Then copy and paste individual values to various fields in another dialog box.
7.2.1
327
Angle
When you click Analyze > Angle, you will be prompted to select two lines. After you
do so, SURFCAM will display a pop-up window showing the value of the True Angle,
the CView Angle and the Current View angle.
Angle pop-up window
True Angle
True Angle is the true measure in 3D space of the angle between the two line
segments.
328
CView Angle
The CView Angle is the measure of the angle as it would appear if viewed from the
current construction view (CView).
Current View Angle
The Current View Angle is the measure of the angle as it appears on the screen
(in the current view).
Choose another angle, or another command from the Analyze menu, or click OK to
close the pop-up window.
7.2.2
Distance
When you click Distance, SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu. Select the
starting and ending locations of the distance to be analyzed. The locations will be
marked with a small square. SURFCAM will then display a pop-up window with
information about the distance selected.
Analyzed Distance pop-up window

Click Analyze > Distance and select two locations to display this sample pop-up window.
Choose to analyze another distance, or choose another command from the menu, or
click OK to close the pop-up window.
7.2.3
Min/Max
Use this command to measure the maximum and minimum distances between two
splines, two surfaces or a surface and a spline.
Click Min/Max and select the two elements. After you make your selection,
SURFCAM will display the Analyze Max/Min pop-up window.
329
Create Points
Used to place points on the two elements at specific locations after the
measurements have been made. There are four options for Create Points.
None
SURFCAM will display a pop-up window showing the result without placing any
points on the two elements.
Maximum
A point will be placed on each element at the points that are the greatest
distance apart.
Minimum
A point will be placed on each element at the points that are the least distance
apart.
> Tolerance
If this option is selected, the Tolerance parameter is activated. SURFCAM will
generate a set of corresponding points on the two elements that exceed the
distance value that is entered for the Tolerance parameter.
Tolerance
The value used when the Create Points option is set to > Tolerance. Enter the
distance, and SURFCAM will generate points at a set of locations that exceed this
value.
Check Points
Major Direction
Number of points in the direction of the surface arrow.
Minor Direction
Number of points in the direction roughly perpendicular to the surface arrow.
This is only active when two surfaces have been selected.
Click OK to see a pop-up window showing the results.
330
Min/Max pop-up window
Choose other entities, or another command from the Analyze menu, or click to close
the pop-up window.
7.2.4
Elements
Click Elements and select an element to analyze. SURFCAM will mark the ends of
the element with small squares and then display a pop-up window showing detailed
information about the element.
Note
You can single out, or mask, elements to analyze by type and color. Masking
makes element selection easier when trying to analyze a complex 3dimensional image in which many elements are close or overlapping. See
The Mask Selection Settings Dialog Box, page 158.
Line pop-up window
If you select a surface to analyze, the popup window display will depend on whether
331
or not you check the box for Show Advanced Analyze Dialogs in the Configuration
Tools System Options tab.
System Options Tab in Configuration Tools
332
Analyze Surface Pop-up Window

Without Show Advanced Analyze Dialogs checked.
Analyze Surface Pop-up Window

With Show Advanced Analyze Dialogs checked.
333
Choose another element, or another command from the Analyze menu, or click OK
to close the pop-up window.
7.2.5
Location
Click Location. SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu for you to indicate a
location to analyze. SURFCAM will then display a pop-up window showing the X, Y,
and Z coordinate values of the location indicated.
Selected Location pop-up window
Choose another location, or another command from the Analyze menu, or click OK to
7.2.6
Tangency
This command is used to analyze the joining or potential joining of the edges of two
surfaces, the end points of two splines, or the end point of a spline and the edge of a
surface. In doing so, it measures the angle between the tangents 1) to the two
surfaces at corresponding points on their edges, 2) to the two splines at their end
points, or 3) to the spline at its end point and the surface at a point on its edge closest
to the end point of the spline.
Click Tangency. You will be prompted to select the first and then the second surface
edge or spline end.
If you select two surface edges, SURFCAM will display the Tangency dialog box.
334
Create Normals
You can elect to have normals drawn to corresponding points on the edges of the
two surfaces to help you visualize how the surfaces join or would join.
None
The angular difference of the tangents will be measured without creating
normals at the measured locations.
Maximum
Normals will be drawn at the corresponding points on the two edges where the
angle difference between the two tangents is at a maximum.
Minimum
angle difference between the two tangents is at a minimum.
> Tolerance
angle difference between the two tangents exceed the defined tolerance.
Angle Tolerance
The tolerance value used when Create Normals is set to > Tolerance.
Check Points
The number of points along the surface edges that will be checked.
Click OK to display a pop-up window showing the maximum and minimum values of
the angles between the tangents at corresponding points on the edges of the two
surfaces.
If you select two spline end points or a spline end point and a surface edge, a pop-up
window will be displayed showing the angle value between the two tangents.
Two Surfaces
335
Two Spline End points or a Spline End point and a Surface Edge
Choose other entities, or another command from the Analyze menu, or click OK to
7.2.7
Surface Points
Use the Surface Points command to display a pop-up window evaluating points
based upon their distance from a surface. This can be used to verify the accuracy of
a surface developed through these locations.
Click Surface Points and select a surface to display the Analyze Surface Points dialog
box.
Tolerance
The user-defined tolerance that is being analyzed. If a point falls beyond this
tolerance, SURFCAM indicates how far the point is from the surface, tolerance not
included.
336
Create Elements
Create geometry as markers at the analyzed locations.
Points
SURFCAM will project a point onto the surface where the measurement was
taken.
Lines
SURFCAM will create a line normal to the surface where the measurement was
taken.
Both
SURFCAM will create both a line normal to the surface and a point where the
measurement was taken.
None
SURFCAM will not create any entities to represent the areas measured.
In Tolerance Color
The color for the entities that are within the tolerance specified.
Above Color
The color for the entities that are above the tolerance specified.
Below Color
The color for the entities that are below the tolerance specified.
Direction
Normal
The measurement will be taken perpendicular to the surface.
Construction View
The measurement to the surface will be taken along the construction view,
parallel to the Z axis.
Offset
Define the offset distance to be added to the measurement taken. This can
account for a design model that has offset surfaces or the probe radius used when
digitizing.
After you make selections in the Analyze Surface Points dialog box and click OK,
SURFCAM will display the Select menu and you will be prompted to Select points to
project from. After you select a point, a pop-up window similar to the Analyze Surface
Points pop-up window will be displayed indicating the results.
337
Analyze Surface Points pop-up window
It is necessary to click Close to return to the Select menu to select other points, or to
go back to the Analyze menu.
7.2.8
Curvature
Use the Curvature command to display a dialog box showing the minimum and
maximum radius, or curvature, across a defined grid of points.
338
This command can be used to find the appropriate cutting tool for the surface. The
side measured is based on the surface arrow.
Create Points
Points are created based on the selected command.
None
The pop-up window will show the result without placing points on the surface.
Maximum
A point will be placed at the largest curvature.
Minimum
A point will be placed at the smallest curvature.
< Radius
Based upon the radius defined, the system will generate points that fall under
this value on the surface.
Radius
The value defined here is used when the Create Points command is set to <
Radius. Enter the radius, or tool corner radius, to determine if there is an area on
the surface that has a smaller radius. The default radius is 0.1.
Check Points
The number of points affects the areas analyzed. Therefore, more points cover
more area but decrease the speed of the process.
Major Direction
Number of points in the direction of the surface arrow.
Minor Direction
Number of points in the direction roughly perpendicular to the surface arrow.
Choose other entities, or another command from the Analyze menu, or click OK to
7.3
339
THE DISPLAY MENU
You can change the screen display at any time by selecting the
appropriate button from the toolbar or by using a command from the
Display menu.
If you click Display on the Main menu bar, the Display menu will appear
whereas the toolbar is always displayed at the top of the screen.
When you click any commandexcept Shadeon the Display menu,
the Display menu bar will appear on the screen. It contains the same
commands as the menu itself.
The order of the Display commands corresponds to the order of the
display tools on the toolbar. Note, however, there is no toolbar button
that corresponds to the Shade command.
For a detailed discussion all the tools except Shade, see The SURFCAM toolbar, page
38. This section will discuss only the Shade command.
Display Menu bar
Note
There is a slight difference in the operation of the Rotate and Pan tools when
these are used from either the Display menu or the Display menu bar, instead
of from the toolbar which is constantly displayed on the SURFCAM screen.
COMMAND
Rotate
FUNCTION WHEN USED FROM DISPLAY MENU OR DISPLAY MENU BAR
Arrow keys
If you continue to press an arrow key, SURFCAM will rotate the image in
5 increments around the vertical axis or the horizontal axis.
+ or - keys
If you continue to press the + or - keys, SURFCAM will rotate in 5
increments around Z axis.
See Rotation Increment, page 886 to change this default value.
Pan
+ or - keys
If you continue to press the + or - keys, SURFCAM will continue to slide
the image in the direction of the arrow.
Hot Keys to use with Rotate and Pan
340
7.3.1
The Shade Menu
Select
Click the Select command to display the Select menu. Select one or more surfaces
to shade.
Shade
Click the Shade command to shade the surfaces you selected. If you do not select
any surfaces, all the surfaces are shaded. The color of the shaded surfaces is set
with the Options command.
To return to the wireframe design, first press the ESC key. Then click the Repaint
button.
Undercut
An undercut is an area where each surface normal points below the horizontal. A
surface can have areas that are undercut areas and other areas that are not
undercut areas.
Click the Undercut command to shade any undercut areas on the surfaces you
selected. If you do not select any surfaces, the undercut areas on all the surfaces
are shaded. The areas that are not undercut areas are shaded a different color.
The Under Color parameter indicates the color of the shaded undercut areas. The
Over Color parameter indicates the color of the shaded areas that are not undercut
areas. These color parameters are on the Shade Options dialog box.
SURFCAM uses the surface arrow and a normal drawn in the surface arrows
direction to identify an undercut on a surface.
Options
Click the Options command to adjust the characteristics of the shaded surfaces.
The Shade Options dialog box is displayed.
341
Ambient Light
Use the slider bar to change the brightness of the light that surrounds the
surface.
Material Reflectance
Use the slider bar to change the brightness of the light reflected from the
surfaces.
Translucency (OpenGL ON is required.)
Use the slider bar to change the degree that the light appears to show through
the surfaces.
Light Source Location
Use this option to indicate the position of the light source in 3D space. Click the
sphere or around the sphere and drag to change the position of the light source.
Image Quality
Use the slider bar to define the how sharp the images appear.
To shade a surface, the surface is divided into multiple polygons. SURFCAM
displays these polygons with the different colors that make the surface appear
shaded.
342
The polygons with smaller areas make sharper images. SURFCAM tests the
curves on the surface to create the polygons. The more curves that are tested
the smaller the polygons. This parameter controls the number of surface curves
that are tested.
Tolerance
This parameter is a surface tolerance for the polygons. No point on a
polygon can be greater than this distance from the surface.
Colors
Shade using surface colors
Select this option to shade each surface with the color of its wireframe
design.
Shade using single color
Select this option to shade all the surfaces with the color that you select for
the Single Color parameter.
Single Color
Select the single color to use for all the surfaces.
Note
Display > Shade > Undercut > Over Color

or Under Color are only available when you
have OpenGL OFF.
Over Color
Select a color to use for the areas that are not
undercut areas. See Note above.
Under Color
Select a color to use for the areas that are undercut areas. See Note above.
Single Color, Over Color, and Under Color
Click a color box to display the Color dialog box with 48 colors and
custom colors.
Click color button to display the Color Selection box
with 16 colors.
Show Surface Wireframe Geometry (OpenGL ON is required.)
Check this box to display both the wireframe and the shaded surface.
Show View Indicator (OpenGL ON is required.)
Check this box to display the View Indicator with the shaded surfaces.
Show CView Indicator (OpenGL ON is required.)
Check this box to display the CView Indicator with the shaded surfaces.
7.4
THE OPTIONS MENU
Use the Configuration Tools, page 879 to change the default values for
the parameters and the settings on the Options menu.
7.4.1
Colors
See Work with the Color Schemes, page 74.

343
344
7.4.2
Display
Click the Display command to change parameters that affect the graphics screen.
Draw the Tool

No
No cutting tool will be displayed.
Yes
The cutting tool defined will be displayed.
345
2D Circles
The cutting tool is not displayed. SURFCAM displays 2D circles, the diameter
of the tool for milling, or the diameter of the nose radius of the insert for turning,
representing the cutter path.
With Holder
SURFCAM will display the cutting tool and the tool holder defined in the
SURFCAM.TOL file.
If you chose Yes or With Holder, the following keys will be activated to control
the tool display.
Enter
Stop the tool motion. Press Enter again to restart the tool motion.
Space Bar
Single-step the tool through its moves after using the Enter key to halt the
tool path. Pressing the Enter key again will cause SURFCAM to resume
animating the tool.
0-9
Change the speed of tool path animation. Zero is maximum tool path
animation speed, 9 is minimum.
Tool Color
The number of the color of the animated tool display.
Tool path display
Off
The tool path will not be displayed. The path will not be saved in the graphics
area.
During cutting
The tool path will be drawn while the cutter path is created.
Upon redraw
The tool path will be displayed only when the graphics screen is redrawn using
the Display Redraw command.
The Off and Upon redraw options may result in a significant decrease in actual
processing time.
Normal vector display
Click Yes to cause SURFCAM to draw the offset vector lines that show the relation
of the center of the tool to the contact point on the surface being cut. This also
traces curves on the surface itself showing where the tool nose contacts the
surface. These vectors and contact path are NOT stored, and will disappear when
the screen is redrawn.
346
Alternate tool path colors

Click Yes to cause the tool path to be drawn with alternating colors. Every other
move will alternate between the primary tool path color (as shown in the Status
menu) and the secondary color, which is the next higher number color in the color
selection dialog box.
Draw Rapid Moves
Click Yes to display the rapid moves. When this is set to No, the rapid moves will
not be visible.
Tool animation wait
The speed/rate at which the animation will be displayed. The default is zero, the
fastest.
Shaft Size / Head Size
These parameters, measured in the units you selected, change the size of the
surface arrow.
The SurfaceArrow parameter in the SURFCAM.INI file sets the default values,
Shaft Size = .25, Head Size = .15.
The following two parameters are delay time values that are measured in seconds.
Entering a value of .5 to either of these will result in a 1/2 second delay.
Time pop-ups are displayed
This value determines the length of time the warning messages appear on the
screen.
Rotation wait
When using the mouse to rotate or pan the image, a delay must be introduced to
prevent the screen from being redrawn whenever a mouse pulse is detected. If
there is no delay, it is difficult to see how the mouse movement is affecting the
image.
Surfaces selectable by
Patch edges
Surfaces can be selected by clicking anywhere on the surface, including the
arrow portion.
Arrows only
Limits the surface selection so that you can select a surface by picking the
arrow only. This option speeds up surface selection for very large DSN files.
Turn on repaint timer
Activate or deactivate the repaint timer.
Display text/dimensions
Always
This is the default. The dimensions will be visible regardless of the current view.
347
In view only
Display dimensions only when the current view matches the construction view
the dimensions were created within.
Show CView Indicator
Check the box to have the CView Indicator displayed. Use the Display Options tab
of the Configuration Tools program to set the default.
Show Arc Center
Select this option to display the center of the arc or circle.
Note
The Arc Center is not the midpoint of the arc.
Point size
Enter a value and select an option to set the size of the display of the points on the
screen.
Make the point size smaller when you display a large number of points from
digitized data. Make the point size larger when the points identify the holes to drill.
% Screen
The point size is a percentage of the screen.
Constant
The point size is measured in the current unit of measure. The points get larger
when you Zoom In and smaller when you Zoom Out.
Pixels
The point size is measured in pixels.
7.4.3
Tolerances
Chaining Tolerance
Elements whose end points are farther away from each other than this distance
will not be chained together.
348
User Tolerance
SURFCAM will regard elements that do not come within this distance of each other
to be not touching. As an example, a point will not be created at a selected
intersection unless the actual intersection of the two selected elements is within
this tolerance.
View Tolerance
This value, measured in degrees, is used when comparing angular values.
Dialog Decimal Precision
Specify the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. Change this value
and tab to other fields to see the change in precision.
Note that this does not change the decimal precision in the NC dialog boxes. Click
Options > NC Settings to change that decimal precision. See NC Settings, page
348.
7.4.4
Units
Click Units to choose between inch and metric measure.

No conversion of part geometry is carried out by SURFCAM. This effectively
multiplies the tolerance values by a conversion factor to suit the tolerance values to
the unit of measure that was chosen. The default unit can be set by using the
SURFCAM Configuration Tools. See Units, page 883.
7.4.5
Axis
Click Axis to choose Mill Axis, Lathe Radius, or Lathe Diameter.

The default can be changed by editing the SURFCAM.INI file. This command is only
available with the SURFCAM lathe option.
7.4.6
NC Settings
Click NC Settings to display the NC Settings dialog box that is used to control the
display of dialog and warning boxes during toolpath creation and post processing. It
also enables you to have control over the default values of NC parameters displayed
during the preparation for creating toolpaths.
Note
Changes you make in the NC Settings dialog box are saved when you exit
SURFCAM.
Before performing an NC operation, such as 2 Axis Pocket, SURFCAM displays a

dialog box containing the settings for the NC parameters used by the operation. When
SURFCAM is shipped, these parameters have SURFCAM-determined default
349
settings. The original default settings are contained in threeinitially identicalINI

files: SURFCAMDefault.ini, Default.ini and Current.ini. These files are saved in the C:\
SURFCAM\Surf2002\NCDefault subfolder.
The original SURFCAM default settings are permanently saved in the
SURFCAMDefault.ini file. This file is write-protected so that its contents will remain
unchanged and it will always be available for use by a technician in the event that you
request SURFCAM technical support.
Initially, the Default.ini file is a copy of SURFCAMs default NC settings. It is expected
that many users will want to modify this file to create their own set of default NC
settings. If you do, you should write-protect it. To do this, right click the Default.ini file
in the NCDefault subfolder. Select the Properties option from the menu that appears.
Check the Read-Only attribute.
Current.ini is the file that SURFCAM reads, at start up, to get the default NC settings.
When SURFCAM is shipped, this file contains the SURFCAM default NC settings.
In the following NC Settings dialog box, notice the three NC Dialog Options boxes that
are checked. With these settings, the Current.ini file will be updated whenever you
exit SURFCAM. The new contents of the Current.ini file will be the last NC settings in
effect when you exit a SURFCAM session.
If you remove a check from one of these boxes, the related part of the Current.ini file
will not be updated when you exit SURFCAM. The associated default NC settings will
then remain the same as they were when you started the SURFCAM session in which
you removed the check.
350
Dont ask to accept or reject toolpaths. Keep All Toolpaths.

If not checked, SURFCAM will display the Keep Operation dialog box each time a
new toolpath is created (except when toolpaths are regenerated). You can then
Accept or Reject the toolpath.
If checked, SURFCAM will keep all newly created toolpaths without displaying the
Keep Operation dialog box.
The Keep Operation dialog box also has a Keep All Toolpaths check box which, if
checked, puts a check in this check box.
During Posting, display a warning if file already exists.
During post processing several files are created. If a file with the same name
already exists, you can be warned by a dialog box that asks Do You Wish To
351
Continue? These existing files are usually temporary files from previous post
processing operations. You will usually want to continue. Click this check box if
you do want the warnings to be displayed.
Note
Veteran SURFCAM users, note that this requires checking the box if you
do want the warning displayed. Previous versions asked you to check
the box if you did not want the warning displayed.
Close Operations Manager On Show Toolpath

Close Operations Manager On Backplot Toolpath
Close Operations Manager On Hide Toolpath
Check the corresponding box if you want the Operations Manager dialog box to
close on the specified condition.
Dialog Decimal Precision
Specify the decimal precision displayed in NC dialog boxes. The default value is 6
decimal places.
Save Settings As
Click this button to save the current NC settings on the Cut Control, Material and
Options tabs as a customized default INI file.
You may find it helpful to have a special set of default NC settings for a particular
type of NC project. For example, if there is a specialized 2 Axis job you do
frequently, change the parameter settings on the 2 Axis Cut Control and Options
tabs to meet the needs of that job. Then open the NC Settings dialog box and click
the Save Settings As button to display the Save As dialog box. Save these NC
settings as an INI file with a name of your choosing. Choose a new name for this
kind of file. Do not save them as SURFCAMDefault, Default or Current since the
files with these names have special uses. The default folder for these INI files is
SURFCAM\Surf2002\NCDefault.
When you need these default settings, load them into SURFCAM using the Open
Settings button.
352
Save As dialog box for saving NC Settings
Open Settings
Click this to display the Open dialog box. It will show the INI files in the NCDefault
subfolder. When you click a file name and click Open, the NC settings in that file
will be loaded into SURFCAM to become the new default NC settings. If you will
need these settings in the next several SURFCAM sessions, save themusing
the Save Settings As buttonas the Current.ini file. Then they will be loaded
automatically each time you start SURFCAM.
353
Enable Integrated Verification

Check this box to use integrated verification within SURFCAM. If this box is not
checked, the stand-alone version of SURFCAM Verify will be launched. See
Integrated Verify, page 935 and Stand-alone SURFCAM Verify, page 950.
Part / Edge With Compensation
Cutter Compensation Look Ahead
This specifies the look ahead for generating the offset path. This option is
specific for Show Toolpath, Backplot Toolpath, and internal verification.
Single Element
This produces an offset or compensated toolpath that is generated by
reading one element ahead while offsetting the current element.
Infinite Elements
The whole path is read before being offset.
Show / Backplot Toolpath Using
This option is specific for Show Toolpath and Backplot Toolpath.
Programmed Path
The original programmed toolpath is displayed instead of the offset path.
Compensated Path
The compensated toolpath is displayed.
NC Dialog Options
Use last selected material as default at start-up
If checked, the last material loaded will be saved in the Current.ini file when you
exit SURFCAM.
If not checked, the default material loaded is always the same and can be
selected by clicking the Choose Material button.
If you click Choose Material, SURFCAM will display the Select Material dialog
box for you to make your selection.
354
Use last selected tools as default at start-up

If checked, the last tool loaded will be saved in the Current.ini file when you exit
SURFCAM.
If not checked, the default tools loaded are always the same and can be
selected by clicking the Choose Tools button to display the Default Tools dialog
box.
There are separate default tools for US (Inch) Tools and Metric (MM) Tools.
There are seven categories of tools for which defaults can be set. To change
the default tool for a category, click its button. This will display the Select Tool
355
dialog box for that category of tool. See The Select Tool functions, page 471 for
a description of how to use the Select Tool dialog box.
Save cut control information at SURFCAM exit
If checked, the last entries on the Cut Control, Material and Options tabs will be
saved in the Current.ini file when you exit SURFCAM.
If not checked, the default NC settings will stay the same. When you exit the
SURFCAM session in which you remove the check from this box, the
Current.ini will not be updated. Therefore, the default NC settings for the next
SURFCAM session will be the same as the ones for the previous session.
Calculate Initial Value For Minimum Z
If checked, the initial value for the Minimum Z parameter on the 3 Axis, 4 Axis
and 5 Axis Cut Control tabs will be calculated from the geometry selected. If not
checked, the initial value for Minimum Z will be blank.
Program Number is Alphanumeric Name
If checked, you can add a program name instead of a number in the Tool
Information dialog box. This should be used only when you choose APT-CL in
the Post List box of the NC Operations Manager. The output file will then show
the PARTNO/Alphanumeric name.
7.4.7
Password
The Password command is available on the menu. Normally you use the command
only if you seek technical help and are directed to use this command.
In the recent versions of SURFCAM, the Password has been replaced with a license
file. See The License File, page 32.
7.4.8
Create
Surface Intersect and Fillet Tolerance

SURFCAM uses this tolerance when creating splines and surface fillets. It defines
the chordal accuracy of the curves when created.
356
Surface Fillet Maximum Evaluation Step

SURFCAM uses this tolerance when creating splines and surface fillets. It defines
the maximum distance between each evaluation pass.
Create Rationals
SURFCAM uses this option when creating splines and surfaces.
If Checked
This will force EXACT representation of the elements used for construction. It
will increase the size of the database and is recommended when perfect
accuracy is a must.
If Not Checked
This will provide an approximate representation of the elements used for
construction. It will decrease the size of the database and is recommended
when general tolerances are required.
The surface will be built within the user tolerance of the exact theoretical
surface. (Enter the User Tolerance value in the Tolerance Options dialog box
that appears when you click Tolerances on the Options menu.) The default is
.00005 inches or .001 mm. See Units, page 348.
7.4.9
Snap & Grid
The Snap & Grid dialog box will be discussed after a discussion of SURFCAM
pointers. These will be one of the following six types: cross hair, arrow, hour glass, Ibeam, hand, or pencil.
7.4.9.1
The General Pointers
1.
The Cross Hair pointer is used to select elements in the workspace.
2.
The Arrow pointer is used to select menu items or to click dialog box buttons
and check boxes.
3.
The Hourglass pointer is used to indicate the system is working on a task

and cannot be interrupted to perform another task.
4.
The I-beam pointer is used to select a text box.
5.
The Hand pointer is used to indicate the location of a hot spot in a help
window.
7.4.9.2
357
The Pencil Pointers

The pencil pointer is used to select points when SURFCAM is in the Snap
mode. Snap mode is active when SURFCAM is first installed.
Snap is a special mode in which SURFCAM uses a pencil pointer to help

you select certain types of points. It is active only after you have clicked the Sketch
command on the The Select Point Menu. When you click the Sketch command,
the pointer changes from a cross hair to a pencil.
Use the Snap mode when you need to select:
1.
Key points on existing geometry or
2.
Coordinate points on a grid system.

Points on Existing Geometry
Snap is used to select points on existing lines, arcs, and circlesbut not on
splines or surfaces. Examples of Snap selectable points are: midpoints, end
points, arc centers, points of intersection, and points of tangency.
When a Snap selectable point falls on, or within a ten pixel wide square
surrounding, the tip of the pencil pointer, an icon identifying the type of point will
be added to the pencil pointer.
POINTER
POINTER
ENTITY
AND ICON
ENTITY
AND ICON
Single point
End point of a line, an arc, or a

circle
Midpoint of a line, an arc, or a

circle
Center of a circle
Intersection of two entities

(lines, arcs or circles)
Foot of a perpendicular to a
line, an arc or a circle
Point of tangency to an arc or a

circle
Point on line parallel to 2nd line
Quadrant points on circles or

arcs at 90, 180, 270, or 360
Point on a curve (line, arc, or

circle only)
Pencil Pointers
358
Point on a horizontal line
A point on a vertical line
A point on a line at a 45 angle

to the horizontal
The point at the SURFCAM

origin
Pencil Pointers
In addition, the element on which the point lies will be highlighted. A click of the
mouse will then select this point, even if the pointer is not exactly on the point.
The following table illustrates some of the variations in the pencil pointer that
will be displayed in the proximity of certain types of points on existing geometry.
End point
Midpoint
Any point on an
element
A separate point
Quadrant point at 90 Point of intersection
The origin
Arc center
(Press CTRL key.)
Snap functions available when selecting the first point
Some Snap selectable points are only defined in relation to other previously
identified points. They are shown in the following table.
Point on a horizontal line

through the first point
Point on a vertical line

through the first point
Point at a 45 angle
to the first point
Additional Snap functions available when selecting points following the first point
Point of tangency
Foot of a perpendicular to
a line, an arc, or a circle
359
Center point of an
arc or a circle (Press CTRL
key.)
Additional Snap functions available when selecting points following the first point
When two different Snap pointssay a mid-point and a point of intersection

are close enough to fall within the interior of the ten pixel wide Snap square
surrounding the pointer, it is difficult to control which point will be selected.
When this occurs, use the Zoom In button on the toolbar to display the two
points at a greater distance apart.
Points on a User Defined Grid

To help with selecting points, you can elect to display a grid of coordinate points
in the workspace. You can then elect to turn on the Snap To Grid function so
that when the pointer is close to a grid point, that point will be selected when
you click the mouse.
360
7.4.9.3
Snap & Grid
Click Options > Snap & Grid to display the Snap & Grid Options dialog box.
Enable snap
Check the box to use the Snap function.
Snap to
Check each element that you want to be a Snap selectable point on existing
lines, arcs, and circles.
Grid Properties
Snap to grid
Check the box to turn on the Snap to Grid function. When the Snap to Grid
function is turned on, a mouse click will select the grid point closest to the
pointer, unless the pointer icon indicates it is closer to another type of Snap
point.
361
The other types of Snap points (except Snap points on Horizontal and
Vertical lines) have precedence over grid points.
Display Grid
Check the box if you want to see the grid displayed. Note that SURFCAM
will snap to the nearest grid point even if that grid point is not displayed.
Grid Interval
X and Y Intervals
Set the actual distance between the points by entering values for X and Y.
Starting at the origin, the Grid Snap points will be located at these intervals
in the X and Y directions.
X and Y Display Multipliers
Control how the Grid Snap points are displayed. Not all of the grid points
need to be displayed. Determine what points on the grid are displayed by
entering values for X and Y Display Multipliers.
For example, if the grid points are .1 units apart, you might want to display
the grid points only at 1 unit intervals. In this case you would use 10 as the
multiplier.
Following are some examples of selecting points when Snap to Grid is on. (Keep
in mind that SURFCAM will snap to the nearest grid point even if it is not
displayed.)
Pointer and grid points

before the first mouse click
Grid point closest to the pointer will

be selected when the mouse is clicked.
When selecting a second point, the

line snaps to the nearest grid point.
Move the pointer to a different location and the

line will snap to a different grid point.
362
Check the Snap Grid status by right clicking to display the Snap Grid dialog box.
Click Snap Grid to turn it on or off.
The line has snapped to a grid point.
7.5
The line has not snapped to a grid point.
THE FILE MENU
Click the File command to open or to save files, to

create a 2D DXF file from a 3D drawing, to output a
variety of pen plotter files, or to create a project folder
to save the DSN and ICD files from a single NC
project or a group of related projects.
Recently used files are listed before the Exit
command. Click on a file name to open that file.
7.5.1
New
Click New to clear the screen of all elements and begin a new drawing. The
layers and views will also be cleared. However, the dialog box values will not
be returned to the default values.
7.5.2
363
Open
Click Open to load a design file into SURFCAM.

Prior to loading a file, SURFCAM will give a warning if changes have been
made to the current drawing so you can discard or save the changes before
opening a new file.
Files of Type
Files of Type, page 364.
Preview
Select the Preview option in the Open dialog box to see the part before you open
the file. If the image is not available, the file was saved in a previous version of
SURFCAM before this option was available.
Tip
To save a new image, you must use the Save As

command.
SURFCAM stores the image of the current workspace
in the DSN file.
The image is saved in GIF format. The size of the image
is 238 X 178 pixels.
Tip
The shortcut to open the Save As dialog box is CTRL+S in

SURFCAM.
If you click the Save button or the Save command, the image is
not updated.
364
Append
Check the box to load information from a file into SURFCAM without erasing the
existing data. By using Append, you can combine information stored in a file with
the work that is currently on the screen.
All entities of the file will be added to the current file. This includes layers and
views.
If the appended file has a layer with the same number as one in the existing file,
the drawings on that layer will be drawn on the corresponding layer of the existing
file. The name of the layer will remain the same as it was in the existing file, not
change to the name from the appended file.
If you want to avoid the situation in which geometry from the appended file is
placed on the same layers as an existing file,
1.
Click the Layer button on the Status bar to display the Layers dialog box.
2.
Click the New button to create new layers. Choose layer numbers that do
not overlap with layers in the other file.
3.
Click a new layer and then click the Move Geom button to move drawings
from an old layer to the new layer. You will be prompted to select the
geometry to move. Note that the layer from which you are moving elements
must be both visible and selectable. It might be helpful if that layer is the only
visible layer. Then you can easily click Visible to move the geometry to the
new layer.
4.
Repeat the above step until you arrive at the point where you will have no
overlapping layers.
5.
Then delete the old layers.
Layers, in either the existing or the appended files, with different numbers will
retain their number, name and contents.
Files of Type
Most CAD systems save designs in their own formats. You can open design files
of the following types. These will be translated into SURFCAMs DSN format.
1. DSN Files (*.DSN)
Open the standard SURFCAM design file.
2. DSNFix Files (*.DSN)
Open a DSN file that has problems due to a power problem or a system crash. A
file will be created with the same name as the input file but with the TMP extension.
The file will contain the fixed data. Although the file will have the TMP extension it
is a valid DSN file and can be loaded by specifying the TMP extension.
365
3. CADL Files (*.CDL)

Open a CADKEY Advanced Design Language file format.
4. CSF Files (*.CSF)
Open a Chrysler Standard format file.
5. DES Files (*.DES)
Open a General Motors format file.
DES does not support color definitions. SURFCAM will display the Convert DES
to DSN dialog box for you to select the color for the SURFCAM entities.
6. DXF Files (*.DXF)
Open a Data Exchange Format file. SURFCAM reads all DXF geometry and
ignores dimension entities such as text, arrows and witness lines.
SURFCAM will read all 2D and 3D geometric elements supported by the DXF
format including blocks, layers, sub-figures, sub-figure definitions (and even
nested sub-figures). Surfaces, as they are represented in DXF, will be read into
SURFCAM as line meshes due to the fact that DXF does not support true
surfaces.
The current image will not be erased.
7. FST Files (*.FST)
Open a Ford Standard Tape format file. SURFCAM will display the Convert FST
to DSN dialog box for you to select the color for the SURFCAM entities.
8. IGS Files (*.IGS)
IGES Configuration file
You can indicate the IgsCfgPath and copy the configuration file to the folder you
indicate.
Use the SURFCAM.ini to indicate the location of the igs2dsn.cfg file.
Add the following.
[FileOpenSave_IGS]
IgsCfgPath=C:\SURFCAM\igs
SURFCAM looks for the igs2dsn.cfg file in the folder that you indicated by the
IgsCfgPath. If SURFCAM does not find the file in that folder, SURFCAM uses
the igs sample file folder.
When you open an IGES file, SURFCAM displays the Convert IGES to DSN dialog
box.
366
Click the Select Elements button to select entities for the conversion.
367
Click Select All or Select None or click individual check boxes to select an element.
If the IGES file contains text that you want to load, you must click Select All.
Surface Arrows
If you want surface arrows to be automatically hidden when you import an IGES
file, enter the following code into the Default Section of the IGS2DSN.CFG file
prior to importing:
ShowSurfaceArrow
For example, place it right before the line: #end of default values.
JAMA-ID Translator
The JAMA-ID translator is a Japanese subset of I.G.E.S. The I.G.E.S.
translator within SURFCAM automatically detects this type of I.G.E.S. format
and interprets it accordingly. There is no user intervention in importing a JAMAID I.G.E.S. file.
9. MESH Files (*.CDL)

Open a CADKEY CADL spline mesh file.
There can be only one mesh per CADL file and no other elements. (The splines
are converted to a single SURFCAM DSN surface.)
SURFCAM will display the Convert CADL spline mesh to DSN dialog box.
CADKEY CADL does not support NURB surfaces. The tolerance is the fitting
tolerance when approximating it with a NURB surface.
The CADKEY spline mesh file must meet the following requirements.
1.
Each spline in the mesh must have the same number of nodes.
2.
The splines must be synchronized in both the U and V directions.
3.
The mesh must be comprised of splines only.
Spline mesh with 4 nodes synchronized along each direction.

368
10. NCAL Files (*.NCA)

Open a Northrop or a FastSurf ASCII file.
The file must be in Northrop format.
NCAL files do not have color information. SURFCAM will display the Convert
NCAL to DSN dialog box for you to select the color for the SURFCAM entities.
11. Parasolid Files (*.X_T; *.X_B)
SURFCAM displays the Convert
PARASOLID to DSN dialog box.
Convert a Parasolid based file to a
SURFCAM DSN file.
Model Unit
Choose Inch or Metric.
Convert Choice
Choose entities for translation
Surfaces, Wire frame, or Both.
Surface Option
Projection Option
There are two options
available for projection: UV or
XYZ projection.
Projection Error
Projection tolerance
(automatically converts to
appropriate units).
Color
The general file format does
not support color definitions.
This option specifies the
surface color in SURFCAM.
Layer
This specifies the SURFCAM
layer that will contain the
converted surfaces.
Convert Parasolid To DSN dialog box

369
Wire-Frame Option
Color
Specify the color of the curves in SURFCAM for wire-frame entities.
Layer
Specify the layer that will contain the converted wire-frames entities.
Degenerate Option
Fix degenerate surface(s)
Check the box if you want degenerate surfaces to be fixed.
Degenerate Tolerance
This is the tolerance to use to check whether the surface is degenerate or
not.
Trim-Back Size
This is the size used to trim back degenerate surfaces.
Add center line(s) and points
Add center points of arcs and circles and center lines that are axes of
revolution.
12. SAT Files (*.SAT)
SURFCAM uses the ACIS 3D Toolkit by Spatial Technologies Inc. to convert an
ACIS SAT data files to a SURFCAM DSN file.
See SolidEdge 4.0 or Earlier (*.PAR) below.
13. SolidEdge 4.0 or Earlier (*.PAR)
SURFCAM uses the ACIS 3D Toolkit by Spatial Technologies Inc. to convert a
Solid Edge 4.0, or earlier, data file to a SURFCAM DSN file.
The parameters are like the parameters that are used to convert a Parasolid file
except for the Projection Option. See Parasolid Files (*.X_T; *.X_B), page 368 for
all parameters except the Projection Option.
Projection Option
Select ACIS or SURFCAM.
370
Convert SAT TO DSN and Convert PAR TO DSN dialog boxes
14. SolidEdge 5.0 or Later (*.PAR)

Convert a SolidEdge file, 5.0 or later, to a SURFCAM DSN file.
SURFCAM displays the Convert SOLIDEDGE FILE TO DSN dialog box.
See Parasolid Files (*.X_T; *.X_B), page 368.
15. SolidWorks File (*.PRT; *.SLDPRT)
SURFCAM displays the Convert SolidWorks File TO DSN dialog box.
371
See Parasolid Files (*.X_T; *.X_B), page 368.

16. SPAC Files (*.SPA)
Open a French Automotive SPAC Format file.
SURFCAM displays the Convert SPAC to DSN dialog box for you to select the
color for the SURFCAM entities.
17. SUP Files (*.SUP)
Open a CADKEY Surface Patch File.
SUPCA: 1
The surfaces must be created as a

Super-Patch ASCII file. Use with the
older CADKEY surfacing product. If you
want to translate Fastsurf files, use the
Northrop (NCAL) translator.
simple 1, 1, 0, 4, 1, 0, 0
645 1 2
4
44
3
5.686038
11.424018 5.738951
2.933540
8.209085
5.276438
1.557291
6.601618
5.045181
-1.195208
3.386684
4.582668
-2.571457
1.779217
4.351411
Sample SUPCA ASCII File format
18. VDA Files (*.VDA)

Open a German Automotive format file.
SURFCAM will display the Convert VDA to DSN dialog box for you to select the
color for the SURFCAM entities.
19. ASCII Files, Ncc Files, Shn Files, and Brn Files (*.asc, *.ncc, *.shn, and
*.brn)
Open a digitized file.
SURFCAM will display the Select Output Type dialog box.
372
Element Type
Identify the type of element to which the imported coordinates are to be
converted.
TYPE
CONVERTED TO
Points
Points
Lines
Lines
Polylines
Polylines
Line Mesh
Line meshes
This requires an equal number of coordinates per row.
Splines
Splines
Ncurves
NURB curves
You can select a Least Squares Optimize option. You must
indicate the number of Check Points Per Span and the size of
the Optimize Deviation.
Ncurves Cptrs NURB curves

Coordinates define control points. Select Uniform or NonUniform Knots and indicate a Degree. You can elect to Show
Polygon.
Nsurface
NURB surface
This requires an equal number of coordinates per row.
Nsurface Cptrs NURB Surface

Coordinates define control points. Select Uniform or NonUniform U and V Knots and indicate a number for U and V
Degrees. You can elect to Show Polygon.
ASCII Files
In the case of ASCII files, SURFCAM reads these coordinates as points, lines,
polylines, or line meshes.
ASCII files containing the coordinate data should follow this format:
0.469898
0.177946
1.034500
0.448800
0.193800
1.033300
-0.427497
-0.209856
1.034400
-0.411197
0.230972
1.056700
0.361197
0.317575
1.067800
373
newrow
-0.499800
0.010200
0.000000
0.499800
0.106588
0.000000
0.499800
0.106588
0.000000
0.499800
0.106588
0.000000
0.499800
0.106628
0.000000
newrow
0.496318
0.132787
2.343500
0.448800
0.193800
2.435600
0.427497
0.209856
2.684401
0.486113
0.157125
2.894502
.361197
0.317575
3.006750
The following limitations exist for ASCII files to be read in with SURFCAM's
Digitized command:
Numbers ONLY
Only the following characters are allowed in the coordinate line. X, Y, and Z
are not allowed.
- .0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Spacing
The spacing between the coordinates need not be consistent because
SURFCAM treats any number of spaces as a single space. The incoming
file may even use TAB characters instead of spaces.
Newrow
This is used to separate sections so that the complete file is not read in as
a single entity. The example above will be read in as three entities.
Ncc Files
SURFCAM will read any numerical control code (Ncc) file with X, Y, Z
coordinates. The G00 code is read as the end code for each entity to be
created. The G01 code is read as the beginning code for each entity to be
created. All other G codes, M functions, feed rates and arc moves are ignored.
The X, Y, Z locations in the code are used to create the entity type clicked in
the dialog box.
Shn Files (Sharnoa Binary Files)

SURFCAM reads the Sharnoa binary files and creates the entity selected in the
dialog box for each section of the file.
374
Brn Files (Brown and Sharpe Files)

SURFCAM reads the Brown and Sharpe files and creates the entity selected in
the dialog box for each section of the file.
20. Gear Data Files (*.gr)

This helps you create a gear design. See Gear Data Files (*.gr), page 390.
21. Involute Data Files (*.inv)
This helps you create an involute curve to be used in a gear design. See Involute
Data Files (*.inv), page 394.
22. CAM Profile Data Files (*.cm)
This helps you create a cam design. See CAM Profile Data Files (*.cm), page 396.
23. DWG Files (*.DWG)
SURFCAM uses the ACIS 3D Toolkit by Spatial Technologies Inc. to convert an
AutoCAD DWG Solid3D data file to a SURFCAM DSN file.
24. (Optional) CATIA File (*.model, *.exp)
Open a CATIA file and translate to DSN format. The CATIA translator is a separate
SURFCAM add-on product.
SURFCAM displays a dialog box prompting you to Select a Model file from the
list.
After you click OK, SURFCAM will display the CATIA to SURFCAM Data
Exchange dialog box.
375
Selected CATIA File, CATIA File Type, Selected CATIA

These values are automatically entered.
Explode Ditto
Translate the entity details pointed to by the CATIA dittos.
Transfer Hidden
Transfer entities that exist as hidden entities in the CATIA file.
Transfer Type
Click the Select entity type button to display the Select Entity Types dialog box.
Select the CATIA entity types that you want to import. Points and Lines are
SURFCAM points and lines. Circles and Conics are SURFCAM NURBS
curves. Surfaces, Faces, Skin, Volumes, Exact Solids are SURFCAM NURBS
surfaces. Mockup Solids and Polyhedral Surfaces are SURFCAM wireframe
(NURBS curves).
376
Click OK to return to the CATIA to SURFCAM Data Exchange dialog box.

Click OK to display the Utility Output dialog box.
377
When the CATIA file has been loaded and translated, a text file describing its
contents will be displayed in this dialog box. You can Save or Print this file, or you
can Close the dialog box. After you click Close, the imported CATIA drawing will
be displayed in the SURFCAM drawing window.
7.5.3
Save
Click the Save command or the Save button to save the current DSN file.
If the current file has never been saved, SURFCAM will display a Save As
dialog box. See the next section for further details.
378
Save a new image
You can select the Preview option in the Open dialog box to see the part before you
open the file. You must use the Save As command to save a new image. See
Preview.
7.5.4
Save As
Click Save As (CTRL+S) to save a file with a new name, a new image, a new folder,
or a new format.
Save in
Change the drive and folder if you want, using the standard Windows methods.
File name
Enter the name of the file. You may need to change the type in the Save As Type
box.
Save as type
Descriptions of the types of files that can be saved with the Save As box follow.
Save As > Write menu

For many of the following file types, after you click the Save button the Save As
> Write menu will be displayed on the Secondary Menu bar.
Save As > Write menu

379
Use this menu to select which elements to save. You can choose to Select
individual elements, Select All elements, or select All Active elements.
You can save files of the following types.
1. DSN Files (*.DSN)
Save as a standard SURFCAM design file.
If you are saving a design file, select DSN from the list. After you enter the name
of your file and click Save, SURFCAM will display the NCPOST dialog box. Click
Yes to cause the project and setup section names, that will later be associated with
your design, to contain the name of the design file. This is a good practice so you
will usually click Yes.
2. DSN V2001 Files (*.DSN)
Save as a SURFCAM Version 2001 file.
3. DSN V2000 Files (*.DSN)
Save as a SURFCAM Version 2000 file.
Note
SURFCAM 99 can open files saved in SURFCAM 2000 and vice-versa.
4. CADL Files (*.CDL)

Save a SURFCAM DSN file as a CDL file.
Note
CADL does not support surface elements. Any surfaces created in

SURFCAM will be written as a series of splines to insure compatibility
with CADL elements.
See Save As > Write menu, page 378.
If you choose to select specific elements, SURFCAM will

display the Select menu for your input.
5. CSF Files (*.CSF)
Save a SURFCAM DSN file as a format file.
CSF files do not support NURBS. A NURB Spline is
approximated with lines in the conversion. SURFCAM will display the Convert
DSN to CSF dialog box for you to specify the tolerance.
380
6. DES Files (*.DES)

Save a SURFCAM DSN file
to a General Motors DES
format file.
See Save
As > Write menu, page 378.
Convert DSN to DES dialog
box.
Max. chordal error
DES does not support arcs, circles, or NURBs so these are approximate with
lines in the conversion. This parameter specifies the tolerance used when
converting.
Start Line Number
The first line number in the output DES file.
Line Increment
Amount to increment the line number.
7. DXF Files (*.DXF)
Save as a DXF file.
SURFCAM will display the Convert DSN to DXF dialog box.
Surface output type

Select either Line Mesh or Polyface.
Surface tolerance
The tolerance between the real surface and the poly face.
381
Sampling curves
The sampling curve number when converting a surface to a poly face.
8. FST Files (*.FST)
Save a SURFCAM DSN file
as a Ford Standard Tape
format file.
See Save
As > Write menu, page 378.
Convert DSN to FST dialog
box.
System Code
FST files contain information about the origin of the file. Ford only supports
CDC-Lundy, CV, and Gerber. Changing this may affect the receiving systems
input options.
Tolerance
FST does not support NURBs. They are approximated with lines in the
conversion. This parameter specifies the tolerance when doing this.
9. IGS Files (*.IGS)
Save a SURFCAM
design file as an IGES
file.
See
Save As > Write menu,
page 378.
SURFCAM will display
the Convert DSN to
IGES dialog box.
With the Precision parameter you can specify the number of digits to write after the
decimal point when dealing with non-integer numbers. The default is 12.
The text in a DSN file can be output to an IGES file. TrueType fonts will be output
as StrokeFont. If you later open the IGES file as DSN, you can edit the text to
return it to its original fonts.
382
Text along curves can be output to an IGES file. Since IGES does not support text
along curves, such text will be output as individual letters. The text will maintain its
appearance along the curve, however.
JAMA-ID Translator
The JAMA-ID translator is a Japanese subset of I.G.E.S. The I.G.E.S.
translator within SURFCAM automatically detects this type of I.G.E.S. format
and interprets it accordingly. There is no user intervention in importing a JAMAID I.G.E.S. file.
When exporting an I.G.E.S. file there is a new standard to support the JAMAID format. The following represents the additional standard listed in the
DSN2IGS translator.
Start Section
JAMA-ID requires metric units so units of DSN2IGS file and all other
tolerance numbers must be in metric units.
DraftStd
0 -- No standard
1 -- ISO
2 -- AFNOR
3 -- ANSI
4 -- BSI
5 -- CSA
6 -- DIN
7 -- JIS
10. Parasolid (*.X_T, *.X_B)

Save a SURFCAM design file as a Parasolid file.
After you click a command on the Save As > Write menu,
SURFCAM will display the Utility Output dialog box informing you that the
translation was successful.
11. SAT Files (*.SAT)

Save a SURFCAM DSN file in SAT format.
See Save As > Write menu, page 378
After you click a command on the Save As > Write menu,
SURFCAM will display the Utility Output dialog box informing you that the
translation was successful.
12. STL Files (*.STL)
Save a SURFCAM DSN file in STL format.
SURFCAM will display the Convert DSN to STL dialog box.
383
384
Part Name
The name given here will be embedded within the file. STL machines
commonly see this name in the control.
STL File type
Change output file to Binary or to ASCII format.
Precision
This parameter refers to the precision of the data and is available for ASCII
format.
Surface tolerance
The tolerance between the real surface and the poly face.
Sampling curves
Indicate the number of sampling curves when converting surface to poly face.
13. VDA Files (*.VDA)
Save a SURFCAM DSN file as a German Automotive VDA format file. This
conversion will support trimmed surface output. Rational surfaces or curves
created in SURFCAM will be approximated with non-rational surfaces or curves in
the output file.
385

Convert DSN to VDA dialog
box.
Enter the first line number in the
output VDA file, the amount to
increment the line number and
the precision.
The Fitting Tolerance is the
tolerance used in approximating
a NURB surface with a NonRational B-spline surface.
14. DWG (*.DWG)
Save a SURFCAM DSN file as an AutoCAD format file. The translator supports
translation of AutoCAD Standard Drawing Entities including Dimensions and Text,
as well as PolyLines.
7.5.5
Send To
Send File to Mail Recipient
386
Mail Recipient
Email the DSN and ICD files, as well as a file which contains pertinent information
about your SURFCAM systemthe SystemInfo.Dat file.
Clipboard
Copy the screen contents to the Clipboard.
7.5.6
Print
Click Print to print or plot the image in the workspace.
Device Information
This lists the current default device to which the system will print or plot. The
default device can be changed by clicking the Printer button.
Screen Bitmap
This changes the information being sent to the device to a raster format and is
most applicable for printer drivers. If the device will not support this format, this
option will not be available. If you click Screen Bitmap, the Bitmap Options and the
White Background option will become available.
Bitmap Options
Select whether the printed image will be in Gray Scale (shades of gray) or color.
387
White Background
The background of the screen you are printing will be white if this box is
marked.
Entity Plot
This changes the information being sent to the device to a vector format and is
most applicable for plotter drivers although many printers will also support this
format. If the device will not support this format, it will not be available. If you click
Entity Plot, the Plot Options and the Swap White Pen options will become
available.
Plot Options / Line Width
Enlarge or reduce the thickness of the geometry. This is particularly helpful
when the screen resolution is high, for example 1280 X 1024. This field will not
be available if the Screen Bitmap is chosen.
Swap White Pen
If this box is marked, the color of an element drawn in white will be changed to
black when it is printed or plotted.
Scale
If the Scale to Fit Paper box is marked, the printed image is enlarged or reduced
to fit within the margins of the paper. If it is not marked, the field to the right will be
available for you to enter the scale at which the plotting will be done.
Draw Borders
If this box is marked, a border will be drawn around the edge of the paper.
OK
This will send the current image to the device.
Cancel
Exit the print feature. Changes you made will be ignored.
Printer
Display the second Print dialog box which is a standard Windows Print dialog
box.
Since there is only a single page to print, you have only the option to print All.
7.5.7
Print Setup
Print Setup is a standard Windows command.
388
7.5.8
Plot
Click Plot to create a 2D DXF file from a 3D

drawing or output a variety of pen plotter files.
Flat DXF
Create a DXF file that can be read into any
CAD system that accepts DXF information.
SURFCAM will output the image on the
screen into a 2D file that can be sent to a 2D
or 3D CAD program. When the data is read
in, it will appear on the screen exactly the
same way it appeared in SURFCAM when
the file was made even though the data itself
is not 3D data. The data file created will be
in the 2D plane only. In order to achieve this,
SURFCAM breaks the projected image into
2D lines in the current view. This creates
files with only lines in them.
Plot menu
Plot
Output a pen plotter file. The output file type is determined by the Plotter parameter
set in the SURFCAM.INI file. The plot file created will be written to the PLTPath
folder defined in the appropriate configuration file. The default is the SURFCAM\
PLT folder. The output file uses the default PLT extension.
When you click Plot, the current screen drawing will be output in the specified file
type. The drawing size is determined by the configuration file Plotter parameter.
The current screen image will be fit to the plotter drawing size.
The following are the supported pen plotter file types: HPGL, DMPL, CALCOMP,
BGL, HPGL2.
Plotter Options dialog box

Click File > Plot > Plot and enter a name in the Save As dialog box to display this dialog box.
389
Number Of Pens
The number of pens that the desired plotter uses. The default is 1.
Paper Size
Select any standard size from the following list. Click the arrow to see the letters
which correspond with the paper sizes.
INCHES
MILLIMETERS
8.5 by 11
a6
105 by 148
11 by 17
a5
148 by 210
17 by 22
a4
210 by 297
22 by 34
a3
297 by 420
34 by 44
a2
420 by 594
a1
584 by 841
a0
841 by 1189
Paper Sizes
Plotter Tolerance
The tolerance used by the plotter to maintain the drawing sizes. The tolerances
are in metric for millimeter sizes.
After you select the Plotter Options, SURFCAM will display a Select menu for you to
choose entities.
Plot > Select menu
Select
Select specific entities. SURFCAM will display the Select menu for your input.
On Screen
Select all entities displayed on the current screen.
Done
Click Done when all entities have been selected.
7.6
SPECIAL DESIGN PROGRAMS
SURFCAM has three special programs to help you design gears, involute curves or
cams.
To create a design for one of these items you must open a special file for that item.
When you open the file the special program will run.
390
7.6.1
Gear Data Files (*.gr)
To design a gear you will open a gear data file called default.gr. SURFCAM will
display the Gear dialog box. This dialog box is the user interface for a gear design
utility that enables you to create designs of spur and internal ring gears. To create a
new gear design, open an existing Gear (.gr) file, such as default.gr in the SURFCAM\
DSN folder.
Gear File
The name of the file you opened will be displayed. Save the file with the same
name or use Save As to save the file with a new name.
Gear Type
Choose either Internal or External.
391
Number of Teeth
Indicate the number of teeth on the gear.
Pitch Diameter
This is the pitch circle diameter. Engaged gears have pitch circles that are tangent
at a point on their connecting center line. This diameter can have no tolerance.
Pitch Diameter
Tip Diameter
This is the diameter of the circle that defines the tips or top lands of the teeth.
Tip Diameter
Root Diameter
This is the diameter of the circle that defines the bottoms or root lands of the teeth.
Root Diameter
392
Outer Diameter
This is the outside diameter of an internal ring gear. All tooth elements lie inside
this circle. A tolerance on this diameter should always be negative.
Outer Diameter
Tooth Thickness
The Tooth Thickness is the width of the tooth measured at the Pitch Diameterat
the intersection with the pitch circle.
Pitch Circle
Tooth Thickness
Pressure Angle
The contact between a driving tooth on one gear and a driven tooth on the other
gear occurs along a line called the Pressure Line. The Pressure Angle is the angle
between the Pressure Line and a line tangent to the two Pitch Circles at their point
of intersection.
The actual tooth contact occurs along a segment called the Line of Action. Contact
pressure starts when the tip of the driven tooth first touches the flank of the driving
tooth.
393
Contact pressure stops just after the tip of the driving tooth first touches the flank
of the driven tooth.
Line of Action
Tangent
Pressure Angle
Pressure Line
Pressure Angle, Pressure Line,

Line of Action and the Tangent to the two Pitch Circles
Base Fillet Radius

This is the radius of the fillet at the base of the tooth.
Base Fillet Radius
Sample of Base Fillet Radius
Top Fillet Radius

This is the radius of the fillet between the top and the flank of the tooth. It must be
less than half the top width.
Top Fillet Radius
Sample of Top Fillet Radius
Backlash
Backlash is the amount by which a tooth space exceeds the Tooth Thickness of
the engaging gear at the pitch diameter.
394
Make the Whole Gear

The DSN file will have the entire gear instead of a single tooth.
Provide gear measurement information
This box must be checked if you want to input information in the following boxes.
Type of Measurement
Pin/Ball Measurement
Input the pin diameter. SURFCAM will calculate the diameter to the outer
tangency of the pins for external gears. SURFCAM will calculate the diameter
between the internal tangency of the pins for internal gears.
Chordal Measurement
You must input the number of teeth to be included in the chordal measurement.
SURFCAM will calculate the distance as measured by calipering across the
specified number of teeth.
7.6.2
Involute Data Files (*.inv)
To design an involute curve you will open an involute data file called default.inv.
SURFCAM will display the Involute dialog box. This dialog box is the user interface
for a design utility used to create involute curves. Involute curves are often used to
design the flank of a gear tooth.
395
Involute File
The name of the DSN file containing the involute profile will be displayed. Save the
file with the same name or use Save As to save the file with a new name.
Start Radius
The radius at which the curve begins.
Start Angle
The angle at which the curve begins.
Wrap Angle
The angle used to define the length of the curve.
Direction
Specify CW for clockwise, CCW for counterclockwise.
Center
The three values here define the center of the arc used to begin the curve.
396
7.6.3
CAM Profile Data Files (*.cm)
To design a cam you will open a cam profile data file called default.cm. SURFCAM
will display the Create CAM Profiles dialog box. This dialog box is the user interface
for a cam design utility that enables you to create, analyze and modify the design of
a disk or plate type cam used in conjunction with a roller type follower. To create
a new cam design, open an existing CAM (.cm) file and modify it.
The components of the cam profile design are listed in the CAM Profile Information
box. The Add, Modify, Delete, and Delete All buttons are used to modify the contents
of this list. Other features of the cam and its follower are entered in the other data
boxes. The Advanced button displays another dialog box that enables further
refinement to your cam design.
When you click OK, a cam design (.cm) file will be saved and a SURFCAM design,
showing the profile of the cam, will be displayed on the screen. The design can then
be saved as a DSN file.
397
CAM Data File

The name of the CAM data file will be displayed.
Save
Save the file with the same name.
Save As
Save the file with a new name.
CAM Profile information
A cam profile is a closed contour that consists of two or more sections or profile
zones. A profile zone is a geometric shape that transmits a unique type of motion
to a roller follower. The start point of each profile zone is identified with an angular
measurement (Angle) in degrees. A value (Lift) that represents the displacement
or lift of the follower, away from the center of the cam, is associated with the start
point of each zone. The geometric shape of a profile zone is mathematically
determined by one of 18 types of motion (Motion Type) that can be assigned to it
in SURFCAM.
The CAM Profile Information box displays one line for each profile zone in the cam
profile. Each line contains the values for the Angle, Lift, and Motion Type
associated with a profile zone. Those values can be edited using the Modify
button. Values for a new profile zone can be added to the list using the Add button.
More detailed descriptions of Angle (Angle at start), Lift (Lift at Start), and Motion
Type are found in the description of the Add and Modify buttons.
Base Radius
This is the radius of the cam base circle, which is the smallest circle (with center
at the center of the cam shaft) that can be drawn tangent to the cam profile. At a
given point on the cam profile, the distance of that point from the cam shaft center
is the Base radius plus the Lift (or displacement) at that point. The value of the
Base radius is used to determine the geometry of the cam profile and the velocity
and acceleration of the follower.
Follower radius
Roller type followers are circular in shape and thus have a radius. The Follower
radius is used to calculate the velocity and acceleration of the follower. The CAM
profile will be offset by this amount.
RPM
RPM is the revolutions per minute of the cam shaft. It is used to calculate the
velocity and acceleration of the follower.
Theta Scale
The SURFCAM cam design utility generates graphs of the displacement, velocity
and acceleration of the follower, in addition to creating the design of the cam
profile.
398
When the DSN file containing the cam profile is generated, there are three
additional layers generated to display these three graphs.
The Theta Scale is the scale for the horizontal axis of the graphs saved in the DSN
file.
The default status of the layers containing the graphs is invisible. These layers can
be made visible from the SURFCAM Layers dialog box accessed by clicking layers
on the Status menu. See The Layers Dialog Box, page 153.
Add/Modify
Click the Add button to create a new profile zone in the cam profile and display its
attributes in the CAM Profile Information box.
To edit an existing profile zone, click it and click the Modify button.
In both cases SURFCAM will display the Zone Start Point Info dialog box.
Angle at start
This is the angle (in degrees) that indicates the location of the start of the profile
zone. This angle is in standard position with its vertex the center of the cam
shaft.
Lift at Start
This is the displacement of the follower, beyond the cam base circle, that will
exist at the start point of the profile zone. The cam base circle is the smallest
circle (with center at the cam shaft center) that can be drawn tangent to the cam
profile. Lift plus Base radius equals the distance from the cam shaft center to
the cam profile at the start point of a profile zone.
Motion Type
There are 18 types of motion that can be assigned to a profile zone by the
SURFCAM cam design utility. These are Dwell, Linear, Simple Harmonic
Motion, general Cycloidal, Parabolic, Cubic, 6 special cycloidal types, and 6
special harmonic types.
399
. If you are undecided as to what type of motion to use for a

particular profile zone, it is often useful to select the Linear type.
Although Linear motion is usually not an acceptable type of motion,
especially for moderate to high velocity cam applications, the cam design
utility can automatically analyze a Linear type motion and turn it into one of
the other more complex motion types. This is done using the Auto button on
the Cam Pre-Process dialog box which is accessed by clicking the
Advanced button.
Delete/Delete All
Click a profile zone in the CAM Profile Information box and click Delete to delete
an individual line.
To delete all profile zones in the box, click Delete All.
Advanced
Click the Advanced button to display the Cam Pre-Process dialog box that is used
to analyze the displacement, velocity, and acceleration of the follower and to
automatically modify the Motion Type of zone profiles that have been set to Linear
motion.
Click the Auto button to modify the linear motion of a profile zone.
400
Cam Pre-process dialog box
Report Window
The Report Window is used to display a Profile Zone Report and a Profile Zone
Graphs report.
Profile Zone Report
Click the Report button to display a report on the characteristics of
each profile zone.
Point
This is the start point of a profile zone.
Angle
This is the angle measurement of the start point of the profile zone.
Type
This is the motion type the profile zone imparts on the follower.
Roller path, Velocity, Profile, and Acceleration continue
These indicate whether or not there is continuity with the corresponding
preceding zone.
Profile Zone Graphs / Motion Graph Windows

Click one of the buttons to display a graphical representation
of the corresponding profile zone and motion window.
Profile Zone Graphs
Graph of six profile zones
Motion Graph Windows
Velocity
Displacement
401
402
Acceleration
Motion Mode
A motion mode is a particular combination of the general motion types of rise,
fall, dwell, linear rise and linear fall. You will select one of them before you use
the Auto button to modify the current linear motions in the cam profile.
Rise-(Dwell)-Fall
This is the most common motion mode. It includes the following modes:
Rise-Dwell-Fall,
Rise-Fall,
Rise-Fall-Dwell,
Rise-Dwell-Fall-Dwell.
Rise-(Linear Rise)-Rise-Fall-(Linear Fall)-Fall
In some instances a required displacement profile will be other than the
Rise-Dwell-Fall. This type of motion mode is for those users who have
special requirements. It includes the following modes:
Rise-Linear Rise-Rise-Fall-Linear Fall-Fall,
Rise-Linear Rise-Rise-Dwell-Fall-Linear Fall-Fall,
Rise-Linear Rise-Rise-Dwell-Fall Linear Fall-Fall-Dwell,
Rise-Rise-Fall-Linear Fall-Fall,
Rise-Linear Rise-Rise-Fall-Fall,
Rise-Rise-Dwell-Fall-Fall-Dwell.
403
Rise-(Linear Rise)-Rise-(Dwell)-Fall
This includes the following motion modes:
Rise-Rise-Fall, Rise-Linear Rise-Rise-Fall,
Rise-Linear Rise-Rise-Dwell-Fall,
Rise-Linear Rise-Rise-Fall,
Rise-Linear Rise-Rise-Dwell-Fall-Dwell.
Auto process method
The process to be used when the Auto button is clicked to make modifications
to the existing linear motion type in the cam profile.
Replace
When you click the Auto button on the toolbar, the design utility will try to
replace the linear segments with some type of motion segment; Harmonic
H1-H6 type or Cycloidal C1-C6 type. The cam profile will retain the same
number of profile zones.
Replace and Add
Use when you want to keep the linear motion characteristics. The design
utility will try to replace each linear segment with three other segments. The
middle segment of these three will be a linear segment. The first and third
will be of the Cycloidal (1-6) or Harmonic (1-6) type of motion.
Keep parameters
If you select the Replace and Add Auto process method, you need to decide
which parameter will be used to control the linear range. For example, if you
choose Angle, the design utility will try to find a solution which will keep the
selected percent of the linear rotation angle region. If you select Displacement
the design utility will try to find a solution which will keep the selected percent
of the linear displacement region.
Linear Ratio
With this scale you can control the percentage of the original linear motion
region that will be kept.
When you finish with the cam design utility and close the dialog box, the modified cam
design will be displayed on the screen. You can then save this design as a DSN file
and produce toolpaths to cut the cam contour.
404
CHAPTER 8 EDIT THE DESIGNS

8.1
COLOR
Change the color of one or more elements using the standard Select menu commands
Single, Within, Intersect, Visible, and MultSelOn/Off.
Click Color to display a 16-color selection bar. Click a color and SURFCAM will display
the Select menu. Select the element(s) whose color is to be changed. SURFCAM
changes the color of the element(s).
Note
If the MultSelOn/Off command in the Select menu is set to Off, when you select
an element its color will be changed immediately. You can continue selecting
elements one at a time to change them to the same color.
If the MultSelOn/Off command is set to On, you can select a number of
elements which will be highlighted when they are selected. To change the color
of these elements, click Done.
To choose a different color for more changes, click Back.
406
8.2
FLIP ELEMENT
Create the complement of an existing arc or vector. For an arc, the portion of the circle
that is not currently displayed will be displayed. For a vector, the vector arrow is flipped
so that it points in the opposite direction.
The Original Element
8.3
The Flip Element
TRIM/BREAK
Use the Edit >Trim/Break menu to perform trim and break operations on lines, splines,
arcs, and surfaces.
Click Trim 1 to change it to Trim 2. Click Break 1 to change it to Break 2. Trim 1 and Break
1 are used to trim or break the first element selected; Trim 2 and Break 2 are used to trim
or break both the elements that are selected.
If either Trim 1 or Trim 2 is selected, the Keep Segment, Delete Segment, and AutoTrim
commands will be displayed.
If either Break 1 or Break 2 is selected, the Multiple and AutoBreak commands will be
displayed.
The Keep Segment, Delete Segment, Multiple, AutoTrim, and AutoBreak commands are
used to perform multiple trims and breaks.
407
Trim/Break operations occur at boundaries lying on elements or their extensions. A

boundary occurs at the intersection of two elements (or their extensions). If elements or
their extensions do not intersect, boundaries can occur at or along the projection of one
element onto another. Projections are always made in the current CView.
8.3.1
Trim/Break Definitions
The Trim operation can either delete a part of an element lying on one side of a trim
boundary or extend the element from an end point to its intersection with a trim
boundary. The Break operation splits or divides an element into two separate
elements at or along a break boundary. A trim/break boundary on one element is
defined by a second element. The first element (the trim/break element) is said to
trim to or break to the second element (the trim/break to element).
8.3.2
Trim/Break Boundaries
Trim/break boundaries for lines, splines and arcs occur at intersections of these
elementsor their extensionsand other lines, splines and arcsor their
extensions.
Trim/break boundaries for surfaces can occur 1) at the intersection of two surfaces or
2) along the projection of an element (line, spline or arc) and its extensions onto the
surface.
8.3.3
Extensions of elements
Line segments, splines and arcs (but not surfaces or points) are often extended to
create trim/break boundaries. There are four types of extension:
1.
Segments are extended along the line on which they lie.
2.
Splines are extended by lines drawn tangent to the spline at its end points.
3.
An arcassociated with a line, a spline or another arc in a trim/breakis

extended along the circle on which it lies.
4.
An arcto be projected onto a surfaceis extended by lines drawn tangent to

its end points.
408
Spline and Spline extended

along tangent lines
Arc and Arc extended

along its circle
Arc and Arc extended

by tangent lines
8.3.4
Projection of an element
All elements, other than surfaces, can be projected onto another element to create a
trim/break boundary. The direction of a projection is usually perpendicular to the
current CView XY planeparallel to the CView Z axis.
Changing the CView can give you a different projection and, thus, a different trim/
break boundary. When the CView is set to zero, however, trim/break projections will
be perpendicular to the current view plane (that is, the screen).
Projections are always bidirectionaltoward and away from the projection plane
(CView or View). Thus an element can be projected onto another regardless of
whether it is above or below it in space.
409
When trim/break operations are applied to surfaces, the user can elect to have
projections made normal to the surface.
Circle above surface
Circle projected from 3 CViews
8.3.5
Trim/Break lines, splines, and arcs
When you Trim a line, a spline, or an arc to a second line, spline, or arc, both the
elements and their extensions are first projected onto the CView XY plane. With
Break, the Break element is projected without its extensions. The intersect points of
these projected images are then projected back to the Trim/Break element to become
the potential trim/break boundaries. If the images do not intersect, no Trim/Break will
occur.
To perform a Trim/Break on lines, splines or arcs:
1.
Click Trim/Break 1 or 2. You will be prompted to Select first element to trim/

break.
2.
Select the first element.
410
If Trim/Break 1 is displayed, the element you select will have the trim/break
performed on it. You will then be prompted to Select element to trim/break to
or location.
If Trim/Break 2 is displayed, trim/break will be performed on the element you
just selected and the next one selected. You will then be prompted to Select
second element to trim/break or location.
3.
Select an element. Trim/break will be performed on the first or both elements.

If either Trim 1 or Trim 2 is displayed, the Other, Reverse, and Undo commands
will be displayed on the Trim/Break menu.
A. Click Other to display all the trimming possibilities.
B. Click Reverse and you will be prompted to Select an element to reverse the
trim. Choose one of the elements just trimmed. SURFCAM restores that
element to its original state and trims it from the other end.
C. Click Undo to undo the trim operations.
If either Break 1 or 2 is displayed, break will be performed on one or both
elements. The Undo command will be displayed on the Trim/Break menu.
Click Undo to undo the break operations. Note that often you must Edit > Color
to see where the elements have been broken.
4.
Break with Multiple:

A. To break elements at their intersections with a multiple number of other
elements, click either Break 1 or Break 2.
B. Click Multiple to display the Select menu and the prompt Select elements
to break to.
C. Select one or more elements to break to and click Done.
D. You will then be prompted to Select element to be broken:
E. Select one or more elements to be broken and click Done.
F. The elements that you just selected will be broken at the locations where
they intersect with the elements you previously selected as the break to
elements.
See Trim/Break lines, splines, and arcs to a location, page 411 for the Location
command description.
8.3.6
411
Trim/Break lines, splines, and arcs to a location
When you Trim/Break a line, a spline, or an arc to a location or point, the point is first
projected onto the CView XY plane. If you are trim/breaking an arc, its center is also
projected. Then the Trim elementwith its extensionsis projected, or the Break
elementwithout its extensionsis projected.
For lines
If a perpendicular can be drawn from the image of the point to the image of the
lineor its extensions if you are trimmingthe intersect point is projected back to
the original lineor its extension if trimmingto become its trim/break point.
For a spline
If one or more perpendiculars can be drawn from the image of the point to the
image of the splineor its extensions if trimmingthe intersect point of the
shortest perpendicular is projected back to the splineor its extension if
trimmingas its trim/break point.
For an arc
A line is drawn through the image of the point and the image of the center of the
arc. The intersect points of this line with the image of the arcor its extensions if
trimmingare projected back to the original arcor extensionsto become the
possible trim/break points on the arc.
When breaking an arc, the intersect point nearest the break to point or location is
the break point. If an intersection described above cannot take place, there will be no
trim/ break operation in that instance.
1.
Click Trim/Break 1 or 2. Follow instructions 1 and 2 from the Trim/Break

lines, splines, and arcs, page 409.
2.
Select the location (the point) to trim/break to. To do this, click Location on the
Trim/Break menu to display the Select Point menu.
Select Point menu
3.
Use the commands on this menu to select the point to trim/break to.
412
8.3.7
Trim/Break a surface to a line, a spline, a surface edge or an arc
Note
To supplement the following information, see the Surface Trimming Rules

Help screen in the SURFCAM Help File.
When you Trim or Break a surface to a selected line, spline (including a surface
edge), or arc, the element is projected perpendicular to the CView XY plane. If the
image of that projection falls on the surface, that image becomes the trim/break
boundary.
If this boundary is not a closed contour or does not intersect the surface edges at two
locations, the ends of the boundary will be extended by one of three methods.
1.
The end points of the boundary may be connected to form a closed boundary.
2.
The end points may be extended until they intersect an edge of the surface.
3.
Splines may be drawn from the boundary end pointsparallel to the surface
flow linesto the edges of the surface.
The method used will be the one that results in the shortest single extension from any
one of the boundary ends.
3 open contour boundaries

not intersecting surface edges
1.
3 extension methods
and resulting surface breaks
Click Trim/Break 1 or 2. (Trim/Break 2 will not trim/break the second element if

it is a line, a spline, or an arc.) You will be prompted to Select first element to
trim/break.
2.
413
Select the surface to trim/break. When a surface is selected for a trim/break

operation, SURFCAM will display the Edit > Trim/Break > Surface menu with
the Element command displayed.
Element
Select a single point (if marked by SURFCAM as a point), line, spline or arc
to trim/break the surface to. (When you trim or break a surface to a second
surface you will use Element to select a second non-tangent surface.)
Location
Used to trim/break the surface to a location. See the Trim/Break lines,
splines, and arcs to a location, page 411.
Multiple
Chain a number of separate elements together to create an entity to trim/
break the surface to. SURFCAM will display the Select menu and you will
be prompted to Select contour(s) to be chained, then Done.
Surface Edge
Used to select the edge of a second surface as the trim/break element when
trimming or breaking the previously selected surface. (When you trim or
break a surface to a second surface that is tangent to the first, you will use
Surface Edge to select the tangent edge of the second surface.)
Options
Change the projection from perpendicular to the CView XY plane to normal
to the surface.
3.
Click the Options command to select the type of projection to be used for the
line, spline, or arc. SURFCAM will display the Trim Options dialog box.
The default projection is perpendicular to the CView XY plane. If you want to

project the element normal to the surface, Set the Project Spline Direction
parameter to Normal and click OK.
414
4.
If Trim/Break 1 was displayed, you will be prompted to Select element to trim/

break to or location. If Trim/Break 2 was displayed, you will be prompted to
Select second element to trim/break or location.
Use either the Element command or the Multiple command to select the
element(s) to trim/break to. After you select one or more element(s), the trim/
break operation will be performed on the surface. SURFCAM will display the
Undo command on the Trim/Break menu for you to undo the operation, if you
choose.
8.3.8
Trim/Break a surface to another surface
Note
To supplement the following information, see the Surface Trimming Rules

Help screen in the SURFCAM Help File.
When you Trim or Break a surface to another surface, the two must intersect. The
trim/break boundary will be the intersection of the two surfaces.
If this boundary is not a closed contour or does not intersect the surface edges at two
locations, the ends of the boundary will be extended by one of three methods.
1.
The end points of the boundary may be connected to form a closed boundary.
2.
The end points may be extended until they intersect an edge of the surface.
3.
Splines may be drawn from the boundary end points, parallel to the surface flow
lines, to the edges of the surface.
The method used will be the one that results in the shortest single extension from any
one of the boundary ends. See the drawings following Trim/Break a surface to a line,
a spline, a surface edge or an arc, page 412.
1.
Click Trim/Break 1 or 2. (Trim/Break 2 will also trim/break the second surface

selected.) You will be prompted to Select first element to trim/break.
2.
Read instructions 2 and 3 in the preceding Trim/Break a surface to a line, a

spline, a surface edge or an arc, page 412.
3.
Select the second surface. The Location and Multiple commands cannot be
used to select the second surface.
If the two surfaces are not tangent at their intersection, you will use the Element
command to select the second surface.
If the two surfaces are tangent at their intersection and a surface edge of the
second surface lies on that intersection, select the second surface by using the
Surface Edge command to select the tangent surface edge. After you select the
second surface, or the surface edge of the second surface, the trim/break will
occur on the first surface or both. SURFCAM will display the Undo command
on the Trim/Break menu for you to undo the operation, if you choose.
8.3.9
415
Trim/Break a surface to a location
When you Trim or Break a surface to a point (or location), the point is either:
1.
projected toward or away from the CView XY plane or
2.
projected along the shortest normal to the surface.
If the image of the projected point falls on the surface, the trim/break boundary will be
a spline through the image pointintersecting two edges of the surface and parallel
to either the major flow lines of the surface or the minor ones. You will choose, in a
dialog box, the method of projection and the direction of the flow lines.
1.
Click Trim/Break 1 or 2. (Trim/Break 2 will operate the same as Trim/Break 1

when you trim/break a surface to a location.) You will be prompted to Select
first element to trim/break.
2.
Read instructions 2 and 3 in the preceding Trim/Break a surface to a line, a

spline, a surface edge or an arc, page 412.
3.
Select the location (the point). To do this, click Location on the Trim/Break
menu to display the Select Point menu. Use the commands on this menu to
select the point to trim/break to.
When you select the point, SURFCAM will display the Trim/Break Surface
dialog box.
4.
Select the Trim/Break Direction (Major or Minor). The trim/break boundary can
be made parallel to either the major or minor flow lines of the surface.
5.
Select the Project Direction (CView or Normal) and click OK.
6.
The trim/break to a location will be executed. There is no undo command

available. To undo the trim or break, use the Untrim command on the Edit >
Surfaces menu.
416
8.3.10
Trimming with Keep Segment and Delete Segment
The Keep Segment and Delete Segment commands on the Edit >Trim/Break menu
provide you with two efficient methods of performing multiple trims on lines, splines
and arcs. These two commands were created for situations in which you have
multiple elements to trim and multiple elements to which they will be trimmed. With
these commands you are able to select a number of possible trim to elements at one
time. Thenwithout having to re-select the Trim command each timeyou can trim,
one by one, other elements to various combinations of the previously selected trim
to elements. You can use the Undo command to undo the previous trim. You can
also undo, sequentially, any number of the previous trims by repeated use of the
Undo command.
The Keep Segment and Delete Segment commands differ in the way the trim is
performed. With Keep Segment, the part of the element that is selected is the part that
is retained. With Delete Segment, the part of the element that is selected is the part
that is deleted.
Keep Segment
Use Keep Segment to select the part of an element to be retained when that
element is trimmed.
To trim multiple elements to one or more elements consecutively and retain the
part of the elements that are selected:
1.
Use commands on the Select menu to select any number of elements that
other elements will be trimmed to. When finished, click Done. You will be
prompted to Select the element(s) to be trimmed.
2.
Select the first element to trim. The part of the element you selectup to a
single trim to element or between two trim to elementswill be the part
that is retained. The Undo command can be used to undo that trim and,
sequentially, any number of previous trims, if you choose. If you select
another element or click Done, the trim will be kept. Continue selecting the
elements you want to trim, one by one. When you are finished click Done.
Before trimming
417
After trimming with Keep Segment
Multiple elements trimmed away from other elements
In the above example the two horizontal lines were selected as the elements
to trim to. The three vertical lines to the left were trimmed. The first, on the
left, was selected at a point above the top horizontal line. The second was
selected at a point between the two lines. The third was selected below the
bottom line. Note that the part of each element that was selected is the part
that was retained.
Delete Segment
Use Delete Segment to select the part of an element to be deleted when that
element is trimmed.
To trim multiple elements to one or more elements consecutively and delete the
part of the elements that are selected:
1.
Click Delete Segment. SURFCAM will display the Select menu and you will
be prompted to Select element(s) to trim to.
2.
Use commands on the Select menu to select any number of elements that
other elements will be trimmed to. When finished, click Done. You will be
prompted to Select the element(s) to be trimmed.
3.
Select the first element to trim. The part of the element you selectup to a
single trim to element or between two trim to elementswill be the part
that is deleted. The Undo command can be used to undo that trim and,
sequentially, any number of previous trims if you choose. If you select
another element or click Done, the trim will be kept. Continue selecting the
elements you want to trim, one by one. When you are finished, click Done.
418
Before trimming
After trimming with Delete Segment
Multiple elements trimmed away from within other elements
In the above example the two horizontal lines were selected as the elements
to trim to. The three vertical lines to the left were trimmed. The first the left
was selected at a point above the top horizontal line. The second was
selected at a point between the two lines. The third was selected below the
bottom line. Note that the part of each element that was selected is the part
that was deleted.
8.3.11
Trimming with AutoTrim
AutoTrim is a quick and efficient method of trimming a single element up to its

intersections with two other elements. AutoTrim is used to delete or keep a section of
an entity between an end point and its intersection with another element or between
two intersections with one or two other elements.
Click the Trim 1 or Trim 2 button to activate the Auto Trim button.
AutoTrim
Click the AutoTrim button to put SURFCAM in the AutoTrim mode.

If the Delete Segment button is active, a click on a segment of an entity will delete that
segment.
419
After AutoTrim with Delete Segment

Before trimming
AutoTrim to delete segments with a single click
To trim by keeping the segments that are clicked, click the Delete Segment button to
toggle it to the Keep Segment button.
Keep Segment and Delete Segment are toggle buttons when AutoTrim is active.
Now when you click a segment of an element it will be retained while the rest of the
element beyond its intersection with two other elements will be deleted.
Before trimming
After AutoTrim with Keep Segment
Multiple elements trimmed away from other elements
420
8.3.12
Breaking with Auto Break
Click the Break 1 or Break 2 button to change the AutoTrim button to the AutoBreak
button. Then click the AutoBreak button to put SURFCAM into the AutoBreak mode.
AutoBreak
In the AutoBreak mode any element you select will be broken at every one of its points
of intersection with all other elements.
In the drawing, a single click on the spline will create break points at the two
intersections with the circle and the five intersections with the line. Thus the spline will
become eight separate entities.
A Spline Broken into 8 Entities by AutoBreak
8.4
INCREMENT
Use the Increment command to specify locations at even increments along an element.
Click Edit > Increment and select an element.
Number Of Sections
This defines the number of sections into which the element will be broken.
421
Break Original Element

Check to break the original entity into separate entities. Leave unchecked to maintain
it as a single element.
Points At Breaks
Create points at the break locations. These points will be created whether the element
is broken or not.
Chords Between Breaks
When an arc, a circle, or a spline is incremented, you can create chord lines between
the break locations.
8.5
SPLINES
Click Splines on the Edit menu to display the Spline menu which is used to edit or modify
splines. Long time users of SURFCAM can encounter two kinds of splines they may need
to edit. Starting with version 6.1 splines created in SURFCAM have been exclusively
NURB splines. Prior to version 6.1 both NURB and parametric splines could be created.
A parametric spline is a smooth curve through a series of points in space. The points
through which a spline was originally drawn are called nodes. When a parametric spline
was created each node was assigned a tangent vector by a blending function built into
SURFCAM. Each vector had a direction defined by X, Y and Z coordinates and a
magnitude. The combination of direction and magnitude of the tangent vectors for all the
nodes defined the parametric spline.
A NURB spline is a smooth curve that is defined by a series of points through which,
except for the first and the last points, the curve does not pass. These points are called
control points. The spline itself is composed of a set of spans defined by equations.
Spans are connected by transition points called knots. The complexity of the span
equations is controlled by a number called the degree. The control points, the type of
knots and the degree combine to define a NURB spline.
The Node/Tangent Vector command on the Spline menu is used to modify parametric
splines only. To modify NURB splines you must use the Control Points command on the
Edit menu. The Optimize and Untrim commands are used with both NURB and
parametric splines and the Polygon and Explode commands are used with NURB splines
only.
422
Click Edit > Splines to display menu.
Node/Tangent Vector
Click Node/Tangent Vector to display the Edit > Splines > Node menu so you can
modify the node and tangent vector information for parametric splines.
Analyze
Click Analyze and select a parametric spline to display a window that indicates the
location and tangent vector information.
Press any key or click the mouse to erase the window.
Move Node
Move a node to another location. Moving the node has no affect on the tangent
vector.
The spline as created
The spline with the topmost node moved to the left of its original location
Tangent Vector
Change the direction of a tangent vector by indicating a new location for the
tangent vector to point towards.
Note
This does not change the magnitude of the tangent vector, only its
direction.
A spline as it was created through the node points
423
424
The spline with one of the tangent vectors edited

so that it runs towards a point to the right of the spline.
Note
Unless the direction the spline is running is known, there is a 50% chance
that the effect of the editing may not make the spline take the desired
shape. This is because splines run in only one direction, from one end to
the other. If the spline was running in the direction other than the one
assumed, the editing may have changed the direction of the tangent
vector by more than 90, and an unexpected loop or curve may have
appeared.
To correct this, simply reverse the magnitude of the tangent vector edited.
In other words, if the magnitude is .76 make it -.76. This can be done by
using the Magnitude command.
This can be avoided by using the Line Tangent command on this menu to
display the vectors that indicate the spline direction.
425
Line Tangent
Create a line that represents the tangent vector at the spline node selected. The
length of the line created will be equal to the magnitude of the tangent vector.
The spline as created
The spline with tangent vectors displayed at each interior node
Splines can be thought of as having a directional quality that is indicated by the

direction of their tangent vectors.
Note
This command can be used for extending a spline. Lines can be created
tangent at either end, then trimmedusing the Edit/Trim commandto
the desired length. The line at the end, pointing along the spline will have
to be trimmed twicethe first time to extend the line past the end of the
426
spline, and the second time to trim the other end of the new line to the
end point of the spline.
Magnitude
Change the magnitude of a tangent vector thereby increasing or decreasing its
effect on the spline.
The following figure shows a spline as created in SURFCAM through the nodes
indicated by the points.
The Original Spline
See the Magnitude Doubled figure to see the same spline with the magnitude of
the topmost vector doubled. Notice that the top of the spline appears more blunt.
427
Magnitude Doubled
See the Magnitude Reduced figure to see the original spline with the magnitude of
the topmost tangent vector reduced to about half its original value. This resulted in
a sharper curve at the top of the spline.
Magnitude Reduced
The magnitude of a tangent vector can be thought of as the speed of the spline at
that node. The larger the magnitude, the higher the speed. This restricts the spline
from turning as sharply.
428
Copy Tangent Vector

Assign the direction of a tangent vector at one spline node to another spline node.
Note
Copying a tangent vector does not copy the magnitude. To copy the
magnitude as well as the tangent vector direction, follow this operation
with the Copy Magnitude procedure.
Copy Magnitude
Give one tangent vector the same magnitude value as another simply by clicking
the nodes.
To copy a tangent vector magnitude, click Copy Magnitude. Then select a spline
near the node with the magnitude to copy. Then select the spline near the node to
which the new magnitude is to be assigned. The edited spline will be redrawn.
Untrim No
When you click Untrim, the display on the menu will change from Untrim Yes to
Untrim No. While set to Yes, any trimmed spline selected will be temporarily
untrimmed. The spline will return to its trimmed state when this is set back to No,
when another spline is selected, or when you exit the spline editing menus.
Optimize
This command creates an optimized parametric or NURB spline, and is similar to the
Optimized command on the Create > Spline menu. See Optimize, page 193. The
original spline will be replaced by the optimized spline. Multiple splines can be
optimized at the same time.
Untrim
Return a parametric or NURB spline that has been trimmed to its original untrimmed
state.
Polygon
Display or hide the controlling polygon on a NURB spline.
Explode
Convert NURB splines to parametric splines or polylines. SURFCAM will prompt you
to Select NURB splines to explode. Select the spline(s) you want to explode.
SURFCAM will display the Explode dialog box for you to select Spline or Polyline for
the conversion. You can also enter the number of extra segments to include in the
new entity. Click OK to display the Transform Copy dialog box. Enter the number of
copies, the color and layer parameters and the new entity will be displayed.
8.6
SURFACES
Every surface element created by SURFCAM has a small arrow attached to one corner.
This arrow indicates the surface side and direction that a cutter will traverse. You can
change the side or direction for the cut with the Edit > Surfaces menu.
429
When a surface is created, the surface arrow is placed at the first point selected. The
default size and color of the arrow are set in the SURFCAM.INI file. You can override
these defaults in Display Options dialog box. See Display, page 344 and also The
Display Options Tab, page 884.
Click Surfaces on the Edit menu to display the Edit > Surfaces menu.
Side
Click Side and then click a surface to move its surface arrow to the other side.
Note
This determines which side of the surface will be used for machining,
filleting, offsetting, and cutter intersections.
Direction
Click Direction and then click a surface to change the direction its surface arrow is
pointing. If it is currently pointing along the cross sections, using this command will
cause the arrow to point across the cross sections (and vice versa).
Corner
Click Corner and then click a point near the desired corner of a surface to move its
surface arrow to that corner. Cutting will now start at this corner rather than the
previous one.
Original Drawing
Arrow on the other side

Surface arrow locations
430
Arrow in different direction
Arrow at different corner
Surface arrow locations
Arrow
Click Arrow and then click a surface to toggle its surface arrow from visible to invisible
(or vice versa).
Decompose
Untrim the surfaces that make up a composite surface and return them to the state
they were in before they were trimmed.
A composite surface
The individual surfaces

after using decompose command
Twist Vectors
When you select a parametric surface, SURFCAM will display the Surface Twists
dialog box for you to select the new twist type vectors for the surface. The surface will
be recalculated with the new twist vectors.
431
Surfaces use Twist Vectors to describe the curvature within a surface patch.
SURFCAM represents surfaces by drawing their patch boundaries (the U and V
splines) and the Twist vectors do not affect the patch boundaries. SURFCAM will
automatically recommend the correct twist vectors for all methods of surface
construction.
Splined
The default for drive curve and 4 curve surfaces.
Ruled
Used when there are only two cross sections. Ruled surfaces must have exactly
two rows in the U direction.
Zero
Used for compatibility with other systems.
Blended
The default blending type for surfaces built from cross sections and offset
surfaces.
Polygon
Create a polygon on an existing NURBS or parametric surface.
432
A parametric surface before and after the polygon command
Display
Select the number of curves to display in the U and V direction. When a value of zero
is entered, the surface will be displayed with flow splines that represent the natural
curvature of the surface.
The original surface

Number of Curves = 0
Number of Curves in each direction = 3
A surface with different numbers of display curves
433
Align
Specify either a location or a vector (direction) that will be used as a reference for
setting the surface side by aligning the arrows on one or more surfaces automatically.
Align
Click Towards or Away From a point or a vector.
a Point/ a Vector
To use a Point, you may not need to create a reference point if there is already
some location (element end point, center, etc.).
To use a Vector, you will be prompted to indicate two locations. Again, you may or
may not need to create reference geometry, depending on the elements available
in the drawing. Usually a line is good to use as a reference vector.
Note
The location of the surface corner with the arrow is used to determine
which side the arrow should point toward. For complicated geometry, you
may need to do the alignment in more than one step.
Untrim
Click Untrim to untrim a surface previously trimmed, either once or a number of times,
using surface trimming commands. See Trim/Break, page 406 and Fillet, page 258.
SURFCAM will display the Edit > Surfaces > Untrim menu.
Surfaces extended using the Edit > Extend command cannot be untrimmed with the
Untrim command. See Extend, page 443.
Older composite surfaces can also be untrimmed with this option. See Composite,
page 265.
Surface
The Surface command untrims every trim operation that has occurred on a
surface. A surface can be trimmed multiple times to multiple elements. All these
trims can be untrimmed in one step by clicking the Surface command and then
clicking on the surface.
434
Edge
The Edge command untrims a single trim operation. To untrim a single trim, click
the Edge command and then click the edge of the surface along which that trim
operation occurred.
Surface with multiple trims
All trims untrimmed

by clicking Untrim > Surface,
then the surface arrow.
One trim untrimmed

by clicking Untrim > Edge,
then clicking on the trimmed edge.
A composite surface
435
A single surface
untrimmed from the composite
Color
Change the color of surfaces to help separate models that consist of inner and outer
surfaces. SURFCAM does so by determining which surfaces are above, or outside,
others and colors them accordingly. Note that boundary curves will have the same
color as their corresponding surfaces and a vertical wall surface will have its original
color.
Above Color
The color of the surfaces that are above (on top of) other surfaces.
Below Color
The color of the surfaces that are below (under) other surfaces.
Transition Color
The transition color for those surfaces that have both front and back parts visible
in the same view.
436
Surface Tolerance
The polygon tolerance which affects the image resolution.
Sampling Curves
The number of curves on the surface that are initially evaluated before the
polygons are created. This number should be increased when some surfaces are
not shaded at all.
Check
Check will detect defective or invalid surfaces. When you click Check, SURFCAM will
display the Select menu and you will be prompted to Select surfaces to check. After
you make your selection, SURFCAM will display the Surface check options dialog
box.
Check Tolerance
If the distances between the points checked on the surface (surface knots) are less
than this tolerance, the surface is considered to be a degenerate surface.
Surface Evaluation Error
Enter the maximum desired deviation error. SURFCAM uses this tolerance to
define the maximum distance between each evaluation point. Based upon the
surface normal at evaluation points, SURFCAM checks if the normal is crossed
between evaluation points. Evaluation points are at the end points of chords
having a chordal deviation of this value.
Change Layer and Color Of Bad Surfaces
Move Degenerate Surfaces To Layer
Select the layer to which the Degenerate Surfaces will be moved.
Move Crossed Normal Surfaces To Layer
Select the layer to which the Normal Surfaces will be moved.
437
Change Colors To
Select the color for the bad elements.
8.7
POLYLINES
Click Edit > Polylines to display the Edit > Polylines menu which gives you access to
commands to add, delete, or move nodes within a polyline, or to create individual line
elements that resemble a chosen polyline.
Move Node
Move one or more nodes by translating. The following procedure can be used to move
a polyline node:
1.
Click Move Node. You will be prompted to Select the polyline to edit.
2.
Select the polyline. SURFCAM will prompt you to Select the nodes to move.
3.
Select all of the nodes you want to move. Then click Done. SURFCAM will
display the From Select Point menu and you will be prompted to Select a
location to move from.
4.
The point you choose here has nothing to do with the existing location of any
of the nodes you are moving. It is merely the base or starting location which
when combined with a second point you will be prompted to selectwill
determine the distance and direction that the nodes will be moved.
5.
Select the base location. SURFCAM will put a square on the base location,
display the To Select Point menu and prompt you to Select a location to move
to.
6.
Select a point. SURFCAM analyzes the distance and direction of this point from
the base point and moves the nodes you selected the same distance and
direction from their original locations and redraws the polyline.
7.
You can continue selecting points as done in step five and watch SURFCAM
move the nodes to different locations and redraw the polyline. When you are
satisfied with the new location of the nodes, click Back on the To Select Point
menu and you will be returned to the Edit > Polyline menu.
Add Node
Insert nodes into a polyline in the following manner:
1.
Click Add Node.
2.
In response to the prompt, select a polyline.
438
3.
In response to the prompt, select two nodes between which to add nodes.
SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu for you to indicate the locations
for new nodes.
4.
As you indicate a location for another node, SURFCAM draws a new segment
into the polyline.
5.
Repeat step 4 for as many nodes as desired to insert. Click Back when
complete. SURFCAM redraws the polyline with the new nodes in place.
Delete Node
Delete selected nodes from a polyline as follows. When you click Delete Node,
SURFCAM will prompt you to select the polyline to edit. After doing so, select all of
the nodes to delete, then click Done. SURFCAM will redraw the polyline with the
chosen nodes removed.
Explode
Create individual line elements that resemble the chosen polyline. The polyline will be
deleted and will no longer be available to edit.
8.8
TANGENCY
The Tangency command connects two separate splines or surfaces by re-drawing and
extending the spline(s) of one entity so that the spline end points coincide with the
corresponding spline end points of the other entity. The two splines or two surfaces
become connected but remain as two separate entities.
You are prompted to Select first surface edge or spline end followed by Select
second.... You must select the end points or surface edges you want to become
connected. The order of these selections has an effect on the shape of the resulting
splines or surfaces. After the selections are made the Edit Surface Tangency dialog box
is displayed.
439
Align Edges
When set to No, not all splines on the first surface selected will necessarily be
connected to splines on the second surface. This will be true when the first surface
edge selected is longer than the second selected edge.
Tangency of two surfaces with Align Edges set to No

and the top surface, whose selected edge is longer, selected first
Edge Tangency
This option is available on the Edit Surface dialog box when the Align Edges option
is set to Yes.
Edge Tangency controls the way the connecting splines are drawn. When the
Tangency command is executed, splines from the second entity selected are redrawn and extended so that they become tangent to corresponding splines in the first
entity. The corresponding splines in the first entity will be modified slightly or remain
unchanged depending on which Edge Tangency option is chosen.
440
Average Both
Splines in the first entity selected will be changed slightly in making the connecting
splines tangent.
Two surfaces
Left surface selected first
Right surface selected first
Tangency of two surfaces with Edge Tangency set to Average Both
First Element
The splines in the first entity selected will remain fixed. Only the splines in the
second entity will be changed in making the connecting splines tangent.
Two surfaces
Tangency of two surfaces with Edge Tangency set to First Element
Method
Select the accuracy of the blend.
<= Tolerance
Tangency of connecting splines will be to within the angle tolerance specified in
the Angle Tolerance box.
Exact
Tangency of connecting splines will be exact.
Angle Tolerance
This is the user-defined tolerance to use for the <= Tolerance option.
8.9
JOIN
The Join command connects two separate splines (or surfaces) into a single entity by redrawing and extending the spline(s) (or surfaces) of one entity so that their end points
coincide with the end points of corresponding splines (or surfaces) in the other entity.
441
Each pair of newly joined splines (or surfaces) is turned into a single new spline (or
surface). For surfaces, this set of new splines defines the new single surface.
You will be prompted to Select first surface or spline to join followed by Select second
surface/spline. Unlike Tangency, selecting a surface edge has no special effect. These
two entities can be touching or not connected. When not connected, SURFCAM will
display the dialog box Edges/Corners do not meet. Do you want to proceed? Click Yes
to continue. SURFCAM will display the Join Curve dialog box (or the Join Surface dialog
box).
Note
The Join command is not the same as the Blend command on the Create >
Surface and Create > Spline menus.
Tangent
If set to No, the corresponding splines from the two entities will be connected without
being tangent. If set to Yes, they will be tangent.
Two surfaces
Join two surfaces with Tangent set to No

442
Edge Tangency
This option is available when the Tangent option is set to Yes.
Edge Tangency controls the way the connecting splines are drawn. When the Join
command is executed, splines from the second entity selected are re-drawn and
extended so that they become tangent to corresponding splines in the first entity.
Before the two sets of splines are joined together into one set, the corresponding
splines in the first entity will be modified slightly or remain unchanged depending on
which Edge Tangency option is chosen.
Average Both
The splines in the first entity selected will be changed slightly in making the
connecting splines tangent.
Two surfaces
Join two surfaces with Edge Tangency set to Average Both
First Element
The splines in the first entity selected will remain fixed. Only the splines in the
second entity will be changed in making the connecting splines tangent.
Two surfaces
Join two surfaces with Edge Tangency set to First Element
Method
Select the accuracy of the blend.
<= Tolerance
Tangency of connecting splines will be to within the angle tolerance specified in
the Angle Tolerance box.
Exact
Tangency of connecting splines will be exact.
Angle Tolerance
Define the tolerance to use for the <= Tolerance option.
8.10
443
EXTEND
Extend the length of a surface or a spline along either axis using two methods.
Click Extend or Trim to extend or to trim the surface or spline. The original element will
be replaced by the trimmed/extended element.
Length
This is the distance the surface/spline will be trimmed or extended.
Type
Tangent
Extend tangent to the element (continuous in first derivative).
Curvature
Extend along the curvature of the element (continuous in first and second
derivatives).
Continuity
Extend continuous to the element (continuous in first through third derivatives).
Full
Extend completely continuous to the element (continuous in all derivatives).
A Surface Before and After Extending
444
The Result of Using the Tangent Option
The Result of Using the Curvature Option
Parameter
Extend along the original curve definition.
Note
8.11
Parameter is available only if the curve or surface was previously

trimmed.
TEXT/DIMENSION
Click Edit > Text/Dim to display the Edit > Text/Dimension menu.
Most of these commands produce the same dialog boxes that were used in the original
text/dimension creation. See Text/Dimension, page 300.
Text
When you click Text, you will be prompted to Select the text or dimension to change.
Make your selection by clicking on any part of the dimension or textarrows,
extension lines, dimension lines, or text.
Font
Change the font of an individual dimension or text. When you click Font, SURFCAM
will prompt you to Select the text or dimension to change fonts. After you make your
selection, SURFCAM will display the Font dialog box so you can change the font.
Explode
Change text into a geometric entity that can be machined (for engraving purposes).
When you click Explode, you will be prompted to Select the text to explode. Select
445
an item of text and it will be changed to geometry that can be machined. It cannot be
changed back to text.
Style
Create new styles for your text and dimensions that will apply to your entire drawing.
Position
Used to change the position of an existing dimension. You will be prompted to Select
the dimension to edit. Reposition the dimension and click the left mouse button.
Style Number
Allows you to change the style for the entire drawing to one you created with the
above Style command.
Properties
Change the style properties for an individual dimension so it will have a style different
from the rest of the drawing.
8.12
CONTROL POINTS
You can modify surfaces or splines by changing the location of the control points.
When you click Control Points, SURFCAM will prompt you to select a spline or a surface.
After you do so, SURFCAM will display a polygon representing the positions of the
control point locations.
SURFCAM will then prompt you to select the control points to be moved. Select the
control point(s) with the cross hair.
SURFCAM will then display the Select Point menu to define a from and to location. The
distance defined will be applied to each control point chosen.
Surface
8.13
Control polygon
Modified Control Point
THE TRANSFORM MENU
Click the Edit > Transform command or click the Transform button to copy
elements to other locations or to move elements to other locations.
446
SURFCAM displays the Transform Menu. Click the Copy

command or the Move command.
Note
If you choose Copy, at some point during the operation

SURFCAM displays the Transform Copy dialog box. See Transform Copy
Dialog Box, page 456.
After you click the Copy command or the Move command, SURFCAM displays the
Transform > Copy or the Transform > Move menu.
8.13.1
Distance
Click Distance to copy or move one or more elements a specific distance from the
current position. You will be prompted to select an item. Then SURFCAM will display
the World dialog box for you to enter the translation distance for the X, Y and Z
coordinates. After you click OK, if you chose Move, the item will be moved. If you
chose Copy, SURFCAM will display the Transform Copy dialog box. See Transform
Copy Dialog Box, page 456.
8.13.2
Location
Click Location to copy or move one or more elements from one location to another so
that the two locations have the same relative position to each other as do two points
which you will be prompted to select. SURFCAM will display the Select menu and
prompt you to select item(s). Make your selection. If the Copy mode is active,
SURFCAM will display a modified Transform Copy dialog box. See Transform Copy
Dialog Box, page 456, but note that the Number of Copies box does not appear on
the modified Transform Copy dialog box.
Next SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu and prompt you to Select location
to translate from. Select a point. SURFCAM will place a box around the point, display
the Select Point menu, and prompt you to select a location. Select the point.
SURFCAM will copy or move the selected element(s) from the old location to a new
location so that these two locations have the same relative position to each other as
the two points you just selected. The Select Point menu remains displayed so that you
can continue to move the selected element(s) until they are in the desired location or
you can make additional copies of the elements in other locations.
8.13.3
447
Rotate
Click Rotate to copy or move elements by rotating them about a specific location.
SURFCAM will display the Rotation Angle dialog box for you to enter the
counterclockwise rotation angle. (Negative values rotate clockwise.)
Note
The rotation always occurs in the construction view. It is recommended that

before performing the rotation, you change the current CView, or rotate the
screen, to ensure the proper rotation.
Enter an angle and click OK. SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu and
prompt you to select the point of rotation. This point will be the center of an arc through
which the element(s) will be rotated. Select the rotation point.
If the Copy mode is active, SURFCAM will display the Transform Copy dialog box.
See Transform Copy Dialog Box, page 456. If you enter a value greater than 1, each
additional copy will be rotated the selected number of degrees from the previous
copy. Click OK.
SURFCAM will then rotate the elements through an arc whose center will be the point
of rotation and whose size is the angle you specified.
8.13.4
Scale
Click Scale to copy or move elements by applying a scale factor that affects both the
size and location of the elements being copied or moved.
After you click Scale, SURFCAM will display the Select menu and prompt you to
select the item(s) to copy or move.
After you make a selection, SURFCAM will display the Scale dialog box and prompt
you to enter the scale factor. The scale factor determines the size of the element that
is copied or moved. For example, a factor of .5 means the new element will be half as
large as the original.
Note
A negative value is allowable for a scale factor, but it is the absolute value
of the scale factor that determines the size of the copy.
After a scale factor is entered, SURFCAM will prompt you to Select Point menu to
scale about. This point to scale about helps determine where the copied element
will be drawn. If you select the exact center of the original element, the copied element
will be drawn on top of the original but at the new size.
If you select a point away from the center of the original element, this point to scale
about acts like the origin on a number line. The center of the original element acts
like the unit location on the number line. The scale factor will be the coordinate on this
line of the center of the copied element.
448
Original element
Point to scale about
1.5
1.0
.25
.5
-.25
Scale Factors
The effect of the scale factor on the size of the copied element
and its location from the point to scale about
If you choose a different point to scale about, you get a similar result but on a
different number line.
If the Move command is active, after you select the point to scale about, SURFCAM
will erase the original element and place the scaled element at the location described
above.
If the Copy command is active, SURFCAM will display the Transform Copy dialog
box. See Transform Copy Dialog Box, page 456. When you make more than one
copy, the unit location on the number line is the center of the original element for the
first copy, but is the center of the previous copy for each succeeding copy.
8.13.5
Scale XYZ
Scale all geometry independently along the three axes. When the elements to scale
are selected, SURFCAM will display the World dialog box. You can enter different
scaling factors for each axis. Negative scale factors can also be used.
Note
Arcs will be converted to splines for independent scaling. In the Move mode,
the original arcs will be deleted.
The minimum scale factor that can be applied to any axis is 0.001. To shrink
something more than 0.001 scale, repeat the process until you have achieved the
proper scale. A scale factor of 1.0 leaves the geometry unchanged along that axis.
Original Element
8.13.6
449
The element after using the Scale XYZ

command with X axis scaled by 1.5;
Y axis scaled by 2.0, Z axis scaled by 1.
Mirror
Click Mirror to copy or move element(s) in a mirror image fashion.

SURFCAM will display the Select menu for you to select an item. Then SURFCAM
will display the Select Point menu for you to select the beginning and ending points
of the mirror line.
The plane of symmetry (the mirror) is always perpendicular to the construction view.
It can be described as an imaginary line in the construction view. The line is situated
where the mirror plane intersects the construction view. Therefore, you can describe
the mirror plane simply by indicating two locations on the line where the mirror plane
intersects the construction view.
If the Copy command is active, SURFCAM will display the modified Transform Copy
dialog box. See Transform Copy Dialog Box, page 456.
SURFCAM will copy or move the entities to the opposite side of the mirror line.
8.13.7
To View
Copy or move and rotate one or more elements from one view to another.
Note
Using the Copy mode with the To View command makes a single copy of
the selected elements in the destination view.
To copy or move elements from one view to another use the following procedure:
1.
Click the To View command. SURFCAM will display the Select menu and
prompt you to select the item(s) to copy or move.
2.
If the Copy command is active, SURFCAM will display the modified Transform
Copy dialog box. See Transform Copy Dialog Box, page 456.
3.
SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu and prompt you to select the view
and the location to transform from.
450
4.
When the CView parameter does not indicate the number of the view from
which to copy or move the element, click CView on the Status bar and set it
accordingly (set it to 0 to transform from the current view). SURFCAM sets the
construction view to the number entered.
5.
Set the View to the same number as the CView and then specify the base point.
SURFCAM will mark the point and will prompt you to select the view and the
location to transform to.
6.
Set both the View and CView parameters on the Status bar to the view to which
the element(s) are to be transformed. Then click the location that will be the
base point in the new view. SURFCAM will copy or move and rotate the
element(s) to the new view and base point.
Original element
in Top view
View 1
View 7
The element copied to the isometric view with the point as the origin
8.13.8
Offset
The Offset command appears on four SURFCAM menus: Edit > Transform, Create >
Line, Create > Arc, and Create > Circle. When you click the Offset command on any
of these menus, SURFCAM will display the Offset menu.
An offset is a set of planar points obtained by projecting the points of a planar

element. Each point of the element is projected the same offset distance. The line of
projection is perpendicular to the element.
When the Offset menu is displayed, you will be prompted to Select element to offset
0.5000000. The default offset distance is 0.5000000.
Change Offset
Click Change Offset to change the offset distance. SURFCAM will display the
Offset dialog box. Enter a new offset value and click OK.
451
The Offset command creates offsets on two different groups of planar elements in
slightly different ways. One group consists of individual lines, arcs, and circles. The
other consists of splines and chained geometry made up of lines, arcs, and splines.
On the Offset menu, the Offset Distance, Location, and Tangent commands are used
when offsetting lines, arcs and circles. Offset Distance is also used to offset splines.
The Chain command is used to offset chained geometry.
8.13.8.1
Offsetting Lines, Arcs and Circles
Offset Distance
When you click Offset Distance, you will be prompted to Select element to
offset n.nnnnn where n.nnnnn is the offset value entered with the Change
Offset command. After you select a line, an arc, a circle (or a spline), you will
be prompted to Indicate offset side.
When offsetting a line, click one side of it. A new line the same length as the
original and parallel to itwill be drawn on that side, at a distance equal to the
offset distance.
When offsetting an arc or a circle, click in its exterior or its interiorthe interior
being the interior of the circle on which the arc lies. A new arc or circle will be
drawn concentric with the original one at a distance equal to the offset distance.
Note that if you chose the interior of the arc or circle as the offset side and the
offset distance exceeds the radius of the arc or circle radius, SURFCAM will
display an error message reading Offset must be smaller than radius.
Line
Arc
Offset Distance
Location
When you click Location, you will first be prompted to Select an element to
offset. After you select a line, an arc, or a circle, SURFCAM will display the
Select Point menu and you will be prompted to Select the location through
which the offset arc/line will pass.
If you offset a line segment, the new line will be located so that either it or its
extension passes through the location.
A new arc will be concentric with, and similarly oriented as the original arc. It
will be located so that either it or its extension will pass through the location.
452
If you offset a circle, the new circle will be concentric with the original one and
pass through the location you selected.
Line
Arc
Offset Location
Tangent
Click Tangent and you will be prompted to Select an element to offset.
If you select a line to offset, you will be prompted to Select the tangent circle.
Click an arc or a circle. SURFCAM will draw the offset line as one of the two
possible tangents to the arc or circle and display the Other command on the
menu so you can have the other possible tangent drawn.
If you select an arc or a circle, you will be prompted to Select tangent arc or
line. If you click an arc or a circle, SURFCAM will draw the offset arc/circle as
one of the two possible tangents to the other arc/circle and display the Other
command so you can have the other possible tangent drawn. If you click a line,
SURFCAM will draw the one possible offset arc or circle that can be drawn
tangent to that line.
Line using a tangent circle
Arc using a tangent arc

Offset Tangent
Arc using a tangent line
You can continue selecting elements to which you want your offset to be
tangent. When you are finished selecting elements, you can click another
Offset command or click Back to return to the Transform menu.
8.13.8.2
Offsetting Chained Geometry
Click Chain to offset a set of connecting elements.

Chain
When you click Chain, SURFCAM will display the Select Chain menu and you
will be prompted to Select beginning element and Select ending element.
Chain the connecting elements and click Done. When you do, you will be
prompted to Select offset side. Click one side of the chained elements.
453
SURFCAM will display the Offset Spline dialog box.
Offset Corner Angle (Degrees)

The Offset Corner Angle controls how the offset of adjacent elements of
chained geometry or adjacent sections of splines is handled when the offset
is toward the exterior of the intersect angle.
Maximum Deviation Error From Spline
Maximum chordal deviation from the spline (or other entity being offset)
allowable in the offset.
When chained geometry is offset, each element in the chain is offset separately. Each
of the resulting offsets is the same type of element as the corresponding element in
the original chain. How the offset of two adjacent elements is accomplished depends
on whether the offset is toward the interior or the exterior of the angle at which the
adjacent elements intersect. (The angle at which adjacent elements intersect is the
angle between the tangents to the two elements at their point of intersection.)
Offsets Toward The Interior of the Intersect Angle
When the offsets of two adjacent elements are toward the interior of their intersect
angle, the two offsets will always overlap or intersect and will therefore be trimmed
or trimmed back.
Adjacent elements to be offset
Offset to the interior of the intersect angle before trim
Offsets toward the interior of the intersect angle
454
Offset to the interior of the intersect angle after trim
In some situations, where the offset is toward the interior of an intersect angle, a
section in the middle of the chained geometry will not have a corresponding section
in the offset due to the effects of the trimming that takes place.
Offset of Chained Geometry
Offsets Toward The Exterior of the Intersect Angle

When the offsets of two adjacent elements are toward the exterior of their intersect
angle, the two offsets will not intersect. How the two offsets are connected depends
on the values of the Offset Corner Angle, on the Offset Spline dialog box, and the
intersect angle between the two adjacent elements.
When the value of the intersect angle is greater than the Offset Corner Angle, the
offsets will be trimmed to each other (extended).
When the value of the intersect angle is less than the Offset Corner Angle, the
offsets will be connected with an arc.
Adjacent elements offset separately to the exterior of the intersect angle
The offset when the intersect angle is greater than Offset Corner Angle
455
The offset when the intersect angle is less than Offset Corner Angle
8.13.8.3
Offsetting Splines
When offsetting splines, you can either use the Offset Distance or the Chain
command. You cannot use the Location or Tangent commands.
With either the Offset Distance or Chain command, SURFCAM will display the
Offset Spline dialog box after you select the spline and the offset side. See Chain,
page 452.
Spline offsetting is similar to chained geometry offsetting.
Even though a spline is not made up of separate elements, the offsets of adjacent
portions of a spline may intersect and overlap. If this occurs, the overlaps will be
trimmed.
Also, in some cases arcs will be inserted in the offset at locations where the spline
has sharp corners.
Offset a Spline
456
8.13.9
Transform Copy Dialog Box
Transform Copy dialog box
Number of Copies
If you choose the Distance, Rotate, Scale, or Scale XYZ command, the Transform
Copy dialog box will contain the Number Of Copies option.
Copy To Color
Choose the Original color or the Current color of the element being copied.
Copy To Layer
Choose to copy to the Current layer, to the Original layer of the element being
copied, or to an Other layer.
Other Layer
When Other is selected, Other Layer becomes active for you to enter the number
of the layer on which you want the copies to appear.
When multiple copies are made, the first copy will be transformed from the location of
the original by the distance, angle, and scale you have indicated. The second copy
will be similarly transformed from the location of the first copy. Each additional copy
will be similarly transformed from the previous copy.
When multiple copies are made using the Scale or Scale XYZ commands, the first
copy will be an enlargement or reduction by the scale factor of the original element.
The second copy will be a similar enlargement or reduction of the first copy. Each
additional copy will be a similar change in size from the previous copy.
8.14
457
THE DELETE MENU
When you click Edit > Delete (Shortcut: Ctrl+D), SURFCAM will display the Edit > Delete
menu and prompt you to Select element(s) to delete.
You can delete a single element, all the elements inside a rubber-band box, elements
that intersect other elements, all visible elements or duplicate elements. You can also
delete text styles.
In addition to deleting, you can undelete (restore) the last element or all previous
elements deleted.
8.14.1
Single, Within, Intersect, Visible
Select elements using Single, Within, Intersect, or Visible. These menu commands
are the same as those in the Select menu. See The Select Menu, page 132.
Note
If a composite surface consists of data on different layers, deleting any part

of the composite will cause the complete composite to be deleted, including
data that was on layers that are not visible. This preserves the integrity of
the database.
8.14.2
Duplicate
The Delete Duplicate command is used to delete elements that are the same size and
shape and occupy the same space. They may even have the same color. Duplicate
surfaces are those that have identical surface arrows, control points and UV lines.
When using the Delete > Duplicate command you can define, within certain
tolerances, what constitutes a duplicate.
When you click Duplicate on the Delete menu, SURFCAM will display the Select
menu. See The Select Menu, page 132.
Select an element. SURFCAM will display the Delete Duplicate Tolerance Options
dialog box for you to specify the conditions under which you consider elements to be
duplicate elements.
458
Delete Duplicate Tolerance Options dialog box

Click Delete > Duplicate and select elements to display this dialog box.
Distance Tolerance
If the difference in the distances between corresponding features of two or more
elements, such as the end points of lines, is less than this value, the elements are
considered to be duplicate elements. Also, if the difference in location of same
sized elements is less than this value the elements are considered to be
duplicates.
Angle Tolerance
Angle tolerance is used to compare the angle of arcs. It is also used to compare
the angle between vector orientations of two elements of the same size and shape.
If the angle difference is less than this value, the elements are considered to be
duplicate elements.
Consider Opposite Orientation as Duplicate
Some elements, such as lines, may appear to be the same, but actually have
opposite orientations. One line may start at point one and end at point two, while
another may start at point two and end at point one. If this option is checked, these
two lines would be considered to be duplicate elements, and one would be
deleted. If not checked, these two lines would not be considered to be duplicates.
This option does not apply to surfaces.
8.14.3
459
Styles
When you click Delete > Styles, SURFCAM will display the Delete Styles dialog box.
Note
When you delete a style, all the dimensions on your drawing that are in that
style will be deleted from the drawing.
Note
Deleted styles can be undeleted any time during the current session by
using the Undelete Last or Undelete All commands, provided you have not
created a new style with the same name.
Delete
To delete a style, click the word Keep next to that style to toggle it to the word
Delete. This will indicate that you want the style deleted. It will not actually be
deleted until you click OK.
Click the Delete button at the top of the column. SURFCAM will display
a dialog box. Specify whether you want the styles to show the word
Keep or the word Delete. Then specify the range. Styles will not be deleted until
you click OK.
Swap All Delete
When you click the Swap All Delete button, all styles marked Keep will be changed
to Delete and all styles marked Delete will be changed to Keep.
8.14.4
Chain
Use the Chain command to delete many elements at one time along a contour that
has a number of connected elements.
460
Click the Chain command. The Select Chain menu is displayed. Use the Select Chain
menu to chain the contour from one element to another element.
After you click the Done button, the elements you selected and all the elements
between those elements are deleted.
8.14.5
Undelete Last
Click Undelete Last to restore the most recently deleted element (view, layer, style,
duplicates).
Repeat this procedure until all elements have been restored. This command is only
valid for items that were deleted during the current SURFCAM session, or since a new
file was loaded. When SURFCAM is exited, these items cannot be undeleted.
Note
When the layer with the element is set to Hidden, the element will NOT
appear on the screen until the layer is set to Visible.
Note
When layers with elements in them have been deleted, all deleted layers will
be undeleted before SURFCAM undeletes any of the elements that were on
the deleted layers.
8.14.6
Undelete All
Click Undelete All to restore all elements (views, layers, styles, or duplicates) that
were previously deleted during the current SURFCAM session.
Note
When the layer with the element is set to Hidden, the element will NOT
appear on the screen until the layer is set to Visible.
NC Machining
CHAPTER 9 COMMON NC PARAMETERS

9.1
INTRODUCTION
Each SURFCAM machining operation has dialog boxes that display its machining
values. The name of the dialog box identifies the NC Mode and the operation.
To create a toolpath, you must determine the values for the machining parameters and
then enter those values into the dialog boxes.
Standard Dialog Box with

the Tool Information, Cut Control, and Options tabs
Normally an NC dialog box has a Tool Information tab, a Cut Control tab, and an Options
tab.
Note
A Material tab is available on the dialog boxes for the Pocket, Contour, and
Face Mill operations. These operations can remove the material around
material boundaries.
A Rest Options tab is available on the dialog box for the Rest Material operation.
A general description of the three common tabs follows.
Tool Information Tab

There are Tool Information tabs for the mill tool, the mill drill tool, the lathe tool, the
lathe drill tool, and the wire EDM tool. Every operation that uses one of these tool
types has the same Tool Information tab. See Tool Information Tab, page 462.
Cut Control Tab

The Cut Control tab contains the information for the cutting process. The parameters
on the Cut Control tabs are not standard. The different cut operations have different
parameters. See The Cut Control tab, page 488.
Options Tab
There are Options tabs for the 2 Axis, the 3 Axis, the 4 Axis, the 5 Axis, the Lathe, and
the Wire EDM modes. The Options tab is the same for every operation in a given
mode. See The Options Tab, page 505.
462
9.2
TOOL INFORMATION TAB
The Tool Information tabs contain many of the same parameters. See also
Chapter 14 Lathe, page 740
Chapter 15 Wire EDM, page 792 and Chapter 15 Wire EDM, page 807
Drill and Hole Processing, page 509.
463
Select Tool
Click the Select Tool button to display a Select Tool dialog box with
the available tools.
The Select Tool functions, page 471
The Select Tool dialog box, page 473
Edit or Add a Tool with SURFCAM, page 475
Select Material
Click the Select Material button to display the Select Material dialog box with the
available materials for the part. You can edit or add a material.
See Select Material, page 484 and Edit or Add a Material, page 485.
*Program To Tool
Program to the Tip is the most common option, but you can program to the Center.
*Tool Number
The Tool Number parameter indicates the position in the tool carousel that holds the
current tool. If the machine has no tool carousel, the post processor ignores any entry
for the Tool Number.
Note
Make the Tool Number equal to the Length Offset parameter and the
Diameter Offset parameter. This number is the T number for many
controllers.
*Length Offset
The Length Offset parameter is not a length measurement.
The Length Offset parameter indicates the number of the controller register that
stores the length offset value. This number is the H number for many controllers.
The length offset value is the Z distance between the tool tip at machine zero and the
tip at the programmed zero. The operator measures the length offset value with the
machine before machining begins. Most controllers automatically enter this measured
value into the register that the Length Offset parameter has identified.
The Length Offset number is normally set to equal the Diameter Offset number.
*Diameter Offset
The Diameter Offset parameter is not a diameter measurement.
The Diameter Offset parameter indicates the number of the controller register that
stores the diameter offset value. This number is the D number for many controllers.
The diameter offset value is the difference between the programmed tool diameter
and the actual tool diameter. The programmed tool diameter is the Tool Diameter
value that is displayed on the Tool Information tab. The actual tool diameter is the
measurement by the operator. The operator normally enters the difference between
464
these two values into the controller register that the Diameter Offset parameter has
identified.
The Diameter Offset number is normally set to equal the Length Offset number.
Work Offset
The Work Offset number indicates the registers in the controller that store the X, Y,
and Z work offset values.
The work offset values are the X, Y, and Z distances between the machine zero
position and the part zero position.
The machine manufacturer sets the location of the machine zero position.
The part zero is a point that is easy to find on the machine table. The part zero position
can be a location on the stock or a location on a fixture that holds the stock. The part
zero position is equal to the origin in the SURFCAM design of the part. The machine
operator uses the machine to indicate the location of the part zero.
After the operator indicates the part zero, the work offset values are loaded into the
work offset registers of the controller.
Spindle
This parameter is available when you do the Mill / Turn operations.
Main
The Main spindle is normally the lathe spindle.
Sub
The Sub spindle is normally the milling spindle.
Turret
This parameter is available when you do the Mill / Turn operations. The five Turrets
for holding tools are the Rear, the Front, the Saddle, the Main, and the Rail turrets.
*Z Gauge Length
This parameter is an estimate of the distance in Z from the turret center to the tip of
the tool. The default value is normally 0. The machine operator can override this value
with the length for the actual tool used.
Note
If the ToolLib Gauge Length on the Options tab is set to the Yes option, the
default value is not 0. The value of the Total Height parameter from the Tool
Library is the default value for the Z Gauge Length.
X Gauge Length
This parameter is an estimate of the distance in X from the turret center to the tip of
the tool.
This parameter is only available for the Mill / Turn or Lathe operations.
465
*Coolant
This parameter indicates the method to use to apply the coolant. The Coolant options
are Off, Flood, Mist, Flood Low, Flood High, Through Low, or Through High.
*Tool Diameter and Tip Radius
The values for these parameters come from the Tool Library.
The Tool Diameter is used in the calculation of the Spindle Speed.
*Number of Flutes
The value for this parameter comes from the Tool Library. SURFCAM uses this value
to calculate the Feed Rate.
*Tool Material
The value for this parameter comes from the Tool Library. The tool is made from this
material. Click the arrow to override this material.
*Surface Speed
The value for this parameter comes from the Material Library. This value depends on
the material that is cut and the material of the tool. The Surface Speed is used in the
calculation of the Spindle Speed.
*Chip Load
The Chip Load value is the product of the Chip Load Per Flute value from the Tool
Library and the Chip Load Factor value from the Material Library.
*These parameters get their default values from the Tool Library or the Material Library.
Six Connected Parameters
SURFCAM formulas connect the following parameters.
1.
The Spindle Speed
2.
The Feed Rate
3.
The Plunge Rate
4.
The Surface Speed
5.
The Feed Chip Load
6.
The Plunge Chip Load.
These formulas contain the values from the Tool Diameter, Surface Speed, Chip
Load Per Flute, Number of Flutes, and Chip Load Factor fields of the Tool Library and
the Material Library. When a new tool is selected, SURFCAM replaces the values in
the formulas with the values for the new tool.
Auto
If the box next to Auto is checked, SURFCAM automatically calculates the six
parameters on the Tool Information tab. SURFCAM displays the new values when
you change the tools.
466
Calculate Speeds button and Auto check box
Calculate Speeds
If the box next to Auto is not checked, click the Calculate Speeds button.
SURFCAM calculates the values again and displays them.
To override any of these six calculated values, enter the values in the boxes. When
you make the changes, the values in other boxes change. After you make a change,
to return the values of these parameters to their original default values, click the
Calculate Speeds button.
Spindle Speed (RPM)
See Six Connected Parameters, page 465.
This parameter shows the revolutions per minute (RPM) of the spindle. You can set
the direction of the spindle rotation to the clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).
SURFCAM uses the following formulas to calculate the Spindle Speed.
Inches
Spindle Speed = (Surface Speed*12) / (3.14159*Diameter)
Millimeters
Formula Parameters
Surface Speed
The Surface Speed value in the formula is from the Material Library. The value
refers to the material that you cut and the material of the tool.
Diameter
The Diameter value in the formula is the value of the Tool Diameter parameter
in the Tool Information Tab.
To override the Spindle Speed value that was calculated, enter a new value.
SURFCAM again calculates the Surface Speed, the Feed Chip Load, and the Plunge
Chip Load values.
Feed Rate
SURFCAM shows the linear feed rate in either units per revolution or units per minute.
To select the unit of measure, click the Options > Units command on the Main menu.
Inch
Select either Inches Per Revolution (IPR) or Inches Per Minute (IPM) from the
second column.
467
SURFCAM uses the following formulas to calculate the Feed Rate.

IPR Feed Rate = Feed Chip Load * Number of Flutes * Chip Load Factor
IPM Feed Rate = IPR Feed Rate * Spindle Speed
Metric
Select either Millimeters Per Revolution (MMPR) or Millimeters Per Minute
(MMPM) from the second column.
MMPR Feed Rate = Feed Chip Load * Number of Flutes * Chip Load Factor
MMPM Feed Rate = MMPR Feed Rate * Spindle Speed
Formula Parameters
Feed Chip Load
The Feed Chip Load value in the formula is taken from the Chip Load Per Flute
value in the Tool Library.
Number of Flutes
The Number of Flutes value in the formula is taken from the Tool Library.
Chip Load Factor
The Chip Load Factor value in the formula is taken from the Material Library.
The value refers to the material that you cut and the material of the tool.
Spindle Speed
See Spindle Speed (RPM), page 466.
To override the Feed Rate parameter value that was calculated, enter a new value.
SURFCAM again calculates the Feed Chip Load value.
Select either units per revolution or units per minute.
The selection determines the code the Post writes for the Feed Rate.
Plunge Rate
This parameter indicates the linear plunge rate in the number of units per minute.
Select the unit of measure from the Options > Units submenu on the Main menu.
This parameter is the rate the tool moves when it plunges to the start point of the
cutting cycle.
SURFCAM calculates the Plunge Rate. The first value of the Plunge Rate is equal to
one half of the first calculation of the Feed Rate.
468
To override the parameter value that was calculated, enter a new value. SURFCAM
again calculates the Plunge Chip Load value.
Your selection of either units per revolution or units per minute for the Feed Rate
parameter also applies to Plunge Rate. The selection determines the code the Post
writes for the plunge rate.
High Feedrate
This parameter can increase the machining speed if the Enable High Speed
Machining box on the Cut Control tab is checked. Enter a value greater than 0 to
increase the machining speed.
The tool speed decreases when a tool must go from a rapid vertical move to a rapid
horizontal move. If you enter a positive value for High Feedrate, the horizontal and
vertical rapid moves are changed to multiple linear moves.
The High Feedrate parameter is the speed that is used for these linear moves.
The value you enter for High Feedrate is normally the maximum speed of the
machine.
The rapid moves with

the High Feedrate = 0
The rapid moves are changed

to multiple linear moves when
the High Feedrate > 0
High Feedrate = 0
469
High Feedrate > 0
Surface Speed
The value of the Surface Speed parameter comes from the Material Library.
SURFCAM shows the value in either surface feet per minute (SFM) or surface meters
per minute (SMM).
When you select a new tool, the value that is displayed is the recommended surface
speed for that tool with the current material.
Enter a new value to override this value. SURFCAM again calculates the values for
the other five parameters.
Feed Chip Load
This value is the actual chip load per flute for the feed moves.
again calculates the Feed Rate value.
Plunge Chip Load
This value is the actual chip load per flute for plunge moves.
again calculates the Plunge Rate value.
Program Number
Indicate the program number that the machine will use. On Fanuc controls, this
parameter is the O number at the top of the program.
470
Insert Post Processor Commands

Select this button to display the Inline Text dialog box. From this dialog box you can
select an SPOST post processor command to put in the ICD file. You can control the
location of the command in the ICD file. See Inline Text, page 486.
Comments
Click the Comments button to open the dialog box.
SURFCAM stores the comments with the NC operation toolpath instructions. After
you click the OK button, at least a part of your comment is displayed on the
Comments button.
9.2.1
Tool Libraries
The SURFCAM tool libraries are contained in Microsoft Access database files.
These .mdb files are in the SURFCAM\Surf2002 folder. The following is a list of the
installed database files.
FILE NAME
DESCRIPTION
Dgtztlb.mdb
Digitizer Tools
Drilltlb.mdb
Drill Tools for Milling Machines
Edmtlb.mdb
EDM Wire
Lathetlb.mdb
Lathe Tools
Ldrlltlb.mdb
Drill Tools for the Lathe
Material.mdb
Global Material Library
Milltlb.mdb
Tools for the Milling Machines
Plungeroughtlb.mdb
Tools for Plunge Rough
Threadmilltlb.mdb
Tools for Thread Milling
471
The ToolLib.dll uses these file names and only these file names. There is a file name
convention for the tool and the material libraries that you must follow.
See Tables, page 474 for additional information.
How to put .mdb files on a network drive

1.
Copy the .mdb files to a network drive.
2.
Add the following line to your toollib.ini file in the [Settings] section:
ToolLibDir=N:\PATH
N:\PATH is the network drive and path where the .mdb files are now found.
3.
Do not change the ToolLib= line in SURFCAM.INI.
The records in the tool library files contain the tool parameters. The tool
parameters are displayed on the Tool Information and Options tabs when that tool
is selected from its library.
To use a tool library from within SURFCAM, click the Tool button on the first line
of the Tool Information tab. The Select Tool dialog box is displayed.
9.2.1.1
The Select Tool functions
There are separate Select Tool dialog boxes for the Mill, Drill, Lathe, Lathe Drill
and EDM tools. These Select Tool dialog boxes are used to do the five following
functions.
1. Select a New Tool to Use in an NC Operation
To select a different tool, click a tool class button on the toolbar. The list of
available tools in that class is displayed. Scroll through the Available Tools list and
highlight the needed tool. Click OK. SURFCAM selects that tool and display its
features on the Tool Information and Options tabs.
2. Select a Customized Tool
To customize an existing tool,
A. Select that tool from the Available Tools box.
B. Change the value of one or more features in the Tool Features box.
C. Click OK. The Tool description on the Tool Information tab indicates that you
customized an existing tool.
Example
The following figure on the left shows the tool description for .750 dia - 2 flute
- Ballmill tool.
The figure shows the tool description after you customize the tool with a
change in its flute Length.
472
.750 dia - 2 flute - Ball Tool
Custom Tool
The .75 and the .375 numbers of the Custom tool description are the Tool
Diameter and the flute Length.
3. Set the default values for the Program To Tool and Stock To Leave
parameters
You can set the default value for the Program To Tool parameter on the Tool
Information tab. See Tool Information Tab, page 462. You can set the default value
for the Stock To Leave parameter on the Cut Control tab. See The Cut Control tab,
page 488.
4. Add a New Tool to the Tool Library
To add a new tool, click the Add Tool button to display a blank Tool
Information dialog box. Enter the tool description and the tool features.
Then click OK to save the new tool. See Edit or Add a Tool with
SURFCAM, page 475.
5. Edit an Existing Tool in the Tool Library
To edit, highlight an existing tool and click the Edit button to display the
Tool Information dialog box for that tool. See Edit or Add a Tool with
SURFCAM, page 475.
To edit a lathe tool, see
Select a Lathe Tool, page 741,
Edit or Add a Lathe Tool, page 743,
Select a Lathe Drill Tool, page 746,
Edit or Add a Lathe Drill Tool, page 747.
To edit Wire EDM, see
Select an EDM Tool, page 809, and
Edit or Add an EDM Tool, page 810.
9.2.1.2
The Select Tool dialog box
Ballmill tool
Dovetail tool
Bullmill tool
Chamfer tool
Endmill tool
Corner round tool
Tapered endmill tool
Lollypop tool
Tapered Bull/Ball tool
Add the Tool to the library
473
474
Shellmill tool
Edit and Save the current record
Key cutter tool
Delete the current record
Tables
Use this box to select another tool table.
You can create a tool table for special applications.

Add a Tool Table
To Add a Tool Table, you must use Microsoft Access. See Add a Tool
Table, page 481
Edit or Add a Tool
You can edit a tool table from SURFCAM or from Microsoft Access.
See Edit or Add a Tool with SURFCAM, page 475.
See Edit or Add a Tool with Microsoft Access, page 477.
Available Tools
This box displays the available tools in a tool class. An example of a tool class
is Ballmill.
Click one of the following buttons at the bottom of the list of tools. SURFCAM
displays the tools that have diameters that are a multiple of the number on the
button. Click the All button to see all the tools of the tool class.
Inches
Metric
475
The descriptions of the tools appear in the list. Click a tool in the Available Tools
box. Key features of that tool are shown in the display box to the right.
Tool Features
You can change the value of the parameters that are displayed in the Tool
Feature display box. If you change the parameters, you create a customized
tool for the current run of SURFCAM. The changes you make here do not
change the actual contents of the tool library.
9.2.1.3
Edit or Add a Tool with SURFCAM
Click the Edit or the Add button to display a Tool Information dialog box like the
box that is shown in the Mill Tool Information dialog box figure.
Edit
Add
Use this Tool Information dialog box to edit an existing tool or add a new tool to the
library.
Mill Tool Information dialog box
476
Tool Description
This parameter is the description of the tool that is displayed in the Available
Tools list box. This description is displayed next to the tool button on the Tool
Information tab. The description cannot be greater than 40 characters.
Tool Number
This is the number of the station in the machines tool carousel that will hold the
current tool. If the machine being used has no tool carousel, the post processor
for that machine will ignore any entry for Tool Number. For convenience, it is
often helpful to make this number the same as the values for Length Offset and
Diameter Offset. For many controllers this is the T number.
Length Offset
This parameter is the default value Length Offset on the Tool Information tab.
This value indicates the number of the controller register that stores the length
offset.
Diameter Offset
This parameter is the default value of Diameter Offset on the Tool Information
tab. This value indicates the number of the controller register that stores the
diameter offset.
Tool Material
The tool is made from this material.
Default Coolant
This is the default value for the Coolant parameter on the Tool Information tab.
This parameter indicates the method to use to apply the coolant. The options
are Off, Flood, Mist, Flood Low, Flood High, Through Low, or Through High.
Number Of Flutes
This parameter is the number of flutes on the tool.
Chip Load Per Flute
This parameter is the default for the Feed Chip Load parameter on the Tool
Information tab.
Drawing Files
This parameter indicates the files that are used to draw the tool and the tool
holder. When tool paths are drawn, you can press the tab key to toggle the tool
display. You can display the tool, the tool and the tool holder, or neither the tool
nor the holder.
The file in the Tool list box contains the design for the tool. SURFCAM joins the
contents of the Holder and Other files to create the tool holder drawing.
Click the ... button to display the Select Tool Drawing File dialog box. You can
select an existing tool file from this box.
477
Spin
Select this check box to see the tool turn when it is displayed.
9.2.1.4
Edit or Add a Tool with Microsoft Access
The SURFCAM tool libraries are contained in Microsoft Access database files. To
edit an existing tool or to add a tool, use the following procedure.
1.
Double-click the .mdb file in the SURFCAM\Surf2002 folder. See Tool

Libraries, page 470.
2.
If the database was created in a previous version of Microsoft Access, the

Convert / Open Database dialog box is displayed. See The Convert / Open
Database dialog box, page 478
3.
If the database was created in the current version of Microsoft Access, a

dialog box like the following is displayed.
478
4.
Double-click any table to open it in a spreadsheet format.
5.
Use the standard Microsoft Access processes to customize the table. You
can edit the data, add new data, or delete the data.
9.2.1.4.1
The Convert / Open Database dialog box
When you double-click an .mdb file, the Convert / Open Database dialog box
can appear. This dialog box indicates that the database was created in a
previous version of Microsoft Access.
479
Convert Database
You can change the file to a newer version. You can edit the values in the
table, edit the structure of the tables, and add tables.
A change in the structure of a table can prevent the correct operation of
SURFCAM. Do not change the database structure.
The changed files will function on the computer that was used when the
change was made. The changed files will function on all computers with the
same version of Microsoft Access.
To use changed files on systems with older versions of Microsoft Access
or systems with no Microsoft Access installed, do the following: Click the
Microsoft Access Tools > Database Utilities > Convert Database > To Prior
Access Database Version command.
Click OK on the Convert/Open Database dialog box. SURFCAM displays
the Convert Database Info dialog box.
480
Select the Surf2002 folder.

Do not overwrite the original file.
1.
Save the file in the Surf2002 folder with a temporary name, for
example, Milltlb_MT.mdb.
2.
Close the dialog box that was displayed.
3.
From the Explorer, give the original file a new name. For example,
Milltlb.mdb to Milltlb_orig.mdb.
4.
Change the name of the temporary file to the EXACT original name. For
example, Milltlb_MT.mdb to Milltlb.mdb.
Open Database
Click this option if you share the database with the users of a previous
version of Microsoft Access. You can continue to use the database with the
previous versions.
You can edit the values in the table, but not change the structure of the table,
or add tables.
481
If Microsoft Access displays a dialog box that tells you that you cannot
change the database object, the following is true. You can not change the
properties of tables. You can not add tables to the database. You can edit
the contents of the table.
Part of Message
The message continues by telling you how to change to the current version.
Close the database. Then in Microsoft Access, click the Tools > Database
Utilities > Convert Database > To Current Access Database Version
command.
9.2.1.5
Add a Tool Table
1.
Double-click an .mdb file in the SURFCAM\Surf2002 folder. See Tool

Libraries, page 470.
2.
If the database was created in a previous version of Microsoft Access, the

Convert / Open Database dialog box is displayed. See The Convert / Open
Database dialog box, page 478
3.
If the database was created in the current version of Microsoft Access, a

dialog box like the following is displayed.
482
Milltlb.mdb Default Table
The default table is a required table in the database files. The Mill Tool Table
is the default table in the example.
Do NOT delete this default table.
Do NOT change the name of this default table.
A. Click a table and use the shortcut CTRL+C to copy the table.
B. Click a blank area on the white screen and use the shortcut CTRL+V to
paste the table.
C. The Paste Table As dialog box appears.
Give the table a name to describe its function.
483
Example
1.
Copy the Mill Tool Table.
2.
Paste the table into a blank area of the screen.
3.
Give the table the name Carbide In the Paste Table As dialog box.
4.
To add another table, paste the table into a blank area of the
screen.
5.
Give the table the name High Speed Steel in the Paste Table As
dialog box.
D. You can copy many tables if necessary.

Corrupt File
If an .mdb file is corrupt,
1.
Copy the default .mdb file from the Surf2002\Def folder.
2.
Paste that file into the Surf2002 folder.
3.
Right-click the file in the Surf2002 folder.
4.
Click the Properties option.
5.
Clear the Read-only Attribute check box.
484
9.2.2
The Material Library
9.2.2.1
Select Material
Click the Select Material button on the Tool Information tab to select the material
to use for the part.
Add a new material.
Edit the material.
Delete the selected material.
Available Materials
This list box displays the description of the materials that are available in the
library. Select a material in the list to display the Surface Speed (SS) and the
Chip Load Factor (CLF) for the selected tool. The Surface Speed is shown in
Surface Feet Per Minute (SFM) or Surface Meters Per Minute (SMM).
9.2.2.2
485
Edit or Add a Material
The material library is stored in the Material.mdb file that is found in the Surf2002
subfolder. This file contains a table of materials and material characteristics.
To make the changes to the Material Library, use the Select Material dialog box.
To add new material, click the Add Material button.
To edit an existing material, click the Edit Material button.
SURFCAM displays the Material Information dialog box.
Material Information dialog box
Reference Number
SURFCAM uses the Reference Number to find the material in the material
library. This number must be unique.
Note
To determine a reference number you can use, find the highest

number now in use. Then add one to that number.
486
Material Description
Indicate how the material must appear in the Available Materials list box of the
Select Material dialog box.
SS and CLF
Indicate the Surface Speed (SS) and the Chip Load Factor (CLF) for each tool
material. The tool materials are High Speed Steel (HSS), Carbide, TIC/TIN
Carbide, Cobalt, TIC/TIN HSS, Ceramic, Diamond, and Tapping.
Note
9.2.3
Select a material in the list box like your new material. Then the values
for this material are the default values for the new material.
Inline Text
You can put a post processor command into the text of an NC operation toolpath file
when you create that file.
The Insert Post Processor Commands button is
on the lower right side of the Tool Information
tab. Click this button to display the Inline Text
dialog box.
From this dialog box you select the Spost post processor commands and set their
parameters.
487
Inline Text Commands

See Spost Reference: Command Reference, page 26 for a description of the
Inline Text commands. These commands are stored in the Incitext.txt file. You can
edit this file.
Use the Inline Text commands to help with the tool change sequences.
Click a command to highlight the command. A description appears on the
comment line below the list box. This description can include the following
information.
(M) - The command is for a mill post processor.
(L) - The command is for a lathe post processor.
(SW) - The command is for a Software Cycle.
(HW) - The command is for a Hardware Cycle.
(5 Axis) - The command is for a 5 Axis machine.
(4 Axis) - The command is for a 4 Axis machine.
488
When a command is highlighted, the command name appears in the center of the
Inline Text dialog box below the description.
Below the display of the command is a set of command parameter boxes. If you
highlight a different command, you see a different set of parameter boxes. When
a command does not require any parameters, no boxes appear.
The prompts appear on the left of the parameter boxes. Some of the prompts are
words that appear in the capital letters. Some other prompts are symbols with
letters that are not capital letters. The prompts that are not capital letters are
prompts to enter a number. The prompts that are in the capital letters are prompts
to enter the word in the parameter box.
If a parameter box has a prompt in the capital letters, the box is a drop down box
with an arrow. Click the arrow to display the word in a drop down menu. You can
click the word to enter that word in the box.
The word prompts can be two words. A hyphen separates the two words. Select
one or the other from the drop down menu. Select any prompt with one word
unless it is in brackets. The words in brackets are optional.
There are groups of prompts that are optional. These optional groups of prompts
appear in a sequence in the display box. The first optional prompt in the sequence
begins with an open bracket. For example, @[XAXIS. The last optional prompt in
the sequence will end with a closed bracket. For example, -x].
Enter the values in all boxes or do not enter any values for a group of optional
prompts.
Never enter a bracket in a parameter box.
Insert Text options
There are three Insert Text options at the bottom of the Inline Text dialog box. You
can enter the text before a tool change. You can enter the text after a tool change.
You can enter the text after the toolpath.
9.3
THE CUT CONTROL TAB
The Cut Control tabs contains many common parameters. See also
2 Axis: The Cut Control Tab, page 569
Lathe:The Turn Control Tab, page 748
3 Axis: The Cut Control Tab, page 636
Wire EDM: The Cut Control Tab, page 812
4 & 5 Axis: The Cut Control Tab, page 704
489
Stock To Leave
This parameter is the amount of material that is left on the surface after the tool path
is generated.
Tool Containment
Both the Cut and Swarf operations support a tool containment process so that you
can machine only a part of a surface.
This parameter indicates the method to use to define the part of the surface to cut.
See Tool Containment, page 546.
490
Step Type
This parameter indicates the method SURFCAM uses to calculate the distance
between one tool pass and the next pass.
Scallop
SURFCAM sets the maximum height of a scallop to equal the value that is entered
for the Step Size parameter. SURFCAM uses the height of the scallop to calculate
the distance between passes. The tool passes are close when the height of the
scallop is small.
Increment
SURFCAM sets the distance between passes to equal the value of the Step Size
parameter.
Step Size
The value of this parameter is the distance between tool passes if the Scallop option
is selected for Step Type parameter.
SURFCAM uses this value to calculate the distance between passes if the Increment
option is selected for Step Type parameter.
Surface Tolerance
SURFCAM breaks surface cutting moves into many linear moves. These linear
moves are along the chords between the points on the surface along the toolpath.
The lengths of these chords and their linear moves change. No point on the surface
can be a distance from a chord that is greater than the value for the Surface
Tolerance.
Retrace Type (3 Axis and 5 Axis)
This parameter describes how the tool moves from one cut pass to the next.
Top Plane
From the end of a cut pass, the tool retracts in Z to the rapid plane. The tool is
moved to a position above the next pass. The tool then plunges at the rapid speed
to a distance above the start point of the next pass. The distance is equal to the
value of the Plunge Clearance parameter. The tool then plunges at the feed rate
into the material to the start point of the next pass.
491
Rapid Plane
Rapid Plane moves

between passes
Relative Plane
3 Axis example
5 Axis example The tool tip is used for the tool path.
The Retrace Type is set to Top Plane.
Relative Plane
From the end of a cut pass, the tool retracts in Z by a calculated distance.
SURFCAM first calculates the height of the highest point in the previous cut and
the start point of the next cut. The larger of the two measurements is added to the
value of the Relative Plane Clearance parameter. The result is the retract distance.
The tool moves to the start point of the next pass like in the Top Plane option.
Rapid Plane
Relative Plane moves
between passes
Relative Plane
3 Axis example
5 Axis example The tool tip is used for the tool path.
The Retrace Type is set to Relative Plane.
Bidirectional
The end of one cut pass is next to the start point of the next pass. The direction of
the next pass is opposite the direction of the previous pass. The tool does not
retract between passes when the distance between a pass and the previous pass
492
is less than a given value. The given value is the value of the Maximum Feed
Between parameter on the Options tab.
Rapid Plane
Directional change
points
Moves between
passes
Relative Plane
3 Axis example
5 Axis example The tool center is used for the tool path.
The Retrace Type is set to the Bidirectional option.
Feed Between
The tool moves from the end of one pass to the start point of the next pass. The
tool will not retract between passes. The tool will not use the top plane. This option
is best for a closed surface like a sphere or cylinder. If this option cuts an open
surface, SURFCAM creates the tool motion like the Top Plane option.
Rapid Plane
Feed Between
Moves
Relative Plane
3 Axis example
5 Axis example
The Retrace Type is set to the Feed Between option.
Retrace Type (4 Axis)

This parameter indicates how the tool moves from one tool pass and the next. The
rapid cylinder in 4 Axis machining is a cylinder that is offset from the part axis of
rotation.
493
Rapid Cylinder
Relative Plane
Part Line
Axis of
Rotation
The Rapid Cylinder and Relative Plane
Top Plane
From the end of a cut pass, the tool retracts away from the axis of rotation to the
rapid cylinder. The tool is moved to a position above the next pass. The tool then
plunges at the rapid speed to a distance above the start point of the next pass. The
distance is equal to the value of the Plunge Clearance parameter. The tool then
plunges at the feed rate into the material to the start point of the next pass.
Rapid Cylinder
Relative Plane
The Retrace Type is set to Top Plane. The Tool Tip is used for the tool path.
Relative Plane
From the end of a cut pass, the tool retracts away from the axis of rotation by a
calculated distance. SURFCAM first calculates the height of the highest point in
494
the previous cut and the start point of the next cut. The larger of the two
measurements is added to the value of the Relative Plane Clearance parameter.
The result is the retract distance. The tool moves to the start point of the next pass
like in the Top Plane option.
Rapid Cylinder
Relative Plane
The Retrace type is set to Relative Plane. Tool Tip is used for the tool path.
Bidirectional
From one pass to the next pass, the tool changes from the Climb method to the
Conventional method of machining. The tool does not retract between passes
when the distance between a pass and the previous pass is less than a given
value. The given value is the value of the Maximum Feed Between parameter on
the Options tab.
495
Rapid Cylinder
Relative
Plane
Directional
change move
The Retrace type is set to the Bidirectional option. The Tool Center is used for the toolpath.
Feed Between
The tool moves from the end of one pass to the start point of the next pass. The
tool will not retract between passes. The tool will not use the top plane. Use this
option for a closed surface. A closed surface curves so that the end of one pass is
near to the start point of the next pass.
Rapid Cylinder
Feed Between
Relative Plane
The Retrace Type is set to the Feed Between option.
496
Rapid Plane
3 and 5 Axis
This parameter is the default Z level for horizontal rapid moves. This value is an
absolute Z level location. Include the clearance above any clamps in the value you
enter.
4 Axis
This parameter is the default distance from the axis of rotation of the rapid
cylinder.The Rapid tool moves are made around the rapid cylinder.
Plunge Clearance
The value of the Plunge Clearance parameter is the distance between the start point
and the end point of a plunge move. This distance is measured along the axis of the
tool when the tool moves toward the part. The start point of the plunge move is the
end point of a vertical rapid move. The end point of the plunge move is the start point
of the first feed move (or cut move).
5 Axis Only
There are two plunge moves in 5 Axis operations, one after the other. The Plunge
Clearance value is the distance between the start point and the end point of these
two moves. The second plunge move is the plunge move that is defined in the first
part of this definition. SURFCAM uses the first plunge to decrease the tool speed
before the tool axis is changed at the bottom of a rapid move.
Relative Plane Clearance
The Relative Plane Clearance value is only used when the Retrace Type parameter
is set to Relative Plane. SURFCAM calculates the Z value of the highest point on the
part along each cut pass. This value is added to the Relative Plane Clearance value
to calculate the height of the next rapid move across the part.
Minimum Z Value
This parameter puts a limit on the depth of a cut. A cut is not made below the Z level
indicated by the value of this parameter.
Gouge Check (3 Axis Cut)
The gouge check function is only available in the 3 Axis Cut operation. The gouge
check function is not available in the 4 Axis or 5 Axis Cut operation. There are two
conditions where SURFCAM does a gouge check. SURFCAM does a gouge check
when the tool has a curve that is larger than some parts of the surface. When
SURFCAM cuts a surface that is near other surfaces, a gouge check is made.
None
A gouge check is not made.
Single Surface
SURFCAM compares the complete surface to the curve of the tool. An adjustment
is made if an undercut is found.
497
Multi Surface
Use this option if there are other surfaces near the surface to cut. A prompt tells
you to select those surfaces. SURFCAM does a gouge check on those surfaces.
An adjustment is made in the tool path if a gouge is found.
Check Clearance (3 Axis Cut)
If the Gouge Check parameter is set to the Multi Surface option, this box is made
active. This parameter defines the amount of stock to leave on the surfaces near the
surface that SURFCAM cuts. SURFCAM does a gouge check on those surfaces.
Leadin Move and Leadout Move
Click the button to display the Leadin Information or the Leadout Information dialog
box. See Leadin/Leadout Parameters for 3, 4 and 5 Axis, page 497.
Plunge Type
Click the Plunge Type button to display the Plunge Information dialog box. See
Plunge Parameters for 2, 3, 4 and 5 Axis, page 500.
9.3.1
Leadin/Leadout Parameters for 3, 4 and 5 Axis
A leadin move is a tool move that is put between a plunge move and the first move
that cuts. A leadout move is a tool move away from the part after the last move that
cuts.
SURFCAM controls the leadin and leadout moves with the parameters on the Leadin
and Leadout Information dialog boxes. The dialog boxes are displayed when the
Leadin and Leadout buttons are clicked. The parameters on the two dialog boxes are
the same.
Figure 7: Leadin Information dialog box
The following use this dialog box.

1.
3 Axis operations, except Z Rough and Z Finish

498
See Leadin and Leadout Parameters for 2 Axis Operations, page 576.
2.
4 Axis operations
3.
5 Axis operations
4.
Contour 3D for both 2 Axis and 3 Axis.
Note
The 2 Axis operation leadin and leadout parameters are described in Leadin
and Leadout Parameters for 2 Axis Operations, page 576.
The leadin and leadout parameters for EDM operations are described in
Lead In Out Type, page 797
Lead Move
None
A leadin move is not made.
Normal
The leadin move is perpendicular to the first cut in the tool path.
Tangent
The leadin move is tangent to the surface.
Tangent + Angle
The leadin move is tangent to the surface, plus a defined angle, toward the cut.
Fixed Angle
The leadin move is at a fixed angle.
Tool Vector
The leadin move is parallel to the tool vector at the point of the leadin move.
Note
Surfware recommends that you use the Tool Vector option when you do 4
Axis machining. The Tool Vector option prevents the rotary motion during a
leadin or leadout move.
Lead Type
3D
The lead move follows the actual 3 axis move that was selected for the Lead
Move parameter.
2D
The 3 axis move is calculated. The X and Y directions of that move are then
used. The tool does not move in Z. This option is used in the conditions that call
for an undercut.
Undercut 3D
The lead move follows the actual 3 axis move that was selected for the Lead
Move parameter. This lead move is used when the surface is undercut
according to the cutting view at the start point of a lead move.
499
Undercut 2D
The 3 axis move is calculated. The X and Y directions of that move are then
used. The tool does not move in Z. This lead move is used when the surface is
undercut according to the cutting view at the start point of a lead move.
Lead Length
The Lead Length is the length of the leadin move.
Angle on Tangent Plane
This parameter is available when the Lead Move parameter is set to Tangent +
Angle or Fixed Angle.
If the Tangent + Angle option is selected, enter the angle to rotate the lead move
along the tangent plane around the normal vector. A counterclockwise rotation is
a positive angle.
If you selected Fixed Angle for the Lead Move, indicate the fixed angle on the XY
plane.
Angle From Tangent Plane
This parameter is available when the Lead Move parameter is set to
Tangent+Angle or Fixed Angle.
If you selected Tangent+Angle for the Lead Move, enter the required angle to
rotate the leadin/leadout move from the tangent plane. A Positive angle is toward
the top.
If you selected Fixed Angle, specify the fixed angle from the XY plane.
Feed Rate
The Feed Rate parameter is the speed for the tool moves. Several types of tool
moves use two or three of these options.
Feed
Use this option to make the tool move at the Feed Rate you entered on the Tool
Information tab.
Plunge
Use this option to make the tool move at the Plunge Rate you entered on the
Tool Information tab.
Rapid
Use this option to make the tool move at the maximum speed of the machine.
The tool moves at the speed that the G00 code requires.
500
9.3.2
Plunge Parameters for 2, 3, 4 and 5 Axis
Click the Plunge button to display a Plunge Information

dialog box.
Plunge Information dialog boxes

501
Plunge Type
Plunge
This option creates a straight line move to depth.
Ramp
This option creates a linear X, Y and Z axis move to depth.
Helical
This option creates a round X, Y and Z axis move to depth.
Peck
This option creates a series of short straight line moves to depth (which breaks
the chips into smaller pieces).
Angle
This parameter controls the angle in top view at which a Ramp plunge move is
created. From the second column, select the Relative, Absolute or Auto option.
Relative
The angle is measured from the leadin move.
Absolute
The angle is measured from the standard position.
Auto
The Auto option is only available for plunge moves in the 2 Axis Contour
operation. This option tells SURFCAM to calculate the correct angle from the
chained contour.
Select an Angle for the Helix plunge Move
Note
Some of the next parameters have a following field with the Constant, the
Cutter Radius, and the Step Size options.
502
Constant, Cutter Radius, and Step Size

When these options are available at the right of another field, SURFCAM
uses your selection to make a calculation. The calculation depends on
your selection and the value you entered in the field to the left.
SURFCAM uses this calculation to get the correct value for the
parameter on the left.
Constant
The correct value for the parameter on the left is the entry in the field
to the left.
Cutter Radius
The correct value is the product of the entry in the field on the left and
the tool radius.
Step Size
The correct value is the product of the entry in the field on the left and
the Step Size that applies.
Length
This parameter is the maximum value for the horizontal distance the tool can move
in one step of a Ramp move. The actual distance is adjusted if there is not enough
space.
Radius
This parameter is the maximum radius of the helix in a Helical move. The actual
radius is adjusted if there is not enough space.
Increment
This parameter is the distance the tool moves on each peck for a Peck plunge
move.
Minimum Length / Minimum Width
This parameter is the minimum value for the horizontal distance that the tool
moves when an adjustment is made because of space. The Minimum Length is
the length of one step on a Ramp move. The Minimum Width is the radius of the
helix on a Helix move. If there is not enough space to do a Helix or Ramp move, a
Plunge move is made. If this parameter is set to 0, SURFCAM will do a Ramp or
Helix move if there is enough space.
Pitch
This parameter is the maximum value for the vertical distance the tool can move
in one step of a Ramp move. This parameter is maximum value for the vertical
distance that the tool moves in one revolution of the Helical move.
Retract
This parameter is the vertical distance the tool retracts in a Peck plunge move.
503
The Ramp Plunge Move Example of Pitch
The Helical Plunge Move Example of Pitch
Ramp Angle
This parameter is the calculated value of the angle at which the tool moves in the
Ramp and Helical moves. This value depends on the values that are entered for
the Length, Pitch, and Radius parameters.
Position
This parameter is for the Ramp or Helical plunge moves. The options are Centered
and Tangent. SURFCAM automatically sets the default option for some
operations. The Centered option is the default for the Pocket operation. The
Tangent option is the default for the Contour operation.
Centered
This option puts the midpoint of the ramp move at the start point of the first cut.
Tangent
This option puts the start point of the ramp move at the start point of the first cut.
504
Position is set to the Centered option:

The midpoint of Ramp Move is at the start point of first cut
Position set to the Tangent option:

The start point of Ramp move is at the start point of first cut
Feed Rate
See Feed Rate, page 499.
Clearance
The Clearance parameter is used for the 2 Axis Contour and the 3 Axis Z Finish
operations. The parameter is only active when the Plunge Type is set to Ramp or
Helical.
A horizontal plunge move is added to the end of a Ramp or Helical plunge move.
The tool is kept away from the part contour by the additional plunge move. The
Clearance parameter is the length of the additional plunge move. This value is the
distance between the end of a Ramp or Helix plunge move and the first cut move.
Clearance distance
9.4
THE OPTIONS TAB
There is a unique Options tab for each NC mode.

1.
Chapter 11 2 Axis: The Options Tab, page 581
2.
3.
Chapter 13 4 Axis and 5 Axis: The Options Tab, page 728
4.
Chapter 14 Lathe: Lathe Options Tab, page 760
5.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM: EDM Options Tab, page 815
505
506
CHAPTER 10 COMMON NC OPERATIONS

This chapter describes the following.

1.
Mill/Turn Machining, page 507
2.
Drill and Hole Processing, page 509
3.
Project, page 542
4.
Tool Containment, page 546
5.
Pattern Slicing with the Z Range filter, page 558
10.1
MILL/TURN MACHINING
Mill / Turn machining is available for 2, 3, 4, and 5 Axis operations.

The Mill / Turn machines are used to do the mill and turn operations on a single machine.
The Mill / Turn option is an option on the NC menu.
Mill / Turn menu
The Mill /Turn option has in the four standard mill modes, 2 Axis, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, and 5
Axis.
508
10.1.1
See Tool Information Tab, page 462.
Mill /Turn Tool Information tab
509
The Spindle, Turret, and X Gauge Length parameters are only available when you do
a Mill /Turn Operation. These additional parameters are needed to support the
requirements of the added spindle and turret on a mill / turn machine.
Spindle
A Mill / Turn machine has two spindles. This parameter tells SURFCAM which
spindle to use. These spindles are the Main spindle, normally the lathe spindle,
and Sub, normally the milling spindle.
Turret
A Mill / Turn NC machine has two turrets to hold the tools. There are several types
of turrets that are available. The Turret parameter tells SURFCAM is the type of
turret to use. The available types of turrets are Rear, Front, Saddle, Main and Rail.
X Gauge Length
This parameter is the distance, parallel to the X axis, from the turret center to the
tip of the tool.
10.1.2
The Cut Control Tab
2 Axis
The Cut Control Tab, page 569.
3, 4 and 5 Axis
The Cut Control tab, page 488.
10.1.3
Options Tab
Chapter 11 2 Axis, page 581.

Chapter 12 3 Axis, page 636.
Chapter 13 4 Axis and 5 Axis, page 728.
10.2
DRILL AND HOLE PROCESSING
See Drill, page 781 for the Lathe drill operations.

The name of the SURFCAM Drill operation for 2, 3, 4 and 5 Axis machining is Hole
Processing. The following are the hole management features.
Mask Feature
The Hole Processing operation has a unique Mask feature. The Mask feature helps
to identify the holes to drill.
510
Template
You can create and save a number of Hole Processing template files that contain the
drill tools that you normally use. These templates include the parameter settings that
you normally use with these tools. These templates can decrease the time that is
needed to create the drill toolpaths.
Accuracy
There is a feature that increases accuracy when the tool is put above the hole. When
you use this feature, the tools move toward each hole from the same direction.
Import
You can import the hole data in digitized form.
Preview
You can see the drill toolpaths before you create the toolpaths.
Sequence
The holes are drilled in a fixed sequence. You can control this sequence by one of
three different methods with the Hole Processing operation.
There are two versions of the Drill operation and Hole Processing.
The standard version
You can create a drill operation with a single tool.
The upgraded version
When you use the upgraded version, an optional purchase, you can create a drill
operation with several tools.
10.2.1
Prepare the drawing
Your drawing must have either a circle or a point at the position of the holes to drill.
You can use larger circles to indicate larger drill holes. The Hole Processing operation
can identify the diameters of the circles.
Use a line to indicate the depth of a hole. The line must be parallel to the Z axis in 2
and 3 Axis Drill operations.
Start the line at a drawn point or the center of a drawn circle.
When your drawing is correctly prepared, you can start the creation of the drill
toolpaths.
10.2.2
511
The drill operation
1.
Open the design file for the part.
2.
Click the Drill command on one of the NC menus. Click the NC > 2 Axis > Drill
command, for example.
3.
The Select menu is displayed and a special Mask function for the Hole
Processing is available.
You normally change the mask selection settings before you use the Select
menu to identify the holes.
See Mask Selection Settings, page 513.
4.
After you make the necessary Mask settings, use the commands on the Select
menu to select the hole positions.
5.
After you identify the positions, click the Done button on the Select menu.
512
The Hole Processing dialog box is displayed. Use this box to select the drill
tools and indicate the drill sequence.
See The Hole Processing menu, page 515.

See The Hole Processing toolbar, page 516.
See The Process tab, page 517.
See The Locations tab, page 532.
6.
After you select the drill tools and set their parameter values, click Process >
Save As to save that information in a template. See Template, page 510.
7.
Click the OK button on the Hole Processing dialog box. The drill toolpath is
created and displayed on the screen.
8.
The Keep Operation dialog box is displayed.
Click the Accept button to keep the operation.

9.
To save the operation for future use, click the Save button.
10.2.2.1
Mask Selection Settings
Click the arrow next to the Mask button on the SURFCAM

Status bar to display the Mask Selection Settings dialog box.
513
514
Clear the check box to mask the color or the element. Then you can see the color
or the element, but you cannot select the color or the element.
Color Selection
A check mark on a color indicates that you can select that color.
Element Selection
Point
If this box is checked, you can select the points on the drawing for the drill
holes.
With Centerline
This box is available when the Point box is checked.
If this box is checked, you can select only those points that are attached
to a line.
Circle
If this box is checked, you can select the circles on the drawing for the drill
holes.
With Diameter Range
This box is available when the Circle box is checked.
If this box is checked, only a circle with a diameter in the indicated range
can indicate a hole to drill.
From, To
These boxes identify the range of the diameters of the circles that you
can select to indicate the holes to drill.
Buttons
All Elements
Click this button to check the Point box and the Circle box. Then you can
select the points and the circles in the drawing.
No Elements
Click this button to clear the Point box and the Circle box.
All Colors
Click this button to check all the color boxes so that you can select all the
colors in your drawing.
No Colors
Click this button to clear all the color boxes.
After you click the OK button on the Mask Selection Settings dialog box, the Mask
function is available.
The word ON is displayed on the Mask button.
515
If OFF is displayed on the Mask button, the Mask function is not available. You can
select all elements on the drawing.
Click the Mask button to toggle between the two settings.
10.2.2.2
The Hole Processing menu
The File Menu

New
Close the current SURFCAM Hole Processing
Template (.schpt) file. Create a new template.
Open
Open a template.
Save
Save the template.
Save As
Save the template with a different name.
Delete
Delete the current template.
The Location Menu
Import
Open a file with the locations of drill holes.
The Edit menu
Edit the entries in the Tool list on the Process tab.

Cut
Delete a row from the list and put it on the
Clipboard. You can paste into the list at another
location.
Copy
Copy the highlighted row.
Paste
Put the row that what copied above the
highlighted row.
Delete
Delete a row. The row is not put on the
Clipboard.
516
The Insert menu

Before
Insert a row above the current row.
After
Insert a row below the current row.
Preview
Click this command to see a preview of a drill

toolpath.
Press the ESC key to return to the Hole
Processing dialog box.
10.2.2.3
The Hole Processing toolbar

1
1.
The File buttons

See The File Menu, page 515.
2.
The Edit buttons

See The Edit menu, page 515.
3.
The Hole Processing buttons

See The Insert menu, page 516.
See Preview, page 516.
10.2.2.4
517
The Process tab
The Process tab contains the tool list and the parameter settings for those tools.
The default tab contains one tool.
Hole Processing Process Tab
You can add more tools to the list. When you add a tool, you can create the
parameter settings for that tool.
518
Double-click an entry to
edit that entry.
Cycle entries have a
drop-down list of cycles.
1
Tool List Box

This box contains the list of tools you normally use.
Use the following procedure to add a tool to the list.
1.
Highlight a row.
2.
Click a button to insert a row above or below the highlighted row.
Insert above
Insert below
3.
Click the Select Tool button to display the Select Drill Tool dialog box.
4.
Select the required tool. See Select Tool, page 520.
5.
Enter the parameter settings that you normally use with the new tool. The
new tool row must remain highlighted. See Tool Settings, page 520.
519
Check box column

The column on the left contains the check boxes that indicate that a tool is used
in a drill operation. The standard version of Hole Processing can use one tool
only in a drill operation. The multiple tool version can use more than one tool in
the same operation.
Tool
The values in this column are the values of the Tool Number parameter. The
default values come from the Tool Library.
Double-click an entry to change the value.
Cycle
The Cycle column contains the name of the drill tool from the Tool Library.
Double-click an entry and use the drop-down list to select a different cycle.
Total Depth
This column shows the depths of the holes that the tool will cut. This value is
equal to the Hole Depth parameter.
Double-click an entry to change the value.
Program ID
Indicate the program ID number that the machine will use. On Fanuc controls,
this parameter is the O number at the top of the program.
Comments
Click the Comments button to open the dialog box.
SURFCAM stores the comments with the NC operation toolpath instructions.

After you click the OK button, the first line of your comments is displayed on the
Comments button.
Insert Post Processor Commands
Click this button to display the Inline Text dialog box. From this dialog box you
can select an SPOST post processor command to put in the ICD file. You can
control the location of the command in the ICD file. See Inline Text, page 486.
520
Tool Settings
Select Tool
Click the Select Tool button to display a Select Tool dialog
box with the available tools. You can edit or add a tool.
521
The Select Drill Tool dialog box is like the Select Mill Tool dialog box. You can
edit or add a tool. See The Select Tool functions, page 471.
The available drill tools are Center Drill, Spot Drill, Countersink, Drill, Tap,
Reamer, Counterbore, Bore, and three custom drills.
After you select a tool, the name of the tool is displayed in the Cycle column of
the Tool List Box. The default cycle for that tool is displayed in the Cycle Type
parameter. The default cycle for the Center Drill, Spot Drill and Counterbore is
Drill.
Select Material
Click the Select Material button to display the Select Material
dialog box with the available materials for the part. You can
edit or add a material.
See Select Material, page 484.
522
*Tool Number
The Tool Number parameter indicates the position in the tool carousel that
holds the current tool. If the machine has no tool carousel, the post processor
ignores any entry for the Tool Number.
Note
Make the Tool Number equal to the Length Offset parameter and the
Diameter Offset parameter. This number is the T number for many
controllers.
*Length Offset
The Length Offset parameter is not a length measurement.
The Length Offset parameter indicates the number of the controller register that
stores the length offset value. This number is the H number for many
controllers.
The length offset value is the Z distance between the tool tip at machine zero
and the tip at the programmed zero. The operator measures the length offset
value with the machine before machining begins. Most controllers
automatically enter this measured value into the register that the Length Offset
parameter has identified.
The Length Offset number is normally set to equal the Diameter Offset number.
Work Offset
The Work Offset number indicates the registers in the controller that store the
X, Y, and Z work offset values.
The work offset values are the X, Y, and Z distances between the machine zero
position and the part zero position.
The machine manufacturer sets the location of the machine zero position.
The part zero is a point that is easy to find on the machine table. The part zero
position can be a location on the stock or a location on a fixture that holds the
stock. The part zero position is equal to the origin in the SURFCAM design of
the part. The machine operator uses the machine to indicate the location of the
part zero.
After the operator indicates the part zero, the work offset values are loaded into
the work offset registers of the controller.
Spindle
This parameter is available when you do the Mill / Turn operations.
Main
The Main spindle is normally the lathe spindle.
Sub
The Sub spindle is normally the milling spindle.
523
Turret
This parameter is available when you do the Mill / Turn operations. The five
Turrets for holding tools are the Rear, the Front, the Saddle, the Main, and the
Rail turrets.
*Z Gauge Length
This parameter is an estimate of the distance in Z from the turret center to the
tip of the tool. The default value is normally 0. The machine operator can
override this value with the length for the actual tool used.
Note
If the ToolLib Gauge Length on the Options tab is set to the Yes
option, the default value is not 0. The value of the Total Height
parameter from the Tool Library is the default value for the Z Gauge
Length.
X Gauge Length
This parameter is an estimate of the distance in X from the turret center to the
tip of the tool.
This parameter is only available for the Mill / Turn or Lathe operations.
*Coolant
This parameter indicates the method to use to apply the coolant. The Coolant
options are Off, Flood, Mist, Flood Low, Flood High, Through Low, or Through
High.
Initial Rapid
This parameter is the absolute Z plane for the start point of the drill cycle.
Note
The type of drill cycle that is used determines the rapid plane that the
tool retracts to between hole locations. The G98 type cycles, retract
to the Initial Rapid plane. The G99 type cycles retract to the Plunge
clearance plane.
Retract To
This parameter is the level to which the drill retracts at the end of the drill cycle.
Rapid Plane
This option is a G98 move. This move uses the value that is entered for the
Initial Rapid parameter.
Plunge Clearance
This option is a G99 move. This move uses the value that is entered for the
Plunge Clearance parameter.
Plunge Clearance
The Plunge Clearance parameter for the Drill operations is the distance above
the part for the start point of the plunge move. This distance above the part is
also the endpoint for a rapid move.
524
Hole Depth, Initial Rapid, Plunge Clearance
Use Centerline as Depth

This parameter tells SURFCAM if a center line defines the hole depth.
If this box is not selected, the Hole Depth parameter controls the depth of the
drilled hole.
If this box is selected, the Hole Depth parameter is not active. A line that you
draw on the drawing will control the depth of the drilled hole. The start point of
the line must on a separate point or at the center of a circle. The point or the
circle indicates the location of the hole. Both the line and a point or circle must
appear in the drawing. The line must be parallel to the Z axis in the 2 Axis and
3 Axis Drill operations.
Starting location with

lines defining depths
Different starting locations with lines
2 Axis Application
525
3 Axis Application


4 Axis Application
5 Axis Application
Use Centerline
Depth To
The Hole Depth parameter indicates a depth, relative to the point or circle you
select to define the drill hole. The Depth To parameter indicates which part of
the drill goes to that depth.
Tip
The Tip option takes the tip of the drill to the defined depth.
Shoulder
The Shoulder option takes the shoulder of the drill to the defined depth.
526
Depth to Tip Compared with Depth to Center
Hole Depth / Drill Tool Hole Diameter

When the tool you select is a drill, tap, reamer, counterbore or bore tool, this
parameter is the Hole Depth parameter.
Hole Depth
The Hole Depth parameter is a depth, relative to the point or circle you select
to define the drill hole. If Depth To is set to Tip, the drill tip moves this
distance below the point or circle. If Depth To is set to Shoulder, the
shoulder of the drill moves this distance below the point or circle.
To drill a hole through the material, do either of the following.
1.
Enter the thickness of the material for the Hole Depth and select the
Shoulder option for the Depth To parameter.
2.
Calculate the distance from the shoulder to the tip of the tool. Add that
to the thickness of the material. Enter that value for the Hole Depth
and select the Tip option for the Depth To parameter.
When the tool you select is a center drill, spot drill or countersink drill this
parameter is called a Diameter parameter.
527
Center Drill Diameter, Spot Drill Diameter or Countersink Diameter

This parameter is the diameter of the cone that is left in the material by these
operations. The cone diameter is normally the edge break plus the diameter
of the hole that the next tool drills.
Extend Depth
This parameter defines an additional distance for the depth of the hole. Use this
distance to adjust for a drill with round edges.
*Tool Diameter
The values for this parameter comes from the Tool Library.
The Tool Diameter is used in the calculation of the Spindle Speed.
*Number of Flutes
The value for this parameter comes from the Tool Library. SURFCAM uses this
value to calculate the Feed Rate.
*Tool Material
The value for this parameter comes from the Tool Library. The tool is made
from this material. Click the arrow to override this material.
Cycle Type
SURFCAM has a number of canned cycles and three custom drill cycles.
SURFCAM post processors use these cycle names for the canned cycles in an
NC machine. See Canned Cycles, page 1347.
The default value for this parameter is the type of cycle that the selected tool
normally uses. If you change the tool after you select a cycle type, you can
change the cycle type.
Drill
The tool moves to the bottom Z level at the Feed rate speed. The tool then
retracts at the Rapid speed rate. This option is a G81 move on most NC
machines.
Peck
This option is a peck operation. This option is a G83 move on most NC
machines. The Peck Increment parameter is active when the Peck option is
selected.
Tap
This option is a standard tapping cycle. The tool moves to the bottom Z level
at the Feed speed rate. The spindle direction reverses at the bottom of the
hole. The tool then retracts to the top of the hole at the Feed speed rate. This
option is a G84 move on most NC machines.
Note
Tapping requires that the feed rate match the spindle speed.
SURFCAM does this automatically. The tool library must indicate
528
that the number of flutes on a tapping tool is one. The chip load per
flute must be equal to the thread pitch of the tap. A 1/4-20 tap has
a chip load value of 0.05.
Left Tap
This option is a left-hand tapping cycle like the Tap cycle, but with reversed
spindle direction.
Rigid Tap
This option is a tapping cycle for a tap that is held tight in the spindle. The
machine controller makes the spindle speed and feed rate match. The
machine controller sets the spindle speed and feed rate values to the correct
values.
Rigid Left Tap
This option is a left-hand tapping cycle like the Rigid Tap cycle, but with
reversed spindle direction.
Reamer
This option is like the Drill cycle except that the tool retracts from the hole at
the Feed rate speed. This option is a G85 move on most NC machines.
Bore
This option is a bore cycle that will bore to the bottom of the hole. The
spindle then stops. The tool is then moved away from the edge of the hole
a small distance. The tool then retracts from the hole at the rapid speed rate.
This option is a G86 move on most NC machines.
The Bore Side Clearance parameter is active when the Bore option is
selected.
Back Bore
This option is a back-bore cycle that stops and adjusts the spindle
orientation before the cycle starts. The tool moves at rapid speed to the
bottom of the hole. The tool then moves at the feed speed rate toward the
wall before the spindle is started. The tool then feeds to the top of the hole
and bores the hole from the bottom to the top.
Bore Side Clearance parameter is active when the Back Bore option is
selected. See Bore Side Clearance, page 529.
Custom 1, Custom 2, Custom 3
These options are cycles that the user defines. These cycles are defined to
use the unique or special capabilities of an NC machine. An example of a
unique capability is the Chip-Break function. See Custom1 Mill, Lathe,
page 1354.
529
Countersink
The Countersink option creates a countersink on a drill hole. When this
option is selected, the Hole Depth parameter is changed to the Countersink
Diameter. SURFCAM uses the Countersink Diameter parameter, the
Clearance parameter value and the tool Tip Angle (from the Tool Library) to
calculate the countersink depth.
Center Drill
The Center Drill option creates a hole to guide the next tool. A center drill
tool with a center tip drills the guide hole.
Counterbore
The Counterbore option creates a hole with a square shoulder on the
bottom.
Spot Drill
The Spot Drill option create a guide hole like the Center Drill option. A spot
drill is used.
Dwell
This parameter is the time, in 0.001 seconds, the drill remains at the bottom of
the hole. If you select a cycle type that can use a dwell value, enter the dwell
value on this line.
Peck Increment
This parameter is active when the Cycle Type is set to Peck. This parameter is
the distance that the tool will feed on each peck before it retracts.
Bore Side Clearance
This parameter is active when Cycle Type is set to Bore or Back Bore. Enter
the distance the tool moves from the finished hole after the spindle has
stopped. This move gives the clearance that is needed for a rapid move from
the hole.
Four Connected Parameters
There are formulas that connect the following SURFCAM parameters.
1.
Spindle Speed
2.
Feed Rate
3.
Surface Speed
4.
Feed Chip Load
These formulas contain the values from the Tool Diameter, Surface Speed,
Chip Load Per Flute, Number of Flutes, and Chip Load Factor fields of the Tool
Library and the Material Library.
530
When a new tool is selected, SURFCAM replaces the values in the formulas
with the values for the new tool.
If the Auto box is selected, the new values for these connected parameters are
calculated and displayed. See Auto, page 532.
If the Auto box is not selected, click the Calculate From Library button to
calculate the new values. See Calculate From Library, page 532.
Spindle Speed (RPM)
See Four Connected Parameters, page 529.
This parameter shows the revolutions per minute (RPM) of the spindle. You can
set the direction of the spindle rotation to the clockwise (CW) or
counterclockwise (CCW).
SURFCAM uses the following formulas to calculate the Spindle Speed.
Inches
Millimeters

Formula Parameters
Surface Speed
The Surface Speed value in the formula is from the Material Library. The
value refers to the material that you cut and the material of the tool.
Diameter
The Diameter value in the formula is the value of the Tool Diameter
parameter in the Tool Information Tab.
To override the Spindle Speed value that was calculated, enter a new value.
SURFCAM again calculates the Surface Speed, the Feed Chip Load, and the
Plunge Chip Load values.
Feed Rate
SURFCAM shows the linear feed rate in either units per revolution or units per
minute.
To select the unit of measure, click the Options > Units command on the Main
menu.
Inch
Select either Inches Per Revolution (IPR) or Inches Per Minute (IPM) from
the second column.
531
IPR Feed Rate = Feed Chip Load * Number of Flutes * Chip Load Factor
IPM Feed Rate = IPR Feed Rate * Spindle Speed
Metric
Select either Millimeters Per Revolution (MMPR) or Millimeters Per Minute
(MMPM) from the second column.
MMPR Feed Rate = Feed Chip Load * Number of Flutes * Chip Load Factor
MMPM Feed Rate = MMPR Feed Rate * Spindle Speed
Formula Parameters
Feed Chip Load
The Feed Chip Load value in the formula is taken from the Chip Load Per
Flute value in the Tool Library.
Number of Flutes
The Number of Flutes value in the formula is taken from the Tool Library.
Chip Load Factor
The Chip Load Factor value in the formula is taken from the Material
Library. The value refers to the material that you cut and the material of
the tool.
Spindle Speed
To override the Feed Rate parameter value that was calculated, enter a new
value. SURFCAM again calculates the Feed Chip Load value.
Select either units per revolution or units per minute.
The selection determines the code the Post writes for the Feed Rate.
Surface Speed
The value of the Surface Speed parameter comes from the Material Library.
SURFCAM shows the value in either surface feet per minute (SFM) or surface
meters per minute (SMM).
The first value is the recommended surface speed for the current tool with the
current material.
To override the parameter value that was calculated, enter a new value.
SURFCAM again calculates the values for the other five parameters.
Feed Chip Load
532
This value is the actual chip load per flute for the feed moves.
To override the parameter value that was calculated, enter a new value.
SURFCAM again calculates the Feed Rate value.
From Library
Two parameter values from the Tool and the Material Libraries are updated
when you change the tool. These values are displayed. You cannot change
these values.
*Surface Speed
The value for this parameter comes from the Material Library. This value
depends on the material that is cut and the material of the tool. The Surface
Speed is used in the calculation of the Spindle Speed.
*Chip Load
The Chip Load value is the product of the Chip Load Per Flute value from
the Tool Library and the Chip Load Factor value from the Material Library.
*These parameters get their default values from the Tool Library or the Material Library.
Calculate From Library
If the box next to Auto is not checked, click the Calculate From Library button.
SURFCAM calculates the values again and displays them.
Auto
If the box next to Auto is checked, SURFCAM automatically calculates the four
connected parameters when you select a new tool. See Four Connected
Parameters, page 529.
To override any of these four calculated values, enter the values in the boxes.
When you make the changes, the values in other boxes change. To return the
values of these parameters to their original calculated values, click the
Calculate From Library button.
10.2.2.5
The Locations tab
The Locations tab contains the list of the coordinates of the holes. This tab also
contains the features that are used to create the drill sequence.
2
1
Hole Processing Locations Tab
Location List Box

This box contains the coordinates of
the locations you identified with the
Select menu.
Tip
Double-click an entry in the

X, Y, or Z column to change
the value.
533
534
Sort Order
2
You can use several methods to sort the drill holes.

Manual Sorting
The holes are drilled in the sequence that the holes were selected if you
used the Single command on the Select menu.
The holes are drilled in the sequence the holes were created if you used the
other commands on the Select menu.
Shortest Distance
The holes are drilled in the sequence that gives the smallest total distance
for the horizontal rapid moves.
Linear Sorting
When you select the Linear Sorting option, the Bidirectional and the Use
Band Widths options are available. You normally check these two options
when you use the Linear Sorting option.
The Linear Sorting option normally arranges the holes in horizontal or
vertical bands of a fixed width.
535
Major Direction
The arrow buttons indicate the direction that the holes in the first band
are drilled.
Step Direction
The arrow buttons indicate the direction that the bands are created and
the direction that holes in the bands are drilled.
536
Bidirectional
If this parameter is checked, the holes in one band are drilled in the opposite
direction from the previous band.
If this box is not checked, the holes in different bands are drilled in the same
direction.
Bidirectional is Off.
Bidirectional is On.
Use Band Widths

Check this box to arrange the holes in horizontal or vertical bands of a fixed
width.
The holes in one band are then drilled before the holes in another band are
drilled.
When you check this box, the Width parameter is available.
537
Width
Enter the band width. The holes are divided into several bands of this
width.
Major Direct = Right

Bidirectional = On
Step Direct = Up
Band Width = On
Width = 0.50
538

Bidirectional = Off
Step Direct = Up
Band Width = On
Width = 0.50

Bidirectional = On
Step Direct = Up
Band Width = On
Width = 1.70
539
540

Bidirectional = Off
Step Direct = Up
Band Width = On
Width = 1.70
Use Accurate Mode

Check the box to increase the accuracy of the position of the drill over the hole.
Then the Distance parameter, the Feed Rate parameter and four vector buttons
are available.
Vector Buttons
Select one of four vector buttons. Each button contains an arrow
that indicates a direction. The four directions are each at a 45
degree angle from the X and the Y axes.
If the tool moves toward the hole from one of these directions, the
maximum position accuracy is reached. The older the machine the larger
the increase in the accuracy. If the tool moves toward all the holes from the
same direction, each hole has the same accuracy.
The tool will move from one hole location to the next at the normal feed rate.
When the tool is a fixed distance from the next hole, the tool moves at a
541
different feed rate. The new feed rate is the value of the Feed Rate
parameter.
The fixed distance is value of the Distance parameter.
The tool always moves toward the hole along a vector that is parallel to the
vector on the button you selected.
The end point of the vector is the hole. The length of the vector is the
Distance parameter.
Distance
This parameter is the distance from the drill hole that the feed rate will
change.
Feed Rate
This parameter is the feed rate for the drill within the distance from the hole
the Distance parameter indicates. To increase the accuracy, this value must
be smaller than the normal feed rate.
The Use Accurate Mode is Off.

There is no move toward the holes.
The Use Accurate Mode is On.

There is the same move toward all the holes
Calculate Toolpath Length

Click this button to calculate the horizontal length of the drill toolpath. The result
is displayed in the box.
542
10.3
PROJECT
The Project operation projects an existing toolpath on a surface to create a new toolpath.
The Project operation can be done in the 3, 4, or 5 Axis machining modes.
The toolpath that is projected is normally created on one design and projected on
another design. The tool moves in the projected toolpath can exist at different depths.
These depths are kept on the new design after the toolpath is projected.
Note
A gouge check is not done in the 4 Axis and 5 Axis Project operation. If you use
a bullnose or an end mill tool to cut a concave surface, a gouge can occur. A
ballnose tool can prevent a gouge. If you cut a non-concave surface with a
bullnose or end mill, keep the tool normal to the surface.
Before
After
Project a toolpath on a number of surfaces
10.3.1
Begin The Project Operation
The Project operation requires some preparation.

1.
There are two requirements for the successful performance of the Project
operation.
A. One file must contain both the projected toolpath and the surface on which that
toolpath is projected. If these two items are in different files, use the Append
option on the Open dialog box to merge the two files.
B. The projected toolpath and the surface on which that toolpath is projected must
have the correct position.
Use the Edit > Transform command to change the position of the surface.
543
Use the Transform Operation button on the Operations Manager dialog box to
change the position of the toolpath.
2.
Click the Project command on the NC > 3, 4 or 5 Axis menu.
3.
A prompt tells you the select the surfaces. Use the commands on the Select
menu to select the surfaces on which the toolpath is projected.
4.
To do the 3 Axis Project operation go to step 6.
5.
This step is for the 4-5 Axis Project operation. After you select the surfaces, the
4-5 Axis Cut dialog box is displayed.
You control the tool orientation during the cut with the parameters on this box.
4-5 Axis Cut dialog box
Lead Type, page 701

Lead Angle, page 703
Side Angle, page 704
Limit of the Angle from Z
Each Lead Type option can cause the tool axis to form an angle with a
normal to the surface. This parameter controls the size of this angle. The
angle of the tool axis with the surface normal at the cut point is not larger
than the value of this parameter. This angle has no limit if this parameter
value is180.
Click OK to continue.
6.
After you select the surfaces in 3 Axis or click OK in the 4-5 Axis, the Select NC
Operation dialog box is displayed.
From this dialog box you select the toolpath that is projected.
544
Click the icon of the toolpath to project on the surfaces.

Then click OK.
10.3.2
Complete The Project Operation
After you click OK, the Project dialog box is displayed.
10.3.2.1
Tool Information Tab, page 462.
10.3.2.2
Cut Control Tab
The of the Cut Control parameters for 3, 4, and 5 Axis Project follow.
545
Stock To Leave
This parameter is the amount of material to remain on the surface after the tool
path is generated.
Surface Tolerance (3 Axis)
Surface Tolerance, page 490.
Line Interval (4 and 5 Axis)
The linear moves in the projected toolpath are broken into small line segments
so that the surface is accurately followed. The value that is entered for the Line
Interval parameter determines the length of these line segments. A normal
range of values is between .02 and .15. The actual value depends on the tool
and the surface tolerance that is required. Smaller values give more accuracy.
Curve Tolerance
The arcs moves in the projected toolpath are broken into small line segments
so that the surface is accurately followed. The value that is entered for the
Curve Tolerance parameter indicates the maximum difference from the arc for
these segments. Smaller values give more accuracy.
Rapid Plane
This parameter is the Z value to use for the rapid moves.
Shelf Plane
This parameter is the Z value that is used when the toolpath is not projected a
surface.
546
Add Z Values
Select the Yes option to add the Z values from projected toolpath moves to the
Z values on the surface. If a move on the original toolpath has a Z value of -1.5,
the projected move is 1.5" below the surface. The tool motion display will be
offset from the surface by the same amount.
When the No option is selected, the toolpath will not be below the surface.
10.3.2.3
Options Tab

After you click OK on the 3, 4, or 5 Axis Project dialog box, SURFCAM creates the
toolpath and displays it on the screen.
The Keep Operation dialog box is displayed. Click the Accept button to keep the
operation.
Use the File > Save command to save this toolpath in the ICD file.
10.4
TOOL CONTAINMENT
The Cut and the Swarf operations support a tool containment process so that you can
machine only a part of a surface.
There are two methods to define the part of a surface to machine.
1.
You can machine the part of a surface that is contained within the boundaries of a
surface patch.
Tip
2.
A surface patch is a 4-sided area. The sides are surface flow curves.
You can machine an area that you define by a group of boundary curves that are
surface splines.
Caution
When you look at the completed toolpath, two errors can appear to occur.
1.
The toolpath did not reach the patch or boundary.
2.
The toolpaths to go across the patch boundary or spline boundary.
Not errors
The toolpath on the screen is the path that the center tip of the tool traces. The tool
containment limits the part of the tool that cuts the surface. Normally the center tip
is on one side of the tool containment boundary and does not cut the surface.
The Cut Control tab on the Cut and Swarf dialog boxes contains the Tool Containment
parameter.
547
None
There is no tool containment process.
The Patch Option, page 547
The Spline Option, page 549
Note
You cannot use this option on trimmed NURB surfaces.
The Both Option, page 555
10.4.1
The Patch Option
1.
Select the Patch option.
2.
When you finish your other parameter selections, click the OK button on the Cut
or Swarf dialog box. SURFCAM displays the Select Point menu.
3.
Click the intersection of two surface flow curves to select a patch corner.
4.
Click the opposite corner.

Tip
You can select several patches that define a larger area. The two
corners of this larger patch must be the points that are at the ends of
a diagonal.
The toolpath is immediately created.
548
Tool Containment with the Patch option
Note
The toolpath on the screen is the path of the center of the tool.
The tool containment limits the cut to the part of the tool that touches the
surface. The shaded area is the area that is cut.
10.4.2
549
The Spline Option
You cannot use this option on trimmed NURB surfaces.

Spline types
The Surface Intersect, Fillet Edge and Projected Splines
These splines are drawn on the surface. The tool containment limits the cut to
the part of the tool that touches the surface, not the center of the tool.
The Cutter Intersect Spline
This spline is not drawn on the surface. The tool containment contains the
center of the tool. The cut extends to the center of the tool. This tool
containment is like the tool containment in the 3 Axis Planar and the Z-Finish
operations. See Bounding Curves, page 668.
Procedure
1. Select the Spline option under the following conditions.
A. A single closed spline defines the area to machine.
B. A set of closed splines defines the area to machine.
C. A single open spline defines the area to machine.
D. A set of separate open splines defines the area to machine.
2.
or Swarf dialog box. SURFCAM displays the Select Point menu.
3.
A prompt tells you to select the first element on the boundary curve.
4.
Follow the directions on the prompt line. Select the first element on the
boundary curve.
5.
See the correct section according to the condition in the first step.
A single closed spline defines the area
A set of closed splines defines the area, page 550
A single open spline defines the area, page 551
A set of separate open splines defines the area, page 553
10.4.2.1
A single closed spline defines the area
1.
Chain of the closed boundary curve.
2.
The Chain Bound menu is displayed. Ignore this menu now. Use this menu
with a set of open splines. See A set of separate open splines defines the
area, page 553.
550
3.
To select the surface side, click either the inside or the outside of the closed
boundary curve.
4.
The prompt to select the first element is again displayed. The Select Chain
menu is again displayed. Click the Done command.
5.
SURFCAM draws the toolpath and displays the Keep Operation dialog box.
Tool Containment with a single closed Spline
10.4.2.2
A set of closed splines defines the area
When closed splines define the area, the area normally machined is inside of each
spline or outside all splines.
1.
Chain a closed spline and select the inside or the outside. Ignore the Chain
Bound menu.
2.
Repeat this process on the other closed splines.
3.
Click the Done command after all the splines are chained.
4.
551
Tool Containment with a set of closed Splines
10.4.2.3
A single open spline defines the area
SURFCAM uses the following test to determine if the area is a closed area or an
extended area.
1.
SURFCAM determines the distance between the end points of the open
spline. Call this distance X.
2.
SURFCAM determines the distance between those end points and the
edges of the surface. Call this distance Y.
3.
If X < Y, the area is closed. If X > Y, the area is extended.
A Closed area
A closed area is the area between the spline and a line that connects the spline
end points.
You can machine the inside of this area or the outside of this area.
An Extended area
SURFCAM defines an extended area with lines from the surface edge that are
tangent to the spline at its end points. The tangent lines are projected on the
surface. The extended area is the area between the spline, these projected
lines and the surface edge.
552
You can machine the inside of this area or the outside of this area.
When a single open spline defines the area,
1.
Chain the open spline.
2.
Select the side of the open spline to machine.
3.
Click the Done command on the Select Chain menu.
4.
An open spline defines a closed area
553
An open spline defines an extended area
10.4.2.4
A set of separate open splines defines the area
Use the Chain Bound menu. Toggle the No Connect command to display the
Connect command.
Chain Bound menu
No Connect
SURFCAM automatically connects one end point of a spline to the other end
point of the same spline. After you select all of the splines, you will have several
separate closed tool containment areas.
Connect
SURFCAM automatically connects the last end point of one spline to the first
end point of the next spline that you select. After you select all of the splines,
you will have one tool containment area.
When a number of separate open splines defines the tool containment area,
1.
Select the first element of the first boundary curve.
2.
Select the last element of the first boundary curve or close the chain.
554
3.
The Chain Bound menu is displayed.
4.
To create one tool containment area, toggle the No Connect command to

the Connect command on the Chain Bound menu.
When you chain the splines, an end point of one spline is automatically
connected to an end point on the next spline. The sequence of selection is
important. The last point on the first spline is connected to the first end point
that is selected on the next spline.
5.
To create several tool containment areas, toggle the Connect command on

the Chain Bound menu to the No Connect command. There will be a tool
containment area for each spline.
6.
Chain the splines. SURFCAM determines if each spline is a closed area or

an extended area. The tool containment area is machined according to the
results of this test. See A single open spline defines the area, page 551.
7.
Click the Done command. SURFCAM draws the toolpath and displays the
Keep Operation dialog box.
The open splines with the No Connect option.
555
The open splines with the Connect option.
10.4.3
The Both Option
If surface patches and splines overlap, you can use the patches and the splines
together to define a tool containment area.
1.
Select the Both option.
2.
or Swarf dialog box. SURFCAM displays the Select Chain menu. The prompt
tells you to select the first element of the boundary curve.
3.
Chain the boundary curve and click the Done command on the Select Chain
menu.
4.
The Select Point menu is displayed. Select a corner of the surface patch.
5.
Select the other corner of the surface patch.

The toolpath is immediately drawn. The spline and the surface patch define two
different tool containment areas. The area of overlap of these two areas is
machined.
556
Tool Containment with the Both option
10.4.4
An Example with an Intersect Spline
You can use the Cutter Intersect splines or Surface Intersect splines to define a Tool
Containment area.
Two surfaces that intersect and a cutter intersect spline.
A cutter intersect spline that contains a toolpath.

557
558
See Spline, page 187.

To prevent a gouge, technicians recommend that you use the size of the actual
cutting tool to create the cutter intersect splines.
10.5
PATTERN SLICING WITH THE Z RANGE FILTER
The Z Range Filter is a SURFCAM add-on product.

Use the Z Range Filter in the NC Operations Manager to create the layered plates that
are used in the construction of patterns. This process is normally used to make the
patterns for larger parts.
The toolpath to cut the complete pattern is first created. Then that toolpath is moved
through the Z Range Filter. The Z Range Filter automatically divides the complete
toolpath into smaller toolpaths to cut the separate plates or layers.
The toolpath for the complete pattern.
The toolpaths for three separate plates.
The plates are machined separately. After the plates are machined, they are assembled
to form the complete pattern.
The part in three separate plates.
559
The part in one large block.
There are two methods to cut and assemble the plates.

1.
Cut the plates and then form the part in a separate operation.
2.
Cut the bottom plate. Attach the material for the next plate to the first plate. Cut the
next plate. Continue until the complete set of plates is cut and assembled.
To create the toolpaths with the Z Range Filter, do the steps that follow.
1.
Create one or more toolpaths on the complete part. You cannot use the Drill
operation with the Z Range Filter. You can do
A. 2 Axis Pocket, Contour, Contour 3D, Face Mill, and Rest Material, or
B. 3 Axis Cut, Project, Z Rough, Plunge Rough, Z Finish, Planar, Contour 3D,
Auto Rough, Rest Material, and Pencil Cut.
2.
Next open the Operations Manager dialog box and select the toolpaths.
A. Click the toolpath icon in the operations tree if there is a single toolpath.
B. Click the Setup Section icon if there is more than one toolpath.
560
3.
Click the ZRangeFltr option in the filter box. The Filter Only button is available.
4.
Click the Filter Only button to display the Z Range Filter dialog box.
5.
Make the correct selections for the parameters on the Z Range Filter dialog box.
Order
Start at top
The plate toolpaths are created and displayed in the operations tree from
the top to the bottom plate.
This option is normally used when the plates are created separately and
then assembled at a later time.
561
Start at bottom
The plate toolpaths are created and displayed in the operations tree from
the bottom to the top plate.
This option is normally used when the plates are assembled and cut at the
same time.
The bottom plate is cut. The material for the next plate is attached to the first
plate. The next plate is cut. This process continues until the complete set of
plates is cut and assembled.
Values
Top Z value
This parameter is the Z value for the top of the part
2 Axis operations
Geometry
The Geometry parameter on the Cut Control tab controls this value
.
1.
Select the Top option for the Geometry.

Then the ZRange Filter Top Z value = the Z coordinate of the part.
2.
Select the Bottom option for the Geometry.

Then the ZRange Filter Top Z value = the Z coordinate of the part
+ the Amount To Remove In Z.
3.
Select the Top Z option for the Geometry.

Then the ZRange Filter Top Z value = the entry for the Top Z
option.
4.
Select the Bottom Z option for the Geometry.

Then the ZRange Filter Top Z value = the Bottom Z entry + the
Amount To Remove In Z.
3 Axis operations
The Top Z value is the highest Z value on the part.
3 Axis operations done in SURFCAM 2001 and earlier
The default for the Top Z value for some 3 Axis operations that were done in
SURFCAM 2001 and earlier is 10. These operations are Planar, Plunge
Rough, Cut, Project and Pencil Cut.
562
Adjust this value to the actual top Z value of the part when you use Z
Range filter on these operations. This adjustment is only required one
time with each operation.
Bottom Z value
This parameter is the Z value for the bottom of the part.
2 Axis operations
The Geometry parameter on the Cut Control tab controls this value.
1.
Select the Top option for the Geometry.

Then the ZRange Filter Bottom Z value = the Z coordinate of the
part - the Amount To Remove In Z.
2.
Select the Bottom option for the Geometry.

Then the ZRange Filter Bottom Z value = Z coordinate of the part.
3.
Select the Top Z option for the Geometry.

Then the ZRange Filter Bottom Z value = the Top Z entry - the
Amount To Remove In Z.
4.
Select the Bottom Z option for the Geometry.

Then the ZRange Filter Bottom Z value = the Bottom Z entry.
3 Axis operations
Bottom Z value is the lowest Z value on the part.
3 Axis operations done in SURFCAM 2001 and earlier
The default for the Bottom Z value for some 3 Axis operations that were done
in SURFCAM 2001 and earlier is 0. These operations are Planar, Plunge
Rough, Cut, Project and Pencil Cut.
Adjust this value to the actual bottom Z value of the part when you use Z
Range filter on these operations. This adjustment is only required one
time with each operation.
Range distance
This parameter is the depth of the plates.
Plunge clearance
This parameter is the distance between the start point and the end point of
a plunge move. This distance is measured along the axis of the tool.
The start point of the plunge move is the end of a vertical rapid move. The
end point of a plunge move is the start point of the first feed move.
Repositioning
Retract is an absolute coordinate
The tool retracts to a level that is an absolute Z value.
563
Retract is relative to top of Z range

The tool retracts to a level that is a fixed distance above the Top Z value.
Overlap
Cut overlapping motion
Check this box to make the toolpaths overlap in Z with the toolpath of the
previous or lower plate.
This option is normally used when the plates are assembled and cut at the
same time. An overlap makes a smooth connection between two plates.
Sorting
Sort by operation.
Use this option to sort the plate toolpaths in the operations tree by the
different operations.
The toolpaths for one type of operation are displayed in a group by the
range. Then the toolpaths for the next type of operation are displayed.
564
Sort by Z range
Use this option to sort the plate toolpaths in the operations tree by the range
of Z values.
The toolpaths for one range of Z values are displayed in a separate Setup
Section. Then the toolpaths for the next range of Z values are displayed.
6.
Click the OK button on the Z Range Filter dialog box to create the set of toolpaths
that cut the separate plates
You can use the Z Range Filter to create the plates to assemble several other types of
parts. See the next drawings.
The part in one large block.
The part in three separate plates.
565
566
Chapter 11 2 Axis
CHAPTER 11 2 AXIS
11.1
2 AXIS MENU
To use the 2 Axis menu, click the NC > 2 Axis command.
NC > 2 Axis menu
Pocket
1. Use the Pocket operation to remove the stock that is found inside a closed
boundary. The 2 axis (XY) tool moves are done in Z direction increments.
2.
Use the Pocket operation to remove the stock that is found between the edge
of the material and a contour. See Pocket, page 581.
Contour
1. Use the Contour operation to cut along the edge of a boundary.
2.
Use the Contour operation to remove the material that is found between the
edge of the material and a contour. See Contour, page 589.
Contour 3D
Use this operation to cut any contour in 3D space. See Contour 3D, page 596.
Drill
See Drill and Hole Processing, page 509.
Pilot Hole
Use the Pilot Hole operation when a hole is needed for the preparation for another
operation. The other operation is an operation that must be done with a tool that can
not drill a hole. See Pilot Hole, page 600.
Face Mill
Use the Face Mill operation when the surface that is cut is parallel to the cutter face.
See Face Mill, page 604.
Rest Material
After you use a Pocket or a Contour operation, some material can remain on the sides
of the part. If the tool is larger than the areas, the tool cannot remove that material.
568
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Use the Rest Material operation to remove this material from the sides of contours
and pockets. See Rest Material, page 605.
Thread Mill
Use this operation to cut the external threads and the internal threads that have
diameters that are larger than the tool diameter. See Thread Mill, page 610.
Options
See Options, page 619.
SURFCAM displays a dialog box for each operation. Normally the dialog box has a Tool
Information tab, a Cut control tab, and an Options tab.
A Material tab is available on the dialog boxes for the Pocket, Contour, and Face Mill
operations. These operations can remove the material around material boundaries.
The Top of the 2 Axis Pocket dialog box
A Rest Options tab is on the dialog box for the Rest Material operation.
The Top of the 2 Axis Rest Machining dialog box
Note
The View for the cutting examples in this chapter is the Top View (plan view).
See Construction View Machining, page 632.
11.1.1
The Tool Information Tab
The Tool Information tab normally contains the same parameters for all the 2 Axis
operations. See Tool Information Tab, page 462.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
11.1.2
The Cut Control Tab
Cutting Method
See Contour 3D, page 596 for the options for the Contour 3D command.
569
570
Chapter 11 2 Axis
On
The center of the tool moves along the path of the chained elements. Use this
option to cut a groove or slot or to cut figures or letters.
This option is available only for the Contour operation. The Side Clearance and
the Amount To Remove On Sides fields will not be available.
Climb
This option causes a standard clockwise tool to move on the left side of a
contour.
This option normally gives the best finish.
Conventional
This option causes a standard clockwise tool to move on the right side of a
contour.
2
4
3
2
The Climb method
The Conventional method
1 = Direction of cut
2 = Tool rotation
3 = Left side
4 = Right side
Pocket Cut Mode
Spiral
The offset tool moves are parallel to the pocket contour.
Zig Zag
The offset tool moves are parallel in both directions at an angle you indicate.
Zig
The offset tool moves are parallel in one direction at an angle that you indicate.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
571
Curve Tolerance
SURFCAM breaks all contour moves along a spline into a set of linear moves.
These linear moves are chords that connect some points on the spline. SURFCAM
adjusts the length of each chord so that the distance between any point on the
chord and the spline is less than or equal to the value of the curve tolerance.
Rapid Plane
The Rapid Plane parameter is the Z coordinate of the rapid plane. The rapid
moves that are vertical begin and end at the rapid plane. The rapid moves that are
horizontal are done at the level of the rapid plane.
Remember to include the needed clearance above clamps when you set the value
of the Rapid Plane.
The Rapid Plane Clearance value on the Options tab is the default value for this
parameter.
If Bottom is selected for the Geometry parameter, SURFCAM indicates if the rapid
plane is below the top of the part. SURFCAM automatically adds the Rapid Plane
Clearance value and the Amount To Remove in Z value for the new Rapid Plane
value.
Plunge Clearance
The Plunge Clearance parameter controls the start point locations for the plunge
moves.
The start point of every plunge move to the first depth of cut will be this distance
above the part.
This distance is relative to the top of the part or to the next level of material that is
cut. The start points for the Plunge moves to the next depth of cuts are this
distance above the material.
Geometry
Top
The chained geometry defines the top of a contour or pocket. SURFCAM
subtracts the Amount to Remove in Z from the Z coordinate of the chained
geometry to calculate the bottom of the contour or pocket.
Bottom
The chained geometry defines the bottom of a contour or pocket. SURFCAM
adds the Amount to Remove in Z to the Z coordinate of the chained geometry
to calculate the top of the contour or pocket.
Top Z
Select the Top Z option to enter the absolute Z coordinate of the top of a
contour or pocket. SURFCAM subtracts the Amount to Remove in Z from the
Top Z value that is entered to calculate the bottom of the contour or pocket.
572
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Bottom Z
Select the Bottom Z option to enter the absolute Z coordinate of the bottom of
a contour or pocket. SURFCAM adds the Amount to Remove in Z to the Bottom
Z value that is entered to calculate the top of the contour or pocket.
Taper Angle
You can cut a contour or pocket that has sides that are not perpendicular. These
sides must have a constant slope. The Taper Angle parameter is the measure of
the slope of the non-perpendicular sides of the pocket or contour.
The Finish Cut On parameter on the Options tab is set to the All Depths option if
you enter a value that is not 0. You can reset this option to the Final Depth Only
option if necessary.
Cutter Compensation Side Clearance Amount
Offset
SURFCAM offsets the toolpath from the geometry by the indicated radius of the
tool. SURFCAM automatically finds possible gouges and prevents them.
Offset with Clearance
SURFCAM offsets the toolpath from the geometry by the indicated radius of the
tool. A side clearance move is automatically put at the entry and exit locations
of the cut. The length of the side clearance move is equal to the Side Clearance
Amount field plus the Finish Spacing (On Sides) amount.
The side clearance moves will be perpendicular to the toolpath motion at each
location. SURFCAM automatically finds possible gouges and prevents them.
Offset with Compensation
This option is the like Offset with Clearance with the following exception.
A Comp Left or Comp Right command (assigned by the post processor) is put
in front of the entry side clearance move. A Comp Off command (assigned by
the post processor) is put at the end of the exit side clearance move.
Part/Edge (Contour only)
SURFCAM will drive the tool along the part geometry, in the direction that the
Cutting Method defines. The tool is on the offset side that you selected. The
gouge avoidance function is not active.
Part/Edge with Clearance (Contour only)
A side clearance move is applied at the entry and exit locations of the cut. The
length of the side clearance move is the value of the Side Clearance Amount
Chapter 11 2 Axis
573
parameter plus the tool radius. The side clearance move is perpendicular to the
tool motion at each location, in the offset direction.
Part/Edge with Compensation (Contour only)
A side clearance move is applied at the entry and exit locations of the cut. The
length of the side clearance move is the value of the Side Clearance Amount
parameter plus the tool radius. The side clearance move is perpendicular to the
tool motion at each location, in the offset direction.
The NCC code includes a Comp Right command before the entry side
clearance move or a Comp Left command. The NCC code also includes a
Comp Off command at the end of the exit, side clearance move. The post
processor assigns these comp commands.
Note
The next five parameters have two columns of data. The On Sides column
refers to stock removal in the X and Y directions. The In Z column refers to
stock removal in the Z direction. SURFCAM uses the five On Sides
parameters to calculate 1) the distance from the contour to the first tool
pass, 2) the number of rough passes to make and 3) the distance from the
contour of the last tool pass.
Amount To Remove
This parameter indicates the approximate amount of material to remove from the
part, either On Sides or In Z.
The actual amount to remove is the difference between the values of the Amount
To Remove and the Stock To Leave parameters.
When a contour cut is made, the Amount To Remove is added to the Stock To
Leave in the On Sides column. This result is compared to other calculations to
determine the distance from the contour to the first tool pass that cuts material.
The other calculations, in turn, determine the number of rough passes that are
made. SURFCAM uses the value in the In Z column to calculate the top and the
bottom of pockets and contours. (See the Geometry parameter descriptions.) If
this value is set to 0, SURFCAM makes a single pass at a distance from the
geometry equal to the Stock To Leave.
Note
Only the In Z column is available for the Pocket operation.
Rough Spacing
Rough Spacing is the distance between 1) two rough passes, or 2) the last rough
pass and the first finish pass. Rough Spacing is also the amount of material the
tool removes on the second through the last rough pass. The first rough pass can
remove less than this amount of material.
574
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Note
If Rough Spacing is greater than the tool radius, SURFCAM will not do a
complete rough cut of some areas (like around islands). Use the default
values for the Rough Spacing parameter for best results.
Note
The default values for Rough Spacing are taken from the Side Roughing
Step Size and the Depth Roughing Step Size parameters on the Options
tab.
Note
If you enter a Rough Spacing value that is greater than the tool radius,
SURFCAM displays the following Warning.
Rough Spacing Warning
Finish Passes
Enter the number of finish passes that you need. If the Finish Passes parameter
is set to 0, all passes are rough passes.
You can have any number of finish passes. Each finish pass will be the Finish
Spacing distance away from the previous pass.
Finish Spacing
Note
The default values for Finish Spacing are taken from the Side Finishing
Step Size and the Depth Finishing Step Size parameters on the Options
tab.
The value you enter is the distance between finish passes or the distance between
the last rough pass and the first finish pass. The value is also the amount of
material the tool removes on each finish pass.
If this value is 0, the finish passes are spring passes.
Stock To Leave
The Stock To Leave is the amount of stock you require left on the chained
geometry after the cutting passes have been done.
Enter the amount of stock to leave on the sides of pockets and contours for the On
Sides parameter.
Enter the amount of stock to leave at the bottom of pockets and contours for the
In Z parameter.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
575
The amount of material that is removed will be the difference between the Amount
To Remove and the Stock To Leave parameters.
If the amount is negative, SURFCAM over cuts the contour on the sides or over
cuts the contour on the bottom.
Leadin Move or Leadout Move
Click the button to display the correct dialog box.
Note
See Leadin/Leadout Parameters for 3, 4 and 5 Axis, page 497.
Note
See Lead In Out Type, page 797 for EDM.
Plunge Type
Click the Plunge Type button to display the Plunge Information dialog box.
See Plunge Parameters for 2, 3, 4 and 5 Axis, page 500.
Plunge Rate (Face Mill)
The Plunge Type button is not on the Face Mill Cut Control tab. Most plunge
moves are made on the side of the material.
A Plunge Rate parameter is available for the Face Mill operation. Select the
Plunge, Feed, or Rapid option.
Plunge and Feed take their values from the Tool Information tab. Rapid refers to
the rapid plunge rate of the machine.
Machine Left-over Material
Select the Machine Left-over Material check box to do a Rest Material operation
after a Pocket or Contour operation. The Rest Machining dialog box is
automatically displayed after a Pocket or contour operation is completed. See
Rest Material, page 605.
Enable High Speed Machining
This parameter is available in the 2 Axis Pocket, Contour, and Rest Material
operations, and the 3 Axis Z Rough operation.
Note
This parameter is only available in the 2 Axis operations when the Cutter
Compensation parameter is set to Offset.
Select the check box to increase the speed of the tool when it changes from one
tool motion to the next.
Tool speed decreases when the tool must go from one move to a non-tangent
move.
If a tool move is tangent to the next move, tool speed can remain the same.
576
Chapter 11 2 Axis
SURFCAM puts one tangent arc or two tangent arcs between two non-tangent tool
moves for high speed machining in 2 Axis. The tangent arcs increase the tool
speed.
Normal Machining
High Speed Machining
Minimum Radius
Enter the minimum radius of the arcs to use in high speed machining.
Maximum Radius
Enter the maximum radius of the two arcs that replace the linear step over in
high speed machining.
Disable for finish passes
Select the check box so that SURFCAM will not put the tangent arcs into a finish
cut move during high speed machining.

= Not Selected
11.1.2.1

= Selected
Leadin and Leadout Parameters for 2 Axis Operations
A leadin move is a move that is put between a plunge move and the first tool move
that cuts material. A leadout move is a move away from the part after the last tool
move that cuts material.
SURFCAM controls the leadin and leadout moves with the parameters on the
Leadin and Leadout Information dialog boxes. Click the Leadin or the Leadout
Chapter 11 2 Axis
577
button to display a dialog box. The parameters on the two dialog boxes are the
same.
Leadin Information dialog box
The 2 Axis Pocket, Contour and Rest Material operations, and the 3 Axis Z Rough
and Z Finish operations use this Leadin Information dialog box.
The Leadin Information dialog boxes are different for other operations.
1.
See Leadin and Leadout Parameters for the Face Mill Operation, page 578
for the Face Mill operation.
2.
See Leadin/Leadout Parameters for 3, 4 and 5 Axis, page 497 for the
Contour 3D operation.
3.
See Top Lead Move and Bottom Lead Move, page 616 for the Thread Mill
operation.
Lead Type
None
Select this option if you do not need a leadin or leadout move. The tool will
plunge at the start point of the first tool move that cuts material.
Line On Final
A move that is linear is used for the leadin or leadout move on the final pass.
No other pass will have a leadin or leadout move.
Arc On Final
An arc move is used for the leadin or leadout move on the final pass. The
arc move is tangent to the final pass and moves in the same direction.
The tool can leave a mark on the side of the part at the start point of the final
pass. An arc move for the leadin can prevent this mark.
Line On All
A move that is linear is used for the leadin or leadout move on all passes.
578
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Arc On All
An arc move is used for the leadin or leadout move on all passes.
Length
Indicate the length of the lead move if you selected the Line option for the Lead
Type.
On the leadin or leadout moves, SURFCAM automatically finds possible
gouges and prevents them.
If the value of Length causes a gouge, SURFCAM automatically trims the
leadin or leadout move. The trimmed move is shown in a different color on the
toolpath display. The different color will not appear in later backplots.
Moves that are trimmed less than half of the original length are shown in yellow.
The leadin or leadout moves that are trimmed more than half of the original
length are shown in red.
A message box is displayed if a leadin or leadout move of any length can cause
a gouge. The message box tells you that there will not be a lead move. A small
square box is put at the point of the discarded lead move in the toolpath
drawing.
Constant, Cutter Radius, and Step Size, page 502
Angle
This parameter is the angle the lead move makes with a cut move when the
lead move is a line.
This parameter is the angular measure or size of the arc when the lead move
is an arc.
Radius
If you selected Arc for the Lead Type, indicate the radius of the lead move. See
Constant, Cutter Radius, and Step Size, page 502.
Feed Rate
11.1.2.2
Leadin and Leadout Parameters for the Face Mill Operation
Click the Leadin or Leadout button to display the dialog box for the Leadin
Information or the Leadout Information.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
579
Length
The lead move for the Face Mill operation is a line. SURFCAM uses the number
you enter and the entry in the next field to calculate the line length. See
Feed Rate
11.1.3
Material Tab
A Material tab is available for the Pocket, Contour, and Face Mill operations. These
operations can remove the material around material boundaries. Use the Material
command on the Pocket, or Contour chain menu to select the material boundary. See
Use Pocket To Remove The Material Near the Material Boundary, page 582.
Tool Center
When the material is removed from between the part and the material boundary,
Tool Center controls the location of the tool center.
580
Chapter 11 2 Axis
On
The center of the tool will be even with but not go past the material boundary.
Beyond Material
The tool center will go outside the material boundary. The Distance From
Boundary parameter is the distance outside the boundary the tool center can
go.
Before Material
The tool center remains within the material boundary. The Distance From
Boundary parameter is the distance from the boundary the tool center will
remain.
Distance From Boundary
This parameter is available when the Beyond Material option or the Before
Material option is selected for the Tool Center parameter.
This parameter is the distance from the material boundary past which the tool
center will not move.
Constant / Cutter Radius
See Constant, Cutter Radius, and Step Size, page 502.
Material Cut Mode
This field is not available for the Contour operation.
Spiral
The offset tool passes will be parallel to the material boundary. The first tool
pass is at or near the material boundary. The following tool passes are toward
the center of the part.
Zig Zag
The offset tool passes will be parallel to a vector that you indicate. After the first
tool pass, each pass is in the opposite direction of the previous pass.
Zig
The tool motion is like Zig Zag except that each tool pass is in the same
direction. After each tool pass, the tool retracts and moves so that the tool
motion is always in the same direction.
This parameter is available in the Pocket and the Face Mill operations.
Check the box for high speed machining to remove the material along a material
boundary.
See Enable High Speed Machining, page 575.
See Use Pocket To Remove The Material Near the Material Boundary, page 582.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
581
See Remove the Material Near and Up to the Material Boundary, page 590.
11.1.4
The Options Tab
11.2
POCKET
The Pocket operation removes the stock that is inside a closed boundary with 2 axis (XY)
tool moves in Z direction increments. One Pocket operation can cut several pockets.
If a pocket contains several islands at different depths, SURFCAM can cut those islands.
SURFCAM cuts only the pockets and the islands that you chain.
The Pocket operation can remove the material that is between a contour on the part and
the edge of the material.
You can select one of three different pocket cut modes. These modes are Spiral, Zig Zag
and Zig. See The Pocket Cut Modes, page 583.
Note
The Pocket operation supports the rotary-table index moves by using CView
machining. Indicate the correct CView and set the Coord button to the VIEW
option. The index move is generated before any tool motion.
To use the Pocket operation, click the Pocket command on the NC > 2 Axis menu.
SURFCAM displays the Select Chain menu and prompts you to select the start point of
the pocket. Use the Select Chain menu to chain the pockets and the islands to cut.
SURFCAM normally selects the plunge points in a pocket. To create a different plunge
point, use the Plunge command on the NC > 2 Axis menu. See Plunge, page 135.
To remove the material near the material boundary, identify that boundary with the
Material command on the Select Chain menu. See Use Pocket To Remove The Material
Near the Material Boundary, page 582 below.
If the pockets have islands at different depths, click the Options command on the NC >
2 Axis menu. The Options tab for 2 Axis is displayed. Change the Path Island Depths
parameter to the Multiple option. See Path Island Depths, page 625.
After you chain the pockets and the islands, create any needed plunge points or select
material boundaries, click the Done command.
SURFCAM displays the 2 Axis Pocket dialog box.
1.
The Cut Control Tab, page 569
2.
Material Tab, page 579
3.
The Options Tab, page 581
582
Chapter 11 2 Axis
4.
Tool Information Tab, page 462
After you click OK on the 2 Axis Pocket dialog box, SURFCAM creates the toolpath and
displays it on the screen. SURFCAM then displays the Keep Operation dialog box. Click
the Accept button to keep the operation.
To save the toolpath, you must remember to use the Save command on the File menu.
11.2.1
Use Pocket To Remove The Material Near the Material Boundary
You can use the Pocket operation to remove the material near and up to a material
boundary. You must have drawn the edge of the material and your drawing must
contain an inner contour. SURFCAM removes the material between the edge of the
material and the inner contour.
When you click the Pocket command on the 2 Axis menu, the Select Chain menu is
displayed. Do the following steps to remove the material between the two contours.
1.
Click the Part button on the Select Chain menu and chain the inner contour.
2.
Before you click the Done button, click the Material button.
SURFCAM prompts you to select the first point on the material boundary.
3.
Chain the material boundary.
4.
Click the Done button.
See Material, page 135 for a description of how to use the Material button.
SURFCAM displays the 2 Axis Pocket dialog box. Two parameters on the Material
tab of this dialog box control the amount of material that is removed. These
parameters are Tool Center and Distance From Boundary. See Material Tab, page
579.
To do high speed machining when you remove the material near a material boundary,
check the Enable High Speed Machining box on the Material tab. Do not use the like
box on the Cut Control tab. See Enable High Speed Machining, page 580.
After you click OK, SURFCAM prompts you to click the inside of a pocket. Click the
area between the part contour and the material boundary.
SURFCAM draws the toolpath.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
11.2.2
583
The Pocket Cut Modes
The Pocket operation has three cut modes. These modes are Spiral, Zig Zag and Zig.
Select these modes with the Pocket Cut Mode parameter on the Cut Control tab.
When the Spiral mode is used, SURFCAM uses offsets from the pocket and the island
contours to analyze the pocket. Any section of an offset that creates a gouge is not
used.
The first offset is equal to the tool radius. The next offsets equal the value on the Cut
Control tab for the Finish Spacing On Sides parameter. The value of the Finish
Passes parameter gives the number of these finish passes. The last offsets equal the
value for the Rough Spacing On Sides parameter. The number of these passes
depends on the amount of the material that is left to remove.
The offset contours are created until there is no space for another contour. The areas
of the pocket that were not looked at in the first analysis are then analyzed in a like
method.
When the analysis is complete, the pocket contains one or more areas with a single
contour.
When the Pocket toolpath is created, the tool will plunge into a point on the innermost
single contour. The plunge point will be the point on the innermost contour that is most
near to the original select point. The select point is the point you first select to indicate
the start point of the pocket.
The innermost contour is then cut. The tool then moves to the next contour. The tool
moves in the general direction of the select point. Normally this direction is
perpendicular to the side of the pocket that contains the select point.
This knowledge gives you some control over the location of the plunge point and the
direction of the offset tool moves. You can create another select point with the Edit >
Trim / Break menu if you need more control.
After the first area with a single contour is cut, SURFCAM cuts the area of the next
innermost single contour. The contours that follow the shape of the pocket boundary
are the last contours that are cut.
584
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Spiral pocket cut with two areas with a single contour.
The Spiral pocket cut with the island avoidance
When the Zig Zag mode is used, tool motion starts with a linear move across the
pocket. The second tool move is an offset move along the pocket boundary. The third
tool move is parallel to the first move but in the opposite direction. Before the pocket
operation begins, you must indicate the direction of the first linear move with a vector
that you select.
The Zig Zag cuts are in two directions. The Zig Zag cuts are different from the Zig cuts
that are only in one direction.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
585
Top View
View: 7
Zig Zag Pocket Cut
When the Zig mode is used, tool motion starts with a linear move across the pocket.
The tool then does a vertical rapid move. Then the tool makes a horizontal move
along a diagonal back to a position over the start point of the next linear move. The
tool then plunges to the start point of the next linear move.
586
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Top View
View: 7
Zig pocket cut
Chapter 11 2 Axis
11.2.3
Pocketing Examples
Pocket cut with several pockets
A pocket cut with the arc leadin moves for all passes
587
588
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Leadin Move Type

Leadout Move Type
Plunge Type
Arc On All
None
Plunge
ON SIDES
Amount To Remove
Rough Spacing
Finish Passes
Finish Spacing
Stock To Leave
.20
0
0
0
IN Z
.5
.5
0
0
0
A pocket cut with the arc leadin moves on the final pass only and no finish pass
Leadin Move Type

Leadout Move Type
Plunge Type
Amount To Remove
Rough Spacing
Finish Passes
Finish Spacing
Stock To Leave
Arc On Final
None
Plunge
ON SIDES
.20
0
0
0
IN Z
.5
.5
0
0
0
Chapter 11 2 Axis
589
Pocket with the rough and finish passes
Leadin Move Type

Leadout Move Type
Plunge Type
Amount To Remove
Rough Spacing
Finish Passes
Finish Spacing
Stock To Leave
11.3
Arc On Final
None
Plunge
ON SIDES
.20
1
.02
0
IN Z
.5
.5
0
0
0
CONTOUR
The Contour operation cuts along the contour of a boundary. You can cut on the left side
of the contour, the right side, or on top of the contour. You can use the Contour operation
to remove the material between the edge of the material and a contour.
A contour boundary is either open or closed. See Open and Closed Boundary
Considerations, page 591.
Before you do a Contour operation, you must define the amount of stock to remove.
Enter the values for the Amount To Remove (On Sides, In Z) on the Cut Control tab.
590
Chapter 11 2 Axis
You can do the rough and finish operations separately or in one operation.
Note
The Contour operation supports the rotary-table index moves by using CView
machining. Indicate the correct CView and set the Coord to the VIEW option.
The index move is generated before any tool motion.
To use the Contour operation, click the Contour command on the NC > 2 Axis menu.
SURFCAM displays the Select Chain menu. You can Use this menu to do three
functions.
1.
You can create plunge points near a contour. To create a plunge point, click the
Plunge command. A prompt tells you to select the plunge points and click the Done
button. See Plunge, page 135.
2.
You can remove the material between the material boundary and the part. To
remove this material, click the Material command. A prompt tells you to select the
start point of the material boundary. See Remove the Material Near and Up to the
Material Boundary, page 590.
3.
You can cut along the contour of the part. To cut along the contour, click the Part
command. A prompt tells you to select the start point of the contour.
Chain the contours, create the plunge point you need, select the material boundary if you
need and click the Done command.
The 2Axis Contour dialog box is displayed.
1.
2.
3.
Material Tab, page 579
4.
The Options Tab, page 581.
After you click OK, a prompt tells you select the side of contour to cut.
Click the side of the contour to cut. SURFCAM creates the toolpath and displays it on the
screen. SURFCAM then displays the Keep Operation dialog box. Click the Accept button
to keep the operation.
To save the toolpath, you must remember to use the Save command on the File menu.
11.3.1
Remove the Material Near and Up to the Material Boundary
Use the Contour operation to remove the material near and up to a material boundary.
1.
You must have drawn a contour that shows the edge of your material.
2.
Measure the maximum distance between the contour to the edge of the
material boundary.
3.
Click the Contour command on the 2 Axis menu.

Chapter 11 2 Axis
591
4.
Click the Material command. A prompt tells you to select the start point of the
material boundary. Chain the contour of the material boundary. Do not click the
Done button. See Material, page 135 for a description of how to use the
Material command.
5.
Click the Part command. A prompt tells you to select the start point of the part
contour. Chain the contour of the part. Then click the Done command.
6.
SURFCAM displays the 2Axis Contour dialog box. Set the Amount To Remove
(On Sides) parameter to the maximum distance between the contour and the
material boundary. This parameter is on the Cut Control tab. See step 2.
7.
Make the correct selections for the Tool Center and Distance From Boundary
parameters on the Material Tab, page 579.
The amount of material that is removed near the material boundary depends
on these selections. You can enter an acceptable value for the Amount To
Remove and not remove all the material. Set the Tool Center parameter on the
Material tab to Before Material. If the Distance From Boundary parameter is
larger than needed, the Contour operation will not cut some material near the
boundary.
8.
Click OK on the 2 Axis Contour dialog box.
9.
A prompt tells you to select the side of the contour to cut. Click the area
between the part contour and the material boundary.
10.
SURFCAM then draws the toolpath.
11.3.2
Open and Closed Boundary Considerations
Closed Contours
SURFCAM calculates the direction of the cut along the contour when you cut a
closed contour. SURFCAM calculates the direction from the Cutting Method,
spindle direction and the side of the contour that is selected. See Cutting Method,
page 569. The spindle direction can be a clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise
(CCW) direction.
Climb, page 570

The tool moves along the left side of the contour when the spindle moves in a CW
direction. The tool moves around the contour in a CCW direction when the tool is
in the inside of a closed contour. The tool moves around the contour in a CW
direction when the tool is on the outside of a closed contour.
Conventional, page 570
The tool moves along the right side of the contour when the spindle moves in a
CW direction. The tool moves around the contour in a CW direction when the tool
592
Chapter 11 2 Axis
is in the inside of a closed contour. The tool moves around the contour in a CCW
direction when the tool is on the outside of a closed contour.
On
The tool moves around the contour in the direction that the contour was chained.
Open Contours
SURFCAM calculates the side of the contour to cut when you cut an open contour.
SURFCAM calculates the side from the Cutting Method, the spindle direction and
the direction the contour was chained.
Climb
The spindle normally turns in the CW direction. If the open contour is chained in a
CW direction, the cut will be on the left side.
Conventional
If the open contour is chained in a CW direction, the tool cuts on the right side of
the contour.
On
The tool is aligned on the contour. The tool moves around the contour in the
direction that the contour was chained.
11.3.3
Contour Examples
Multiple Contour cuts
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Contour with several Z level cuts
Amount To Remove
Rough Spacing
Finish Passes
Finish Spacing
Stock To Leave
ON SIDES
0
.20
0
0
0
Contour cut around islands
IN Z
1
.5
0
0
0
593
594
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Contour cut around clamps
The Contour cut with the arc leadin moves for all passes
Leadin Move Type

Leadout Move Type
Plunge Type
Amount To Remove
Rough Spacing
Finish Passes
Finish Spacing
Stock To Leave
Arc On All
None
Plunge
ON SIDES
0
.20
3
.06
0
IN Z
1
0
0
0
0
Chapter 11 2 Axis
The Contour cut with the arc leadin moves on the finish pass only.
Leadin Move Type

Leadout Move Type
Plunge Type
Amount To Remove
Rough Spacing
Finish Passes
Finish Spacing
Stock To Leave
Arc On Final
None
Plunge
ON SIDES
0
.20
3
.06
0
IN Z
1
0
0
0
0
595
596
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Contour cut with the rough and finish passes
Amount To Remove
Rough Spacing
Finish Passes
Finish Spacing
Stock To Leave
11.4
ON SIDES
.357
.0625
3
.02
0
IN Z
1
0
0
0
0
CONTOUR 3D
Use this operation to cut any element in 3D space. SURFCAM sets the tool orientation
to Top View.
Procedure
1. Click either the NC > 2 Axis > Contour 3D command or the NC > 3 Axis > Contour
3D command. SURFCAM displays the Select chain menu.
2.
Select the first element of the chain.
3.
Then select the last element of the chain.
4.
Continue this process or click the Done command.

Chapter 11 2 Axis
597
After you click the Done command, the Contour 3D dialog box is displayed. See
1.
2.
See The Cut Control Tab, page 569 for the descriptions of parameters not described in
the following list.
598
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Cutting Method
On Contour
This option makes the center line of the tool move along the path of the chained
elements. Use this option to cut a groove or slot. When you use a ball end mill, the
center of the ball is moves along the contour.
Cutter path for On Contour with the path set to Center
On Top
This option keeps the tool tangent to the contour while the tool tip is above the
contour.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
599
Cutter path for On Top with the path set to Tip
Stock To Leave
This option is available when the Cutting Method is set to On Top. The Stock To
Leave indicates the amount of material that is left on the surface after the toolpath is
created.
Rapid Plane
See Rapid Plane, page 599.
Minimum Z
This parameter sets the minimum Z level move that is allowed. The toolpath will not
move below this level. The toolpath keeps at this minimum Z level until the end of the
contour or a higher Z level is found.
Leadin/Leadout Move
See Leadin/Leadout Parameters for 3, 4 and 5 Axis, page 497.
Plunge Type
Plunge Side
The side of the contour (Left or Right) on which a lead move will be done. This
parameter is not active when the Plunge Type parameter is set to Plunge.
11.5
DRILL
600
11.6
Chapter 11 2 Axis
PILOT HOLE
The Pilot Hole operation cuts a hole to prepare for another operation that cannot cut a
hole. This hole is called a pilot hole. The operation is needed when the second operation
uses a tool that cannot cut in a plunge move.
The Pilot Hole operation analyzes the toolpath for the other operation to find the location
and the depth of each drill move. The Pilot Hole operation then creates a toolpath that
drills these holes.
You can use the Pilot Hole operation to cut a smaller center hole to prepare for a later
drill operation.
SURFCAM automatically puts the Pilot Hole operation in a location where it will be done
before the second operation.
When you click the Pilot Hole command, the Select NC Operation dialog box is
displayed.
A prompt tells you select an operation that has holes that need a pilot hole. The
operations from the current project are displayed.
Click the operation that has holes that need a pilot hole. Then click the OK button. The
2 Axis Pilot Drill dialog box is displayed. Enter the required parameter values on the three
tabs of this dialog box.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
601
1.
All of the fields on this Tool Information tab are also contained on the common Tool
Information Tab, page 462.
2.
Click the Pilot Drill Control tab to display the following dialog box.
602
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Cycle Type
Drill
The Drill option is straight drill cycle type operation. The drill makes a plunge move
to the bottom of the hole. The tool then makes a rapid move to a level above the
hole. (A G81 move).
Peck
The Peck option is a normal peck cycle type operation. (A G83 move).
Center Drill
If you set the Center Drill parameter to Yes, a center hole is cut for each pilot hole.
Set the depth of the center drill hole with the Hole Depth parameter. If a center drill is
Chapter 11 2 Axis
603
done, repeat the Pilot Hole operation with the Center Drill set to No so that the pilot
hole is the correct depth.
Hole Depth
The Hole Depth parameter is active when the Center Drill parameter is set to the Yes
option. The Hole Depth is the depth to center drill.
Leave Clearance
Enter a value for the Leave Clearance parameter to leave some material at the bottom
of the hole. The material at the bottom of a hole prevents the tool marks at the bottom
of pocket operations.
Initial Rapid
This parameter is the absolute Z plane for the start point of the drill cycle.
Plunge Clearance
See Plunge Clearance, page 523.
Retract To
This parameter is the level to which the drill retracts at the end of the drill cycle.
Rapid Plane
This option makes a G98 move. The Initial Rapid parameter value indicates the
level to which the tool retracts.
Plunge Clearance
This option is a G99 move. The Plunge Clearance value indicates the level to
which the tool retracts.
Peck Increment
This parameter is the distance that the tool moves on each peck. After a peck of this
distance, the tool retracts. Some of the material is removed when the tool retracts.
Dwell Time
The Dwell Time parameter is the time, in milliseconds, the tool remains at the bottom
of the hole.
After you click OK on the 2 Axis Pilot Drill dialog box, SURFCAM creates the toolpath for
the Pilot Hole operation.
The number of points selected and the number of the points that are sorted are printed
on the prompt line. SURFCAM displays the Keep Operation dialog box. Click the Accept
button to keep the operation.
The Pilot Hole operation is put above the operation that needs the pilot holes in the
operations tree of the NC Operations Manager dialog box.
604
11.7
Chapter 11 2 Axis
FACE MILL
The Face Mill operation makes a flat surface on the top of the material.
To use the Face Mill operation, click the Face Mill command on the NC 2 Axis menu.
SURFCAM displays the Select chain menu. A prompt tells you to select the start point of
the material boundary. See The Select Chain Menu, page 134.
Chain the boundary of the material you need to face off and click the Done button.
SURFCAM displays the 2 Axis Face Mill dialog box.
1.
2.
3.
The complete removal of the material near the boundary depends on the correct
selections for two parameters on the Material tab. When the Tool Center parameter is
set to Before Material, the value for the Distance From parameter must be correct. If the
Distance From Boundary parameter is larger than needed, the Face Mill operation will
not cut some material near the boundary. See Material Tab, page 579.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
605
After you click OK on the 2 Axis Face Mill dialog box, SURFCAM creates the toolpath
and displays it on the screen. SURFCAM then displays the Keep Operation dialog box.
11.8
REST MATERIAL
The Rest Material operation removes the material that a Pocket or Contour operation did
not remove. When a Pocket or a Contour operation is done, some material normally
remains on the sides of the part. The material normally remains in the areas that are
smaller than the tool.
The Rest Material operation removes the material from the sides of contours and
pockets. If some material is left at the bottom of a pocket, other methods are used to
remove that material.
A Rest Material operation must follow the operation that did not remove all of the
material. The Rest Material operation is an operation that is done on a previous
operation.
To do a Rest Material operation on a Pocket or a Contour operation, click the Rest
Material command on the 2 Axis menu. SURFCAM displays the Select NC Operation
dialog box. A prompt tells you to select an operation.
606
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Click a Pocket or Contour operation and click OK. SURFCAM displays the Select Chain
menu. A prompt tells you to select the start point of the pocket or contour. After you chain
the pocket or contour, click the Done button.
SURFCAM displays the 2 Axis Rest Machining dialog box. That box contains the 2 Axis
Rest Options tab, shown below, which contains the parameters that are unique to the
Rest Material operation. See also
1.
2.
3.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
607
The following are the descriptions of the parameters on the 2 Axis Rest Options tab.
Remaining Stock Overlap

There will be points on the part contour at which the remaining material starts and
ends. This parameter is the distance past these points that you require the tool to
move on its final pass. Enter a positive value to make sure that the remaining material
at these points is removed
Cutting Method
Contour Cut
The tool will plunge off to the side of the rest material. The center of the tool then
moves to the halfway point along the boundary of the rest material. From there the
tool cuts into the material. The Contour Cut is the most used method to cut the rest
material.
Pocket Cut
The tool will plunge off to the side of the rest material. The tool then cuts into the
center of the material. The tool cuts from the center to the outside of the material.
608
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Contour Cutting Method
Pocket Cutting Method
Sort Type
Sort Type applies to the condition when the rest material is connected to two separate
features of the part, like two islands.
The material that is connected to two features of the part has two properties.
1.
There are two areas of the material that are an equal distance from the two
features.
2.
There is a middle area of the material. A set of closed toolpaths can cut this
area.
The Rest Material cut starts with the middle area. The Sort Type parameter controls
how the two areas of material near the two part features are cut.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
609
The cut starts with the middle area.
Auto
After the middle area is cut, the area next one part feature is cut. After that area is
cut, the area next to the other feature is cut.
None
After the middle area is cut, SURFCAM cuts the two areas of material near the part
features with the same toolpath. One tool pass cuts one area. The next tool pass
cuts the other area. This sequence is repeated until both of the areas are cut.
610
Chapter 11 2 Axis
The area next to one feature is cut.
11.9
The other area next to a feature is cut.
THREAD MILL
Thread Mill is a 2 Axis operation that cuts external and internal threads that have
diameters that are larger than the tool diameter.
The external threads are cut from round stock with a diameter that is larger than the
Major Diameter of the thread. The Major Diameter is the outside diameter of the thread.
The Internal threads are cut from round holes. The Drill, Pocket or casting operations are
used to create the round hole. The round hole must be smaller than the Minor Diameter.
The Minor Diameter is the inner diameter of the thread.
The major diameter of external threads and the minor diameter of internal threads must
result from a cut by a tool. These diameters must not come from an existing surface.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
1.
Major Diameter
2.
Minor Diameter
3.
Thread Depth
4.
Thread Length
5.
Pitch
1
Internal Thread
1.
Major Diameter
2.
Minor Diameter
2
External Thread
Thread Features
Click the NC > 2 Axis > Thread Mill command to see the Thread Mill dialog box.
611
612
Chapter 11 2 Axis
11.9.1
The Tool, Tool Diameter, Default Major Diameter, Pitch, and Number of Teeth
parameters on the Tool Information tab for the Thread Mill operation are unique.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
613
See Tool Information Tab, page 462 for a description of the parameters that are not
described in the following list. The default values for the following parameters come
from the Thread Mill tool library.
Select Tool
The name of the current tool is displayed. Click the Select Tool button to display
the Select Thread Mill Tool dialog box used to select a new tool.
The values of some of these tool parameters are transferred to the Tool
Information tab when the tool is selected.
Default Major Diameter

This parameter is the smallest size for a major diameter that the current tool
normally cuts.
Pitch
The Pitch parameter is the distance from a point on an insert tooth to a like point
on the next tooth. If the value of Number of Teeth is 1, the Pitch is not used.
614
Chapter 11 2 Axis
11.9.2
Cut Control Tab
Thread Information
See the figure Thread Features, page 611.
Thread Type
The types of the thread that Thread Mill cuts are Internal and External.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
615
Thread Direction
The thread can have Right Hand or Left Hand direction.
Major Diameter
The Major Diameter is the outside or largest diameter of the thread for external
and internal threads.
Thread Pitch
This parameter is the pitch of the selected Thread Mill tool. This value is taken
from the Tool Library. The value is shown in IPT (inches per tooth) or TPI (teeth
per inch). The metric mode uses MMPT and TPMM in the place of IPT and TPI.
You cannot override this value.
Minor Diameter
The Minor Diameter is the inside or smallest diameter of the thread for external
or internal threads.
Number of Starts
A thread can have several start points. The number of starts of the thread can
be 1 to 10.
Use Centerline
Select Yes to use the centerline to define the length of the thread. If you select
Yes, the field for the Thread Length parameter will not be available.
Thread Length
This parameter is the length of the thread.
Cutting Information
Cutting Direction
Select the direction that the cutter must move in the thread hole. Up and Down
are the two options.
The Cutting Method that is used is displayed to the right of the list box. The
Cutting Method can be Climb or Conventional.
The Cutting Method name is displayed to the right of the list box.
The selections for the Thread Type, the Thread Direction and the Cutting
Direction parameters determine the Cutting Method that is used.
The Cutting Method will be Climb when the Thread Type is External, Thread
Direction is Right Hand, and the Cutting Direction is Down.
Top Overrun
Indicate the over run at the top end of the thread.
The field to the right indicates how the over run is calculated. Select the
Threads option if the Top Overrun parameter is measured in the number of
616
Chapter 11 2 Axis
threads. Select the distance unit of measure if the Top Overrun parameter is
measured in the number of distance units.
Bottom Overrun
Indicate the over run at the bottom end of the thread.
See Top Overrun, page 615 for a description of the field to the right.
Stock To Leave
This parameter is the amount of material to leave on the side of the thread.
No. of Rough Passes
This parameter is the number of rough passes to use.
No. of Finish Passes
This parameter is the number of finish passes to use.
Depth of Each Finish Pass
This parameter indicates the amount of material to cut on each finish pass.
Rapid Plane
This parameter is the level in Z at which the rapid moves between holes are
done.
Plunge Clearance
Plunge At Center
Check the box to make the tool plunge at the center of the thread hole. If the
box is not checked, the plunge point will be over the start point of the lead move.
Plunge with Rapid Move
Check the box to plunge with a rapid move. If the box is not checked, the plunge
is at plunge speed.
Start Angle at Top
The Cartesian angular location for the first start. See Number of Starts, page
615.
If the Number of Starts is greater than one, additional Starts are put equally
around the circumference of the thread.
Cutter Comp
Check this box to enter a value for the cutter compensation in the box to the
right.
Top Lead Move and Bottom Lead Move
The Thread Mill operation must have a leadin move and a leadout move.
SURFCAM does the leadin or leadout moves at the top or bottom of the thread.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
617
There are four possible leadin or leadout moves for the Thread Mill operation.
These four moves are Radial Line, Tangent Arc, Tangent Line and Tangent
Helix. All four moves are allowed on external threads. Only the Radial Line,
Tangent Arc and Tangent Helix moves are allowed on Internal threads.
There are times when a Lead move is not allowed in Thread Mill. If a lead move
is not allowed, the Lead move settings in the Lead Move Information dialog box
are changed to their default values.
An allowed Lead move and the moves default settings change with the different
settings for several parameters. When a Lead move is allowed depends on the
Tool, Major Diameter, Minor Diameter, Cutter Comp, and Thread Type
parameters.
If any parameter changes make a current Lead move not allowed, a warning
message is displayed. The message appears after you click OK, Apply or a
Lead move button.
When you exit the message box, the Lead move settings are changed to their
default values.
Click the Defaults button on the Lead Move Information dialog box to display
the default lead move settings.
Lead Move Information dialog box
Lead Type
Radial Line
The cutter moves toward and leaves the material along a line normal to
the material.
618
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Tangent Arc
The cutter moves toward and leaves the material along an arc tangent to
the material. (The Z level of the tool remains the same during the lead
move.)
Tangent Helix
The cutter moves toward and leaves the material along a helix that is
tangent to the material. (The Z level of the tool changes during the lead
move.)
Tangent Line
This option is only available when the Thread Type is External. The cutter
moves toward and leaves the material along a line tangent to the
material.
Allowable Range
The range of allowed values for the Clearance, Radius and Angle
parameters are displayed to the right of their list boxes.
Clearance >=
The Clearance parameter is the gap between the contact point on the
tool and the point of contact on the material.
Radius
This parameter is the radius of the arc in a Tangent Arc or Tangent Helix
lead move.
Angle
This parameter is the angular measurement of the arc in a Tangent Arc or
Tangent Helix lead move.
Feed Rate, page 499
11.9.3
2 Axis Options Tab
See The Options Tab, page 581.

After you click OK on the Thread Mill dialog box, SURFCAM displays the Select
menu. A prompt tells you to select the points and the circles for the thread mill
operation.
Note
Remember to select the points and the circles that match the Thread Type
you selected on the Cut Control tab. You cannot cut Internal and External
threads in the same Thread Mill operation.
Click the Done button on the Select menu. SURFCAM then creates and displays the
toolpath. SURFCAM then displays the Keep Operation dialog box. Click the Accept
Chapter 11 2 Axis
11.10
619
OPTIONS
Click the Options command to display the NC Options dialog box. This box contains all
the NC Options tabs.
Maximum Feed Between

When the tool finishes one pass and must move to the start point of the next pass,
there are two options. The tool can retract to the rapid plane, move over and plunge
to the start point. The tool can move across the part at the current feed rate. The
Maximum Feed Between parameter controls which option is used.
620
Chapter 11 2 Axis
SURFCAM measures the distance from the end of one pass to the start point of the
next pass. If that distance is smaller than Maximum Feed Between, the tool moves
across the part.
Constant, Cutter Radius, and Step Size, page 502
Corner Angle (30150)
A corner angle on a part is an angle between two connected linear sides of the part.
These corner angles are found along the outside contour of the part or along a pocket
contour. SURFCAM uses lines that are offset from the sides of a part to create
sections of a toolpath.
The two offsets from a corner angle will be two lines that either intersect or do not
intersect. When the corner angle is greater than 180, the two offset lines will
intersect. When the two offset lines intersect, they are trimmed to create the toolpath.
The offset lines of corner angles between 150 and 180 will not intersect. SURFCAM
automatically extends these offset lines to make them intersect. These extended lines
are used to create the toolpath.
The Corner Angle parameter tells SURFCAM how to fill the offset gap when a corner
angle is less than 150.
If a corner angle is less than 30, SURFCAM fills the gap between the two offsets with
lines or an arc. Indicate in the box to the right of the Corner Angle box which type of
element to use to fill the gap.
If a corner angle is between 30 and 150, SURFCAM compares its measure to your
entry for the Corner Angle parameter. If the corner angle is greater than the Corner
Angle parameter, SURFCAM extends the offset lines to create the toolpath. If the
corner angle is less than or equal to the Corner Angle parameter, SURFCAM fills the
offset gap with lines or an arc. Indicate in the box to the right of the Corner Angle box
which type of element to use to fill the gap.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
If a corner angle is < 30, lines or an arc automatically fill the gap.
2
If a corner angle is > 150, the offset lines are automatically extended to fill the gap.
1. Pocket
2. Interior angle
621
622
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Arc
SURFCAM puts an arc between two line moves when a corner angle is less than
30 or less than the Corner Angle value. The location of the arc is calculated from
the Corner Clearance value.
An arc move is put between two line moves.
Line
SURFCAM puts a line between two line moves when a corner angle is less than
30 or less than the Corner Angle value. The location of the line is calculated from
the Corner Clearance value.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
623
A line move is put between two line moves.
Corner Clearance
The Corner Clearance parameter controls the location of the element SURFCAM puts
between two line moves when a corner angle is less than 30. This also applies when
a corner angle is less than the Corner Angle parameter. The Corner Angle Type
parameter indicates the element that is used.
When this value is 0, the tool remains in touch with the sides of the part at the corner
angle. See Constant, Cutter Radius, and Step Size, page 502.
Side Clearance (Options tab)
This value is the default value for the Cutter Compensation amount on the Cut Control
tab.
Constant
If you select the Constant option, the Cutter Compensation = Side Clearance.
Cutter Radius
If you select Cutter Radius, the Cutter Compensation = Side Clearance * Cutter
Radius.
Side Roughing Step Size
This parameter is the default value for the Rough Spacing (On Sides) parameter on
the Cut Control tab. The Rough Spacing (On Sides) parameter is the distance
between two rough cut passes on the side of a contour or pocket. The side of the tool
cuts this distance into the material on a rough pass. The default value for the Side
Roughing Step Size is 80% of the tool radius. See Constant, Cutter Radius, and Step
Size, page 502.
624
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Side Finishing Step Size

The parameter is the default value for the Finish Spacing (On Sides) parameters on
the Cut Control tab. The Finish Spacing (On Sides) parameter is the distance
between finish passes on the side of a contour or pocket. The default value for the
Side Finishing Step Size is 8% of the tool radius. See Constant, Cutter Radius, and
Step Size, page 502.
Depth Roughing Step Size
This parameter is the default value for the Rough Spacing (In Z) parameter on the Cut
Control tab. Rough Spacing (In Z) is the distance between two rough cut levels in Z.
The default value for this parameter is 80% of the tool radius. See Constant, Cutter
Radius, and Step Size, page 502.
Depth Finishing Step Size
The parameter is the default value for the Finish Spacing (In Z) parameter on the Cut
Control tab. Finish Spacing (In Z) is the distance between two finish cut levels in Z.
The default value for the Depth Finishing Step Size is 8% of the tool radius. See
Rapid Plane Clearance
This parameter is the default Z level for horizontal rapid tool motions.
Plunge Clearance
The Plunge Clearance parameter on the Options tab is the default value for the same
parameter on the Cut Control tab.
Note
There are 2 different methods to set this value. The first one gives an
immediate result.
1.
Click the Options command on the NC menu and change the Plunge
Clearance value. SURFCAM shows that value on the Cut Control tab
during your NC operation.
2.
Click the Options tab during an NC operation and change the Plunge
Clearance value. You will not see the new value on the Cut Control
tab until you start the SURFCAM program the next time.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
625
Path Island Depths

Constant
Select this option to prevent any cuts above the chained islands. SURFCAM will
not remove any material above a chained island.
Multiple
Select this option to cut the chained islands to the Stock To Leave distance above
the top of each island. Use this option when the islands are at multiple depths.
A normal tool pass is made at each depth increment that the Rough Spacing In Z
parameter requires. A tool pass is also made at the depth equal to the Stock To
Leave amount above the top of each island.
The Multiple option requires that you draw the islands at their actual Z level on the
part. The pocket and contour tool motion will not cut an island after the tool is below
the top of the island.
Tip
If a pocket has an island with a side that is common to the pocket, that
pocket is special. The chain for that pocket must start in the pocket on
the island. Do not use the Auto > Visible method to chain the pocket.
The pocket and islands with sides in common.
626
Chapter 11 2 Axis
First chain the islands at 1 and 2 .

Then chain the pocket at 3 .
The pocket in Verify
Roughing 3D
Select this option to do a form of roughing. This option cuts the contours on your
part that are chained. The In Z parameters, like the Amount To Remove on the
Chapter 11 2 Axis
627
Pocket and the Contour Cut Control tabs, are not active. The location in |Z of the
contours on the drawing controls the depth of the cuts.
When you use this option, the contours are chained in any sequence. The system
automatically sorts the contours from the top to the bottom.
Gouge Check
Full
SURFCAM gouge checks all toolpaths. Normal tool moves, leadin, leadout and
plunge moves are all checked.
Single
This option applies only to contour cuts and does not check for the gouges.
Path Only
SURFCAM gouge checks the toolpath. The leadin and leadout moves are not
checked.
Cutter Comp At Top
Select the Yes option for CNC controllers that require all cutter compensation moves
above the part or at the rapid plane. When the cutter compensation is turned on or
off, the location of the tool at the rapid plane is not required.
Feed Between Rate
The Feed Between Rate is the tool Feed Rate speed during the step over from one
tool pass to the next. See Feed Rate, page 499.
Depth First
SURFCAM cuts a pocket with several tool passes at different depths. This parameter
controls how SURFCAM makes these passes at different depths when there are
multiple pockets.
Yes
SURFCAM cuts each pocket to the full depth before it cuts the next pocket.
No
SURFCAM cuts all pockets at each depth before it makes the cuts at the next
depth.
Finish Cut On
The Finish Cut On parameter controls when the finish pass is done on Pocket and
Contour operations.
Final Cut Only
The finish pass is done at the final depth.
All Depths
The finish pass is done at each depth.
628
Chapter 11 2 Axis
Pocket Nesting Depth

The pockets that are completely contained within other pockets are called nested
pockets. There can be many levels of nested pockets. The Pocket operation removes
the material in these pockets.
The nested contours define nested areas that rotate between pockets and material.
The area between a pair of nested contours is either a pocket or the material.
Every pocket that contains a nested pocket has an island. The nested pocket is on
that island. The pocket that is the deepest one in the nest can either contain an island
or not contain an island. The Contour operations are done on the outside of the part,
the sides of pockets and the sides of islands.
The Pocket Nesting Depth parameter controls the sequence of the cuts of nested
pockets and contours.
All Enclosed
SURFCAM cuts all pockets or contours from the pocket or contour you click to the
deepest one.
Choose
When you select this option, the Depth parameter is active. Enter a number for the
Depth parameter. SURFCAM cuts that many contours or pockets.
The Sort Type parameter controls the sequence of the contour cuts. If the Sort
Type is set to the Choose option, the cut sequence is from an inside pocket to an
outside pocket. If Sort Type is not set to Choose, the cut sequence is from the
pocket you click to an inside pocket. See Sort Type, page 628.
Depth
This parameter is active when Pocket Nesting Depth is set to Choose. The Depth
parameter controls the number of nested pockets cut with the Pocket or the Contour
operation.
Sort Type
Sort Type controls the cut sequence for multiple features on a part.
Operations
The Features To Cut
2 Axis Pocket, Contour, Drill
The cut sequence for several pockets and

contours or several drill holes.
2 & 3 Axis Contour 3D; Wire EDM The cut sequence for several contours.
3, 4, and 5 Axis Drill
The cut sequence for several drill holes.
None
Select None to get the following cut sequences.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
629
If the pockets and contours are chained one by one, they are cut in the sequence
they were chained.
If you chain the pockets and the contours with the Auto command, they are cut in
the sequence they were created.
SURFCAM uses either a point or a circle to indicate the location of a drill hole. If
you select the circles (or points) with Within, Intersect or Visible they are cut in the
sequence they were created.
Auto
Select the Auto option for the SURFCAM program to calculate the best cut
sequence for the pockets or contours.
When you drill a number of holes, the drill sequence is calculated after you select
the first hole.
Nested (2 Axis Only)
Select the Nested option to start a Contour cut of nested pockets on an inside
pocket. The Contour cuts are done from an inside pocket to an outside pocket.
This option does not apply to Pocket cuts.
The Pocket Nesting Depth parameter controls the number of nested pockets that
are cut. See Pocket Nesting Depth, page 628.
ToolLib Gauge Length
Yes
SURFCAM automatically makes the value for Z Gauge Length on the Tool
Information tab equal the Total Height value from the Tool Library.
No
SURFCAM keeps the value for Z Gauge Length on the Tool Information tab equal
to 0.
Display Plunge Changes
When you set this parameter to the Yes option, SURFCAM displays the changes in
the toolpath to correct for possible gouges. SURFCAM displays these changes with
colors in the toolpath drawing and with descriptions in two dialog boxes.
If SURFCAM finds a possible gouge in a plunge or lead move, that tool move is either
trimmed or discarded. When a change occurs, SURFCAM displays dialog boxes.
The following dialog box indicates that a plunge or lead move was changed.
630
Chapter 11 2 Axis
The warning dialog box about changes in Plunge, Leadin, or Leadout moves
SURFCAM displays another box that indicates the exact moves that were trimmed.
The box that indicates the exact moves that were trimmed
There are three types of changes that are reported.

1.
The moves with a length that was decreased less than 50%.
2.
The moves with a length that was decreased more than 50%.
3.
The moves that were completely discarded.
When SURFCAM makes any toolpath changes, the toolpath drawing shows the
changed tool moves in different colors.
A plunge or lead move with a length that SURFCAM decreased by less than 50% is
displayed in yellow. Those with a length that SURFCAM decreased more than 50%
are displayed in red.
SURFCAM automatically makes some changes in plunge moves. SURFCAM makes
a change if the Helical Radius in the Plunge Information dialog box is greater than tool
radius * 10. The radius is trimmed to tool radius * 10. SURFCAM makes a like change
if the Ramp Length in the Plunge Information dialog box is greater than tool * 10. A
dialog box is displayed to tell you the change was made.
Lead Angle Tolerance
If you set the Gouge Check parameter to Full, SURFCAM uses the value you enter
for the Lead Angle Tolerance parameter.
Chapter 11 2 Axis
631
The leadin and leadout tool moves can be a line or an arc. SURFCAM uses angles to
define these lines and arcs. SURFCAM defines a line lead move by the angle that the
tool moves toward or away from the contour. SURFCAM defines an arc lead move by
the angle measure of the arc.
If a gouge is found on a lead move, SURFCAM adjusts these lead move angles to
prevent the gouge. The adjustments are made in 1 increments.
The value you enter for the Lead Angle Tolerance parameter will limit these
adjustments. If the lead move angle is 60 and you enter 5 for this parameter, the
adjustments stop at 65. If SURFCAM cannot prevent the gouge in this degree range,
the tool move is removed from the toolpath.
Straight Plunge On Islands
Yes
SURFCAM retracts the tool and moves it to a plunge point that you select.
Select these plunge points with the Plunge command on the Select Chain menu.
The Select Chain menu is displayed after you click the Pocket command on the
NC 2 Axis menu. See The Select Chain Menu, page 134.
No
Normally to complete finish passes on an island, the tool is retracted after the
rough passes and moved to a plunge point. Normally SURFCAM selects the
plunge point near the island.
Align to Deepest Plunge
Select Yes to align the location of each plunge move between Z levels. The plunge
moves are aligned to the position of the lowest plunge. This alignment prevents any
pilot holes that are drilled to prepare for the pocket operation will not overlap.
Restore Defaults
Restore all the parameter values on the tab to the parameter values that existed when
you opened SURFCAM.
11.11
ADVANCED PROCEDURES 2 AXIS
The SURFCAM 2 Axis Plus (or higher) systems let you do some additional 2 1/2 axis
procedures.
11.11.1 Tapered Walls

During the pocket and contour operations, you can select an angle for the cuts on a
wall. This angle is defined from the side view of the elements. A 0 angle is a straight
wall. A 20 angle is wall that tapers toward the inside of the pocket or contour, at 20.
632
Chapter 11 2 Axis
A contour cut with the 20 walls
11.11.2 Multiple Island Depths

The Pocket operation can cut a pocket that has islands that are at different depths.
During the operation, the tool passes over the top of an island until it is below the
island Z level. 3 Axis option
To cut the islands at different depths, select the Multiple option for the Path Island
Depths parameter on the 2 Axis Options tab.
11.11.3 Construction View Machining

You can do 2 axis operations from the construction views. You can machine the
different sides of a block of material with the construction view machining.
SURFCAM can be used to index the rotary axis for positioning. The axis can be
positioned for each cutting view. These views can be created from part sides, fixture
sides, or work offset locations. The views define the index positioning for each
SURFCAM operation.
A view to define each tool orientation must be created. After you select the X and Y
axis locations for the view, the Z axis origin is defined. The Z axis origin is defined as
the zero position. Views parallel to the standard eight views are not required to be
created, when the desired Z axis origin is Z zero.
Note
The best results occur when you place the Z axis origin at the center of the
rotary table for each view. If this procedure is not done, you must be careful
when you select the clearance locations.
The following SURFCAM operations can be indexed for CView machining.

Chapter 11 2 Axis
1.
2 Axis: Pocket, Contour, Drill, and Contour 3D
2.
3 Axis: Cut, Planar, and Contour 3D
633
Create the part geometry in 3D space around the axis of rotation. The operation must
be done in the View coordinates. On the Status bar, set Coord to VIEW. Set the
CView to the defined plane for the operation.
Note
Rotary axis index operations are not done in the 4 Axis mode. The Post
Processor sends the rotary axis index positions for the 2 axis or 3 axis mode
operations.
The View 1 plane is the rotary axis zero. The following drawing shows the axis of
rotation along the X axis, from negative to the positive. The line through the center of
the box is the X axis. The arrow indicates the positive direction of tool motion for the
rotary axis. The top of the box is on the View 1 plane. The front of the box is on the
View 2 plane. When the Coord button on the SURFCAM Status bar is set to View, the
top of the box is cut in CView 1. The output for the top is at the rotary axis zero. The
front is cut in CView 2. The output for the front is rotary axis 90.
The axis of rotation along the X axis, from negative to positive
634
Chapter 11 2 Axis
The drawings show the tool orientation for indexing during the pocket cutting.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
CHAPTER 12 3 AXIS
12.1
3 AXIS MENU
To use the 3 Axis menu, click the NC > 3 Axis command.
NC > 3 Axis menu
Cut, page 636

The Cut operation cuts a single surface.
Project, page 542
Z Rough, page 638
Z Rough removes a large amount of material to prepare for other operations. This
operation uses 2 axis (XY) tool moves in Z increments.
Plunge Rough, page 685
Plunge Rough removes a large amount of material to prepare for other operations.
This operation uses a large number of plunge moves.
Z Finish, page 656
The Z Finish operation does the finish machining on a part. Z Finish is best at the
machining of steep surfaces. This operation can be done on several surfaces at one
time.
Planar, page 663
The Planar operation cuts several surfaces at a time. The operation is best at
machining surfaces that have slopes that are near to the horizontal.
Contour 3D, page 596
Drill and Hole Processing, page 509
Pilot Hole, page 600
Auto Rough, page 674
Auto Rough
Auto Rough is a different method to remove the material before other operations are
done.
636
Chapter 12 3 Axis
REST Material, page 678

The Rest Material operation removes the material that another operation did not
remove.
Pencil Cut, page 681
The Pencil Cut operation removes the material that was left along the concave
intersection of two surfaces by another operation.
Options, page 696
Each 3 Axis operation has a dialog box. The dialog box displays the machining
parameters. The parameters are displayed on tabs. The box is displayed after you select
the geometry to cut. The Tool Information, the Cut Control, and 3 Axis Options tabs are
the most common. Some 3 Axis operations have additional tabs.
12.1.1
All Tool Information tabs for 3 Axis operations are the same. See Tool Information
Tab, page 462.
12.1.2
The Cut Control Tab
Most 3 Axis Cut Control parameters are like the parameters for 4 and 5 Axis
operations. See The Cut Control tab, page 488.
Some of the parameters are unique to an operation.
1.
Cut Control Tab Z Rough, page 646,
2.
Cut Control Tab Z Finish, page 657,
3.
Cut Control Tab Planar, page 665, and
4.
Control Tab Auto Rough, page 676.
5.
Cut Control Tab Pencil Cut, page 682.
6.
Cut Control Tab Plunge Rough, page 690.
12.1.3
The Options Tab
12.2
CUT
The Cut operation cuts a single surface.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
637
A set of splines that flow in two directions define the surface. These splines form two sets
of flow curves. The surface arrow that is attached to the surface points toward one set of
flow curves.
The direction of the Cut operation is toward the surface arrow. Change the direction of
the surface arrow with the Edit > Surfaces > Direction command.
A normal Cut toolpath
The Cut operation can limit the cut to a small part of a surface with the tool containment
process. See Tool Containment, page 546.
Click the Cut command. A prompt tells you to select a surface.
After you select the surface, the 3 Axis Cut dialog box is displayed.
1.
2.
The Cut Control tab, page 488
3.
The Options Tab, page 636
Set the required parameter values and click the OK. SURFCAM creates the toolpath and
displays it on the screen.
12.3
PROJECT
See Project, page 542.
638
Chapter 12 3 Axis
12.4
Z ROUGH
Z Rough removes a large amount of material to prepare for other operations. The
operation uses 2 axis (XY) tool moves in Z increments.
Click the NC > 3 Axis > Z Rough command. SURFCAM displays the Select menu. A
prompt tells you select the surfaces to cut.
After you select the surfaces, the Material Information dialog box is displayed. This box
is used to describe the material for the part.
Material Type
The Material Type parameter describes the shape of the material. (The Plunge Rough
operation also uses several of these options for the value of the Boundary Type
parameter.)
Extents Box
Use this option when the material is a rectangle like block and the material
boundary is not drawn.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
An example of a part design without a design of the material
If you select this option, the Material Extents Box dialog box is displayed.
639
640
Chapter 12 3 Axis
There are two methods to use this box.

1. Lower Left Corner / Upper Right Corner
Enter the coordinates of the two opposite corners of the block of material.
Click the OK button.
2. XY Offset / Z Offset
Enter the values for additional amounts of material around the part in the X, Y
and Z directions.
Calculate Bounding Box
Click this button to calculate the actual X and Y coordinates of the corners.
The X and Y offset values are added to the results.
The Z coordinate of the corners is calculated and the Z offset value is added.
The calculated coordinates are then stored in the Lower Left Corner and the
Upper Right Corner fields. You can change these values if necessary.
Click the OK button.
Box
Use this option when the material is a rectangle-like block and the material
boundary is drawn.
The Select Point Menu is displayed. The prompts tell you to select the corners of
the material box.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
641
A part drawing with a block around the part
Bottom Profile
Use this option when a 2D contour of the material is drawn at the Z-level of the
bottom of the part.
The Material Height parameter is made active. Enter the height of the material.
The top of the material is this distance above the bottom contour in your drawing.
642
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Side view of a case where the Bottom Profile method is used
When you click OK, the Select Chain menu is displayed and a prompt tells you to
select the first element. Complete the chaining process on the bottom contour.
Top Profile
Use this option when a 2D contour of the material is drawn at the Z-level of the top
of the part.
The Material Height parameter is made active. Enter the depth of the material. The
bottom of the material is this distance below the top contour in your drawing.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
643
Contour drawn at a Z-level above the top of the part design
Side view of a case where the Top Profile method is used
When you click OK, the Select Chain menu and a prompt tells you to select the
first element. Complete the chaining process on the top contour.
Surfaces
Use this option when the material is in a shape that has non-flat surfaces.
You must have the design of the part and the design of the material in the same
drawing. The part design must be on the inside of the material design. The material
design can have any number of surfaces.
The surface arrows on the material design surfaces must point toward the inside
of the design. Create the surfaces on all the sides of the material design.
644
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Correct orientation of surface arrow
Wrong orientation of surface arrow
During the Z Rough and the Plunge Rough operations, the material between the
part and the material surfaces will be rough cut.
During the Z Rough operation, the balance of the material under the material
surfaces is also cut.
During the Plunge Rough operation, only the material above and around the part
is cut. SURFCAM does not cut the material that is past the edges of the part.
When you click OK, the Select Chain menu is displayed and a prompt tells you to
select the material surfaces. Select the surfaces and click the Done command.
Example of material shape with a non-flat surface

Chapter 12 3 Axis
645
No material
This option is available only for Z Rough. Use this option when you need to remove
the material from the inside of a pocket-like area.
You cannot do a Z Rough operation with this option on parts that do not have
pocket-like areas.
Example of a cavity where the No Material method is used
Part surfaces with offset

This option is available only for Plunge Rough. Use this option to remove all the
material except the material that is inside an offset distance from the part.
If you select this option, the Offset Amount parameter is made active. Enter the
offset from the material.
Material Height
The Material Height parameter is active when you select either Bottom Profile or Top
Profile for the Boundary Type. Enter the thickness or height of the material.
After you select the Material Type and Material Height, click the OK. SURFCAM will
prompt you to identify the surfaces of the material around your part.
After you select the surfaces, the 3 Axis Z Rough dialog box is displayed.
646
Chapter 12 3 Axis
12.4.1
Tool Information Tab Z Rough
12.4.2
Cut Control Tab Z Rough
Chapter 12 3 Axis
647
Cutting Method
Climb
This option causes a standard clockwise tool to move on the left side of a
contour.
This option normally gives the best finish.
Conventional
This option causes a standard clockwise tool to move on the right side of a
contour.
2
4
The Climb method
The Conventional method

1
Direction of cut
Tool rotation
Left side
Right side
Stock To Leave
Enter the amount of material to leave on the surface after the toolpath is created.
Rapid Plane
Enter the absolute Z axis coordinate of the level to which the tool retracts.
Maximum Z Value
This parameter is the Z coordinate of the highest point on the material.
Enter a smaller number to indicate where the machining will not be done.
SURFCAM will not cut any area on the part that is higher than the value you enter.
SURFCAM uses the Material Type parameter on the Material Information dialog
box to determine the default Maximum Z Value.
648
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Extents Box
If you select this option, the Maximum Z Value is the Z coordinate of the Upper
Right Corner on the Material Extents Box.
Box
If you select this option, the Maximum Z Value is the Z coordinates of the top
of the box.
Bottom Profile
If you select this option, the Maximum Z Value is the Z coordinate of the bottom
profile plus the Material Height.
Top Profile
If you select this option, the Maximum Z Value is the Z coordinate of the top
profile.
Surfaces
If you select this option, the Maximum Z Value is the Z coordinate of the highest
point on the surfaces that define the material.
No Material
If you select this option, the Maximum Z Value is the Z coordinate of the highest
point on the part.
Minimum Z Value
This parameter is the Z coordinate of the lowest point on the material.
Enter a larger number to indicate where the machining will not be done.
SURFCAM will not cut any area on the part that is lower than the value you enter.
SURFCAM uses the Material Type parameter on the Material Information dialog
box to determine the default Minimum Z Value.
Extents Box
If you select this option, the Minimum Z Value is the Z coordinate of the Lower
Left Corner on the Material Extents Box.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
649
Box
If you select this option, the Minimum Z Value is the Z coordinate of the bottom
of the box.
Bottom Profile
If you select this option, the Minimum Z Value is the Z coordinate of the bottom
profile.
Top Profile
If you select this option, the Minimum Z Value is the Material Height subtracted
from the Z coordinate of the top profile.
Surfaces
If you select this option, the Minimum Z Value is the Z coordinate of the lowest
point on the surfaces that define the material.
No Material
If you select this option, the Minimum Z Value is the Z coordinate of the lowest
point on the part.
Z Step Size
This parameter is the depth of each rough cut pass in Z until the bottom Z value is
reached. If this value is greater than the distance to the bottom Z value, an
adjustment is made. The step in Z is decreased to match the remaining depth.
XY Step Size
This parameter is the increment in the XY directions that SURFCAM offsets the
next rough pass at the same Z-level.
Plunge Clearance, page 571
Plunge Point Selection
Automatic
SURFCAM automatically selects the plunge points.
Select
If you select this option, you select the plunge points. After you click OK on the
Z Rough dialog box, the Select Point Menu is displayed. A prompt tells you to
select the plunge points.
Side Clearance (type)
This parameter tells SURFCAM when to insert a side clearance move. A side
clearance move is a linear move that is perpendicular to the first leadin tool move
at its start point. A linear move that is perpendicular to the end of the last leadout
move is also a side clearance move. If you have not defined a lead move (if Lead
Type is None), the side clearance move is perpendicular to the part contour.
650
Chapter 12 3 Axis
The Side Clearance moves are normally used to apply the cutter compensation.
The tool is put in a position away from the contour to prevent a mark on the side
of the part. The machine operator will some times apply the cutter compensation.
This done to adjust for the difference between the programmed tool diameter and
the diameter of the tool that is used.
None
The side clearance moves are not applied.
On All
The side clearance moves are applied on all contours. The islands are
included.
With Cutter Comp (Not Available for 3 Axis Z Finish)
This option makes the post processor add the diameter compensation codes to
the Infeed and Outfeed move in the final NCC program. These codes are
normally the G41, G42 and G40 codes.
On Islands (Not Available for 3 Axis Z Finish)
The side clearance moves are applied only to a lead move on islands.
Side Clearance (amount)
This parameter is the length of the side clearance moves. The default value is the
value of the Side Clearance parameter on the Options tab.
If the Side Clearance (type) is With Cutter Comp, this parameters value must be
larger than the diameter offset register on the machine.
Leadin Move, Leadout Move
Click the button to display a dialog box. The dialog boxes for the Leadin
Information and the Leadout Information have the same parameters.
The Z Rough operation uses a 2 Axis pocket cycle in Z increments. See Leadin
and Leadout Parameters for 2 Axis Operations, page 576.
Plunge Type
Click the Plunge Type button to display the Plunge Information dialog box. See
Plunge Parameters for 2, 3, 4 and 5 Axis, page 500.
Enable High Speed Machining, page 575.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
12.4.3
651
Z Rough Pocket Options Tab
Corner Angle (30150) (the value and the gap type)

A corner angle is the angle between two linear sections of a part contour.
SURFCAM creates toolpaths with offsets from the part contour. If the two offset
lines at a corner angle do not intersect, SURFCAM must fill the gap. The two
offsets of corner angles that are less than 180 do not intersect.
652
Chapter 12 3 Axis
The Corner Angle parameter controls how SURFCAM fills the gap.
1.
SURFCAM fills the gap at a corner angle less than 30 with the Arc or
Line you select for the Corner Angle (gap type).
2.
If a corner angle is between 150 and 180, SURFCAM extends the two
offset lines to make them intersect.
Corner Angle < 30 with the Arc and the Line, Corner Angle > 150 with extended lines.
3.
When the corner angle is from 30 to 150, SURFCAM compares the

Corner Angle (value) parameter with the corner angle size.
A. If the corner angle size is less than or equal to the Corner Angle
(value), SURFCAM closes the gap with an arc or line. Indicate which
entity with your selection for the Corner Angle (gap type) parameter.
B. If the corner angle size is greater than the Corner Angle (value)
parameter, SURFCAM extends the two offset lines to make them
intersect.
angle size < Corner Angle, gap=Arc and gap=Line - angle size > Corner Angle, gap=extended lines
Chapter 12 3 Axis
653
Corner Clearance
This parameter indicates the distance that the tool remains from the part at a
corner angle. When this value is 0, the tool touches the part walls during the
change in tool direction.

Side Roughing Step Size
This parameter is the distance for the side of the tool to cut into the material on the
rough passes. The default overlap is 80% of the tool radius. See Constant / Cutter
Radius, page 653.
Depth Roughing Step Size
This parameter is the default vertical Z distance between each rough cut level. See
Constant / Cutter Radius, page 653.
Cutter Comp At Top
If the CNC controller requires the cutter compensation moves be above the part or
at the rapid plane, select the Yes option.
To start or stop the cutter compensation, the tool can be below the rapid plane.
Feed Between Rate
The Feed Between Rate is the tool Feed Rate speed during the step over from one
tool pass to the next. See Feed Rate, page 499.
Depth First
This option controls the sorting order when there are multiple pockets.
Yes
SURFCAM completely cuts each pocket before it cuts the next pocket.
No
SURFCAM cuts all pockets at each depth before the next depth is cut.
654
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Material Cut Mode

This parameter describes the tool motion when the material between the material
boundary and the part is removed.
Spiral
The offset tool passes will be parallel to the material boundary until the tool
nears the part. Then the moves are parallel to the part profile.
Zig Zag
The offset tool passes will be parallel to a vector that you indicate. After the first
tool pass, each pass is in the opposite direction of the previous pass. Each
pass is from the material boundary to the part. After these moves are done,
SURFCAM makes a single move along the part contour.
Contour Cut
The offset tool passes will be parallel to the part contour. The passes move
from the material boundary toward the part.
Pocket Cut Mode
This parameter describes the tool motion when the material in a pocket is
removed.
Spiral
The offset tool passes start in the center of the pocket and are parallel to the
pocket contour.
Zig Zag
The offset tool passes will be parallel to a vector that you indicate. After these
moves are done, SURFCAM makes a single move along the part contour.
Show Plunge Changes
SURFCAM adjusts plunge moves when the adjustments are needed. Select the
Yes option to display a dialog box when a change is made. The dialog box
describes the changes.
This parameter is the default value for the Side Clearance amount on the Cut
Control tab.
1.
Set the Side Clearance amount and type on the Options tab.
2.
Select a new Tool.
Then you see the Side Clearance amount change on the Cut Control tab.
Constant
If you select the Constant option, the Side Clearance default value is the Side
Clearance.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
655
Cutter Radius
If you select Cutter Radius, the Side Clearance default = Side Clearance *
Cutter Radius.
The default for the Side Clearance parameter on the Options tab is 0.1. The default
for the type parameter is Cutter Radius.
Straight Plunge On Islands
Before SURFCAM does finish passes on islands, the tool must retract and move
to a plunge point. If this parameter is set to the No option, SURFCAM selects the
plunge point.
If this parameter is set to the Yes option, you select the plunge point on each
island. Use the Plunge command on the Select Chain menu to identify the plunge
points. See The Select Chain Menu, page 134.
This parameter is used when the Gouge Check Lead Move is set to the Yes option.
Angles are used to define a line and an arc lead move. The angle with a tangent
to the part contour defines a line lead move. The angle from the center of an arc
to the end points of the arc defines the arc lead move.
If a gouge is found on a lead move, adjustments are made in these lead move
angles to prevent the gouge. The adjustments are made in 1 increments. The
adjustments will not be greater than the number of degrees you indicate for this
parameter.
An example is the lead move angle is 60 and the Lead Angle Tolerance
parameter is 5. SURFCAM will not make an adjustment greater than 65. If the
gouge occurs in this range, the lead move is deleted.
Gouge Check Lead Move
If this parameter is set to the Yes option, SURFCAM will do a gouge check on
Leadin and Leadout moves.
Align to Deepest Plunge
SURFCAM normally selects the plunge point for each Z level rough cut. These
points can be different in a pocket that has sides that are not vertical sides. When
a pilot hole is needed at each Z level, you get the best results if can you drill one
pilot hole.
Set this parameter to the Yes option. SURFCAM aligns the positions of the plunge
moves to the position of the lowest plunge move. Then the pilot holes will not
overlap.
656
Chapter 12 3 Axis
12.4.4
3 Axis Options Tab Z Rough

After you make the required changes in the parameter values, click the OK.
SURFCAM creates the toolpath and displays it on the screen.
12.5
Z FINISH
The Z Finish operation cuts a part by using a 2 axis (X,Y) contour cycle in Z axis
increments.
The operation can cut nested boundary curves. The nested curves function like pockets
that have islands.
SURFCAM always cuts the inside of the outer boundary and does not cut any islands
that are inside this boundary. This method gives the ability to Z finish the outside of a part
and only the outside. To cut only the outside of a part, use two boundary curves. Use one
large curve to contain the complete part and a curve that is inside of that curve. The
toolpath keeps away from the second curve.
A Standard Model
Click Z Finish on the NC 3 Axis menu. the Select menu is displayed and a prompt tells
you to select the surfaces to finish.
After you select the surfaces, the 3 Axis Z Finish dialog box is displayed.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
12.5.1
Tool Information Tab Z Finish
12.5.2
Cut Control Tab Z Finish
657
658
Chapter 12 3 Axis
See Cut Control Tab Z Rough, page 646 to read the descriptions of the parameters
not in the following list.
Steep Cutting
The Z Finish operation is better than the Planar operation on those areas of a
surface that have steep slopes.
Yes
Select Yes to cut the steep areas of the selected surfaces. You can identify the
steep areas of the surfaces with the Steep Cutting Options.
No
Select No to cut the complete surfaces.
Steep Cutting Options
These parameters help you identify the location of the steep areas of a surface.
Angles that are between tangents to the surface and the horizontal identify the
location of the steep areas of a surface. Those areas where the tangent angles are
between the Min Angle and the Max Angle are called steep.
Min Angle
This parameter is the smallest angle that defines the steep areas of a surface.
This value is normally in the range of 30 to 60. SURFCAM will not cut the
areas that have tangent lines with angle measurements less than this value.
Max Angle
This parameter is the largest angle that defines the steep areas of a surface.
This value is normally set to 90. SURFCAM will not cut the areas that have
tangent lines with angle measurements greater than this value.
Grid Tolerance
To identify the boundary of the steep areas, a grid is created and projected on
the surface. The grid is not displayed. Angle Measurements are taken at the
intersection of the lines in this grid to identify the boundaries of the steep areas.
The Grid Tolerance parameter is the distance between the lines in this grid.
Smaller values give better results.
Overlap
This parameter is the distance for the tool to move past the steep area
boundaries. This parameter helps completely cut the steep area.
Save Curves
When the steep cutting is done, temporary surface splines are drawn along the
boundaries of the steep areas. These splines are then projected on the Z0
plane where they are used to create the tool paths. Select the Yes option to
save these splines.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
659
Bounding Curves
A bounding curve is a single closed entity. A bounding curve can include any
number of connected lines, arcs, and splines. SURFCAM cuts only the area that
is inside this boundary.
To turn on the bounding curve feature, set this parameter to the Yes option.
To chain the bounding curve, you must select a element at the start and the end
of the chain.
Open Contours
This option is active when either the Steep Cutting option or the Bounding Curves
option is set to the Yes option.
Contours that begin and end at the same point are closed contours. The contours
that begin and end at the bounding curves are open contours.
This parameter controls how open contours are cut.
Zig Zag
The tool moves backward and forward in opposite directions while the tool
moves from one contour depth to the next.
Zig
The tool retracts at the end of every contour cut, so that the cuts are always in
the same direction.
Contour Order
Some of the parts you cut will have multiple features that extend above the other
flat features. The Contour Order parameter controls the sequence of the Z Finish
cuts on these features.
Negative Z
The separate extended features are cut one at a time. The cuts start at the
highest Z level and go to the lowest Z level before the next feature is cut.
Z Level Negative
The Cuts are made on all features at the same highest Z level at the same time.
SURFCAM then returns to the first feature and cuts it at the next Z-level that is
lower before it moves to the other features and cuts at that level. This method
is repeated until the Z Finish operation is complete.
660
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Contour Order = Negative Z
Contour Order = Z Level Negative
Chapter 12 3 Axis
661
Positive Z
The separate extended features are cut one at a time. The cuts start at the
lowest Z level and go to the highest Z level before the next feature is cut.
Z Level Positive
The Cuts are made on all features at the same lowest Z level at the same time.
SURFCAM then returns to the first feature and cuts it at the next Z-level that is
higher before it moves to the other features and cuts at that level. This method
is repeated until the Z Finish operation is complete.
Contour Order = Positive Z
Contour Order = Z Level Positive

662
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Finish Inside Only

This parameter is used when you are finish a surface that has a pocket like area.
Yes
Select Yes to finish only the pocket like area.
No
Select No to finish the complete surface.
Side Clearance
See Side Clearance (type), page 649 and Side Clearance (amount), page 650.
Leadin Move, Leadout Move
Plunge Type
12.5.3
Z Finish Options Tab
Depth Finishing Step Size

This parameter is the default vertical Z distance between the separate finish levels.
This parameter controls how the value you enter in the box on the left is used.
Constant
The value you enter is used for this parameter.
Cutter Radius
The product of the value you enter and the radius of the selected is the value
that is used.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
663

See Side Clearance (Options tab), page 654.
This parameter is used when the Gouge Check Lead Move is set to the Yes option.
SURFCAM defines the line and the arc leadin or leadout moves with angles. The
angle at which the move approaches a contour defines the line moves. The center
angle of the arc defines the Arc moves.
If a gouge is found on a lead move, adjustments are made in these lead move
angles to prevent the gouge. The adjustments are made in 1 increments. There
is a limit to the size of the adjustment. The limit is the number of degrees you
indicate for the value of the Lead Angle Tolerance parameter. If the lead move
angle is 60 and you indicate 5 for the Lead Angle Tolerance, the adjustments will
not be greater than 65. If the gouge is not prevented in this degree range, the
move is deleted from the toolpath.
Gouge Check Lead Move
If you select No, the Leadin and Leadout moves are not checked for any gouges.
Plunge Point Selection
Automatic
SURFCAM automatically selects the plunge points.
Select
Select this option for you to select the plunge points. After you click OK, the
Select Point Menu is displayed and a prompt tells you to select the plunge
points.
Show Plunge Changes
See Display Plunge Changes, page 629.
12.5.4
3 Axis Options Tab Z Finish

After you click OK on the 3 Axis Z Finish dialog box, SURFCAM creates the toolpath
and displays it on the screen.
12.6
PLANAR
Use the Planar command to do two different types of operations.

1.
One type is called Planar. See Planar, page 669.
2.
The other type is called Flow Surface. See Flow Surface, page 670.
664
Chapter 12 3 Axis
The Planar and the Flow Surface operations have three tool containment features.
These features let you put a limit on the areas of the surfaces to cut. These tool
containment features are
1.
Check Surface, (See Check Surfaces, page 666.)
2.
Bounding Curve, (See Bounding Curves, page 659.)
3.
Shallow Cutting. (See Shallow Cutting, page 667.)
When you click the Planar command, the Select menu is displayed and a prompt tells
you to select the surfaces to cut.
After you select the surfaces, the 3 Axis Planar dialog box is displayed.
12.6.1
Tool Information Tab Planar
Chapter 12 3 Axis
12.6.2
665
Cut Control Tab Planar
See The Cut Control tab, page 488 to read the descriptions of the parameters not in
the following list.
666
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Step Type
This parameter determines how the number of tool passes is calculated.
Scallop
The number of passes is calculated from the scallop height entered for the Step
Size parameter.
Increment
The number of passes is calculated from the distance between passes that is
entered for the Step Size parameter.
Step Size
If Scallop is selected for Step Type, this parameter is the maximum height of a
scallop.
If the Increment option is selected for Step Type, this parameter is the distance
between the cut passes.
Scallop Minimum Step
If Scallop is selected for Step Type, this parameter is the minimum value for the
step over.
Check Surfaces
A check surface is a surface on the part that intersects another surface that you
will cut. The intersection of the two surfaces forms a boundary. A check surface is
a tool containment feature. SURFCAM will not cut past this boundary.
To use this form of tool containment, set this parameter to the Yes option. Then
the Clearance parameter is active. SURFCAM cuts the Clearance distance above
the check surface. A prompt tells you to select the check surfaces.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
667
Clearance
This parameter indicates the amount of stock to leave above the check surface.
2
1 = Check Surface _________ 2 = Clearance
Shallow Cutting
This parameter will limit the tool motion to the areas on the surface with small
slopes. This feature cuts the areas of a surface that have slopes in the angular
range that you indicate. Indicate the range in the Shallow Cutting Options section.
The Planar operation is better than the Z Finish operation on those areas of a
surface that have shallow slopes.
Yes
Select Yes to cut the shallow areas of the selected surfaces. You can identify
the shallow areas of the surfaces with the Shallow Cutting Options.
No
Select No to cut the complete surfaces.
668
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Shallow Cutting Options

These parameters help you identify the location of the shallow areas of a surface.
Angles that are between tangents to the surface and the horizontal identify the
location of the shallow areas of a surface. Those areas where the tangent angles
are between the Min Angle and the Max Angle are called shallow.
Min Angle
This parameter is the smallest angle that defines the shallow areas of a
surface. This value is normally set to 0.
Max Angle
This parameter is the largest angle that defines the shallow areas of a surface.
This value is normally in the range of 0 to 30. SURFCAM will not cut the areas
that have tangent lines with angle measurements greater than this value.
Grid Tolerance
To identify the boundary of the shallow areas, a grid is created and projected
on the surface. The grid is not displayed. Angle Measurements are taken at the
intersection of the lines in this grid to identify the boundaries of the shallow
areas.
The Grid Tolerance parameter is the distance between the lines in this grid.
Smaller values give better results.
Overlap
This parameter is the distance for the tool to move past the shallow area
boundaries. This parameter helps completely cut the shallow area.
Save Curves
When the shallow cutting is done, temporary surface splines are drawn along
the boundaries of the shallow areas. These splines are then projected on the
Z0 plane where they are used to create the tool paths. Select the Yes option to
save these splines.
Bounding Curves
You can create a number of closed boundary curves that define small areas on
surfaces. If you set the Bounding Curve parameter to Yes, you can limit the cuts
to these areas. When these areas are cut, the tool center does not go past the
curve.
Lines, arcs and splines can join to form the boundary curves. If the curves are not
drawn on the surface, the curves are projected on the surface to form the
boundary. The curves are projected in the construction view.
After you indicate the direction of the cut with the Select Point menu, the Select
Chain menu is displayed. A prompt tells you to select the beginning element.
Chain all the boundary curves and click the Done.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Tip
669
The best performance occurs when Maximum Feed Between is smaller

than the shortest distance between two separate boundaries, but larger
than the Step Size. The Maximum Feed Between is on the Options tab.
The Step Size is on the Cut Control tab. If a flow surface is used and the
surface is a trimmed surface, you must select the bounding curves to trim
the complete surface.
Cutting Direction
There are two methods that control the major direction of the Planar operation
toolpath.
Planar
A Planar option toolpath is like the intersection of the surfaces with a set of
planes. These planes are at equal distances and perpendicular to the XY plane.
From the Top View the toolpath appears like a set of parallel lines. From a side
view you can see that the toolpath moves follow the curve of the surfaces.
You have control of the direction of the parallel tool moves. A prompt tells you
to select a beginning point and a point toward the direction of the cut. The tool
moves are parallel to the line the two points define.
This line also controls the part of the surfaces that are cut. SURFCAM creates
the toolpath on the side of the line you select. If the line passes through the
middle of the design, only the area on that side of the line is cut.
670
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Flow Surface
The Flow Surface option uses a special flow surface to define the directions of
the toolpath. The flow surface is put in a position above the area to cut. One set
of flow curves on the flow surface is projected on the area of the surface to cut.
The surface arrow indicates which set of flow curves are projected.
A flow surface in a position over the part.
The tool moves follow the direction of the

surface arrows.
Use the Flow Surface operation to cut

the steep slopes that follow along a
contour with many curves. A
perpendicular cut is the best cut on
steep these surfaces.
You can make each cut approximately
perpendicular to a section of the steep
surface along the contour. The flow
surface for this purpose must have flow
curves that follow the changing angle
of approach toward the steep surface.
See the figure.
A Flow surface to cut the steep surfaces along a contour.
The size and the shape of the flow surface also determines which area of the
surfaces are cut. Only the area within the projected boundaries of the flow
surface are cut.
Retrace Type
This parameter indicates the method to use to move the tool between two cut
passes. See Retrace Type (3 Axis and 5 Axis), page 490.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
671
Optimized Feed Between

Select Yes to analyze the toolpath to minimize the number of rapid moves.
Optimized Stepover
When feed between moves are made near a surface with a near to vertical slope,
small step away moves can occur. If you set this parameter to Yes, these moves
are removed.
Cut Waterfall Ends
When a multi-surface toolpath is generated, cutter compensation is available for
the edges of the surface. The Cut Waterfall Ends parameter has four options that
control the tool motion.
No
If you select No, only the surface area is cut. No tool moves are made past the
edges into the edge protection areas. There will be no waterfall moves in the
toolpath at the surface edges.
Yes
Click Yes to cut the surfaces and to extend the cut along or through the edge
protection. The result is the waterfall moves that are made when the tool path
falls over the surface edge.
The Cut Waterfall Ends = No
The Cut Waterfall Ends = Yes
Cutter Diameter
This option is like the Yes option. SURFCAM cuts all the edge protection area
except a distance equal to the tool diameter.
Cutter Radius
This option is like the Cutter Diameter option. SURFCAM cuts all the edge
protection area except a distance equal to the cutter radius. The tip of the cutter
cuts to the top of the edge. The tool does not cut completely over the edge.
672
Chapter 12 3 Axis
The Cut Waterfall Ends:

Cutter Diameter
The Cut Waterfall Ends:

Cutter Radius
Maximum
Enter the maximum angle from the horizontal at which end cuts are made.
Limit Angle At Ends
Use this parameter to prevent the cuts on steep walls.
This parameter controls the cuts at the start and the end of each planar pass. The
parts of a planar cut between the two ends are always cut.
No
Select No to cut all the steep areas at the two ends of a planar pass. The angle
at the ends of each pass are ignored.
See the Limit Angle At Ends = No figure.
Yes
Select Yes to prevent the planar cuts on walls that are steeper than the angle
in the Maximum parameter.
See the Limit Angle At Ends = Yes figure.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Limit Angle At Ends = No
673
Limit Angle At Ends = Yes

Select this box to increase the tool speed when it changes from one tool motion to
the next in two 3 Axis operations. The operations are Planar and Rest Material Planar operations.
This box is active when the Leadin Move and the Leadout Move are set to the
None option.
The tool speed decreases when the tool must go from one linear move to a nontangent move. SURFCAM puts several more linear moves between two nontangent tool moves in 3 Axis high speed machining. SURFCAM uses a tangent arc
between the non-tangent tool moves when it designs the linear moves. When the
design is completed, the linear moves replace the tangent arc. These linear moves
increase the tool speed.
The Linear moves between non-tangent moves in high speed machining
Threshold Angle
SURFCAM calculates when to put several linear moves between two other
linear moves by looking at the angle between them. If that angle is greater than
the Threshold Angle parameter, the linear moves are put between the two tool
moves.
674
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Max Error
SURFCAM uses the Max Error parameter to calculate how many linear moves
are needed and their length. SURFCAM calculates the size of an arc between
two non-tangent moves by looking at the intersection of the two moves. The
distance between the midpoint of the arc and the two lines intersection point
must be smaller than the Max Error parameter. The number and size of linear
moves is calculated from this arc.
12.6.3
3 Axis Options Tab Planar

After you click OK on the 3 Axis Z Finish dialog box, SURFCAM creates the toolpath
and displays it on the screen. Click the Accept button on the Keep Operation dialog
box to keep the operation.
12.7
CONTOUR 3D
Contour 3D, page 596.
12.8
DRILL
Drill and Hole Processing, page 509.
12.9
PILOT HOLE
The Pilot Hole operation is available on the 2 Axis and 3 Axis menus. See Pilot Hole,
page 600.
12.10
AUTO ROUGH
The Auto Rough operation removes a large amount of material from around a part. The
operation uses a 2 axis (XY plane) cut cycle at increased Z-level depths. Auto Rough is
designed to work only in the Top CView.
To prepare for the Auto Rough operation, you must first do a Planar operation on your
part. When you do this Planar operation, you must set some parameters to prepare for
the Auto Rough operation. Use the same tool that you use when you do Auto Rough. On
the Cut Control tab, use the same value for the Stock To Leave parameter and select
Increment for Step Type.
After you finish the Planar operation, click the Auto Rough command. The Select NC
Operation dialog box is displayed.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
675
Click the Planar operation. The toolpath from that Planar operation is drawn on the part.
The 3 Axis Auto Rough dialog box is displayed.
12.10.1 Tool Information Tab Auto Rough

676
Chapter 12 3 Axis
12.10.2 Control Tab Auto Rough
See The Cut Control tab, page 488 for the descriptions of the parameters not in the
following list.
Depth Step Size
This parameter is the increase in the Z-level depth for each roughing pass.
Shelf Plane
The value that is entered for this parameter is the Z level of a plane above the part.
When the tool moves past the edge of the part, the tool retracts to this level.
Maximum Z
Indicate the Z-level depth for the final pass of the tool.
Minimum Z
Indicate the Z-level depth for the first pass of the tool.
12.10.3 3 Axis Options Tab Auto Rough

After you click OK on the 3 Axis Auto Rough dialog box, SURFCAM creates the
toolpath and displays it on the screen. Click the Accept button on the Keep Operation
dialog box to keep the operation.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
A toolpath that Auto Rough can use.
Example of an Auto Rough toolpath.

677
678
12.11
Chapter 12 3 Axis
REST MATERIAL
The Rest Material operation removes the material that other operations did not remove
because of the size of the tool. The operation calculates the location of this material.
Z Finish and Planar are the two types of Rest Material operations. The Z Finish operation
tool moves are 2 axis (X,Y) moves that occur in Z axis increments. The tool moves in the
Planar operation are parallel moves that follow the curve of the surfaces that are cut.
The Rest Material operation removes the material that remains after all the operations in
a single Setup Section have been done. All the Setup Section operations, and the Rest
Material operation, must be done in the Top CView. If there is more than one Setup
Section, a prompt tells you to select the correct Setup Section.
Click the Rest Material command on the NC 3 Axis menu.
NC 3 Axis menu
The Rest Material menu is displayed and a prompt tells you to select the operation for
Rest Machining.
Rest Material menu
If you select Z Finish, the Select menu is displayed and prompt tells you to select the
surfaces to finish. After you select the surfaces, the 3 Axis Z Finish dialog box is
displayed. See Z Finish, page 656.
If you select the Planar option, the Select menu is displayed and a prompt tells you to
select the surfaces to cut. After you select the surfaces, the 3 Axis Planar dialog box is
displayed. See Planar, page 663.
The two Rest Material dialog boxes contain the 3 Axis Rest Options tab. This tab controls
the 3 axis rest machining.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
679
Stock
Use Bounding Box with Offset (Based on Toolpath) of
Select this option create the stock in the form of a box. The box dimensions are
equal to the outside measurements of the part, plus an offset on all sides. The
offset is equal to the value you enter in the data entry box.
680
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Create Stock by Displaying a Separate Stock Selection dialog box

Select this option to display the standard Add Model dialog box. The Add Model
dialog box gives you the maximum control over the dimensions of the stock.
Tolerances
Comparison
The distances between the surface of the part and the top of the rest material are
calculated. If these distances are less than this value, the rest material is not
removed. The smaller this number, the more rest material that is removed.
Resolution
To identify the location of rest material on the surface, a temporary grid is drawn
on the surface. This parameter sets the size of the rectangles in that grid. The
smaller the rectangles are the more rest material that is identified.
The options are Coarse, Medium, Fine, and Automatic.
Curve Smoothness
Use this parameter to indicate the degree to which the rest material and offset
curves will be smooth curves. The options are None, Average or Very Smooth.
Overlap
To completely remove the rest material, enter a distance for the tool to move past
the edge of the material.
Save Curves
Original Undercut Boundaries
SURFCAM determines the edges of the rest material not removed by the previous
operations and creates boundary curves along these edges. Select this option to
display the Undercut Boundaries curves and the toolpath. The curves and the
toolpath are saved on the current layer. To get the best results, save these curves
on layers that do not contain your drawing.
Intermediate Offset Curves
SURFCAM determines the boundary curves that are offset from the Original
Undercut Boundaries. Select this option to display these Intermediate Offset
Curves and save them on the active layer.
Normals Used For Tool Offset
Select this option to display and save the normal vectors that are used to
determine the tool offset.
Final Offset Curves
SURFCAM projects the Intermediate Offset Curves on the Z plane with Z
coordinate equal to 0. The Final Offset Curves are used to guide the creation of
the Rest Material toolpath. Select this option to display the final offset curves and
save them on the active layer.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
12.12
681
PENCIL CUT
The Pencil Cut operation removes the material that is left along the intersection of two
surfaces by other machining operations. The operation also removes the material along
the folds that can appear in the middle of a single surface.
SURFCAM uses pencil curves to guide the Pencil Cut operation. The pencil curves are
created along the folds and the intersection of two surfaces. The pencil curves are like
cutter intersect splines. Create a cutter intersect spline with the Create > Spline menu.
See Cutter Intersect, page 209.
To calculate a pencil curve between two surfaces, an offset from the two surfaces is
calculated. The curve that is created at the intersection of these offset surfaces becomes
the pencil curve. SURFCAM uses the Tool Diameter and the Tip Radius to calculate
these offset surfaces.
The center of a ball that moves along the intersection of two surfaces creates a pencil
curve. A ballnose tool follows this type of curve. The pencil curves for bullnose and end
mill tools are created in like methods.
The Pencil Cut toolpath is a single tool pass along these pencil curves.
3 Axis Pencil Cut Toolpath

682
Chapter 12 3 Axis
When you use the Pencil Cut operation, you must select a smaller diameter tool than the
tool used in the previous operation.
Click the Pencil Cut command on the NC > 3 Axis menu. The Select menu is displayed
and a prompt tells you to select the surfaces to cut. Select the surfaces. SURFCAM
displays the Pencil Cut dialog box.
12.12.1 Tool Information Tab Pencil Cut

12.12.2 Cut Control Tab Pencil Cut
Chapter 12 3 Axis
683
See Cut Control Tab Z Rough, page 646 to read the descriptions of the parameters
not in the following list.
Curve Tolerance
SURFCAM breaks all contour moves along a spline into a set of many linear
moves. The linear moves are along the chords that connect two points on the
spline. SURFCAM adjusts the length of the chords to make sure that no point on
the spline, near the chord, is farther from the chord than the value of the Curve
Tolerance.
Threshold Angle
The amount of material that is removed along the intersection of two surfaces
depends on the intersect angle of the surfaces. More material is removed along
larger angles. A smaller amount of material is removed along small angles. The
Pencil Cut operation is best used in those areas with small intersect angles.
The value for the Threshold Angle controls where pencil curves are created. The
pencil curves are created in the areas along the intersections of surfaces that
intersect at an angle greater than the Threshold Angle.
A break occurs and a pencil curve is not created in the areas where the intersect
angle is less than the Threshold Angle. If the break is small, the two pieces of
pencil curve on either side of the break are connected. The connection is made to
keep a smooth and continuous toolpath along the intersection.
Steep / Shallow Cutting
No
Select No to cut each pencil curve in one continuous cut.
Yes
Select Yes to cut the steep and shallow parts of each pencil curve in different
moves. The Steep Cutting Options parameters are made active.
Steep Cutting Options
These parameters determine how the steep parts of pencil curves are cut.
Cutting Direction
Up
The cut of a steep part of a pencil curve starts at the bottom.
Down
The cut of a steep part of a pencil curve starts at the top.
Cutting Order
First
The steep parts of pencil curves are cut before the shallow parts are cut.
684
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Later
The shallow parts of pencil curves are cut before the steep parts are cut.
Auto
The sequence of the cuts of the steep and shallow parts are optimized.
Steep Angle
A pencil curve is called steep when a tangent to the curve makes an angle with the
horizontal greater than this value. The maximum value is 90. The default is 45.
Length Tolerance
A part section between two steep sections can be either shallow or steep.
SURFCAM uses the section length to calculate if it is steep or shallow for
machining purposes. If the section is shallow and the section length is less than
the Length Tolerance parameter, the section is called steep. SURFCAM cuts the
section with the other steep sections.
If the section is shallow and the section length is greater than the Length Tolerance
parameter, the section is called shallow. SURFCAM cuts the section with the other
shallow sections.
A part section between two shallow sections is done in a like method.
Vertical Corner Surfaces
Surfaces that intersect in a vertical line are called vertical corner surfaces.
Yes
Select Yes if the parts contains vertical corner surfaces.
No
When there are no vertical intersections on the part, set this parameter to No.
Save Curves
Select Yes to save the pencil curves and the toolpath.
Leadin Move and Leadout Move
A leadin move is a tool move that is put between a plunge move and the first move
that cuts. A leadout move is a tool move away from the part after the last move that
cuts.
SURFCAM controls the leadin and leadout moves with the parameters on the
Leadin and Leadout Information dialog boxes. The dialog boxes are displayed
when the Leadin and Leadout buttons are clicked. The parameters on the two
dialog boxes are the same.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
685
Pencil Cut Leadin Information
Lead Type
None
A lead move is not made.
Arc
The lead move is an arc.
Angle
The Angle parameter is the angle measure of the Arc lead move.
Radius
The entry is the arc radius when the Constant option is selected. The arc radius
is the product of this entry and the tool radius if Cutter Radius is selected.
Feed Rate, page 499
12.12.3 3 Axis Options Tab Pencil Cut

After you click the OK button on the Pencil Cut dialog box, the toolpath is created and
drawn on the screen. SURFCAM then displays the Keep Operation dialog box. Click
the Accept button to keep the operation.
12.13
PLUNGE ROUGH
Plunge Rough is an operation that removes a large amount of material in the preparation
for other machining operations. The Plunge Rough operation uses plunge tool moves to
remove sections of material that are round. To remove the full amount of material, the
plunge moves must overlap. The tools that are used to make the plunge moves can be
either center cut or non-center cut tools.
686
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Plunge Rough Tools

The tools that are used to do the Plunge Rough operation are rigid and have cut
edges at the face. These tools cut the material only in the Z direction. The tools cut
the material at a high feed rate. There are two types of plunge rough tools.
Center Cut Tools
Center cut tools can cut with the full diameter of the cutter face. The first plunge
cut tool move in the toolpath is done at a decreased feed rate. The decreased feed
rate is required because of the slower cutter speed near the tool center. The next
plunge moves have increased feed rates.
Non Center Cut Tools
A non-center cut tool does not remove the material at the center of the tool. A post
of material is left at the center of the plunge location. The next plunge move must
cut this post of material. These tools can cut at higher feed rates than other tools.
Center Cut Tool
Non Center Cut Tool
When you click Plunge Rough, the Select menu is displayed and a prompt tells you to
select the surfaces to cut.
Select the surfaces to cut and click the Done command.
The Material Information dialog box is displayed.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
687
Material Information dialog box
Boundary Type
The Boundary Type parameter identifies either the material boundary or the boundary
of a tool containment area. The Boundary Is parameter controls how the Boundary
Type is used.
Extents Box, Box, Bottom Profile, Top Profile, Surfaces
See Material Type, page 638.
Part surfaces with offset
Use this option to describe the material when it is in the shape of the part with an
offset.
Material Height / Offset Amount
The Material Height parameter is available when the Boundary Type is Bottom Profile
or Top Profile. Enter the thickness or height of the material that is cut to make the part.
The Offset Amount is available when the Boundary Type is Part surfaces with offset.
Enter the value of the offset from the surface for the surface of the material.
Tool Center, page 579
The Tool Center parameter controls the tool motion at the material boundary or the
tool containment boundary. This parameter is not active when the Boundary Type is
set to Surfaces or Part Surfaces with Offset.
Boundary Is
The Boundary Is parameter tells how the boundary is used when the Tool Center is
available and set to Beyond Boundary.
Note
The Tool Center parameter is available if the Boundary Type is set to

Extents Box, Box, Bottom Profile, or Top Profile.
688
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Material
The identified boundary is the material boundary.
Tool Containment
The identified boundary is a tool containment boundary.
Click OK. SURFCAM displays the Plunge Rough dialog box.
12.13.1 Tool Information Tab Plunge Rough
Chapter 12 3 Axis
689
See Tool Information Tab, page 462 to read the descriptions of the parameters not in
the following list.
Cutting Diameter
The Cutting Diameter is the outside diameter of the tool. On center cut tools, the
full diameter of the tool cuts the material. On non-center cut tools, only the outer
part of the diameter cuts the material.
Cutting Width
The Cutting Width is the width of the outer part of the tool diameter that cuts the
material. On non-center cut tools, this width is less than the radius of the tool. On
center cut tools, the Cutting Width is the radius of the tool.
690
Chapter 12 3 Axis
12.13.2 Cut Control Tab Plunge Rough
Grid Type
The Plunge Rough plunge moves are aligned on plunge points that are arranged
in a square or a triangle grid pattern. The Grid Type parameter identifies which grid
pattern is used. A round core of material is removed from around each plunge
point by each plunge move. The diameter of these cores is the diameter of the tool.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
691
Equilateral Triangle
The plunge moves are aligned on the corners of equilateral triangles in the
Equilateral Triangle grid pattern. The sides of the triangles must have a length
that causes an overlap of the round cores of material.
Square
The plunge moves are aligned on the corners of squares in the Square grid
pattern. The sides of the square must have a length that causes an overlap of
the round cores of material.
Min Overlap
The Min Overlap parameter is the minimum size of the area where the round cores
overlap.
The overlap area has an overlap circle that is tangent to four round cores in the
Square grid pattern. The overlap area has an overlap circle that is tangent to three
round cores in the Equilateral Triangle grid pattern.
The value for Min Overlap is the diameter of the overlap circle. The drawing below
shows the overlap circles in a Square and Equilateral Triangle grid pattern. The
overlap circle is shown at 20 times the normal default value.
SURFCAM uses the Min Overlap parameter and the tool diameter to calculate the
value of the Max Step Size parameter.
Normally there is no need to change the default value of the Min Overlap
parameter. The default value is 0.01.
Step Size
The Step Size parameter is the distance that one plunge point is from the next
plunge point. The Step Size is the length of the sides of the squares or the triangles
in the grid pattern. The default value of the Step Size parameter is the value of the
692
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Max Step Size parameter. You can change the Step Size value but it is normal to
use the default value.
Note
You cannot make the step size greater than the Max Step Size.
Max Step Size

The Max Step Size parameter is a calculated value. The value depends on the
diameter of the tool, the Grid Type (Square or Equilateral Triangle) and the Min
Overlap value. The value of Max Step Size changes when you change the tool
diameter, the Grid Type or the Min Overlap value.
Cut Direction
The Plunge Rough plunge moves are done along parallel rows. The Cut Direction
parameter controls how these rows are cut. The distance between the rows In the
Square grid pattern is the length of the sides of the square. The distance between
the rows In the Equilateral Triangle grid pattern is the height of the triangle.
Bi-directional
Two passes, one in each direction, are made along each row. If there is open
space on one side of a bi-directional pass, the tool cuts on slopes that increase
and decrease.
If there is material on both sides of a bi-directional pass, a different method is
used.
SURFCAM cuts the slopes that increase and decrease by different methods.
The plunge moves are done on the slopes that increase to get the best chip
removal. When SURFCAM finds a slope that decreases, the tool moves
forward to where it can make the deepest plunge. If a pilot hole is needed at
that location, make sure to drill one. The plunge moves are made from this point
forward along the next slope that increases. The slopes that decrease are cut
on the next pass along the same row in the opposite direction.
The Stock To Leave parameter, the Material Cut Mode parameter and the
surface depth are used to calculate the depth of each plunge move.
Plunge moves on a pass from the left
Chapter 12 3 Axis
693
Plunge moves on the opposite pass

Uni-Directional
One pass is made in each direction. The plunge moves are made on the slopes
that increase and the slopes that decrease.
Stock To Leave
This parameter defines the minimum amount of material to leave after a plunge
cut. On a surface with a slope, there are areas where more material than this
amount are left.
Min Cut Depth
The Min Cut Depth parameter identifies the areas on the part too shallow to cut.
SURFCAM will not make a plunge move in an area with a smaller depth of material
than this value.
Material Cut Mode
Incremental Depth
The material is cut in multiple passes through multiple layers from the top to the
bottom. On each tool pass, the tool will plunge only to the height of that layer.
If a part of the surface is above the bottom of the layer, the tool plunges to the
stock to leave distance above the surface.
Final Depth Only
The tool cuts to the stock to leave distance above the surface at each plunge
location.
Depth Increment
This value defines the Z step of the layers. The parameter is active if the
Incremental Depth option is selected for the Material Cut Mode.
Initial Rapid
This parameter is the clearance plane at which the tool does the horizontal
repositioning moves in the rapid mode.
694
Chapter 12 3 Axis
Pilot Holes
This check box tells SURFCAM to look for the locations on the surfaces where pilot
holes are needed.
The default setting for the box is checked. If the box is not checked, SURFCAM
will not look for the needed pilot hole locations. If the box is checked and
SURFCAM does not find any needed pilot holes, no action is taken.
If needed pilot hole locations are found, a dialog box is displayed after the Plunge
Rough operation is finished.
After you click Yes, the 2 Axis Pilot Hole dialog box is displayed. Use this dialog
box to set the parameters for the pilot holes. See Pilot Hole, page 600.
When the operation is completed, the Pilot Hole operation is put above the Plunge
Rough operation in the Operations Manager Toolpath Tree.
Note
The pilot holes in the Plunge Rough operation can overlap. If the pilot
holes that overlap are found, select the correct tool to cut the holes that
overlap. A rigid tool is needed.
Note
If a Center Drill operation is needed for the Pilot Holes, do that operation
in a separate step.
Use the 3 Axis Pilot Hole operation. See Pilot Hole, page 600. On the
Select Operation dialog box that is displayed, select the Plunge Rough
operation. On the Pilot Hole Cut Control tab, set the Center Drill
parameter to the Yes option. Enter the correct value for Hole Depth.
When the operation is completed, the Center Drill Pilot Hole operation is
put above the Plunge Rough operation in the Operations Manager
Toolpath Tree. To put the three operations in the correct sequence, put
the Center Drill operation above the earlier Pilot hole operation.
Plunge Move
Straight
Select the Straight option for a normal plunge move.
Peck
Select the Peck option for a peck move.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
695
Peck Retract
The tool retracts to this level after every peck increment.
Peck Increment
The Peck Increment parameter is active when Plunge Move is set to Peck. This
value is the distance the tool moves on each peck move.
12.13.3 3 Axis Options Tab Plunge Rough

See The Options Tab, page 505 and The Options Tab, page 636.
After you make the needed changes in the parameter values, click the OK button on
the 3 Axis Plunge Rough dialog box. SURFCAM creates the toolpath and displays it
on the screen. Then the Keep Operation dialog box is displayed. Click the Accept
696
Chapter 12 3 Axis
12.14
OPTIONS
All 3 Axis operations have the same Options tab parameters.
See The Options Tab, page 728 to read the descriptions of the parameters not in the
following list.
Chapter 12 3 Axis
697
Vertical Surface Check

You can increase the toolpath creation speed if you remove the edge protection
on vertical surfaces. If you load a solid model CAD design, you can set this
parameter to No because all surfaces are normally closed.
If a design has a surface that is vertical and has no top, set this parameter to the
Yes option.
Save Z Slices To Layer
When this parameter is set to the Yes option, SURFCAM saves the Z-level cuts in
Z Rough and Z Finish. SURFCAM saves those cuts on layer 255 if that layer is not
used. If layer 255 is not available, the first available layer is used. If there are no
available layers, the cuts are not saved. SURFCAM gives that layer the name Z
Slices. Each Z-level cut is a polyline.
Scallop Sample Distance
This parameter is a distance across the surface to sample. SURFCAM uses the
sample to calculate the increment side step over needed to reach the required
height of the scallop.
This parameter controls how the value you enter in the box on the left is used.
Constant
The value you enter is used for this parameter.
Cutter Radius
SURFCAM uses the product of the value you enter and the radius of the
selected tool to determine this parameter.
Scallop Limit Angle
The angle of the surface from the horizontal at which calculations for the scallop
height for the selected surfaces will be limited. The default is 89.
Display Lead Move Changes
The 3 Axis Z Rough and Z Finish operations can have a lead move that is like the
2 Axis operations. If SURFCAM finds a possible gouge, the lead move is either
trimmed or discarded.
Click the Yes option on this parameter to see a warning dialog box when a change
is made in a lead move. See Display Plunge Changes, page 629.
There are three types of changes that are made to a lead move. The length of the
lead move is decreased less than 50% or the length is decreased more than 50%
or the lead move is discarded.
SURFCAM uses a different color to display a lead move that was changed. A lead
move with the length decreased less than 50% is displayed in yellow while one
decreased more than 50% is displayed in red.
698
Chapter 12 3 Axis
CHAPTER 13 4 AXIS AND 5 AXIS

13.1
4 AND 5 AXIS MENUS
To use the 4 Axis or 5 Axis menu, click the NC > 4 Axis or NC > 5 Axis command. The
operations are the same on the two menus.
NC 4 Axis and 5 Axis menu
Cut
Use the Cut operation to cut a single surface by following flow curves that define the
surface. See The Cut Operation, page 700.
Project
Swarf
A Swarf cut uses the side of the tool to cut a surface. See The Swarf Operation, page
705.
Contour
Contour is a one-pass operation. Contour can be a swarf operation, a contour
operation, or both. See The Contour Operation, page 711.
Trim
The Trim operation trims material from the edge of a part. See The Trim Operation,
page 719.
Drill
Set Axis
See The Set Axis Operation, page 722.
Options
13.1.1
700
13.1.2
The Cut Control Tab
Some of the parameters on the Cut Control tab for the Contour and the Trim
operations are unique to the operation. See
1.
The Contour Cut Control Tab, page 712,
2.
The Trim Cut Control Tab, page 720,
The parameters on the Cut Control tab for other operations are described in the The
Cut Control tab, page 488.
13.1.3
The Options Tab
13.2
THE CUT OPERATION
The Cut operation cuts a single surface by following the flow curves that define the
surface. SURFCAM defines a surface with a grid of splines that flow in two directions.
The splines form two sets of flow curves. The surface arrow, attached to a surface, points
toward one set of flow curves. You can change the direction to point toward the other set
with the Edit > Surfaces > Direction command.
The direction of the cut in the Cut operation, is toward the direction of the surface arrow.
The Cut operation has the capability of machining a small part of the surface with a
process that is called Tool Containment. See Tool Containment, page 546.
13.2.1
Begin the Cut Operation
Click the Cut command and select a surface. SURFCAM displays the 4-5 Axis Cut
dialog box.
701
Lead Type
This parameter controls the alignment of the tool during the cut.
Lead/Lag Surface
Use this option to align the tool so that its axis is at an angle with a normal to
the surface. The angle is parallel to the direction of the cut. The angle can range
from -90 to 90. The tool is normal to the surface at the default value of 0.
If you select this option, the Lead Angle parameter is available. Enter the angle
at which the tool passes over the part.
4 Axis tool motion

normal to the surface
5 Axis tool motion

normal to the surface
A positive angle makes the tool shank go before the tip across the part. This
action drags the tool tip across the surface.
Note
The 4 Axis operations normally use a lead angle.
4 Axis tool motion

with 10 lead angle
5 Axis tool motion

with 10 lead angle
A negative angle makes the tool shank follow the tip across the part. This action
pushes the tool tip across the part. A negative angle is called a lag angle.
702
4 Axis tool motion

with -10 lead angle
5 Axis tool motion

with -10 lead angle
Tip
Do not use a lag angle with end mill tools.
Tip
When you use a 4 axis machine with rotary axis limits, set the Retrace
Type parameter to the Bidirectional option. Then the rotary axis can
unwind on each pass.
Point
Select the Point option to make the axis of the shank contain a defined point.
This option is a method that can control the tool vector.
This option is only available in the cut cycle. The Point option is normally used
when there is an undercut application. Use this option where the tool must cut
between two surfaces or under a single surface.
If you selected the Point option, SURFCAM displays the Select Point Menu.
Select the tool axis point. Then SURFCAM displays the dialog box for the Cut
operation.
Point controlling
tool vector
View:7
4 Axis Point Vector Control
Point controlling
tool vector
View:2
703
Curve
The Curve option is like the Point option. This method gives added control over
where the tool vector passes. Curve is normally used for the difficult undercut
applications where the tool must cut between two surfaces or under a single
surface.
Curve controlling
vector
Curve controlling
vector
4 Axis Curve Type Vector Control
5 Axis Curve Type Vector Control
You can enter the values for the Lead Angle and the Side Angle parameters.
SURFCAM uses these two angles to calculate the best tool alignment. While
the tool moves along the curve, the tool alignment is adjusted. SURFCAM
keeps the tool alignment near these two angles.
If you selected the Curve option, SURFCAM displays the Select Chain menu.
Select the first element of the tool axis curve, then the last element. Then
SURFCAM displays the dialog box for the Cut operation.
Lead Angle
This parameter is the value of the angle of the tool with the surface normal. The
angle is parallel to the direction of the cut. This parameter is active when Lead
Type is set to Lead/Lag Surface or to Curve.
704
Side Angle
This parameter is used when the Lead Type is Curve. The plane of a Side Angle
is perpendicular to the plane of a Lead Angle.
Click the OK button on the 4-5 Axis Cut dialog box.
1.
If you selected the Lead/Lag Surface option, the 4 Axis Cut or the 5 Axis Cut
2.
If you selected the Point option, the Select Point menu is displayed. A prompt
tells you to select the tool axis point. After you select the point, the 4 Axis Cut
or the 5 Axis Cut dialog box is displayed.
3.
If you selected the Curve option, the Select Chain menu is displayed. A prompt
tells you to select the tool axis curve. After you select the curve, the 4 Axis Cut
or the 5 Axis Cut dialog box is displayed.
13.2.2
The Cut Tool Information Tab
13.2.3
The Cut Control Tab
See The Cut Control tab, page 488.
13.2.4
The Cut Options Tab
13.2.5
Complete the Cut Operation
1.
When you finish, click the OK button.
2.
SURFCAM creates the toolpaths and displays the tool motion on the screen.
3.
SURFCAM displays the Keep Operation dialog box.
4.
13.3
THE PROJECT OPERATION
13.4
705
THE SWARF OPERATION
The Swarf operation cuts a single surface with the side of the tool. The tool shank is held
parallel to the surface during the cut with the side angle equal to 0.
There are two types of orientation of the tool shank along the surface during the Swarf
operation. The orientation of the tool shank can be off the centerline to the positive or the
negative side of the part
To insure the correct tool orientation for the machining process, turn on the tool display
during the cut. To turn on the tool display, click Options > Display. The Tool Display
Options dialog box is displayed. Set the Draw The Tool parameter to the Yes option.
Swarf Cut
The Swarf operation has the capability of machining a small part of the surface with a
process that is called Tool Containment. See Tool Containment, page 546.
If you must set the tool at a slope along the axis of rotation, a 5 axis swarf cut is required.
13.4.1
Begin the Swarf Operation
Click the Swarf command and select a surface. SURFCAM displays the 4 Axis or the
5 Axis Swarf dialog box. The parameters determine the cutter shank orientation.
4-5 Axis Swarf dialog box

706
Swarf Type
Ruled
If you select this option, the shank of the tool is parallel to the flow curves of the
surface during the cut.
Minimum Tilt
Use this option to keep the tool tip below the other parts of the tool. The tool
shaft can not be lower than the tool tip.
Note
This option can cause a gouge problem if the surface being cut is
parallel to the XY plane.
In 4 Axis machining, the rotary axis rotation helps keep the tool shank
orientation.
The Minimum Tilt option is better in the 5Axis Swarf operation than in the 4 Axis
Swarf operation. This option requires the rotary axis to rotate 180 while the
moves are made along the linear axes. This rotation can cause the tool to
gouge the surface in a 4 Axis Swarf operation.
Tool orientation to the point that the tool is parallel to the XY plane
Tool orientation change to maintain the tip in the most negative Z axis orientation
Start Z Angle > 90

The Start Z Angle > 90 parameter controls the shank orientation at the start point
of the surface cut. This parameter is not used if the Minimum Tilt mode is used.
During a 4 axis Swarf, the tool is moved off the axis of rotation centerline. The Start
Z Angle > 90 parameter determines which direction off the centerline to move. You
707
can select either side of centerline for the shank orientation when the swarf cut
starts.
During a 5 Axis Swarf, the Start Z Angle > 90 is the angle between the tool shank
and the positive Z axis. You can select one of the two possible shank orientations
when the swarf cut starts.
After the operation starts, the shape of the surface controls the orientation of the
tool shank.
No
4 Axis
Select No to leave the tip of the tool below the shank.
The tool orientation is toward the side of the part that requires the least
amount of part rotation.
The tool orientation for this type of cut

The drawings are oriented with the axis of rotation along the X axis.
5 Axis
Select No to leave the tip of the tool below the shank (in Z). This No option
does not insure that the tool tip is always the lowest part of the tool.
When the surface goes over a hill in the direction across the cuts, the tool
tip becomes more positive in Z axis than the rest of the tool.
708
The drawings indicate the tool orientation for this type of cut.
Yes
4 Axis
Click Yes to begin the operation with the tool shank on the opposite side of
the rotary axis centerline.
5 Axis
Some machines can turn the tool so that the tip is higher in Z than the rest
of the shaft. Click Yes to begin the operation with the tip of the tool more
positive in Z axis than the shank.
Side Angle
Indicate an angle for the shank clearance. The Side Angle is also used for an
undercut.
You can adjust for a tapered tool during a Swarf cut. The tool taper angle is entered
for the value of the Side Angle to keep the shaft of the tool parallel to the surface.
A larger angle is used when a shank clearance is needed for these tools.
Note
A positive value for the Side Angle aligns the position of the tool shaft
away from the surface. A value of 90 is normal to the surface.
Note
The Side Angle is used like the Lead Angle is used in 5 Axis Cut.
Part used for 4 Axis Swarf Examples
View: 5
Rotation occurs for this
side cut along the axis of rotation.
View: 2
No tool rotation is possible.
The part rotates back to zero

for the cut across the axis of rotation.
View: 2
709
The tool orientation is normal to the surface. A Side Angle of zero was used.
Part rotated additional

10 degrees for the side angle
The part is rotated

back to zero for this cut.
View:2.
The tool orientation with a positive side angle of +10 was used.
710
Part is rotated 10 degrees

less for the side angle.
Part is rotated back

to zero for this cut.
View:2.
The tool orientation with a negative side angle of -10 was used.
4 Axis Swarf Cut Examples
View: 2
View: 5
View: 2
The above drawings show a Side Angle of zero.
View: 5
View: 2
View: 5
View: 2
Tool orientation with a positive side angle of +10
View: 5
View: 2
View: 5
View: 2
View: 5
711
Tool orientation with a negative side angle of -10
After the Swarf type has been selected and the Start Z Angle > 90 and Side Angle have
been identified, click OK. The 4 Axis or 5 Axis Swarf Cut dialog box will be displayed.
13.4.2
The Swarf Tool Information Tab
13.4.3
The Swarf Cut Control Tab
See The Cut Control tab, page 488.
13.4.4
The Swarf Options Tab
13.4.5
Complete the Swarf Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
13.5
THE CONTOUR OPERATION
Contour is a one-pass operation that can be used as a swarf operation, a contour

operation, or both. It is a swarf type operation when it is performed using a single surface
as the guide surface. A guide surface must be associated with the spline being cut.
A guide surface must be associated with one or more other surfaces, called bottom
surfaces, that are used to control the swarf cut along the tool vector. If the guide surface
is not cut, it can act as a guide for a contour cut performed on the bottom surface(s). Both
kinds of cuts can be performed together on the same pass.
Both cuts are also guided by a cutter intersect spline, called the contour curve, that is
projected onto the guide surface. The contour curve must have been previously created.
The closer it is created to the guide surface, the more accurately it can be projected onto
that surface.
SURFCAM provides gouge detection and avoidance on all bottom surfaces.
The amount of material to be removed by the swarf cut on the guide surface is controlled
by the Stock To Leave on Guide Surface parameter on the Cut Control tab. The amount
712
of material to be removed by the contour cut on the bottom surface is controlled by the
Stock To Leave at Bottom Surfaces parameter.
The tool orientation is dependent on the guide surface arrow side, direction, and the
value for the Side Angle parameter on the Cut Control tab.
Note
In performing a Contour cut, if the tool is required to tilt along the axis of
rotation, a 5 Axis Contour cut must be used.
13.5.1
Begin the Contour Operation
1.
Click the Contour command.
2.
Select the guide surface.
3.
Select the bottom surfaces.
4.
Click the Done command.
5.
SURFCAM displays the Select Chain menu. Select a point that is near one end
of the cutter intersect spline, the contour curve that you earlier created.
SURFCAM displays a square around that end of the curve.
6.
Select a point that is near to the other end of the curve. SURFCAM displays the
Contour dialog box.
13.5.2
The Contour Tool Information Tab
13.5.3
The Contour Cut Control Tab
For descriptions of Cut Control parameters not in the following list, see The Cut
Control tab, page 488.
713
5 Axis Contour Cut Control tab
Stock To Leave on Guide Surface

Specify the amount of stock to leave on the guide surface.
Stock To Leave at Bottom Surfaces
Specify the amount of stock to leave on the bottom surfaces.
Side Angle
Specify an angle for shank clearance. The side angle can also be used for an
undercut. You can also adjust for tapered tools during swarf cutting. The tool taper
angle is input for Side Angle to maintain the tool shaft parallel to the surface. A
larger angle can be used when shank clearance is desired for these tools as well.
714
Curve Tolerance
Contour moves along a spline will be broken into linear moves along a chord
between two points on the spline. When driving the tool around a spline curve,
SURFCAM will adjust the length of the chordal moves to make sure that the edge
of the contour is never a greater distance from the chord than the value of the
Curve Tolerance.
Rapid Plane
Specify an absolute location to move to for clearance above the part surface. This
should include clearance above any clamps or obstructions.
Minimum Z
This sets the most negative Z axis move allowed. The toolpath will not move below
this level. The toolpath maintains this Z level along the contour until the end of the
contour or a higher Z level is intersected.
13.5.4
The Contour Options Tab
13.5.5
Complete the Contour Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
13.5.5.1
Four Axis Contour Examples
The tool axis perpendicular to the axis of rotation performs a swarf of the selected
surface. When a side angle is entered, the part is rotated to tilt the tool away from
the surface wall. It is only applied to the walls that are being swarf cut. The
following drawings show the tool position that is perpendicular to the axis of
rotation.
Note
SURFCAM will display the cut with the tool tilted. During the machine cut,
the tool remains vertical while the axis is rotated for the swarf cutting of
the tool. This also applies to the side angle cuts.
Part used for 4 Axis Contour Examples
View:5
Rotation occurs for this side
cut along the axis of rotation.
View:2

View:2
The tool orientation is normal to the surface. A side angle of zero was used.
715
716
The part is rotated an additional 10 for the side angle.

View:2
The tool orientation with a positive side angle. A side angle of +10 was used.
The part is rotated 10 less for the side angle.

717
View:2
The tool orientation with a negative side angle. A side angle of -10 was used.
4 Axis Contour Examples
13.5.5.2
The lead angle is applied to the cutter in the plane of the normal to surface
orientation. The drawings below indicate the tool orientation for the contour cut.
These examples have the surface arrow at the top of the cone, on the outside, and
directed around the surface.
Part used for 5 Axis Contour Examples
View: 2
View: 5
This cut is normal to the surface (zero degree side angle).

718
View: 2
View: 5
This cut is normal to the surface (zero degree side angle).
View: 2
View: 5
View: 2
View: 5
The cut is a +10 side angle cut.
View: 2
View: 5
View: 2
719
View: 5
The cut is a 10 side angle cut.
13.6
THE TRIM OPERATION
Use the Trim operation to trim the material from an outside or an inside edge of a part.
To trim an inside and an outside edge, you must do the operation two times.
A trimming curve along the final edge of the part helps to make a Trim operation toolpath.
During the Trim operation, the outside edge of the tool is tangent to the trimming curve.
The center of the tool is offset to one side or the other of the trimming curve.
The angle between the top surface of the part and the edge that is cut by the side of the
tool is determined by direction lines that you attach to the trimming curve at appropriate
locations. The angle at which the direction lines intersect the surface is the angle at which
the tool will cut. If a direction line is normal to the surface at a given location, the angle
between the surface and the edge will be 90. The size of the cutting angle, as the tool
moves from the location of one direction line to the next, will slowly change in a smooth
transition.
The direction lines must attach to the trimming curve at the end points of the elements of
that curve. If you need a direction line between the end points of an element you must
use the Break 1 command on the Edit > Trim Break menu. Break that element where the
direction line will be positioned.
A trimming curve
Trimming curve with direction lines

Trim Curve Examples
720
Tool tangent to trimming curve
Tool offset to interior of trimming curve
Trim toolpath showing tool
Tool tilted by the direction line

Trim Curve Examples
13.6.1
Begin the Trim Operation
1.
Click the Trim command.
2.
SURFCAM displays the Select Chain menu. Select the first element of the
trimming curve.
3.
Complete the chain operation.
4.
SURFCAM displays the Trim dialog box.
13.6.2
The Trim Tool Information Tab
13.6.3
The Trim Cut Control Tab
See The Cut Control tab, page 488 for the descriptions of Cut Control parameters not
in the following list.
721
4 Axis Trim Cut Control tab
Cutting Depth
This parameter is the depth that the tool cuts into the material.
Curve Tolerance
The Contour moves along a spline are linear moves along the chords between two
points on the spline. When the tool around a spline curve, SURFCAM adjusts the
length of the chordal moves. The contour is never a larger distance from the chord
than the value of the Curve Tolerance.
722
13.6.4
The Trim Options Tab
13.6.5
Complete the Trim Operation
1.
2.
SURFCAM displays the Select menu. Select the tool direction lines or vectors.
3.
Click the Done command.
4.
Select the offset side.of the trimming curve. Then SURFCAM creates the trim
toolpath and displays the tool motion on the screen.
5.
6.
13.7
THE DRILL OPERATION
13.8
THE SET AXIS OPERATION
Since there are significant differences as well as similarities between the operations
found on the 4 axis and 5 axis menus, this section is devoted to special considerations
for the two NC modes.
13.8.1
NC 4 Axis Special Considerations
The Part orientation in 3D space and the axis of rotation are important to 4 Axis
machining. These two conditions affect the rotary axis zero. The part geometry and
axis of rotation must be created in relation to the physical placement of the rotary table
to insure that the proper NC code and machine tool motion are created.
When a 4 axis cut is done, SURFCAM displays the tool while it moves around the
geometry. The tool motion that is shown is the opposite of the actual rotary motion
that is created. The clockwise tool motion is positive rotary motion. The
counterclockwise tool motion is negative rotary motion. The post processor can
override the direction of the rotary axis motion.
723
Typical Vertical Milling Machine with Rotary Table along the X Axis
SURFCAM 4 Axis creates tool path files along three linear axes and one rotary axis
or two linear axes and one rotary axis. You can position the rotary axis at any
orientation. The normal position of the rotary axis is along the X axis or the Y axis.
13.8.1.1
Set Axis for 4 Axis
The axis of rotation can be set at any angle and in any direction in 3D space. It
must be set in relation to the physical placement of the machine tool's rotating axis.
A common configuration is to have a rotary table mounted on the X positive end of
the machine tool table. This requires the axis of rotation to be defined along the X
axis. The first selection point is at the X negative end of the rotational axis. (This
could be the center of the rotary table face.) The second selection point is at the X
positive end of the rotational axis. This produces a positive motion when the rotary
axis turns counterclockwise. When the points are selected in reverse order, a
positive motion is a clockwise rotation.
In the Axis of Rotation figure, the line in the center of the face is the axis of rotation.
When the end with the circle is selected first and the opposite end is selected
second, the arrow indicates the direction of positive tool motion.
The arrow indicates negative tool motion if the end points of the line are selected
in the opposite order.
Note
A similar drawing can be created to indicate the machine tool's rotary

axis orientation and axis of rotation.
724
Axis of Rotation
The axis of rotation can be selected with any orientation. When this command is
not used, SURFCAM defaults to the axis rotation defined in the SURFCAM.INI file.
When this parameter is set for the machine configuration, it is not necessary to
click the Set axis command.
Note
The default axis of rotation is set in the SURFCAM.INI file with the
ROT4AXIS parameter. See Rotary 4 axis, page 888.
13.8.1.2
Rotary Axis Zero
Setting the axis of rotation does not set the Rotary Axis Zero position. SURFCAM
designates this position as normal to CView:1 in the Z plus direction.
Viewing a horizontal line from View:2 or View:5, the Rotary Axis Zero position
exists when the tool is above, and perpendicular to the line with the tip pointing
toward the line as in the drawing.
The tool location on the X, Y, or Z axis does not affect the Rotary Axis Zero
position. The axis of rotation is identified with the line entering the right side of the
box and exiting the left side.
The Rotary Axis Zero is at the 12 o'clock position. This drawing is in View:7.
725
Viewing the box from the right side is View:5. The front side of the box is View:2.
The tool is above and perpendicular to the horizontal lines of the View:2 and
View:5 sides. This indicates the Rotary axis rotation zero position.
13.8.1.3
Indexing Operations
SURFCAM can be used to index the rotary axis for positioning. The rotary axis can
be positioned for each cutting view. These views can be created from part sides,
fixture sides, or work offset locations. The views define the index positioning for
each SURFCAM operation.
A view to define each index must be created. After selecting the X and Y axis
locations for the view, the origin is defined. This location defines the local
coordinate system for that view. The origin for the standard views is at World X0,
Y0, Z0. It is not required that you create views parallel to the 8 standard views
when the desired origin is World X0, Y0, Z0.
Note
It is recommended that the origin be placed at the center of rotation for

each view. When different origins are used, care must be taken in
selecting clearance plane locations.
The following SURFCAM operations can be indexed in the 2 axis mode: Pocket,
Contour, Drill, and Contour 3D. In the 3 axis mode SURFCAM operations that can
be indexed are: Cut, Planar, and Contour 3D.
The part geometry must be created in 3D space around the axis of rotation. The
operation must be performed in View Coordinates. In the Status bar, Coord must
be set to VIEW. The CView must be set to the appropriate view for the operation.
Note
Rotary axis indexing operations are not accomplished in the 4 axis mode.
The Post Processor outputs the rotary axis positioning for the 2 axis or 3
axis mode operations.
The drawing in the Axis of Rotation figure shows the axis of rotation along the X
axis from negative to positive. This is indicated by the line through the center of the
box. The arrow indicates the positive direction of tool motion for the rotary axis.
The top of the box is machined in View:1. The front of the box is machined in
View:2.
With SURFCAM set to VIEW Coordinates, pocket the top in CView:1. The
output for the top pocket is positioned at a rotary axis of zero.
726
Axis of Rotation
along the X Axis from Negative to Positive
The front pocket is cut in CView:2. The output for the front is indexed 90 before
the pocket is machined.
The Tool Orientation for Indexing during the Pocket Operation
13.8.1.4
Simultaneous Axis Motion
You can select either 3 axis or 4 axis simultaneous motion. Select this option with
the Options command on the NC 4 Axis Menu. The options for the Limit Rotary
Motion parameter are 3 Axis or 4 axis. The axis number selected determines the
tool motion for the 4 axis operation that is done.
Selection of 3 axis simultaneous motion uses one rotary axis and two linear axes
for motion. The use of 4 axis simultaneous motion provides one rotary axis and
three linear axes of motion.
The selection of 4 axis simultaneous motion allows movement of all four axes
during the operation. When 3 is selected, axis motion is dependent upon the axis
of rotation. When the axis of rotation is on the X axis, no Y axis motion occurs.
When the axis of rotation is along the Y axis, no X axis motion occurs. When the
axis of rotation is not along any standard axis, all 4 axis motion can occur.
727
3 Axis
When 3 axis simultaneous motion is selected the operation is done with the tool
tip pointing through the axis of rotation. The Lead angle entry, in the Lead angle
dialog box, has no effect on the tool angle. The tool is always pointing through
the axis of rotation.
4 Axis
During the 4 axis simultaneous motion, the tool orientation is often normal to
the surface.
3 Axis Simultaneous Motion
4 Axis Simultaneous Motion
Tool Orientation during a Cut
13.8.2
NC 5 Axis Special Considerations
To do 5 axis cutting, SURFCAM calculates I, J, and K vectors to direct the tool shank
in relation to the tool tip contact point. These vectors identify the tool shank orientation
during the cutting process. You can adjust the tool shank vectors used with lead angle
and side angle inputs.
The cutting procedures that are described in this section are all done in the Top View.
With SURFCAM you can generate NC programs in a local coordinate system. Thus
you can machine different sections of the work with independent machining
orientationsa necessity with most parts. SURFCAM can be used to change the
machining orientation of the part by using construction views. This is accomplished
by setting the CView (construction view) parameter to the number of the view that
matches the machining orientation of the piece currently being cut.
13.8.2.1
Set Axis for 5 Axis
The Set Axis command is used when one or more than one of the axes on the
machine rotary. Use the Set Axis command to change the output of the rapid
movements in the toolpath. A cylinder motion defines the rapid moves, not linear.
728
Before the Set Axis command is used, the Number of Rotary Axis parameter on
the 5 Axis Options tab is set to 1. See Number Of Rotary Axis (5 Axis), page 730.
The first default value for the Number Of Rotary Axis parameter is 0. You can
change the default value. Run the SURFCAM Config Tools program and select
the SURFCAM.INI file from the Select SURFCAM Initialization File dialog box.
Click the Rotary 5 axis button on the NC Options tab of the Options dialog box.
(See Rotary 5 axis, page 889.)
Number of Rotary Axis
1
SURFCAM displays the Select Point Menu. Select the first point and the
second point on the rotation axis.
0
SURFCAM displays the message that the Number of the Rotary Axis is 0.
Press any key to continue.
13.9
THE OPTIONS TAB
Click the Options command to display a dialog box that has all the NC Options tabs.
4 Axis and 5 Axis Options dialog boxes
Limit Rotary Motion (4 Axis)

Use this parameter to set 3 or 4 axis motion.
729
730
When 4 Axis motion is selected, one rotary axis and three linear axes are used to cut
the surface. When 3 Axis motion is selected, one rotary axis and two linear axes are
used. When the axis of rotation is on the X axis, no Y axis motion occurs. When the
axis of rotation is along the Y axis, no X axis motion occurs. When the axis of rotation
is not along any standard axis, all 4 axis motion can occur.
When 3 Axis is selected, the tool tip points through the axis of rotation during the
operation. The entry for the Side Angle parameter on the 4-5 Axis Swarf dialog box
does not change the tool angle. The tool always points through the axis of rotation.
During 4 axis simultaneous motion, the tool orientation is often normal to the surface.
Number Of Rotary Axis (5 Axis)
Select the number of rotary axes to use for 5 axis machining. Select 0 when the
machining center has no rotary axis or 1 for the first rotary axis. This parameter
changes the display of the rapid moves between cuts. This parameter does not cause
any changes in the final NC code.
Feed Between Clearance
This parameter is the relative distance for the tool to retract at the end on one cut
pass. The tool then makes a feed move to the start point of the next pass. This value
is used when the distance between one pass and the next pass is less than the
Maximum Feed Between size.
When a tool move is smaller than this value, the tool moves to the Feed Between
Clearance level. Then the tool moves to the start point of the next pass. If the move
is larger than this value, the cutter moves to the Rapid Plane.
Constant
The value that is entered is used for the distance of the Feed Between move.
Cutter Radius
The Feed Between distance is the product of the value that is entered and the tool
radius.
Feed Between Rate
The Feed Between Rate is the tool Feed Rate speed during the step over move from
one tool pass to the next. See Feed Rate, page 499.
Lead On Feed Between
3 Axis
Yes
The tool path will apply any leadin type to each Feed Between move.
No
The leadin move is created for the first cut.
731
4 and 5 Axis
Yes
The leadin move will be done at all the Feed Between moves.
No
The leadin and leadout moves will be done only at the start and the end of the
surface cut.
Leadout move
at end of cut
Leadin and Leadout moves
for each Feed Between move
Leadin move at beginning of cut
The Lead On Feed Between option is selected as Yes for this 5 Axis cut.
Leadout move
at end of cut
No Leadin move
on Feed Between
Leadin move at beginning of cut
The Lead On Feed Between option is selected as No for this 5 Axis cut.
Change Tool Axis Vector (4 and 5 Axis)

This parameter determines when the tool axis vector is applied. The tool axis vector
is the orientation of the tool shaft after the type of cut and lead angle are applied.
During XY
The tool orientation is applied during the first XY move in the toolpath.
732
At Top
The first XY move is completed. Then the tool orientation is applied.
During Z
The tool orientation is applied during the first Z axis move to the part. This option
is not recommended when there is no leadin move.
At Bottom
The orientation is applied after the Z axis move is made. The orientation is
completed before the leadin move is started.
Tool Vertical For Rapid (4 and 5 Axis)
Yes
The tool is put in the vertical position before any rapid move is made.
No
The tool is kept in its current orientation during the rapid moves.
Rapid Frequency
This parameter controls the number of tool retracts that are needed to cut a surface
that has several separate cut areas.
Per Pass
The tool retracts to move from one cut area to the next area on each tool pass.
Per Region
One area of the surface is cut before a tool retract is done to move to the next area.
Side Step Mode
This parameter controls how the tool moves between each cut.
Follow Edge
This option keeps the tool in contact with the material during the move to the next
cut.
733
Side step mode set to Follow Edge
Direct
Between tool passes the tool moves in XY and then Z if the next cut is lower in Z.
Between tool passes the tool moves in Z and then XY if the next cut is higher in Z.
Side step mode set to Direct.
Write Normal
Some machine controllers use the I, J, K normal vectors to the surface for 3D cutter
compensation. These vectors are at the points where the tool touches the surface.
If you set this parameter to Yes, SURFCAM outputs this vector information.
734

Yes
The value for Z Gauge Length on the Tool Information tab is set to the tool Total
Height value from the tool library.
No
The Z Gauge Length is 0 or the value you enter for it.
Rapid Plane Clearance
This parameter is the default Z level for horizontal rapid moves.
Plunge Clearance
Sort Type
See Sort Type, page 628.
Restore Defaults
Restore all the parameter values on the tab to the parameter values that existed when
you opened SURFCAM.
13.10
GRAPHIC TOOL DISPLAY
When SURFCAM displays the 4 axis tool motion, the orientation of the tool axis changes.
On an actual 4 axis machine, the part rotates while the direction of the tool axis remains
fixed. See the figures.
TOOL ORIENTATION IN SURFCAM
ACTUAL TOOL ORIENTATION
This was accomplished with 4 axis swarf

with the start angle set to greater than 90.
Actual tool orientation used by the

machine tool for the swarf cut at the left
Graphic Tool Display
735
736
TOOL ORIENTATION IN SURFCAM
ACTUAL TOOL ORIENTATION
This was accomplished with 4 axis Swarf

with the start angle set to less than 90.
Actual tool orientation used by the

machine tool for the swarf cut at the left
Graphic Tool Display
Chapter 14 Lathe
CHAPTER 14 LATHE
14.1
LATHE MENU
To use the Lathe menu, click the NC > Lathe command.
NC Lathe menu
Turn
Use the Turn operation to machine the part along the length of the material. The cut
moves are parallel to the Z axis. The Turn operation can cut at any angle to the Z axis
in some conditions. See Turn, page 765.
Face
Use the Face operation to machine the part along the diameter of the material. The
cut moves are perpendicular to the Z axis. The Face operation can cut at any angle
to the Z axis in some conditions. See Face, page 769.
Face Off
Use the Face Off operation to remove the material from the face of the part. Remove
this material to prepare for other turn operations. See Face Off, page 773.
Groove
See Groove, page 775.
Thread
Use the Thread operation to create the inside or outside canned cycle threads. See
Thread, page 778.
Drill
Use the Drill operation to drill the face of the part. Only the part centerline is drilled.
See Drill, page 781.
Partoff
Use the Partoff operation to remove a turned part from the bar stock. See Partoff,
page 784.
Options
Click Options to display the NC Options dialog box. This box displays all the NC
Options tabs. See Lathe Options Tab, page 760.
738
Chapter 14 Lathe
14.1.1
General Information
The parts for the a lathe operation are designed in 2D geometry. The parts are turned
on two axis lathes.
SURFCAM is compatible with any lathe axis orientation. The axis orientation is set by
the user in SURFCAM. The actual axis orientation and direction is controlled by the
post processor. You can create the standard output for many manufacturers with the
sample post processors that are supplied. See Chapter 22 Post Processor, page
1267 for the procedure for configuring the different post processors. For display
purposes, all references to the tool orientation are based on the turret that is at the
rear of the part. Front lathe machine code is produced by the post processor.
You can generate NC programs in a local coordinate system. Thus you can machine
different sections of the work with independent machining orientationsa necessity
with many parts
Each Lathe operation has a separate dialog box. That box is displayed after you
select the operation and identify the geometry on which it will be done. After you click
the OK button on a Lathe dialog box, SURFCAM prompts you to select a Lathe
Retract Point and Lathe Clearance Point.
Retract-Clearance Points
The retract point is the point where the toolpath begins and ends. The lathe retract
point is normally the point where the tool changes are made.
A lathe clearance point defines a level or distance from the Z axis. The tool does
a rapid move from the retract point to this level at the lathe cycle start. The tool
does a rapid move from this level to the retract point at the end of the lathe cycle.
These rapid moves are perpendicular to the Z axis. The lathe ID operations
normally use the lathe clearance points.
If you do not need a retract point, click the Done command on the Select Point
menu. If you do not need a clearance point, click the Done command.
14.1.2
Configure the Lathe View
There are 3 lathe coordinate systems in SURFCAM. Click Options > Axis. Then select
the Mill Axis, Lathe Radius, or Lathe Diameter option. See the Mill Axis, Lathe Radius
and Lathe Diameter figure.
Chapter 14 Lathe
VIEW 1
VIEW 7
WORLD DIALOG BOX
MILL
LATHE
RADIUS
LATHE
DIAMETER
Mill Axis, Lathe Radius and Lathe Diameter
739
740
Chapter 14 Lathe
14.1.3
The Tool Information tabs for all lathe operations are the same except for the Drill tab.
Chapter 14 Lathe
741
See Tool Information Tab, page 462 to read the descriptions of the parameters not in
the following list.
Select Tool
Click the Select Tool button to display a Select Tool dialog box
with the available tools.
1.
Select a Lathe Tool, page 741,
2.
Select a Lathe Drill Tool, page 746,
3.
Edit or Add a Lathe Tool, page 743, or
4.
Edit or Add a Lathe Drill Tool, page 747.
Spindle Speed (RPM)

This parameter Indicates the spindle speed in either RPM (revolutions per minute)
or CSS (constant surface speed). You can set the direction of the spindle rotation
to the clockwise direction (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).
SURFCAM calculates the Spindle Speed with the following formulas.
Inches
Millimeters
Surface Speed
The Surface Speed is a value from the Material Library that depends on the part
material and the material of the tool.
Diameter
This value is the diameter of the part. The value is taken from the part
geometry.
Nose Radius
This parameter is the nose radius of the tool from the Tool Library.
14.1.3.1
Select a Lathe Tool
See The Select Tool functions, page 471 for a description of the uses of the Select
Tool dialog box.
742
Chapter 14 Lathe
Toolbar
Use the toolbar to select a tool, add a new tool, or edit the features of an
existing tool.
Diamond Tool
Groove Tool
Round Tool
Add a Tool to the Library.
Triangle Tool
Edit and Save the current record.
Thread Tool
Delete the current record.
You can create a tool table for special applications.
Chapter 14 Lathe
743
Tables
Use this box to select another tool table.
Add a Tool Table
To Add a Tool Table, you must use Microsoft Access. See Add a Tool
Table, page 481
Available Tools
This list box displays the available tools of the current class of lathe tools. The
tool description appears in the list. The tool and parameters you select in this
box are used in the next NC lathe operation. You can change any of these tool
parameters in the text fields of this dialog box. Tool parameter changes apply
only the current operation and are not saved in the lathe tool library.
Edit or Add a Tool
You can edit a tool from SURFCAM or from Microsoft Access.
See Edit or Add a Lathe Tool, page 743.
See Edit or Add a Lathe Drill Tool, page 747
See Edit or Add a Tool with Microsoft Access, page 477.
Lathe Tool Parameters
The display area next to the Available Tools list box displays the parameters
you can change.
14.1.3.2
Edit or Add a Lathe Tool
You can add a tool to the lathe tool library. You can edit
the features of tools that are in the library.
Click the Edit / Save or the Add A Tool button on the Edit and Save
Select Lathe Tool dialog box. SURFCAM displays the
Lathe Tool Information dialog box.
Add a Tool
744
Chapter 14 Lathe
Tool Description
This parameter is the description of the tool that appears in the lathe tool list
box on the Select Lathe Tool dialog box. This entry can not be more than 40
characters.
Turret
The five Turrets for holding tools are the Rear, the Front, the Saddle, the
Main, and the Rail turrets.
Tool Number, Length Offset, and Diameter Offset
Enter appropriate values.
X Gauge Length
This parameter is an estimate of the distance in X from the turret center to
the tip of the tool.
Z Gauge Length
This parameter is an estimate of the distance in Z from the turret center to
the tip of the tool. The default value is normally 0. The machine operator can
override this value with the length for the actual tool used.
Note
If the ToolLib Gauge Length on the Options tab is set to the Yes
option, the default value is not 0. The value of the Total Height
parameter from the Tool Library is the default value for the Z
Gauge Length.
Chapter 14 Lathe
745
Tool Material
Select a material for the tool.
Default Coolant
Choose the default coolant to be used with the tool. This can be Off, Flood,
Mist, Flood Low Pressure, Flood High Pressure, Through Low Pressure, or
Through High Pressure.
Chip Load
The chip load on the tool in one revolution.
Drawing Files
Specify the files used to draw the tool and the tool holder. When tool paths
are being drawn, you can press the tab key to toggle through displaying just
the tool, the tool and the tool holder, or neither the tool nor the holder. The
file in the Tool list box contains the design for the tool. The files in the Holder
and the three Other list boxes are combined together by SURFCAM to
create the drawing of the tool holder.
Click the ... button to display the Select Tool Drawing File dialog box which
is used to select an existing tool file.
These tool files are design files in the same format as a DSN file except that
they are given the .TLE file extension for English inch tools or the .TLM file
extension for metric tools. The default folder for storing TLE or TLM files is
C:\SURFCAM\Tool.
746
Chapter 14 Lathe
14.1.3.3
Select a Lathe Drill Tool
See The Select Tool functions, page 471 for a description of the uses of the Select
Tool dialog box.
Toolbar
Use the toolbar to select a tool, add a new tool, or edit the features of an
existing tool.
Center Drill Tool.
Counterbore tool
Spot Drill Tool
Bore tool
Chapter 14 Lathe
747
Countersink Tool
Custom tool
Drill Tool
Add a Tool to the Library.
Tap tool
Edit and Save the current record.
Reamer tool
Delete the current record.
Tables
See Tables, page 743.
Available Tools
This list box will display the available tools of the currently selected class of
lathe drill tools. The tool description appears in the list. Selecting a tool in
the list selects its parameters for the next NC lathe operation. You can
change any of these tool parameters in the text fields of this dialog box
before clicking OK. Tool parameter changes affect only the current
operation and are not saved in the lathe tool library.
Lathe Drill Tool Parameters
The lathe drill tool parameters that can be changed are displayed next to the
Available Tools list box.
14.1.3.4
Edit or Add a Lathe Drill Tool
See Edit or Add a Lathe Tool, page 743 for details.

New tools can be added to the lathe drill tool library;
existing tools can be modified. Click the Edit and Save
button or the Add a Drill Tool button to display the Drill
Edit and Save
Tool Information dialog box.
Add a Tool
748
Chapter 14 Lathe
See Edit or Add a Lathe Tool, page 743.

Spin
The Spin check box next to each item under Drawing Files is used to specify
whether or not the tool will spin while being displayed.
14.1.4
The Turn Control Tab
The cut control tabs for the Turn and Face operationsTurn Control and Face
Controlare identical. The cut control tabs for the remaining lathe operations contain
many of the same parameters that appear on the Turn Control tab.
You will be referred to this section in the following sections that describe lathe
operations.
Chapter 14 Lathe
749
Operation
This parameteravailable for the Turn, Face, Face Off, Groove, and Thread
operationsidentifies the direction of the lathe operation you selected.
Selecting an operation will automatically set the Cut, Retract, Lead In, and Lead
Out angles to the standard angles for that operation.
Click the arrow to open a drop-down list of operations specific to the lathe
operation you chose on the Lathe menu.
750
Chapter 14 Lathe
TURN OPERATIONS *
FACE AND FACE OFF OPERATIONS *
OD Turn
OD Face
OD Back Turn
OD Back Face
ID Back Bore
ID Back Face
ID Bore
ID Face
GROOVE OPERATIONS *
THREAD OPERATIONS *
OD Groove
OD Right
OD Back Groove
OD Back Right
ID Back Groove
ID Back Right
ID Groove
ID Right
OD Face Groove
OD Left
OD Back Face Groove
OD Back Left
ID Back Face Groove
ID Back Left
ID Face Groove
ID Left
* ID = Inside Diameter. OD = Outside Diameter.
Cutter Compensation
There are four types of cutter compensation available. Each has a corresponding
method to include the machine controls code, for compensation. (G41/G42)
The actual output will vary depending on the compensation method and whether
the path is programmed to the tip or center.
None
This method outputs the coordinates of the chained geometry REGARDLESS
of the Tip or Center option. The output code will not include G41/G42 codes.
Chapter 14 Lathe
751
Cutter Compensation set to None, Programmed to Tip
Cutter Compensation set to None, Programmed to Center
SURFCAM
This method outputs the coordinates of the compensated insert BASED on the
Tip or Center option. The output code will not include G41/G42 codes. The
following two drawings are examples of the tool motion using the SURFCAM
option.
752
Chapter 14 Lathe
Cutter Compensation set to SURFCAM, Programmed to Tip
Cutter Compensation set to SURFCAM, Programmed to Center
Control
This method differs from None in only one respect: the output will include G41/
G42.
Both
This method differs from SURFCAM in only one respect: the output will include
G41/G42.
Chapter 14 Lathe
753
Undercut
The Undercut parameter controls the tool motion when an undercut or groove
exists along the chained contour. The definition of undercut depends on the view
along the cut direction. The part of a groove you cannot see when you look at the
part contour in the cut direction is an undercut. The part you can see is not an
undercut.
Undercuts defined in the cut direction
When the Undercut parameter is set to Yes, SURFCAM cuts a part of the
undercut. SURFCAM cuts the amount the tool size allows. When the Undercut
parameter is set to No, SURFCAM ignores an undercut along the chained contour.
Undercut set to YES and NO
Curve Tolerance
SURFCAM will break all contour moves along a spline into linear moves along
chords connecting points on the spline. When driving the tool around a spline
curve, SURFCAM will adjust the length of the chordal moves to make sure that the
edge of the contour is never a greater distance from the chord than the value of
the Curve Tolerance.
Retract Clearance
Before positioning to the start of the next pass, move to this distance above the
highest point of the previous pass.
Plunge Clearance
The distance the tool will travel in a rapid move to the beginning of a tool path or
away from the end of a tool pathmeasured along a direction parallel to the retract
direction.
754
Chapter 14 Lathe
Side Clearance
The Side Clearance value is the length of a linear move that is perpendicular to the
first move of a toolpath.
The most common use for this parameter is to establish a G01 move during which
the control can apply the cutter the compensation offset (D-Comp) prior to
beginning the actual cutting motion. When Cutter compensation is being used,
10% of the tool radius is a good starting value. You can adjust this value for
specific situations.
Another common use for this parameter is to keep the tool a user-defined distance
away from the finish contour for the plunge move to the Z-Level of the tool path.
Typically this is used in pocketing with islands when no leadin move or leadout
move is programmed. This keeps the tool from leaving rub or chatter marks along
the wall of the island or profile of the pocket during Z plunge and retract moves.
Stock To Leave X and Z
Enter the amount of stock to leave on the part for each axis.
Rough and/or Finish Cut
Use this parameter to set the cut to be a Rough Cut, Finish Cut, or Both.
Front and back angle gouge checking is automatically applied to all rough and
finish tool paths. SURFCAM uses the user-defined angles from the cutting edge of
the tool to perform gouge checking. Set these angles in the tool library. To insure
proper gouge checking, the tool library must be updated to your actual tools.
The following drawings show the gouge checking for Rough and Finish cuts.
Chapter 14 Lathe
Turn Gouge Checking
755
756
Chapter 14 Lathe
Turn Gouge Checking (Continued)
Chapter 14 Lathe
Face Gouge Checking
757
758
Chapter 14 Lathe
Face Gouge Checking (Continued)
Rough Depth Of Cut

This is the amount of material to remove on each roughing pass. This amount does
not affect the Finish operation. This parameter is available only if you have
selected Rough Cut or Both.
Finish Depth Of Cut
This is the amount of material to remove on each finish pass. This parameter is
available only if you have selected Finish Cut or Both.
The operation that you select in the Operation parameter sets the default values for
the following parameters. You can override these values.
Cut
This angle determines the direction of tool motion. An angle of 180 causes the
tool to cut from right to left. This parameter is available only if you have clicked
Rough Cut or Both. It is not available for Finish Cut.
Chapter 14 Lathe
759
Angular Definition
This drawing assumes machining in View 1. Negative angles are supported.
Retract
Enter the angle for the retract moves.
Lead In / Lead Out
Angle
Set the angle for all Lead In and Lead Out moves.
The Lead In move precedes the starting cut position. The Lead Out move
follows the end of the cut.
Length
Set the length of the Lead In (Lead Out) move.
Finish Passes
The number of Finish Passes to perform. The Finish Depth Of Cut value is used
on each of these passes. This parameter is available only if you have selected
Finish Cut or Both.
Spring Passes
Indicate the number of extra times the final Finish Pass is cut. The final Finish Pass
can be repeated to remove material that may be left due to part deflection or to tool
deflection. This parameter is available only if you have selected Finish Cut or
Both.
760
Chapter 14 Lathe
14.1.5
Lathe Options Tab
The Lathe Options tabs for all lathe operations contain the same set of parameters.
Lathe Options tab
Corner Angle
A corner angle on a part is an angle between adjacent linear sections of a part
contour or boundary. Corner angles can be located along the outside contour or
along a pocket contour.
SURFCAM creates toolpaths by creating offsets from the contour or sides of a
part. The offsets around a corner angle will be two lines that may or may not
intersect. If they intersect, as in the case of corner angles greater than 180, the
Chapter 14 Lathe
761
tool path will merely change linear direction at the intersection. Offsets of corner
angles between 150 and 180 will not intersect but SURFCAM automatically
extends them so that they do. The toolpath will then change direction at this
intersection.
The Corner Angle parameter tells SURFCAM how to fill the offset gap when a
corner angle is less than 150.
If a corner angle is less than 30, SURFCAM will close the gap between the two
offsets by inserting an arc or several lines, depending on your selection in the box
to the right of the Corner Angle box.
When a corner angle is in the range of 30 to 150 and is less than the value you
enter for Corner Angle, SURFCAM will close the offset gap with an arc or several
lines, depending on your selection in the box to the right of the Corner Angle box.
For an interior angle < 30,

an arc or line move will be inserted automatically
For an interior angle > 150,

the consecutive line moves will automatically be intersectional
762
Chapter 14 Lathe
Example of two line moves that are intersectional
Arc
An arc move will be inserted between line moves when the directional change
is less than the Corner Angle value. The Corner Clearance value determines
the location of the arc.
Arc move inserted between line moves

Chapter 14 Lathe
763
Line
A line move will be inserted between line moves when the directional change
is less than the Corner Angle value. The Corner Clearance value determines
the line location.
Line move inserted between line moves
Corner Clearance
When an arc or line move is inserted (because the interior angle of a direction
change is less than the Corner Angle value), this value determines the tool
clearance from the direction change intersection. When this value is zero, the tool
remains in contact with the part walls during the directional change.
Groove Side Step (5-100%)
The number entered here is the percentage that is used to calculate the value of
the Groove Side Step parameter on the Groove Tool Information dialog box. This
is a percentage of the flat part of the groove tool cutting surface. The flat part is
equal to the groove tool width minus twice the tool nose radius of the tool.
If the tool is not a groove tool, the interior circle of the tool multiplied by this
percentage will be used.
764
Chapter 14 Lathe
Flat part of groove tool cutting surface
Lead In / Lead Out Speed

Set the Lead In and Lead Out move speeds to Plunge, Feed or Rapid.
Follow
Sets the roughing pattern. When set to Yes, the roughing pattern follows the
contour of the chained elements between roughing passes. When set to No, the
roughing pattern steps in on the appropriate cutting angle for each pass. The
following drawings show the same rough cut with this option set to Yes in the first
picture and set to No in the second.
Rough Cut with Follow

set to Yes. The tool path follows the
element contour between rough passes.
Rough Cut with Follow

set to No. The tool path does not follow the
element contour between rough passes.

This function is not implemented for Lathe operations.
Chapter 14 Lathe
14.2
765
TURN
The Turn operation is used most often to machine the part along the length of the
material with cutting moves parallel to the Z axis. It can, in fact, be used to cut at any
angle to the Z axis in the correct circumstances.
Note
This section uses the X axis for diameters and the Z axis for lengths.
The direction of the cutting moves are controlled by the Cut parameter on the Turn
Control tab of the Lathe Turn dialog box. A Cut angle of 180 causes the cutting move to
be from right to left or toward the chuck, while a Cut angle of zero causes moves in the
opposite direction. A Cut angle of -90 causes moves toward the center line or Z axis,
while 90 causes moves away from the Z axis. Other moves, such as Retract, Leadin and
Leadout are measured in the same way.
The Turn operation has four turning options. Two, called OD Turn and OD Back Turn,
are outside diameter (OD) cutting operations. The other two, called ID Bore and ID Back
Bore, are inside diameter (ID) cutting operations. The Operation parameter on the Turn
Control tab identifies which of these turning operations will be used.
The Operation parameter and the angle values for the Cut, Retract, Leadin and Leadout
parameters are connected in that a change in the Operation parameter produces a
corresponding change in the default setting for these other parameters, as shown in the
following table:
OPERATION
OD Turn
CUT
RETRACT
LEADIN
LEADOUT
ANGLE
ANGLE
ANGLE
ANGLE
180
90
180
60
OD Back Turn
90
120
ID Back Bore
-90
-120
180
-90
180
-60
ID Bore
The Tool parameter, on the Tool Information tab, and the Operation parameter, on the
Turn Control tab, are also connected in that the selection of a tool will cause the
Operation parameter to be set to the operation for which that tool is most intended.
To use the Turn operation click Turn on the NC Lathe menu. SURFCAM will display the
Turn Chain menu and you will be prompted to Select beginning element of part.
Accurate chaining is important in defining the part contour that is to be turned. When
selecting the beginning element of that contour, make sure you click on or near the
beginning of the element. Remember that when you pick the beginning element you are
766
Chapter 14 Lathe
selecting both a point and a direction for chainingthe direction being from the
beginning of the element toward the point you select.
You will next be prompted to Select ending element of part. Pick the point at the other
end of the contour that defines the area to be turned.
You will then be prompted to Select beginning (ending) element of material boundary.
Selecting the material boundary is optional. Either click Done or select the material
boundary. SURFCAM will then display the Lathe Turn dialog box.
See
1.
Tool Information Tab, page 740,
2.
The Turn Control Tab, page 748, and
3.
Lathe Options Tab, page 760.
After you click OK on the Lathe Turn dialog box, SURFCAM will prompt you to Pick
Lathe Retract Point and Pick Lathe Clearance Point. See Retract-Clearance Points,
page 738.
After you select Retract and Clearance points SURFCAM will produce the toolpath and
display it on the screen. It will then display the Keep Operation dialog box. Click Accept
To permanently save the toolpaths in the ICD file of your NC project, you must re-save
the DSN file using the Save command on the Files menu.
OD Turn with Cut angle = 180,

Rough only
OD Turn with Cut angle = 180,

Finish only
OD Turn: Cut angle = 180 with roughing and finishing machined separately
Chapter 14 Lathe
ANGLE
Rough Depth Of Cut
Cut
LENGTH
.25
180.00
Retract
90.00
Lead In
180.00
.1
60.00
.2
Lead Out
Rough OD Turning Operation
ANGLE LENGTH
Rough Depth Of Cut
.25
Cut
180.00
Retract
-90.00
Lead In
180.00
.1
Lead Out
-60.00
.2
Rough ID Boring Operation
ANGLE LENGTH
Finish Depth Of Cut
.01
Retract
90.00
Lead In
180.00
.1
60.00
.2
Lead Out
Finish Passes
Spring Passes
0
Finish OD Turning Operation
767
768
Chapter 14 Lathe
ANGLE LENGTH
Finish Depth Of Cut
.01
Retract
-90.00
Lead In
180.00
.1
Lead Out
-60.00
.2
Finish Passes
Spring Passes
0
Finish ID Boring Operation
ANGLE LENGTH
Rough Depth Of Cut
.25
Finish Depth Of Cut
.01
Cut
180.00
Retract
90.00
Lead In
180.00
.1
60.00
.2
Lead Out
Finish Passes
Spring Passes
0
OD Turning Operation with Rough and Finish
ANGLE LENGTH
Rough Depth Of Cut
.25
Finish Depth Of Cut
.01
Cut
180.00
Retract
-90.00
Lead In
180.00
.1
Lead Out
-60.00
.2
Finish Passes
Spring Passes
0
ID Boring Operation with Rough and Finish
Chapter 14 Lathe
14.3
769
FACE
The Face operation is used most often to machine the part along the diameter of the
material with cutting moves perpendicular to the Z axis. It can, in fact, be used to cut at
any angle to the Z axis in certain circumstances.
Note
The direction of the cutting moves is controlled by the Cut Angle parameter on the Face
Control tab of the Lathe Face dialog box. A Cut Angle of -90 causes moves toward the
center line, while 90 causes moves away from the center line. A Cut Angle of 180 causes
the cutting move to be from right to left or toward the chuck, while a Cut Angle of zero
causes moves in the opposite direction. The Retract, Leadin and Leadout moves are
measured in the same way.
The Face operation has four turning options. TwoOD Face and OD Back Faceare
outside diameter (OD) cutting operations. The other twoID Face and ID Back Face
are inside diameter cutting operations. The Operation parameter on the Face Control tab
identifies which of these turning operations will be used.
The Operation parameter and the angle parameters for the Cut, Retract, Leadin and
Leadout moves are connected in that a change in the Operation parameter produces a
change in the default setting for the angles as shown in the following table:
CUT
RETRACT
LEADIN
LEADOUT
ANGLE
ANGLE
ANGLE
ANGLE
OD Face
-90
-90
30
OD Back Face
-90
90
-90
120
ID Back Face
90
-90
90
-120
ID Face
90
90
-30
OPERATION
The Tool Library # parameter and the Operation parameter are also connected in that
the selection of a tool will cause the Operation parameter to be set to the operation for
which that tool is most intended.
To use the Face operation, click Face on the NC > Lathe menu. SURFCAM will display
the Face Chaining menu and you will be prompted to Select beginning element of part.
Accurate chaining is important in defining the part contour that is to be turned. When
selecting the beginning element of that contour, make sure you click on or near the
beginning of the element. Remember that when you pick the beginning element, you are
770
Chapter 14 Lathe
selecting both a point and a direction for chainingthe direction being from the
beginning of the element toward the point you select.
end of the contour that defines the area to be turned.
You will then be prompted to Select beginning (ending) element of material boundary.
Selecting the material boundary is optional. Either select the material boundary or click
Done. SURFCAM will then display the Lathe Face dialog box.
See
1.
2.
The Turn Control Tab, page 748, and
3.
Lathe Options Tab, page 760.
After you click OK on the Lathe Face dialog box, SURFCAM will prompt you to Pick
page 738.
OD Face turn with Cut angle = -90,

Rough only
OD Face with Cut angle = -90,

Finish only
The facing operation with roughing and finishing machined separately.
Chapter 14 Lathe
ANGLE
Rough Depth Of Cut
Cut
LENGTH
.150
-90.00
Retract
0.00
Lead In
-90.00
30.00
Lead Out
Rough OD Face: Cut angle = -90
ANGLE
Rough Depth Of Cut
Cut
LENGTH
.250
90.00
Retract
0.00
Lead In
90.00
.1
-30.00
.2
Lead Out
Rough ID Face: Cut angle = 90
ANGLE
Finish Depth Of Cut
LENGTH
.010
Retract
0.00
Lead In
-90.00
.1
30.00
.2
Lead Out
Finish Passes
Spring Passes
0
Finish OD Face: Cut angle = -90
771
772
Chapter 14 Lathe
ANGLE
Finish Depth Of Cut
LENGTH
.010
Retract
0.00
Lead In
90.00
.1
-30.00
.2
Lead Out
Finish Passes
Spring Passes
0
Finish ID Face: Cut angle = 90
ANGLE
LENGTH
Rough Depth Of Cut
.250
Finish Depth Of Cut
.010
Cut
-90.00
Retract
0.00
Lead In
-90.00
.1
30.00
.2
Lead Out
Finish Passes
Spring Passes
0
OD Face with Rough and Finish Cut angle = -90
ANGLE
LENGTH
Rough Depth Of Cut
.250
Finish Depth Of Cut
.010
Cut
90.00
Retract
0.00
Lead In
90.00
.1
-30.00
.2
Lead Out
Finish Passes
Spring Passes
0
ID Face with Rough and Finish Cut angle = 90
Chapter 14 Lathe
14.4
773
FACE OFF
The Face Off operation is used to remove material from the face of the part in preparation
for performing other turning operations. You can remove a specified amount of material
to the right of a point you select on the part. Most of the time this point will be the right
most point on the part. In addition to a point on the face of the part and the amount of
material to remove, you must identify a point on the outside diameter of the material and
one on the inside diameter. The inside diameter of the material will usually be the Z axis
so that all the material on the face of the part will be removed.
However, if you work with stock that has a hole in its center, you might want to identify a
point on the inside of the hole as the inside diameter in order to avoid unnecessary tool
moves.
The outside and inside diameters referred to above, are called the major and minor
diameters, and when you perform the Face Off operation, SURFCAM will prompt you to
select them. The amount of material to remove is identified in the Stock To Remove
parameter on the Face Off Control tab.
To use the Face Off operation click Face Off on the NC > Lathe menu. SURFCAM will
display the Select Point Menu and you will be prompted to Select a point on the face.
Select one of the right most points on the part. You will then be prompted to Select a
point denoting major diameter or Done for prev point position. Select a point on the
outermost diameter of your material. If that point is the same as the one you selected as
a point on the face, you can click Done to use the previously selected point. You will then
be prompted to Select a point denoting minor diameter or Done for 0. Select a point that
identifies the innermost diameter to which you want to cut. If the point is on the Z axis,
you can click Done.
SURFCAM will then display the Lathe Face Off dialog box.
See Tool Information Tab, page 740 and Lathe Options Tab, page 760.
Following is the Face Off Control tab.
774
Chapter 14 Lathe
The Face Off Control tab
See The Turn Control Tab, page 748 to read the descriptions of the parameters not in
the following list.
Stock to Remove
Enter the amount of stock to remove from the part.
Minor Diameter
The distance from the Z axis to the inner most point on the material. Unless the inner
most part of the stock contains a hole the Minor Diameter will have a value of zero.
Chapter 14 Lathe
775
Major Diameter
The distance from the Z axis to the outermost part of the stack.
There are three key parameters for the Face Off operation: the Tool parameter on the
Tool Information tab and the Operation and Stock To Remove parameters on the Face
Off Control tab. First, you must select a tool from the tool library. When you do, the
Operation parameter is set to the appropriate operation. Indicate the amount of material
to remove from the right side of the part by entering the value in the Stock to Remove
field.
After you click OK on the Lathe Face Off dialog box, SURFCAM will prompt you to Pick
page 738.
14.5
GROOVE
The Groove operation is used to cut grooves in a part. There are several categories of
groove cutting available: OD Groove, OD Back Groove, ID Back Groove, ID Groove, OD
Face Groove, OD Back Face Groove, ID Back Face Groove, and ID Face Groove. Select
the category you want to use with the Operation parameter on the Tool Information
dialog box.
Note
To use the Groove operation click Groove on the NC > Lathe menu. SURFCAM will
display the Groove chaining menu and you will be prompted to Select beginning
element of part.
Accurate chaining is critical to defining the groove. When selecting the beginning
element of the groove, make sure you click on a point that is near the beginning of the
element. Remember that when you pick the beginning element you are selecting both a
point and a direction for chainingthe direction being from the beginning of the element
toward the point you select.
end of the contour that defines the groove.
You will then be prompted to Select beginning element of material boundary. Selecting
the material boundary is optional. Either select the material boundary or click Done.
SURFCAM will then display the Lathe Groove dialog box.
776
Chapter 14 Lathe
Following is the Groove Control tab.
Groove Control tab
See The Turn Control Tab, page 748.

Rough Cycle Type
Cycle type describes the way in which succeeding tool moves are performed when
cutting a groove. Two Cycle Types use the center of the groove. The center is defined
Chapter 14 Lathe
777
to be either the lowest point in the groove or, if the lowest point lies on a horizontal
line, the center of that line.
Center Sequential
The first move is down the center of the groove. The next moves are toward one
edge of the groove (to the left for OD groove). When the first half of the groove is
cut, the tool returns to the center and moves toward the other edge (to the right for
OD groove).
Center Alternate
The first move is down the center of the groove. The next move is to one side of
the center (to the left side for OD groove), followed by a move on the other side.
The cutting moves alternatefrom one side of the center to the otheruntil the
groove is complete.
Sequential
The first move is down one edge of the groove (the right edge for OD groove). The
next moves are in the direction of the other edge (to the left for OD groove).
Groove Side Step
The distance that the tool steps over to make the next cutting pass. It is a calculated
value. See Groove Side Step (5-100%), page 763.
Finish Cycle
Finish cycle describes the sequence of tool moves performed when doing finish
cutting.
Groove To Center
The first finish move is down one edge of the groove (the right edge for OD
groove)to the bottomand then over to the center. The next move is down the
other edge, and then over to the center of the groove.
Groove To Face
The first move is down one edge of the grooveto the bottom (the left edge for
OD groove). The next move is down the other edgeto the bottomand then over
to the other edge.
After you click OK on the Lathe Groove dialog box, SURFCAM will prompt you to Pick
page 738.
778
14.6
Chapter 14 Lathe
THREAD
The Thread operation is used to create inside or outside canned cycle threads. This
operation performs the rough and finish cuts for the thread.
To use the Thread operation, click Thread on the NC > Lathe menu. You will be
prompted to Select a line for lathe thread. Click on a line on your drawing along which
you want a thread to be cut.
After you select the line to thread, SURFCAM will display the Lathe Thread dialog box.
Following is the Thread Control tab.
Chapter 14 Lathe
779
Lathe Thread Control tab
Operation
The available thread operations are OD Right, OD Back Right, ID Back Right, ID
Right, OD Left, OD Back Left, ID Back Left, and ID Left.
Thread Pitch
Enter the distance from one thread to the next. This can be entered as Thread per
inch (TPI) or Inches per thread (IPT)if you are using metric, Millimeters per thread
780
Chapter 14 Lathe
(MPT) or Threads per Millimeter (TPM). Inches per thread is calculated as 1 / number
of threads per inch.
Depth of Thread
The distance from the major radius of the thread to the minor radius. Do not use the
thread diameter. The default value is calculated from the thread pitch. If you change
the thread pitch, the depth will be re-calculated and changed also.
First Cut Depth
This is the initial material removal amount per side.
Minimum Cut Depth
Indicates the minimum amount of material to remove for any pass.
Infeed Angle
Enter the angle for the infeed move. The angle is
measured from vertical.
Retract Angle
Enter the angle for the retract move. The angle is
measured from vertical.
Retract Clearance
Enter the distance above the top of the thread to
retract to, before positioning to the next pass.
This move is made at the retract angle.
Included Angle
and Thread Angle
Starts
A multiple start thread is a thread in which the lead is an integral multiple, other than
one, of the pitch. For this option, enter the number of starts for the thread.
Spring Passes
The number of times the final finish pass is re-cut. The final finish pass can be
repeated to remove material that may be left due to part deflection or to tool
deflection.
Lead In Length
Enter the distance for the approach to the first thread. This value can be entered as
threads or inches (millimeters).
Lead Out Length
Enter the distance to overrun the last thread to insure a complete thread. This value
can be entered as threads or inches (millimeters).
After you click OK on the Lathe Thread dialog box, SURFCAM will prompt you to Pick
page 738.
Chapter 14 Lathe
781
14.7
DRILL
The Drill command on the NC > Lathe menu is used to drill the face of the part. Only the
part centerline can be drilled.
When you click Drill on the NC > Lathe menu, SURFCAM will display the Select Point
menu and you will be prompted to Select starting location for canned cycle. After you
select the location to drill, SURFCAM will display the Lathe Drill dialog box.
See Tool Information Tab, page 740 for a description of the Drill Tool Information tab
parameters except for Tool Diameter and Number of Flutes. These are values that are
loaded from the tool library when a drill tool is selected.
For a description of the Lathe Options, see Lathe Options Tab, page 760.
782
Chapter 14 Lathe
Lathe Drill Control tab
Cycle Type
See Cycle Type, page 527.
Hole Depth
This is the depth of the hole from the geometry described.
Depth To
This controls which part of the drill is taken to the depth defined by Hole Depth.
Tip
Tip will take the tip of the drill to the defined depth.
Chapter 14 Lathe
783
Center
Center will take the full diameter of the drill to the defined depth.
Drill Included Angle
Drill Included Angle is active when the Depth To parameter is set to Center. This is
the tool Tip Angle. The default value for a standard twist drill is 118.
To change this default value, click the button to the right of the tool description on the
Tool Information tab. Then click the Edit and Save button on the Select Lathe Drill
Tool dialog box and change the value.
Clearance
Define an extra distance for the overall depth of the hole. This can make up for a drill
that has rounded edges and can break the edge to reduce deburring.
Initial Rapid
This is the absolute Z plane for the beginning of the drill cycle. See the Initial Rapid,
Plunge Clearance, and Clearance Position figure.
Plunge Clearance
The Plunge Clearance parameter for Drill operations is the distance above the part
for the start point of the plunge move. The endpoint of a rapid move and the start point
of a plunge move are this distance above the drill hole.
Initial Rapid, Plunge Clearance, and Clearance Position

Retract To
This is the level to which the drill will retract at the end of the drill cycle.
Rapid Plane
This is a G98 type move using the value entered for Initial Rapid.
Plunge Clearance
This is a G99 type move using the value entered for Plunge Clearance.
784
Chapter 14 Lathe
Dwell time
Enter the length of time to dwell for the appropriate cycle. This time is entered in
milliseconds (1000 = 1 second).
Peck Increment
Enter the peck size for the peck cycle.
Bore Side Clearance
This is the side clearance for the bore cycles.
After you click OK on the Lathe Drill dialog box, SURFCAM will prompt you to Pick Lathe
Retract Point. See Retract-Clearance Points, page 738.
After you select the Retract Point SURFCAM will produce the toolpath and display it on
the screen. It will then display the Keep Operation dialog box. Click Accept to keep the
operation.
14.8
PARTOFF
The Partoff operation is used to cut a turned part off of the bar stock from which it was
machined.
Click Partoff on the NC > Lathe menu. SURFCAM will display the Select Point Menu and
you will be prompted to Select a point on the back face. Select one of the left most
points on the part. You will then be prompted to Select a point denoting major diameter
or Done for prev point position. Select a point on the outermost diameter of your part. If
that point is the same as the one you selected as a point on the back face, you can click
Done to use the previously selected point. You will then be prompted to Select a point
denoting minor diameter or Done for 0. Select a point that identifies the innermost
diameter to which you want to cut. If the point is on the Z axis, you can click Done.
SURFCAM will then display the Lathe Partoff dialog box.
See Tool Information Tab, page 740 and Lathe Options Tab, page 760 for descriptions
of parameters on the Tool Information and Lathe Options tabs.
See The Turn Control Tab, page 748 for descriptions of parameters on the Partoff
Control tab that are not described here.
Chapter 14 Lathe
785
Partoff Control tab
Cut Angle
The angle that identifies the direction of the tool on the cutting moves.
Major Diameter
The calculated value of the major diameter you selected in response to the
SURFCAM prompt. You can override that selection by entering another value in this
box.
786
Chapter 14 Lathe
Minor Diameter
The calculated value of the minor diameter you selected in response to the
SURFCAM prompt. You can override this value.
Parting Type
The type of cutting moves used to cut the part from the stock.
Straight
The cutting move will be a single continuous cutting move until the part is released
from the stock.
Peck
The cutting moves will be a series of pecking moves with the depth of each peck
given by the Increment value and the amount of each retraction move given by the
Retract value.
Alternate
The cutting moves will consist of a first cut to a depth given by the Increment value.
A second cut move is made that is offset a fixed amount from the first move and
to a depth equal to the Increment value. These cutting moves alternate until the
last cutting move next to the part releases the part from the stock.
Increment
Defines the amount of material to remove at a time.
Increment will be available for the Peck and the Alternate parting types.
Retract
The distance above the previous material to retract before starting next cut.
Retract will be available for the Peck and the Alternate parting types.
Side Step
The distance the tool moves side to side between each cut.
Side Step will be available for the Alternate parting type.
Corner Type
This describes the shape of the corner at the outside diameter of the back face of the
part.
Square
The corner will be square.
Chamfer
The corner will be a 45 bevel. The Chamfer / Radius parameter will become
active.
Radius
The corner will be round. The Chamfer / Radius parameter will become active.
Chapter 14 Lathe
787
Chamfer / Radius
Enter the length along the chamfer or specify the radius of the cornerdepending on
which parameter appears on the dialog box.
Clean Up Stock
A No indicates there will be no clean up pass. A Yes indicates a clean up pass will be
performed from the stock remaining after the partoff operation is complete. The
amount of material removed depends on the value entered for the Amount to Remove
parameter.
Amount To Remove
This will be available only when Clean Up Stock is set to Yes. It is the amount of
material that will be removed on the finish pass.
The tool will cut down to within the Increment of the minor diameter, leaving this
amount of material on the part. The tool will then retract, step over this amount, and
make a single continuous move to the minor diameter.
After you click OK on the Lathe Partoff dialog box, SURFCAM will prompt you to Pick
page 738.
14.9
OPTIONS
The Options command displays the NC Option dialog box which contains all the NC
mode Options tabs. It provides a convenient way to view and to edit the Lathe Options
tab and the tabs of the other NC modes at the same time.
See Lathe Options Tab, page 760.
788
Chapter 14 Lathe
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
CHAPTER 15 WIRE EDM

15.1
WIRE EDM MENU
To use the Wire EDM menu, click NC > Wire EDM command.
NC EDM menu
2 Axis XY (EDM Contour)

Use the 2 Axis XY operation to cut a closed contour with several passes of the EDM
wire. See 2 Axis XY (EDM Contour), page 789.
4 Axis
Use the 4 Axis operation to make a single pass with the EDM wire to make a Swarf
like cut. See 4 Axis, page 805.
4 Axis UV Trim
Use the 4 Axis UV Trim operation to trim the material that is not needed from the edge
of a part. See 4 Axis UV Trim, page 815.
Options
Use the Options command to display the NC Option dialog box which contains all the
NC Options tabs. See EDM Options Tab, page 802.
Tip
The Wire EDM operations are done in top view (plan view). The part geometry for the
EDM operations is drawn in the top view at Z0. If there are different top and bottom
profiles, draw the two at Z0.
15.2
2 AXIS XY (EDM CONTOUR)
The 2 Axis XY operation is normally used to cut a closed contour with several passes of
the EDM wire.
You will set the width of a Tab on the contour. You can pre-select and color code the
Thread Point (in green) and the Start Point (in red) on the contour. With the color code,
SURFCAM can automatically select the Thread and Start Points and chain the contour.
You will indicate the side of the contour to cut.
SURFCAM will create the toolpath starting with the initial burn from the Thread Point to
the entry Retract Point. The initial pass begins with a Straight Line leadin move from the
entry Retract Point to an offset from the Start Point on the contour. The initial pass ends
790
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
with a Straight Line leadout from the offset of the End point on the contour to the exit
Retract Point.
There, a Stop command is inserted in the code to allow the operator to apply appropriate
clamps on the part. The Tab is then cut with a pass that ends at the entry Retract Point.
Another Stop command is inserted so that the waste material can be removed.
Next a number of Skim passes are executed beginning and ending at the entry Retract
Point. The Leadin and Leadout moves for Skim passes can be one of three types:
Straight Line, Teardrop, or Offset Curve Overlap.
After the final Skim pass the wire can be set to stop at the Retract Point or the Thread
Point.
Initial Pass Before Tab is Cut
Skim Passes with Teardrop Lead moves
You can also use 2 Axis XY to cut multiple contours. Three strategies are available for
the order in which you perform initial passes, Tab cuts, and Skim passes.
Click NC > EDM > 2 Axis XY to display the 2 Axis EDM Contour dialog box. See
1.
2.

Cut Control Tab, page 795,
3.
4.
Skim Cut Tab, page 800

EDM Options Tab, page 815.
After you click OK on the 2 Axis EDM Contour dialog box, SURFCAM will display the NC
> EDM > Select Chain menu.
NC > EDM > 2 Axis XY > Select Chain
There are two ways to create the toolpath.

If you have already created and color coded the Thread (green) and Start Points (red),
click Auto on the Select Chain menu. Click Visible on the Select menu, then click Done.
Click Done on the Select Chain menu.
Note
If you do not select a Start Point, SURFCAM will start at the point on the contour
nearest the Thread Point.
With the Auto > Visible method, red Start Points must be on the contour, not just
near it.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
791
Be sure to consider the width of the Tab when you select a Start Point. Gouges
are possible if either a Start Point or an End Point is too close to a sharp corner.
If you did not color code the Thread and Start Points, perform the following steps.
1.
Chain the contour(s) to be cut, but do not click Done on the Select Chain menu
until you have selected the Thread and Start Points.
2.
Click Thread. SURFCAM will display the Select Point menu. Select the Thread
point(s) and click Done.
3.
Click Start Point. SURFCAM will display the Select Point Menu. Select the Start
Point(s) on or near each contour and click Done. Selected points not on the
contour will be projected onto the contour as the Start Points.
Click Done on the Select Chain menu.

You will be prompted to select the side to contour. After you click on the correct side of
a contour, SURFCAM will create the 2 Axis XY toolpath and display the tool motion on
the screen. It will then display the Keep Operation dialog box. Click Accept to keep the
operation.
Note
To permanently save these toolpaths, you must use the Save command on the
File menu to re-save the DSN file and the ICD file.
792
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
15.2.1
2 Axis EDM Contour Tool Information tab
Tool
The name of the current tool is displayed. That tool reference number is displayed
on the button. To select a different tool, edit a tool record or add a new tool, click
the button to display a Select EDM Tool dialog box.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
793
See Select an EDM Tool, page 809 and Edit or Add an EDM Tool, page 810.
Material
The name of the current material is displayed. The material reference number is
displayed on the button. To select a different material, edit a material record or add
a new material, click the button to display the Select Material dialog box.
See The Material Library, page 484.
Wire Diameter
This parameter is the diameter of the EDM wire.
Thread Wire
Check this box to cause the EDM machine to automatically thread the wire.
Spark Gap
The distance to offset the tool path for spark compensation.
Submerge Tank
If you check this box, the EDM machine automatically fills the fluid tank.
Offset Register
This parameter is the number of the register that stores the offset value for the first
cut.
Initial Power Setting
This parameter is the power setting for the first burn into the material.
Power Setting
This parameter is the power setting for the other burns along the contour.
Initial Feed Rate
This parameter is the inches per minute feed rate of the first burn into the material.
Feed Rate
This parameter is the inches per minute feed rate for the other burns along the
contour.
Work Offset
Enter the work offset for the operation. The post processor uses this value to
define the fixture offset register.
Flushing
This parameter is the force to use to send the flushing fluid down the wire. The
options are High, Medium, Low and None.
Program Number
This parameter is the program number that the machine uses for the program.
This parameter is the O number at the top of the program for some controls,. The
largest number that is accepted is 32,767.
794
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
Comments
You can place a comment into the tool change output during post processing as a
message to the operator.
Insert Post Processor Commands...
See Inline Text, page 486.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
15.2.2
795
Cut Control Tab
2 Axis EDM Contour Cut Control tab
Wire Compensation
This is the wire compensation type. The actual value used for wire compensation
is the value for Spark Gap on the Tool Information tab.
796
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
None
This method outputs the coordinates of the chained geometry. The output will
not include G41/G42 codes.
SURFCAM
This method outputs the compensated coordinates of the chained geometry.
The coordinates are adjusted by the value for Spark Gap. The output will not
include G41/G42 codes.
Control
This method outputs the coordinates of the chained geometry. The output will
Both
This method outputs the compensated coordinates of the chained geometry.
The coordinates are adjusted by the value for Spark Gap. The output will
Compensation Side
Choose Right or Left as the side on which to cut the
contour. The compensation will apply to this side.
Taper
Taper is the value of the angle between the wire
and the normal to the part.
Positive Taper angle
A positive value creates an edge that is tapered

toward the top of the part.
A negative value creates an edge that is tapered
toward the bottom of the part.
Negative Taper angle
A value of 0 creates a part edge that is

perpendicular to the surface of the part.
Retract Distance
This parameter is the distance that the end point of a leadout move is from the
contour.
Sharp Corner Type
A sharp corner occurs when two sides of a part intersect and create an inside
angle that is less than 180. The toolpath around a sharp corner is one of three
shapes.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
797
Sharp
This option makes two parts of the toolpath
intersect at a point.
A Sharp Corner
Round
Select this option to put an arc between two
parts of the tool path.
A Round Corner
Loop
Select this option to put a circle like element
between two parts of the tool path.
A Loop Corner
Overlap
This parameter is not active.
Lead In Out Type
This parameter controls the shape of leadin and leadout moves. A leadin move is
from a Retract point to the Start point. A leadout move is from the End point of a
skim pass to a Retract point.
Click the button to display the EDM Leadin and Out Information dialog box.
EDM Leadin and Out Information dialog box
798
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
Lead Type
Straight Line
The lead move is along a line normal to the
contour. The wire makes a 90 turn to move
along the contour.
Teardrop
The lead move is a line from the Retract
Point to an end of an arc. The size of the arc
is from 120 to 180.
Straight Line
The other end of the arc is the intersection

of the normal to the contour and the
toolpath along the contour.
The arc is tangent to the toolpath. Enter the
radius and angular measure of this arc.
Offset Curve Overlap
This option is not active.
Length
This parameter is not active.
Teardrop
Angle
This parameter is active when Lead Type is Teardrop. This parameter is the
angular measure of the arc in the teardrop lead move. The angle can have a
value between 120 and 180.
Radius
This parameter is active when the Lead Type is Teardrop or Offset Curve
Overlap. This parameter is the arc radius in these moves. This value must be
less than one fourth of the Tab width.
Stock To Leave
This parameter is the stock to leave after the first pass.
Pre-drill Thread Points
Check this box to make the machine predrill the thread points if it is possible.
Burn To Thread Point On Exit
Check this box to make the machine burn from the retract point to the thread point.
This burn is at the end of the last skim cut.
Tab Width
Enter the length of the Tab or enter a 0 for no Tab.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
799
Tab Stop Code

A tab stop command is put in the code at the end of the first pass. The wire will
have reached the first retract point. Another stop command is put at the end of the
pass that cuts the tab. This stop command is put before the move to the other
retract point.
OPSTOP
This option causes a reading of the stop switch that is on the controller
determine if a stop is made.
STOP
This option puts the stop command in the code. The wire stops automatically.
Cut Strategy
This parameter controls the sequence that the Rough pass, Skim passes and Tab
cut are done when multiple contours are cut.
Rough, Tab, Skim each profile
The Tab is cut after the Rough pass. Then the Skim passes are done before
SURFCAM moves to the next contour.
Rough, Skim, Tab each profile
The Rough pass is done, followed by the skim passes. Then the Tab is cut
before SURFCAM moves to the next contour.
Rough and Skim each, then All Tabs
The Rough and Skim passes are done, but not the Tab cut before SURFCAM
moves to the next contour. All passes on all the contours are done before
SURFCAM cuts the Tabs on the contours.
Part Thickness
This parameter is the thickness of the material.
Upper Guide Distance
This parameter is the distance from the top of the work piece to the upper guide.
Lower Guide Distance
This parameter is the distance from the bottom of the work piece to the lower
guide.
800
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
15.2.3
Skim Cut Tab
2 Axis EDM Skim Cut tab
Number of Skim Passes

Enter the number of skim passes to make after the first pass.
Offset Register
Enter the number of the register to use to store the offset value for skim passes.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
801
Stock To Leave
This parameter is the stock to leave at the end of each skim pass.
Power Setting
This parameter is the power setting for each skim pass.
Flushing
This parameter controls the force of the flush fluid on the skim passes. The options
are Low, Medium, High and None.
802
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
15.2.4
EDM Options Tab
2 Axis EDM Options tab

This parameter controls how the wire moves from the end of one pass to the start
point of the next pass. The parameter controls the speed of the move. SURFCAM
calculates the distance between the end of one pass and the start point of the next
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
803
pass. If that distance is less than this value, the wire will feed from one point to the
other.
Note
Too large a value can cause the tool to gouge the part on the feed
through a narrow area. Decrease the Maximum Feed Between size to
less than the distance to the start point of the next pass to prevent a
gouge.

Corner Angle (30150)
This parameter is not available in Wire EDM.
Corner Clearance
This parameter is not available in Wire EDM.
Side Clearance
This parameter is the side clearance for the leadin and leadout moves at the start
and the end points of a pass.
Side Finishing Step Size
This parameter is the default distance between finish passes. This parameter is
the distance for the wire to cut into the material on each finish pass. The default
overlap is 80% of the wire radius.
Gouge Check
Full
This option is the default. SURFCAM tests the complete contour before it
creates the toolpaths. This action prevents a gouge of the contour.
Single
Select this option when you create a toolpath that drives the center of the tool
on the contour. If you use the Full option, the system will not machine the
chained elements that intersect the other elements.
Sort Type
See Sort Type, page 608.
Display Thread Point Changes

Yes
SURFCAM tells you when a thread (plunge) point is changed, and the reason
why the point was changed.
No
SURFCAM can change the thread point and not tell you.
804
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
Sharp Corner Angle

SURFCAM creates toolpaths by creating offsets from the sides of a part. The
offset lines at a corner angle will be two lines that can intersect or not intersect.
The offset lines that intersect are trimmed to create the toolpath. The offset line
that do not intersect are connected to create the toolpath. The size of the corner
angle controls how the lines are connected.
Corner Angle < 5
SURFCAM closes the gap between the two offsets with an arc.
Corner Angle > 180
The offset lines intersect and are trimmed to create the toolpath.
160 < Corner Angle < 180
Offsets of corner angles between 160 and 180 will not intersect. SURFCAM
automatically extends the offset lines to make them intersect. The toolpath then
changes direction at this intersection.
5 < Corner Angle < 160
The Sharp Corner Angle parameter tells SURFCAM how to fill the offset gap
when a sharp corner angle is between 5 and 160. There are two conditions.
When the
Corner Angle > Sharp Corner Angle value
SURFCAM extends the offset lines to make them intersect.
Corner Angle <= Sharp Corner Angle value
SURFCAM fills the offset gap with two lines, an arc, or a loop. SURFCAM
uses your selection for the Sharp Corner Type parameter on the Cut Control
tab. If you selected the Sharp option, two lines are used. If you selected the
Round option, an arc is used. If you selected the Loop option, a loop is used.
Curve Tolerance
Restore Defaults
Restore all the parameter values on the tab to the parameter values that existed
when you opened SURFCAM.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
15.3
805
4 AXIS
The 4 Axis operation is used to make a single pass with the EDM wire in swarf cut mode.
This operation is available to end users with the SURFCAM 2 Axis PLUS system and
above.
Before you use the 4 Axis operation you must:
1.
Create a top profile;
2.
Create a bottom profile;
3.
Connect the two profiles with a

surface;
4.
Edit the surface so that the

arrow is
A. attached along the bottom
profile;
B. pointed to the outside of the
surface;
C. pointing in the direction of
the cut;
5.
Create a Thread Point;
6.
Create a Cut Point (the

location where the wire will be
cut).
4 Axis EDM Example
Note
The Thread and Cut points must be on the side of the surface to be cut. They
must be located so that the wire will not gouge the part as it moves from the
Thread Point to the Start Point and from the End Point to the Cut Point.
Note
The Start Point of the cut will be the location on the bottom profile where the
surface arrow is attached.
When you click 4 Axis on the NC > Wire EDM menu you will be prompted to Select a
surface.
Select the surface by clicking its surface arrow. (Make sure the arrow is pointed in the
right direction.
SURFCAM will display the 4 Axis EDM dialog box.
See
1.

806
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
2.
The Cut Control Tab, page 812, and
3.
Note
Since gouge checking is not currently implemented in 4 Axis EDM, it is

recommended that you enter a value of 0 for the Tool Diameter parameter on
the Tool Information tab. It is best to use the cutter compensation on the
machine controller to control potential gouges in narrow interior angles.
Note
It is also recommended that you enter a value of 0 for the Curve Tolerance on
the Cut Control tab. This will prevent a tool move that is within the allowable
chordal deviation from cutting off the tip of a sharp exterior corner.
Click the OK button on the 4 Axis EDM dialog box. SURFCAM displays the Select Point
menu and prompts you to select the thread point of the wire. Click on the Thread Point.
You will then be prompted to Select cut point. Click the Cut Point.
SURFCAM will create the 4 Axis toolpath and display the tool motion on the screen. It
will then display the Keep Operation dialog box. Click Accept to keep the operation.
Note
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
15.3.1
807
4 Axis EDM dialog box
Tool
Click the Select Tool button to display a Select EDM Wire dialog box. See Select
an EDM Tool, page 809.
You can edit or add a tool. See Edit or Add an EDM Tool, page 810.
808
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
Material
The name of the current material is displayed. The material reference number is
displayed on the button. To select a different material, edit a material record or add
a new material, click the button to display the Select Material dialog box.
See The Material Library, page 484.
Tool Number
This parameter is the tool number for the cutting cycle.
Diameter Offset
The diameter offset numbernot a diameter measurementto be used with this
tool. On most NC machines a D or an H number appears in the code to identify
which offset number to activatenot the distance to offset the tool.
Initial Power Setting
The machine uses this power value for the first burn into the material.
Power Setting
The Power Setting is normally called EPAC. The machine uses this value for the
length of the contour.
Feed Rate
This parameter is the XY axis feed rate in the distance units per minute.
Taper Angle
This parameter is the angle of the wire as it moves along the contour.
Spark Gap
The distance to offset the tool path for spark compensation. The system does not
include this offset in the toolpath. The control uses this offset.
Wire Feed
Set this parameter to the Yes option if the machine can thread the wire through the
material.
Program Number
This parameter is the program number that the machine uses. This number is the
O number at the top of the program for some controllers. The largest number that
is accepted is 32,767.
Comments
Enter the comments to use for a message to the operator.
Insert Post Processor Commands...
See Inline Text, page 486.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
15.3.1.1
809
Select an EDM Tool
To select an EDM tool, click the Select Tool button on the Tool Information tab.
The Select EDM Wire dialog box.
Go to first record.
Add an EDM tool to library.
Go to previous record.
Edit or Save the current tool

information.
Go to next record.
Delete the current tool record.
Go to last record.
Select EDM Wire Toolbar
Tables
Use this box to select another tool table. See Tables, page 474.
810
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
Available Tools
This list box displays the available EDM tools.
When you change the value of a parameter in the text field, the change is only
for the current operation. The change is not saved in the EDM tool library.
EDM Wire Parameters
Spark Gap
This value defines the distance to offset the tool path for spark
compensation. The system does not include this offset in the toolpath. It is
used by the control.
Diameter
This is the diameter of the wire.
Initial Power
The machine uses this value for the first burn into the material.
Power Setting
The machine uses this value for the length of the contour.
15.3.1.2
Edit or Add an EDM Tool
New tools can be added to the EDM tool library.

Features of an existing tool can be edited.
Click the Edit / Save button or the Add EDM Tool
button to display the EDM Tool Information dialog
box.
Edit/ Save Tool Add EDM Tool
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
811
EDM Wire Information dialog box
Reference Number
The tool reference number. This number is used to look up the tool in the EDM
tool library and must be unique. (Hint: Choose a reference number before
selecting the add tool button. There are usually unused reference numbers
following each group of tools. Use one of these numbers when adding new
tools to the list.)
Wire Description
The description of the wire as it is to appear in the EDM tool list box on the
Select EDM Tool dialog box. This is limited to 40 characters. (The default
descriptions provided include information such as the size and tool material
type.)
Flush
The default flushing to be used with the wire. This can be Low, Medium, or
High.
Drawing Files
Specify the files used to draw the tool and the tool holder. When tool paths are
being drawn, you can press the tab key to toggle through displaying just the
812
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
tool, the tool and the tool holder, or neither the tool nor the holder. The file in
the Tool list box contains the design for the tool.
Click the ... button to display the Select Tool Drawing File dialog box which is
used to select an existing tool file.
Select Tool Drawing File dialog box
These tool files are design files in the same format as a DSN file except they
are given the TLE file extension. The default folder for storing TLE files is C:\
SURFCAM\Tool.
Spark Gap, Diameter, Initial Power, Power Setting, Wire Feed
See Select an EDM Tool, page 809.
15.3.2
The Cut Control Tab
This section describes the parameters that appear on the 4 Axis and the 4 Axis UV
EDM Cut Control tabs.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
813
Cut Control tab for Wire EDM
Cutting Method
On
SURFCAM drives the center, of the wire, along the path of the chained
elements.
Right
SURFCAM drives the wire to the right side of the contour.The chaining direction
determines the side that is on the right.
Left
SURFCAM drives the wire to the left side of the contour. The chaining direction
determines the side that is on the left.
814
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
Curve Tolerance
Side Clearance (type)
A side clearance move is a linear move that is perpendicular to the start point of a
leadin move or the end of a leadout move. If lead moves have not been defined (if
Lead Type is None), a side clearance move will be perpendicular to the part
contour. Side clearance moves are commonly used for applying cutter
compensation. They are also often used to position the tool away from the profile
to avoid leaving a dwell mark.
The Side Clearance (type) parameter indicates the cutting situation in which a side
clearance move will be applied.
None
No side clearance moves are applied.
On All
Apply side clearance moves to all lead moves.
With Cutter Comp
This will force the post processor to add diameter compensation codes to the
infeed and outfeed moves in the final NCC program G41, G42 and G40 on
most machines.
Side Clearance Amount
This parameter is the length of the perpendicular side clearance moves (infeed
and outfeed moves to and from lead moves). When no leadout move has been
defined this is the value of the leadout move, away from the part, along a
perpendicular to the part.
When you set the Side Clearance (type) to be With Cutter Comp, the Side
Clearance (value) must be larger than the value stored in the corresponding
diameter offset register on the machine, otherwise the machine may not be able
to correctly cut the contour. Cutter or diameter compensation involves making an
adjustment for the difference between the programmed tool diameter and the
diameter of the actual tool that is used.
Finish Passes
SURFCAM automatically incorporates finish passes into the cycle if you enter a
non-zero number. For a single pass around the contour, set this value to 1 or zero.
You can, however, have as many finish passes as desired. Each pass will remove
the amount of stock entered in the Finish Spacing parameter.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
815
Finish Spacing
Specify the amount of stock to be removed in each finish pass.
Stock To Leave
This cutting operation will leave the stockin the amount of the value entered
on the sides of the contour.
Leadin Move / Leadout Move
SURFCAM can add linear motion or arc motion that causes the tool to approach
and depart the workpiece with a tangent move. Click the Leadin Move / Leadout
Move buttons to display the Leadin Information / Leadout Information dialog
boxes. These dialog boxes are the same as those used in 2 Axis cutting. See
Leadin and Leadout Parameters for 2 Axis Operations, page 576.
15.3.3
EDM Options Tab
See EDM Options Tab, page 802.
15.4
4 AXIS UV TRIM
The 4 Axis UV operation trims material that is not needed from the edge of a part.
One application is to trim the edges of a part that has been formed from a relatively thin
sheet of material by some process such as vacuum forming or stamping.
816
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
The toolpath is directed by a trimming curve that coincides

with the final edge of the part. During the 4 Axis UV
operation, the outside edge of the tool is tangent to the
trimming curve. The center of the tool is offset to one side
or the other of the trimming curve. This makes it possible to
trim material from the edges of a hole in the interior of a part
as well as material from the outer edges. Doing both on the
same part requires two separate 4 Axis UV operations.
The angle between the top surface of the part and the edge
that is cut by the side of the tool is determined by direction
lines that you attach to the trimming curve at appropriate
locations. The angle at which the direction lines intersect
the surface is the angle at which the tool will cut. If a
direction line is normal to the surface at a given location,
the angle between the surface and the edge will be 90.
The size of the cutting angle, as the tool moves from the
location of one direction line to the next, will change in a
smooth transition.
A trimming curve
Direction lines must be attached to the trimming curve at

end points of elements that make up that curve. If you must
put a direction line between the end points of an element
(such as a spline, an arc or a line), you must use the Break Trimming curve with direction
lines
1 command on the Edit > Trim/Break menu to break that
element where it intersects the direction line.
Views showing tool tilted to follow direction lines
To use the 4 Axis UV operation, click 4 Axis UV on the NC > Wire EDM menu.
SURFCAM will display the Trim Curve chaining menu and you will be prompted to
Select beginning element of trimming curve.
After you complete the chaining of the trimming curve, SURFCAM will display the EDM
4 Axis UV Trim dialog box.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
817
EDM 4 Axis UV Trim Tool Information dialog box
See
1.
2.
The Cut Control Tab, page 812, and
3.
After you click OK on the EDM 4 Axis UV Trim dialog box, SURFCAM will display the
Select menu. You will be prompted to Select tool direction lines or vectors. Select the
lines or vectors and click Done.
You will then be prompted to Select offset side. Click on the appropriate side of the
trimming curve.
818
Chapter 15 Wire EDM
SURFCAM will create the trim toolpath and display the tool motion on the screen.
SURFCAM will display the Keep Operation dialog box. Click Ok to keep the operation.
Note
15.5
OPTIONS
The Options command displays the NC Option dialog box which contains all the NC
mode Options tabs. It provides a convenient way to view and to edit the EDM Options
tab and the tabs of the other NC modes at the same time.
The EDM Options tab parameters are described in EDM Options Tab, page 815.
CHAPTER 16 NC OPERATIONS MANAGER

16.1
NC OPERATIONS MANAGER DIALOG BOX
When the part design for your project is saved, the file that contains the toolpath data is
created.
When the toolpaths are saved, you manage the toolpaths from the NC Operations
Manager dialog box.
To open the NC Operations Manager dialog box, click the button on the
SURFCAM toolbar or press CTRL+N.
1
5
7
8
3
4
1. NC Operations Manager toolbar, page 834

Customize the toolbar, page 835
Some of the available buttons do not appear on the NC Operations Manager
dialog box. You can add these buttons to the toolbar or arrange the buttons in a
different sequence.
820
2. NC Operations tree, page 821

3. NC Post Status area
This area contains a description of the selected post processor.
4. Icons
Select small or large icons.
5. NC Mode box
This box displays the six types of NC machines.
Select a machine type. The list of available post processors for that machine type are
displayed in the NC Post List.
6. NC Post List box
This box displays the machine configuration files, the posts, available for the type of NC
machine selected.
7. NC Filter list box, page 876
This box contains the names of filters that you can use during post processing. These
filters do the translations on toolpath instructions before the post processing is done.
8. Filter Only button
Use the Filter Only button to do a selected filter function on a selected operation. A new
operation is created. Click an operation in the Operations Tree and a filter from the Filter
List box. Then click the Filter Only button.
9. Post
Use the Post button to do post processing on the operations in the Operations Tree. First
select the operations in the NC Operations Tree. Then select a post file in the NC Post
List. Then click the Post button to run the post processing commands.
You can do post processing on the selected operations if you double-click the post
processor name in the NC Post List.
16.2
821
NC OPERATIONS TREE
NC Project
The base node of the tree is the complete machining project. Select the Project node
to do all the operations in the project.
Edit a project or a setup section, page 830.
Setup Sections
Add a new setup section to the project, page 838
A setup section contains the icons for the machining operations that will be done in
the same machine setup.
Select a setup section to do all the operations in a single setup.
Edit a project or a setup section, page 830.
Operations
Add a new operation
When you add a new operation, an icon with the name of the operation is added
under the selected Setup Section.
Select a single operation in any setup section to do that operation.
Toolpath displayed
If the toolpath for the operation is displayed on the screen, the text of the name is
displayed in bold letters.
Add an existing operation to current setup section, page 838
822
Edit an operation name, page 822

Edit an operation, page 823
Operation Icons
Each type of operation has a unique icon that is displayed to the left of the name.
On the left side of each icon, is a circle. The color gives you information about the
operation.
1.
A white circle indicates that the operation does not support the
associativity properties. The operation is not a Pocket, Contour
or Face Mill operation.
2.
A yellow circle indicates that the operation supports the

associativity properties but the operation was done with an
earlier SURFCAM version. The earlier version did not save the
geometry with the operation. Regenerate the toolpath.
3.
A red circle indicates that the operation has geometry

information, but the geometry was changed. Regenerate the
toolpath.
4.
A green circle indicates that the operation has geometry

information. There is no need to regenerate the toolpath.
16.2.1
Edit an operation name
Edit the Current Name

Two methods to edit the name of a machining operation follow.
1.
Click one time on a name in the NC Operations Tree. Click again to open a
box. Edit the name and click outside the box to close the box.
2.
Click the name to edit. Then click the Properties button on the
toolbar. Edit the Operation Description in the dialog box that is
displayed.
Display the Tool Number and the CView Number

Before you run SURFCAM, open the current.ini file in the Surf2002\NCDefault
folder.
Set the CommentWithToolCViewRef value in the Settings section equal to 0, 1, 2,
or 3.
0
1
2
3
Example
16.2.2
Results if you enter 0, 1, 2, or 3
Edit an operation
Edit a merged operation, page 827.

Edit a transformed operation, page 828.
There are 2 methods to edit a simple operation.
1.
Right-click an operation to display a menu.
2.
Click the operation and click a button on the toolbar.
16.2.2.1
Properties
You can change the name and the description of the operation.
Click the Properties command on the menu or click the Properties button
on the toolbar to display the Operation Properties dialog box.
823
824
Operation File Name

Create a toolpath. SURFCAM assigns the toolpath a name by appending three
characters to the DSN file name. SURFCAM attaches the characters AAA to
the first toolpath. SURFCAM attaches the characters AAB to the second
toolpath. Change these names to make better descriptions.
The Operation File Name will be the name of the NCC file that the post
processor creates.
This parameter is also the name of the file that is created when the operation
is copied from the ICD file. Click the ICD Extract To INC File icon to copy the
operation from the ICD file. The new file is in the INC file format. See ICD
Extract, page 871.
Operation Description
The Operation Description appears in the NC Operations Tree. Enter a new
description here to change the description in the operations tree.
16.2.2.2
Edit Parameters
Use the Edit Parameters button to edit the parameters on an operation

dialog box but not regenerate the toolpath. You can use the Edit
Parameters command on the Right-click menu to do the same.
The dialog box for that operation is displayed. The parameters that do not change
the toolpath are active. You cannot edit the other parameters.
16.2.2.3
Regenerate Toolpath and Reselect Geometry
When you click the Regenerate Toolpath and Reselect Geometry

command or button, the dialog box for the selected operation is displayed.
You can edit all the parameters on all the tabs. When you click the OK
button, SURFCAM prompts you to select the geometry. After you select the
geometry, the toolpath is regenerated.
825
Two examples of when to use the Regenerate Toolpath and Reselect Geometry
command follow.
Copy a Machining Strategy
Use the Regenerate Toolpath and Reselect Geometry command to apply an
operation that was done on one design to a another design.
1.
Open a copy of SURFCAM and open the design file with the operation
that you will copy.
2.
Now open another copy of SURFCAM. Open the other design.
3.
Use the Copy button on the Operations Manager toolbar, or press

CTRL+C, to copy the needed operation from the first design. Paste the
operation into a Setup Section in the Operations Manager Toolpath Tree
for the second design. The toolpath and the value of all the machining
parameters are copied. See General Edit, page 840.
4.
Right-click the operation you pasted to display the right-click menu.
5.
Click the Regenerate Toolpath and Reselect Geometry command to

display a dialog box for the operation.
6.
Make the necessary changes in the parameters on the several tabs and
click OK.
7.
SURFCAM prompts you to select the geometry before the new toolpath
is drawn.
Changes to a Design
When a design is changed after the toolpaths are created, the old toolpaths
cannot fit.
Use the Regenerate Toolpath and Reselect Geometry command to create a
new toolpath for the new design.
1.
Right-click the old operation in the Operations Tree.
2.
Repeat steps 3 through 5 in the above example.
16.2.2.4
Regenerate Toolpath with Original Geometry
This option uses the associativity properties of the SURFCAM data base. Now
these associativity properties are available for the Pocket, Contour and Face Mill
operations. When these operations are done, SURFCAM saves the geometry with
the toolpath.
The saved geometry lets SURFCAM automatically regenerate the toolpath after
you change the original toolpath parameters. There is no need to reselect the
geometry if the geometry was not edited.
826
If you did edit the geometry, the geometry can help SURFCAM automatically
regenerate the toolpath.
When you click the Regenerate Toolpath with Original Geometry
command or button, one of three actions happen.
1.
The dialog box for the selected operation is displayed. You can edit
all the parameters on all the tabs. When you finish, click the OK button. If no
changes were made in the geometry, the toolpath is automatically
regenerated.
If you made changes in the geometry and SURFCAM can select the new
geometry, a box like the following box is displayed.
This dialog box is displayed for a short time. Then the Chaining Preview is
displayed in the SURFCAM window.
The SURFCAM generated chains are highlighted.

The Auto Chaining Preview menu is displayed on the submenu bar.
827
Part Chains/Material Chains

These commands are toggle buttons. If you chained material and the part,
you can toggle between the two commands. Click the Part Chains command
to highlight the part contour. Click the Material Chains command to highlight
the material contour.
Side Point
If you click a pocket or click on the side of a contour, the point you click is a
Side Point. This command toggles the display of the Side Points. A square
indicates the location of a Side Point.
Continue Regeneration
Click this command to continue to regenerate the toolpath with the saved
geometry.
Reselect Chains
Click this command to display the dialog box. After you click OK, a prompt
asks you to select the beginning element of a new chain.
2.
If you made changes in the geometry and SURFCAM cannot select the new
geometry, the following box is displayed.
Click OK to display the dialog box for the selected operation. After you edit
the parameters, SURFCAM prompts you to select the geometry. After you
select the geometry, the toolpath is regenerated.
16.2.3
Edit a merged operation
You can put several operations in one setup section into a single new operation. The
new operation is added to the setup section. See Merge Setup Section, page 839.
828
You can edit the name and the description of this new operation. Right-click the new
operation to display the NC Operation Information dialog box.
Operation File Name, page 824

Operation Description, page 824
16.2.4
Edit a transformed operation
You can do transformations on the toolpath to create a new operation. See

Transform, page 844. The new operation is added to the setup section.
Right-click a transformed operation to edit it.
829
Operation File Name, page 824

Operation Description, page 824
Creation Information
The Creation Information list box shows the list of transformations that were done
on the toolpath of the selected operation. Select a transformation to edit.
Change Parameters
Click the Change Parameters button to change the transformation parameters for
the transformation you selected. The dialog box for that transformation is
displayed. Make the required changes in the parameters.
Regenerate Toolpath
After you make the changes to the transformation parameters, click the
Regenerate Toolpath button to regenerate the toolpath.
Print
Click the Print button to print the operation name, description and the items in the
information list box.
830
16.2.5
Edit a project or a setup section
You can edit a setup section or the complete project. Right-click a Setup Section icon
or the NC Project icon. The NC Section Information dialog box is displayed. The
dialog box has three tabs.
16.2.5.1
Information tab
Section File Name

The Section File Name is the name of the project if you clicked the NC Project
icon (2dribs, for example). The Section File Name is the name of the Setup
Section if you clicked a setup section (2dribsSetup_Section_One, for example).
Section Description
This parameter is the description or name for the setup section or project node
that appears in the NC Operations Tree. You can change the name here or you
can change the name by clicking on the selected operation in the Operations
Tree.
Additional User Information
The additional information can include the operator instructions and
descriptions of the preparation for the project. The information is saved in a list
of strings.
Note
SURFCAM saves any changes with the DSN file.

16.2.5.2
831
Stock and Fixture tabs
You can add or change the Stock or the Fixtures in the Verify program. The
process is repeated when you run Verify the next time. If you add or change the
Stock or the Fixtures in SURFCAM, you do not repeat the process.
The Stock and Fixture tabs are used to add or change the stock and the fixtures.
Enter the values for the parameters on these two tabs.You will not repeat the
process in the Verify program.
After you select a Stock Type or a Fixture Type, the options on the tabs will be the
same.
Type = Box
Stock and Fixture tabs with the Type = Box

832
Corner 1
Corner 1 is the corner with the smallest X, Y, and Z coordinates.
Corner 2
Corner 2 is the opposite or diagonal corner. Corner 2 has the largest X, Y,
and Z coordinates.
Geometry Bounding Box
Click the Geometry Bounding Box button for the SURFCAM program to
create a bounding box. SURFCAM calculates the coordinates of the
opposite corners of a box that fits either the toolpath or the part geometry.
Offset
If additional material is needed, enter a value for the offset from the corners
of the part. The offset helps SURFCAM create the additional material
around the part.
833
Type = Cylinder
Stock and Fixture tabs with the Type = Cylinder
If the material is in the cylinder form, enter its diameter and the coordinates of
the end points of its axis.
Axis 1
Axis 1 is the end point with the smallest values for the X, Y, and Z
coordinates.
Axis 2
Axis 2 is the end point with the largest values for the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
Diameter
Enter the diameter.
834
Type = STL Solid
Stock and Fixture tabs with the Type = STL Solid
STL File
Enter a file name or click the Browse button to display a File Open dialog box.
16.3
NC OPERATIONS MANAGER TOOLBAR
If the buttons on your toolbar do not include the following, you can add those you need.
See Customize the toolbar, page 835.
Move Buttons
See Move, page 837.
835
Add, Split, Create, and Merge Buttons

See Add, Split, Create, and Merge, page 838.
General Edit Buttons
See General Edit, page 840.
Create Setup Sheet Button
See Create Setup Sheet, page 841.
Verify Buttons
See Integrated Verify, page 935.
Transform Button
See Transform, page 844.
Edit NC Toolpaths Button
See Edit NC Toolpaths, page 861.
View Toolpath Buttons
See View Toolpath, page 871.
ICD Extract Buttons
See ICD Extract, page 871.
Import Files or Convert Operations Buttons
See Import Files or Convert Operations, page 872.
Edit Toolpaths
See Edit an operation, page 823.
16.3.1
Customize the toolbar
Double-click in an open space on the toolbar to display the Customize Toolbar dialog
box.
Tip
The right side of the toolbar is the easiest place to click.
836
All the Operations Manager toolbar commands are displayed in the two boxes on this
dialog box.
Available buttons
You can add the buttons in this list to the toolbar. You can add the blank button
arrange the other buttons according to their type of function.
Toolbar buttons
The buttons in this list are the buttons that are displayed on the toolbar after the
Customize Toolbar dialog box is closed.
Add
Add a selected button from the Available buttons list to the Toolbar buttons list.
1.
Click a button in the Available buttons list.
2.
Click the button in the Toolbar buttons list to display to the right of the button that
you will add.
3.
Click the Add button. The selected button is moved to the Toolbar buttons list.
Remove
To remove a button from the toolbar, click its button in the Toolbar buttons list.
Then click the Remove button. The button is moved from the Toolbar buttons box
to the Available buttons list box.
Close
Save the current arrangement of buttons and close the dialog box.
Reset
Restore all buttons to their original position.
837
Move Up or Down
You can click and drag the buttons in the Toolbar buttons list to change their
position. Move a button toward the top of the list to move the button to the left on
the toolbar.
16.3.2
Move
Select a Setup Section or an operation. Then use the following buttons to move your
selection in the Operations Tree.
Move the Operation to Previous Setup Section. *
Numeric Keypad
Page Up (9, NumLock On)
Move the Operation to the Top of Setup Section. *
Move an Operation toward the top of a Setup Section by one position. *

Numeric Keypad
Up Arrow (8, NumLock On)
Move an Operation toward the bottom of a Setup Section by one position. *
Numeric Keypad
Down Arrow (2, NumLock On)
Move the Operation to the bottom of a Setup Section. *
Move the Operation To Next Setup Section. *

Numeric Keypad
Page Down (3, NumLock On)5
* You can move the operations by dragging with the mouse.
838
16.3.3
Add, Split, Create, and Merge

Add a new setup section to the project
F2
Create a new setup section. The Setup sections are used to group together
the operations that will be done with the same tool. You can do a process
like Post Process or create a Setup Sheet with all the toolpaths in the Setup
Section
Add an existing operation to current setup section

Click the button to display the Add Operation dialog box.
F3
Add an operation to an NC project by importing an INC file that was created

in another project. You can use the ICD Extract INC File button to remove
this operation from another NC project. The removed file is saved in the
INC file format. See ICD Extract, page 871.
839
Operation File
Enter the name of the INC file with the toolpath to add to your project.
Click the Browse button to help you find the file name.
Operation Type
Select an operation type from the list. You can click the Other option to
enter your description of an operation type.
Other Operation Type label
Enter your description of the operation type if the other options are not
correct.
The operation is added to the end of the selected Setup Section.
Merge Setup Section
Use this button to merge the operations in the selected Setup Section into
one operation. A new icon is added at the end of the Setup Section. The
name of the new operation is Merged - setup section name. The
Operations Tree contains the original operations that were merged and the
new operation.
840
Split operation
Use this command to divide an operation into multiple operations.
Ctrl + S
Split Operation At Every Tool Change

A tool change sequence begins with the coordinate system information
record and ends with the tool change record. This option creates a
separate operation from each tool change sequence that is found.
Split Operation At Tool Change If Different Tool Number
A tool change sequence will not become a separate operation if the tool
number is the tool number of the previous operation.
Note
If this command can not divide the operation, an error message is
displayed. An operation is not divided if the result is exactly like
the original operation. If the original operation has one tool
change sequence, the operation is not divided.
16.3.4
General Edit
Edit Cut
Ctrl + X
Remove the selected operation, setup section, or the project from the
operations list and copy it to the clipboard. Use this command if you need
to paste what you deleted back into the tree.
Edit Copy
Copy the selected operation, setup section, or project to the clipboard.
Ctrl + C
841
Edit Paste
Ctrl + V
Paste the contents of the clipboard into the operations tree. This
command is not available if the clipboard does not contain an item from
a previous Cut or Copy command. If the clipboard contains a single
operation, the operation is pasted in the selected setup section. If the
clipboard contains several sections, they are pasted at the end of the
project.
Edit Delete
Delete an operation, setup section, or the project. The deleted items are
Keyboard not put on the clipboard.
Delete Key
16.3.5
Create Setup Sheet
To create a setup sheet, first select a single operation, a setup section, or the project.
Note
The operation files are merged if a setup section or the project is selected.
Then click the Create Setup Sheet button or press the F4 key to display the
Setup Sheet Options dialog box.
Output Tooling Setup

Select this box to display the information about the tool or tools for the selected
operation, setup section, or project.
842
Output Tooling Graphics

This box is active when the Output Tooling Setup box is selected.
Select this box to display a graphic of the tool next the tool information.
Output Operation Setup
Select this box to display an Operations List for the selected operation, setup
section, or project.
Output Operation Graphics
This box is not active.
Rapid Velocity
This parameter is the maximum feed rate for the NC machine. Check the
specifications of the machine tool manufacturer.
Tool Change Time
Enter the time that is allowed to change the tools. This value determines the total
time that is calculated.
When you click OK, the setup sheet is displayed in the Microsoft Internet Explorer
in HTML format. See the following examples.
You can customize the setup sheets, but you need some knowledge of HTML.
Tip
Use any standard Windows HTML editor to edit the Setup Sheets.
Use the File > Save As command on the Explorer to save the setup sheet.
Click the Print button on the Explorer to print the setup sheet.
Refer to the Setup Sheet Options dialog box in the SURFCAM Help file for technical
information.
Previous Style Setup Sheet
Tip
If you want the previous look for the setup sheet,
1.
Open \Surf2002\SURFCAM.INI
2.
In the [DefaultSystemParameter] section,

SetupSheet=1 is the default, the new format.
Set SetupSheet=0 to maintain the previous style of setup sheet. It still
appears in html format.
843
844
16.3.6
Transform
Transform Operation
Do one of ten transformations to create a new toolpath.
F6
845
Three of these transformations create a new operation that has several copies of the
same toolpath. These transformations are Rectangular Array, Circular Array, and
Indexed Array. Use these transformations when you need to cut several copies of the
same part in one project.
The other transformations create a single copy of a toolpath, in a different orientation
from the original. The transformed operations have Transformed and the name of
the existing operation in their name.
The list box at the bottom of the INC Transform dialog box displays a message that
indicates when the transformation is done.
16.3.6.1
Translate
Click the Translate button to display the INC Translate dialog box.
Use this box to translate a toolpath a distance from its original location.
Translation
The distance to offset the toolpaths in the X, Y and Z directions in the
construction view.
Construction View
The construction view reference number. The construction view determines the
actual direction of each axis vector in the world coordinate system.
846
16.3.6.2
Rotate
Click the Rotate button to display the INC Rotate dialog box. This box contains two
methods to rotate a toolpath around a point.
Rotation Angle
The toolpaths are rotated through this angle.
Construction View
Enter the construction view reference number. The rotation axis is the Z axis of
the indicated construction view.
Retain Orientation
Select No to change the orientation of the toolpath after the rotation. The
toolpath rotates and moves to a different location.
Select Yes to keep the orientation of the toolpath after the rotation. The toolpath
rotates through the indicated angle and does not change its orientation.
847
40 Rotation with the Retain Orientation set to No
20 Rotation with the Retain Orientation set to Yes
Rotate About Location

Enter the coordinates of the rotation point to change the toolpath orientation.
848
Reference Location
Enter the coordinates of the rotation point to keep the toolpath orientation.
Locations In World Coordinate System
The coordinates of rotation points are in the World Coordinate System.
Locations In Construction View
The coordinates of rotation points are in the construction view.
16.3.6.3
Scale Uniform
Click Scale Uniform to display the INC Uniform Scale dialog box.
Use this dialog box to change the scale of the selected toolpath. The same change
is applied in all directions. The size and the location of the toolpath are changed.
See Scale, page 447.
Scale Factor
Enter a value for the new scale.
Scale About Location
Enter the coordinates of the point around which the change in the scale is
made.
16.3.6.4
849
Scale XYZ
Click Scale XYZ to display the INC Scale dialog box. Use this box to change the
scale of a toolpath a different value in each direction.
Scale X (Y, Z)
Enter a value for the new scale in each direction.
Scale About Location
Enter the coordinates of the point around which the changes in the scale are
made. The default is the origin.
Maximum Chordal Deviation
SURFCAM uses chords to draw a curve. Scale XYZ can change the shape of
a curve if the same chord lengths are used.The Maximum Chordal Deviation
limits this change.
850
Scale with X = 1, Y = 2, and Z = 1
SURFCAM adjusts the length of the chords to make sure the curve is never
farther away from the chord than the Maximum Chordal Deviation value.
16.3.6.5
Mirror
Click the Mirror button to display the INC Mirror dialog box. Use this dialog box to
create a mirror image of a toolpath on the other side of a plane.
851
Mirror Plane
Select a standard coordinate system plane (XY, YZ or ZX Plane) or a plane you
define (Other Plane).
Define Other Plane
Define the Other Plane with a point on that plane and a vector that is normal to
that plane.
Enter the Location X, Y, and Z coordinates to define the point.
Enter the Direction X, Y and Z coordinates to define the vector.
The end point of this normal vector is always the origin (0,0,0). The Direction
coordinates are the coordinates of any point on the normal vector.
852
16.3.6.6
Rectangular Array
Click Rectangular Array to display the INC Rectangular Grid dialog box. Use the
box to display several copies of a toolpath in a 2D or 3D rectangular grid.
INC Rectangular Array

853
Construction View
The construction view reference number.
Rectangular Grid
Use this section to define the size and shape of the rectangular grid.
Number Of Copies
Enter the number copies of the toolpath in each X, Y and Z direction.
Distance
Enter the distance in each direction that a point on the toolpath is from the
same point on a copy. If you enter a negative value, the copies are made in
the negative direction.
The remaining parameters control that the sequence the copies of toolpaths are
drawn.
Sort Toolpaths By Tool
Select this option if you used several tools to create the toolpath. Tool changes
are required to cut the complete toolpath.
The parts of each copy of the toolpath that the same tool created are drawn at
the same time. This method minimizes the number of tool changes that are
required to cut the complete set of toolpaths.
Reverse Direction Each Row
This option reverses the direction that the next row or next column of copies are
drawn. Use this method to cause better performance when the set of toolpaths
are cut.
XYZ
SURFCAM draws the copies in the X direction.
YXZ
SURFCAM draws the copies in the direction.
854
16.3.6.7
Circular Array
Click the Circular Array button to display the INC Circular Array dialog box. Use
this box to create the copies of toolpath on an arc.
Number Of Copies
Enter the number of copies of the toolpath to make.
Rotation Angle
Enter the angle of rotation between each copy of the toolpath.
Construction View
The construction view reference number.
Center Location
Enter the center of the circular array.
Keep Original Toolpaths
Check this option to keep the original and the copies in the new toolpath. If this
option is not checked, only the copied toolpaths are saved.
The parts of each copy of the toolpath that the same tool created are drawn at
the same time. This method minimizes the number of tool changes that are
required to cut the complete set of toolpaths.
855
Retain Orientation
If you click Yes, the orientation will be maintained with respect to the specified
reference point that you designate in the Reference Location field. If you click
No, then a reference point is not required.
Reference Location
Active only if you choose Yes for the Retain Orientation field.
With Orientation Retained
Without Retaining Orientation

5 copies at 45 Rotation angle, in CView 1
856
16.3.6.8
Indexed Array
Click the Indexed Array button to display the INC Index dialog box.
Use this dialog box to create several copies of a toolpath that are put at fixed
distances around an arc.
Number Of Copies
The number of copies of the toolpath to make from the selected INC file.
Rotation Angle
The angle of rotation between each copy of the toolpath.
Rotation Axis
Set the axis of rotation to the X, Y, or Z axis, or select the Other Axis option.
Define Other Axis
This section is active if you selected Other Axis option in the Rotation Axis
section. The Location coordinates X, Y, and Z define a point on the other axis.
The Direction coordinates X, Y and Z define the axis direction vector from the
axis location point. These two points together define the other axis.
Keep Original Toolpaths
Check this box to keep the original toolpath and the copies in the new INC file.
If the box is not checked, only the copied toolpaths are saved in the file.
857

Check this box to sort the toolpaths by the tool that is used. If the box is not
checked, the toolpaths are in the order they are in the file that is copied.
The original toolpath
Toolpaths created by making 4 copies around the X axis
858
16.3.6.9
Wrap Cylinder
Click Wrap Cylinder to display the INC Wrap Cylinder dialog box.
Use this dialog box to wrap a 2D toolpath around a cylinder. The cylinder axis must
be parallel to either the X axis or the Y Axis.
To define the cylinder, indicate a point on the cylinder axis and enter a value for
the radius.
Axis Mapped To Angle
Select the X Axis option to wrap the toolpath around a cylinder with an axis that
is parallel to the Y axis. Select the Y Axis option to wrap the toolpath around a
cylinder with an axis that is parallel to the X Axis.
Wrapping Angle Direction
CCW
Wrap the toolpath in a counterclockwise direction.
CW
Wrap the toolpath in a clockwise direction.
859
Wrap Mapping
Wrap Mapping determines the mapping from Cartesian coordinates to
cylindrical coordinates. Z coordinates map to cylinder radius values and Wrap
coordinates map to angle values.
Z Coordinate
The value of a Z coordinate on the toolpath or on the design which is to be
mapped to a distance from the center of the cylinder. This will usually be the
value of Z coordinates on the top of the design. This Z value will usually be
mapped to the surface of the cylinder. That will result in toolpaths, such as
those at the bottom of a pocket, being mapped onto points that are in the
interior of the cylinder, thus creating a pocket on the surface of the cylinder.
Maps To Radius
This will usually be the radius of the cylinder onto which the toolpath is being
wrapped.
Wrap Coordinate
The X coordinate of a point on the drawing or toolpath if the Axis Mapped
To Angle was set to X-Axis or the Y coordinate if it was set to Y-Axis. Points
with this coordinate value will be mapped onto points on the cylinder at
locations designated by Maps To Angle value.
Maps To Angle
This value locates positions around the circumference of the cylinder with
angles in standard position0 equals 3 oclock, 90 equals 12 oclock.
Point On Cylinder Axis
Specify a point on the axis of symmetry of the cylinder to define the cylinder. If
X-Axis was selected for Axis Mapped To Angle, the axis of symmetry will pass
through this point and be parallel to the Y-Axis. If Y-Axis was selected, the axis
of the cylinder will contain this point and be parallel to the X-Axis.
Maximum Chordal Deviation
Toolpath arcs are broken into lines and converted to points on the cylinder so
that the distance between points on the arc are within this specified tolerance.
Use Cylindrical Cam
If you check Use Cylindrical Cam, you must also provide the slot width and
select Right Side or Left Side. Use this option to control the cut angle which is
determined from the centerline of the toolpath instead of the angle of the
cylinder at the cut location. The toolpath is assumed to be slot-like with a
constant width.
860
Toolpath wrapped counterclockwise around Y-axis
Toolpath wrapped counterclockwise around X-axis
16.3.6.10
861
Reverse
Click Reverse to display the INC Reverse dialog box.
Reverse the direction of the toolpaths in an INC file.

Plunge Distance
Indicate the plunge distance for the reversed toolpaths.
16.3.7
Edit NC Toolpaths
Use this button to edit a toolpath in the operations tree. Select an operation
in the tree and then click this button.
SURFCAM displays the Edit NC menu and the toolpath for the operation. The
first line of the tool motion instructions is displayed on the prompt line.
Edit NC menu
Use this menu to edit the tool motion instructions that create the toolpath. Each line
of instruction describes a tool motion or some other information that is needed to
create the complete NC program.
The prompt line displays the current line of instruction. When that instruction is a tool
movement, SURFCAM marks the end point of that movement (on the screen) with a
square.
The following commands are used to select the line of instruction to display on the
prompt line.
862
16.3.7.1
Select the Instruction
Start
Display the first instruction.
Previous
Display the previous instruction.
Pick
Click a part of the toolpath to display the instruction that creates that motion.
Next
Display the next instruction.
End
Move to the last instruction.
Four of the previous five commands can be done with the following keys.
Home
Move to the start point of the tool motion (Start).
Up Arrow
Move backward through each tool motion (Previous).
Down Arrow
Move forward through each tool motion (Next).
End
Move to the end of the tool motion (End).
The Start of row and End of row lines mark the start and the end of a row of tool
motion instructions. You can move to an End of row mark with the following keys.
Page Down
Move forward to the next end of row mark.
Page Up
Move backward to the previous end of row mark.
Use the next group of menu commands to edit the current instruction, insert new
instructions or delete instructions.
16.3.7.2
863
Edit
Use this command to edit the current record that is displayed on the prompt line.
A different method is required to edit each type of instruction.
User Information
Make changes to the user information in this box.
Comment Text
Linear move / Plunge move / Rapid move

When the record to edit is a tool move, you can change the end point of the
move. When you click Edit, SURFCAM displays the Select Point menu. A
prompt tells you to select a location.
A square marks the end point of the tool move that is displayed on the prompt
line. Use the Select Point Menu to change the location of this end point (the
location of the square). The change is made in the toolpath.
864
Hole start
To edit a hole start instruction, you move the hole start location. A square marks
that location. SURFCAM displays the Select Point Menu and a prompt tells you
to enter the new hole start location.
After you select the new location, the Drill Hole Depth dialog box is displayed.
A prompt tells you to enter a new hole depth value. Enter the new hole depth
and click OK. The new XY coordinates and hole depth are displayed in the hole
start instruction.
Tip
Use the Relative command on the Select Point Menu to change a hole
start location by a given X, Y, Z amount.
Arc / Helix
To edit an Arc or Helix move,
1.
Change the speed from the plunge rate to the feed rate or the reverse, or
2.
Change the move from the arc move to the helix move or the reverse.
If the speed of the move is the feed rate, SURFCAM displays the Arc At Feed
Rate dialog box.
865
If the speed of the move is the plunge rate, SURFCAM displays the Arc At
Plunge Rate dialog box.
Offset Z Coordinate
You can change the Z coordinates of the end point of an arc or helix move
by this amount.
If the new value for an arc move is different from the previous move, the arc
is changed to a helix.
If the value for a helix move is equal to the previous moves value, the helix
is changed to an arc.
Change To Plunge Arc
Convert the speed rate of an arc or helix move from the feed rate to plunge
rate.
Change To Feed Arc
Convert the speed rate of an arc or helix move from plunge to feed rate.
Cutter Information
When the instruction is cutter information, a Select Tool dialog box like the
Select Mill Tool box is displayed. A prompt tells you enter new cutter
information.
866
Feed rate
When the record is a feed rate instruction, the Feed Rate dialog box is
displayed. A prompt tells you to enter a new feed rate.
Plunge rate
When the record is a plunge rate instruction, the Plunge Rate dialog box is
displayed. A prompt tells you to enter the new plunge rate.
867
Tool change information

When the record is a tool change information instruction, a Tool Change dialog
box is displayed. A prompt tells you to enter the new tool change information.

Lathe Thread
When the words Lathe Thread appear on the prompt line, the Start Thread
868
See Thread, page 778.

Start canned cycle
When the prompt line reads Start canned cycle, the Start Drill dialog box is
displayed.
16.3.7.3
869
Insert
Click the Insert command or press the Insert key to display the Insert menu.
The options on this menu are instruction types. Click an option to put that type of
instruction after the instruction that is displayed on the prompt line.
Rapid, Line, Plunge
SURFCAM displays the Select Point Menu. A prompt tells you to select a
location. Use the Select Point Menu to select a location point. A new move is
inserted between the move that was displayed on the prompt line and the point
you select. The following move is adjusted. See The Select Point Menu, page
140.
Hole
SURFCAM displays the Select Point Menu. A prompt tells you to enter the new
hole start location. Select the new location. The Hole depth dialog box is
displayed. Enter the depth of the new hole.
End Row
The End Row record marks the end of a pass of the tool across the surface.
Feed Rate or Plunge Rate
Insert one of these records to change the feed rate or plunge rate for later
movements in the operation file. The Feed rate or Plunge rate dialog box is
displayed. A prompt tells you to enter a new feed rate or plunge rate.
Tool Change
Insert a tool change into the operation file. SURFCAM displays a Select Tool
dialog box. A prompt tells you to enter the new cutter information.
Comment
The Comment Text dialog box is displayed. Enter a comment. The comment
begin and comment end characters are automatically added. Verify that the
correct begin and end comment characters are defined in the POSTFORM file.
Inline Text, page 486
The Inline Text dialog box is displayed. Select a post processor command to
insert into the toolpath file.
870
NC Mode
The 2 Axis and 3 Axis operations have one set of Insert menu options. The 4
Axis and 5 Axis operations have a different set of Insert menu options.
Use the NC Mode command to display the other set of Insert menu options.
The Mode menu is displayed.
The 4 Axis and 5 Axis moves require that the I, J, and K vectors are indicated.
Back
Returns you to the Edit NC menu.
16.3.7.4
Delete
Click Delete on the Edit NC menu to display the following Delete menu.
Current
Deletes the current instruction only.
Start
Delete all the instructions from the first to the current instruction.
Previous
Delete the current instruction and the previous one.
Pick
Click a part of the toolpath to delete its instruction, the current instruction and
all the instructions between the them.
Next
Deletes the current and the next instruction.
End
Delete all the instructions from the current one to the last instruction.
Back
Returns you to the Edit NC menu.
When you are in the Delete mode, you can use the following keys.
Down Arrow
Delete the current and next moves (Next).
Up Arrow
Delete the previous and current moves (Previous).
Page Down
Delete to the next End of row move.

Page Up
Delete to the previous End of row move.
End
Delete to the end of the operation file (End).
Home
Delete to the first instruction in the operation file (Start).
16.3.7.5
871
Done
Click the Done button to quit the edit mode.
16.3.8
View Toolpath
Show Toolpaths
Show the toolpath for the selected operation. The command is
available when an operation is selected and no toolpath is displayed.
Tip
Toolpath name is displayed in bold print.
Backplot toolpath
Show the tool draw the toolpath for the selected operation. The
command is available when an operation is selected and no toolpath
is displayed.
F8
16.3.9
F9
Hide Toolpaths
Hide the toolpath for the selected operation. The command is
available when an operation is selected and the toolpath is
displayed.
ICD Extract
ICD Extract To INC File
Copy the selected operation, setup section, or project to an INC file.
Now you can add the copied material to another NC project. See
Add, Split, Create, and Merge, page 838.
If a single Setup Section or the complete project is selected, the
operations are merged and saved in one INC file. See NCD Folders,
page 877.
872
The file that is created from the complete project has a special name.
The new name is EXT_ plus the name of the DSN file on which the
copied operations were done.
If the file is created from one Setup Section, the Setup Section name
is appended to the above file name.
If a single operation is copied, three letters are appended to that file
name. The operation that is first done has the letters AAA appended
to the name. The operation that is next done has the letters AAB
appended. See Properties, page 823.
F10
ICD Extract Operation As Text

Copy the selected operation to a text file. SURFCAM displays the
Extract INC to Text File dialog box for you to give a name to the text
file. The dialog box is like the standard Save As dialog box. Use the
text file to determine or check the sequence and the contents of the
INC file.
16.3.10 Import Files or Convert Operations
Ctrl + G
INC to Geometry
Convert the parts of the selected toolpath into geometric elements.
These elements are put on the current layer in the current color.
Ctrl + L
INC to CADL
Convert the selected toolpath to a CADL file format. The Save As
dialog box is displayed. Enter the new file name.
Ctrl + A
873
Import APT file

Import an APT file to create a new operation. This button is active
when a Setup Section is selected. The File Open dialog box is
displayed. Select an *.apt file and click the Open button.
SURFCAM displays the Import APT Options dialog box.
Use Construction View Coordinates

Check this box if there is an MCS entity in the APT file. The
geometric entities that follow are transformed with the coordinate
system.
Unsupported Entities
Indicate the method to use to process entities that are not
supported. An example is APT lines which begin with the key
words that SURFCAM can not identify. You can ignore the line,
save the line as Comment Text or save the line as an inline text
record.
After you click OK, the Select Tool For Any Missing Tool Information
874
The format for APT files does not include all of the information that is
kept in tool change and cutter records. The tool and material you
selected completes any information not available in the APT file. In
the APT files, the dialog is displayed for each CUTTER/ line in the
file.
Tool Type
Select the type of tool.
Tool
The description of the selected tool is displayed. The tool
reference number is displayed on the button next to the
description. To select another tool, click the button to display the
Select a Tool dialog box. See The Select Tool functions, page 471
and Edit or Add a Tool with SURFCAM, page 475.
Material
The description of the selected material is displayed. The material
reference number is displayed on the button next to the
description. To select another material, click the button and the
Select Material dialog box is displayed. See Select Material, page
484 and Edit or Add a Material, page 485.
Tool Diameter
This parameter is the full diameter of the tool that is read from the
APT file. You can change this diameter.
Tool Tip Radius
This parameter is the tool tip radius that is read from the APT file.
You can change this tip radius.
Note
The Tip Radius is not used if the tool is a lathe tool.
After you click OK, the APT file that was imported becomes the last
operation in the selected Setup Section.
Ctrl + N
Import NCC file

Use this command to import an existing NCC file and create a new
operation. SURFCAM displays a File Open dialog box to select the
NCC file. After you click the Open button, SURFCAM displays the
Import NC Options dialog box.
875
Comments Follow
The characters that are displayed begin a comment on a line. The
rest of the line following these characters is ignored.
Center Of Arcs
Select the method to identify the centers of arcs. The options are
Absolute coordinates, Relative To Start or Relative To End of the
arc.
Implied Decimal Places
Check the box if a decimal point is required after an indicated
number of digits. Indicate the number of digits.
NC File Is For Lathe
Check the box if the NC File Is for the Lathe.
X-Axis Coordinates
Indicate that the X Axis coordinates are a Diameter or a Radius
value.
After you click OK, the Select Tool For Any Missing Tool Information
876
Enter the tool information that was not available in the imported
NCC file.
See Tool Information Tab, page 462 for the descriptions of tool
parameters.
After you click OK, the NCC file that was imported becomes the
last operation in the selected Setup Section.
16.4
NC POST LIST
This box displays the posts that are available for the type of machine that is displayed in
the NC Mode box. This box can contain the names of post processor support programs
that can be run by double clicking.
Note
See Post Processor, page 1267 for a description of how to use some entries.
These entries are entries in the NC Post List, the SPost configuration files or
posts, and the MPost/LPost/EPost and the APT-CL program.
The following can appear in your list.

1.
MPost/LPost/EPost
Use these options to run the programs in one of SURFCAMs two post processor
systems. MPost runs MPOSTWIN.EXE. LPost runs LPOSTWIN.EXE. EPost runs
EPOSTWIN.EXE.
2.
APT-CL
THE APT-CL is a program that converts the toolpaths in an operation or a Setup
section to an APT file. Click an operation or Setup Section icon and double-click
on APT-CL in the Post List box. SURFCAM runs the INC2APT program to create
the APT file and display it in an editor.
16.5
NC FILTER LIST BOX
This box contains the names of filters that you can use during post processing. These
filters do the translations on toolpath instructions before the post processing is done.
Select a filter. You can run the filter during post processing or click the Filter Only button.
<None>
A filter operation will not be done. The Filter Only button will not be available.
ArcFltr
The ArcFltr converts some line moves to arc moves. See Tool Path Smoother with
the ArcFltr feature, page 1284.
877
NURB Filter, page 1285

The NurbFltr converts some line moves to NURB spline moves.
ArcFltrMx
The ArcFltrMx filter analyzes the linear 5 axis moves in the NC file. These linear
moves are translated into separate XY and UV arc moves if the moves fall in an
indicated tolerance.
This filter is used for 4 Axis wire EDM machines and 5 axis controls that support arc
interpolation. This filter is available on SURFCAM 4 Axis and 5 Axis. See ArcFltrMx
Filter, page 1284.
ZRangeFltr
Use the ZRangeFltr to create the layered plates that are used in the construction of
patterns. See Pattern Slicing with the Z Range filter, page 558.
16.6
NCD FOLDERS
When you click one of the following four buttons on the NC Operations Manager dialog
box, new subfolders are created.
1.
Run SURFCAM Verify (See Verify Buttons, page 835.)
2.
ICD Extract INC File (See ICD Extract, page 871.)
3.
Create Setup Sheet (See Create Setup Sheet, page 841.)
4.
Post (See Post, page 820.)
The name for the subfolder will be the file name of the current DSN file plus the extension
NCD.
Example
If the DSN file is stored in the SURFCAM \ DSN folder with the file name 2dribs, the
subfolder name will be 2dribs.NCD. An NCD subfolder stores the files that are created
when one of the four identified operations is done.
878
Reference
CHAPTER 17 CONFIGURATION TOOLS

17.1
INTRODUCTION
17.1.1
Temporary Override of Default Values
The default values for the SURFCAM parameters are contained in the SURFCAM.INI
file. You can use an NC menu to make a temporary override to some of these values.
Click the Options command near the right end of an NC menus.
NC > 4 Axis menu > Options
SURFCAM displays a tab with options for each NC operation.
See the following chapters for a description of the options.

1.
Chapter 11 2 Axis: The Options Tab, page 581.
2.
3.
4.
Chapter 14 Lathe: Lathe Options Tab, page 760
5.
Chapter 15 Wire EDM: EDM Options Tab, page 802.
880
17.1.2
Change Default Values
You can use the SURFCAM Configuration Tools program to make a change in
some of these values in the SURFCAM.INI file.
1.
2.
3.
Point to SURFCAM 2002.
4.
Click SURFCAM Config Tools.
5.
SURFCAM displays the Select SURFCAM Initialization File dialog box.
6.
Select the SURFCAM.INI file name.
7.
Click the Open command.
8.
SURFCAM displays the SURFCAM 2002 Options dialog box.

A. The System Options Tab, page 881
B. The Display Options Tab, page 884
C. The NC Options Tab, page 888
D. The Plotter Options Tab, page 896
E. The File Options Tab, page 899
F. The System Files Tab, page 902
G. The Default Paths Tab, page 904
881
H. The Tolerances Tab, page 905

I. The NC Default Paths Tab, page 906
J. The Input Device Tab, page 908
9.
17.2
Start SURFCAM again to see the changes.
THE SYSTEM OPTIONS TAB
Minutes between automatic saves

Specify the frequency of SURFCAM's automatic save. Set this parameter to zero if
you do not want an automatic backup.
882
SURFCAM generates a file called DSNn.TMP for the current drawing, where n is zero
for the first copy of SURFCAM running, 1 for the second copy running, etc. If the
power fails, or the user re-boots the computer while using SURFCAM, the DSNn.TMP
file will automatically be recovered the next time SURFCAM is started.
Note that when SURFCAM is exited normally, the DSNn.TMP file will be erased.
Memory allocation settings
Database page size and Maximum size
These two parameters define the amount of RAM to allocate for the database.
The first parameter is the initial allocation of RAM (in Kilobytes) to use for storage
of elements in the database. As more storage is needed, it is added in increments
equal to this value. The minimum allocation value is 24. The factory default setting
is 128.
The second parameter indicates the maximum size of the database (in Kilobytes).
When no second parameter is entered, SURFCAM defaults to 40 megabytes (as
if the parameter were set to 40960).
Display list page size and Maximum size
These two parameters define the amount of RAM to allocate for the file display.
This includes geometry, tool path, and vectors. These are separate from the Tool
display page size parameters.
The first parameter is the initial allocation of RAM to use for file display. As more
storage is needed, it is added in increments equal to this value. The factory default
setting is 128.
The second parameter sets the maximum amount of RAM to use for display. Since
the display list is single precision (as opposed to the database which is doubleprecision), the second parameter can be set considerably smaller than the second
parameter of the Database page size.
Tool display page size and Maximum size
These two parameters define the amount of RAM to allocate for the tool display
the animated tool displayed during machining. The values entered are in
Kilobytes.
The first parameter is the initial allocation of RAM to use for tool display. This value
should always be large enough to hold the entire tool drawing. If the value is set
too small, the animation of the tool will be extremely slow due to the system
reading graphic information from the disk at each tool position.
The second parameter defines the maximum amount of RAM available for the tool
drawings.
883
Text page size and Maximum size

These two parameters define the amount of RAM to allocate for the text and
dimensions that will be displayed on the drawing screen.
The first parameter is the initial allocation of RAM to use for text display. As more
storage is needed, it is added in increments equal to this value.
The second parameter defines the maximum amount of RAM available for text
display.
Toolpath INC Edit Size and Maximum size
This indicates the initial allocation of disk space (in Kilobytes) to use for graphical
editing of *.INC files using the NC Edit operation in the NC Operations Manager
dialog box. This parameter must be as large as the INC file that is being edited.
The default is 4mb.
Units
Set the default unit of measure to inches or millimeters. When you change from one
unit to the other, all parameters that are based on the default unit typeon all tabs
will be automatically converted.
Once SURFCAM is running, you can override the default Units setting by clicking
Options > Units and then choose Inch or Metric. When you do this, SURFCAM
automatically makes the conversions of the other parameters listed above.
System View Defaults
View Number / CView Number
Choose the default View and CView numbers from the eight standard views. See
Standard views, page 41. The default setting for View is 1. The default setting for
CView is 0.
View
Check this box to make VIEW the Coord default, instead of
WORLD.
The Default Layer Number / Name
The default layer number is 1. Enter a number and name (up to 79 characters) to
create a new layer. Any positive integer results in that layer number being created and
added to the Layers dialog box on startup. Any new file will have that layer number
and name as its current layer.
If you choose 0, SURFCAM will be launched with 0 as the default layer and no layers
will be listed in the Layers dialog box.
Show Advanced Analyze Dialogs
Check this to cause a more advanced set of Analyze dialog boxes to be displayed
when you use the Elements command on the SURFCAM Analyze menu.
884
17.3
THE DISPLAY OPTIONS TAB
Time delays (in seconds)

Pause for modal pop-ups
This value determines the length of time to display the pop-up warning.
885
Pause for dynamic rotation

The number of seconds the system will wait to redraw the screen when the mouse
is used to rotate or pan the image. This delay must be introduced to prevent the
screen from being redrawn whenever a mouse pulse is detected.
Flash Element Selection
This value determines the length of time that selected elements are displayed in
the highlight color.
Arrow
Shaft Size, Head Size, and Color
The first parameter indicates the size of the shaftin the same units of measure
that are used for the ScreenSize parameter.
The second parameter indicates the size of the arrow's head.
Note
When the first and second parameters are set to zero, the arrow is not
displayed.
The third parameter indicates the color of the arrows.

Note
When the color is set to element color or zero, the arrow will appear the
same color as the surface. In drawings that contain many surfaces, this
makes it easier to determine the surface to which an arrow belongs.
Screen Size
The width and height (in inches or millimeters) of your video display screen. The
closer these values are set to the actual dimensions of your screen, the closer the
dimensions of objects drawn on the screen will be to their actual size when the
viewing scale in the Status menu is set to 1. If the values you enter are not in the
correct ratio, you will get distortion; for example, a circle would look like an ellipse.
Measure the height and width of your screen with a ruler to determine the actual
physical dimensions. Note that the first number in the INI file is the horizontal
dimension, the second is the vertical.
Surface representation: Number of U and V splines
These parameters set the number of U and V direction splines displayed when a
surface is created. When you enter a zero for these defaults, the surface is displayed
using the knots. When the numbers are greater than zero, the splines are displayed
equally spaced.
General display attributes
Curve Error (in Pixels)
Tolerance within which curves are drawn on the screen. Error is in pixels.
Default tool speed
Set the tool animation speed of the tool display. The tool animation speed ranges
from 0.0 (fastest) to 0.9 (slowest).
886
Default fillet radius size

The default radius when either Create > Fillet or Create > Surface > Fillet is first
selected.
Rotation Increment
Specify the rotation increment value. This is the amount that an image will be
rotated when you use the arrow keys in conjunction with the rotation function to
rotate the image.
Chamfer distances
These are the default values for the First Trim Value and Second Trim Value
parameters on the Chamfer dialog box that will be displayed when you click Change
Chamfer on the Create > Chamfer menu. See Chamfer, page 186.
Default system color
The color of elements when they are displayed on the screen.
The OpenGL graphics card
Check the box if you have an OpenGL graphics card installed.
An OpenGL graphics card increases the speed and the accuracy of the SURFCAM
3D graphics display. If you use the Pan button, the Rotate button, the Zoom In button,
or the Zoom Out button, the shaded images remain shaded.
OpenGL is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Tip
Do the following if some of the surfaces are not visible when the design
rotates.
1.
Run the SURFCAM Configuration Tools program.
2.
Click the Display Options tab.
3.
Increase the value for the Pause for Dynamic Rotation parameter.
If you check the box and do not have an OpenGL card installed, SURFCAM will use
the OpenGL graphics functions, but your system will display graphics very slowly.
Open SURFCAM from the Start Menu
If you right-click SURFCAM 2002 GL OFF and click the Properties command, you
can see the code OPENGL=0.
If you right-click SURFCAM 2002 GL ON and click the Properties command, you
can see the code OPENGL=1.
887
GL OFF
Open SURFCAM from the desktop icon

If you open SURFCAM from the icon on your desktop, right-click the icon to see
the properties.
surfcam.exe -OPENGL=0
SURFCAM does not use an OpenGL card.
surfcam.exe -OPENGL=1
SURFCAM does use an OpenGL card
surfcam.exe
SURFCAM uses your selection on the Display Options tab of the Configuration
Tools program
Display CView Indicator
Indicates whether or not the CView Indicator (the small coordinate system) will be
displayed. This can be changed later using the SURFCAM Options > Display menu.
Display Wide Lines
Check the box to have wide lines displayed on your screen for lines, splines or arcs.
Cross Hair Pointer
Check the box to choose the classic Cross Hair pointer. Leave it unchecked to choose
the Mouse pointer. To select a Mouse pointer, click Start > Settings > Control Panel.
Then double-click Mouse.
Caution: Using animated pointers will slow down the SURFCAM process.
888
17.4
THE NC OPTIONS TAB
Cutting Display
You can set various options for the display of the tool and the toolpaths. Check the
options you want.
Advanced milling options
Rotary 4 axis
Set the number of axes for simultaneous motion by clicking 3 Axis or 4 Axis in the
Rotary 4 Axis Milling dialog box. Identify the default axis of rotation by first
identifying the X, Y, and Z locations of the start point of the axis of rotation. Then
identify the X, Y, and Z locations of the end point of the axis of rotation.
889
Rotary 5 axis
For 5 Axis machines with dual rotary tables, set the Number of rotary axes to 1 in
the Rotary 5 Axis Milling dialog box. For 5 Axis machines with dual rotary heads,
set the Number of rotary axes to 0.
Identify the default rotary axis by first identifying the X, Y, and Z locations of the
start point of the rotary axis. Then identify the X, Y, and Z locations of the end point
of the rotary axis. This parameter defines the default axis for 5 axis machines that
utilize a rotary axis.
890
A new rotary axis can be defined in SURFCAM with the Set Axis command on the
NC 5 Axis menu. See Set Axis for 5 Axis, page 727.
Lathe options
Input (radial)
Click this button to display the Lathe Input (Radius) dialog box.
891
Display Order of Axes

First, Second, Third
These are the coordinates that will appear in the World dialog box when
Lathe Radius is selected on the Options > Axis menu. These coordinates
are usually set to X, Z, and -.
The - symbol prevents the third coordinate from being displayed in the World
dialog box.
Active Input on Start-up
If you check this box, whenever the World dialog box is displayed in
SURFCAM, it will be displayed as shown in the World dialog box for Lathe
Radius figure.
World dialog box for Lathe Radius
However, checking this box does not make Lathe Radius the default in the
Options > Axis menu. For that option, see Active Input on Start-up, page
892.
Axes Direction
The start point for the three axes is 0, 0, 0. Your entries in these boxes
determine a point on each axis, based on the Mill axes orientation.
Display (radial)
Click this button to display the Lathe Axis Display (Radius) dialog box.
892
Display Order Of Axes

These are the names of the axes that are displayed on the View Indicator in the
lower left corner of the drawing window when Lathe Radius is selected on the
Options > Axis menu.
First
This is the name of the horizontal axis. It is usually set to Z.
Second
This is the name of the vertical axis. It is usually set to X.
Third
This is the name of the depth axis. It is usually set to the - symbol which
prevents the axis name from being displayed on the View Indicator.
Check this box to make:
1.
Lathe Radius the default option

on the Options > Axis menu and
Options > Axis menu
2.
893
the View Indicator the one shown

in the View Indicator for Lathe
Radius figure.
View Indicator for Lathe Radius
Checking this box does not make the World dialog box display only X and Z
coordinate options. For that option, see Active Input on Start-up, page 891.
Axes Direction
Input (diameter)
Click this button to display the Lathe Input (Diameter) dialog box.

First, Second, Third
These are the coordinates that will appear in the World dialog box when
Lathe Diameter is selected on the Options > Axis menu. These coordinates
are usually set to D, Z, and -.
The - symbol prevents the third coordinate from being displayed in the World
dialog box.
894

If you check this box, whenever the World dialog box is displayed in
SURFCAM, it will be displayed as shown in the World dialog box for Lathe
Diameter figure.
World dialog box for Lathe Diameter
However, checking this box does not make Lathe Diameter the default in the
Options > Axis menu. See Active Input on Start-up, page 895.
Axes Direction
Note: The 2 in the First Y coordinate tells SURFCAM to divide diameter values found
in the World dialog box by two.
Display (diameter)
Click this button to display the Lathe Axis Display (Diameter) dialog box.
895

These are the names of the axes that are displayed on the View Indicator in the
lower left corner of the drawing window when Lathe Diameter is selected on the
Options > Axis menu.
First
This is the name of the horizontal axis. It is usually set to Z.
Second
The name of the vertical axis. It is usually set to D.
Third
This is the name of the depth axis. It is usually set to the - symbol which
prevents the axis name from being displayed on the View Indicator.
Check this box to make:
1.
Lathe Diameter the default option

on the Options > Axis menu and
Options > Axis menu
2.
the View Indicator the one shown

in the View Indicator for Lathe
Diameter figure.
View Indicator for Lathe Diameter
Checking this box does not make the World dialog box display only D and Z
coordinate options. For that option, see Active Input on Start-up, page 894.
Axes Direction
Use Tool Library Gauge Length
Check an NC mode box, like 2 Axis, to have the total height value for a newly selected
tool displayed in the Z Gauge Length box on the Tool Information tab for that NC
896
mode. Total height is a value associated with each tool in the Tool Library. You will
usually check these boxes when you are using an NC machine that must make use
of a tool gauge length.
17.5
THE PLOTTER OPTIONS TAB

l
897
Plotter Selection
Plotter name
With this drop-down list box you can display the plotters contained in the
PLOTTER.CFG file. Scroll through the list and click the one you want for the
default plotter.
Plotter key
This is a key word associated with the Plotter name. It will be the plotter
designation used in the Plotter parameter line in the SURFCAM.INI file.
Number of pens
With this drop-down list box you indicate the number of pens on the plotter. Pen
carousels for plotters are usually limited to one, two, four, eight, or sixteen pens.
This number will be the last entry on the Plotter parameter line in the
SURFCAM.INI file. SURFCAM will use this number to tell which pen color
assignment line to read in the SURFCAM.INI file.
Paper selection
Paper size
With this drop-down list box you indicate the size of the paper used by the plotter.
The letter in front of the size description will be one of the entries on the Plotter line
in the SURFCAM.INI file.
The paper sizes are indicated below.
INCHES
MILLIMETERS
8.5 by 11
a6
105 by 148
11 by 17
a5
148 by 210
17 by 22
a4
210 by 297
22 by 34
a3
297 by 420
34 by 44
a2
420 by 594
a1
584 by 841
a0
841 by 1189
Color assignments
n Pen(s)
Click one of these buttons to display a Pen Color Assignments dialog box.
Plotter pens are mapped to the system colors with the numbers entered in the Pen
Number boxes.
898
Pen Color Assignments dialog box for 4 pens
17.6
899
THE FILE OPTIONS TAB
File format
With this drop-down list box you can display the file format type names that are
contained in the SURFCAM.INI file. The entries in this box are the parameter names
900
used in each of the lines in the SURFCAM.INI file that identify the types of files that
can be saved and opened in SURFCAM.
Format properties
File description
These are the names of the file types that appear in the File of type drop-down list
box on the Open dialog box and the Save as type drop-down list box on the Save
As dialog box.
Extension(s)
These are the file extensions that a file of this type can have. For example, a file
with an extension TLE is a file that represents the design of a tool with the unit of
measurement in inches (English units). It is in the same format as a DSN file which
represents the design of a part.
To DSN translator DLL
For a file type that can be translated into a DSN file, this is the name of the DLL
file that will do the translating.
From DSN translator DLL
If it can be done, this is the name of the DLL file that will translate a DSN file into
a file of this type.
To DSN DLL entry point
This is a set of characters located in the DLL file that marks the beginning of the
instructions that implement the translation of this type of file into a DSN file.
From DSN DLL entry point
This is a set of characters located in the DLL file that marks the beginning of the
instructions that implement the translation of a DSN file into this type of file.
Default folder
This is the name of the subfolder where files of this type will be stored.
Append File
This is the default setting for the Append box on the on the Files > Open dialog
box.
Never
Append is never checked when the Open dialog box is displayed.
True
Append is initially checked and maintains last checked state.
False
Append is initially NOT checked and maintains last checked state.
Always
Append is always checked when Open dialog box is displayed.
901
File format management

Add file type
Click this button to display the Add File Format dialog box from which you can add
a new file type. The entry you make in the New key: list box will appear in the File
format drop-down list box.
Delete file type

Click this button to display the Delete File key dialog box from which you can
delete a file type from the SURFCAM.INI file. The file type that is currently listed in
the File format list box is the one that will be deleted.
Undelete
This button appears only when the Delete file type button has been clicked and the
OK button on the Delete file key dialog box has been clicked. Click Undelete to
undelete the last file type you deleted.
902
17.7
THE SYSTEM FILES TAB
Default system files

The path and file names of the major SURFCAM system files are displayed on this
tab. Use the Browse buttons to find the desired path and file names.
Plotter file
The file that contains plotter configuration. The default file is PLOTTER.CFG and
is installed to the main SURFCAM\PLT folder.
Help files
The files that contains the SURFCAM online help. The default help file is
SURFCAM.HLP and is installed to the main SURFCAM folder.
Use Tool and materials library DLL
If this box is checked, the box below it will contain the path and file name of a
dynamically linked library (DLL) file that will process tool and material information
for SURFCAM.
903
If this box is not checked, the Tool and Material libraries will not be available to you.
SURFCAM will display a different Tool Information tab in which you will have to
enter all of the tool features yourself.
Sample of the Top Portion of the Tool Information tabs when the user
chooses to use, or chooses NOT to use the Tool and Materials Library DLL
904
17.8
THE DEFAULT PATHS TAB
Default paths
Font folder
The folder where SURFCAM screen fonts are stored.
PLT folder
The folder where SURFCAM writes plotter output (PLT) files.
Tool folder
The folder used to store the files containing the drawings of tools and tool holders.
These are design files similar to DSN files except they have a TLE file extension.
Each tool listed in one of several tool libraries (such as MILLTLB.MDB) has a tool
and a tool holder file from this folder assigned to it. When that tool is selected for
an NC operation, the tool and tool holder drawings from these files will be
displayed as the tool path is drawn on the screen. See Drawing Files, page 476.
Temp folder
The folder used by SURFCAM to store temporary files.
17.9
905
THE TOLERANCES TAB
Default system tolerances

Chain tolerance
The tolerance to use for finding elements to chain. When elements are separated
by less than this value, the elements can be chained for machining.
Surface intersection tolerance
The surface fillet and intersect tolerancefrom the Create > Surface > Options
dialog boxthe accuracy within which intersection points are calculated.
Maximum surface step
This is the surface fillet maximum evaluation stepthe maximum distance
between points on cutter and surface intersect splines and fillets before
optimization. Reducing this number will cause more points to be generated in the
original (non-optimized) spline, which may increase the accuracy, but will also
increase the time it takes to calculate the spline, and consume more memory. The
default is in inches.
906
Surface parameter tolerance

This parameter controls the creation of nodes in surfaces built by cross sections.
A small value may cause more nodes in the resultant surface, but it will match the
sections very closely. A larger value will have fewer nodes but may deviate from
the sections.
Tolerance
This parameter defines the distance separating two elements that SURFCAM
recognizes as intersecting. When two elements are closer than this value,
SURFCAM determines that they are intersecting.
View tolerance
When SURFCAM attempts to create a fillet between two elements, it evaluates the
angle at which the planes containing each of the elements intersect. If that angle
is greater than the View tolerance, SURFCAM will not create the fillet.
17.10
THE NC DEFAULT PATHS TAB
907
NC Default paths
See NC Settings, page 348.
Default folder
The folder where the files containing the default NC settings are stored. The
default name of this folder is NCDefault.
Select Default NC ini file
The name of the INI file that will contain the current NC settings. The default name
of this file is Current.ini.
908
17.11
THE INPUT DEVICE TAB
The Input Device tab provides an easy way to modify the SURFCAM.INI file so that you
can use one of the supported 3D input devices or one of the supported digitizer devices.
3D Input Device
SpaceMouse
See SpaceMouse, page 933.
SpaceBall
See SpaceBall, page 933.
Digitizing device
FaroArm
See FaroArm, page 916.
Digitizer Tablet
See Digtab, page 933.
CHAPTER 18 MISCELLANEOUS UTILITIES

18.1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains descriptions of frequently used SURFCAM utilities:

1.
See Set Default Version, page 909.
2.
See INC2APT, page 911. The INC2APT utility is used to create APT files in
situations in which it is not practical to do so from within SURFCAM;
3.
See FaroArm, page 916. The FARO utility facilitates the use of the FARO
digitizer arm to input location coordinates into SURFCAM drawings;
4.
See Input Devices, page 933. The three commonly used input devices are Digtab,
Spaceball, and SpaceMouse.
18.2
SET DEFAULT VERSION
SURFCAM
If you have more than one version of SURFCAM installed, you can use the Set
Default Version tool to identify a default version.
910
Set Default SURFCAM Installation dialog box
Click Start > Programs > SURFCAM 2002 > SURFCAM Tools > Set Default Version.
The current default version will be highlighted and marked with the >>>> symbols.
Move the highlighter with the up or down arrows or by clicking. Click the Set button
to select the highlighted version as the default.
Default Editor
Click SURFCAM NC Editor to select the traditional SURFCAM editor. Click PEditor to
select the text editor developed by Predator. See Chapter 20 Editor, Part 2: Predator
Editor, page 1054 and Chapter 20 Editor, Part 3: SURFCAM NC Editor, page 1198.
If you double-click a file with one of the following extensions from within the Windows
Explorer, the file will open in the SURFCAM installation version or the default editor
that you selected:
.cfg
.e2
.m3
.e
.def
.e4
.m4
.l
.dem
.inc
.m5
.m
.dsn
.l2
.ncc
.pst
911
File Association
18.3
INC2APT
The INC2APT program is used to convert an INC file to the APTCL format. APTCL format
is used by some post processors to produce NC code.
After you read this section, see the INC2APT-Specification document for technical
information.
Following are 3 ways to run the INC2APT program.
1.
From the NC Operations Manager dialog box, select a Setup Section or a single
operation and then double-click the APT-CL option listed in the Post List box. This
will run the INC2APT program and produce an APT file. See the description of
APT-CL in APT-CL, page 876.
2.
In the Explorer double-click the INC2APT.exe program in the SURFCAM\

SURF2002 folder.
3.
From the command prompt, type inc2apt. Command line options are indicated in
red in the parameter descriptions below.
Note
Options followed by a number argument must be separated by a space.
Example: SURFCAM\SURF2002\INC2APT -w -5 -F 1 -R 45 -I "%p%n" -O

"%p%N.apt
Note
-d is an additional command line option specifying that the dialog box be

displayed. If you do not want this default, delete the -d in command lines
containing INC2APT in the PST file. (Search for -d and replace with nothing.)
Then use the -d in a command line when you do want the dialog box displayed.
When you run INC2APT, the Convert INC To APT File dialog box will be displayed.
912
Convert INC to APT dialog box

-I Input INC File
Enter the name of the INC file to be converted or click the Browse button to display
the Open dialog box from which to select an INC file. If you enter a file name in an
operating system that supports long file names, enclose a file name containing
spaces in double quotes.
-O Output APT File
Enter the name for the APT file that will be produced.
913
-F Feed Angle Limit
This tells INC2APT to break the feed move for 4 or 5 Axis machines if the change in
the tool axis vector exceeds this value. The default value is 360.
-R Rapid Angle Limit
This tells INC2APT to break the rapid move for 4 or 5 Axis machines if the change in
the tool axis vector exceeds this value. The default value is 360.
-W Output World Coordinates
Check this box if the world coordinate system is to be used to output values to the
APT file. Normally the machine coordinate system in the INC file is used to output
values. These coordinate systems, however, can be the same.
If the -W and -EVENT boxes are both checked, the tool vectors (I, J and K) are added
to the APT commands. See -EVENT Output Event Data, page 915.
-M Invert LCS (forces a - W too)
Check this box to invert the Local Coordinate Systeminvert the CView coordinate
vectors.
-5 Output Tool Axis Vectors
Check this box to output 5-Axis tool vectors, even if the INC file was not done in 5Axis.
If the -5 and -EVENT boxes are both checked, the tool vectors (I, J and K) are added
to the APT commands. See -EVENT Output Event Data, page 915.
-OP Output Operation Information
Check this box to add the command OPERTN/ n1, n2, n3 as a line in the APT file.
n1 Operation Type
Lathe
Turn = 1, Face = 2, Face Off-Box = 29, Groove = 3, Thread = 4, Drill = 5, Partoff
= 30
2 Axis
Pocket = 6, Contour = 7, Contour 3D = 14, Drill = l 8, Pilot Hole = 8, Face Mill
= 35, Thread Mill = 38
3 Axis
Cut = 9, Project* = 6 & 10, Z Rough = 11, Z Finish = 27, Planar = 13, Contour
3D = 14, Drill = 8, Pilot Hole = 8, Auto Rough = 33
4 Axis
Cut = 16, Project* = 6 & 18, Swarf = 17, Contour = 19, Trim = 31, Drill = 20
5 Axis
Cut = 21, Project* = 6 & 21, Swarf = 22, Contour = 24, Trim = 32, Drill = 25
914
EDM
2 Axis XY = 28, 4 Axis = 26, 4 Axis UV = 34
Note
* The first number following the word Project in the above 3, 4 and 5
Axis line is the number for the Project operation. The second number
denotes the SURFCAM mode.
n2 Cycle Type
Drill = 0, Peck = 1, Tap = 2, Ream = 3, Bore = 4, Back Bore = 5, Left Tap = 6,
Custom1 = 10, Custom2 = 11, Custom3 = 12, Rigid Tap = 13, Rigid Left Tap = 14,
countersink = 15
n3 Spindle Type for Mill/Turn Operations
Main Spindle = 0, Sub Spindle = 1
-P Output Next Tool Pre-select
Check this box to cause INC2APT to search ahead in the INC file for the next tool
number when it encounters a tool change command. INC2APT will then insert, into
the APT code, a tool load commandLOADTL/ n (n = current tool number)followed
by a tool select commandSELCTL/ n (n = next tool number).
-B Output ROW/START, ROW/END
Check this box to output a ROW/START command when a Start of row is found in
the INC file and a ROW/END command when an End of row is found.
-TOOLINFO Output Tool Information
Check this box to output tool description comments.

For Lathe:
PROGRAMMED ORIENTATION
OUTPUT AS
OD TURN
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:ODTURNING
OD FACE
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:FACING
OD THREAD
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:ODTHREADING
OD BACK TURN
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:ODBACKTURNING
ID BACK FACE
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:BACKFACING
ID BACK TURN
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:IDBACKBORE
ID THREAD
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:IDTHREADING
ID FACE
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:IDBORING
OD FACE GROOVE
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:ODFACEGROOVE
OD GROOVE
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:ODGROOVE
OD BACK GROOVE
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:ODBACKGROOVE
915
OD BACK FACE GROOVE
PPRINT/
ORIENTATION:ODBACKFACEGROOVE
ID BACK FACE GROOVE
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:IDBACKFACEGROOVE
ID BACK GROOVE
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:IDBACKGROOVE
ID GROOVE
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:IDGROOVE
ID FACE GROOVE
PPRINT/ORIENTATION:IDFACEGROOVE
-X Insert Move When Vector Crosses Quadrant
Check this box to output an extra move (a GOTO) when the XY of the normal vector
crosses a quadrant (0, 90, 180, 270 degrees) and insert a QUAD line above it.
-C Check and Warn if Output File Exists
Check this box to cause INC2APT to determine if the target APT file already exists
and display a warning if it does.
-FAR Force Feedrate After Each Rapid
Check this box to insert a redundant Feed command above a GOTO that follows a
rapid GOTO command. (A GOTO command that follows another GOTO that was
preceded by a Rapid command is automatically a Feed command.)
-N Output RAPID0/RAPID1 Format
Check this box to replace Rapid/GOTO sequences with modal Rapid0/Rapid1

commands, similar to FANUC G0 and G1 commands. This produces a smaller APT
file if the post processor supports this format.
-CVIEW Output CVIEW Number and Name
Check this box to output the CVIEW Number and Name.

-EVENT Output Event Data
Check this box to display the APT file tool motion commands. When a tool motion
event is found in the INC file, INC2APT displays the correct APT command. The
current location of the tool follows the APT command name. If either the -W box or
the -5 box is checked, the tool axis vectors (I, J and K) follow the tool location.
APT commands that identify the start of a tool motion are put before the GOTO
command or the group of commands that control the tool motion.
APT commands that identify the end of a tool motion are put after the GOTO
command or the group of commands that control the tool motion.
THE INC TOOL MOTION EVENT

INC_START_OF_LEADIN
INC_END_OF_LEADIN
INC_START_OF_LEADOUT
APT COMMAND
FOLLOWED BY CURRENT TOOL LOCATION
EVENT/LDIN_S, X, Y, Z, J, K
EVENT/LDIN_E, X, Y, Z, J, K
EVENT/LOUT_S, X, Y, Z, J, K
916
INC_END_OF_LEADOUT
INC_START_OF_ZLEVEL
INC_END_OF_ZLEVEL
INC_START_OF_SIDESTEP
INC_END_OF_SIDESTEP
INC_START_OF_RETRACT
INC_END_OF_RETRACT
INC_START_OF_PLUNGE
INC_END_OF_PLUNGE
EVENT/LOUT_E, X, Y, Z, J, K
EVENT/ZLVL_S, X, Y, Z, J, K
EVENT/ZLVL_E, X, Y, Z, J, K
EVENT/SSTP_S, X, Y, Z, J, K
EVENT/SSTP_E, X, Y, Z, J, K
EVENT/RTCT_S, X, Y, Z, J, K
EVENT/RTCT_E, X, Y, Z, J, K
EVENT/PLNG_S, X, Y, Z, J, K
EVENT/PLNG_E, X, Y, Z, J, K
-DEBUG Output Debug Data
Check this box to display an APT comment string when an INC record is found that
INC2APT cannot identify. The record number and the record size are displayed.
Example - $$ Unrecognized INC record #221, Size 190
Decimal Precision
-Precision <decimal digits>
Specify the number of decimal places to output floating point numbers. This is used
for locations and dimensions.
Vector Precision
-Precision <decimal digits>
Specify the number of decimal places for floating point numbers. Usually, this should
be a higher precision than for locations and dimensions so that the vector maintains
its unit length.
18.4
FAROARM
FARO and FaroArm are registered trademarks of FARO Technologies, Inc.

The SURFCAM FaroArm utility is an interface between a FARO digitizing arm and
SURFCAM. It is used to enter the location of points on an object into a SURFCAM
design. When FARO is running and SURFCAM is connected to the FaroArm, a
Digitize button will appear on all SURFCAM Select point menus. The FaroArm is
another way of creating a location within your drawing.
18.4.1
Setting Up FARO
Perform the following steps to prepare for using the FaroArm to transmit digitized
data to SURFCAM.
1.
917
To select the digitizing device, use the Config Tools program. On the Input
Device tab, select FARO as the Digitizing device. To access Config Tools, see
Chapter 17 Configuration Tools, page 879.
When you open SURFCAM, the Digitize command will appear on the Select
Point menu.
2.
To access the FARO utility, click the Start button, then navigate to Programs,
then to SURFCAM 2002, then to SURFCAM Tools, then to FARO Digitizer.
Click the left mouse button. The FARO Digitizer dialog box will be displayed.
3.
Open the Digitizer Communications dialog box by clicking the Communications

command on the Options menu. Set the serial port settings to the appropriate
values. Correct values can be determined from the calibration software
supplied with the FARO digitizing arm. Close the dialog box by clicking OK.
4.
Start the digitizer by pressing the Start/Stop button or selecting Start Digitizer
from the File menu. If the settings are configured correctly, the readout boxes
will display a steady stream of data. Otherwise an error message will appear.
18.4.2
FARO Digitizer Dialog Box
This section is an overview of the FARO Digitizer dialog box. Following sections go
into more detail on the options available on the various drop-down menus accessed
through the menu bar.
SURFCAM FARO Digitizer dialog box
File menu
The File menu has options to start and stop the digitizer, connect and disconnect
from SURFCAM, and to exit the program. See File Menu, page 919.
918
Options menu
The Options menu provides access to the various dialog boxes on which you will
configure the digitizer. See Options Menu, page 920.
Digitize menu
FARO has five modes of operation that can be selected in the Digitize menu.
Each mode can also be run with the Project Onto Plane filter turned on. See
Digitize Menu, page 930.
Help menu
The Help menu gives access to the help file and information about this application.
XYZ coordinates
Shows the position, in the FaroArm world coordinates, of the digitizing tip on the
digitizing arm.
IJK coordinates
Shows the normalized orientation of the digitizing tip.
Connect to SURFCAM
The Connect/Disconnect button allows the user to initiate and terminate the DDE
(Dynamic Data Exchange) link to SURFCAM (if SURFCAM is currently running).
Stop digitizer
The Start/Stop button controls the data stream input from the FaroArm.
Status Bar
The Status bar keeps the user informed of the various operations and settings of
the FARO application. It consists of a Message area, Sampling Mode indicator
box, ON TOP indicator box and a Sound On indicator box.
Message area
The message area displays short messages when the application attempts,
processes, or completes an operation.
Typical messages:
Opening COM1...
Attempting to connect to SURFCAM...
Reading in data...
Sampling terminated.
Sampling Mode indicator box
The currently selected sampling mode.
ON TOP indicator box
This box shows the caption ON TOP if the FARO application is set to always
be in the foreground (covering other windows, even if FARO is inactive).
Otherwise, the box is empty.
919
Sound On indicator box

This box shows the caption BEEP if the FARO application is set to give audio
feedback whenever a point is digitized. Otherwise, the box is empty.
Digitized Points Counter
The title bar of FARO digitizer dialog box is updated whenever a point is digitized.
The counter records the number of points digitized. The Digitized Points Counter
is visible even when the application is minimized.
18.4.3
File Menu
The File Menu has options to start and stop the digitizer, connect and disconnect from
SURFCAM, and exit.
File Menu
Connect to SURFCAM
Toggle the connection state between FARO and SURFCAM. FARO
communicates with SURFCAM using a DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) link, and
a check mark beside the item indicates that the link currently exists.
Start Digitizer
Toggle the data stream status of the application, effectively starting and stopping
the reading of the digitizer data. A check mark beside the item indicates that the
program is currently reading in data.
Get SURFCAM CView
Selecting this menu item retrieves the current CView in SURFCAM into the Project
Onto Plane filter.
Exit
Exit the FARO utility.
920
18.4.4
Options Menu
The Options menu contains commands used to configure the digitizer.
File Menu
General Configuration
This option displays the General Configuration dialog box.
General Configuration dialog box
Units
Units of measure can be set to Inches or Millimeters.
Audio Feedback
The FaroArm has an internal speaker which outputs tones whenever the
primary or secondary button is depressed.
921
Audio feedback active

The speaker can be set to be active or silent.
End stop warnings active
The FaroArm can give warning tones when the end stops of the rotational
joints are reached.
Front Button/Back Button
The pitch of the tones can also be set by the user for both the primary button
(Front button (Hertz)) and the secondary button (Back button (Hertz)).
Probe Tip Selection
This option displays the Probe Tip Selection dialog box.
Probe Tip Selection dialog box
Probe Tip
FaroArms support up to four pre-defined tips: the supplied point tip (Point
probe), the ball end tip (1/4 Ball probe), and two custom tips. The digitizer tips
must first be properly calibrated using the software supplied with the FaroArm.
Tool Library
This button displays the Select Digitizer Tool dialog box. You can select, edit,
add, and delete digitizer tips in the digitizer tool library.
922
Select Digitizer Tool dialog box
Project Along Tip

See definition in dialog box.
Projection Distance
Enter the desired projection distance.
Communications
Selecting this displays the Communications Settings dialog box. This stops the
data stream if the program is currently digitizing.
923
Communications Settings dialog box
Serial Port Settings

Serial port
Connected serial port (COM1 to COM4).
Baud rate
Speed of data stream (4800 to 57600 baud).
Parity
Data parity (None, Even, Odd, Mark, or Space).
Data bits
Number of data bits per byte sent. (4 to 8).
Error tolerance
The higher the error tolerance, the greater the number of retries whenever
the application receives erroneous packets from the data stream.
Sampling rate
This slider controls the number of times per second that FARO will read the
position of the digitizer tip. The higher the number, the higher the frequency of
reads and updates.
Stream/Undo Settings
Selecting this option displays the Stream Distance dialog box in which you enter
the desired streaming distance. Streaming distance is the distance the digitizer tip
must travel from the last digitized point before the next digitized point is output
automatically.
924
Stream Distance dialog box
Locked Plane Settings

This options displays the Locked Plane Settings dialog box.
Locked Plane Settings dialog box
Locking Plane
A Locking Plane can be selected from the three fixed planes (XY, YZ and XZ)
and a user defined.
Define plane
This displays a dialog box to define a plane. See Definition Dialog Boxes, page
927.
Plane Definition Options
Distance from plane to origin
This is the shortest distance from the world origin of the FaroArm to the
desired plane. The position of the plane in space is determined by this value.
Distance between planes
For multiple planes, a set distance between each plane must be defined.
925
Number of planes
The number of planes desired for multiple planes. These planes are parallel
to the defined plane, and are offset a defined distance away from each other
in the direction of the plane normal.
Define location of the initial plane
Click this button to display a dialog box to identify the location of the initial
plane. See Definition Dialog Boxes, page 927.
Align Plane Settings
Select the Align Plane Settings mode to display the Align Plane Settings dialog
box.
Align Plane Settings
Align Plane
The desired plane can be selected from four choices: the XY plane, the YZ
plane, the XZ plane, and the user-defined plane. The first three planes are
orthogonal to each other and correspond to the world X, Y, and Z axes
according to the FaroArm. The user-defined plane is stored from session to
session, and can be modified using the Define Plane dialog.
Define plane
This displays a dialog box used to define a plane. See Definition Dialog Boxes,
page 927.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter sets the angle between the digitizer tip and the plane
at which the point will be digitized. A tolerance setting of two degrees would
create a point at the location where the orientation of the tip became parallel to
the align plane within two degrees.
926
Project Onto Plane Settings

Selecting this mode of operation will display the Projection Plane Settings dialog
box.
Projection Plane Setting dialog box
Projection Plane
You can choose from the three fixed fields (XY, YZ or XZ) or a user defined
plane.
Define Plane
Click to display the Define Plane dialog box. See Definition Dialog Boxes, page
927.
Plane Definition Options
Distance from plane to origin
This is the shortest distance from the world origin of the FaroArm to the
desired plane. The position of the plane in space is determined by this value.
Define the location of the plane
The user can also define the location of the plane by clicking the button that
brings up the Define Plane Location dialog box, which allows the position of
the plane in space to be digitized by the FaroArm. See Definition Dialog
Boxes, page 927.
Always On Top
This option make the FARO window always appear in the foreground (covering
other windows, even if FARO is inactive). ON TOP appears on the Status line.
Sounds On
This activates the sound on feature in which the FARO utility gives audio feed
back whenever a point is digitized.
927
AutoStart
If AutoStart is enabled, the application can attempt to connect to SURFCAM and
start digitizing immediately when it is first executed.
18.4.5
Definition Dialog Boxes
There are several dialog boxes called up by other dialog boxes that help you define
axes and planes. They are shown in this section. The explanation of how to use them
is found on each dialog box and in a discussion following each drawing.
18.4.5.1
Define Plane
The Define Plane dialog box is accessed from the Locked Plane Settings, Align
Plane Settings and Projection Plane Settings dialog boxes.
Define Plane dialog box
Plane Definition
A plane is defined by the vector normal to the plane, and the distance from the
plane to the origin. The dialog has three fields for the I, J, and K components of
the planes normal vector, and a field for the distance between the plane and
928
the world origin of the FaroArm. Any numbers are valid for the normal vector
of the planeexcept for zero in all three vector component fields. The
Normalize vector button will calculate the normalized components for the vector
entered in the component fields.
Instructions for Digitizing a Plane
With this dialog box you can define a plane in space by digitizing three points
within the plane. Press the Start button to begin the digitizing process. After
digitizing each point, you have the option of UNDO-ing the last point digitized.
After the third point is digitized, the resulting plane is calculated using the
position and order (for the normal vector direction) of the three points at that
point in space. The position of the plane in space is determined by the shortest
distance of the plane from the origin. After defining the plane, this offset is
calculated and stored in the Distance from origin field of the dialog, and can be
modified without altering the orientation of the defined plane.
18.4.5.2
Define Plane Location
The Define Plane Location dialog box is accessed from the Projection Plane
Settings and the Locked Plane Settings dialog boxes.
Define Plane Location dialog box
929
Origin definition
This dialog box enables you to select a point in space to serve as the origin of
the plane. The plane will pass through this point. Given the point that is digitized
and the plane, the offset distance from the plane will be calculated and
updated.
This operation must occur after selecting the desired plane. Subsequently
selecting a different plane will change the origin position.
18.4.6
Digitize Startup
To operate the FARO digitizer arm with SURFCAM you must have both SURFCAM
and the FARO utility running.
Turn on the FaroArm by either pressing the Start/Stop button on the machine or
clicking Start digitizer on the File menu of the FARO Digitizer dialog box.
Then connect SURFCAM to the FARO digitizer arm by clicking Connect to
SURFCAM on the File menu of the FARO Digitizer dialog box.
You will use the digitizer arm when you are working in the SURFCAM Create menu
in any situation where the Select point menu is displayed. In Figure 17, the Select
point menu being displayed is the one you see when you click Create, then click Point.
Once SURFCAM is connected to the digitizer arm, the Digitize button on all
SURFCAM Select point menus will be activated.
To enter points, click the Digitize menu and select one of the five digitizer modes. See
Digitize Menu, page 930. When you select a digitizer mode, a sketch of the digitizer
will be displayed on the screen.
930
Digitizer displayed on SURFCAM screen
As you move the arm, the image will make corresponding moves on the screen.
The FaroArm has two digitizer buttons that are located either on the arm itself or on
a foot pad. One of these buttons is called the primary button and the other is called
the secondary button. By pressing these buttons you tell the digitizer to read and
transmit the coordinates of a location. These buttons are used in slightly different
ways in each of the five modes.
When you have finished digitizing points, selecting any other menu or menu item will
turn off the display of the digitizer arm on the screen.
18.4.7
Digitize Menu
The Digitize menu contains the five modes in which the FaroArm operates. It also
contains the Project Onto Plane filter used to project digitized points onto a specified
plane.
931
Digitize menu
Create/Undo
In the Create/Undo mode a point is digitized by pressing the primary button. The
previous point can be deleted by pressing the secondary button.
Temp/Accept
In the Temp/Accept mode, press the primary button when a temporary point is to
be taken. Press the secondary button to permanently digitize that point.
Stream/Undo
In the Stream/Undo mode you can input a stream of points. You should set the
Stream Distance parameter before you use this mode. See Stream/Undo Settings,
page 923. Position the digitizer tip at the first point of the desired stream, and press
(hold down) the primary button. The first point will be digitized at that point. While
the primary button is held down, move the digitizer tip towards the next desired
point in the stream. When the specified distance has been traveled by the tip away
from the previous point, the next point is digitized. This process of digitizing points
at regular intervals continues until the primary button is released. To delete the
final point in the stream, press the secondary button.
Align Plane
Set the desired plane in the Align Plane Settings dialog box before you use this
mode. See Align Plane Settings, page 925. Place the digitizer tip at the desired
location. Press and hold down the primary button, then move the digitizer tip to the
desired location and orientation. When the angle between the alignment plane and
the current orientation of the tip falls within the specified tolerance, a point will be
digitized. Release the primary button, and then move to the next point to be
digitized if the point is acceptable. Otherwise, press the secondary button to delete
the point.
932
Locked Plane
Set up the Locked Plane environment in the Locked Plane Settings dialog box
before you use this mode. See Locked Plane Settings, page 924.
Define the initial plane in space corresponding to the first plane in the area to be
digitized. Define the number of planes and the distance between them.
After setting up the proper environment, begin the digitizing session by selecting
Locked Plane on the Digitize menu. A small dialog will appear on the screen, which
allows you to make all the multiple planes active, or to select an individual plane
among the set of planes.
Locked Plane Control dialog box
To begin taking points, position the digitizer tip near the first point to be digitized,
and then hold down the primary button. Move the digitizer tip to cross the defined
locked plane(s). When a plane is crossed by the tip, a point is digitized. Release
the primary button to stop taking points, and press the secondary button to delete
the previous point.
933
Project Onto Plane

Project Onto Plane is a filter that takes any point that is digitized and projects it
onto a specified plane in space. Use this option in conjunction with any of the five
digitizer modes.
18.5
INPUT DEVICES
SURFCAM supports all digitizers which use a WINTAB compatible driver. SURFCAM
also supports two input devices that make it easy and intuitive to rotate 3D models.
18.5.1
Digtab
The SURFCAM Digitizing ApplicationDigtabis a program designed to serve as an

interface between a digitizing tablet and SURFCAM. Digtab supports WinTab digitizer
drivers, the industry standard for digitizers in the Microsoft Windows environment.
Digtab enables you to use both the digitizer puck and the computer mouse. It is
suggested that you use the puck to input points and the mouse to select menu or
button commands.
Use the SURFCAM Configuration Tools utility to modify the SURFCAM.INI file so you
can use the Digtab. See The Input Device Tab, page 908.
Information on installing a digitizer and using the Digtab interface can be found in the
Digtab Help file, Digtab.hlp, found in the SURF2002 subfolder.
18.5.2
SpaceBall
SpaceBall is a registered Trademark of the Logitech Group.

The SpaceBall is a 3D input device that detects the slightest fingertip pressure applied
to it and resolves the pressure into X, Y, and Z translations and rotations of a 3D
image. This provides intuitive, interactive six degrees-of-freedom control of 3D
graphical images and objects.
Use the SURFCAM Configuration Tools utility to modify the SURFCAM.INI file so
you can use the SpaceBall. See The Input Device Tab, page 908.
More information on installing and using a SpaceBall is found in the SpaceBall help
file, Spacball.hlp, found in the SURF2002 subfolder.
18.5.3
SpaceMouse
SpaceMouse is a registered Trademark of the Logitech Group.
934
The SpaceMouse is a 3D input device that uses a cap, rather than a ball, to provide
interactive six degrees-of-freedom control of 3D graphical images.
Use the SURFCAM Configuration Tools utility to modify the SURFCAM.INI file so
you can use the Space Mouse. See The Input Device Tab, page 908.
Chapter 19 SURFCAM Verify
CHAPTER 19 SURFCAM VERIFY

Integrated Verify, page 935

Stand-alone SURFCAM Verify, page 950
Reverse Post, page 1048
PART 1: INTEGRATED VERIFY
19.1
INTRODUCTION
This Integrated Verify program runs in the SURFCAM window. It is an abbreviated

version of the stand-alone program, SURFCAM Verify, which runs in its own window.
To run the integrated version of Verify, first select the operation(s) to verify in the
Operations Tree of the NC Operations Manager.
NC Operations Manager dialog box
Then do one of the following to activate Integrated SURFCAM Verify:

1.
Run SURFCAM Verify

Click the Run SURFCAM Verify button on the toolbar to display the
integrated Verify menu in the upper right corner of the SURFCAM screen.
(Shortcut: F5)
936
2.
Chapter 19 SURFCAM Verify, Part 1: Integrated Verify
Run SURFCAM Verify in Auto Mode

Click the Run SURFCAM Verify in Auto Mode button on the toolbar, to
have Verify automatically enclose the part in a wireframe bounding box
and then begin the verification.
The Integrated Verify Menu and Toolbar

See Verify Menu Bar, page 938.
See Verify Toolbar, page 947.
See Tool Animation Speed, page 946 for the Slider Bar information.
Upgrades Available
1.
SURFCAM Verify PLUS is an upgrade that can be purchased. It is an enhanced

version of SURFCAM Verify.
u In this document a diamond will indicate that SURFCAM Verify PLUS is
required.
2.
G Code is an upgrade that can be purchased.

See Reverse Post, page 1048.
19.2
WIREFRAME MODE
It is in the Wireframe mode that you prepare for the verify simulation that will be done in
the Verify mode. When you first open Verify, it will be in the Wireframe mode.
In this mode you can create wireframe models of both the stock from which the part will
be cut and the fixture(s) that will hold the stock. You have two ways to create these
models:
1.
Click Model on the menu bar to display the Model menu.
2.
Click the Add Model button to display the Add/Modify Model dialog box.
These two methods differ in the sequence in which you choose the type of model and
the shape it will take. See Model Menu, page 939.
You can create two types of models: Stock or Fixture. They can be in the shape of a Box,
a Cylinder, or an STL Solid.
937
If it becomes necessary to delete a model, you must first activate the selection
mode by clicking the Select button on the toolbar. Then click the model to be
deleted. Then click Delete on the Model menu or press the Delete key.
Tip
In the Wireframe mode the SURFCAM screen control features

remain active. You can use View on the Status bar and the buttons
on the toolbar to arrange how the stock and fixtures will be
displayed during verification.
SURFCAM Toolbar and Status Bar
19.3
VERIFY MODE
A wireframe model of the stock must already exist before you can enter the Verify mode.
To change to Verify mode, click File > New > Verify or click the Verify button
on the toolbar. Verify automatically detects which buttonmill or latheto
display.
u With SURFCAM Verify PLUS, you can choose to click File > New > Turbo
or click the Turbo buttonmill or latheon the toolbar.
See File Menu, page 938.

When Verify enters the Verify mode, the wireframe model will be changed to a solid
model.
The orientation and look of the solid model can be controlled with commands on the View
menu. It can be rotated and it can be made to appear translucent. See View Menu, page
942.
None of the display control buttons on the SURFCAM toolbar are active in the Verify
mode, nor is the View button on the Status menu.
Click Verify > Start or click the Start button to begin verification. The simulation of
the tool cutting material from the part will begin.
Click Verify > Stop or click the Stop button to interrupt the verification.
See Verify Menu, page 943.
u With SURFCAM Verify PLUS, you will have access to the Inspect menu which has
commands used to analyze the machined work piece. See u Inspect Menu, page 945.
938
19.4
VERIFY MENU BAR
19.4.1
File Menu
New
Begin a new simulation. You must have already created a
wireframe model of the material around your part.
The wireframe material model will become a solid model
and various simulation process buttons will become
active.
File Menu
Verify
Click Verify to change the wireframe model to a solid model in preparation
for the simulation. Then click Verify > Start or click the Start button to
show the simulation of the tool removing material from the part.
Turbo
Click Turbo to prepare for the Turbo simulation. Then click Verify > Start
or click the Start button to quickly display the finished part. The tool
motion will not be displayed.
The material will be removed in the background and the final part with material
removed will be displayed at the end.
Wireframe
Select Wireframe to return a solid model to a wireframe model.
Switching to this mode implies you are preparing for a new simulation session. All
models of fixtures and the workpiece are displayed in wireframe. All preparation
for a simulation (verification) is done in this mode.
Exit
Exit Verify and return to SURFCAM.
19.4.2
939
Model Menu
This menu is used to create and delete models of the

material or stock.
Stock, Fixture
Use the following commands to create simulated
material as a rectangular box, a cylindrical tube or
an STL Solid.
Box
Click Box to display the Create Box dialog box.
Model Menu
If you use the toolbar button instead of the menu, the Add/Modify Model
dialog box will be displayed.
You can then choose stock or fixture. Then if you choose box, the parameters
will be the same as in the Create Box dialog box.
Add/Modify Model dialog box

and Create Box dialog box
Corner 1
This is the corner with the smallest X, Y, and Z coordinate values.
Corner 2
This is the diagonally opposite corner (largest X, Y, and Z coordinates).
940
Bounding Box / Cylinder

Instead of entering values for the two corners, check Toolpath or Geometry
and click the Use Bounding Box button to have Verify calculate the values
of the coordinates of the opposite corners of a box that fits either the toolpath
or the part geometry.
Offset
The Offset box will be available for you to enter a value for the offset from
the actual corners of the part. This gives a buffer of material around the
part.
Cylinder
Click Cylinder to display the Create Cylinder dialog box.
You can then choose stock or fixture. Then if you choose cylinder, the
parameters will be the same as in the Create Cylinder dialog box.

and Create Cylinder dialog box
To identify a cylindrical tube of material, enter its diameter and the coordinates
of the end points of its axis.
Axis 1
The end point with the smallest values for the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
941
Axis 2
The end point with the largest values for the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
Bounding Cylinder/Diameter
Instead of entering values for Axis 1 and Axis 2, you can click the Use
Bounding Cylinder button to have Verify calculate the coordinates of the end
points of the axis and the diameter of the cylinder.
STL Solid
Click STL Solid to display an Open dialog box for you to choose an STL file.
You can then choose stock or fixture. Then if you choose STL Solid, you can
browse for the file you want to open.

and Open STL file dialog box
Stock Color
Change the color of the wireframe and solid model. The Tool Color box containing
10 color patches will be displayed.
Delete
First click the Select mode button. Then click the desired item. Then click the
Delete command to delete the item.
942
Delete All
Delete all Stocks or all Fixtures in the drawing.
19.4.3
View Menu
u Lathe View
The Lathe View options are used to change the view of a Lathe window. The 2D
and 3D options let you switch between 2D and 3D modes. The 3/4 View option is
used to switch a 3D view to a 3/4 view.
The View is automatically set to 3/4 View before verifying an ID turning operation.
View NC Errors
Start the generation of an error log during simulation. If there are any errors, they
will be displayed in an error window at the end of the simulation.
Stock Translucent
Make the solid model translucent.
Rotate Solid
Activate model rotation on the screen. You can rotate the model by clicking and
dragging.
Zoom
Zoom Window
Zoom Window will activate a rubber
band effect that you can use to change
the viewing window.
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Fit
You can zoom in or out on the model or
fit it to the viewing window.
u Deep Zoom
Deep Zoom activates an expandable

3D box used to zoom in on a portion of the model.
Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse to capture a portion of the
model. When you release the button, the Deep Zoom view box containing the
portion of the model you selected will be displayed in the viewing window.
Open SURFCAM Verify App
Open the stand-alone version of Verify.
19.4.4
943
Verify Menu
The Verify menu contains commands to control the

verification process.
Model
Switch to the different Verify modes.
Animation
The simulation of the tool removing material
is displayed on the screen as it occurs.
During the simulation or at the end, you can
change the view by rotating or zooming. The
simulation display will be reprocessed completely
before the new view is updated. Therefore, on
large jobs, changing views can be very time
consuming. It is recommended that you set the
view before processing when you use the
Animation command.
Verify Menu
u Solid
The simulation of the tool path and the rendering of the cut part will be
performed in the background. The representation of the cut part will be
displayed at the end of the simulation process.
During the background simulation or at the end, you can change the view by
rotating or zooming. After you change the view, there is a short delay while the
new view is produced. The simulation display will not be reprocessed so
changing the view is much faster in Solid mode than in Animation mode.
u Both
Put the simulation in the Animation + Solid mode.
This combines the Animation and Solid modes. The simulated material
removal will be displayed and rotation and zoom view changes will be
completed quickly.
Go To
The Go To options are used to cause the simulation to stop or pause at certain
points in the code.
944
Tool Display
Click Verify > Tool Display to control how
the tool will be displayed during verification.
Or click the tool display buttons on the
toolbar.
On
Translucent
Off
Verify > Tool Display
Start
Start the simulation.
Stop
Stop the simulation.
Single Step
Go through the simulation step by step.
Click Single Step instead of Start or after clicking Stop. A tool move will be
displayed after each click. Single Step can be used in both Verify and Turbo
modes.
Fast Forward
Speed up the display of the tool during the simulation.
Rewind
Rewind will become active at the end of the simulation or after the Stop button has
been clicked.
Click Rewind to return to the beginning of the simulation. The material model will
be returned to its original solid form.
19.4.5
945
u Inspect Menu
The Inspect menu is used to compare the machined part

with the designed part in either the DSN or the STL
format. You can also set the tolerances used in these
comparisons. The commands on this menu are available
only if you have purchased the Verify Plus upgrade.
The first three commands become active only after you
turn a wireframe model into a solid model which you do by
clicking
1.
the Turbo button or
2.
the Verify button,
Inspect Menu
then the Solid button.
Tolerances
Surface Tolerance
This is used to create STL
polygons when an STL file is
created from a DSN file.
Comparison Tolerance
This is the tolerance that is used
when the design part is
compared to the machined part.
Tolerances dialog box
Material found more than this distance above a design surface is recognized as
rest material. The absence of material more than this distance below a design
surface is recognized as a gouge.
Load Design Part as STL
Display the Open file box to select an STL file to compare with the machined part.
Transfer Design Part
Transfer the DSN file into Verify to compare with the machined part.
Compare With Design
This command becomes active after you select either
1.
Load Design Part as STL or
2.
Transfer Design Part.
This command puts Verify in the comparison mode.
946
Click the Start button or the Fast Forward button to begin the simulation. When the
simulation is complete, the cut part will be displayed in three colors to show the
results of the comparison. Red indicates gouged areas. Blue is used to show
excess material. Grey is used to show the areas of the part that are within the
comparison tolerance.
Extract Rest Curves
Extract boundary curves around areas that contain excess material and transfer
them to the design. This command becomes active after you select Compare
With Design.
19.4.6
Options Menu
The Options menu contains commands that enable you

to control simulation performance.
Edit Tool List
The Edit Tool List dialog box will be displayed. Click
the tab for Mill Tools or Lathe Tools to see the list of
tools.
Color
Double-click on a Tool Color to display a Tool
Color dialog box. Click on a color to choose it.
Options Menu
Edit Tool List dialog box
Tool Animation Speed

You can set Tool Animation Speed to Low, Medium, or High.
A Slider Bar appears at the bottom right corner of the Integrated Verify
Menu and Toolbar. Set the animation speed by moving the tab on the
bar.
947
Resolution
You can choose Automatic, Coarse, Medium, or Fine.
Beep When Error
Beeps will be sounded when errors are made during simulation.
Log NC Errors
Click to generate a log of errors.
19.4.7
Help Menu
Choose the Help menu to open the Help File index, to see the About SURFCAM
Verify box, or to see information related to upgrading to SURFCAM Verify PLUS.
19.5
VERIFY TOOLBAR
The table in this section displays the buttons on the toolbar and describes their function.
The function of most buttons can also be accomplished by selecting an item from one of
the menus. Menu commands are shown in the second column.
BUTTON
DESCRIPTION
Menu: File > Wireframe.
Wireframe
Put Verify into the Wireframe mode (the default mode).

See Wireframe, page 938.
Select
Enter the Select mode. Then click on a material model to

highlight it. You can delete the model with the Delete key
or the Delete command on the Model menu.
Menu: Model > Stock or Model > Fixture
Add Model
See Stock, Fixture, page 939.

Menu: File > New > Verify
Verify
Enter the Mill or Lathe Verify mode.

See Verify, page 938.
Menu: File > New > Turbo
Turbo
Enter the Mill or Lathe Turbo Verify mode.

See Turbo, page 938.
948
BUTTON
DESCRIPTION
Menu: Verify > Rewind
Rewind
See Rewind, page 944.

Menu: Verify > Start
Start
Becomes active after you click the Verify or Turbo

buttons. Click to begin the simulation.
Menu: Verify > Single Step
Single Step
Display the simulation one step at a time.

Menu: Verify > Fast Forward
Fast Forward
Increase the speed of the display of the tool cutting the

material.
Menu: Verify > Stop
Stop
Stop the simulation in both the Verify and Turbo modes.

Menu: Verify > Model > Animation
Animation
Put the simulation in the Animation mode. The tool will be

shown removing material from the part.
Menu: Verify > Model > Solid
Solid
Put the simulation in the Solid mode. The tool will not be
shown removing material from the part.
Menu: Verify > Model > Both
Animation + Solid
Put the simulation in the Animation + Solid mode.

Menu: Verify > Tool Display > On
Solid Tool
Display the tool as a solid.

Menu: Verify > Tool Display > Translucent
Translucent Tool
Display a translucent tool.

Menu: Verify > Tool Display > Off
Tool Off
Do not display the tool.

BUTTON
DESCRIPTION
Menu: View > Stock > Translucent
Translucent Stock
Display the stock as translucent.

Menu: View > Zoom > Deep Zoom
Deep Zoom
See Deep Zoom, page 942.

Menu: View > Open SURFCAM Verify App.
Stand-alone Verify Program
Run the Stand-alone program which runs in its own

window.
949
950
Chapter 19 SURFCAM Verify, Part 2: Stand-alone SURFCAM Verify
PART 2: STAND-ALONE SURFCAM VERIFY
19.6
STAND-ALONE VERIFY
The stand-alone SURFCAM Verify program was developed by Predator Software Inc.
Copyright 1994-2001, Predator Software, Inc.

Portland, Oregon. All Rights Reserved.
SURFCAM Verify PLUS

SURFCAM Verify PLUS is an upgrade that can be purchased. It is an enhanced
version of SURFCAM Verify.
u In this document a diamond will indicate that SURFCAM Verify PLUS is required.
G Code
G Code is an upgrade that can be purchased.
19.6.1
CMS (Common Model Structure)
CMS is a new modeling technique, developed by Predator Software Inc., with

characteristics that ideally suit the requirements of CNC program verification and
simulation.
CMS is the term given to the imbedded technology employed within Verify. This
technology is presented to the user in the form of views. Each view is displayed in a
window and has certain attributes that can be set by the software or user to provide
optimal performance for a given task. For instance, an animated view will require
different attributes from a solid view. Verify sets many of these attributes
automatically. Other attributesdepending on your version of Verifylike animation,
solid, model resolution, etc., can be set by the user.
Verify is constructed from several modules.
19.6.2
Machining Simulation & Modeling
Verify provides animation, showing tools cutting the part, and solid model
representations of the machined component that can be inspected as if it was the real
part.
Verify can model machining processes by all supported machine tool types and can
combine milling and turning operations on the same part.
951
SURFCAM Verify can be operated in four modes:
Animation
u Solid
u Animation + Solid
u Turbo
19.6.2.1
Animation
When in animation only mode, Verify produces animated simulation of the

machined part. The resulting screen images are not solid model based and
therefore have limitations regarding accuracy and the ability to change views.
Multiple animated windows can be opened, each having different view attributes.
View attributes such as zoom settings, view angle, light source, etc., can be set for
each window. If these settings are changed after some processing has taken
place, the job will reprocess completely before any new view update. On long jobs,
this can be very time consuming, so it is recommended that animated only views
be set prior to processing.
Animated only views cannot be measured in any way, but they do provide a useful
visual check that the program is doing what was intended.
The main advantage of running animated only views is the small amount of
memory used. This makes this mode ideal for users with limited computer system
resources.
19.6.2.2
Solid
u Solid
Verify solid views provide solid model representations of the machined part
without providing animated simulation. While processing, no changes in the model
are displayed until processing is stopped. Only when processing has stopped,
either by manual intervention or automatic stop controls, does the model view
change to show the state of the part.
Multiple solid views can be opened but this is not usually necessary, as a single
solid view can be rotated, zoomed, panned, sectioned and measured quickly at
any time. The window view angle and light source can be changed with the mouse
by dragging the part in the model window.
After changing view attributes, there is a short delay while the new view is
produced. The job is not reprocessed so, regardless of the number of CNC
program lines processed, the time to change views is constant for each job.
952
Verifys solid model resolution can be changed to suit the conditions for each Job.
Higher model resolution requires more memory and longer processing times but
on physically large jobs that include fine detail, a higher resolution may be
required. For most jobs, the SURFCAM Verify default settings will provide a good
combination of speed, resolution and memory use.
The resolution of Verifys model does not affect the accuracy of measurement. The
resolution does impact image quality on jobs containing fine detail, but this can be
negated by using the Deep Zoom capability. Deep Zoom allows selected areas of
the model to be refined to bring out detail that may have been hidden in the normal
view. Each Deep Zoom view is shown in a separate window and consists of a
miniature model.
Model resolution affects the accuracy of tool collision detection, but extreme
accuracy in this area is not generally a desirable thing. Allowing a tool to rapid
close to the part within thousandths of an inch or hundredths of a millimeter without
indicating a tool collision is not a good idea.
Memory requirement for solid views is based on the physical dimensions of the job
and the model resolution. When processing, you will notice that the memory
requirement remains almost constant, making SURFCAM Verify the ideal solution
for modeling large jobs.
19.6.2.3
Animation + Solid
u Animation + Solid
Animation + Solid views provide the best of both worlds. Animated simulation of
the part being cut is shown, while solid model data of the part is being stored.
Animated and solid views use more memory than either of the views shown
separately but, in most cases, this is not a problem. Combining animated and solid
views in a single window does allow the fast dynamic rotation and zooms of
animated views. All measurement and view controls associated with solid only
views are available.
19.6.2.4
Turbo Solid Modeling for 3-axis Surface Milling
u Turbo Solid Modeling for 3-axis Surface Milling
Turbo is a second generation Turbo solid modeling system for parts made from
complex surfaces. Turbo offers a supreme combination of speed and accuracy for
modeling certain 3-axis milled parts. Turbo does not support all tool shapes and
machining operations are restricted to the top face of the part only. However,
Turbo is the perfect modeling system for mold & die manufacturing and similar
industries. Turbo models can be zoomed and dynamically rotated.
953
CMM (Coordinate Measuring Machine) inspection includes very powerful

Advanced Inspection (STL Compare) capability. STL Compare uses STL (Stereo
Lithography) files to compare the machined model with the original design model.
As with the other models, Deep Zoom can also be used with Turbo. Virtual CMM
measurement is possible, but feature measurement is not.
19.6.3
Machine Tools
Verify supports 3-axis, 4-axis and 5-axis milling machines and 2-axis turning
machines. CNC programs for most CNC controllers and machine tool configurations
can be converted into accurate models of the finished part.
19.6.4
Tooling
Verify supports a wide range of standard tool types for both milling and turning
applications.
In addition, a tool geometry language called NTG (New Tool Geometry) is provided
for you to create your own complex tool and tool holder shapes for both milling and
turning jobs. See NTG Language, page 1016 for an explanation of NTG.
STANDARD MILLING TOOL SHAPES
STANDARD TURNING CUTTING INSERT
SUPPORTED
SHAPES
Flat ended tools

Drills
Ball end tools
Bull end tools
Radius form tools
Chamfer tools
Dovetail tools
Tapered ball end tools
Tapered bull end tools
Spherical tools
19.6.5
Diamond tips
Triangular tips
Square tips
Pentagonal tips
Hexagonal tips
Grooving tools
Button tipped tools
Threading tools
Drills
Stock
Verify allows the user to create stock, fixtures and clamps from simple geometric
primitives. These primitives can be assembled into complex stock and fixture
shapes.
954

Alternatively, for the CAD user, SURFCAM Verify can accept CAD geometry in the form of STL files
for the creation of stock and fixture assemblies.
19.6.6
CNC Program Translators and Reverse Posts
Verify processes all input CNC data to merge the tool path information with tooling
and stock data. Verify supports two methods of pre-processing: translators and
reverse posts. Translators cannot be configured. Reverse posts can be configured by
anyone capable of editing an ASCII file. Both translators and reverse posts are unique
for each supported CNC controller or machine type and are designed to handle the
following processes.
1.
Checking that arc end points are calculated correctly (within CNC controller tolerances).
2.
CNC program syntax checking.
3.
Rotary moves that exceed rotary axis limits.
Translators are binary files and are stored in three folders. Translators for milling
applications are stored in a subfolder named ..\RPOST\MILL\MCF with a file
extension of .MCF. Lathe translators use a file extension of .LCF and are stored in the
..\RPOST\LATHE\LCF subfolder. Advanced translators for multi-axis machining are
stored in the ..\RPOST\MILL-5\A5F subfolder.
Reverse posts are ASCII files and are stored in three folders. Translators for milling
applications are stored in a subfolder named ..\RPOST\MILL with a file extension of
.RPM. Lathe translators use a file extension of .RPL and are stored in the ..\RPOST\
LATHE subfolder. Advanced translators for multi-axis machining use a file extension
of .RP5 and are stored in the ..\RPOST\MILL-5 subfolder.
19.7
GETTING STARTED
19.7.1
Start SURFCAM Verify
The SURFCAM installation routine installs all SURFCAM Verify program files and
adds SURFCAM Verify to the Windows Start menu.
From the Start button
1.
2.
3.
Point to SURFCAM.
4.
Click the SURFCAM Verify command.
If you have the SURFCAM Verify icon on your desktop, double-click it to open Verify.
19.7.2
955
Screen Layout
Main Window
The Main Window is an area of screen where the model windows and various
dialog boxes and information panels are displayed. The modeling systems,
Animation, Solid, Animation+Solid, and Turbo are represented in one or more
windows within the Main Window. These model windows can be repositioned and
resized by the user or automatically Tiled or Cascaded using the standard
Windows commands on the Window menu.
Windows
Each window contains a view of the model. The settings for each window can be
changed independently. Each can have its own view angle, light source, tool
colors, zoom and cross-section settings. To change any of these settings, make
the window active by placing the mouse cursor inside the window and clicking the
left mouse button.
Typical SURFCAM Verify window
19.7.2.1
View Rotation
Use the left mouse button to rotate the view of the model.
1.
Click on the model in a Verify window using the left mouse button.
956
2.
While keeping the left mouse button depressed, drag the model view around
to the desired view. In the case of Turbo and animation views, the model
image will change to a wire-frame representation. In the case of a solid view,
the image resolution will reduce while the left mouse button is depressed.
3.
When the desired view angle is obtained, release the left mouse button.
There will be a short delay while the image regenerates for the new view.
Note
The regeneration time for an animated-only view will take longer than
other views.
u If many lines of tool path data have been processed, you will find it quicker to
change to solid view, rotate the solid view, and then change back to the
animated view.
19.7.2.2
Shortcut Menu
Use the right mouse button to zoom, pan, change views, or change the light
source.
1.
Click on the model in a Verify window using the right mouse button.
2.
Select the desired command and specify any secondary mouse clicks.
Note
The regeneration time for an animated-only view will take longer than
other views.
u If many lines of tool path data have been processed, you will find it quicker to
change to solid view, change the light source, and then change back to the
animated view.
19.7.2.3
Status Bar
The Verify Status Bar is permanently displayed at the bottom of the SURFCAM
Verify window.
The main function of the status bar is to show the name and path of the NC or APT
file being processed. This is useful when you are processing multiple programs.
The Status Bar also shows the state of the Num Lock, Scroll Lock and Caps Lock
keyboard keys and a progress bar and cancel button associated with certain
SURFCAM Verify processes.
19.7.3
Toolbars
Most Verify features can be accessed by clicking the appropriate button on a toolbar.
Click Options > Toolbars and click on a toolbar name to

toggle its display on or off.
Note
Toolbars can be dragged to various screen

positions. First click on the region around the
buttons.
1. File Bar
See File Bar, page 958.

2. Edit Bar
Options > Toolbars
See Edit Bar, page 958.

3. Process (VCR) Bar
See Process Bar (VCR Buttons), page 959.

4. View Bar
See View Bar, page 960.

5. Inspection Bar
See Inspection Bar, page 962.
957
958
6. Tool (Panel) Bar
See Tool (Panel) Bar, page 963.
19.7.3.1
File Bar
File Bar
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Open the Job setup dialog for creating and editing Job information.
A Job is a setup for a particular machining operation or sequence
of operations.
Job
Print details of the current Job.

Print
Open a new Verify window. *

Mill
Lathe
Verify
u Open a new Turbo window. *
Mill
Lathe
u Turbo
* If Job processing has not been started, the window will open showing the stock
only. If the Job has been processed completely or in part within another window,
the window will display the Job in the state at which processing has been stopped.
19.7.3.2
Edit Bar
Edit Bar
BUTTON
Translucent
Animation
Solid
Animation
+ Solid
Solid Tool
Translucent
Tool
Tool Off
959
FUNCTION
The Translucent stock and fixtures button toggles the state of an
active window between a translucent and solid image.
The animation button switches the state of an active window to
animation simulation mode only.
Switching to and from Animation Mode can take a long time if you are
working in zoomed views or if many lines of tool path data have been
processed.
u The Solid button switches the state of an active window to Solid
model mode.
u The Animated & Solid button switches the state of an active Verify
window to Animated and Solid.
The Solid Tool button displays a solid tool and tool holder during
animation.
The Translucent Tool button displays a translucent tool and tool
holder during animation.
The Tool Off button disables the tool and tool holder display during
animation.
Click the Tool colors button to open the tool colors dialog box. You can
specify a range of tool colors, etc. See Tool, Stock & Fixture Colors,
Tool Colors page 1020.
19.7.3.3
Process Bar (VCR Buttons)
Process Bar
960
BUTTON
Rewind
Play
FUNCTION
The Rewind button returns Verify to the start of the program so you
can reprocess the Job from the beginning.
The play button starts processing the Job until the end of the CNC
program or processing is stopped.
The single step button processes a single block of CNC program with
every mouse click. This option works well when the CNC Panel is
Single Step enabled. The CNC Panel will display each block of CNC program as
it is processed.
Fast
Forward
The fast forward button overrides the current tool animation speed to
the fastest setting.
Click this button to stop the verification process.

Stop
19.7.3.4
View Bar
View Bar
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Click the Zoom Window button to zoom into an active window.
Zoom
Window
Zoom In
See * Caution and * Multiple.

The Zoom In button doubles the scale of the active window. The
Zoom In button can be used multiple times to zoom into already
zoomed area.
BUTTON
Zoom Out
961
FUNCTION
The Zoom Out button halves the scale of the active window. The
Zoom Out button can be used multiple times to show more area
outside of the current area.
Zoom
Previous
Zoom Fit
Pan
View
The Zoom Previous button returns to the prior view within a

window. The zoom previous button can be used multiple times to
return to an original view.
The Zoom Fit button calculates the extents of the stock and the
fixtures and fills the screen with the entire view within a window.
See * Caution.
Click the Pan button to pan an active window across the enclosed
model. Panning is faster than unzooming and re-zooming.
The View button opens the combined Rotate / Light Source control
window.
See View, page 1019.
The Isometric View 1-4 buttons change the active
window to the specified view.
Isometric View 1-4
Standard Views
Axis Icon
See * Caution.
The Standard View buttons change the active window to
the top, bottom, left, right, front, and back views.
See * Caution.
Click the Axis Icon button to toggle the display of the axis icon
within the active window.
* Caution Using this command in Animation Only view may take a long time.
* Multiple This button can be used multiple times.
962
19.7.3.5
Inspection Bar
Inspection Bar
BUTTON
FUNCTION
u The Deep Zoom button is used with SURFCAM Verify models. It

allows the user to select an area of specific interest on the part and
Deep Zoom
locally refine the model to give enhanced detail.
When the button is selected, the user can use the mouse to drag
a 3D box around the area of interest by picking the center of the 3D
box, holding the left-hand mouse button depressed and dragging
the window to the chosen size. The first mouse click must be made
with the cursor on the surface of the job.
A new window will be opened showing the zoomed view. If the 3D
window is large, the degree of refinement is less than if the window
is small. The time taken to produce the Deep Zoom view depends
on the number of tool passes through the selected volume.
X-Section
Inspect
Click the X-Section button to perform cross sectioning on SURFCAM

Verify models. See Section, page 1022.
Click the Inspect button to open the Feature and CMM measurement
dialog box for active windows. See Measurement, page 1023.
Click the STL Compare button to open the STL compare dialog box
for an active Turbo window. STL compare is often referred to as
STL
Advanced Inspection. See Comparison with Design Model, page
Compare 1025.
3/4 View
2D/3D View
u The 3/4 View button toggles a 3D Lathe window between full 3D

and 3/4 views.
u The 2D/3D button toggles the view in a Turbo II Lathe window
between 2D and 3D modes.
19.7.3.6
963
Tool (Panel) Bar
Tool (Panel) Bar
BUTTON
Control Panel
Status Panel
CNC Panel
FUNCTION
Click this button to toggle the display of the Control Panel on or off.
See Control Panel, page 963.
Click this button to toggle the display of the Status Panel on or off. See
Status Panel, page 965.
Click this button to toggle the display of the CNC Panel on or off. See
CNC Panel, page 967.
Click this button to open the error log window for the current Job. If no
processing errors have been found, this button will be inactive. See
Error Log Error Log, page 1028.
19.7.3.6.1
Control Panel
Click Options > Control Panel or click the button on the Tool (Panel) bar
to display the Control Panel.
The Control Panel controls the processing of a Job and shows the state of
some of the optional controls. The control Panel can be positioned anywhere
on the SURFCAM Verify desktop or docked at the top or the bottom of the
screen.
Control Panel
Stop Control
Stop control check boxes are used to automatically stop SURFCAM Verify
processing on the occurrence of one or more of the following events:
964
None
When none is selected, all other Stop Control check boxes are unchecked and
processing continues until stopped manually using the Stop button or until the
Job is completed.
Tool Crash
Selecting this check box instructs SURFCAM Verify to stop processing when any
type of tool collision is detected.
Tool Change
The Tool change check box instructs SURFCAM Verify to halt processing when
a tool change NC code, M06 for example, is detected.
Program Stop
Processing is stopped when a program stop typically a M00 code is detected in
the CNC program.
Optional Stop
Processing is stopped when an optional stop typically a M01 code is detected in
the CNC program.
Program Change
In those cases where multiple CNC programs are included in a single Job,
selecting this check box tells SURFCAM Verify to halt processing at the end of a
CNC program, prior to the next CNC program starting.
Step Size
Checking the Step Size box halts processing after a specified number of blocks
have been processed. The number of blocks is defined by entering a value into
the Step Size box adjacent to the Step Size check box.
Holder Control
The holder control section controls how SURFCAM Verify animates tool
holders and checks for collisions between tool holders and stock.
Check Holder
The Holder Check box switches tool holder and tool shank collision checking ON
or OFF. When in the OFF state, no collisions of tool shank or holder will be
detected.
As this feature slows processing down, those users using slower computer
equipment should uncheck this box unless holder and shank collision checking
is required.
Tool Holder On
The Tool Holder On check box is used to switch on tool holders and tool shanks
in Preview animation sessions. When in the ON state, Preview animation will run
considerably slower, so this box should be left unchecked unless visualization of
the tool holder and shank is required. This check box is not available if the Holder
check box is unchecked.
965
Tool Animation
The animation speed slider bar controls the speed of SURFCAM Verifys
animation. The slider is operable at any time when an animation window is
open. Check boxes are provided for easy selection of Slow, Medium, and
Fast speeds.
19.7.3.6.2
Status Panel
Click Options > Status Panel or click the button on the Tool (Panel) bar to
display the Status Panel.
The Status Panel can be docked at the sides of the Main Window, or left floating
within the Main Window.
Tool No.
This is the programmed number of the tool that is
cutting. For instance, T02 would be displayed here
when the tool T02 in the current NC program is cutting.
Coolant
Shows the status of the machine tools coolant supply
at any time during processing. Coolant is shown to be
either ON or OFF.
Mill Spindle
The Mill Spindle window shows the state of the spindle
during processing of milling jobs. The Mill spindle is
shown to be either ON or OFF.
Lathe Spindle
The Lathe Spindle window shows the state of spindle
during processing of milling jobs. The lathe spindle is
shown to be either On or OFF.
CNC Line No.
The Line Number window shows the block number
being processed at any time. In the event that
processing is stopped, the Line Number window shows
the last block that was processed. The line number
does not necessarily indicate the NC line number as
shown with a N address (N1050 for instance). CNC
files can contain comments that have no N address
such as: (Tool no. 101 - 10mm drill).
SURFCAM Verify considers this to be a block and
increments the block count accordingly.
Status Panel
966
Cutter Comp.
The Cutter Compensation box shows the state of tool cutter compensation
at any time during processing. The default state is <none> but this will
change to a value LEFT or RIGHT if cutter compensation is switched on by
the CNC program. (G41 or G42 for instance) A G40 in the CNC program will
switch cutter compensation to <none>.
Feed Rate
The Feed Rate box indicates the active feed rate at any time during
processing. The display shows a numeric value in the units selected for the
Job.
MAT. Removed
During processing, SURFCAM Verify calculates the volume of material
removed by the cutting process, and displays that value in this box.
Cycle Time
SURFCAM Verify calculates the true machining cycle time as a Job is being
processed. This cycle time is shown in the Cycle Time box at any time
during processing.
RAM Used
To assist the user to identify when system performance degradation is due
to insufficient computer memory, the memory used during processing is
shown in the Memory Used box.
In addition, SURFCAM Verify can show error messages when it detects that
system degradation will occur if certain selected commands are allowed to
continue. The user is given the choice to continue or cancel the operation.
Errors
If tool collisions are detected, the number of errors found is shown in the
Error box. If errors are evident, click the Errors button on the Toolbar to
display the list of errors with details of their cause. See Error Counter, page
1028.
Tool position (X, Y, Z, A, B, C (I, J, K) Display))
The tool Position display shows the position of the tool tip in relation to the
stock origin. The display updates as each tool move is processed.
If NC program data is being processed, angular positions are shown in
degrees for each rotary axis. If APT or other similar data files are processed,
I, J & K tool vectors are displayed.
Job Completed
The Job completed progress bar shows how Job processing has
progressed. When the bar is filled with the shaded bar, the Job is complete.
19.7.3.6.3
967
CNC Panel
Click Options > CNC Panel or click the button on the Tool (Panel) bar to
display the CNC Panel.
The CNC Panel shows the NC program scrolling as it is being processed. As
each NC program line is processed it is highlighted. When processing stops,
the NC line that was last processed is shown highlighted.
CNC Panel
Leaving the CNC Panel open slows down processing, particularly when
processing a Turbo model. It is therefore recommended that the CNC Panel be
closed unless it is needed.
19.7.4
Menus
19.7.4.1
File Menu
Open
Click File > Open or click the Open (Job) button
on the File Bar to open the Job setup dialog box
for creating and editing Job information. A Job is a
setup for a particular machining operation or sequence
of operations.
New
Verify
Open a new Verify window.
Turbo
Open a new Turbo window.
Close
This command will close the active model window.
Close All
File Menu
968
This command will close all open model windows.

Print Setup
This command will open the Windows Printer Set-up dialog. For more
information, consult your Windows manual.
Print Preview
This command prints the Job details to screen for review prior to printing.
Print
Click File > Print or click the Print button on the File bar to print details of
the current job.
Export
Click File > Export to display a list of
supported export file formats. Selecting a
format will open a dialog box that will request
a file name and any variables associated with
the file format chosen.
Exported models can be imported back into
SURFCAM Verify as stock for further
operations.
Last opened file list
Recently opened Jobs will be listed above the Exit command. To re-open one
of these Jobs, click the file name.
Exit
Click File > Exit to close the SURFCAM Verify program.
19.7.4.2
Edit Menu
Model
Animation
See Animation, page 959.
u Solid
See Solid, page 959.
u Animation + Solid
See Animation + Solid, page 959.
Translucent
See Translucent, page 968.
Copy to Clipboard
Copy the contents of the current window to the clipboard.
Edit Menu
969
Tool Display
See Edit Bar, page 958.
Colors
Click Edit > Colors to display the Tool Colors
dialog box. See Tool, Stock & Fixture Colors,
page 1020.
Background Color
Click Edit >
Background Color
to display a Color
dialog box.
Choose a
background color
for all open
windows. By
default the
background color
will be
automatically
saved when you
exit Verify.
Tool Colors dialog box
Preferences
Click Edit > Preferences to display the Settings dialog box so you can change
system defaults. See Preferences and Defaults, page 972.
Machines
Click Edit > Machines to display a list of machines. You can add a machine or
edit machine properties. See Machine Setup, page 979.
19.7.4.3
View Menu
The View menu commands are also on the View bar. See sections indicated.
970
Zoom Previous, page 961

Zoom Fit, page 961
Zoom In, page 960.
Zoom Out, page 961
Zoom Window, page 960
Pan, page 961
View, page 961 and View, page 1019
Isometric View 1-4, page 961
Standard Views, page 961
View Menu
Axis Icon, page 961
19.7.4.4
Process Menu
Several of the Process menu commands are on the Process bar.

Start
See Play, page 960.
Process Menu
Stop
Stop the Simulation.
Single Step
See Single Step, page 960.
Fast Forward
See Fast Forward, page 960.
Rewind
See Rewind, page 960.
Index Part
The Index Part command launches the indexing dialogs to facilitate manual
indexing of the part at any time. More information relating to manual indexing
can be found in the Job Set-up section of this manual.
971
Reset Origin
Reset Origin opens a small dialog that enables the Program Origin to be
repositioned at any time during processing. The values entered are X, Y & Z
absolute distances from the Machine Datum. Resetting the program origin in
this way is normally associated with a programmed stop in the CNC program.
19.7.4.5
Inspection Menu
Most of the Inspection menu commands can be found on the Inspection bar.
Deep Zoom
See Deep Zoom, page 962.
Section
See X-Section, page 962.
Inspection
See Inspect, page 962.
Compare
See STL Compare, page 962.
3/4 VIEW
See 3/4 View, page 962.
2D 3D
See 2D/3D View, page 962.
Inspection Menu
19.7.4.6
Options Menu
Several of the Options menu commands can be found on the Tool (Panel) bar.
Options Menu
Upgrade
Click Options > Upgrade to display the
Licenses dialog box from which you can
check the status of your Verify license.
Control Panel
Click Options > Control Panel to toggle its
display on or off. See Control Panel, page
963.
Status Panel
Click Options > Status Panel to toggle its
display on or off. See Status Panel, page
965.
972
CNC Panel
Click Options > CNC Panel to toggle its display on or off. See CNC
Panel, page 967.
Error Log
See Error Log, page 963.
Toolbar Size
Choose small, medium, or large size toolbar buttons. Typically, you should be
using small buttons on low-resolution displays and large buttons on highresolution displays.
Toolbars
See Toolbars, page 956.
Graphics Library
If you are using a computer fitted with a good quality OpenGL graphics
accelerator card, we recommend that you use the OpenGL option. Otherwise,
use Fast.
19.7.4.7
Windows Menu
These are standard Windows commands.
19.7.4.8
Help Menu
The Help command provides access to SURFCAM Verifys online help.

Contents
Click Contents to display a window showing a list of help topics with hypertext
links to corresponding help sections.
About SURFCAM Verify
Select About SURFCAM Verify to display an information window containing the
version number, copyright notice and SIM number.
19.7.5
Preferences and Defaults
Click Edit > Preferences to display the Settings dialog box. Use this to change
Preferences and system default settings.
The default settings are set by us to provide an acceptable model resolution for typical
Jobs.
973
Settings dialog box
Language
The Language list box will display a list of supported languages. The default is
English_US (American English). Select a language from the list to change all
SURFCAM Verify screen text to that language. Screen text is held in editable text
files in the ..\SYSTEM folder. These files have a file extension of STR. The
Language list box shows a list of all .STR files.
Note
If you change the language and want to change to a different language,

you might find it easier to use the shortcuts: ALT, E, P to go through the
same process.
Default CNC Editor

SURFCAM Verify defaults to using PEditor. However, another editor can be used.
To configure SURFCAM Verify to use another editor, enter the full path and file
name in the Default Editor box, for example, C:\WINDOWS\NOTEPAD.EXE.
Default Machine
The Default Machine list box shows all machine tools that have been configured
using the SURFCAM Verify Machine Properties setup. To select a machine
definition as the default, select a machine from the list. This selection will be saved
as the default if the Save Now button is clicked.
Machines
Click the Machines button to open the Machines dialog box which lists all machine
definitions.
974
New
Click New to open a dialog box that requires that you enter the new machine
name. To save the machine name, click OK.
Properties
Once a machine definition file is created using
the New button, the machine name will appear
in the Machine List window. To view or edit the
properties in any machine definition file, select
the machine from the list and click the
Properties button. The Machine Setup dialog
box will be displayed showing the machine
parameters associated with the machine
definition selected.
For more information about machine tool setup,
see Machine Setup, page 979.
Machines dialog box
OK
Click OK to close the dialog box.
Default Tooling Database

The Default Tooling Database window shows the file where all information relating
to individual tools is saved when using the Tool No. facility on the Tool setup dialog
box. The default is a file called ALLTOOLS.DAT.
Solid Model Defaults
Click the Solids... button to open a dialog that offers two choices for setting the
accuracy of the solid model. The setting entered here will be used by all Jobs,
unless overridden by the solid model setting in the Stock tab on the Open Job
dialog box. See Stock Tab, page 998.
Fixed Sub-division
The CMS model resolution can be set to a
fixed value by checking the Fixed
Subdivision check box and entering a value
of between 100 and 500 in the adjacent box.
The value represents a number of
subdivisions along the longest edge of the
stock. This subdivided value is then further
subdivided by SURFCAM Verify to provide
accuracy.
Solid Model Defaults
Remember, the higher the value, the better the image quality but at the expense of
processing speed and memory usage. If your jobs have machined detail that is small in
comparison with the size of the stock, you may need to make the subdivision number
larger. For example, if you have a job that is 100 units along its longest side and the
975
smallest feature machined on it is 5 units wide, a subdivision setting of 100 is bound to

show the detail, as the feature will be spread across 5 subdivisions. On the other hand,
if the job were 1,000 units in size, a 5-unit feature would need a subdivision setting of
at least 200 to guarantee that the feature is displayed.
This is not a hard and fast rule, so experiment with different settings to suit your needs.
Deep Zoom can negate any limitations of model resolution by locally refining an area of
interest.
Automatic Sub-division
The Solid Model detail will be automatically calculated based on the stock size.
Default Folders
The default folders for certain SURFCAM Verify data files can be defined. In each
case, the full path must be entered.
Job Files
The default is ..\Common Files\jobs.
CNC Files
The default is ..\Common Files\programs.
Libraries (tooling, stock, etc.)

The default is ..\Common Files\tools.
STL Files
The default folder for STL (Stereo Lithography) files used for stock import or STL
comparison is ..\Common Files\Stock.
Machine Files
The default is ..\Common Files\Machines.
Default File Extensions

SURFCAM Verify uses data files generated by other systems, which use their own
extensions. These files are CNC program files and STL files. During Job setup, NC
and STL files with any file extension can be selected using the Windows Browse
facility. However, it is much easier if SURFCAM Verify lists only files of the
required type at the appropriate time. Entering your chosen default file extensions
into these boxes tells SURFCAM Verify to first list these file types only.
There are several default NC program file extensions already set up. Notice that
the extensions are separated by semi-colons.
Save defaults during Exit
Check this box to direct SURFCAM to save the layouts for future use.
Size, position and View/Light settings will be saved, but not the type of view.
Repeat Continuously Demonstration Mode
Check to repeat the current job continuously for demonstration purposes.
976
19.8
MACHINE SETUP
19.8.1
Overview
SURFCAM Verify is provided with several machine definition files for typical milling
and turning machines. It is unlikely that these machine definitions will satisfy the
requirements of your own machine tools, so you will need to configure machine
definitions for each of the NC machine tools on your shop-floor. Machine definition
files can contain the following machine tool information:
1.
2.
Units (inch or metric)

Rotary axis translation
3.
4.
5.
6.
4th & 5th axis origin position

Machine Datum
Machine type
Machine axis travels
Note
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Tool change position

Tool change time
Load/unload time
Maximum spindle speed
Rapid travel threshold value
Actual rapid-travel rate
A machine definition can be set up using either inch or metric units, but not
both. If you use both inch and metric programs on any of your machines, it
is recommended that you configure two machine definitions for each
machine tool, one for inch units and the other for metric units.
A machine definition need contain only the controller type and machine type to
process many 3-axis milling and 2-axis turning jobs. Machine definitions for 4 and 5axis milling machines are a little more complex.
Machine definition files can be created using the Machines button on the Preferences
dialog box. See Creating a machine definition, page 976. Machine definitions
specified in this way set the default values for the machine and are saved in the
machine definition file (MCH file).
Machine definitions can also be altered from within the Job setup dialog boxes.
19.8.1.1
Creating a machine definition
To set up a new machine definition file, follow these steps:

1.
Click Edit > Preferences.
977
Edit > Preferences > Settings dialog box
2.
Click the Machines button next to the Default Machine list box.
3.
The Machines dialog box will be

displayed.
Click the New button.
4.
A dialog box will open and you will

be prompted to enter a new
machine name.
Machines dialog box
Enter a machine name and click

OK.
Do not enter a file extension, as SURFCAM Verify will automatically add the
file extension .MCH. You will be returned to the Machines list window.
Notice that your machine has been added to the list.
5.
With your new machine highlighted, click the Properties button.
6.
The Machine Setup dialog box will be displayed.
978
Machine Setup dialog box
The Machine Setup dialog box consists of the following sections:

A. Machine Setup. Machine Setup, page 979.
B. Control. Machine Setup: Control Tab, page 982.
C. Travels. Machine Setup: Travels Tab, page 983.
D. Time Params 1. Machine Setup: Time Params 1 Tab, page 984.
E. Time Params 2. Machine Setup: Time Params 2 Tab, page 985.
F. Rotary Axis. Machine Setup: Rotary Axis Tab, page 985.
7.
Enter the parameters for your machine definition and save them.
19.8.2
979
Machine Setup
Machine Setup dialog box
Machine Name
The Machine Name text box shows the name of the machine tool being
configured. If this is not correct, click the Cancel button, return to the Machines
dialog box and select the correct machine.
Machine Type
Select the type of machine tool being used in the current Job.
MACHINE
DESCRIPTION
VMC 3-axis
Vertical 3-axis milling machines and machining centers.
VMC 4-axis
VMC 5-axis
HMC Y-Vert
Horizontal 3-axis milling machines or machining centers where

the Y-axis is vertical.
HMC 4-axis Y-VertHorizontal 4-axis milling machines or machining centers where

the Y-axis is vertical.
HMC 5-axis Y-VertHorizontal 5-axis milling machines and machining centers
where the Y-axis is vertical.
980
MACHINE
DESCRIPTION
HMC X -Vert
Horizontal 3-axis milling machines or machining centers where

the X-axis is vertical.
Lathe Z -Hor
Lathes and other turning machines with 2 controllable axes

where the Z axis is horizontal.
Lathe Z -Vert
Lathes and other turning machines with 2 controllable axes

where the Z axis is vertical.
Mill/Turn
Not used in this release.
Mill/Turn Z-Vert
Not used in this release.
Selecting a machine type affects the way further screens are laid out, the options
available to you, and the way SURFCAM Verify models the Job. It is, therefore,
very important to choose the correct machine type.
Save As
The Save As button allows changes to be made to current Machine Configuration
and for the changes to be saved as a new Machine Configuration.
Units
Check the units to be used with the current machine definition. If you wish to use
both inch and metric units with the same machine tool, we recommend that you
create two almost identical machine definition files, one for inch and one for metric
use. Inch and metric units cannot be mixed in a machine definition or Job files.
Setup Graphic Window
The setup graphic window gives a dynamic representation of the machine tool
setup. It shows:
1.
The Machine Datum as a purple cross.
2.
The Axis travel envelope as a black outline.
3.
Axis of rotation of a 4th axis as a purple arrow

with a number 4 below it.
4.
Axis rotation of a 5th axis as a green arrow with

a number 5 below it.
5.
The 5th axis datum as a green cross.
6.
The tool change position as a green T.
7.
Position and direction of the X, Y & Z axes as white lines with white X, Y and
Z letters in the axis plus direction.
19.8.2.1
981
Machine Datum
The Machine Datum is a point in machine space from which important job and
machine dimensions are taken. The actual location of the Machine Datum in
machine space is significant only if:
1.
You are checking axis over-travels.
2.
You are using a machine with one or more rotary axes.
3.
You manufacture components using a fixed datum point on the machine to

locate stock or fixtures and the program origin.
If none of the above points are relevant to you, you can usually ignore the Machine
Datum and work in part (stock) space.
On machines that have one or more rotary tables, the Machine Datum is always
considered to be the point where the 4th axis (Primary Axis) axis of rotation passes
through the 4th axis table surface.
On rotary head machines that do not have a rotary table, the Machine Datum is a
point from which the rotary-axes positions are defined. This is often the machine
tool builders Machine Origin position.
19.8.2.2
Axis Travel Envelope
The axis travel envelope is not a prerequisite for processing a Job and can be
ignored.
The axis travel envelope is only significant if you wish to check for axis over-travel
violations. The machine envelope is defined by entering coordinate points in
relation to the Machine Datum.
The envelope is a rectangular space on milling machines and cylindrical space on
turning machines. It is defined by entering values for maximum and minimum X, Y
and Z values coordinates of diagonally opposite corners for mills and X & Z values
for lathes.
If an axis is programmed in such a way that the NC program tries to exceed these
limits, an error message will be generated.
982
19.8.3
Machine Setup: Control Tab
Control tab
Control
The Control list box is used to select a CNC program translator or Reverse Post
for the current Job. Click the arrow button at the side of the list box to display a
complete list of translators and reverse posts that are applicable to the machine
type.
DOC Control Document Button
Click the DOC button at the side of the NC Controller list box to display a document
file that contains information relating to the NC program translator that is currently
shown in the Control list box.
Default Axis Translations
The Axis Translation options are applicable to 3-axis milling machines with
indexing tables only.
A programmed rotary indexing move can be translated by the model as a different
axis. For example, imagine a machine with a removable indexing table that can be
mounted as either an A or a B axis. The CNC controller always outputs an A move.
When we want to simulate the rotary table in the B axis position, we can set the A
translation list box to B. In this case SURFCAM Verify will model each A rotary
move as if it was a B move.
Machine Modes
Enable Dog-Leg
Some machines can only perform rapid moves that are horizontal, or vertical or at a 45
degree angle (diagonal). A dog-leg is a combination of a horizontal (or vertical) move
983
and a diagonal move. Checking Enable Dog-leg forces Verify to use a dog-leg move for
all rapid moves from point A to point B.
19.8.4
Machine Setup: Travels Tab
Travels tab
Machine Travels
The Machine Travels check box enables the use of axis over-travel checking and
requires the user to enter maximum and minimum travel limits for each axis
relative to the Machine Datum.
The machine travel values of Xmin, Ymin, Zmin & Xmax, Ymax, Zmax are used to
define the maximum travel limits of the machine about the Machine Datum. The
values entered adopt the units defined in Machine Setup.
4th Axis
Physical travel limits for a 4th axis rotary axis can be specified as plus (+) or minus
(-) values about the rotary axis zero position. These values are accumulative, so if
you are programming incremental rotary moves and the sum of those moves
exceeds the physical capability of the rotary axis, an error is generated during NC
program translation by the G-code translator.
5th Axis
Physical travel limits for a 5th axis rotary axis can be specified as plus (+) or minus
(-) values about the 5th axis zero position. As with the 4th axis limits, these are
accumulative and will detect over travels while translating the G-code data.
Tool Change Position
The Tool Change Position X, Y & Z values are used to define the position to where
the machine spindle positions itself to facilitate a tool change. These values are
984
used for calculating cycle times and for basic collision checking. Information
relating to acceleration and deceleration of the machine axes is not stored. It is
assumed that the tool moves in a straight line to the Tool Change Position.
If the box is checked, the user must enter the coordinates of the tool change
position. The tool change position is entered as X, Y & Z distances from the
Machine Datum. If you are not using SURFCAM Verify to calculate cycle times,
you should uncheck the Tool Change Position check box.
The tool change position is shown in the Setup Graphic window as a green T
shape.
19.8.5
Machine Setup: Time Params 1 Tab
These characteristics are used for error checking and cycle time calculations but are
not essential for SURFCAM Verify to processes Jobs.
Time Params 1 tab
Max Mill / Lathe Spindle Speed

Enter the maximum spindle speed for the current machines. SURFCAM Verify
uses this information to trap programming errors that specify a higher spindle
speed than the machine tool is capable of.
985
Actual Rapid Feeds per Axis

The machine tools rapid feed rate should be entered here. This value is used for
calculating machining cycle times only.
Delays (s)
Tool Change
Enter the average time taken to change a tool in the current machine tool. This value
may be the fixed tool change time in the case of a machine with automatic tool changing
or an average time for a manual tool change. This value is used for calculating cycle
times only.
Load + Unload
The Load + Unload is an average time for loading and unloading a part for the current
machine. This time is used for calculating cycle times only.
19.8.6
Machine Setup: Time Params 2 Tab
Time Params 2 tab
19.8.7
Machine Setup: Rotary Axis Tab
The Rotary Axis dialog box is used to specify parameters for 4th axis indexing tables,
full 4th and full 5th axis rotary axes (rotary table or rotary head).
986
Rotary axis tab
Machine Configuration
The Machine Configuration list box displays machine configurations that are
relevant to the machine type selected. For instance, if a 4-axis vertical milling
machine is being configured, options for a 4th axis rotary head or rotary table are
displayed. Depending on the selection, the Rotary Axis dialog box will change to
present only options applicable to that machine type.
Primary Axis (4th Axis)
The Primary Axis can be a rotary table or a rotary head. In the case of 5-axis
machines, the primary axis is generally considered to be the axis closest to the
machine frame.
Programmed Axis
The programmed axis list box offers the choices of A, B or C axes. This is the address
used by the NC program to specify rotary moves (A90, B-30, C25 etc.). It does not
necessarily define the physical direction of the axis.
Direction
The 4th axis direction uses industry standard conventions for specifying the direction.
The direction can be specified as being: +X; -X; +Y; -Y; +Z or -Z. The following diagram
shows the relationship between the rotary axis directions and the X, Y & Z-axes.
987
It is important to note that the arrows depicting rotations (+A, +B & +C) show the positive
direction of the tool, not the direction of rotation of the table. These may or may not
agree with the actual programmed axis and direction. In the case of a machine with a
removable rotary table for instance, the Programmed Axis may be A, but its physical
location on the machine may cause it to rotate about the Y axis (normally considered to
be a B axis). We would select +Y from the Direction list box. In this case, an A90
programmed move will be modeled as a B+ move.
Startup position
The 4th axis start-up position defines the angle at which the 4th axis is positioned at the
time of program start. The default value is zero. This option is used when a CNC
program is started with the 4th axis in a position other than zero or the zero position does
not conform to the standard definition of a rotary axis zero position.
Coord. Mode
The coordinate mode list box offers three options that affect how SURFCAM Verify
interprets angular moves.
Positional
This option tells SURFCAM Verify to interpret angular moves as absolute
values. The direction of rotation is determined by the programmed angle
being of a higher or lower value than that of the starting angle. For instance,
a move from a start point of A270 to A30 would move 240 degrees in the
negative direction (30 is smaller than 270 so move is negative) and a move
from A270 to A355 would move 85 degrees in the positive direction (355 is
larger than 270 so move is positive).
988
Module 360
This mode tells SURFCAM Verify to interpret all angular moves as absolute
values. The direction of rotation is determined by the shortest distance
between the start angle and the programmed angle. For instance, a move
from A10 to A30 would be a positive move of 20 degrees and a move from
A10 to A350 would be a 20-degree move in the negative direction.
Angles above 360 degrees are allowed (A380, B460 or C720 for instance).
If the direction of rotation is specified in the NC program using M codes, this
option should be used. The code specified by any M code will override the
shortest route logic.
Sign + Position
This option tells SURFCAM Verify to interpret all angular moves as absolute
moves with the sign (+ or -) dictating the direction of rotation. For example,
a move from A10 programmed as A30 would be modeled as a positive 20
degree move and a move from A10 programmed as A-30 would be modeled
as a negative move of 340 degrees in the negative direction.
Programming Point
SURFCAM Verify normally expects the CNC program to define the path of the tool
tip. However, on machines with two rotary heads, it is usual to program a point on
the machine that is associated with the position of the rotary axes. The
Programmed Point X, Y, & Z boxes are used to specify the position of this
programmed point in relation to the 5th axis position.
When the programmed point is specified here, the location of the point must be
added to each tool definition as a distance from the tool tip. See Programming
Point, page 988.
Secondary Axis (5th Axis)
The Primary Axis can be a rotary table or a rotary head. In the case of 5-axis
machines, the secondary axis is generally considered to be the axis furthest from
the machine frame.
See Primary Axis (4th Axis), page 986.
5th Axis position
Note
Remember that the Machine Datum is on the center of rotation of the
Primary (4th) axis (usually on the 4th axis table top in the case of a rotary
table machine or at some convenient point along the rotary axis on a
rotary head machine).
When configuring a machine with two rotary tables, the position of the 5th axis
rotary table must specified. It is specified as X, Y & Z distances from the Machine
Datum.
989
Entering X, Y & Z values in these boxes defines the axis of rotation of the 5th axis
and a point along that axis that is used to define the Programmed Point.
19.9
JOB SETUP
A SURFCAM Verify Job requires that certain information be entered before a CNC
program can be processed. The information required is divided into 3 main areas:
1.
Information about the Machine and Controller
2.
Information about the Tooling
3.
Information about the Stock
In the case of machine information, most machine data is already held in the machine
definition files. All other information must be entered using the Job dialog boxes.
19.9.1
Open Job
Click File > Open or click the Job (Open) button on the File bar to display the
Open Job dialog box. This dialog box is used to set up new Jobs or make setup
changes to existing Jobs.
Open Job Screen
Select Job
The Select Job box shows the Job that is active. To select a different Job, click the
arrow and select a new Job from the list. The list shows all Job files listed in the
Jobs folder as defined in Settings.
990
New Job
To set up a new job, click the New Job button. Enter the new job name and click
OK.
Note
The job name can be any file

name within the limits of the
operating system used. Do not
enter a file extension. SURFCAM
Verify will attach the default file
extension .JOB.
Enter New Job Name dialog box
Then click the Add button on the NC Prog.

tab.
The Add File to Job dialog box will be displayed. You must Add an NC file before
you can use the Machine, Stock and Tool tabs to enter the setup data. See Add,
page 993.
Import Job
The Import Job button allows Job files that are not in the default Job folder or old
Project (PRJ) files to be imported into SURFCAM Verifys current structure. Once
imported, data from an old Project file will be saved in SURFCAM Verify Job file
format, without affecting the original Project file. Imported SURFCAM Verify files
from other folders are saved in the current default SURFCAM Verify folder
structure.
If other files needed for the imported project are not found in the Jobs folder, STP
files for example, SURFCAM Verify will ask if you wish to browse for the missing
files.
Delete Job
The Delete Job button deletes the currently selected Job file and certain
SURFCAM Verify data and temporary files associated with it. To delete a Job,
select the Job to be deleted using the CNC Files list box. If you have recently run
the Job, you should make sure that all windows are closed.
Click the Delete button to display the Delete Job dialog box.
Delete Job dialog box

991
If you are not using the Job setup files (STP files) for other Jobs and wish to delete
them, check the Delete Setup files box. If you do not wish to delete the setup files,
leave the box unchecked.
Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the current job. Click No if you wish to
abort the operation.
When a Job is deleted, the following files will be removed from your computer
system:
1.
The SURFCAM Verify Job setup file with the file extension JOB.
2.
Setup files with file extensions: STP, ST2, ST3, etc. Setup files can be used
in more than one Job, so are deleted only if the Delete Set up files check
box is checked.
3.
SURFCAM Verify internal RVP files. These files are output by the CNC
program translators and are used for producing SURFCAM Verify models.
4.
Tool collision log files with the file extension ERR.
5.
Files with the file extension ALL. These files are produced when multiple
CNC program files are included in a single Job. The ALL file consists of
concatenated RVP files.
6.
NC program error log files with the file extension LOG. These files are
produced by the CNC program translator if problems are found when
converting CNC program data into RVP format.
7.
SURFCAM Verify temporary files with the file extensions TB1, TB2, TB3,
etc.
8.
Editor backup files with the file extension BAK.
9.
Temporary files with the file extension $$$.
The following files are not deleted when you click the Delete Job button:
1.
CNC program files (.NC or other file extensions).
2.
Machine setup files (MCH).
3.
Stock setup files (STK or STL).
4.
Tool library files (LIB).
Note
Machine setup files, stock files and tool library files can be used in many
Jobs, so delete these files only if you are sure that no existing Job
requires them.
Scan CNC file

To save Job setup time, the Scan CNC File button is used to scan the current CNC
file using the CNC translator or Reverse Post (chosen by selecting a CNC
controller from the Machine Setup dialog box) to extract basic tool data and
992
estimated stock size. This information is written to the current Job setup. If some
tools have been defined manually, scanning the CNC file will add those tools that
do not already exist in the tool setup. If scanned tools have the same programmed
numbers as tools already in the setup, the tools will be added using the same
numbers. Before saving the setup, the duplicate numbers must be changed or else
a system error will be shown. Stock that is set up in this way will be sized according
to the maximum axis travel extent in feed rate (G01) mode for each axis.
Active CNC/STP
This window shows the active CNC file and STP files.
Click the arrow at the side of the CNC list box to display all CNC program files used
in the current Job. The setup file (STP) associated with the selected CNC program
will be shown in the second text box.
If you wish to use information contained in another setup file, use the Copy From
button to import this information to the current setup file.
Copy From
To import setup information from another setup file you should click the Copy From
button and then select the required STP file from the list shown. SURFCAM Verify
will retrieve the setup information in the older file and save those details in the new
STP file.
BKP (Backup STP)
When SURFCAM Verify saves changes to the Job setup, it automatically makes
a backup copy of the original setup files. The BKP button is used to restore this
backup to the current setup.
Cancel
The Cancel button will close the Jobs dialog box. All changes made to the setup
will be lost.
OK
Click OK button to save the Job setup. If the Job has not been processed before,
the CNC program(s) and other setup data defined in the Job setup will be
translated into SURFCAM Verify ready for processing. If the Job has been
processed before, the message Reprocess CNC files? will be displayed. Click
Yes to re-processes the Job with the latest tooling, stock, and machine settings.
Click No to use the prior tooling, stock, and machine settings.
19.9.1.1
NC Program Tab
Click the NC Prog. tab to enter Job specific information relating to the CNC
program.
993
CNC Files
The CNC Files window shows all CNC files, with their path, that are included
within the active Job.
SETUP
The Setup window shows the setup file name (STP file), the machine and
controller associated with each CNC file in the current Job.
Add
Click the Add button to add or insert a CNC file to the active Job.
When using the Add button for the first time in a Job, the CNC program will be
added to the CNC program window. Subsequent uses of the Add button will
add further CNC programs to the list.
To insert a CNC program into an existing list, first highlight the CNC program
below where you want the new CNC file inserted and then click Open.
When multiple CNC files are selected, the second and subsequent CNC files
can be associated with a rotation of the part or an origin shift. See Stock Tab,
page 998.
When adding a new CNC file to the Job, SURFCAM Verify will automatically
assign a STP file name. This file name will include the name of the CNC file
plus a two-digit number that indicates the sequence in which multiple STP files
are created. For example, a CNC file named SURF.NC will generate an STP
file name of SURF-01.STP, if it is the first CNC program file selected in a Job
setup. Adding a second CNC file will generate a STP file named SURF-02.STP,
etc.
994
Note
The second and subsequent STP file names are based on the first
STP file name, regardless of the name of the subsequent CNC files.
To change the orientation of the stock, position of stock datum and program
origin for any CNC program, click on the CNC program name in the CNC files
Window and change the settings for that CNC program using the controls on
the Stock tab. Up to 128 CNC programs can be processed in each Job.
Insert
Click the Insert button to place an additional CNC program anywhere within an
existing list of CNC programs. To insert a new CNC program,
1.
Click the CNC program description in the CNC program window above
where you want to place the new program. The program name and STP
name will be highlighted.
2.
Click Insert. A Windows browse dialog box will open.
3.
Click on the CNC file that you wish to insert and click Open. The new
CNC program will be inserted and a setup file (STP) created using the
existing Job settings.
Edit
Click the Edit button to launch the default editor (as defined in settings, see
Default CNC Editor, page 973) and loads the current CNC file into it.
Note
After you edit a file, be sure to save the file. It is very important that
you save and exit the editor before trying to process the Job.
Delete
The Delete button is used to deselect a CNC file from the current Job. The file
itself is not deleted from the computer system, but it ceases to be included in
the Job setup.
DOC. (Job Document File)
Click the DOC button to launch the default editor and create a document file
with the name of the Job but with the file extension DOC. This document file
can be used to make notes relating to the current setup.
Cancel Process
The Cancel Process button will stop the translation of the CNC program and
setup data into RVP format.
19.9.1.2
Machine Tab
The Machine tab is used to specify the machine that will be used to process the
active CNC program file that is selected on the NC Prog. tab.
995
Machine Name
The Machine Name list box is used to select the machine to be used for the
selected operation in the current Job.
To change the machine, click the arrow and select the machine.
Axis Translations
Axis translations for this machine tool may have already been defined in
Machine Setup. However, some machines have rotary tables that can be
oriented to suit each job being machined. To allow for this, changes can be
made to axis translations that are saved in the Job files, but not in the machine
definition file.
The Axis Translations panel contains three data entry boxes that allow
programmed rotary axis moves to be mapped to other axes. For example,
consider a horizontal milling machine with a rotary table that can be mounted
in either a B or an A axis orientation. The CNC controller will expect the
programmer to use only one axis address, say the B address, to instruct the
CNC controller to make a rotary move. However, if the rotary table is oriented
in the machine A position, we need to tell SURFCAM Verify to model all B
moves as A moves. To do this:
1.
Select the list box adjacent to the B label.
2.
From the list of options, select A+. (or A- if the direction needs to be
reversed).
996
Origin Shifts
The Origin Shift window is used to store information relating to programmed
origin shifts. Origin shifts, often programmed using CNC codes G54 through
G59, are defined using the following syntax:
G54 = 1.2 3.4 5.6
When entering origin shift information, it is important to separate the values by
a space.
In this example, when a G54 is encountered in the CNC program, the origin is
moved to coordinates X1.2, Y3.4, Z5.6.
In the case of a Fanuc control using extended coordinate systems format P1=,
SURFCAM Verify supports values of P1 to P99. For example:
G54.1 P1 = 1.2 3.4 5.6
A control using the letter address E would require an entry in the Origin shift
window of:
E = 1.2 3.4 5.6
A total of 100 origin shifts can be defined in each Job setup.
Properties
Click the Properties button to open the Machine Setup dialog box. Changes can
be made to the machine settings at this point, but they will be saved only in the
current STP Job files. Changes here will not be saved to the machine definition
files. See Machine Setup, page 979.
Radius Offsets
Use the Radius Offset panel to enter cutter radius compensation offsets.
If you are programming using cutter radius compensation, you will need to tell
SURFCAM Verify the values of the compensation and where to apply them.
Often cutter radius compensation is invoked from the CNC program using a line
similar to:
G41 (G42) D04 X20.00 Y30.00
Where G41 or G42 specifies the direction of the compensation, D04 indicates
the CNC memory address where the value of the compensation is stored
(number 04 in this case) and the X and Y values specify a normal tool move
during which the compensation becomes effective.
The offset value stored in the CNC controller can be entered into SURFCAM
Verify as follows:
1.
Click the inside the Radius Offset box.
2.
997
Enter D04 = 25.00 (where 25.00 is the value stored in memory location
04) and press enter.
Length Offsets
Use the Length Offset panel to enter tool length offsets. There are two
scenarios that can require data to be entered here.
Length Offsets for a specific tool
SURFCAM Verify assumes that the programmed tool path is the path taken
by the tool tip. However, if you are programming a different point on the tool
or a point on the machine (usual with rotary head machines), it is possible
to enter a length offset for that tool telling SURFCAM Verify to adjust each
tool move by the defined amount. In this case the length offset is associated
with a particular tool.
As an example, consider a ball end-milling cutter with a diameter of 12mm.
The CNC programmer has programmed the center of the tip radius, not the
tool tip, and has given the tool the number T07. To ensure that SURFCAM
Verify offsets the tool path, we must:
1. Click the inside of the Length offset box.
2. Enter T07=6.0 and press enter.
The address T07 is recognized by SURFCAM Verify as tool T07 in the

current CNC program. The 6.0 value is the length of the offset along the tool
axis.
Length Offsets Called by CNC Program
Your CNC controller may allow tool length offsets to be called from the CNC
program. These offsets, usually entered by the machine operator into the
controller memory, may be called at any time for use with any tool by using
an appropriate CNC program command. In this case, we must tell
SURFCAM Verify to activate the defined offset each time the offset code is
encountered in the CNC program.
In the case where a tool length offset of 10.00 mm has been entered into a
CNC controllers memory location 05 and the CNC program address for
calling this offset is H, we must:
1. Click the inside of the Length offset box.
2. Enter H05=10.0 and press enter.
If, for the chosen CNC controller, the programmed address for calling length
offsets is the letter H, we use H05 to apply an offset of 10.00 mm each time
an H05 is encountered in the CNC program.
998
19.9.1.3
Stock Tab
Stock Graphic Window

The stock graphic window displays the current stock shape as a blue wire
frame. The following is also displayed:
1.
The Stock Datum (stock 0,0,0) shown as a black cross (+).
2.
The Program Origin (NC program 0,0,0) shown as a green square (o

o).
3.
The Machine Datum shown as a blue cross (X).
4.
A 4th axis shown as a blue arrow with a number 4 below it.
5.
A 5th axis shown as a green arrow with a number 5 below it.
6.
A 5th axis position shown as a green cross.
7.
Stock dimensions.
8.
Axis labels.
The Program Origin defaults to the position of the Machine Datum.

The stock is shown in relation to the +X, +Y, and +Z axes with its basic
dimensions. In the case of stock imported from a CAD system in STL file
format, the stock shape is shown without dimensions.
Stock Item No.
The stock item window shows the number of the stock/fixture item that is
currently selected. Click the arrow at the side of the window to display a list of
stock and fixture items in the current setup. Click one of the listed numbers to
999
select that item as the active stock, high light its graphic and load its details into
the stock dialog boxes.
Toggle Dimensions
Click this to toggle the view in the Stock Graphic Window to show more or less
detail.
Add Button
Click the Add button to add a stock, fixture, or clamp item to the current stock
setup. A small stock item is added to the graphic window in the form of a square
box with its corner at the Stock Datum position (0,0,0). This stock item can be
reshaped, resized and changed from a stock item to a fixture item using the
Shape & Size tab.
Delete Button
Select a stock/fixture item by clicking it in the graphic window or selecting the
item from the Stock Item No. box. Then click the delete button to delete the item
from the current setup.
Stock Name
If you intend to save stock and fixture setups for future use, you must give the
setup a name. The Stock Name list box is used to name the current stock setup
and to load a saved stock setup into the current Job setup. To name a stock
setup:
1.
Click the arrow at the side of the Stock Name box.
2.
Select <Save as> from the list of choices.
3.
Enter a name in the Enter New Stock File Name dialog box.
New Stock File Name
4.
Click OK.
To recall a previously saved stock setup into the current Job, click the arrow at
the side of the Stock Name box and select the stock name from the list.
1000
19.9.1.3.1
Shape & Size Tab
Shape & Size tab
Shape
The stock shape and type (stock or fixture, solid or hole) can be selected
from the shape list box. When you select a shape, data entry boxes are
displayed for you to enter the specific dimensions of that shape. The shape
options are:
Box
Stock item in the shape of a rectangular box.
CYL-X
Stock item in the shape of a cylinder with its axis parallel to

the machine X-axis.
CYL-Y

the machine Y-axis.
CYL-Z

the machine Z-axis.
Box_Hole
Hole in either stock or fixture item in the shape of a

rectangular box.
RNDX_Hole
Hole in stock or fixture item in the shape of a cylinder with its

axis parallel to the machine X-axis.
RNDY_Hole

axis parallel to the machine Y-axis
RNDZ_Hole

axis parallel to the machine Z-axis
Box_Fixt
Fixture item in the shape of a rectangular box.

1001
XCYL_Fixt
Fixture item in the shape of a cylinder with its axis parallel to

the machine X-axis.
YCYL_Fixt

the machine Y-axis.
ZCYL_Fixt

the machine Z-axis.
STL Stock / STL Fixture

These are stock or fixture shapes in the STL format. When you select one of
them, the STL File name box and a Browse button are displayed for you to enter
the STL file to use.
STL Size and Shape tab

STL File
This box will contain the STL file name.
Browse
This is a standard Browse button used to search for the STL file.
STL Fix Utility
Click this button to run the STL Fix Utility on the loaded STL file if needed.
See STL Fix Utility, page 1041.
19.9.1.3.2
Location Tab
The Location tab is used to position the Stock Datum in relation to the Machine
Datum. The default position is 0,0,0. That is, the Stock Origin and the Machine
Datum share the same position.
1002
The Location values can be left set to 0 if:

1.
You are not tracking axis over travels.
2.
You are not using rotary tables.
3.
You are setting your program origin in relation to a point on the stock, not
a point on the machine.
To relocate the Stock Datum from the Machine Datum:

1.
From the Stock Location dialog box, enter X, Y & Z values that define the
absolute position of the Stock Datum from the Machine Origin.
2.
The values are saved automatically to the Job files.
19.9.1.3.3
Origin Tab
The Origin tab is used to enter the position of the program origin.
1003
The position is defined either:

1.
As a point on the current stock item.
2.
As a point in relation to the Machine Datum.
X-Y Origin
The X-Y Origin list box contains a list option for defining the Program Origin
in relation to the currently active stock item. The options are:
min X min Y
Selects the point on the current stock item that is its minimum X and Y value.
max X min Y
Selects the point on the current stock item that is its maximum X and minimum
Y value.
min X max Y
Selects the point on the current stock item that is its minimum X and maximum
Y value.
max X max Y
Selects the point on the current stock item that is its maximum X and maximum
Y value.
Center
Selects a point that is the center of the X and Y dimensions of the current stock
item.
Manual
Allows user input of a point in relation to the Stock Datum.
1004
If changes are made, values in the Position from Machine Datum boxes are
updated accordingly.
Z Origin
The Z Origin list box reveals a list of optional positions for the Program
Origin in the Z-axis. The options are:
Top
Locates the Program Origin on the top surface of the current stock item.
Center
Locates the Program Origin at a point central to the current stock items
maximum and minimum Z-axis extents.
Bottom
Locates the Program Origin on the bottom surface of the current stock item.
Manual
Locates the Program Origin at a manually entered position in relation to the
Stock Datum.
If changes are made, values in the Position from Machine Datum boxes are
Programmed Origin position from Machine Datum
In many cases and particularly where a 4th axis rotary table is used, the
Program Origin will need to be specified from the Machine Datum. To
facilitate this, the Position from Machine Origin option is provided.
The three text boxes labeled X, Y & Z all require a value that represent an
absolute distance from the Machine Datum.
If changes are made, values in the X-Y Origin and Z Origin boxes are
19.9.1.3.4
Rotation Tab
The Rotation tab is used to define the orientation of the stock. If a job contains
multiple CNC programs the Rotation tab is used to re-orient the stock between
programs if that is required.
1005
When several stock rotations are included in a single Job, each rotation is
defined relative to the original stock position. The moves are absolute, not
incremental.
When stock is rotated, the program origin remains fixed in relation to the
Machine Datum. The program origin can be relocated by selecting the Origin
tab and entering new position values, either in relation to the stock or the
machine origin. See Origin Tab, page 1002 for more information about
relocating the program origin.
Rotation Graphic Window
The rotation graphic windowon the Rotation tabshows a red colored
rectangular block that represents the stock in its current orientation. Its sides
are numbered like a dieany two opposite sides add up to 7. This makes it
easy to identify faces that are hidden. In addition to the rectangular block,
the machine axes, Stock Datum, Program Origin and Machine Datum are
shown.
Stock Graphic Window
The stock graphic windowon the Stock tabshows a blue wire frame
image of the stock in its current orientation. When the stock is rotated, the
original position is displayed as a gray outline, while the blue wire frame
image rotates to the new position.
Angle
The Angle text box is used to enter or select the degree of rotation that will
occur when the Rotate CW or Rotate CCW button is clicked.
aXis
The aXis button is used to specify the axis about which the rotation occurs.
Clicking the aXis button toggles between the three options X, Y and Z. The
1006
stock will rotate about the chosen axis at the point where the axis passes
through the Stock Datum.
The Program Origin will not move during a rotation.
Rotate CW / Rotate CCW

These buttons are used to rotate the stock about the axis specified with the
aXis button by the number of degrees specified in the Angle box. CW rotates
the stock clockwise and CCW counterclockwise.
Other Rotate buttons
There are 6 buttons labeled with direction arrows. These can be used to
rotate the stock quickly in 90-degree steps around the X, Y or Z axes.
Reset
The Reset button restores the original orientation. This is useful if you have
made complex rotations along more than one axis and have lost your
position. Clicking the Reset button will allow you to start again.
Undo / Redo
The Undo button reverses the last rotation made. The Redo button restores
the last move after the Undo button has been used. These are useful
controls if you wish to reverse a rotation to check your position and then
restore the move.
19.9.1.3.5
Verify Settings Tab
The Verify Settings tab displays two options for setting the accuracy of the solid
model.
1007
Fixed Sub-division, Automatic Sub-division

See Solid Model Defaults, page 974.
19.9.1.4
Tool Tab
The Tool tab displays the list of tools associated with the current job and a
graphical representation and description of each tool. The tab is used to add or
delete tools from the list.
Default Tool
This is the tool that Verify will use until the first tool change command is
encountered.
1008
Tool List Window

This window displays a list of tools defined for the current job. Each line contains
an item number, the programmed tool number, the tool shape (drill, flat, chamfer,
etc.), and the tool orientation in relation to the machine axes. Click a tool in this list
to display its characteristics on the Tool description tabs to the right of the list
window.
Add
Click this button to add a blank line at the end of the tool list. You must then
complete the new tool description by making the appropriate entries on the Tool
Definition tab. See Tool Definition Tab, page 1008.
Delete
Click a tool line in the Tool List Window and then click Delete to remove that tool
from the list.
Save Toolkit
If you intend to use the current set of tools on another job click Save Toolkit to
create a new tool library file with a .TLB file extension.
Load Toolkit
Click Load Toolkit to load an existing tool library file. The tools in the file will be
added to any tools already in the current job.
Note
19.9.1.5
If added tools from a library file have the same programmed number as
a tool already defined; both will be listed showing the same programmed
number. To avoid errors later, you should change the programmed
number of one of the tools at this time.
Tool Definition Tab
The tool definition tab is used to define a new tool or modify an existing one.
1009
Tool Graphic Window

The Tool Graphic Window displays a graphical image of the tool, tool shank
and tool holder. The tool shank and tool holder will be displayed in green. The
tools will be displayed in various colors. These shapes are defined using the
NTGNew Tool Geometrylanguage.
Note
The shape of the graphical image displayed in the Tool Graphic

Window is defined by a program written in a language called NTG
(New Tool Geometry). See NTG Language, page 1016 for an
explanation of NTG.
Toggle View
The Toggle View button zooms and unzooms the Tool Graphic Window. It will
toggle the window through three views.
Tool No.
This box displays the programmed tool number of the tool that is high lighted in
the Tool List Window. Use this box to enter the programmed tool number of a
new tool or to change the number of an existing tool.
Note
The number entered in the box must be exactly the same as that used
in the CNC program. If a program contains a tool programmed as
T003, the Tool No. box must contain the characters T003. Using T03
or T3 will not do.
Machine Type
The Machine Type list boxto the right of the Tool No. boxdisplays the
machine type of the machine selected on the Machine tabin the Machine
Name box.
1010
Tool Type
The Tool Type list boxto the right of the Machine Type list box displays the
tool type of the tool that is high lighted in the Tool List Window.
The Parameters box, below the T. Lib # list box, displays the dimensions of the
tool listed in the Tool Type box.
The Tool Type drop down list contains all of the tool types available for the
machine type listed in the Machine Type list box. If Machine Type is Mill only
milling tools are listed.
Milling Tools
The available mill tools are Flat end, Ball end, Bull end, Drill, Radius,
Sphere, Chamfer, Dovetail, Tapered Ball, Tapered Bull and User Defined
(using NTG).
Lathe Tools
The available lathe tools are Diamond, Triangle, Square, Pentagon,
Hexagon, Radius Groove, Grooving, Button, Thread, Lathe-Drill and User
Defined (using NTG).
Home Name (Lathe Tools Only)
The Home Name box will be displayed under the Tool No. box when the
Machine Type is Lathe. Some turning machines use tool offsets that are stored
in memory locations in the CNC controller. When these offsets are needed,
they are often called as part of the tool number. For instance, T0101 might be
used to call tool number 01 with the offset stored in memory location 01. Tools
called in this way can use any of the offsets stored in the controller, T0103 or
T0107 for instance.
To cancel the offsets, calling the tool number with no offset is one possibility. In
this case, we tell SURFCAM Verify that the tool offset is being cancelled by
entering the string used in the Home Name text box. In the above case, we
would enter T0100 in the Home Name box to tell N-See that the offset used with
tool number 01 is cancelled. The values of called offsets are entered in the
Length and Diameter offset boxes on the Machines dialog.
T. Lib # (Tool Library Number)
The T. Lib # list box is used to save and recall individual tools. Often, tool
assemblies (tool, shank & holder) are common to many Jobs but do not
necessarily form part of a standard tool library. In this situation, it is useful to be
able to save individual tools for future use. To save a tool:
1.
Make the chosen tool current by selecting it from the list of tools in the
current Job.
2.
1011
Click the cursor inside the tool Number box and enter the tool number.
The number and tool details will be saved to the ALLTOOLS.DAT file in
the \NSEE2000\LIB folder when the Job is saved.
To recall a tool that has previously been saved into the current Job click the
arrow at the side of the T. Lib # list box and select the desired tool from the list.
Parameters
The Parameters box is used to display the dimensions of the current tool. It is
also the area where the NTG program to define a new tool shape is entered
and displayed when User Defined has been selected in the Tool Type list box.
Mill Tool Parameters
The parameters used to define the various mill tools are Angle, Bottom D
(Bottom Diameter), Corner R (Corner Radius), Diameter and Height.
Lathe Tool Parameters
The parameters used to define the various lathe tools follow.
Width
This is the width of a Grooving or a Radius Groove tool.
Height
Enter the height of the tool in the Height text box.
IC (Inscribed Circle)
The Inscribed Circle is a common way of specifying a tool tips size. The
Inscribed circle is the largest circle that could be drawn inside the tool tips
boundary.
Corner R (Corner Radius)
Usually, a tool tip has a specified radius at the cutting tip. This radius is entered
in the Corner Radius text box.
Angle
The included angle of the tool tip at the cutting point is entered here. This option
is only available when the angle is variable. Square, triangle, pentagon and
hexagon tool tip shapes obviously have included angles that are fixed and
cannot be changed by the user.
Orientation
The orientation angle is used to define the angle of the tool tip in relation to the
Z-axis. The angle is the angle between the Z-axis and the first cutting edge.
Diameter
The diameter of a lathe drill.
1012
Tool Orientation
Programming Point
Turning
You can program your lathe with the path of the center of the tip radius or
maybe another point. SURFCAM Verify expects that programmed tool paths
specify the path of the theoretical tool tip (touch off point), so we use the
Programming Point Offset X and Offset Z entries to tell SURFCAM Verify
the position of the actual programmed point from the theoretical tip.
The entries must be in the units specified in for the current Machine/Job
setup.
Milling
There are two situations where you will need to change the position of the
Programmed Point in a milling Job.
1. If the programmed point of the tool is not the tool tip.
2. If you are setting up a Job for a machine with one or more rotary heads.
If the programmed point is not the tool tip, the center of radius of a ball-end
mill perhaps, you must tell SURFCAM Verify the position of the programmed
point in relation to the tool tip. To do this, simply enter a value in the
Programmed Point box that corresponds to the distance from the tool tip to
the programmed point. The value can be signed (+ or -) to indicate the
direction of the change. If you are setting up a Job for a machine tool with
one or more rotary heads, you must enter a value in the Programmed Point
box that represents the distance from the programmed point (defined in the
machine setup dialog) and the tool tip. In this instance, the value effectively
defines the tool length.
19.9.1.6
1013
Tool Shank Tab (Milling Tools)
Specifying a tool shank for milling tools is optional. It is only necessary if you wish
to check for shank collisions.
The shank is considered to be the non-cutting part of the tool.
Tool Shank
The Tool shank check box is used to enable shank creation for the current tool.
Diameter
Enter the shank diameter in the Diameter text box.
Height
Enter the height of the shank in the Height text box.
1014
19.9.1.7
Tool Holder Tab
Tool Holder
The Tool Holder check box is used to enable the creation of a tool holder for
the current tool.
Holder Types
There are several tool holder shapes to choose from.
Milling Tools
Flat
A flat tool holder requires entry of the Diameter and Height of the holder.
Ball
A ball ended tool holder requires entry of the Diameter and Height of the holder.
Bull
A bull-ended holder requires entry of the Diameter, Corner Radius and the
Height.
Chamfer
A chamfer tool holder requires entry of the Diameter, Bottom Diameter, Angle (of
the Chamfer) and the Height of the holder.
Lathe Tools
Simple Bar
The simple bar lathe tool holder is a rectangular bar with a length and width
specified by the user. The depth of the bar is estimated by SURFCAM Verify and
is not configurable by the user. The parameters required to specify a lathe tool
holder are:
1015
Width
This is the holder dimension along the Z-axis.
Height
This is the holder dimension along the X-axis.
Angle
This is the angle of the front face of the holder in relation to the Z-axis.
Clearance X
This is the clearance distance, along the X-axis, from the programming point
to the tool holder face.
Clearance Z
The clearance distance, along the Z-axis, from the programming point to the
tool holder face.
minimum Diam.
This is the smallest diameter hole in which the tool holder could sensibly be
used. This is for internal turning applications.
User defined
A tool holder can be specified in SURFCAM Verifys NTG language. See NTG
Language, page 1016.
19.9.1.8
Tool Turret Tab (Lathe Tools Only)
The Tool Turret tab is used to define the position and orientation of the current
lathe tool as it is held in the tool turret and the orientation of the turret.
Tool Graphic Window

The Tool Graphic Window displays a graphical image of the lathe tool.
1016
Tool Orientation
The Tool Orientation graphic displays 8 possible lathe tool orientations in
relation to the stock. The orientation marked by a cross hair is the one shown
in the Tool Graphic Window. Select a different orientation by clicking on it in the
graphic.
Cutting direction
The cutting direction list box has two options, CW (clock-wise) and CCW
(counterclockwise). A value of CW is required if the spindle is rotating in a
clockwise direction when viewed from the Z+ direction.
Turret
The turret position can be defined as being either Top or Bottom. This option is
used when simulating machining on a 2-axis machine with 2 turrets.
19.9.2
NTG Language
NTG (New Tool Geometry) is a simple language used to define custom tool shapes.
NTG language is based on standard CNC program concepts using modified G01
(linear) and G02 or G03 (arc) moves to define a closed tool shape.
The syntax for NTG program line is:
<type> <X coord> <Y coord> <I arc center coord> <J arc center coord>
The <type> parameter can be 0, 1, 2, or 3.
0 to define the start point (no I or J value)
1 to define a straight edge (no I or J value)
2 to define a clockwise arc (I & J values are required)
3 to define an anti-clockwise arc (I & J values are required)
Here is a simple NTG definition of a square tool tip with sides of 0.25.
[INSERT]
0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.0
0.0
0.0
[EOF]
1017
The [INSERT] header tells N-See that the following geometry relates to a tool insert
or cutting tip. If a tool holder were being defined, the header [HOLDER] would be
used.
The first 0 indicates the starting point, in this case 0.0 0.0. If the line were to read
G00 X0.0 Y0.0, you would immediately recognize the structure. The only difference
is that the letter addresses have been left off.
The first 1 on each line indicates a straight-line move (G01) to the point defined by
the next coordinates, 0.0 0.25.
Each of the following lines starting with a 1 are straight line moves to other points on
the absolute coordinate system.
The [EOF] (End of File) tells SURFCAM Verify that the geometry is complete.
Here is another example that defines a 1 square tool insert that has a 0.125 radius
at each corner.
[INSERT]
0
0.125
0.0
0.0
0.125
0.0
0.875
0.125
1.000
0.875
1.0
1.0
0.875
1.0
0.125
0.875
0.0
0.125
0.0
0.125
0.125
0.125
0.875
0.875
0.875
0.875
0.125
[HOLDER]
;; Holder not defined
[EOF]
The lines starting with 2 are the equivalent of a G02 move in a CNC program with X,
Y & I, J coordinates.
A [HOLDER] definition is used, but the comments indicate that it is not used. A
[HOLDER] definition is optional and would be defined in the same way as an insert.
To create a tool using NTG:
1.
From the Job dialog, select the Tool tab.
2.
Click Add.
3.
From the Tool Type list box, select <USER DEFINED>.

1018
4.
Type the instructions in the window.
5.
When finished, click Save NTG.
6.
Enter the file name and click Save
There are some simple rules to follow:

1.
A NTG file must begin with the header [INSERT].
2.
Holders are optional and are defined with the header [HOLDER].
3.
The first entity must define the cutting tip.
4.
Each coordinate must be separated by at least one blank space.
5.
The NTG file must end with [EOF].
6.
All coordinates are in absolute mode.
7.
Insert and Holder shapes must be closed.
8.
The tool must be defined in a clockwise fashion.
Note
This means that external radii are defined with G02 (2) type moves and
internal radii with G03 (3) type moves.
To convert a standard SURFCAM Verify lathe tool to NTG format, load an existing Job
that contains the required tool definition from the Open Job dialog box.
1.
Select the Tool tab.
2.
From the list of tools in the Tool List window, click the chosen tool.
3.
From the Tool type list box, select NTG. You will notice that a window will appear
showing the NTG listing for the selected tool.
4.
Edit the NTG listing as desired.
5.
Click the Save NTG button and enter the new NTG file name when prompted.
19.10
INSPECTION
There are three main ways to inspect a SURFCAM Verify model.

1.
Visual checking
2.
Measurement
3.
Comparison with Design Model
19.10.1 Visual Checking

Visual checking of the machining process and the machined part can provide a feeling
of comfort that things are as they should be.
19.10.1.1
1019
View
Click View > Rotate / Light Source or click the View button on the View
toolbar to display a View dialog box so you can change the view angle and
light source in the active window.
View Angle
The view angle can be changed by entering XY
and Z angles into the boxes provided or by
dragging the image in the view window with the
mouse at the same time keeping the left mouse
button depressed.
To use the new view angle in the active window,
release the left mouse button and click the Apply
button.
Light Source
A light bulb icon represents the light source when
the cursor is inside the View window and the right
mouse button is depressed.
Position the cursor in the view window and drag
the light source while keeping the right mouse
button depressed.
To use the new light settings in the active window, release the right mouse
button and click the Apply button.
You can change both the View Angle and the Light Source prior to clicking
Apply.
To close the control window, click the View button on the View Bar or click
the close button in the top right hand corner of the window.
1020
19.10.1.2
Tool, Stock & Fixture Colors
Click Edit > Colors or click the Tool

Colors button on the Edit toolbar to
turn tool colors on or off and to set
specific colors for certain tools. The Tool
Colors dialog box will be displayed.
Range Colors
The Range Colors check box is used to
highlight the tool path made by a certain
section of the program. For example, if
you wished to identify a part of a surface
machined by blocks 1200 to 3400, you
would:
1.
Check the Range colors box.
2.
Enter 1200 in the First box.
3.
Enter 3400 in the Last box.
4.
Click Apply and close the dialog

box.
Tool Colors dialog box
When the Job is processed, the machined material will appear gray until block
number 1200 is reached. The tool path will turn light blue while block lines 1200
to 3400 are machined, then revert back to gray.
Tool Colors
You can allocate a color to each tool in the current Job setup, as well as to
Stock, Fixtures, Collisions, and Holder.
When a tool collision occurs, the tool path left by the tool is shown in a different
color from the rest of the tool path. Also, in Preview, at the time of the collision
the tool changes color briefly.
Check the Tool Color box to switch tool colors ON. Otherwise, all toolpaths will
be shown in gray.
Tool, Stock, Fixture, Collisions, Holder
Change Color
1. Select the item from the list.
2.
Select a color from the palette at the bottom of the window.
3.
Click the Apply button and close the dialog box.
19.10.1.3
1021
Translucent
Click Edit > Translucent or click the Translucent button on the Edit bar to
toggle the appearance of the stock and fixtures in the active window between
solid view and a translucent view. Translucency can be a very effective way
of viewing what is going on inside or behind the part during the machining
process.
19.10.1.4
Pan
Click View > Pan or click the Pan button on the View bar to move the model
in the active window in any direction within the window. Panning will allow a
zoomed view of a section of the part to be positioned in the active window
without the need to zoom and unzoom.
19.10.1.5
Zoom Views
To inspect fine detail, it is desirable to be able to magnify an area of the part.

SURFCAM Verify offers several zoom controls to assist in this area.
Zoom Window
Click View > Zoom Window or click the Zoom Window button View Bar to
cause the cursor to change shape to an arrow and pecked box. In this
mode, the cursor can be used to select a zoom area.
To select a zoom area, select Zoom Window from the menu or View Bar. With
the left mouse button held down, click on the part at a corner of the area to be
zoomed. Without releasing the left mouse button, drag a rectangular window
(shown as pecked lines) until the desired areas is covered. Release the lefthand mouse button. There will be a short pause as the zoom takes effect.
Note
Zooming into Preview models can cause a lengthy delay while the
zoomed area is reprocessed. It is recommended that zoomed areas
of Preview models be selected at the beginning of processing to
minimize the reprocessing time.
u Deep Zoom
Click Inspection > Deep Zoom or click the Deep Zoom button on the Inspection bar to
cause the mouse cursor to change to an arrow with attached wire frame
box.
Click on the surface of a model and drag the mouse with the right mouse button
depressed to form a wire frame box on the model.
1022
Release the right mouse button to open a new window and display the selected
volume as a miniature solid model that is refined to show more detail. The size
of the wire frame box dictates the level of refinement. A small box will show
more detail than a larger box and will often process quicker.
Zoom Out
Click View > Zoom Out or click the Zoom Out button on the View bar to
cause the model in the active window to be re-displayed in full view. The
size and shape of the window will determine the image size of the part.
19.10.1.6
2D/3D Views
u For lathe jobs, click Inspection > 2D 3D or click the 2D View button to
toggle the active window between a two dimensional cross-sectional
view and a 3 dimensional view.
The 2D cross-sectioned view offers a convenient way to watch tool

animation and to measure the part, whereas the 3D view can be rotated
and sectioned (see following paragraph - 3/4 Section). Both views can
be zoomed.
19.10.1.7
3/4 Section
For lathe jobs, click Inspection > 3/4 View or click the 3/4 View button on
the Inspection bar to toggle that view between a full model and a 3/4
sectioned model. The 3/4 section provides a convenient way to view the
results of internal machining operations.
19.10.1.8
Section
Click Inspection > Section or click the X-Section (cross-section) button on

the Inspection bar to allow Preview (mill & lathe) and Verify milling models to
be cross-sectioned.
1023
A X-section dialog box will be displayed for you to

define the direction and position of the cross-section.
Standard cross-sections are available in three
planes: X-Y, Z-Y, and Z-X. Also you can define
planes by choosing the Any Section option and
entering three points by clicking on the model.
To create a cross-section:
1.
Select an active window.
2.
Click Inspection > Section or click the XSection button.
3.
Select the plane.
4.
Select the position by using the slider bar or

entering precise coordinates.
5.
Click the Cut X-Section button.
6.
Click the Undo button to return to the original solid part.
X-Section dialog box
19.10.2 Measurement
Measuring the finished or partly finished model provides the first real inspection of
machined components before they are even made. Verify provides very powerful
measurement tools.
Click Inspection > Inspection or click the Inspect button on the Inspection bar to
open the Inspection dialog box. Use this dialog box to check solid, both, and
turbo (not animation) models for dimensional accuracy. The following image
shows a typical inspection session.
Inspection dialog box
1024
The upper window is used to display a list of points or features that you select by
clicking on them in a model window.
The Features and Snap to boxes control the points and type of features you can
select. See Snap to, page 1025.
Click on an item in the top window. Hold down the CTRL key and click a second item.
The lower window will show the distance between two items.
Delete & Delete All Buttons
The Delete and Delete All buttons are used to delete selected points and features
in the top window. Click Delete All to delete all items in the top and bottom
windows.
To delete a single point in the top window, click the item in the top window and click
the Delete button.
Center Button
Select the center of an arc or circle:
1.
Point to the arc in the Verify window and click the left mouse button. The
description ARC, center [X<value> Y<value> Z<value>] R<value>
appears in the top Inspection window.
2.
Click the description of the arc in the top Inspection window.
3.
Click Center. A new line will appear in the top window giving the center
position of the arc.
Input X-Y Button

Find an exact Z value for a specific X-Y coordinate:
1.
Note
2.
Click the Input X-Y button and enter an X value and a Y value in the Input
XY->Z dialog box and click OK.
The input X and Y coordinate values must lie within the original stock
and fixture boundary.
A line will appear in the top window that gives details relating to a point
on the top surface of the part at the location of the X-Y coordinates
entered. These details include the type of surface at the selected point
and the X, Y & Z coordinate of the point.
Edit
Open the default editor to edit the NC file.
Features
If the Features box is not checked, you can select only points on the model that
are on that type of feature displayed in the Snap to box.
1025
If the Features box is checked, you can select only the type of feature displayed
in the Snap to box.
Snap to
This box displays the type of feature you want to select or from which you want
to select points. If Snap to is set to Anything, you can select any type of feature
or if Features is not checked, you can select points from any feature.
19.10.3 Comparison with Design Model

When inspecting complex milled surfaces, conventional methods of measurement
provide useful information but do not always tell the whole story. Measuring points on
a surface tells you only that the part is correct at the points measured. It does not tell
you if there are areas between the selected measurement points that fall outside
required tolerances.
SURFCAM Verify has a very powerful feature called STL Compare, which
automatically compares a SURFCAM Verify machined surface with the original
design model. Any deviations from the as required part within user definable
tolerances can be highlighted.
STL (STereo Lithography) files are produced by many leading CAD and CAM
systems. The quality and consistency of STL output varies considerably from CAD/
CAM to CAD/CAM system. Generally, the best STL files are produced by true solid
model based CAD/CAM systems. If you experience inconsistent or clearly incorrect
results, it is most likely that your STL files are not of sufficiently high quality (See STL
Fix).
STL-compare can be used with both Verify Solid and Turbo models.
1026
19.10.3.1
STL Compare
The comparison of CAD

design models with
SURFCAM Verifys Solid
and Turbo models is an extremely
powerful feature.
Click Inspection > Compare or
click the STL Compare button on
the Inspection bar.
The first time you make this
choice, the STL File Selection
Compare dialog box will be
displayed as well as the regular
STL Compare Control dialog box,
shown in the STL Compare
Control dialog box figure.
STL File Selection Compare dialog box
STL File
Click the STL File button to select a file. The file name and path will appear in
the STL File window. Click OK to load the STL file.
If you later wish to change the STL file, click the STL filename button on the regular
STL dialog box.shown in the STL Compare Control dialog box figure.
Offsets
If the STL file origin does not coincide with your NC program origin, the STL
Matching list boxes can be used to enter X, Y, and Z offsets to reposition the
STL model to align with the machined part.
STL Fix Utility
Click the STL Fix Utility button to run the STL Fix utility to correct certain
problems with bad STL files. See STL Fix Utility, page 1041.
19.10.3.2
1027
Comparing STL file with Solid or Turbo Model
Once the STL file has been selected, SURFCAM Verify will
read the STL file and superimpose the STL model over the
Turbo model. The Turbo image will appear to change color.
Compare Tolerance
The Compare Tolerance parameter is used to set the
maximum and minimum tolerance beyond which
SURFCAM Verify will show deviations. The tolerance is
entered as a numeric value in the units defined in Job
setup.
Show Compare
Check Show Compare to reprocess the Solid or Turbo
model and display it with colors that show gouges and
excess material.
Based on the Compare Tolerance, Red is used to show
gouged areas. Green is used to show excess material.
STL Compare
Control dialog box
Grey is used to show areas of the Turbo model that are

within the compare tolerance.
Show Model
Check Show Model to display the Solid or Turbo solid model only.
STL filename
Click the button to open a different STL file for comparison.
19.11
ERROR DETECTION
SURFCAM Verify automatically detects the following errors:

1.
Tool collisions with clamps and fixtures.
2.
Rapid tool moves into the stock.
3.
Tool shank collisions with stock, clamps, and fixtures.
4.
Tool holder collisions with stock, clamps, and fixtures.
5.
Program syntax.
Program syntax checking is carried out at the time the NC program is translated into
SURFCAM Verifys internal RVP format. All other checking is carried out at the time the
simulation or solid model is generated.
1028
19.11.1 Tooling Collisions

When SURFCAM Verify is processing, it checks to see if the tool, tool shank, or tool
holder collides with the stock, clamps, or fixtures in such a way that the collision would
cause damage to the tool, stock, or machine tool. If such a problem is detected,
SURFCAM Verify will indicate the error by incrementing the Error Counter by one (1).
Error Counter
The error counter, labeled Errors, is located on the Status Panel. This box shows
the number of errors that have been detected in the current Job. The counter is
incremented by one each time an error is detected. If errors have been detected,
the details of each error can be found in the Error Log file that is opened using the
Error log button on the Toolbar.
Error Log
Click Options > Error Log or click the Error log button on the Tool (Panel) bar.
If no errors have been detected, the Error Log button and menu command
will not be available.
Error Log File
The Log of errors is viewed in a split window, showing the list of errors in the
bottom panel and the NC or other tool path file in the upper window.
You will notice that some lines in the tool path file are highlighted in Red. This
highlight indicates that these lines are responsible for an error. Click on one of
these lines to highlight the error detail in the lower window that is associated with
the selected program line.
1029
Click on one of the errors in the lower window to highlight it and scroll the tool path
file to the offending tool path line in the upper window that will also be highlighted.
Edit NC file
Load the NC file into the text editor.
Print Errors List
Print a list of the erors that occurred.
19.11.2 Syntax Checking

While processing the tool path, stock, and tooling data, the syntax of the tool path file
will be checked for certain errors.
These errors include:
1.
Checking that arc end points are calculated correctly (within CNC controller tolerances).
2.
CNC program syntax checking.
3.
Rotary moves that exceed rotary axis limits.
If such errors are found, SURFCAM Verify will not allow the Job to be processed and
an error window will be opened showing the errors found. These errors should be
rectified before re-processing is attempted.
19.12
SAMPLE JOBS
SURFCAM Verify is supplied with several sample Jobs. Each Job will highlight certain
powerful areas of functionality that may not be obvious from reading other sections of this
manual.
The instructions assume that you are using SURFCAM Verify on a computer with a
moderately fast processor (Pentium 90 or above), 32 MB of RAM and a 15 display (or
larger) running at 1024x768 resolution. If your computer is slower, has less memory or
has a lower screen resolution, it is recommended that you open only one or two windows.
19.12.1 MILL.JOB
This is a milling job that includes multiple CNC programs and rotations of the part.
19.12.1.1
Open File
1.
Start SURFCAM Verify.
2.
From the File menu, select Open or click the Open (Job) button on
the Toolbar.
1030
3.
Click the arrow to the right of the Select Job list box.
4.
From the list of Jobs, select MILL.
5.
Click OK. SURFCAM Verify will ask if you want to reprocess the program.
6.
Click NO. Since no changes have been made to tooling, stock, or fixtures,
processing the CNC file is unnecessary.
19.12.1.2
1.
Set Up and Processing

Click Verify to open a window. Wait until the window appears showing
the stock.
2.
Click Verify three more times to open three

more windows.
3.
From the Window menu, select Tile.
4.
Click inside the first open Window. With the

Left Mouse Button held down, drag the stock
inside the window to a new angleor click the
right mouse button and select a different view.
5.
Repeat this operation until you have a different

view in each window.
1031
6.
Select the first window. If not in Animation mode, click the Animation
button on the View Bar. There will be a short delay while the new view takes
effect.
7.
Repeat this step for the second and third windows.
8.
9.
Select the fourth window and click the Solid button on the toolbar.
Click Play and watch the part process. You will see the tool cutting
the part in the three Animated windows. The Solid window will not update
until the Animation is halted at the end of the job or by the user clicking the
Stop button.
10.
Click Stop to halt the animation at any time and Play to restart the
animation.
11.
Click Rewind and then Play to begin processing again from the
beginning.
After completely processing the whole Job, your screen could look like the
following.
1032
19.12.1.3
Viewing Errors
Having processed the Job, it would be nice to see what machining has been done.
Notice also that the error window on the Status Panel is showing a number of
errors. First let us look at the errors. To do this:
1.
Click the Error log button on the Toolbar to see the list of errors, tool
collisions, and note the block numbers that cause the errors. Click on any of
the errors and see the NC program display in the top panel scroll to the
offending NC program line.
19.12.1.4
Inspect the Part
Although we have opened 4 views of the Job, each with a different view, we still
cannot see every face of the part. Let us use the Solid model to closely inspect the
part.
1.
Click inside the solid window.
2.
Use the left mouse to drag and rotate the Solid model to another position
with the left mouse button depressed.
Similarly, we can take a closer look at the model by zooming into an area.
1033
1.
Still with the Solid window selected, right click and select Zoom
Window button.
2.
Drag a window over the area into which you want to zoom. Wait for the
display to regenerate.
3.
Zoom out using the Zoom Out button.
4.
Rotate and zoom the part to check it all over.
19.12.1.5
Check Dimensions
Having done a visual check of the part, let us check some dimensions.
1.
First choose the Solid viewyou cannot measure animate-only viewsand

rotate and zoom to show the features to be measured. It is recommended
that you choose a view that shows straight edges and holes or slots with
rounded corners.
2.
Click Inspect. An empty Inspection dialog box will be displayed. See

Measurement, page 1023.
Inspection dialog box
3.
Check the Features check box. Then, using the mouse cursor, pick some
features on the Solid model. Select an edge, an arc and a flat surface
(Plane). In the top window, you will see a list of features (planes, arcs,
edges, complex surfaces, etc.) Each feature will also show its location in
Cartesian coordinates with relation to the program origin and other useful
geometric data.
4.
Click on an arc description. Click Center. You will see a new line of
information appearing in the top window. This line indicates an arc Center
1034
and gives the arcs normal and its location in X, Y & Z coordinates. Your
Inspection dialog box will look like the following now.
5.
Hold down the CTRL (control) key on your computer and click on two items
in the top window. It is suggested an edge and the arc center. A new line of
information appears in the bottom window. This information describes the
relationship between the two chosen items. It is usual for SURFCAM Verify
to provide the straight-line distance between the two features, the X-Y
distance and Z distance. The Inspection dialog box will now look like this.
6.
To delete any single item in the top window, select it with the mouse cursor
and click the Delete button. To delete all items in the top window, click the
Delete All button. The contents of the lower window empties as its related
items in the top window are deleted.
7.
Next, uncheck the Feature check box and try selecting features on the solid
model. You will find that only points on surfaces are now found. The
software is now in virtual CMM (Coordinate Measuring Machine) mode.
8.
When you have finished, click the Inspect button on the Inspection tool bar
again to close the Inspection window.
19.12.1.6
1035
Rotating and Zooming
You may have noticed that some features were difficult to select due to their being
hidden by other part features. In these circumstances, rotating the model and
zooming will help. However, what if the feature to be measured is inside the job?
The only answer is to cross-section the job (X-section). To cross-section the Job
in the Solid window:
1.
With the Solid window still selected, click on the XSection button on the Inspection Bar. The X-Section
dialog box appears.
2.
Click the arrow to the right of the section type list box
and select the Z-Y Section option. Using keyboard
input or the slider control locate the green sliding
window at the point you wish to make the cross
section.
3.
Click the Cut X-Section button. The Solid model will

refresh in a sectioned view. Notice that SURFCAM
Verify always removes the part of the model nearest to the user.
19.12.1.7
Cross Sections
Often it is necessary to make cross-sections that are not conveniently parallel to

any of the part axes. To make such a cross-section:
1.
From the X-Section list, select the Any Plane option. Note that another
option called Delete Last Point appears.
2.
On the Verify model, pick three points on the plane you wish to cross-section
through.
3.
Click the Cut X-Section button.
19.12.2 SURF.JOB
This is a surface milling Job that demonstrates the high speed and accuracy of Turbo
II modeling, CMM and STL Compare inspection.
1036
19.12.2.1
Set Up and Process
1.
Open SURF.JOB. See Open File,

page 1029.
2.
Click Turbo. A window will open

and the stock for SURF.JOB will
appear in Turbo mode.
3.
Right click in the window and

select Zoom Fit.
4.
Click Play. The Job will process

and the part will appear to be
machined in the window. Note
that processing may be slower if
the CNC Panel is open.
19.12.2.2
Inspect the Part
Having simulated the machining of the part, we will now inspect it. To do this, we
can use two inspection techniques.
1.
Virtual CMM Measurement
2.
Advanced Inspection (STL file compare)
First, let us measure some points on the surface using SURFCAM Verifys virtual
CMM capability.
1.
Click Inspect. The Inspection dialog box will be displayed. Note that
the Feature measurement check box is grayed out, as Turbo windows do
not support feature based measurement.
2.
Click the mouse cursor anywhere on the part surface. Notice the X, Y & Z
coordinates are returned in the upper inspection window together with the
program block that machined that point.
3.
Select another point on the surface. Another line of point data appears in the
upper inspection window.
1037
4.
Click the top line of point information in the inspection window. With the left
mouse button held down, drag the highlight to include the second line and
release the mouse button. A line appears in the lower inspection window
showing the shortest distance between the two points, the X-Y distance and
difference in Z values.
5.
Select as many points as you wish and measure distances between them.
If you have two lines in the top inspection window that are separated by
another line, select each with the CTRL key held down.
6.
When you are finished, close the Inspection dialog box by clicking the
Inspect button again.
19.12.2.3
STL Compare
Now for the powerful STL compare feature. To demonstrate this feature
effectively, we have introduced a small gouge in the surface of the job. This may
be already visible to you, depending on the resolution of your computer display. To
use STL compare:
1038
1.
Click the STL compare button on the

View Bar. The STL Compare dialog box will be
displayed. The first time the button is clicked,
both dialog boxes will be displayed.
2.
However, if you have previously used this

command, it may be necessary to click the STL
file name button to display the following STL
Compare dialog box. See STL Compare, page
1026.
STL Compare dialog box
3.
Click STL File. Select Surf.stl and click Open on the STL Files dialog box.
4.
Click OK on the STL Compare dialog box and the Surf.stl file will be loaded.
5.
Click inside the Compare Tolerance box and enter 0.002. The SURF part is
programmed in inches, so we are entering a tolerance of 0.002 inches.
6.
Click the Show Model check box. Note that areas of the model have
changed color.
7.
You should see a small area of red on the part surface and several green
stripes. The green stripes are cusps that exceed 0.002 or excess material
and the red areas shows gouges.
8.
9.
Click the Zoom Window button.

Drag a small window around the red area on the part surface and wait for
the window to repaint. SURFCAM Verify will zoom in around the gouge.
Notice the detail and quality of the image.
10.
1039
Click Inspect.
11.
Click a point on the part surface within the red area. Note that the
information relating to the chosen point in the gouge has been displayed in
the top Inspection window. Notice that the information given now includes
the deviation from the STL ideal surface (STL Error).
12.
Click on a green high spot adjacent to the gouge. Note that similar point data
appears in the Inspection window.
13.
Select the two point data lines in the Inspection window and see the small Z
difference between the high spot and the gouge.
14.
When you have finished, close the Inspection window and deselect STL
compare by clicking the STL button on the View menu.
19.12.3 TOMBSTON.JOB
This part has been provided to show a typical setup using a tombstone fixture to
machine 4 components at one time and how to build complex stock and fixture
arrangements from simple geometric primitives.
Open TOMBSTON.JOB. See Open File, page 1029.
1.
Click the Verify button on the toolbar.
2.
Click on the Animated & Solid button on the View Bar. This will set the View
attributes for the SURFCAM Verify window.
3.
Using the mouse to locate the cursor along the windows edge, drag the window to a
suitable size.
4.
Click Play to begin the verification session. You will see the tool cutting the 4 jobs
located on the tombstone fixture.
5.
Stop the animation at any time using the Stop button.
So far, we have seen only the tool cutting the part. Now let us add tool shank and
holder to the animation.
1.
Click the rewind button on the toolbar. This will restart the CNC program to the
beginning and repaint the stock in its starting state.
2.
Check the Holder Check and Holder Display boxes on the Control Panel.
3.
Click Play. This time you will see the tools and tool holders are animated.
4.
Click the holder display check box to uncheck it while the animation is running. At the
end of the current tool move you will see that the holder animation is switched off.
Leaving the Holder Check box in the checked state will still check for holder collisions
with the stock or fixture.
1040
5.
Stop the animation at any time.
To see how the stock and fixture have been created:

1.
Click Open (Job) button on the Toolbar.
2.
Click the Stock tab on the Open Job dialog box.
3.
Click the arrow on the Stock Item No. list box at the bottom of the dialog box. Select a
numbered item from the list and see the item highlighted in the graphic window.
4.
Also note the shape details and dimensions on the Shape & Size tab. Looking at each
item, you will notice that each stock and fixture element is specified in the stock
coordinate system from a single point (the stock Datum).
5.
Click Cancel.
19.12.4 BLADE.JOB
A typical 5-axis surfacing job showing the machining of a turbine blade in a complex
fixture.
The BLADE job has been provided to demonstrate SURFCAM Verifys 5-axis milling
capability and the STL stock and fixture import facility. This part also provides an
excellent opportunity to experiment with Deep Zoom.
To run BLADE.JOB:
Start SURFCAM Verify and open Blade. See Open File, page 1029.
6.
Click on the Animated & Solid button on the View Bar. This will set the View attributes
for the SURFCAM Verify window.
7.
Using the mouse to locate the cursor along the windows edge, drag the window to a
suitable size.
8.
Click the Play button on the Toolbar.
9.
Once the job is completed, you can use the Zoom and Deep Zoom buttons to inspect
the machined surface. To use Deep Zoom:
10.
Click the Deep Zoom button on the Inspection Bar. The mouse cursor will change to an
arrow with a box attached to it.
11.
Click the surface of the job at the center of the area to be zoomed. With the left-hand
mouse button depressed, drag a box over the area to be zoomed. If you drag too far,
the box will not grow. This will ensure that the Deep Zoomed view will be to a higher
resolution to that of the original view.
12.
A new window will open and the deep zoomed view will be shown with a surrounding
bounding box. This view is a solid model that can be rotated and measured and further
zoomed.
1041
19.12.5 LATHE.JOB
LATHE.JOB is a typical 2-axis turning job with both OD and ID turning, threading,
grooving and contouring operations. The Job is held in a chuck and machined from
one end only. To run LATHE.JOB:
1.
Start SURFCAM Verify.
2.
From the File menu, select Open or click the Open button on the toolbar.
3.
Click the arrow to the bottom right of the Current Job list box.
4.
From the Job list, select LATHE.
5.
Click OK and wait for the message and click NO when prompted to re-process?
6.
Click the Verify button to open a window and then select the Animation button.
7.
Click the Turbo button to open a Turbo window.
8.
Select Tile from the Window menu to automatically arrange the two windows.
9.
Click the Play button to start processing.
Having processed the Job, you will have seen a 3D animation of the process in the
one window and a 2D animation in the turbo window. It would be a good idea to
visually check the part from all angles. To do this:
1.
Click the mouse cursor in the Turbo window to make it active.
2.
Click 2D3D on the Inspection menu or click the 2D button on the Inspection menu.
Notice the 2D image becomes a 3D image.
3.
Click the View button on the Inspection Bar or 3/4 View on the Inspection menu. See
the full 3D image in the turbo window becomes a sectioned image. We can now see
inside the part.
4.
Click the Zoom Window button on the View Bar. Then, drag a window around a section
of the part in the turbo window. The resulting zoomed view may require changes in the
View angle and Light to allow a clear view inside the part.
5.
Click the View Button on the View Bar. Drag the View and Light positions until you are
happy with them and click the Apply button. Notice that the Light and view angle have
been changed, but the view is now unzoomed. To get a closer look, use the Zoom
Window button again. Close the View/Light control if you are finished with it.
19.13
STL FIX UTILITY
19.13.1 Product Overview

STL Fix is a software utility that is supplied with SURFCAM Verify for correcting some
problems associated with importing STL (Stereo Lithography) files into SURFCAM
1042
Verifys STL file compare and STL stock import modules. STL file data consists of a
collection of triangles and their normal vectors. Some STL files include triangles with
inconsistent or incorrect normals. An example would be a description of a solid that
has some normals pointing out and some into the solid, rather than all pointing out of
the solid.
Operations
The application includes the following operations:
1.
2.
Recalculate Normal
Vectors
Reorient Polygons
3.
Reverse Normal Vectors
4.
Reverse Normal Vectors to always

point upwards
View Controls
The following display controls can be used to manipulate a view of an STL model:
1.
2.
3.
Display STL Origin

Display STL Bounding
Box
Change View Angles
4.
5.
Zoom In
Zoom Out
6.
Colors
Colors are used to show the orientation and consistency of the triangle normal
vectors.
1.
Yellow - Triangles with normal vectors pointing toward the user.
2.
Cyan - Triangles with normal vectors pointing away from the user.
3.
Magenta - Triangles with normal vectors that are incorrect for the triangle
orientation.
STL Triangle Selection

The STL triangles can be selected at any time by clicking each of them using the
left mouse button, or by dragging a window around many triangles. Use the right
button to deselect them. This is also valid when dragging windows around many
triangles. Selected triangles are shown in dark color.
If the View option is active, triangle selection is not possible.
Selected polygons will be displayed with bright colors, while deselected areas will
be lighter.
1043
19.13.2 Installation and Execution

STL Fix can be executed from inside SURFCAM Verify or as a stand-alone Windows
application. If launched from within SURFCAM Verify, STL Fix will automatically load
the currently selected STL file. If launched as a stand-alone program, the STL file
must be selected.
STL Fix is included with the SURFCAM Verify distribution CD-ROM and is copied to
your system when SURFCAM is installed. However, it will operate only if Advanced
Stock or STL Compare modules are licensed.
STL Fix can be launched when selecting an STL file within the Stock dialogue or STL
Compare dialog.
To run STL Fix from SURFCAM Verify:
1.
From the Stock dialog box, select a file and click the STL Fix button.
2.
From the STL Compare dialog box, click the STL Fix button.
19.13.3 Screen Layout

All STL Fix functions are selected from the Main Menu or Toolbar. The following
diagram shows a typical STL Fix session.
STL Fix Utility screen

1044
The Main Window is an area of screen where the STL model is displayed. The
window can be resized, maximized or minimized, using standard Windows controls.
19.13.4 Status Bar

The STL Fix Status Bar at the bottom of the screen displays the name of the STL file
loaded and the number of triangles that it contains. The status of Caps, Num Lock,
and Scroll Lock keys will also be shown.
19.13.5 Toolbar
Typical STL Fix Toolbar
Open, Save, Print

See File Menu, page 1045.
Origin, Bounding Box, Axis Icon
See View Menu, page 969.
Angles
Click the Angles button to change the view angle and light source
associated with the Main Window. Hold down the left mouse
button to drag the STL image to a new position. Hold down the
right mouse button to change the light source.
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Show Gaps and Errors

Invert Normals, Re-Calculate Normals, Re-Orient Triangles,
Force Normal Z Positive, Swap X, Y, Z, Offset
See Options Menu, page 1046.
Help
Open the STL Fix help file.
19.13.6 Menus
The Main Menu is made up of a number of submenus. Each submenu contains
commands that are used to control an STL Fix session. Most of the menu commands
have buttons assigned to them on the Toolbar.
19.13.6.1
File Menu
Open
Open the Load STL file dialog box.
Save
Save the current STL file in its modified form.
Save As
Open the standard Save As dialog box to save the current
STL file. The file can be saved either in ASCII or binary
mode.
File Menu
Print
Print the current STL view.
Print Preview
Print the STL model to screen for review prior to printing.
Print Setup
This is the standard Print Setup command.
Last opened file list

The list shows recently opened files. Click a file name to re-open the file.
Exit
Close the STL Fix utility.
19.13.6.2
Edit Menu
Select All
Select all the triangles in the current STL model.
Select None
Deselect all of the triangles selected previously.
Edit Menu
1045
1046
19.13.6.3
View Menu
Origin
Click Origin to show or hide the STL origin position.
The origin will be marked with a cross (+).
Bounding Box
Click Bounding Box to display or hide the STL
bounding box. The bounding box is calculated from
the minimum and maximum extents of the STL
triangle coordinates.
View Menu
Axis Icon
Click Axis Icon to display it.
19.13.6.4
Options Menu
Zoom In
The Zoom In button magnifies an area of the STL
model. To select an area, drag a window using the
left mouse button.
Zoom Out
The Zoom Out button restores a zoomed view to
the original size.
Show Gaps and Errors
Click this button to show gaps and errors.
Options Menu
Operation Options
The following commands apply to currently selected triangles. Triangles can be
selected by clicking each with the left mouse button, or by dragging a window
around multiple triangles.
This vector can be different from the STL normal vector that is listed inside the
STL file for each triangle. Triangles, which have the triangle orientation
inconsistent with the STL surface normal, will be shown in magenta.
STL Fix can cure the following problems:
1.
Reverse the STL normal so that normal is consistent with other,

neighboring surface normals. (For example, set all normals so that they
point out of a solid or a surface.)
1047
2.
Re-set the STL normal to be consistent with the triangle orientation.
3.
Re-set the order of the triangle coordinates (for example, clockwise to

counterclockwise order) to be consistent with the STL vector.
4.
Reverse the sense of the STL normal along the Z direction so all normals
point up.
Invert Normals
Click Invert Normals to reverse the selected triangle normal vector
direction. Use this option so the selected triangle or triangles have a
coloring (yellow or cyan) that is consistent with neighboring triangles.
Re-Calculate Normals
Click Re-Calculate Normals to re-calculate the selected triangle normal
vectors, based on the triangle vertex coordinates.
This Option is suited for STL triangles that have a correct triangle orientation,
but an incorrect STL surface normal.
Triangle normals are calculated using the right hand rule.
Re-Orient Triangles
Click Re-orient Triangles to change the orientation of selected STL
triangles from clockwise to counterclockwise, or vice versa.
This Option is suited for STL triangles that have a correct STL surface normal,
but an incorrect triangle orientation.
Triangle orientation is re-set to comply with the right hand rule.
Force Normal Z Positive
The Positive Z-direction button reveres normal vector Z-components of
selected triangles that have a negative Z component.
This option is useful when STL files contain triangles where it is known that all
normals should be pointing upwards, as in the case of surface modeling. This
applies where all surface normals have a unique Z value for a given X and Y
pair.
Swap X, Y, Z
Clicking the Swap X, Y, Z button creates a new view of the model by
swapping the positions of the X, Y, and Z axes. There are three possible
view.
Offset XYZ
The Offset X, Y, Z button is used to reposition the model in relation to the
origin. Click to display the Offset dialog box. Enter the new values of the
X, Y, and Z coordinates. Click Ok to reposition the model to most
coordinates.
1048
Chapter 19 SURFCAM Verify, Part 3: Reverse Post
19.13.6.5
Help Menu
The Help menu contains the following commands.

Selecting Help On Help will provide assistance if you are having difficulty using
STL Fixs help facility.
Help
Open the STL Fix help file.
About Stl Fix
Click About STL Fix to display information window containing copyright and a
brief explanation of the most important program features.
PART 3: REVERSE POST

Click the link to open the Reverse Post document
Chapter 20 Editor
CHAPTER 20 EDITOR
Editor Defaults, page 1049

Predator Editor, page 1054
SURFCAM NC Editor, page 1198
PART 1: EDITOR DEFAULTS
20.1
INTRODUCTION
SURFCAM ships three editors.

1.
SURFCAM NC Editor p. 1198
2.
Predator Editor p. 1054
3.
The SView Editor is still available for those who want to use it. It is no longer used
in the current version. See the Help file for assistance.
The following table indicates when each is set as a default and how to change that
default.
EDITOR AND INSTALLATION DEFAULT
CHANGE
SEE
Explorer: Double-click a SURFCAM text file

Set Default Version Utility
Default Explorer Editor, page
with an extension indicated in the Set Default
to PEditor 1049
SURFCAM Installation dialog box figure.
Default = SURFCAM NC Editor
Verify: Edit DOC files.
Default = PEditor
Operations Manager: Edit NCC files after
posting.
to
Verify Program Default
SURFCAM Editor, page 1050
NC Editor
PST WizardDefault Post

to PEditor Processing Editor, page 1052
Default = SURFCAM NC Editor
20.2
SET DEFAULT VERSION UTILITYDEFAULT EXPLORER EDITOR
To change the default editor used when you double-click a SURFCAM text file (with an
extension indicated in the picture) in the Explorer:
1.
Click Start > Programs > SURFCAM 2002 > SURFCAM Tools > Set Default
Version.
1050
Chapter 20 Editor, Part 1: Editor Defaults
2.
Click SURFCAM NC Editor or PEditor on the Set Default SURFCAM Installation

dialog box.
3.
Click the Set button.
Set Default SURFCAM Installation dialog box
20.3
VERIFY PROGRAM DEFAULT EDITOR
To change the default editor used in the SURFCAM Verify program:

1.
Click Start > Programs > SURFCAM 2002 > SURFCAM Verify to run Verify.
2.
Click Edit > Preferences on the menu bar to display the Settings dialog box.
The Default CNC Editor will be displayed.

1.
Click the ... button, next to the name of

the default editor, to browse for the
SURFCAM NC Editor editor,
or
Enter the path and file name:
C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\SURFCAM NC Editor\sedit.exe
1051
1052
2.
20.4
Click the Apply button.
PST WIZARDDEFAULT POST PROCESSING EDITOR
To change the default editor used to edit NCC files at the end of post processing from
within the Operations Manager:
1.
Click Start > Programs > SURFCAM 2002 > SURFCAM Tools > PST Wizard to
display the Post Menu Wizard dialog box.
2.
Click the Next button to display the Post To Add dialog box.
3.
Click SURFCAM NC Editor or PEditor.
4.
Click the Next button at least once.
5.
Click the Cancel button.
1053
1054
Chapter 20 Editor, Part 2: Predator Editor
PART 2: PREDATOR EDITOR
20.5
INTRODUCTION
20.5.1
PEditor Overview
Predator Software, Inc.

8835 S.W. Canyon Lane, Suite 300, Portland, Oregon
Copyright 1994-2002. All Rights Reserved.
The PEditor supports opening multiple CNC programs at the same time and does not
define a limit to the number. The maximum number of CNC programs open at the
same time depends on the amount of Windows virtual memory. PEditor displays
warning messages when memory gets low.
Note
The CNC program size is limited to 32 Mb per CNC program and can be
limited by the amount of Windows virtual memory.
EDITOR PROCEDURES
1.
Start the Editor
SEE
Start the Editor, page 1055
Editor Menus, page 1065
2.
Create a new CNC program.
New, page 1065
3.
Open an existing CNC program. Open, page 1066
4.
Edit CNC programs.
Edit Menu, page 1087

Insert Menu, page 1092
Delete Menu, page 1098
NC Menu, page 1100
5.
Backplot CNC programs.
Backplot, page 1077
6.
Save CNC programs.
File Menu, page 1065
20.5.2
1055
Start the Editor
The PEditor is stored in the following folder

SURFCAM\Predator Software\Virtual CNC 3.4.
To open the Editor, double-click on PEditor.exe.
20.5.2.1
From the Command Prompt
To start PEditor from a command line, first you must be in the proper folder:
C:\SURFCAM\Predator Software\Virtual CNC 3.4.
Then type peditor and press the Enter key.
By default, PEditor opens a new blank CNC program. To automatically open an
existing CNC program, start PEditor from the command line with one of the
following commands. Note that after you type the command, you must press the
Enter key.
peditor filename.ext
peditor \\unc pathname\filename.ext
20.5.2.1.1
Command Line Options
PEditor can be started with a variety of command line options.

Notes:
1.
The command line options are case specific. Upper and lower case
options will do different things.
2.
In the following, if you do not enter a file name, an Open File dialog box
will be displayed for you to select the file(s).
3.
If you do enter a file name and if there is a space in the folder or the
name, you must enclose all within quotes.
4.
Example: peditor -#H20 ..\common files\programs\2dribs.ncc
5.
After you type the command name, press the Enter key.
COMMAND
peditor -B
peditor -b
peditor -c
DESCRIPTION
Load a CNC program and begin the Backplot.
Load a CNC program and open in Backplot mode.
Load 2 CNC programs and open in Compare
Mode.
1056
COMMAND
peditor -m fadal
peditor -o
peditor -P
peditor -p
peditor -S
peditor -s
peditor -r
peditor -x
DESCRIPTION
Switch to a specified machine template.
Read only mode, regardless of files r/w options.
Load a CNC program, Backplot, and print
graphics.
Print text.
Send to CNC from the hard disk.
Send to CNC from memory.
Receive from CNC.
Exit SURFCAM.
This command line is typically combined with
other commands.
For the following commands, a file name is required after the command:
peditor -#xx
peditor -#Hxx
20.5.2.1.2
Load a CNC program and move the cursor to line

xx.
Load a CNC program and move the cursor to line
xx and highlight that line.
Multiple Command Line Options
PEditor can be started with multiple command line options. File names are
always optional, and are processed sequentially. See the following:
peditor 2dribs.ncc -p -s -x
In the above example, 2dribs.ncc will be loaded into memory, printed to the
default printer, and sent to the default machine. The editor will then be closed.
20.5.2.1.3
1057
Add a Command Line Option to the Windows Explorer
You can add options, such as print, to the rightclick menu in the Explorer.
To add options:
1.
In the Windows Explorer, click View >

Folder Options.
2.
Click the File Types tab.
File Types tab

1058
3.
Scroll through the list to see if there is an NC file type or an NCC file type
as displayed in the graphic.
4.
If these types exist, you can edit them. If they do not exist, you can create
them.
5.
For this example, suppose NC File type exists.
6.
Highlight that file type and click the Edit button.
7.
The Edit File Type dialog box will be displayed.
8.
Suppose that only Open is displayed in the Actions box.

Highlight it and click the Edit button to see the contents of the Editing
Action dialog box.
9.
The Action box says Open. The Application box says:

C:\SURFCAM\Predator Software\Virtual CNC 3.4\PEditor.exe %1
1059
Press CTRL+C to copy this command.

10.
Click OK to return to the Edit File Type dialog box.
11.
Click New.
Editing action for type: NC File
Enter Print in the Action box.

12.
In the Application box you will enter almost the same command as in the
Editing action for type: NC File figure.
The only difference is that
-p is placed before %1:
New Action dialog box
C:\SURFCAM\Predator Software\Virtual CNC 3.4\PEditor.exe -p %1

Press CRTL+V to copy the previous command. Then insert -p before
%1.
20.5.2.2
When Starting Windows
To start the PEditor every time Windows starts:

1.
Open the Explorer.

1060
2.
Point to Peditor.exe in the C:\SURFCAM\Predator Software\Virtual CNC 3.4

folder.
3.
Press and hold the right mouse while you drag the mouse to the C:\
WINDOWS\Profiles\. . .\Start Menu\Programs\Startup folder.
4.
Release the mouse button.
5.
When you release the button, a menu will

be displayed. Choose Create Shortcut(s)
Here.
20.5.2.3
Start the Editor and Automatically Open a CNC Program
To start PEditor and automatically open a CNC program, double-click the file name
of the CNC program from the Windows Explorer.
File Association
This feature requires that the CNC programs file extension be associated with
peditor.exe from within Explorer. Multiple file extensions can be associated with
peditor.exe.
1061
See Set Default Version, page 909.

See the example in the figure File Types tab, page 1057 and notice that it says
the NC file opens with PEditor. This was established with the Application shown
in the figure Editing action for type: NC File, page 1059.
20.5.3
Screen Elements
By default, when PEditor is started, a new, blank CNC program appears on the
screen. The PEditor Window figure identifies the major screen elements.
Main Menu
CNC Machines Menu
Toolbar
Status bar
Keyboard Status
PEditor Window
20.5.3.1
Menus
File Menu, page 1065
Edit Menu, page 1087
Insert Menu, page 1092
Delete Menu, page 1098
NC Menu, page 1100
DNC Menu, page 1107
Options Menu, page 1117
Window Menu, page 1119
Help Menu, page 1176
1062
Note
Some commands carry out an action immediately; others display a

dialog box with options.
Selecting Commands with the Mouse

Click the name of a menu on the menu bar, and then click the command name.
To cancel a menu without selecting a command, click outside of the menu.
Selecting Commands with the Keyboard

Press ALT or F10 to select the menu bar. To select a command, press the key
for the underlined letter or number in the command name. To cancel a menu
without selecting a command, press ESC.
Selecting Commands with Shortcut Keys

The most common commands are available by pressing the shortcut keys
listed on the menu to the right of the command. For example, to save the
current CNC program press CTRL+S.
Features that lack a specific shortcut key can be accessed from the keyboard
with menu shortcut keys. For example ALT+H and then a K to display the
Shortcut Keys on the help screen.
FEATURE:
MOVEMENT
SHORTCUT
KEY(S)
FEATURE: SELECTION
SHORTCUT
KEY(S)
Previous line
Up Arrow
Previous line
Shift+Up Arrow
Next line
Down Arrow
Next line
Shift+Down Arrow
Previous character Left Arrow
Previous character
Shift+Left Arrow
Next character
Right Arrow
Next character
Shift+Right Arrow
Previous word
CTRL+Left
Arrow
Previous word
Shift+CTRL+Left
Arrow
Next word
CTRL+Right
Arrow
Next word
Shift+CTRL+Righ
t Arrow
Start of line
Home
Start of line
Shift+Home
End of line
End
End of line
Shift+End
Start of file
CTRL+Home
Start of file
Shift+CTRL+Hom
e
End of file
CTRL+End
End of file
Shift+CTRL+End
Up one window
Page Up
Up one window
Shift+Page Up
Down one window
Page Down
Down one window
Shift+Page Down
Select entire file
CTRL+A
FEATURE: INSERT
SHORTCUT
KEY(S)
SHORTCUT
KEY(S)
FEATURE: DELETE
Clipboard contents Shift+Insert
Selection or character Delete

at right
New Line
Enter
Cut to the clipboard
Shift+Delete
Space
Spacebar
Character left of the

cursor
Backspace
Current line
CTRL+D
FEATURE: FILE
SHORTCUT
KEY(S)
SHORTCUT
KEY(S)
FEATURE: EDIT
New file
CTRL+N
Cut to clipboard
Open existing file
CTRL+O
Copy to the clipboard CTRL+C
Close current file
CTRL+W
Paste contents of
clipboard
CTRL+V
Save current file
CTRL+S
Find specific
characters
CTRL+F
Save As
F12
Replace specific
characters
CTRL+H
Print current file
CTRL+P
Continue to find or
replace
F3
Close current
window
CTRL+F4
Goto a specific line
CTRL+G
Switch to next open CTRL+F6

file
Exit
20.5.3.2
1063
CTRL+X
Expression calculator CTRL+E
ALT+F4
Toolbar
PEditor includes a toolbar to provide quick access to common commands.
The toolbar provides quick access to commonly used commands.

Note
If you cant see all of the buttons, drag the CNC Machines Menu to the
right to uncover them.
1064
When you point to a tool and hover over it, the name of the button will be displayed.
You can choose to display the Toolbar with text identifying the buttons. See
Toolbar Style, page 1118.
Toolbar Buttons with Text and Icons
The Editor toolbar is displayed by default. Click Options > Toolbar > Off to turn it
off. To turn it back on, click Options > Toolbar > Small Icons (or Large Icons).
Every toolbar button has a corresponding menu command.
BUTTON
SEE
1.
New
New, page 1065
2.
Open
Open, page 1066
3.
Save
Save, page 1068
4.
Print
Print, page 1086
5.
Cut
Cut, page 1087
6.
Copy
Copy, page 1088
7.
Paste
Paste, page 1089
8.
Find
Find, page 1089
9.
Diff
Compare, page 1069
10.
Undo
Undo, page 1087
11.
Redo
Redo, page 1087
12.
Prev
Next Tool Change, page 1100
13.
Pick
Select Tool, page 1089
14.
Next
Next Tool Change, page 1100
15.
Recv
Receive from CNC, page 1108
16.
Prop
Properties, page 1112
17.
Plot
Backplot, page 1077
CNC Machines Menu

To change the current CNC machine, click the arrow on
the CNC Machines menu and select a CNC machine.
20.5.3.3
1065
Status Bar
The status bar displays the current line and column position of the cursor for the
active CNC program. It also displays a brief description of the currently selected
command or toolbar button.
The Status bar is displayed by default. Click Options > Status Bar to toggle it on or
off.
20.5.3.4
Context-Sensitive Help
Press F1 to obtain context-sensitive help.

Press CTRL+F1 to obtain What's This? help. Use this when your pointer is in a
data entry box on a dialog box.
Note
20.6
This is different from other SURFCAM help files in that there is no Whats
This? button and you must press CTRL+F1.
EDITOR MENUS
20.6.1
File Menu
20.6.1.1
New
When PEditor starts, a new blank CNC program named CNCCode1 opens.
PEditor assigns a temporary name to the CNC program until it is saved. To begin
working, simply start typing.
Click the New button or click File > New to create a new CNC program at
any time.
Note
The temporary name will increment for every new CNC program. For
example, the second new CNC program will be named CNCCode2 until
it is saved.
1066
20.6.1.2
Open
Click the Open button or click File > Open to open an existing CNC
program. The Open dialog box will be displayed.
Note
Check Read Only to review a CNC program without making changes.

If a CNC program is flagged Read Only, PEditor will not allow any edits.
PEditor supports opening multiple CNC programs at the same time and does not
define a limit to the number. The maximum number of multiple CNC programs
open at the same time depends on the amount of Windows virtual memory.
PEditor displays warning messages when memory gets low.
Note
The CNC program size is limited to 32 Megs per CNC program and can
be limited by the amount of Windows virtual memory.
20.6.1.3
Close
There are various methods to close the PEditor, the CNC program, or the current
window.
Note
If the Backplot window or the Compare window is open, it is considered

the current window.
See Exit, page 1086 to close the Editor.
METHOD
PROCEDURE
File Menu
Click File > Close to close the current window
Keyboard
Press CTRL+W or CTRL+F4 or to close the current Window.

ALT+F4 will close the Editor, not just the window.
Toolbar Button
Click the Close button located on the right side of the Main
Menu barnot on the Title barto close the active
Window.
METHOD
File Menu
1067
PROCEDURE
Click File > Close to close the current window
Control Menu
Double-click the current File Control Button
Double-click the Backplot Control Button
Double-click the Compare Control Button

Double-click the Control menu box on the left side of the Main
Menu barnot on the Title barto close the active window. Any
other open windows will remain open.
Editor Menu Bar and Toolbar
Backplot Menu Bar and Toolbars
Compare Menu Bar and Toolbars
It is a good practice to close a CNC program when you are finished with it in order
to free up memory.
Note
If a CNC program has changes that have not been saved, PEditor will
display a dialog box asking if you want to save the CNC program before
exiting. If you choose Yes and the CNC program has a temporary name,
PEditor will display the Save As dialog box. See Save, page 1068.
1068
20.6.1.4
Save
You can set the PEditor to automatically create backup copies of the CNC
programs. See Options Menu, page 1117.
Click the Save button or click File > Save to save a CNC program.
(Shortcut: CTRL+S)
Note
If the active CNC program has a temporary file name, for

example CNCCode1, the Save command becomes a Save As
command.
Note
If the active CNC program is flagged Read Only and changes have been
made, the Save command becomes a Save As command.
20.6.1.5
Save As
When you save a CNC program, PEditor saves it with its current name and
location. Use the Save As command to save another copy of a CNC program.
Naming CNC Programs

A name for a CNC program is valid if it fits the following criteria:
1.
File names can be up to 255 characters long including an optional file

extension.
2.
All characters are valid except the following characters * ? , ; [ ] + = \ / : |

< >.
3.
A period can be used only to separate the file name from the extension.
Note
Extensions are useful for distinguishing among different types of files.

For example, backup files have an extension of .BAK. Extensions can
be used to indicate the CNC programs appropriate CNC control. For
example, the extension of .F10 would indicate that the CNC program
is for a Fanuc 10.
Using Save As to copy a CNC Program

First save the active CNC program. Then click File > Save As. Type a new
name or select a new location for the copy, and click OK.
20.6.1.6
Save All
Click File > Save All to save all open CNC programs.
Note
The Save All command works like the Save and Save As commands.
20.6.1.7
1069
Compare
Click the Compare button or click File > Compare to compare the active
CNC program with a similar CNC program.
Note
If no CNC program is currently open, PEditor will display an Open dialog

box and will prompt you to open the first file. Another Open dialog box will
then be displayed for you to select the second file.
When the files are both open, the editor will display them side by side. The menus
will change and a compare toolbar will appear with several compare specific
buttons.
1070
BUTTON
FUNCTION
Display the start of both programs.
Top
Scroll up both programs. Keep the button depressed to quickly

scroll up both programs.
Scroll Up
To scroll either CNC program independently, click its individual

scroll bar.
Scroll down both programs. Keep the button depressed to
quickly scroll down both programs.
Scroll Down
Display the end of both programs.

Bottom
Find the Next Difference in both programs.

To use the menu, click Compare > Next Difference.
Next Difference
Include or accept the current difference in the original CNC

program.
Assign
Difference
To use the menu, click Compare > Assign Difference.

To edit either program independently, click in its window and
type.
Exit Compare. See Close, page 1066.
Exit
20.6.1.8
1071
Find File
Click File > Find File to search a hard drive or a network drive to find a CNC
program.
The Find File dialog box will be displayed. Specify the criteria and click OK.
PEditor will search the drive and build a list of files that match the specified
parameters.
The Found Files dialog box will be displayed. Double-click a file to open the CNC
program. Click the Reset button to return to the prior File Find dialog box.
20.6.1.9
Summary Information
Click File > Summary Information to summarize a CNC program. PEditor will
calculate travel limits, feed rate limits, spindle speed limits, feet of tape and other
related information for the active CNC program. To summarize a section of a CNC
program, highlight the appropriate section before selecting Summary Information
from the File menu. The Summary Information dialog box will be displayed.
1072
Tape Summary
Displays linear
travel limits
Displays rotary
travel limits
File Summary
Summary Information dialog box
Note
The Summary Information command may take several minutes on large

CNC programs. See the Percentage Done gauge on the status bar.
Note
Select lines of code prior to Summary Information to summarize the

selected lines only.
20.6.1.10
1073
Templates
Click File > Templates to configure PEditor for different styles of CNC controls.
Templates configure PEditor for the following commands:

1.
Backplot
2.
Change Feed Rates and Spindle Speeds
3.
Delete Block Skips, Comments, End of Blocks, Sequence Numbers and

Spaces
4.
Insert Block Skips, Comments, End of Blocks, Sequence Numbers and

Spaces
5.
Next and Previous Tool Change
6.
Send, Receive, and Terminal
7.
Summary Info
8.
Math Operations
When you click the Edit button, PEditor will display a Templates dialog box with
four tabs: Registers, Strings, Commands, and Arcs.
1074
Registers
Use the Registers tab of the Templates dialog box to configure registers to be
any character or series of characters.
Specify Register
Specify Registers
Output Format
Specify a Value for

preview display only
Display a preview of
the registers format.
The following table lists the registers available with their default values.
REGISTER NAME
DEFAULT
REGISTER NAME
DEFAULT
Axis Depth
Miscellaneous
Axis Horizontal
Peck Increment
Axis Lower Guide
Preparatory
Axis Rotary Depth
Rapid Plane
Axis Rotary Horizontal
Sequence Number
Axis Rotary Vertical
Spindle Speed
Axis Upper Guide
Tool Number
Axis Vertical
User0
Circle Center Depth
User1
REGISTER NAME
REGISTER NAME
Circle Center Horizontal I
User2
Circle Center Vertical
User3
Circle Radius
...
Diameter Offset
User7
Feed Rate
User8
Fixture Offset
User9
Length Offset
Note
DEFAULT
1075
DEFAULT
Registers User0 - User9 are especially useful for supporting

conversational style CNC programs.
Strings
Use the Strings tab of the Templates dialog box to configure strings to be any
character or series of characters.
Specify String
Output Value
The following table lists the strings available with their default values.
1076
STRING NAME
DEFAULT
Block Skip
Comment Start
Comment End
End of Block
Place Holder
Program Start
Program End
Commands
Specify
Command
Specify
Commands
Output Register
Specify
Commands
Output Value
Display Preview of
the Commands
Register
Format and Value
The following table lists the commands available with their default values.
COMMAND NAME
DEFAULT
COMMAND NAME
DEFAULT
Absolute
G90
Horz / Vert Plane
G17
Arc Clockwise
G2
Incremental
G91
Rapid
G0
Arc Counterclockwise G3
COMMAND NAME
DEFAULT
COMMAND NAME
DEFAULT
Depth / Horz Plane
G18
Tool Change
M6
Feed
G1
Vert / Depth Plane
G19
1077
Arcs
Use the Arcs tab of the Templates dialog box to configure Arcs and Helixes to
be any of the following circle center types.
Specify arc
and helix circle
center type.
20.6.1.11
Backplot
Click the Backplot button or click File > Backplot to backplot the active
CNC program.
1078
Drag this menu

bar to the right
to see all the
tools.
Click this Exit

button to close the
Backplot window.
Backplot Window
When Compare Mode is

active, the Plot From
Compare dialog box will
be displayed prompting
you to select which file to
Backplot.
Backplot has its own
toolbar and menu
commands. See Backplot Toolbar, page 1079.
Note
Menus and toolbar buttons can be clicked even while backplotting.
The Backplot window displays a graphical view of the tool motion. To backplot a
section of a CNC program, highlight the appropriate section before selecting
Backplot. The backplotter changes color at each tool change, based on the tool
1079
number, for example T1 is blue and T2 is green. Linear and circular feed motion is
shown with solid lines and arcs. Rapid motion is shown in dashed lines.
Exit Backplot
Click the Exit button in the upper right corner of the Backplot windownot the
Editor window. See Close, page 1066.
20.6.1.12
BUTTON
Backplot Toolbar
MENU
View > Zoom Fit
FUNCTION IN CURRENT VIEWPORT *

Zoom Fit: Fit the graphic to the screen.
Auto Fit: Automatically fit the current CNC
program whenever it exceeds the boundaries of the
current view.
Autofit works dynamically while the editor is
backplotting.
View > Zoom In
Zoom in on the toolpath graphics.
View > Zoom Out
Zoom out on the toolpath graphics.
View > Top View
Display the top view.
View > Front View
Display the front view.
View > Back View
Display the back view.
View > Bottom View Display the bottom view.

View > Right View
Display the right view.
1080
BUTTON
MENU
FUNCTION IN CURRENT VIEWPORT *
View > Left View
Display the left view.
View > Lathe View
Display the lathe view.

To display the lathe view correctly, verify that the
horizontal, vertical, depth, circle horizontal, circle
vertical, and circle depth axis are defined within the
templates. Lathes and mills cannot share the same
template since the axis definitions are so different.
For example, Axis Horizontal on a mill is usually an
X, while on a lathe it is typically a Z.
View > Isometric ViewDisplay the isometric view.

View > Axonometric
View
Display the axonometric view.
File > Print Backplot Print the toolpath graphics.

Note
You must use the button on the Backplot

toolbar, not the standard toolbar.
Note
Since clicking the Print Backplot button

prints using the defaults, the Print dialog
box will not be displayed.
Note
See Print Backplot, page 1081.
Single step each line.
Perform the backplot.

Pause the backplot.
Stop the backplot.
1081
* To use a different viewport, click the desired viewport then click the appropriate
button on the toolbar.
20.6.1.13
Backplot Menus
Most of the commands on the Backplot menus are the same as those on the
regular Editor menus. Differences are noted in the following.
File Menu
New, page 1065.
Open, page 1066.
Close, page 1066.
Save, page 1068.
Save As, page 1068.
Save All, page 1068.
Printer Setup, page 1085.
Print, page 1086.
Print Backplot
Click File > Print Backplot to print the toolpath graphics or click the button
on the Backplot toolbar. (Shortcut: CTRL+P)
Note: You must use the button on the Backplot toolbar, not the standard toolbar.
To print from a different viewport, first click the desired viewport.

Exit
See Exit, page 1086.
Edit Menu
See Edit Menu, page 1087.
Insert Menu
See Insert Menu, page 1092.
Delete Menu
See Delete Menu, page 1098.
NC Menu
See NC Menu, page 1100.
1082
DNC Menu
DNC stands for Direct Numerical Control. See DNC Menu, page 1107.
View Menu
Zoom fit
All of the other commands have corresponding toolbar buttons. See
Backplot Toolbar, page 1079.
Options Menu
Toolbar
See Toolbar, page 1117.
Backplot View
Vertical Backplot View
1083
Horizontal Backplot View
If it appears that you only have one window, you might have to drag the
splitter bar from the top or bottom for horizontal viewfrom the right or left
for vertical view. See Window Menu, page 1084.
Background Color
Click Options > Background Color.
For each of the following, SURFCAM
will display a Color dialog box for you
to choose a color.
Editor
Your choice will become the
background color for the editor.
Text
Your choice will become the color
for the text in the editor.
1084
Backplot
Your choice will become the background color for the backplot window.
Font
See Font, page 1119.
Status Bar
See Status Bar, page 1118.
Backup Files
See Backup Files, page 1119.
Window Menu
For all commands except Split, see Window Menu, page 1119.
Split Bars
1085
Split Window
Split
To display multiple viewports within an open backplot window, do one of the
following:
1.
Drag the split bar.
2.
Double-click the split bar.
3.
Click Window > Split.
The cursor will change into a splitter bar. Click on the position to
split the current open backplot into multiple viewports.
Note
Every viewport supports independent zoom in, zoom

out, fit, pan, and view commands.
Drag either split bar to resize the viewports.

Double-click a split bar to undo that split.
Help
See Help Menu, page 1176.
20.6.1.14
Printer Setup
Click File > Printer Setup to change printers or their configuration. The Printer
Setup dialog box will be displayed.
1086
20.6.1.15
Print
Click File > Print to print the active CNC program. (Shortcut: CTRL+P)
The SURFCAM automatically prints the current date, time, page number,
and file name in a header on every page for ISO 9000 compatibility.
Note
If you use the menu command or the shortcut, the Print dialog box will be
displayed.
If you use the toolbar button, the Print dialog box will not be displayed.
The printer defaults will be used.
Also see the figure Toolbar Buttons with Text and Icons, page 1064.
20.6.1.16
List of Last Files Opened
The PEditor keeps track of the four CNC programs worked on most recently. One
of these CNC programs can quickly be opened by selecting it from the bottom of
the File menu.
20.6.1.17
Exit
There are various methods to close the PEditor, the CNC program, or the current
window.
See Close, page 1066 to close the CNC program or the current window.
Note
If either the Backplot window or the Compare window is open, it is

considered the current window.
Here we consider closing the Editor program:
METHOD
PROCEDURE
File Menu
Click File > Exit to close the PEditor.
Keyboard
Press ALT+F4 to close the Editor, not just the window.
Toolbar Button
Click the Close button located on the right side of the Title
barnot on the Menu barto close the Editor.
Control Menu
Double-click the Control menu box on the left side of the

Title barnot on the Menu barto close the PEditor.
1087
Editor Menu Bar and Toolbar
Exiting PEditor closes all active CNC programs.

If a CNC program has changes that have not been saved, PEditor will display a
dialog box asking if you want to save the CNC program before exiting. If you
choose Yes and the CNC program has a temporary name, PEditor will display the
Save As dialog box. See Save, page 1068.
20.6.2
Edit Menu
20.6.2.1
Undo
Click the Undo button or click Edit > Undo to undo the effects of the last
command. (Shortcut: CTRL+Z)
The Undo command can be repeated to undo the effects of the last 256
commands per CNC program.
20.6.2.2
Redo
Click the Redo button or click Edit > Redo to redo the effects of the last
command, after an undo.
NoteRedo is only available after an Undo command.
The Redo command can be repeated to redo the effects of the last 256 Undo
commands per CNC program.
20.6.2.3
Cut
Press backspace or delete during data entry to correct simple mistakes.
Deleting with the Cut

To delete large sections of a CNC program, first select the sections. Then
click the Cut button or click Edit > Cut.
1088
Deleting with the Keyboard
Several keys and key combinations can be used to delete sections of a CNC
program. See Editor Shortcuts, page 1193.
Moving with Cut
The Cut command can also be used to move sections of a CNC program. To move
sections of a CNC program, select the sections and click the Cut button or click
Edit > Cut. The selected section of CNC code is deleted from the active CNC
program and stored in a temporary location called the clipboard. Place the cursor
into the desired position within a CNC program and click the Paste button or click
Edit > Paste. A copy of the CNC code will then be inserted at the current cursor
position.
Moving with the Keyboard
KEY(S)
CUT / MOVE
CTRL+X
Cut selected text to the clipboard.
CTRL+V
Paste clipboard contents to cursor position.
Shift+Delete
Cut selected text to the clipboard.
Shift+Insert
Paste clipboard contents to cursor position.
Drag and Drop

Use Drag and Drop to quickly move CNC code within a CNC program.
1.
Select the CNC code.
2.
While code is highlighted, keep the mouse button depressed and drag the
selected CNC code to a new position.
3.
Drop the code by releasing the mouse button.
20.6.2.4
Copy
To copy sections of a CNC program:
1.
Select the sections.
2.
Click the Copy button or click Edit > Copy.

Shortcuts: CTRL+C or CTRL+Insert
The selected section of CNC code will be copied from the active CNC
program and stored on the clipboard.
3.
1089
Place the cursor in the desired position within a CNC program and click the
Paste button or click Edit > Paste.
Shortcuts: CTRL+V or Shift+Insert
A copy of the CNC code will be inserted at the current cursor position.
20.6.2.5
Paste
To paste the contents of the clipboard into the active CNC program:
1.
Select the sections you want to copy to the Clipboard.
2.
Use either the Cut or the Copy command.
3.
Place the cursor in the desired position within a CNC program and click the
Paste button or click Edit > Paste.
Shortcuts: CTRL+V or Shift+Insert
20.6.2.6
Select Tool
Select all blocks that use the current tool. To use this command, position
the cursor within the range of blocks you want selectedafter one tool
change and before anotherand click Select Tool.
This command can be very effective when used with Change Feed Rates, Change
Spindle Speeds, Backplotting, Math Operations, etc.
20.6.2.7
Select To Bookmark
Select all characters between the cursor position and the bookmark that you set
previously. (Shortcut: CTRL+B)
20.6.2.8
Select All
Click Edit > Select All to select or highlight the entire active CNC program prior to
issuing a second command. (Shortcut: CTRL+A)
20.6.2.9
Find
Click the Find button or click Edit > Find to search for specific characters
or CNC code. (Shortcut: CTRL+F).
The Find dialog box will be displayed.
1090
Finding CNC Codes
If PEditor has trouble finding or replacing specific characters or CNC code, verify
the following:
1.
If Match Case is checked, PEditor will find only text with the same
capitalization as you entered.
2.
If From Cursor position is checked, PEditor will find text only after the current
position.
3.
Verify that there arent any spaces before or after the sequence of
characters. For example, if you have a space after a CNC code in the Find,
PEditor will not find that CNC code when it is immediately followed by
another CNC code.
20.6.2.10
Replace
Click Edit > Replace to search for, and replace specific characters or CNC code.
(Shortcut: CTRL+H).
The Find and Replace dialog box will be displayed.
20.6.2.11
1091
Continue
Click Edit > Continue to continue the last Find or Replace command, even between
multiple CNC programs. (Shortcut: F3).
20.6.2.12
Goto
Click Edit > Goto to find specific CNC registers. (Shortcut: CTRL+G)
The Go To dialog box will be displayed.
Specify register
to find.
Specify which
occurrence.
Indicate whether
you want the search to
begin from the
beginning or from the
cursor position.
1092
20.6.2.13
Jump to Bookmark
Move cursor to bookmark. (Shortcut: CTRL+J)
20.6.3
Insert Menu
20.6.3.1
ASCII Code
Click Insert > ASCII Code to insert specific

ASCII codes. The ASCII Table dialog box
will be displayed.
Note
20.6.3.2
Some characters will display

differently based on the currently
selected font.
Block Skips
To insert block skips, select the lines of CNC code and then click Insert > Block
Skips. A block skip will be inserted at the beginning of each selected line of CNC
code.
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6
/T1 M6
M3 S5000
/M3 S5000
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9. /G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
1093
Defining Block Skips
Click File > Templates, choose a template, and click the Edit button to configure
Block Skips to be any character or series of characters. The default Block skip is
a forward slash.
20.6.3.3
Bookmark
Insert a bookmark, or reference point, at the current cursor position in the NC

program file. This bookmark does not alter the file and it exists only for the edit
session in which you set it. (Shortcut: CTRL+M)
20.6.3.4
Comments
To insert comments, select the lines of CNC code and then click Insert >
Comments. Comments will be inserted for each selected line of CNC code.
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6
(T1 M6)
M3 S5000
(M3 S5000)
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9. (G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.)
Defining Comments
Comments to be any character or series of characters. The default comment is an
open parenthesis and a close parenthesis.
20.6.3.5
Date
To insert the current date, position the cursor and click Insert > Date.
20.6.3.6
End Of Blocks
To insert end of blocks, select the lines of CNC code and then click Insert > End
Of Blocks. An End of Block will be inserted at the end of each selected line of CNC
code.
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6
T1 M6$
M3 S5000
M3 S5000$
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9. G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.$

1094
Defining End Of Block
End Of Block to be any character or series of characters. The default End Of Block
is a dollar sign.
20.6.3.7
Expression
Click Insert > Expression to insert the result of a complex expression at the cursor
position. (Shortcut: CTRL+E)
The Expression command solves complex math operations with support for trig
functions and variables. The Expressions dialog box will be displayed.
Type an
expression
using any
combination
of constants,
functions,
or variables.
Click to insert the

variable into the
expression.
Preview expression
results dynamically.
Expression Variables
The following table lists the expression variables available. The values are
displayed in the dialog box and are based on the position of the cursor.
VARIABLES
DESCRIPTION
Last Axis Rotary

Horizontal
Last Axis Rotary

Vertical
Last Axis Rotary Depth
Last Feed Rate
PI
Math Constant
Last Spindle Speed
Last Tool Number
Last Axis Upper Guide
Last Axis Lower Guide
Last Axis Horizontal
Last Axis Vertical
Last Axis Depth
1095
The variables are inserted using the formatting specified in the current template.
Basic Operators
The following table lists the basic operators available in the order of evaluation with
a description.
OPERATOR
DESCRIPTION
Exponentiation
Multiplication
Division
Addition
Subtraction
The above operators can be typed or the appropriate button can be clicked with
the mouse.
Complex Expressions
Use parentheses to force the order of evaluation with a complex expression.
Math Functions
See Math Functions, page 1177 for a complete table listing of all the advanced
functions.
1096
Sample Expressions
The following table lists a few sample expressions and their results.
20.6.3.8
EXPRESSION
RESULT
F*2
36.
(F*2)+5.5
41.5
2*COS(PI)
1.997
File
Position the cursor at the point of insertion and then click Insert > File to insert
existing CNC code, sub programs, subroutines or any file. The Open NC Code or
ToolPath File dialog box will be displayed.
If the file is not listed, verify that the correct drive and folder are selected. Also
verify that the Files of Type box specifies the correct file type. To list all CNC
programs in the current folder, select All Files in the Files of Type box.
20.6.3.9
Sequence Numbers
Click Insert > Sequence Numbers to display the Sequence Numbers dialog box.
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6
N10 T1 M6
M3 S5000
N15 M3 S5000
1097
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9. N20 G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.

Note
Select lines of code prior to Insert Sequence Numbers to add them to the
Defining Sequence Numbers
Sequence numbers to be any character or series of characters. The default
sequence number is the letter N. In addition, the Templates command supports full
register formatting for all sequence number values.
20.6.3.10
Spaces
Click Insert > Spaces to insert spaces before every defined register.
Note
BEFORE
AFTER
T1M6
T1 M6
M3S5000
M3 S5000
G1X1.5Y2.4F9.
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
Select lines of code prior to Insert > Spaces to add them to the selected
lines only.
Defining Spaces
The PEditor can be configured to insert spaces before any defined register.
Registers to be any character or series of characters. See Registers, page 1074.
20.6.3.11
Time
Click Insert > Time to insert the current time at the cursor position.
1098
20.6.4
Delete Menu
20.6.4.1
Block Skip Lines
Click Delete > Block Skip Lines. Each line of CNC code that starts with a block skip
will be deleted.
BEFORE
AFTER
/T1 M6
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
/M3 S5000
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
Note
Select lines of code prior to Delete Block Skips to delete them from the
Defining Block Skips
Block Skips to be any character or series of characters. The default Block skip is
a forward slash.
20.6.4.2
Truncate Comments
Click Delete > Comments. Each comment will be truncated from every line of CNC
code.
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6 (1/2 EM) T1 M6
(JOB 123-456)
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.

Note
Select lines of code prior to Delete > Comments to delete them from the
Defining Comments
Comments to be any character or series of characters. The default comment is an
open parenthesis and a close parenthesis.
20.6.4.3
1099
End of Blocks
Click Delete > End of Blocks. Each End Of Block will be deleted from every line of
CNC code.
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6$
T1 M6
M3 S5000$
M3 S5000
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.$G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.

Note
Select lines of code prior to Delete > End of Blocks to delete them from
the selected lines only.
Defining End Of Block
End Of Block to be any character or series of characters. The default End Of Block
is a dollar sign.
20.6.4.4
Sequence Numbers
Click Delete > Sequence Numbers.

BEFORE
AFTER
N10 T1 M6
T1 M6
N15 M3 S5000
M3 S5000
N20 G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.

Note
Select lines of code prior to Delete Sequence Numbers to delete them

from the selected lines only.
Defining Sequence Numbers
the Sequence Number to be any character or series of characters. The default
sequence number is the letter N.
20.6.4.5
Spaces
Click Delete > Spaces.
1100
Note
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6
T1M6
M3 S5000
M3S5000
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
G1X1.5Y2.4F9.
Select lines of code prior to Delete > Spaces to delete them from the
20.6.4.6
Line
Click Delete > Line to delete the current line. (Shortcut: CTRL+D)
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6
T1 M6
M3 | S5000
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
20.6.4.7
Truncate Line
To truncate the current line, position the cursor at the truncation point and click
Delete > Line. The current line will be truncated at the cursor position.
20.6.5
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6
T1 M6
M3 | S5000
M3
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
NC Menu
20.6.5.1
Next Tool Change
Click the Next Tool Change button or click NC > Next Tool Change to find
the next tool change.
Defining Tool Changes
Tool Changes to be any character or series of characters. The default Tool
Change command is an M6.
20.6.5.2
1101
Previous Tool Change
Click the Previous Tool Change button or click NC > Previous Tool
Change to find the previous tool change.
Defining Tool Changes
Tool Changes to be any character or series of characters. The default Tool
Change command is an M6.
20.6.5.3
Change Feed Rates
Click NC > Change Feed Rates to display the Feed Rate dialog box.
Drag the dial to

specify values.
Optional:
Set Minimum and
Maximum Limits
Note
Select lines of code prior to selecting NC > Change Feed Rates to edit
them on the selected lines only.
Defining Feed Rates
Feed rates to be any character or series of characters. The default feed rate is the
1102
letter F. In addition, the Templates command supports full register formatting for
all feed rate values.
20.6.5.4
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6
T1 M6
M3 S5000
M3 S5000
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F4.5
Change Spindle Speeds
Click NC > Change Spindle Speed to display the Spindle Speed dialog box.
Drag the dial to

specify values.
Optional:
Set Minimum and
Maximum Limits
Note
Select lines of code prior to selecting NC > Change Spindle Speeds to

edit them on the selected lines only.
Defining Spindle Speeds
Spindle Speeds to be any character or series of characters. The default spindle
speed is the letter S. In addition, the Templates command supports full register
formatting for all spindle speed values.
20.6.5.5
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6
T1 M6
M3 S5000
M3 S2500
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9.
1103
Resequence
The Resequencing Properties dialog box will be displayed so you can resequence
existing sequence numbers. This process is twice as fast as deleting existing
sequence numbers and re-inserting different ones. This method simplifies the
process when sequence numbers are used to support dual turret lathes or other
specialized machines.
20.6.5.6
Math Operations
Click NC > Math Operations to change a register based on the result of a complex
expression. The Math Operation command solves complex math operations with
support for trig functions and variables. The Register Math Operations dialog box
will be displayed.
Specify a
Register or
Choose Custom
Type an
expression using
any combination
of constants and
functions
Preview
expression
results
dynamically.
1104
Basic Operators
The following table lists the basic operators available in the order of evaluation with
a description.
OPERATOR
DESCRIPTION
Exponentiation
Multiplication
Division
Addition
Subtraction
Complex Expressions
Use parenthesis to force the order of evaluation with a complex math operation.
Advanced Functions
See Math Functions, page 1177 for a complete table listing of all the advanced
functions.
Registers
REGISTER NAME
DEFAULT
Axis Depth
Axis Horizontal
Axis Lower Guide
Axis Rotary Depth
Axis Rotary Horizontal
Axis Rotary Vertical
Axis Upper Guide
Axis Vertical
Circle Center Depth
Circle Center Horizontal
Circle Center Vertical
Circle Radius
Diameter Offset
Feed Rate
Fixture Offset
Length Offset
REGISTER NAME
DEFAULT
Miscellaneous
Peck Increment
Preparatory
Rapid Plane
Sequence Number
Spindle Speed
Tool Number
1105
User0
User1
User2
User3
...
User7
User8
User9
Note
Select lines of code prior to selecting NC > Math Operations to edit them
on the selected lines only.
Defining Registers
Registers to be any character or series of characters. The defaults are shown on
the previous page. In addition, the Templates command supports full register
formatting for all numeric values.
BEFORE
AFTER
T1 M6
T1 M6
M3 S5000
M3 S5000
G1 X1.5 Y2.4 F9. G1 X4.5 Y2.4 F9.
20.6.5.7
DNC Restart
Click NC > DNC Restart to create a CNC program after a tool breaks. DNC Restart
creates a copy of the current CNC program, deletes every line above the cursor,
and inserts the program start register at the beginning.
1106
Note
The original CNC program is not affected by the DNC Restart command.
Restart from previous tool change
Follow these steps to restart from the previous tool change.

1.
Click the Next or Previous Tool Change button to find the appropriate restart
position.
2.
Position the cursor to the desired restart position.
3.
Select DNC Restart from the NC menu.
4.
Review and edit the new CNC program to eliminate any potential errors.
5.
Optionally backplot the new CNC program to graphically verify the restart
position.
6.
Save the new CNC program.
Restart from any line
Follow the steps on the following page to restart from any line.
1.
Position the cursor to the desired restart position. The Find and Goto
commands can be especially helpful.
2.
Click the Previous Tool Change button.
3.
Select the appropriate number of tool change lines.
4.
Click the Copy button.
5.
Click the Undo button three times to return to the appropriate restart
position.
6.
Select DNC Restart from the NC menu.
7.
Position the cursor below the number of lines defined in the program start
register.
8.
Click the Paste button.
9.
Review and edit the new CNC program to eliminate any potential errors.
10.
Optionally backplot the new CNC program to graphically verify the restart
position.
11.
Save the new CNC program.
20.6.6
1107
DNC Menu
20.6.6.1
Send to CNC
Click the Send to CNC button or click DNC > Send To CNC to send the
active CNC program to a CNC machine. The Sending dialog box will be
displayed. The bottom portion of that dialog box is displayed below.
Displays the total size in bytes and feet of tape
Displays characters
per second,
characters sent, and
feet of tape sent
Displays the
current RS-232
communication
port parameters
Displays the current

signal state of the major
RS-232 wires.
Note
Click OK to abort
the send gracefully.
Click Cancel to
abort the send immediately.
The Cancel button aborts the Send to CNC command by sending the
End Sequence defined below.
Defining Send to CNC
Click DNC > Properties to configure the Send To CNC command to add any
character or series of characters. The following send sequence is always used.
Start Sequence
Conversation Send Start String
Program Send Start String
Sequence per Line of CNC Program
Line Send Start String
<one line of the CNC program>
Line Send End String
1108
CR/LF Send Translation

Line Send Delay
Sequence per Character of CNC Program
<one character of the CNC program>
Character Send Translation
Character Send Delay
End Sequence
Program Send End String
Conversation Send End String
Note
Multiple send configurations per CNC machine can be defined with the
Templates and Properties command.
Send from Disk
To send a CNC program directly from disk, close all open CNC programs prior to
clicking the Send To CNC button or selecting the Send To CNC command from
the DNC menu.
Note
Send from Disk supports local floppy drives, local hard disk drives, and
remote network drives.
Send in the Background
Every Send works in the background, allowing for editing, backplotting, or running
other applications in the foreground.
Note
Under Windows 95, ill-behaved foreground applications can interrupt,

delay, or even hang sending CNC programs in the background. Windows
NT is highly recommended for sending CNC programs in the
background.
20.6.6.2
Receive from CNC
Click the Receive from CNC button or click DNC > Receive From CNC to
display the DNC Receive dialog box.
Displays the last 4000 characters

of the CNC program currently being received
Displays characters
per second, characters
received, and feet
of tape received
RS-232
communication port
parameters

RS-232 wires.
Defining Receive from CNC
Click DNC > Properties to configure the Receive from CNC command. The
following receive sequence is always used.
Sequence per Line of CNC Program
<one line of the CNC program>
CR/LF Receive Translation
Sequence per Character of CNC Program
<one character of the CNC program>
Character Receive Translation
1109
1110
Receive in the Background
Every Receive works in the background, allowing for editing, backplotting, or

running other applications in the foreground.
Note
20.6.6.3

delay, or even hang receiving CNC programs in the background.
Windows NT is highly recommended for receiving CNC programs in the
background.
Terminal
Click DNC > Terminal to remotely access a CNC machine. The Terminal dialog
will be displayed.
Note
Not all CNC machines support terminal or remote RS-232 access. Some
CNC machines require terminal or remote access prior to any send,
receive or DNC operations. See PEditor Overview, page 1054 and to the
controls documentation for additional details.
1111
Displays the last 4000 characters

received from the CNC machine
Displays the
current RS-232
communication
port
parameters

RS-232 wires.
Click the Send or Receive buttons to begin sending or receiving a CNC program.
Defining Terminal
Click DNC > Properties to configure the Terminal command.
Terminal in the Background
Terminal works in the background allowing for editing, backplotting, or running

other applications in the foreground.
Note

delay, or even hang terminal. Windows NT is highly recommended for
using terminal in the background.
1112
20.6.6.4
Properties
Click the Properties button or click DNC > Properties to edit the current
DNC properties. Properties configure the following commands:
1.
Send to CNC
2.
Receive from CNC
3.
Terminal
Note
To create, rename, copy or delete CNC controls, select Templates from

the File menu. The CNC Library dialog box will be displayed.
Note
Properties and Templates share a common library.
20.6.6.4.1
RS-232 Properties
Properties can be configured for almost every CNC control using the following
dialog box.
20.6.6.4.2
Events
Defining Event Strings

Click DNC > Properties > Events to configure Event strings to be any
character or series of characters.
1113
1114
Specify event
string.
Specify event
strings output
value.
Note
Special characters can be specified using the following format \n

where
n=0-255 and n is the characters ASCII value in decimal. For example,
specifying the conversation start string to \013\010 would output a
blank line at the beginning of every CNC program sent to the CNC
machine. See SURFCAM NC Editor, page 1198.
The following table lists the strings available.

STRING NAME
STRING NAME
Comment End
Line Send End
Comment Start
Line Send Start
Conversation Send End
Program Send End
Conversation Send Start Program Send Start

Defining Event Constants
Click DNC > Properties > Events to configure Event constants to slow down
RS-232 communications to older CNC controls.
1115
Specify event
constant.
Specify event
constants value
in milliseconds.
The following table lists the constants available.
CONSTANT NAME
Character Send Delay
Line Send Delay
See:
DNC Setups, page 1125,
BTR Setups, page 1190, and to
RS-232 Basics, page 1120.
20.6.6.4.3
Translate
Translation tables provide comprehensive configuration of every character sent

or received by the PEditor. ASCII to EIA, EIA to ASCII, ASCII to ISO, ISO to
ASCII and custom translations are possible using the Translate tab within the
Properties dialog box.
1116
Displays receive
character
and its
ASCII value
Specify
Send CR and
LF translation.
Option Cells
Click the option cell to remove, replace, or delay each sent/received
character.
Value Cells
Click the value cell to specify the values used to replace or delay each sent/
received character.
See:
DNC Setups, page 1125,
BTR Setups, page 1190, and to
RS-232 Basics, page 1120.
Translate Examples
The following examples solve common DNC problems using the Translate Tab
within the Properties Command.
1.
Deleting Leaders and Trailers

The following example will automatically delete leaders and trailers during a
Receive From CNC command.
RECEIVE TRANSLATION
\000
Remove
2.
1117
Deleting Extra Carriage Returns

The following example will automatically delete extra carriage returns during
a Receive From CNC command.
RECEIVE TRANSLATION
3.
\013
Remove
\010
Replace
VALUE
\013\010
Deleting Punch Codes

The following example will automatically delete punch codes during a
RECEIVE TRANSLATION
4.
\018
Remove
\020
Remove
Deleting End of Tape Codes

The following example will automatically delete end of tape codes during a
RECEIVE TRANSLATION
5.
\004
Remove
\003
Remove
Deleting Spaces
The following example will automatically delete spaces during a Send To
CNC command.
SEND TRANSLATION
\032
20.6.7
Remove
Options Menu
20.6.7.1
Toolbar
Some of the following commands should not be used from the Backplot menu.
1118
Small Icons
The Small Icons toolbar is displayed by default. If Large Icons are currently
being used, click Options > Toolbar > Small Icons to place a check mark in front
of Small Icons and enable the display of the small icons.
Large Icons
The Large Icons toolbar is often used in touch screen applications. Click
Options > Toolbar > Large Icons to place a check mark in front of Large Icons
and enable the display of the large icons.
Toolbar Style
Classic or Explorer style buttons
Classic Style
Explorer Style
Text Icons
Display text under the icons.
Icons Only
Display icons without text.
Off
Click Options > Toolbar > Off to turn off the display of the Editor Toolbar. To
turn it back on again, click either Options > Toolbar > Large Icons or Options >
Toolbar > Small Icons.
Note
20.6.7.2
If the toolbar is turned off, select the CNC programs maximize button
to take advantage of the additional space.
Status Bar
The status bar is displayed by default. Click Options > Status Bar to toggle the
Status Bar on or off.
Note
20.6.7.3
If the status bar is toggled off, select the CNC programs maximize button
to take advantage of the additional space.
Background Color
Click Options > Background Color to display the Color dialog box.
1119
Choose a color from the Basic colors, the previously defined Custom colors, or
click the Define Custom Colors button to specify a unique color.
20.6.7.4
Text Color
Click Options > Text Color to display the Color dialog box.
Choose a color from the Basic colors, the previously defined Custom colors, or
click the Define Custom Colors button to specify a unique color.
20.6.7.5
Font
Click Edit > Font to change the CNC code display. The Font dialog box will be
displayed.
20.6.7.6
Backup Files
PEditor can create backup files. Click Options > Backup Files to toggle this option
on or off. Backup files are assigned the BAK extension by default. If a CNC
program gets accidentally deleted or corrupted beyond repair, revert to the backup
file.
Note
20.6.8
Before using a backup file for production work, update the backup CNC
program for any recent changes.
Window Menu
This chapter provides instructions for using all window commands grouped in the
Window Menu. PEditor supports working with multiple CNC programs at the same
time. Each CNC program has a separate window.
Cascade, Vertical Tile, Horizontal Tile
These are the standard Windows display commands.
Arrange Icons
To neatly arrange minimized open CNC programs, click Window > Arrange Icons.
List of Current Files
To switch to a different open CNC program, select among the list of currently open
files at the bottom of the Window menu.
1120
20.7
DNC SETUP AND REFERENCE
20.7.1
RS-232 Basics
This chapter provides an introduction to the RS-232 standard and how it relates to
CNC machines.
Even though RS-232 (Electronic Industry Association
recommended standard number 232) communication is well
defined, getting it to work correctly can be challenging. The
standard was initially designed to connect terminals and
modems and these terms are still used in the industry. The
computer is the terminal or the data terminal equipment
(DTE) and the CNC is the modem or the data
communication equipment (DCE). This manual will use the terms computer and CNC
for simplification
.
Note
The standard 25 pin serial port will be used in all wiring diagrams in this
manual.
20.7.1.1
Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits and Stop Bits
These terms describe the format of the CNC program sent through the RS-232
cables. The computer and the CNC must have matched baud rates, parity, data
bits and stop bits. When these are set incorrectly, a transferred CNC program will
be garbled.
20.7.1.2
Flow Control
Flow control is the ability to pause communication and allow a CNC to process the
CNC program received from a faster computer. Flow control can be implemented
in software or hardware. Software flow control adds certain characters to the CNC
program to notify the computer or CNC machine of its status. Hardware flow
control monitors the transfer of the CNC program by changing the state of the flow
control lines in the RS-232 cable. It is important to verify that the cable contains
the correct wiring if hardware flow control is used. When flow control is set
incorrectly, garbled CNC programs or lost information will develop as the transfer
progresses.
20.7.1.3
1121
Cable Installation
When installing RS-232 cable, try to avoid RF and EMF

noise. Too much RF and EMF noise will interfere with the
transfer of CNC programs over long cable distances with
fast baud rates. If problems persist:
1.
Use shielded twisted pair cabling with a drain wire.

For example, Belden cable number 8723.
2.
Attach the drain wire to pin one on the PC connector only.
3.
Move cable away from power conduits.
4.
Move cable away from electrical motors including air conditioners, air
compressors, and machine tool motors.
5.
Move cable away from light fixtures.
6.
Move cable away from welding and EDM equipment.
20.7.1.4
Cabling
The following wiring diagrams assume there is a standard DB25 pin RS-232 port
on the CNC control. One-way communication can be achieved by connecting the
transmit line and the signal ground line.
WIRING DIAGRAM (SEND ONLY)

CNC CONTROL
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
8 Received Line Signal Det.
9 Reserved
...
...
25
25 Unused
In order to receive information from the CNC, add in the receive line.
1122
WIRING DIAGRAM (SEND AND RECEIVE)

CNC CONTROL
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
9 Reserved
...
...
25
25 Unused
Since the only lines that are connected are for data communication, a cable wired
per the above diagram will support software flow control only.
20.7.1.5
Hardware Flow Control
In order to support hardware flow control, the request to send and clear to send
lines also need to be connected. The computer will use the request to send line to
notify the CNC that it is ready to send information. The computer then waits for the
CNC to set the clear to send line before it transfers any information. Similarly, the
CNC will set its request to send line to indicate that it is ready for information, and
wait for the computer to set the clear to send line before it transfers any
information. Connect the request to send line of the computer to the clear to send
line of the CNC and connect the clear to send line of the computer to the request
to send line of the CNC. The following wiring diagram is the minimum required
cable for using hardware flow control.
WIRING DIAGRAM (HARDWARE)

CNC CONTROL
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
1123
WIRING DIAGRAM (HARDWARE)

CNC CONTROL
Note
PC 25 PIN
9 Reserved
...
...
25
25 Unused
When installing RS-232 cables, have the following tools on hand;

Adjustable Pliers, Crimp Tool, Electrical Tape, Flat Screwdriver, Needle
Nose Pliers, Ohm Meter, Phillips Screwdriver, Pins, Shells, Soldering
Iron, Ties, Wire Connectors, Wire Cutter, Wire Markers, and Wire
Stripper.
The following table lists the standard RS-232 DB9 pins and their descriptions.
9 PIN RS-232
PIN
FUNCTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Received Line Signal Detect

Received Data
Transmitted Data
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Ring Indicator
The following table lists the standard DB25 pins RS-232 and their descriptions.
1124
25 PIN RS-232
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
20.7.1.6
FUNCTION
Protective Ground
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Received Line Signal Detector
Reserved
Reserved
Unused
Secondary Received Line Signal
Detector
Secondary Clear To Send
Secondary Transmitted Data
Transmission Signal Element Timing
Secondary Received Data
Receiver Signal Element Timing
Unused
Secondary Request To Send
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Quality Detector
Ring Indicator
Data Signal Rate Selector
Transmit Signal Element Timing
Unused
Cable Lengths
The quality of the cable will determine the maximum lengths and baud rates. The
following table lists recommended cables, guidelines for shielding and maximum
cable lengths.
Note
BELDEN # PAIRS
CABLE
MAXIMUM LENGTH
8102
24 ga.
190 feet
8103
24 ga.
190 feet
8132
28 ga.
220 feet
8133
28 ga.
220 feet
1125
Greater distances can be achieved with the use of short haul modems,
RS-422 converters or fiber optic converters.
20.7.1.7
DNC RS-232 Worksheet
Use the worksheet Worksheets, page 1195 to assist and record the setup process
for every CNC machine.
20.7.2
DNC Setups
The following is an RS-232 communication guide on setup and configuration for

common CNC controls.
Note
Due to the vast number of different machine tools, CNC controls, builders,
and OEMs, SURFCAM cannot guarantee that the following information is
current with respect to any particular CNC machine.
PEditor supports any CNC control that can bi-directionally communicate via its RS232 port using ASCII and ISO formats using industry standard software or hardware
flow control. In addition, PEditor supports any ASCII serial device including BTRs or
tape punches. Older controls can be interfaced using the PEditor BTR. See BTR
Setups, page 1190 for a comprehensive list of supported controls.
Due to manual size limitations, not every CNC control setup could be included. See
CNC Setups, page 1183 for a comprehensive list of supported CNC controls along
with their appropriate document names.
Note
Recommended baud rates should be used as a starting point and can be

increased after confidence in wiring and line noise is verified.
1.
Anilam Crusader p. 1126
2.
Bridgeport BOSS 3, 4, 5 and 6 p. 1129 14.
Fanuc 10, 11, 12, and 15 p. 1151
3.
Bridgeport BOSS 8,9 and 10 p. 1131
15.
Fanuc 16, 18, 160 and 180 p. 1154
4.
Centurion 5 p. 1132
16.
Haas Mill and Lathe p. 1158
5.
Decitek Tape Punch p. 1135
17.
Heidenhain 145 - 412 p. 1160
13.
Fanuc 6 and 9 / GN 6 and 9 p. 1150
1126
18.
Maho 432 - 532 p. 1163
6.
Decitek Tape Punch p. 1135
7.
Dyna Mechtronics 2200 - 4400 p. 1138 19.
Mazak M-32 and T-32 p. 1164
8.
Dynapath Delta 20 and 30 p. 1140
Mazak M2 and T2 p. 1166
9.
Facit Tape Punch 4046 - 4047 p. 1142 21.
Okuma OSP 500 - 5000 p. 1167
10.
Fadal CNC 88, HS and MP-32 p. 1144 22.
Siemens 810 p. 1169
11.
Fanuc 0 p. 1146
23.
Yasnac LX-1, MX-1 and MX-2 p. 1171
12.
Fanuc 3 / GN 3 p. 1148
24.
Yasnac LX-3 and MX-3 p. 1173
20.7.2.1
20.
Anilam Crusader
Anilam Crusader Setup
From the Anilam Crusader control set the following AUX codes with the following
procedure:
1.
Press Emergency Stop button.
2.
Pull Out the Emergency Stop button.
3.
Press Manual button.
4.
Set the AUX code.

5.
Press Start button.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until completed.
Note
1127
The AUX codes are organized into five groups and should be set in the
following order.
1ST GROUP BAUD RATES
1ST GROUP BAUD RATES
AUX 2780 110
AUX 2785 1800
AUX 2781 150
AUX 2786 2400
AUX 2782 300
AUX 2787 4800
AUX 2783 600
AUX 2788 9600
AUX 2784 1200
AUX 2789 19200
2ND GROUP HANDSHAKE OR FLOW CONTROL
AUX 2790 None

AUX 2791 Software
AUX 2792 Hardware, DTR-DSR
3RD GROUP DATA BITS
AUX 2765 5
AUX 2766 6
AUX 2767 7
AUX 2768 8
4TH GROUP PARITY
AUX 2770 None

AUX 2771 Odd
AUX 2772 Even
5TH GROUP SEND AND RECEIVE
AUX 2700 Write to RS-232 using G & M Codes

AUX 2701 Read from RS-232 using G & M
Codes
Note
The AUX codes in the 5th Group are not modal and must be set every
time.
If the CNC program is larger than the available memory on the CNC control, add
M2711 codes and % within the CNC program every 1000 lines.
1128
WIRING DIAGRAM
ANILAM
CRUSADER
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
9 Reserved
...
...
25
25 Unused
Anilam Crusader
Send to CNC Tutorial
From Crusader
1.
Select AUX 2701.
2.
Select Automatic.
3.
Press Start.
Note
Some Anilam Crusaders do not require the operator to select Automatic.
From PEditor
1.
2.
Select the appropriate CNC machine.

Click the toolbar button or click DNC > Send to CNC.
20.7.2.2
1129
Bridgeport BOSS 3, 4, 5 and 6
Bridgeport BOSS 3, 4, 5 and 6 Setup
Configure baud rates on the control by removing the ERS card and setting the
following switches.
SWITCH STATUS BAUD RATE

S2
S3
Note
ON
ON
300
1200
Turn off the 10K connector on the ERS card.
Set the following strings in the DNC properties dialog box.

VALUE
EVENT STRING
K\13\10\13\10\17
Conversation Send
Start
\26
Conversation Send
End
1130
WIRING DIAGRAM
BRIDGEPORT
3, 4, 5 AND 6
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
9 Reserved
Bridgeport BOSS 3, 4, 5 and 6

From Bridgeport BOSS, select edit mode.
From PEditor
1.
2.
Note

Click the toolbar button or click DNC > Send to CNC.
CNC programs for the Bridgeport will not load if they contain a % at the
beginning, an E at the end of the program, or a $ at the end of the
program.
20.7.2.3
1131
Bridgeport BOSS 8, 9 and 10
Bridgeport BOSS 8, 9 and 10

1.
The Bridgeport control will prompt for a program number.
2.
Type a -, negative sign, to enable software flow control.
Note
Bridgeport Easylink protocol is supported by the SURFCAM DNC series

only.
1132
WIRING DIAGRAM
BRIDGEPORT
8, 9 AND 10
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
9 Reserved
...
...
25
25 Unused
Bridgeport BOSS 8, 9 and 10 Setup
Connect cabling to DNC port, Port B. Add a CR to all LF received using the
Translate tab within the DNC properties dialog box.
20.7.2.4
Centurion 5
Centurion 5 Setup
To configure the Centurion 5, see the machines control documentation.
WIRING
DIAGRAM
PC 25 PIN
CENTURION 5
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
12
12 Secondary Rec. Line Sig. Det.
13
13 Secondary Clear to Send
14
14 Secondary Transmitted Data
15
15 Transmission Sig. Ele. Timing
...
...
20
20 Data Terminal Ready
...
...
25
25 Unused
Centurion 5

From Centurion 5
1.
From Main, press F10 for the utility menu.
2.
Press F4 for the RS-232 menu.
3.
Press F6 for the receive menu.
4.
Press F1 for text and optionally type the program number.
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Centurion CNC machine.
2.
Select Send to CNC using the DNC menu or toolbar button.
From Centurion 5
1.
Press ESC once transfer is complete.

1133
1134
Centurion 5
DNC Tutorial
From Centurion 5
1.
2.
Press F6 for the DNC menu.
3.
Press F3 for fast mode or F4 for run mode.
4.
Press F1 for RS-232.
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Centurion CNC machine.
2.
From Centurion 5
1.
Press cycle start.

Centurion 5
Receive from CNC Tutorial

From PEditor
Click the toolbar button or click DNC > Receive from CNC.
From Centurion 5
1.
2.
Press F4 for the RS-232 menu.
3.
Press F5 for the send menu.
4.
Press F1 for text.
5.
Press F1 to begin sending the current program or F7 to select any program

in memory.
20.7.2.5
Decitek Tape Punch
Decitek Tape Punch Setup

1.
Set the Decitek Tape Punch to No parity.
2.
Configure the switches on the Decitek tape punch to the following.

SWITCH STATUS
LDC
OFF
ON
High 1200 Baud, Medium 600 Baud or Low for 300

Baud.
Set the following event strings in the DNC properties dialog box.
VALUE
EVENT STRING
\18
Conversation Send
Start
\20
Conversation Send
End
1135
1136
WIRING
DIAGRAM
DECITEK TAPE
PUNCH
20.7.2.6
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
9 Reserved
....
....
20
....
....
25
25 Unused
DSI Tape Punch
1137
DSI Tape Punch Setup
First, set the DSI Tape Punchs baud rate to High (300) or Low(110), newer
punches support faster high and low baud rates. If there is a switch on the back of
the tape punch it must be set upward and the High-Low switch set to low.
Note
Verify that the punch is in Line mode instead of Local and that the Red
punch light at the bottom is on.
WIRING DIAGRAM
DSI TAPE PUNCH
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
9 Reserved
....
....
25
25 Unused
1138
20.7.2.7
Dyna Mechtronics 2200 - 4400
Dyna Mechtronics Setup
To configure the Dyna Mechtronics, see the machines control documentation.
WIRING
DIAGRAM
DYNA
PC 25 PIN
MECHTRONICS
1
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
9 Reserved
....
....
25
25 Unused
1139
Dyna Mechtronics 2200 - 4400

From Dyna Mechtronics
1.
Select Line Mode and specify the starting sequence number.
2.
Press the SHIFT, READ/WRITE keys.
3.
Select YES to the RS-232 COM message.
4.
Select YES to the Upload message.
5.
Select NO to the Line Execute message.
6.
Select YES to start immediately to the Program Execute message.
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Dyna Mechtronics CNC machine.
2.
Note
The Dyna Mechtronics control can send or receive CNC programs up to

900 lines in length. In addition the Dyna Mechtronics can DNC a CNC
program with an unlimited number of lines.
To DNC to the Dyna Mechtronics use the above Send to CNC procedure except
answer YES to the Line Execute message. DNC mode on the Dyna Mechtronics
does not support subroutines, looping and block skip commands.
1140
20.7.2.8
Note
Dynapath Delta 20 and 30
Some Dynapath controls require wiring pins 2-2 and 3-3.
Dynapath Setup
To configure the Dynapath 20 and 30, see the machines control documentation.
WIRING
DIAGRAM
DELTA 20 AND
30
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
8 Received Line Signal Det
9 Reserved
....
....
20
....
....
25
25 Unused

From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Dynapath CNC machine.
2.
From Dynapath
1.
From the main menu, select 9 [LOAD].
2.
Press the START LOAD soft key.
DNC Tutorial
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Dynapath CNC machine.
2.
Select Send To CNC using the DNC menu or toolbar button.
From Dynapath
1.
Type RS232C from the Catalog mode.
2.
In Load Mode choose and R option and P1 for parity on.
3.
Move to Auto or Single mode and press Cycle Start.

1141
1142
Note
The file may not contain subroutines or repeat events.

From PEditor
From Dynapath
1.
From the main menu, select C [CATALOG].
2.
Type the name of the program.
3.
Select mode 8 [RECORD].
4.
Select mode 8 [RECORD].
5.
Press the START RECORD soft key.
20.7.2.9
Facit Tape Punch 4046 - 4047
Facit Tape Punch Setup
Configure the switches on the Facit tape punch to the following:
SWITCH ASCII SWITCH ASCII

480
0
480
0
127
1
127
1
122
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
WIRING
DIAGRAM
FACIT TAPE
PUNCH
10
60
11
1000
3184
12
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused
1143
1144
20.7.2.10
Fadal CNC 88, HS and MP-32
WIRING
DIAGRAM
FADAL
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
9 Reserved
...
...
25
25 Unused
Fadal CNC 88, HS and MP-32 Setup
Set the following options in the Translate tab within the DNC properties dialog box.
RECEIVE TRANSLATION
\013
Remove
\000
Remove
\010
Replace
1145
VALUE
\013\010
To configure the Fadal, use the SETP command.

From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Fadal CNC machine.
2.
From Fadal:
Type TA,1 ENTER to start the transfer.
1.
Note
The TA,1 command can be added to the conversation send start string
to automate the sending of CNC programs. However, DNC with the TA,1
command added to the conversation send start string will cause errors
on the Fadal control. To solve this problem, create two CNC machines
one for send and the second for DNC.
DNC Tutorial
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Fadal CNC machine.
2.
From Fadal
1.
Type DNC ENTER to start the transfer.


From PEditor
From Fadal
1.
Type PU,,,1 ENTER to start the transfer.
1146
20.7.2.11
Fanuc 0
Fanuc 0 Setup
To configure the Fanuc 0, use the following procedure:

1.
Switch the PWE parameter to off. The Fanuc 0 will stay in Alarm mode while
setting the following parameters
:
PARAMETER VALUE DESCRIPTION
#0002 Bit 01
2 Stop Bits
#0002 Bit 20
RS-232
Input
#552
4800 Baud
10
2.
Switch the PWE parameter to on and press Reset.
3.
Set Handy page setting I/O = 0 for ISO format.
Note
Bits are read right to left. The Fanuc 0 only allows configuration of the
stop bits and the baud rate.
RECEIVE TRANSLATION VALUE
\000
Remove
\013
Remove
\010
Replace
WIRING
DIAGRAM
FANUC 0
\013\010
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused
Fanuc 0
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Fanuc CNC machine.
2.
From Fanuc
1.
Select Edit mode.
2.
Press the O key and type the program number.
3.
Press the Read key to start the transfer.
Fanuc 0
DNC Tutorial
From PEditor
1.
2.

1147
1148
From Fanuc
1.
Select Tape mode.
2.
Press Cycle Start.
Note
The Fanuc 0 controls must have a tape mode to DNC. To pause during
the DNC process, turn the Feedrate Override to 0%.
Fanuc 0

From PEditor
1.
2.
From Fanuc
1.
Select Edit mode.
2.
3.
Press the Punch key to start the transfer.
20.7.2.12
Fanuc 3 / GN 3
1149
Fanuc 3 / General Numeric 3 Setup
To configure the Fanuc 3 or General Numeric 3, use the following procedure:

1.
Turn a key lock or switch on to change the controls parameters. The control
will stay in Alarm mode while setting the following parameters.
2.
Select Edit mode.

PARAMETER
VALUE
0014 - ASR 33
0069
DESCRIPTION
0
2400
RS-232 I/O
Baud Rate
3.
Turn the keylock or switch to off and press Reset.
4.
Set page setting I/O = 1 and ISO Format = 1.
Note
The control only allows configuration of the stop bits and the baud rate.
Note
The control must have the optional I/O interface with the DB-25 female
port installed prior to working with the Send to CNC and Receive from
CNC commands. Unfortunately, the control even with the I/O interface
does not support DNC or drip feeding large CNC programs.
WIRING DIAGRAM
FANUC 3 AND GN
3
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused
1150
20.7.2.13
Fanuc 6 and 9 / GN 6 and 9
Fanuc 6 and 9 / General numeric 6 and 9 Setup
To configure the Fanuc 6 and 9 or the General Numeric 6 and 9, use the following
procedure:
1.
Turn a key lock or switch on to change the controls parameters. The control
will stay in Alarm mode while setting the following parameters.
2.
Select MDI mode.

PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
311
xxxx1000 2400 Baud or
311
xxxx0111 1200 Baud or
311
xxxx1001 4800 Baud
340
Input Device
341
Output Device
3.
Turn the keylock or parameter engage switch to off and press Reset.
4.
Set page setting I/O = 1 and ISO Format = 1.
Note
The Fanuc 6 and 9 only allows configuration of the stop bits and the baud
rate.
Note
1151
The 6M-B and the 6T-B controls must have the optional I/O interface with
the DB-25 female port installed prior to any RS-232 communications. To
DNC the 6, control must have a SURFCAM BTR installed.
WIRING DIAGRAM
6 AND 9
20.7.2.14
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused
Fanuc 10, 11, 12, and 15
1152
Fanuc 10, 11, 12 and 15 Setup
To configure the Fanuc, use the following procedure:

1.
Switch the PWE parameter 8000 to off. The Fanuc will stay in Alarm mode
while setting the following parameters.
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
#0000 Bit #0 0
TV Check Off
#0000 Bit #1 1
Count TVC Off
#0000 Bit #2 0
ISO Parity On
#0000 Bit #3 1
NCR Output LF
#0000 Bit #4 0
EIA Off ISO On
#0020
FG Input Device
#0021
FG Output Device
#0022
BG Input Device
#0023
BG Output Device
#5001
Device Number
#5110
Use DC Codes
#5111
Use 2 Stop Bits
#5112
600 Baud or
#5112
1200 Baud or
#5112
2400 Baud or
#5112
10
4800 Baud or
#5112
11
9600 Baud or
#5112
12
19200 Baud
2.
Switch the PWE parameter 8000 to on and press Reset.
3.
Set page setting I/O = 1 and ISO Format =1.
Note
The Fanuc only allows configuration of the stop bits and the baud rate.
RECEIVE
TRANSLATION VALUE
\000
Remove
\010
Replace
\013\010
WIRING DIAGRAM
FANUC 10, 11, 12
AND 15
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused
Fanuc 10, 11, 12 and 15

From PEditor
1.
2.
From Fanuc
1.
Select Edit mode.
2.
3.
Press the Read key.
Fanuc 10, 11, 12 and 15
DNC Tutorial
From PEditor
1.
2.
From Fanuc
1.
Select Tape mode.
2.
Press the Cycle Start key.
1153
1154
Note
The Fanuc must have a tape mode to DNC. To pause during the DNC
process, turn the Feedrate Override to 0%.
Note
Do not use a program number O7000 since it is reserved by Fanuc.
Fanuc 10, 11, 12 and 15

From PEditor
1.
2.
From Fanuc
1.
Select Edit mode.
2.
3.
Press the Input key.
4.
Press the Punch key to start the transfer.
20.7.2.15
Fanuc 16, 18, 160 and 180
1155
Fanuc 16, 18, 160 and 180 Setup
To configure the Fanuc, use the following procedure:

1.
Within the Setting (Handy) screen, set parameter write to 1. The Fanuc will
stay in Alarm mode while setting the following parameters.
PARAMETER
VALUE
#0000 Bit #0 0
TV Check Off
#0000 Bit #1 1
ISO Output
#0020
I/O Channel
#0100 Bit #1 0
Count TVC Off
#0100 Bit #3 1
NCR Output LF
#0100 Bit #5 1
ND3 DNC Buffer On
#0101 Bit #7 1
ENS Null Alarm Off
#0101 Bit #0 1
Use 2 Stop Bits
#0101 Bit #7 1
Feed Output Off
#0102
Use DC Codes
#0103
600 Baud or
#0103
1200 Baud or
#0103
2400 Baud or
#0103
2400 Baud or
#0103
10
4800 Baud or
#0103
11
9600 Baud or
#0103
12
19200 Baud
#3201 Bit #0 1
2.
Note
DESCRIPTION
RDL Overwrite On
Within the Setting (Handy) screen, set parameter write to 0. Reset the
Fanuc to exit Alarm mode.
The Fanuc only allows configuration of the stop bits and the baud rate.
RECEIVE
TRANSLATION VALUE
\000
Remove
\010
Replace
\013\010
1156
WIRING DIAGRAM
FANUC 16, 18,
160 AND 180
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused
Fanuc 16, 18, 160 and 180

From PEditor
1.
2.
From Fanuc
1.
Select Edit mode.
2.
Press Program key.
3.
Turn the Program Protect Key Off.
4.
Press the chapter softkey, right arrow button, until READ appears.
5.
6.
Press the READ softkey.
7.
Press the EXEC softkey.
Fanuc 16, 18, 160 and 180
DNC Tutorial
From PEditor
1.
2.

1157
From Fanuc
1.
Select Tape mode.
2.
Press the Cycle Start key.
Note
The Fanuc must have a tape mode to DNC. To pause during the DNC,
process turn the Feedrate Override to 0%.
Note
Do not use a program number O7000 since it is reserved by Fanuc.
Fanuc 16, 18, 160 and 180

From PEditor
1.
2.
From Fanuc
1.
Select Edit mode.
2.
Press Program key.
3.
Turn the Program Protect Key Off.
4.
Press the chapter softkey, right arrow button, until PUNCH appears.
5.
6.
Press the PUNCH softkey.
7.
Press the EXEC softkey.
1158
20.7.2.16
Haas Mill and Lathe
Haas Setup
Set the following parameters to configure the Haas.
PARAMETER VALUE
11
12
13
14
24
25
37
Note
DESCRIPTION
Baud Rate
Parity
Stop Bits
Synchronization
Leader to Punch
End of Block
Pattern
Number of Data
Bits
Controls built before 9/90 can send and receive only. DNC is available
on controls built after 9/90.
WIRING DIAGRAM
HAAS
1159
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused
Haas

From Haas
1.
Press the LIST PROG key.
2.
Select the ALL option or optionally type O and the program number.
3.
Press the RECV RS-232 key.
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Haas CNC machine.
2.
Haas
DNC Tutorial
From Haas
1.
Press the MDI button twice.
2.
Press Cycle Start.
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Haas CNC machine.
2.
Note
The Haas control does not support M98 or M30 codes while dripfeeding
large CNC programs.
1160
Haas

From PEditor
From Haas
1.
Press the LIST PROG key.
2.
Select the appropriate CNC program or the ALL option.
3.
Press the SEND RS-232 key.
20.7.2.17
Heidenhain 145 - 412
Heidenhain Setup
To configure the Heidenhain, use the controls on-screen menus to set baud rates,
parity, data bits, and stop bits by pressing the MOD or PARAMETER key.
Note
Heidenhain blockwise mode is supported by the SURFCAM DNC series

only.
Set the following event string in the DNC properties dialog box.
VALUE
1161
EVENT STRING
\13\10 Conversation Send

Start
Note
Heidenhain 145 controls require using the Read in program selected

method with the following event string in the DNC properties dialog box.
VALUE
EVENT STRING
\13\10\2 Conversation Send

Start
Note
Older Heidenhain 155 controls require the following event strings in the
DNC properties dialog box.
VALUE
EVENT STRING
\13\10
Conversation Send
Start
Line Send End
WIRING DIAGRAM
HEIDENHAIN
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused

From Heidenhain
1.
Select Editing mode.
2.
Press the EXTERNAL key.

1162
3.
Select Read-In Program Offered.
4.
Type the program number.
5.
Press the ENTER key.
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Heidenhain CNC machine.
2.

From PEditor
1.
2.

From Heidenhain
1.
Select Editing mode.
2.
Press the EXTERNAL key.
3.
Select Read-Out Selected Program.
4.
Press the ENTER key.
5.
Select the CNC program using the arrow keys.
6.
Press the ENTER key to start the transfer.
20.7.2.18
Maho 432 - 532
Maho CNC Setup
VALUE
\4
WIRING DIAGRAM
MAHO CNC
EVENT STRING
Conversation Send
End
PC 25 PIN
1163
1164
20.7.2.19
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused
Mazak M-32 and T-32
Mazak M-32 and T-32 Setup
Use the following procedures to configure the Mazak:

1.
Use parameter #1 to create a three letter I/O device name under I/O device
param(1).
2.
Specify the I/O base param for Data In, Data Out and N/C Running to the
created device name and number.
3.
Specify the following control parameters under User Parameter No 2.
PARAMETER VALUE
Note
4.
DESCRIPTION
G19
4800 Baud
G20
2 Stop bits
G21
Even Parity
G22
Parity Check Invalid
G23
8 Data bits
G27
CR Placement
G29
Software Handshake
G42
200
Wait Time
Mazaks Mazatrol is supported by the SURFCAM DNC series only.

Specify the following control parameters under User Parameter No 4.
PARAMETER VALUE
11
DESCRIPTION
4800 Baud
12
2 Stop bits
13
Parity selection
15
Data bit selection
PARAMETER VALUE
16
DESCRIPTION
Handshake Selection
17
Parity added to DC Code
18
20
Seconds for time out
19
No output of DC2 or DC4
WIRING DIAGRAM
MAZAK M-32, T32
PC 25 PIN
1165
1166
20.7.2.20
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused
Mazak M2 and T2
Mazak M2 Setup
To configure the Mazak, set the following control parameters:

OP2
248
ISO
OP24
16
4800 Baud or
OP24
32
2400 Baud or
OP24
64
1200 Baud or
OP24
128
600 Baud or
OP24
256
300 Baud
VALUE
EVENT STRING
\13\10 Conversation Send

Start
Note
Mazaks Mazatrol is supported by the SURFCAM DNC series only.
20.7.2.21
Okuma OSP 500 - 5000
Okuma OSP 500 - 5000 Setup
To configure the Okuma, use the following procedure:

1.
Specify the following control parameters:

1167
1168
PARAMETER
VALUE
#34 Time Before Alarm 2

#39 Baud Rate
4800
#44 Input Device
#46 Output Device
#54 Read Device

Number
#57 Time Before Alarm 3

2.
Specify the following optional parameters bit to be 01001011 for ISO mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM
OKUMA OSP
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused

From Okuma OSP
1.
Select Edit mode.
2.
Press the f3 (pip) button.
3.
Press the f1 (read) button.
4.
Press the return key.
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Okuma OSP CNC machine.
2.

1169

From PEditor
1.
2.
From Okuma OSP

1.
Select Edit mode.
2.
Press the f3 (pip) button.
3.
Press the f2 (punch) button.
4.
Press the return key to start the transfer.
Note
The Okuma OSP requires installation of the Okuma DNC B board prior
to DNC operation. Okumas Okuma A and Okuma B DNC protocols are
supported by the SURFCAM DNC series only.
20.7.2.22
Siemens 810
Siemens 810 Setup
To configure the Siemens 810, use the following procedure:

1170
1.
Specify the following control parameters. The bit order for the parameters is
76543210.
Note
5011
11010100 Tape Read
5013
11010100 Tape Punch
Bits 0-3 control the baud rate. Bit 5 controls parity. Bits 6-7 control stop
bits.
PARAMETER VALUE
5016
Note
DESCRIPTION
00001000 Special Bits
Bit 3 controls the Read In Character EOF. Bit 4 controls ISO Mode. Bit 7
controls Software Handshake.
WIRING
DIAGRAM
SIEMENS 810
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
14
14 Secondary Transmitted Data
...
...
18
18 Unused
19
19 Secondary Request To Send
20
21
21 Signal Quality Detector
...
...
20.7.2.23
1171
Yasnac LX-1, MX-1 and MX-2
Yasnac LX-1, LX-2, MX-1 and MX-2 Setup
To configure the Yasnac, use the following procedure:

1.
Turn the thumbwheel inside the tape reader to 1.
2.
76543210.
1172
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
6000 Bit 7
ISO Mode
6003 Bit 1
RS-232 I/O
6003 Bit 5
RS-232 I/O
6021 Bit 1
6021 Bit 4
Recognize Data
Ready
6021 Bit 5
Keep RS Signal High
6021 Bit 6
6022 Bit 0
6022 Bit 1
6026
00011000 2400 Baud, Input
6028
00011000 2400 Baud, Output
Note
Within parameters 6026 and 6028 bit 4 controls the Stop Bits. Bit 5
controls XON/XOFF codes.
Note
Within parameters 6026 and 6028 bits 0-3 control baud rates. To specify
a different baud rate, set the control parameters using the following table.
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
6026 and 6028 00010101 300 Baud

6026 and 6028 00010111 1200 Baud
6026 and 6028 00011000 2400 Baud
6026 and 6028 00011001 4800 Baud
6026 and 6028 00011010 9600 Baud
3.
Return thumbwheel to original setting.
WIRING DIAGRAM
YASNAC
PC 25 PIN
20.7.2.24
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused
1173
Yasnac LX-3 and MX-3
Yasnac LX-3 and MX-3 Setup
To configure the Yasnac, use the following procedure:

1.
76543210.
1174
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
6000 Bit 7
ISO Mode MX-3
6002 Bit 7
ISO Mode LX-3
6003 Bit 1
RS-232 I/O
6003 Bit 5
RS-232 I/O
6021 Bit 1
6021 Bit 4
Recognize Data
Ready
6021 Bit 5
Keep RS Signal High
6021 Bit 6
6026
00011000 2400 Baud, Input
6028
00011000 2400 Baud, Output
Note
Within parameters 6026 and 6028 bit 4 controls the Stop Bits. Bit 5
controls XON/XOFF codes.
Note
Within parameters 6026 and 6028 bits 0-3 control baud rates. To specify
a different baud rate, set the control parameters using the following table.
PARAMETER
VALUE
DESCRIPTION
6026 and
6028
00010101 300 Baud
6026 and
6028
00010111 1200 Baud
6026 and
6028
00011000 2400 Baud
6026 and
6028
00011001 4800 Baud
6026 and
6028
00011010 9600 Baud
WIRING DIAGRAM
YASNAC
PC 25 PIN
1 Protective Ground
2 Transmitted Data
3 Received Data
4 Request to Send
5 Clear to Send
6 Data Set Ready
7 Signal Ground
...
...
20
...
...
25
25 Unused

From Yasnac
1.
Select Edit mode.
2.
Press the prog key.
3.
Press the reset key.
4.
5.
Press the IN key.
Note
Skip step 4 if the program number is specified in the CNC program.
From PEditor
1.
Select the appropriate Yasnac CNC machine.
2.

From PEditor
1.
2.

1175
1176
From Yasnac
1.
Select Edit mode.
2.
Press the Prog key.
3.
Press the Reset key.
4.
5.
Press the OUT key to start the transfer.
Note
20.7.3
Skip step 4 if the active program is not the appropriate CNC program.
Help Menu
Contents
Click Help > Contents to display the table of contents.
Search for Help on
Click Help > Search for Help On to search for a help topic, or click on the search
button in the Help window.
Introduction
Click Help > Introduction to display an introduction to the PEditor.
G Codes Milling
Click Help > G Codes Milling to display a list of common milling G Codes or see G
Codes Milling, page 1179.
G Codes Turning
Click Help > G Codes Turning to display a list of common turning G Codes or see
G Codes Turning, page 1182.
Shortcut Keys
Click Help > Shortcut Keys to display a list of the shortcut keys available or see
Editor Shortcuts, page 1193.
About PEditor
Click Help > About to display the PEditors serial number and version number.
Click the System Info button to see detailed information about your PC for
troubleshooting technical problems.
To close the help window, press the <Esc> key.
20.8
TABLES
20.8.1
Math Functions
Basic Math Functions
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
ABS(value)
Absolute
SQR(value)
Square Root
SGN(value)
Sign
INT(value)
Integer
FIX(value)
Fix
FACT(value)
Factorial
ROUND(value; places) Round
RND(value)
Random Number
ISPRIME(value)
Is Prime
FRAC(value)
Fraction
Logarithmic and Exponential Functions
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
LN(value)
Natural Logarithm, basis e
LOG(value)
Decadic logarithm, basis 10
EXP(value)
e^value
Trigonometric Functions
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
%DEG
Switch to 0-360 Degrees
%RAD
Switch to 0-2PI
SIN(value)
Sine
COS(value)
Cosine
TAN(value)
Tangent
1177
1178
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
COT(value)
Cotangent
SEC(value)
Secant
CSC(value)
Cosecant
ASIN(value)
Arc Sine
ACOS(value)
Arc Cosine
ATAN(value)
Arc Tangent
ASEC(value)
Arc Secant
ACSC(value)
Arc Cosecant
ACTG(value)
Arc Cotangent
Hyperbolic Functions
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
SINH(value)
Hyperbolic Sine
COSH(value)
Hyperbolic Cosine
TANH(value)
Hyperbolic Tangent
SECH(value)
Hyperbolic Secant
CSCH(value)
Hyperbolic Cosecant
COTH(value)
Hyperbolic Cotangent
Reverse Hyperbolic Functions
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
ASINH(value)
Hyperbolic Arc Sine
ACOSH(value)
Hyperbolic Arc Cosine
ATANH(value)
Hyperbolic Arc Tangent
ASECH(value)
Hyperbolic Arc Secant
ACSCH(value)
Hyperbolic Arc Cosecant
ACOTH(value)
Hyperbolic Arc Cotangent
20.8.2
G and M Codes
G Codes Milling
CODE
DESCRIPTION
G00
Rapid Linear Positioning
G01
Linear Feed Interpolation
G02
CW Circular Interpolation
G03
CCW Circular Interpolation
G04
Dwell
G07
Imaginary Axis Designation
G09
Exact Stop
G10
Offset Value Setting
G17
XY Plane Selection
G18
ZX Plane Selection
G19
YZ plane Selection
G20
Input In Inches
G21
Input In Millimeters
G22
Stored Stroke Limit On
G23
Stored Stroke Limit Off
G27
Reference Point Return Check
G28
Return To Reference Point
G29
Return From Reference Point
G30
Return To 2nd, 3rd and 4th Ref. Point
G31
Skip Cutting
G33
Thread Cutting
G40
Cutter Compensation Cancel
G41
Cutter Compensation Left
G42
Cutter Compensation Right
G43
Tool Length Compensation + Direction
G44
Tool Length Compensation - Direction
G45
Tool Offset Increase
G46
Tool Offset Double

1179
1180
CODE
DESCRIPTION
G47
Tool Offset Double Increase
G48
Tool Offset Double Decrease
G49
Tool Length Compensation Cancel
G50
Scaling Off
G51
Scaling On
G52
Local Coordinate System Setting
G54
Work Coordinate System 1 Selection
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
G60
Single Direction Positioning
G61
Exact Stop Mode
G64
Cutting Mode
G65
Custom Macro Simple Call
G66
Custom Macro Modal Call
G67
Custom Macro Modal Call Cancel
G68
Coordinate System Rotation On
G69
Coordinate System Rotation Off
G73
Peck Drilling Cycle
G74
Counter Tapping Cycle
G76
Fine Boring
G80
Canned Cycle Cancel
G81
Drilling Cycle, Spot Boring
G82
Drilling Cycle, Counter Boring
G83
Peck Drilling Cycle
G84
Tapping Cycle
G85
Boring Cycle
G86
Boring Cycle
G87
Back Boring Cycle

CODE
DESCRIPTION
G88
Boring Cycle
G89
Boring Cycle
G90
Absolute Programming
G91
Incremental Programming
G92
Programming Of Absolute Zero
G94
Feed Per Minute
G95
Feed Per Revolution
G96
Constant Surface Speed Control
G97
Constant Surface Speed Control Cancel
G98
Return To Initial Point In Canned Cycles
G99
Return To R Point In Canned Cycles
M Codes Milling - Fanuc
CODE
DESCRIPTION
M00
Program Stop
M01
Optional Stop
M02
End of Program
M03
Spindle On CW
M04
Spindle On CCW
M05
Spindle Stop
M06
Tool Change
M07
Mist Coolant On
M08
Flood Coolant On
M09
Coolant Off
M19
Spindle Orientation On
M20
Spindle Orientation Off
M21
Tool Magazine Right
M22
Tool Magazine Left
M23
Tool Magazine Up
M24
Tool Magazine Down
M25
Tool Clamp
M26
Tool Unclamp
1181
1182
CODE
DESCRIPTION
M27
Clutch Neutral On
M28
Clutch Neutral Off
M30
End Program, Stop and Rewind
M98
Call Sub Program
M99
End Sub Program
G Codes Turning
STD
SP.
SP.C
DESCRIPTION
G00
G00
G00
Rapid Linear Positioning
G01
G01
G01
Linear Feed Interpolation
G02
G02
G02
CW Circular Interpolation
G03
G03
G03
CCW Circular Interpolation
G04
G04
G04
Dwell
G07
G07
G07
Hypothetical Axis Interpolation, Sine Curve
G09
G09
G09
Exact Stop
G10
G10
G10
Offset Value Setting
G20
G20
G70
Input In Inches
G21
G21
G71
Input In Millimeters
G22
G22
G22
Stored Stroke Limit On
G23
G23
G23
Stored Stroke Limit Off
G27
G27
G27
Reference Point Return Check
G28
G28
G28
Return To Reference Point
G29
G29
G29
Return From Reference Point
G30
G30
G30
Return To 2nd, 3rd, and 4th Reference

Point
G31
G31
G31
Skip Cutting
G32
G33
G33
Thread Cutting
G34
G34
G34
Variable Lead Thread Cutting
G36
G36
G36
Automatic Tool Comp. X
G37
G37
G37
Automatic Tool Comp. Z
G40
G40
G40
Tool Nose Rad. Comp. Cancel
G41
G41
G41
Tool Nose Radius Comp. Left
STD
SP.
SP.C
DESCRIPTION
G42
G42
G42
Tool Nose Radius Comp. Right
G50
G92
G92
Programming Of Absolute Zero
G65
G65
G65
User Macro Simple Call
G66
G66
G66
User Macro Modal Call
G67
G67
G67
User Macro Modal Call Cancel
G68
G68
G68
Mirror Image For Double Turrets On
G69
G69
G69
Mirror Image For Double Turrets Off
G70
G70
G72
Finishing Cycle
G71
G71
G73
Stock Removal, Turning
G72
G72
G74
Stock Removal, Facing
G73
G73
G75
Repeat Pattern
G74
G74
G76
Peck Drilling, Z Axis
G75
G75
G77
Grooving, X Axis
G76
G76
G78
Thread Cutting Cycle
G90
G77
G20
Cutting Cycle A
G92
G78
G21
Thread Cutting Cycle
G94
G79
G24
Cutting Cycle B
G96
G96
G96
Constant Surface Speed Control
G97
G97
G97
Constant Surface Speed Cancel
G98
G94
G94
Feed Per Minute
G99
G95
G95
Feed Per Revolution
G90
G90
Absolute Programming
G91
G91
Incremental Programming
20.8.3
1183
CNC Setups
The following is an updated list, as of the printing date, of CNC controls supported by
PEditor.
Note
100% accurate.
1184
CONTROL AND MODEL
DOCUMENT NAME
Agiecut 150F
AG-150F
Agiecut HSS
AG-HSS
Agiecut Sprint
AG-SPRINT
Allen Bradley 7360
AB-7360
Allen Bradley 7370
AB-7370
Allen Bradley 8200
AB-8200
Allen Bradley 8400
AB-8400
Allen Bradley 8600
AB-8600
Allen Bradley 9/230
AB-9/230
Amadan 04P-C
AM-04PC
Ampex
AP
Anilam 1100
AN-1100
Anilam Commando
AN-CO
Anilam Crusader
AN-CR
Anilam Eagle
AN-EG
Bandit 1
BA-1
Bandit 2
BA-2
Bendix Dynapath 10
BD-10
Bendix Dynapath 20
BD-20
Bendix Dynapath 30
BD-30
Bosch CC220
BO-CC220
Bosch 300
BO-300
Bridgeport Boss 2
BP-BOSS2
Bridgeport Boss 4
BP-BOSS4
Bridgeport Boss 5
BP-BOSS5
Bridgeport Boss 6
BP-BOSS6
Bridgeport Boss 7
BP-BOSS7
Bridgeport Boss 8
BP-BOSS8
CONTROL AND MODEL
DOCUMENT NAME
Bridgeport Boss 9
BP-BOSS9
Bridgeport Boss 10
BP-BOSS10
Bridgeport Heidenhain 150
BP-HH150
BP-HH151
BP-HH155
Bridgeport SX15
BP-SX15
Brother Tapping Center
BR-TC
Burney 2.5RS
BU-25RS
Burney 3
BU-3
Charmilles Robofil 300
CH-R300
Cincinnati Acramatic 850
CN-AC850
Cincinnati Acramatic 850TC
CN-AC850TC
CN-AC900
Cincinnati Acramatic 900 T10
CN-AC900T10
CN-AC950
CNC Inovation RTE-1000
CI-RTE1000
Decitek Tape Punch
DE-TP
Deckel Dialog 3
DD-3
Deckel Dialog 4
DD-4
DSI Tape Punch
DS-TP
Dyna Mechtronics 2200
DM-2200
DM-2800
DM-3000
DM-2400
Dynapath Delta 10
DP-DELTA10
Dynapath Delta 20
DP-DELTA20
Dynapath Delta 30
DP-DELTA30
Emco TM02
EM-TM02
1185
1186
CONTROL AND MODEL
DOCUMENT NAME
ESAB
ES-ESAB
ESAB Compupath 500
ES-CP500
Facit Tape Punch 4046
FA-TP4046
Facit Tape Punch 4047
FA-TP4047
Fadal CNC 88
FA-CNC88
Fadal HS
FA-HS
Fadal MP-32
FA-MP32
Fagor 8010
FG-8010
Fagor 8025
FG-8025
Fanuc 0M
FN-0M
Fanuc 0T
FN-0T
Fanuc 00P
FN-00P
Fanuc 3M
FN-3M
Fanuc 3T
FN-3T
Fanuc 3TD
FN-3TD
Fanuc 6MA
FN-6MA
Fanuc 6MB
FN-6MB
Fanuc 6TA
FN-6TA
Fanuc 6TB
FN-6TB
Fanuc 9M
FN-9M
Fanuc 9T
FN-9T
Fanuc 10M
FN-10M
Fanuc 10T
FN-10T
Fanuc 10TF
FN-10TF
Fanuc 11M
FN-11M
Fanuc 11T
FN-11T
Fanuc 12M
FN-12M
Fanuc 12T
FN-12T
CONTROL AND MODEL
DOCUMENT NAME
Fanuc 15M
FN-15M
Fanuc 15T
FN-15T
Fanuc 16M
FN-16M
Fanuc 16T
FN-16T
Fanuc 18M
FN-18M
Fanuc 18T
FN-18T
Fortuna CNC Grinder
FO-CNC
General Electric 1050
GE-1050
General Electric 1050HV
GE-1050HV
GE-2000
General Numeric 3
GN-3
General Numeric 6M
GN-6M
General Numeric 6T
GN-6T
General Numeric 9M
GN-9M
General Numeric 9T
GN-9T
Giddings and Lewis CNC 800
GL-CNC800
GL-CNC900
GL-CNC8000
Giddings and Lewis Numeriset

NS6
GL-NS6
Greco Mini File
GR-MINI
Haas Mill
HA-MILL
Haas Lathe
HA-LATHE
Heckler and Koch 783/M
HK-783M
Heidenhain TNC 145
HH-TNC145
Heidenhain TNC 151
HH-TNC151
Heidenhain TNC 155
HH-TNC155
Heidenhain TNC 306
HH-TNC306
1187
1188
CONTROL AND MODEL
DOCUMENT NAME
Heidenhain TNC 355
HH-TNC355
Heidenhain TNC 360
HH-TNC360
Heidenhain TNC 407
HH-TNC407
Heidenhain TNC 412
HH-TNC412
Heidenhain TNC 415
HH-TNC415
Heidenhain TNC 2500
HH-TNC2500
Hitachi
HI
Hitachi-Seiki Multi
HS-MULTI
Hitachi-Seiki Seicos
HS-SEICOS
Houdalle Hecc 80/3
HO-HECC80
Hurco Ultimax 3
HU-3
Hybrid D6
HY-D6
Index C200
IN-C200
Index GB50
IN-GB50
Index GB65
IN-GB65
Index GB100
IN-GB100
Kearney and Trecker 180
KT-180
Kearney and Trecker Gemini
KT-GEMINI
Maho 1000
MA-1000
Mazak T
MZ-T
Mazak TA
MZ-TA
Mazak T2
MZ-T2
Mazak T3
MZ-T3
Mazak T-32
MZ-T32
Mazak M2
MZ-M2
Mazak M-32
MZ-M32
Mazak T-Plus
MZ-TPLUS
Memex Electronics Mx1000
ME-MX1000
CONTROL AND MODEL
DOCUMENT NAME
Mitsubishi 90H
MI-90H
Mitsubishi 110G
MI-110G
Mitsubishi 300
MI-300
Mitsubishi 330HM
MI-330HM
Mitsubishi 335M
MI-335M
Mitsubishi 500
MI-500
Mitsubishi L0
MI-L0
Milltronics Centurion 5
MT-CENT5
Numeritronix Executive 1501
NE-1501
Okuma OSP 500
OK-500
Okuma OSP 5000
OK-5000
Okuma OSP 5000 GL
OK-5000GL
Okuma OSP 5000 Green
OK-5000G
Okuma OSP 5000 GL
OK-5000GL
Okuma OSP 5020
OK-5020
Okuma OSP 5020L
OK-5020L
Okuma OSP 5020MC
OK-5020MC
Okuma OSP 7000
OK-7000
Prototrak Plus
PR-PLUS
Prototrak MX2
PR-MX2
Prototrak MX3
PR-MX3
Philips Maho 432-9
PM-4329
Philips Maho 432-10
PM-43210
Philips Maho 532
PM-532
Traub TX 8D
TR-TX8D
Roland Camm 3
RO-CAMM3
Rybett Camstore 2
RY-C2
Seicos
SE
1189
1190
20.8.4
CONTROL AND MODEL
DOCUMENT NAME
Sharnoa Tiger 4
SH-T4
Siemens 810
SI-810
Siemens 880
SI-880
Siemens GN-3TB
SI-3TB
Siemens GN-8M
SI-8M
Sinumeric System 3
SS-3
Sodick Mark 20
SO-MARK20
Sodick Mark 21
SO-MARK21
Southwestern Prototrak MX2
SP-MX2
Southwestern Prorotrak MX3
SP-MX3
Strippit Hecc 80/3
ST-HECC803
Traub TX-8
TR-TX8
Traub TX-8D
TR-TX8D
Tree
TREE
Umac 6B20 Cascade
UM-6B20
Yasnac LX-1
YN-LX1
Yasnac MX-1
YN-MX1
Yasnac MX-2
YN-MX2
Yasnac LX-3
YN-LX3
Yasnac MX-3
YN-MX3
BTR Setups
The following is a list of older controls that require a BTR prior to communicating with
PEditor.
Note
100% accurate.
CONTROL AND MODEL
TAPE READER
Actrion 3
Decitek
CONTROL AND MODEL
TAPE READER
Agietron CNC 100 and 200
Ghilmetti
Allen Bradley 4000, 4500 and 7370
Remex
Allen Bradley 7300 and 4600
Digitronix
Allen Bradley 7320,7360 and 7300
EECO
Allen Bradley 8200
Remex
Director
Andrew EF90
Remex
Asea 312
Bendix 5 Series / System 5
Remex
Bendix 20, 42, 400, 600, 800, 872, 892, 1500 and 1800
Remex
BostoMatic Director
Remex
Bridgeport BOSS 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7
Remex
Bridgeport NC(A) Series 2
Remex
Bunker Ramo 2200
Remex
Bunker Ramo 3100
Digitronics
Charnon
Addmaster
Cincinnati 220 and 230
Tally
Cincinnati AC4 and Big Blue
Remex
Cincinnati AC5, AC8, and CNC
Accuread
Cincinnati AC5
Tally
Cincinnati Acramatic 10VC, 900, T10v0, V2900, TC V2.1 and Cincinnati

TC
Remex
CompuDyne Model B
Remex
DEC PDP-8/a
Remex
DEC PDP-8
Decitek
Diatrol
Tally
Excellon
Slo-syn
Fanuc 2000C, 3000C, 5A, 5M, 5T,6A, 6M, 6T, 7M, 7T, 9M, Fanuc
9T, 11, 20A, 30, 200A, 200B, 220 and 240
Fritz Werner
Remex
General Automation
Slo-syn
1191
1192
CONTROL AND MODEL
TAPE READER
General Electric 100, 120 and 7500
Remex
General Electric 7500, 7542, 1050, 1050T, 1050MC,

1050MCL, 1050MCCL, 1050HLX, 1050TX, 550, 550T,
550TX and 8500
General
Electric
General Numerics 5 and 6 Series
Fanuc
Ghielmetti 201 and 204
Fer
Giddings and Lewis 80 and 800
Remex
Giddings and Lewis SS70
Tally
Hughes NC 200
Octal
Icon 360 and 380
Tally
Japax EDM FE02
GNT
JLP TOM82
EECO
Kearney and Trucker 200
Remex
Mitsubishi Meldas 5000c and 5000w
Ricom
Moog Hydropoint 3000
Decitek
Okuma 2200 and 3000
Sanyo Denki
Olivetti Multi-Auctor
Slo-syn
Plessey 22 and 2200
Remex
Positool 900
Remex
Pratt and Whitney CNC1, MC1000 and Teammate
Decitek
Pratt Tape-o-matic
Tally
Pratt MC750 and Triax
Remex
Saab MCT8 and PSU
Saab
Sajo Tally
Tally
Siemens 530, 550 and R2000
Tally
Sinumerik
Tally
Slo-syn ENC, LNC, MNC 24 and 36
Slo-syn
SMT CNC2200
Addmaster
Square D
Tally
Strippit 1150 and 7300
Remex
Sundstrand Swinc
Remex
Traub TX7
Oki Electric
CONTROL AND MODEL
TAPE READER
Westinghouse Producer 2
Decitek
Yasnac Sanyo Denki
Sanyo Denki
20.8.5
1193
Editor Shortcuts
Keys with a + between them require holding keys down simultaneously.

Features that lack a specific shortcut key can be accessed from the keyboard with
menu shortcut keys. For example ALT+H and then a K to display the Shortcut Keys
on the help screen.
KEY(S)
CURSOR MOVEMENT
KEY(S)
SELECTION
Up Arrow
Previous line
Shift+Up Arrow
Previous line
Down Arrow
Next line
Shift+Down Arrow
Next line
Left Arrow
Previous character Shift+Left Arrow
Previous character
Right Arrow
Next character
Shift+Right Arrow
Next character
CTRL+Left Arrow Previous word
Shift+CTRL+Left
Arrow
Previous word
CTRL+Right ArrowNext word
Shift+CTRL+Right
Arrow
Next word
Home
Start of line
Shift+Home
Start of line
End
End of line
Shift+End
End of line
CTRL+Home
Start of file
Shift+CTRL+Home
Start of file
CTRL+End
End of file
Shift+CTRL+End
End of file
Page Up
Up one window
Shift+Page Up
Up one window
Page Down
Down one window
Shift+Page Down
Down one window
CTRL+A
Select entire file
KEY(S)
INSERT
KEY(S)
DELETE
Shift+Insert
Contents of
clipboard
Delete
Selection or character at right
Enter
New Line
Shift+Delete
Cut to the clipboard
Spacebar
Space
Backspace
Character left of the cursor
CTRL+D
Current line
1194
KEY(S)
FILE
KEY(S)
EDIT
CTRL+N
New file
CTRL+X
Cut to clipboard
CTRL+O
Open existing file
CTRL+C
Copy to the clipboard
CTRL+W
Close current file
CTRL+V
Paste contents of clipboard
CTRL+S
Save current file
CTRL+F
Find specific characters
F12
Save As
CTRL+H
Replace specific characters
CTRL+P
Print current file
F3
Continue to find or replace
CTRL+F4
Close current
window
CTRL+G
Goto a specific line
CTRL+F6
Switch to next open CTRL+E

file
ALT+F4
Exit
20.8.6
Expression calculator
ASCII Chart
DEC HEX ASCII
00
NUL
01
KEY
DEC HEX ASCII
ctrl+@
DEC HEX ASCII
DEC HEX ASCII
32
20
SP
64
40
96
60
SOH ctrl+a
33
21
65
41
97
61
02
STX
ctrl+b
34
22
66
42
98
62
03
ETX
ctrl+c
35
23
67
43
99
63
04
EOT
ctrl+d
36
24
68
44
100 64
05
ENQ ctrl+e
37
25
69
45
101 65
06
ACK
ctrl+f
38
26
&
70
46
102 66
07
BEL
ctrl+g
39
27
71
47
103 67
08
BS
ctrl+h
40
28
72
48
104 68
09
HT
ctrl+i
41
29
73
49
105 69
10
0A
LF
ctrl+j
42
2A
74
4A
106 6A
11
0B
VT
ctrl+k
43
2B
75
4B
107 6B
12
0C FF
ctrl+l
44
2C ,
76
4C L
108 6C l
13
0D CR
ctrl+m
45
2D -
77
4D M
109 6D m
14
0E
SO
ctrl+n
46
2E
78
4E
110 6E
15
0F
SI
ctrl+o
47
2F
79
4F
111 6F
16
10
DLE
ctrl+p
48
30
80
50
112 60
DEC HEX ASCII
KEY
DEC HEX ASCII
DEC HEX ASCII
1195
DEC HEX ASCII
17
11
DC1
ctrl+q
49
31
81
51
113 61
18
12
DC2
ctrl+r
50
32
82
52
114 62
19
13
DC3
ctrl+s
51
33
83
53
115 63
20
14
DC4
ctrl+t
52
34
84
54
116 64
21
15
NAK
ctrl+u
53
35
85
55
117 65
22
16
SYN
ctrl+v
54
36
86
56
118 66
23
17
ETB
ctrl+w
55
37
87
57
119 67
24
18
CAN ctrl+x
56
38
88
58
120 68
25
19
EM
ctrl+y
57
39
89
59
121 69
26
1A
SUB
ctrl+z
58
3A
90
5A
122 6A
27
1B
ESC
ctrl+[
59
3B
91
5B
123 6B
28
1C FS
ctrl+\
60
3C <
92
5C \
124 6C |
29
1D GS
ctrl+]
61
3D =
93
5D ]
125 6D }
30
1E
RS
ctrl+^
62
3E
>
94
5E
126 6E
31
1F
US
ctrl+_
63
3F
95
5F
127 6F
DEL
20.8.7
Worksheets
The following worksheets should be completed during installation of PEditor and for
every CNC machine on the shop floor.
Printing an RS-232 Adapter Worksheet
To print an RS-232 Adapter Worksheet, select Search from the help menu. After
the RS-232 Adapter Worksheet topic is found, select Print Topic from the File
menu in the help window.
SURFCAM RS-232 Adapter Worksheet
Customer:
Adapter:
Installed By:
# of Com Ports:
Intelligent:
Port Address:
Driver Size:
Memory Range:
I/O Range:
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
q2
q4
q8
q 16
q 24
q 32
q ____________
q Yes q No
q 3F8 q 2F8 q ____________
q 8k
q 64k q ____________
____________
- ____________
____________
- ____________
1196
IRQ:
q3
q4
q5
q 10
q 11
q 12
q ____________
q7
q 15
Printing a CNC RS-232 Worksheet

To print a CNC RS-232 Worksheet, select Search from the help menu. After the
CNC RS-232 worksheet topic is found, select Print Topic from the File menu in the
help window.
Note
Document each CNCs RS-232 parameters in the worksheet on the

following page. The CNC RS-232 worksheets works best when kept with
this manual.
SURFCAM CNC RS-232 Worksheet

Customer:
CNC / Machine:
Installed By:
COM Port #:
Baud Rate:
Parity:
Data Bits:
Stop Bits:
Flow Control:
Wait for CNC:
Require DTR:
Require RTS:
Comment End:
Comment Start:
Line Send End:
Line Send Start:
Conv. Send End:
Conv. Send Start:
Conv. Rec. End:
Conv. Rec. Start:
Prog. Send End:
Prog. Send Start:
Prog. Rec. End:
Prog. Rec. Start:
Character Delay:
Line Delay:
Receive CR:
Receive LF:
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
____________
q 2400 q 4800 q 9600 q _____
q None q Even q Odd q _____
q7
q8
q _____
q1
q2
q _____
q None q Soft. q Hard.
q Yes q No
q Yes q No
q Yes q No
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
_____________________________
____________
____________
q None q Remove
q Add LF
q None q Remove
q Add CR
Send CR:
Send LF:
Nulls:
q None q Remove
q None q Remove
q Yes q No
q Add LF
q Add CR
1197
1198
Chapter 20 Editor, Part 3: SURFCAM NC Editor
PART 3: SURFCAM NC EDITOR
20.9
INTRODUCTION
The SURFCAM NC Editor is a Windows-based, 32 bit program designed specifically for

editing programs for numerically controlled machine tools. The SURFCAM NC Editor
contains features that are helpful to NC programmers when creating new programs or
changing existing programs. In addition to basic editing functions, the program has
specialized functions that eliminate tedious and repetitive tasks such as sequence
numbering, and provide useful analyses that, for example, compare two NC programs.
The SURFCAM NC Editor is suitable for use with large NC programs such as those
produced by computer-assisted programming systems.
Another powerful feature of SURFCAM NC Editor is that you have access to the
SURFCAM DNC utility from the tool bar.
20.10
USING THE EDITOR
Start the editor by one of the following methods:

1.
Within a SURFCAM session, click the NC Operations Manager button.

Then click Post.
2.
Click Start, then point to Programs, then to SURFCAM 2002, then click
SURFCAM NC Editor.
All changes made in the editor are made to a copy of the data file contained in the
computer's memory. These changes do not become permanent until you save the file.
Menu
Toolbar
Right-click
Menu
The SURFCAM NC Editor Screen

Current/
Total Blocks
1199
Interaction with the editor is through standard Windows commands and techniques.
Resize and move the editor window the same as in most Windows programs. Enter
commands via a menu bar at the top of the editor window. Several of the most commonly
used menu commands also appear on the toolbar at the top of the screen.
You can edit or view more than one file at a time. When multiple files are open, each has
its own title bar. The various menus and actions will apply only to the active file. Click
anywhere within a file's window or title bar to cause it to become the active file.
Insert / Overwrite Mode
Press the Insert key on your keyboard to toggle between the Insert and the Overwrite
mode.The pointer is simple vertical line when you are in the Insert typing mode. It is
a black block when you are in the Overwrite typing mode.
20.11
MAIN MENU
20.11.1 File Menu
New
Start a new NC program file in a new edit window. This will not affect other
files that are currently being edited.
Open
The Open a File dialog box will be displayed so you can select the
filename of the NC program you intend to edit or review.
1200
You can click a box that forces the file into Read Only mode.
You can open the same file multiple times, but copies after the first are Read Only
and cannot be edited.
Close
Close the current file. If you have made changes and not saved them, a dialog box
will be displayed asking if you wish to save the changes.
Save
Save the file in the active edit window using its current name. If a name
has not yet been provided, the editor will prompt you for one. If the file
already exists on disk, a dialog box will be displayed asking if you want to
replace it.
Save As
The Save As dialog box will be displayed so you can save the active file using a
new name. You can also write it to a different disk or folder.
Open Related
Locate and open files that are related to the active file, for example post processor
listings and programmers notes. These relationships are maintained in the Editor
Options dialog box.
Close Related
Close files that were opened with the Open Related command.
SURFCAM DNC (SDNC)
Run the SURFCAM DNC program.
Print
Print the active file or a portion of it. If you highlight a range of blocks, the
Print dialog box will contain a check box to specify that only the selected
blocks should be printed. Files will be printed using the editors screen font
unless you check the Use Assigned Font box and specify a different font.
1201
Insert
Position the pointer to the desired location before clicking Insert. The Insert a File
dialog box will be displayed so you can insert a file into the file that you are editing.
The entire file that you specify will be inserted at the pointer location.
Exit
Close the editor. If any open files were changed but not saved, the editor will ask
if you want to save them before exiting.
Recent File List
A list of recently opened file names may also appear on this menu. Click on a name
to open the file.
Note
In some installations, some File menu commands may not be available.

When embedded within another application, the editor may show an
abbreviated menu list to better maintain system integrity. The missing
functions are available elsewhere in the system within which the editor is
imbedded.
Note
Menu items that are locally defined may appear on the File menu.
20.11.2 Edit Menu

There are various methods to select code.
1.
Hold the mouse button down and drag the mouse over characters.
1202
2.
Entire blocks or lines can be selected by keeping the mouse to the left of the
lines.
3.
Press the shift key and use the arrow keys to select the characters.
4.
Select the start character and then hold the shift key down while you select the
end character. Between these actions, you can page down through the file if
necessary.
5.
Use Edit menu selection commands.
Undo (CTRL+Z)
Undo the last change you made. For example, if you unintentionally
delete some characters, click Edit > Undo to restore them.
The editor retains a list of changes and you can press the Undo
command repeatedly to undo previous actions. The size of the list depends
on available memory.
Not all changes can be undone.
Cut (CTRL+X)
Erase characters and copy them to the clipboard. The clipboard
retains its information even when you change files so that characters
cut from one program can be pasted into another program. However,
the clipboard only saves one cut operation's data.
The Clipboard retains its information even when you change files so that
characters cut from one program can be pasted into another program.
1203
Copy (CTRL+C)
Copy characters to the clipboard without deleting them. Use Copy
and Paste to duplicate characters, lines, or blocks of lines.
Paste (CTRL+V)
Copy the clipboard contents into the NC program at the pointer
location.
Note
Data would have to be previously placed into the clipboard

using Cut or Copy.
Delete
Remove the selected characters. Unlike Cut, this operation does not use the
clipboard and therefore requires fewer resources if deleting a large amount
of data. It also leaves the clipboard contents intact in case you have data
there that you intend to use later.
Select All (CTRL+A)
Select all characters within the current file.
Select Tool Range
Select all blocks between two tool change commands. To use this function,
position the pointer within the range of blocks you want selectedafter one
tool change and before anotherand click Select Tool Range.
If the pointer is positioned prior to the first tool change, all blocks after the
first and up to the tool change are selected. If the pointer is positioned after
the last tool change, all blocks starting with the first after the last tool change
and ending with the next to last block in the program will be selected.
The intent of this function is to provide an easy method of deleting or
otherwise changing all blocks related to a given tool. See Machine Tool,
page 1238 for the method of specifying the tool change command. (Usually
M6 or Txxx).
Linear Abs <-> Inc
Click this command to show a dialog box intended to help you convert
portions of a program from absolute tool positions to incremental positioning
or the reverse. It converts X, Y, and Z words only. Although intended for
linear motion only, it may work correctly for some circular motion, for
example when changing absolute to incremental where G2 and G3
commands already have incremental center locating. A warning is issued if
any circle commands are encountered and these should be carefully
checked.
The editor attempts to determine the current tool position, which is a
necessary piece of information. This will be displayed and should be
changed if necessary.
1204
This menu item is selectable only if a portion of the NC program is selected,

and blocks partially selected are considered completely selected.
Insert ASCII Char
Click this menu command to show a dialog box where you can select
characters to insert into the NC program. The box contains all possible
characters with decimal values from 1 through 255 in three columns
showing hex, decimal, and ASCII or other representation. (To insert a null,
or zero, value, use the Null Byte character specified under editor options.)
If the inserted character has no graphical representation or formatting
function, a 03 for example, it will be usually be shown as a box.
Show Hex
Opens a small window that shows the hexadecimal representation of the
block under the cursor. The characters are read down. For example, the
first column of the hex window might read 4-E-N, indicating that the first
character in the block is the letter N with a hexadecimal value of 4E.
Select to Mark
This command is available if a mark has previously been set. Use it to select
all characters between the pointer position and the mark.
You can use Select to Mark to quickly select large areas of the NC program.
Note
You can right-click and choose this command from the right-click
menu.
Set Mark
Set a mark, or reference point, at the pointer position and activate the Go to
Mark command. This mark does not alter the file and it exists only for the
edit session in which you set it.
Note
You can right-click and choose this command from the right-click
menu.
Click this button, or click Search > Jump to > Mark, to return quickly
to the mark. For example, you might set the mark to a place in your
program where a Z-axis move seems questionable, then go on to
look at other areas in the program, then quickly return to the questionable
position.
Clear Mark
Clear any previously set mark within the active edit window.
1205
20.11.3 Search Menu

Find
Display the Find/Replace dialog box.
Find
Enter a value in the Find box. If you enter X1.0, the search will find all variations
of X1.0 such as X01.000. If you want to perform an exact search, check the Use
Character Search option.
Find Next
Continue to click Find Next as required.
Replace, then Find
Enter a replacement string into the Replace With box.
You can then replace one occurrence at a time and then locate the next.
Replace All
Replace all occurrences.
Search Up
The search will be performed from the insertion point towards the top of the file.
Use Character Search
Perform an exact search.
Note
The editor will perform a character search regardless of the Use

Character Search setting if the Find value is only one character long.
1206
Feeds and Speeds

NC program commands that signify tool changes, feedrate changes, or spindle
speed changes are specified in the Set Machine Tool Characteristics dialog box.
See Machine Tool, page 1238.
Click Search > Feeds and Speeds. Then choose one of the following to move the
pointer down from current pointer position to the next change indicated.
Tool Change (T)
Spindle Speed Change (S)
Feedrate Change (F)
Jump to
Top
Jump to Start of File.
Bottom
Jump to End of File.
Mark
Jump to Mark location.
Note
You can right-click and choose the Top or Bottom command from the
right-click menu.
20.11.4 Global Menu

Selections will affect the entire NC program file or the blocks you select.
Reseq
The Resequence dialog box will be displayed so you can
resequence or add sequence numbers to the NC program.
Sequence numbers are N-words and are placed at the front
of each block. However, if a block already has an optional
delete character of a slash (/) in the first position, the
sequence number will follow it.
1207
Increment
Enter the amount
to add to each
successive
sequence
number.
Starting Number
Enter the starting
sequence
number.
Start at Block
Enter the block at
which to start
sequence
numbering. For
example, if the
first block is a
program number
that should not be
numbered, enter
a 2 here.
Number of Digits
Enter the number of digits in each sequence number. This will also establish
the maximum sequence number.
Sequence Every
The default is to sequence number all blocks or all blocks in the specified
range.
If you want to sequence every n blocks, then enter the n value in the box. A
value of zero or one will sequence every block. A value of ten, for example, will
sequence every tenth block
Start at Cursor
Start resequencing at the pointer location, not at the start of the program. Thus
you can avoid placing sequence numbers on program name blocks,
comments, and other miscellaneous blocks that often appear at the start of a
program.
Note
This option takes precedence over the Start at Block option.
1208
Selected Blocks Only

If any characters were selected when you clicked Reseq, the Selected Blocks
Only box will be available. Check it to cause resequencing to apply only to
those blocks that are selected.
Suppress leading zeros
Check the box if you do not want sequence numbers to have leading zeros.
Do Not Sequence Comments
Comments will not be sequenced.
Do Not Sequence Empty Blocks
Blank lines will not be sequenced.
Insert Blank Space After Seqno
Leave a space after the sequence number.
Number Blocks (No "N" in Seqno)
Number blocks without a preceding N.
Note
Once a file is numbered using this option, the editor will not remove
or replace them automatically. If you need to resequence, uncheck
the box and use Add/Change again, then use Remove Only, and the
numbers should be removed.
Add/Change
Resequence a program. Existing sequence numbers will be replaced.
Remove Only
Remove all sequence numbers.
End-of-block
The End of Block dialog box will be displayed.
1209
Add EOB Characters

Add an EOB character to end
of each block.
Remove EOB Characters
Remove the EOB character
from end of each block.
You should make sure that the
EOB character in the box is
valid, since the editor makes
no assumptions.
Add CR / LF After EOBs
Add a carriage return / line
feed after each EOB
character.
End of Block dialog box
NC programs without CR / LF characters are difficult to edit since multiple

blocks will appear on each line.
Note
Before using this option, be sure that your NC controller accepts CR

/ LF character sequences since there is no provision within this editor
for automatically removing them later.
End of Block Character

Enter the EOB character used by the machine tool controllerusually $ or #.
This character is also used by the numeric option of the Compare command.
Whatever character you specify here will be saved between sessions.
Blanks
The Insert or Remove Blanks dialog box will be displayed. You can delete all
blanks from the NC program, or insert them before address letters for better
readability.
The currently-selected blocks
are affected, not the entire
file.
Insert Blanks
Add a blank before all
address letters except N. This
may make the program easier
to read.
Insert or Remove Blanks dialog box
1210
Remove Blanks
Remove all blanks from the NC program except those within comments.
Remove Blank Lines
Remove blocks that are empty or contain only spaces.
Word Format
The Word Format dialog box will be displayed. You can change the word format
for several word addresses at once. For example, if you have a program with no
decimal points in it and need them added, you can specify the number of assumed
decimals and the editor will insert decimal points in all occurrences of the words
you specify.
Reformat an NC program for functional or cosmetic reasons. This dialog box is

used as follows.
1.
Click on the letter address to be adjusted in the Address Letters Affected

line. Click more than one address if you wish.
2.
Specify the number of digits before and after the decimal point.
3.
If the existing NC program file does not contain decimal points, enter the
number of assumed decimals into the Decimals Assumed box. (For
example, if 40000 = 4.0 then enter a 4.)
4.
Set the various options at the lower left.
5.
To test your settings, enter various numbers in the text box at the top and
click the Try box. This will not affect the file.
6.
1211
If the settings are correct, click the Start button. No changes will be made to
the file until you click Start.
The editor will save the options used, but not the address letters, between
sessions.
Example:
Assume that you want to X, Y, Z, I, J and K words to have a decimal point and
no leading zeros, but want to keep trailing zeros. There are three digits before
the decimal, and four after. You would do the following on the Word Format
panel:
1.
Click on the address letters you want changed.
2.
Type 3 into the Digits Before Decimal box.
3.
Type 4 into the Digits After Decimal box.
4.
If the file currently has no decimals, you would enter 4 into Decimals
Assumed.
5.
Check the Suppress Leading Zeros and the Include Decimal point
options.
6.
Make sure the Suppress Trailing Zeros option is not checked (no X).
7.
Unless you want plus signs on positive numbers, leave the Include +
Sign if Positive box unchecked.
8.
Select the Try button to see the results of your specs. You can type any
number you want into the sample data box for testing. This does not
affect the file. It just lets you know what the editor thinks you want.
9.
Select the Start button. This will reformat the file.
10.
Check the changes carefully before you save the file.
If you use this dialog box and then discover that you have corrupted your NC
programfor example, you experimented with one decimal place in the X, Y, and
Z axesjust don't save the program. Click File > Close. When the editor tells you
that your file has changed, and asks if you want to save it, click No. Then click File
> Open and read the program in again.
1212
Adjust
The Adjust / Transform
dialog box will be
displayed so you can
perform arithmetic
operations on values
within an NC program.
Unless you highlight
some blocks and check
the Selected Blocks Only
box, the operation will be
performed on the entire
program.
For example, you can change all X and Y axis values in the program by entering
constant values. This could help alter an NC program where the part or fixture is
moved to another table location.
Another typical use for Adjust is to reflect a change in tool length for machining
centers, or offsets for lathes.
Note
Be careful when using this function. Word addresses may have multiple
meanings (e.g., G01X1.0 and G04X1.0) or uses, especially within
canned cycles. Also, do not forget that changes to X or Y might
necessitate changes to I and J, etc.
If a portion of your program uses incremental moves, this function may also
produce invalid results.
Letter Address(es)
Enter up to 3 address letters in the Letter Address boxes.
Operation(s)
Click the arrow to see the list of operations.
Adjustment Amount
Numeric values can be adjusted by the number you enter in the box.
Examples
1.
Change lathe programs from diameter to radius notation. Enter / in the

Operation box and 2 as the Adjustment Amountusually referring to the
X axis.
2.
To convert from inch to metric units enter * in the Operation box and 25.4
as the Adjustment Amount.
3.
Enter * for the Operation and 1.1 for the Adjustment Amount for F
addresses to increase feed rates by 10 percent.
1213
Decimals to assume if input has no decimal point

If the NC program has no decimal points, the editor can't perform its
calculations properly unless you enter the number of decimal positions to
assume. If the NC program has decimal points, this is not necessary.
Check this box if you want the change applied only to blocks that were selected
before you clicked Global > Adjust.
Start
Once the values are set, click the Start button.
Columns
Delete Column
Enter the range of columns to
delete. If no entry is made in the
second box, only the single
column will be deleted.
Check this box to delete the
selected blocks only.
Delete by Columns dialog box
1214
20.11.5 Calcs Menu
Basic Calculator
This is a convenient way to access the
standard calculator provided with
Windows. If it is not available on your
system, this menu command will not be
visible.
Slider Button
Use the slider on the bottom right to
indicate the number of decimal
places.
Note
You can drag the results to

the editor window.
Basic Calculator
Trig Calculator
A special purpose dialog box will be displayed to help calculate angles and sides
of triangles.
Click a tab for a Right triangle or an Oblique triangle. Enter angles and lengths.
1215
Trig Calculator dialog box
Enter angles and lengths. When sufficient information has been entered, the
Compute button will become available.
Compute
Click the Compute button and the calculator will fill in the remaining boxes.
Clear
Click Clear to clear all values.
Close
Click Close to exit this dialog box.
Note
You can drag the results to the editor window.
Programming Calculator
A dialog box with several tabs will be displayed to provide various aids in
developing feed rates, spindle speeds, and other values.
1216
Conversion
Conversion Tab on Programming Calculator
Enter a value in the Millimeters box to convert to Inches and vice versa. If a
commonly used fractional (inch) value results, it will be displayed. You can also
enter a fraction of an inch as shown on the far right in the above dialog box.
Feedrates
Convert between units per revolution and units per minute; also between feed
per tooth and units per minute. The English/Metric options determine the actual
units used. Click the button for the conversion desired and enter values as
appropriate.
1217
Feedrates Tab on Programming Calculator
Speeds
Convert between surface feet (or meters) per minute and RPM values. Specify
English or metric units and the operation, and then enter the values.
Speeds Tab on Programming Calculator
Drill
Calculate the drill tip length based on tip angle and diameter and also assist
with countersink calculations.
1218
Drill Tab on Programming Calculator
Tapping
Calculate the feedrate based on pitch or threads per inch (or mm), and convert
between pitch and threads per inch or mm.
Tapping Tab on Programming Calculator
Hole Circles
Calculate the coordinates for point to point moves arranged in an arc.
1219
Hole Circles Tab on Programming Calculator
Notes
1.
The Starting Angle is relative to the 3 oclock position.
2.
If you do not specify a value for Included Angle, the complete circle is
created.
3.
You can drag the resulting coordinates to the editor window.
1220
20.11.6 Analysis
General
A dialog box will be
displayed that displays
program size and
information regarding tool
usage, shows the
minimum and maximum
values found in various
words, and checks for
reasonable data.
File Data tab
File Data
This tab provides basic information about the NC program in the active edit
window.
Min / Max
This is a
reasonableness check.
It looks for letter
address values that far
exceed the average
value of that letter.
For example, X values
are averaged and the
high and low X values
are checked against
the average.
This is performed for X,
Y, Z, I, J, K, R, C, U,
and V.
Min/Max tab
1221
If the high/low values deviate significantly, the editor will indicate this. (The
deviation allowance is preset to 5 standard deviations). Although false alarms
are possible, and even likely for some programs, this method often detects
missing decimal points. Deviations are reported on the Min/Max tab if they exist.
Tool Change
When tool usage
information is
displayed, you can
click on any line to
jump to the program
statement that
generated it.
Tool Change tab
Miscellaneous
This is a
reasonableness
check.
Search for characters
that do not normally
appear in an NC
program.
The default is to
search for comma,
underscore, and
double quote
characters. You can
change this list by
entering different
characters in the box.
Miscellaneous tab
This function must be

specifically
requested.
1222
Compare
To use Compare, at least one NC program must be open.
If only one file is currently open, a Select File to Compare Against dialog box will
be displayed for you to open another file.
If more than one file is open, a Compare Select dialog box will be displayed with a
list of files to be compared with the active file. Double-click the file you want or click
the Get a File button to read in a different file for comparing.
Automatic Compare
Automatic Compare dialog box
You can scroll through both files using the scroll bar or keyboard.
To compare the files click the Numeric button or the Character button.
Character
A character compare is an exact, character by character comparison.
However, sequence numbers (N words) can be ignored by checking the
Ignore Sequence Numbers box.
1223
Numeric
A numeric compare ignores sequence numbers, comments, EOB
characters, and format differences. For example, N0040 X3.100 F30.0 will
match X3.1F030.
You can specify a comparison tolerance for numeric compares. Two
numbers that match within this tolerance are considered equal. For
example, with a tolerance of 0.001, Z3.0 and Z2.9999 are considered
matched.
After the compare is done, new lines will be shown in blue and deleted lines in
red. Click the arrow buttons to jump to the next or previous mismatch.
In both comparison methods, the editor will attempt to resynchronize, or seek
matching blocks after a mismatch is located.
If the character compare is active, then the program looks ahead up to fifty
blocks to determine if a mismatch represents just a few added or deleted blocks
or if the NC programs are completely different.
If the numeric compare is active, the editor only looks ahead five blocks. This
is necessary because the numeric compare function is more likely to find false
matches. For example, many NC programs contain several lines reading
X0.000 Y0.000 throughout.
You can continue to edit or do other work while a compare operation is in
progress.
If the files are different, you can save a Differences file by clicking the Save
button on the Compare window. This file shows the two compared files as a
single, merged file with changes relative to the left file. Additions are prefixed
with a +, deletions with a -, and replacements with < and >, indicating a blocks
presence in the left or right file.
1224
Manual Compare
2
3
6
Manual Compare dialog box
Use the Manual Compare method when you anticipate making changes to one
or both files as a result of the comparison. It is important to realize that most
operations start at the text cursor (insertion point) location in each file, and that
the text cursors may be on different blocks in each file. Use the mouse or arrow
keys to position the text cursors as necessary.
Either file can be changed during a Manual Compare.
1 Move text cursor for each file to top, up one, down one, to bottom.
2 Move up or down one independently.
3 Copy selected test from right file to insertion point in left file.
4 Find next mismatch or match, starting from both text cursors.
5 Same as above except ignore sequence numbers.
6 Return to normal editing.
Backplot
Click the Backplot command to see a window that shows two and three axis
programs displayed graphically.
Backplot Screen
Toolbar Buttons
Fit to Screen.
Zoom Up.
Zoom Down.
1225
1226
Show various views of the toolpath and fit to the current

screen.
Small rotation on each axis and fit to the screen.
Print toolpath.
Left, right, up, down.

Rotate on X, Y, or Z axis.
Show current axis orientation. Each axis is drawn to a length
corresponding to the maximum travel range for the program being
reviewed.
Alternate mouse function. Normally, to pan and zoom, you hold down the
mouse button and a rubber-band box is drawn around the area to be
shown. A single click will center the display on the location clicked. If the
Alternate Mouse Function button is locked down, click and drag the mouse to
move the toolpath. Right click and drag up or down to zoom. This method may not
be suitable for large toolpaths or slower computers.
Start a toolpath replay.
Stop or single step. This pause button stops the drawing of the toolpath.
To resume, click on one of the speed buttons to the right. To single step,
continue to click the pause button.
Replay speed: slow, medium, or full. At slow or medium speeds, the
current block is highlighted in the editor as the replay proceeds.
Status Bar
The current tool number, feedrate, and spindle speed are displayed.
When the condition on the label occurs, the indicator will light up.
1227
Click a button to highlight it. The following descriptions refer to highlighted

buttons.
Hide Cycle Text
Text output (for example, G81) is not shown when a cycle is encountered.
Hide Rapid Moves
Rapid moves are not displayed.
Stop on Tool Change
Replay stops when a tool change is encountered.
Stop on Opstop
Replay stops when an OPSTOP command is processed.
Single Tool
Motion with tools other than the currently loaded tool is not shown.
Hide Opskips
Blocks preceded by a slash are not displayed.
Color Change
Change the color when the specified condition occurs. Colors can be set to
change on tool, feedrate, or spindle speed changes.
Backplot Setup Options
Click the Setup button to see the following dialog box.
1228
Basic Options Tab
Basic Options tab
Choose portrait or landscape page orientation for printing.

Machine defaults to incremental mode
Check this option to set the backplot default to incremental (G91)
mode. It will still react to G90 and G91 commands within the NC
program.
1229
Cycles Tab
The values in this Cycles tab indicate that all G codes from G81 through G89
and G73 are to be displayed as cycles in the graphical display. It also
indicates that a G80 turns the cycle mode off.
Fixture Offsets Tab
Fixture Offsets
1230
The values in this tab set a G55 fixture offset command to the X and Y
values shown. The backplotting function allows up to 7 fixture offsets.
Click the Clear Values butt to set the XYZ coordinates to zero.
Click the Restore Defaults button does this and enters G53 through G59 as
offsets 0 to 6.
Display Tab
Display tab
The colors specified on the Display tab are used in the backplot.
Code
The code for a rapid positioning move is specified here. Generally, this is
a G0, but values such as R or F999 can also be used.
Modal
If the rapid command is modal (remains in effect until a G1 for example),
check the Modal box.
XYZ Button
The oblique view angles can be changed by rotating to the desired
angles and clicking the XYZ button on this dialog.
1231
20.11.7 Options Menu

The Options menu controls various editor settings.
Changes made here are retained between sessions.
Files tab
Editor
Files Tab
Starting Directory
Enter the folder you want the editor to use as the current folder at startup. If
you leave this box blank, the editor will use the current folder.
File Extensions
These extensions and descriptions are used in file open and save dialog
boxes.
1232
Do not enter the period when entering an extension. Multiple extensions can
be entered on a line by separating them with a semicolon.
Make Automatic Backup
Check this box to have NC program files copied when they are opened. Files
will be copied to a new file with the same name but with a file extension of
bak.
Related Files
Click the Related Files button to open the Define Related Files dialog box.
Use this dialog box to specify the file extensions for related files, the folders
in which to search for them, and various other options.
Related File Extensions
List the file extensions that determine that files are related.
For example, postprocessor listings might have an extension of lst and
programmer's notes an extension of notes.
Separate extensions with a semicolon. If the extensions lst and notes are
specified, an NC program named program5.ncc would have files named
program5.lst and program5.notes related to it.
Any file with same name, regardless of extension
Check this box to cause the editor to relate any files with the same name,
regardless of their extensions. An NC program named program5.ncc
would have as related files any file named program5 regardless of its
1233
extension. Checking this box causes the extensions listed in the text box
above it to be ignored.
Related File Directory
The editor will start searching for related files in the specified directory,
unless the Look in same directory as NC program box is checked.
Click the Browse button to locate the directory.
Look in same directory as NC Program
If you check this box, the Related File Directory will not be available.
Look in lower level subdirectories also
Check this box to search Lower level directories.
Open related files as read-only
If Open related files as read-only is checked, files located by the Open
Related menu item (under Files) will be opened in read-only mode.
Postprocessor listings would typically be opened in this manner.
Show Open Related on the file menu
Check this option to have file names appear on the File menu list. If you
do not check this box, the ability to open related files is unavailable.
Note
1.
A maximum of 10 related files will be opened.
2.
Related files are opened in text mode. Context based text colors
are not available.
Colors Tab
Background, Text, Comments
Click in a box and scroll up or down to select a color.
1234
Colors tab
Highlight Words
A dialog box will be displayed to set colors for individual NC words. Point to
a color and drag it onto a word.
For example, all M-words could be colored green by dragging the green box
to the M-word.
Note
When you edit a file, you can click the button or select
Color Highlighting from the right-click menu to cycle
through several highlighting methods.
Reset to Defaults
Click the button to restore all options to their default values.
1235
Characters Tab
Characters tab
Set Font
A standard Windows font selection dialog box will be displayed.
Default Font
Set the character font back to the default, Courier-New 10 Point.
Convert Keyboard Input to Upper Case
Check this box to convert all input characters to upper case.
Character Used to Represent Null characters Contained in Files
This is the character that will replace null characters when a file is read, and
will then be converted back to null when the file is saved. It cannot be a letter
or number. The default is @.
Send To Tab
You can create your own menu commands that will appear on the File menu.
These commands can call other programs and optionally pass the current file
name (and path) to the other program on its command line.
1236
A Send To menu item can also be created that copies the current file to a disk.
If this capability is used, the file is instantly copied. If it already exists the current
copy will be overwritten.
Send To Tab
Enable Send To capability on File menu and Toolbar

Check the box to put a command on the File menu.
Remove the check if you do not want the item to be on the File menu each
time you open the editor.
Menu Text
This is the text that will appear on the File menu.
Command
Enter the command to be issued when you click this command on the File
menu. A special variable called &fn is available which contains the current
file name. For example, the command c:\windows\notepad &fn would start
the Microsoft Notepad application with the editor's active file loaded.
1237
Tool Tip
Whatever is entered here will appear in the editor's status line when the local
menu item is highlighted, as well being displayed as a Tool Tip.
Miscellaneous Tab
Miscellaneous Tab
Toolbar
Indicate if you want small or large toolbar buttons or none at all.
Your choice will be saved between sessions.
Tool Tips
You can do the following.
1.
Set the background color of the Tool Tips (menu hints).
2.
Extend the time that the tool tips are displayed.
Turn off the tool tips.

Tool tips are used on all toolbar buttons and in several dialog boxes.
1238
Show Warnings and Information

Indicate whether you want the editor to show warnings in the following
cases.
1.
When a file containing null characters is read or written
2.
Before making a Global change.
Also control the display of informational messages after a global change.

For example, nn coordinates were changed.
Machine Tool
The Set Machine Tool Characteristics dialog box will be displayed. This describes
characteristics of the target NC controller.
These settings are saved between user sessions. If not set correctly, the editor will
be unable to distinguish comments from NC program text or to locate tool
changes, etc.
Set Machine Tool Characteristics dialog box
Method of Identifying Comments

Characters that start comments
List the characters that indicate a comment for the NC machine to be
programmed. Do not forget the Program Name character (often O or %).
A typical set of comment indicators is (%O.
TAB can start comment

Check this box if your machine tool considers a TAB character as a
comment indicator.
Feeds and Speeds
Word for tool change
Enter characters that denote a tool changeusually T or M6.
Word for speed change
Enter characters that denote a spindle speed changeusually S.
Word for feedrate change
Enter characters that denote a feedrate changeusually F.
20.11.8 Window Menu

Cascade, Tile Horizontal,
Tile Vertical
These are standard
Windows commands.
Available Window List
Click another open window
to transfer to it.
20.11.9 Help Menu

Help
Use this command for general help information. Press the
F1 key to get context-sensitive help.
About
The current version of the editor will be displayed.
20.12
TOOLBAR
SURFCAM NC Editor Toolbar

1239
1240
Each button on the toolbar has a corresponding command elsewhere in the program.
BUTTON
20.13
SEE
BUTTON
SEE
New, page 1199
Jump to, page 1206
Open, page 1199
Highlight Words, page 1234
Save, page 1200
Tool Change (T), page 1206
Print, page 1200
Spindle Speed Change (S), page

1206
Cut (CTRL+X), page 1202
Feedrate Change (F), page 1206
Copy (CTRL+C), page 1203
Top, page 1206
Paste (CTRL+V), page 1203
Bottom, page 1206
Undo (CTRL+Z), page 1202
SURFCAM DNC (SDNC), page

1200
Find, page 1205
Help, page 1239
SHORTCUT KEYS
F1 Displays help on current dialog box.

F3 Repeats the previous Search command.
20.14
FILE FORMATS
20.14.1 UNIX Files

UNIX workstations use a different method from most PC based systems to denote the
end of a line within files. The editor detects UNIX files automatically and converts
Chapter 20 Editor
1241
them to PC format when they are read. When saved, the files will be in PC format.
UNIX systems generally have the capability to convert PC format files back to UNIX
if necessary.
20.14.2 Other File Formats

Files uploaded from NC controllers or produced by some postprocessors may not
conform to PC conventions for line end characters. In some cases there may be
multiple methods within the same file. The editor will read most common nonstandard formats. If it fails to recognize the file format, you may still be able to produce
an easily editable file display by using the End of Block command (under the Global
menu) to append CR/LF characters after character format EOBs if they exist (often
a $ character).
1242
Chapter 20 Editor
CHAPTER 21 SURFCAM DNC

21.1
INTRODUCTION
SURFCAM DNC is a Windows-based program designed to communicate with machine

tool controllers that support an RS-232 interface. SURFCAM DNC will download NC
programs from the computer to the machine tool, upload NC programs from the machine
tool to the computer, and assist in determining the communication characteristics of the
controller.
Characteristics of up to 48 machine tools can be stored in a configuration file maintained
by SURFCAM DNC. If necessary, multiple configuration files can be used.
Screen Savers and Power Management schemes should be removed from SURFCAM
DNC computers. Failure to do so could cause interruption in the operation of the DNC
package.
To start the SURFCAM DNC program, click Start > Programs > SURFCAM 2002 >
SURFCAM DNC. Then click the left mouse button.
An alternate method is to click the SURFCAM DNC button in the SURFCAM NC Editor
text editor. See Chapter 20 Editor, Part 3: SURFCAM NC Editor, page 1198.
21.2
SURFCAM DNC PROCEDURE
Perhaps the best way to introduce SURFCAM DNC is to step through the process of
adding a machine tool to the folder and then downloading an NC program. This process
is divided into four steps. Assume that the computer and the controller are already
physically connected.
21.2.1
Step 1 - Gather information Regarding the Machine Tool Controller
You need information on the communications settings used by your machine tool
controller. Specifically, you need to know the settings for data bits, parity, line speed,
stop bits, handshaking, communications protocol used, and block delay time. The
Users Manual for the controller usually contains this information. In some cases a
supplement is available from the tool manufacturer describing their communications
settings. It is likely that some of the features are configurable, so you may need to
check the controller itself to determine your settings.
1244
21.2.2
Step 2 - Add the Machine to the SURFCAM DNC Configuration File
When you start the SURFCAM DNC program, the SURFCAM DNC II dialog box will
be displayed.
SURFCAM DNC II dialog box
If you prefer that the Connect, Reset, and Stop buttons be displayed on the left,
double-click in the column of the buttons.
SURFCAM DNC II dialog box with Buttons on Left
Click Configure to display the dialog box in the Configure drop-down menu figure.
1245
Configure drop-down menu
Click Machine List to the dialog box in the Maintain Machine List dialog box figure.
Maintain Machine List dialog box
Click the Add button, enter a new name, and click OK to add the machine.
Machine for testing was entered in the example, but you can use any name of up to
60 characters. This name should be meaningful to users because it will appear in
download and upload menus.
See Machine List, page 1260.
21.2.3
Step 3 - Configure the Machine Entry
At this point, you can configure the new machine. Click Configure > Edit Machine and
choose the new machine. A dialog box will be displayed with the name of the machine
you have chosen as its title. This box has four tabs used to create and maintain
machine specifications.
21.2.3.1
Files Specifications Tab
Enter the direction of communication and file specifications on this tab.
1246
File Specifications Tab
Download / Extension / folder

Check this box if the NC controller is capable of receiving NC programs.
Enter the Extension and folder download path of available files for specific
machines. The easiest method is to click the Browse button and then locate the
folder and click on it. The machine will get the files from this folder.
Upload / Extension / folder
Check this box if the NC controller is capable of sending data and you intend to
use this ability for uploading files.
Enter the Extension and folder upload path of available files for specific
machines. The easiest method is to click the Browse button and then locate the
folder and click on it. The machine will get the files from this folder.
Notes
1.
These entries can easily be changed later and can be overridden at

execution time.
2.
If no file extension is provided by the user when uploading a program, the

extension specified here will be appended.
3.
If neither Download nor Upload is checked, the machine name will not
appear on any menu item.
21.2.3.2
1247
Communication Tab
The Comm Port parameter must reflect the computer configuration, while the
remainder should match the CNC controller values and requirements.
Communication Tab
Comm Port
Comm Port refers to the address of the serial port on your computer to which
the RS-232 cable is attached. If you don't know the correct setting, leave it as
is. There are four possibilities and you can try them one at a time later. (On
some computers, the mouse is attached to COM 1, so make sure you know
how to leave Windows without using the mouse.)
Protocol
ASCII
This really means that no protocol is used. Make sure to use Hardware or
Xon / Xoff flow control when using ASCII transfers so that the receiver can
cause the sender to pause when necessary.
Xmodem, Xmodem CRC, and Xmodem 1K
Xmodem
Xmodem uses a 128 character block plus control characters. Each block
is numbered and includes a check character. The receiver initiates the
transmission by sending a <NAK> character. It then waits 10 seconds for
the transmitter to send a block of data. It will retry 10 times if no block is
received. Block numbers start at 1 and continue to 255, after which they
1248
are repeated. The receiver acknowledges correct receipt of a block via a

<ACK> character.
Xmodem CRC
Xmodem CRC is almost identical to Xmodem except that is uses 16 bit
check character instead of an 8 bit check character. The receiver starts
the transmission by send a C rather than a <NAK> character. If the
sender does not start sending after the third attempt, the receiver
attempts to use standard Xmodem and sends <NAK> characters.
Xmodem 1K
Xmodem 1K is like Xmodem CRC except that it uses blocks of 1024
characters rather than 128. Xmodem 1K is faster than the other variants
on clean lines where there are few errors, but may be slower if many
errors are encountered. SURFCAM DNC drops back to Xmodem CRC if
more than 5 errors are encountered in a row. 128 character blocks are
preceded by an <SOH> character, and 1024 character blocks by an
<STX> character.
Xmodem
128 character data block, 8 bit check sum.
Xmodem CRC
Xmodem 1K
Notes regarding Xmodem Protocols

Software flow control (Xon/Xoff) cannot be used with Xmodem protocols.
Since the receiver initiates the file transfer, the sender should be started first.
The receiver will retry for a limited number of times (usually 10) before
abandoning the effort.
Vendors are often not specific on which version of Xmodem they are using. You
can tell which method is in use using the SURFCAM DNC Terminal function.
Open the terminal window, set the line parameters and check the Expand control
character display, and open the port. Then start an Xmodem receive operation
at the machine tool controller. Watch the terminal window. If SURFCAM DNC
receives a <NAK>, the controller is using Xmodem. If SURFCAM DNC receives
a 'C', the control is using Xmodem CRC or Xmodem 1K.
You can tell if Xmodem CRC or Xmodem 1K is being used by trying to send data
from the control to SURFCAM DNC. Start the controller and then send a 'C' in
terminal mode from SURFCAM DNC. If the block of data that SURFCAM DNC
receives starts with an <STX>, then the control is sending via Xmodem 1K.
In most cases, Xmodem transfers can be performed even if the receiver
requested CRC or 1K.
1249
Handshaking (Flow Control)

SURFCAM DNC supports both Hardware and Software flow control. Flow
control refers to the ability of either end of a communication link to control the
rate at which it is receiving data. You can avoid using flow control altogether but
this is advisable only if Xmodem is being used.
Hardware Flow Control uses the control signal lines in the serial cable to control
the data rate. SURFCAM DNC uses the Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to
Send (CTS) signals. The Data Set Ready (DSR) status is displayed, but not
used for flow control. It simply means that a remote device is attached and
turned on.
Software Flow Control uses Start (X-on) and Stop (X-off) characters to
control data flow. When a receiver needs to stop the inflow of data, it sends an
X-off. It sends an X-on character when ready to receive again.
Although the option is available, it is generally not advisable to use both
software and hardware flow control.
Block Delay (msec)
Some controllers require a delay for block processing when downloading. You
can cause a delay between blocks by entering a value in Block Delay (msec).
This value is in milliseconds, so 1000 equals one second. Maximum is 9999.
Block delay should normally be set to zero unless communication problems
occur.
Remaining parameters
Using the information collected in step 1, Step 1 - Gather information Regarding
the Machine Tool Controller, page 1243, set the appropriate values for the
remaining parameters on the Communication tab. All information entered here
must match the settings on the controller for proper communication to occur.
SURFCAM DNC's Terminal Mode command can help determine the correct
settings if necessary. See Terminal, page 1257.
For this example, assume that the controller is set to communicate at 9600 Line
Speed, 7 Data Bits, Even for Parity, 1 Stop Bit, Xon/Xoff for Handshaking. Use
zero Block Delay.
21.2.3.3
Data Specifications Tab
The communication character codes used by your controller are entered on the
Specifications tab.
1250
Data Specifications Tab
EOB
Specify the character or characters sent to the controller following each block
of data. Although the NC program stored on disk may contain Carriage Return/
Line Feed (CRLF) characters, the controller may require a LF or CR character
only.
Char Code
This is primarily for use with tape punches. You can specify an alternate input
and output code. The default is ASCII (RS-358). You can also select EIA code
(RS-244A).
Trigger Strings
Download Start
Specify the characters the controller should expect to signal the beginning
of data transmission.
Download Ready
It is common for controllers to send a DC1 character to tell an external
source (in this case, SURFCAM DNC) that it is ready to receive data. From
the Code List in Control Character List, page 1264, note that DC1 is a
Control-Q, so in this example ^Q is entered into the Download Ready box.
The caret (^) character is a common abbreviation for Control sequences.
Download Stop
For this example it is assumed that the controller expects a percent sign at
the end of a transmission, so % is entered in the Download Stop text box.
1251
Download End
Program will wait for this response to Download Stop string.
Upload Start
Specify the character to be sent to the controller to trigger upload.
Upload Ready
Program will wait for this response to Upload Start string.
Upload Stop
Acknowledges Upload End received from controller.
Upload End
Will be sent by controller to signal end of upload.
Leader
Intended for use with tape punches, leaders and trailers will be produced as
indicated by checked boxes. The length in feet is specified in the text box
and is applied to both leader and trailer. Maximum length is five feet.
21.2.3.4
Filters Tab
The Filters tab is used when it is necessary to remove characters from the data
stream when downloading or uploading.
Filters Tab
Character Filter Download and Upload

Nulls
If checked, null characters are removed from the data stream.
1252
Spaces
If checked, spaces are removed from the data stream.
Comments
If checked, data starting with a left parenthesis through end of block is
removed.
Characters
Any characters entered here are not downloaded. Control characters can be
entered by preceding the character with a caret (^) symbol. For example,
control-A would be ^A.
21.2.4
Step 4 - Download an NC Program
Once an NC controllers communications characteristics have been added to the

SURFCAM DNC configuration file, an NCC file can be downloaded to the machine.
On the SURFCAM DNC II dialog box, click Communicate > Download to display the
drop-down menu shown below. All machines that are added with the Download box
checked will appear on this menu. See Download / Extension / folder, page 1246.
Communicate > Download > Machine for Testing dialog box
After you click the machine name, the Open dialog box will be displayed showing the
Download folder.
1253
Open dialog box
For this example, assume the NCC file you download is XL14510.ncc. When you click
Open the following dialog box will be displayed.
Communicate > Download
Now click the Connect (Transmit/Receive) button. If the Comm Port setting was
correct, the following SURFCAM DNC II dialog box will be displayed.
1254
Download Connect
When you click Transmit, the Status message will change to Waiting for machine
tool because we specified that a ^Q character must be received before we send data.
Once this is sent by the machine controller, SURFCAM DNC will display the following
download progress dialog box.
Download Progress
When the download is complete, click Reset, or click the Communicate menu for
more downloads, or click the File menu to Review/Restart, or Exit the program. See
Review / Restart, page 1255.
21.3
SURFCAM DNC REFERENCE
This reference section describes the individual parts of the SURFCAM DNC II dialog box.
1255
SURFCAM DNC II dialog box
21.3.1
File Menu
Review / Restart
This is active only if you have opened a file to download. A program review dialog
box with the currently open file will be displayed.
Program Review dialog box
1256
Search
Enter the search characters and click the Search button.
Alternate start block
To set an alternate start block, select a block in the file and click on the Set
Block button.
To remove an alternate start block, select the first block in the file and click on
the Set Block button.
Add or remove a prefix
To add a prefix to an NC program, click the Add Prefix button. This will open a
text entry area where you can key in program blocks to be downloaded before
starting the download of the NC program itself. Enter the prefix blocks and click
Accept Prefix to apply it. The NC program file is not changed. The prefix can be
used in conjunction with an alternate start block to restart an NC program at a
point other than the beginning.
To remove a prefix, click the Remove Prefix button.
Add a Prefix dialog box
Close
Close the Review dialog box.
1257
Exit
End the SURFCAM DNC program.
21.3.2
Communicate Menu
Communicate menu
Download (Followed by machine list)

This is the first step in downloading an NC program to a machine tool controller.
After you pick the target machine from the displayed list, an Open dialog box will
be displayed. Select the NC program to be downloaded, then click Connect, then
Transmit to start downloading.
Note
All machines with the Download box checked on the Configure > Edit
Machine > Files Specification tab will appear on the menu. See
Download / Extension / folder, page 1246.
For a Download example, see Step 4 - Download an NC Program, page 1252.

Upload (Followed by machine list)
Upload NC programs from a CNC controller. A Save As dialog box will be
displayed wherein you specify the name of the resulting file. Then click Connect,
then Receive to start uploading.
Note
All machines with the Upload box checked on the Configure > Edit
Machine > Files Specification tab will appear on the menu. See Upload /
Extension / folder, page 1246.
Terminal
The Terminal Mode dialog box will be displayed. This is used to help install and
debug the RS232 connection to a machine tool controller.
1258
Text Area
The text output area of the screen shows characters sent to and from the
controller. Data sent to the controller is prefixed by Out-> and data received
from the controller is prefixed by In-->.
Open Port
Initializes the computer, using the communications parameters specified in the
boxes along the bottom of the Terminal Mode dialog box. If the operation is
successful, the Open Port button will become inactive and the Close Port
button will be enabled. Success means that the local communications port is
available, but does not guarantee that the machine tool controller is accessible.
If you receive an error message, make sure that the Comm Port exists and is
not being used by another Windows application, or by the mouse.
Close Port
Closes the communications port. The port is also closed if you close the
Terminal Mode dialog box by pressing the ESC key or using Windows controls.
Control Character Display
These options are used to determine how control characters are displayed in
the text area.
1259
Standard
Control characters will be displayed with a caret notation, such as ^M for
control-M.
Expand
Abbreviations will be used. For example, <CR> will be displayed for
Carriage Return.
None
No control characters will be displayed.
CRLF Out
If this box is checked, pressing the ENTER key will send a CRLF (Carriage
Return / Line Feed) sequence to the machine tool controller instead of just a
CR character.
Echo
If this box is checked, both input and output characters are shown in the text
area rather than just input received from the machine tool controller.
Log Output
If this box is checked, communications are recorded in a disk file for later
viewing and analysis. When you leave terminal mode, the View Log dialog box
will be shown. You can scroll through the log file and save it if desired.
Clear Text
Clear the text display on the screen.
Communication Parameters
Comm Port, Data Bits, Parity, Line Speed, Stop Bits, Handshaking
Use these drop-down lists to quickly adjust communication parameters to
match those of the machine tool controller. If you are not sure what the CNC
settings are, the Terminal Mode window is a good way to find out.
You must close the communications port (Close Port button) before
changing settings. The settings you use are retained until you change them.
Close
Close the Terminal Mode dialog box.
1260
21.3.3
Configure Menu
Configure menu
Edit Machine
Click Edit Machine and select a machine from the submenu.
See Step 3 - Configure the Machine Entry, page 1245.
Machine List
Click Machine List to display the Maintain Machine List dialog box.
Move Up / Move Down

Click a button to move the highlighted file up or down in the list. This will change
the order of the listing in the submenu.
Add
Click the Add button, enter a new name, and click OK to add the machine.
Delete
Click the Delete button to delete the highlighted Machine. Click OK to delete the
machine or click Cancel to cancel the deletion.
Note
21.3.4
1261
Machine names can be changed by selecting the desired item and

replacing the existing name. Items left blank will be deleted when the OK
button is pressed.
Help
Help on SURFCAM DNC

Click Help on SURFCAM DNC to display general help information. You can press
<F1> to get context-sensitive help.
About SURFCAM DNC
Show program version information.
21.3.5
SURFCAM DNC II Dialog Box Buttons
Connect (Transmit, Download, Receive)

Click this button to open the communication port on your computer and perform
other initialization. When the computer is ready to communicate, the button text
will change to Transmit if you previously specified Download on the Communicate
menuor to Receive if you previously specified Upload. Click Transmit to begin a
download operation. Click Receive to start an upload.
Reset
Clears all display areas and resets the program. Communications buffers are
cleared, and any program in the process of being uploaded may be truncated.
Stop
Stops an upload or download, and resets the program to restart the operation.
During a download, restarting will cause the entire NC program to be retransmitted. During an upload, clicking Stop will cause the file being uploaded to
be saved to disk. If the machine tool does not notify the computer when uploads
are complete, a message will appear on the Status line indicating that transmission
1262
has stopped. You must then select Stop to indicate that the operation is complete
and that the file should be saved.
DSR (Data Set Ready)
When this button is red, a connection is present (the Data Set Ready line is
enabled).
RX / TX (Receive Character / Transmit Character)
If the RX button is red, an upload is in progress. If the TX button is red, a download
is in progress.
21.3.6
SURFCAM DNC II Status and Process
Status
This shows current status (Downloading, etc.) and error conditions.
Characters
This is the number of characters in the download file. This may differ from the file
size on disk due to filtering, etc.
Time Elapsed
This is the Time elapsed since the Transmit or Receive button was pressed. It
is updated every second.
Transferred
This is the number of characters transferred so far during download or upload.
Update frequency varies based on buffer size and other factors.
Time Remaining
This is an estimate of time remaining for a download. Based on actual data rate, it
is updated about every three seconds after an initial five second delay for sampling
the data rate.
Characters / Second
This is the current actual data rate, updated about every second.
21.4
SURFCAM DNC OTHER CONSIDERATIONS
21.4.1
Configuration Options
Configuration options are stored in a file called sdnc.sdnccfg.Following is a command

line with various switches: sdnc.exe [-c cfgfilename] [-m machinename] [-d]
[downloadfilename]
[-c cfgfilename]
1263
Specify an alternate path and name for the sdnc.sdnccfg file.

Example
SDNC -c d:\dnc\dept5\swdnc.fil
If it does not exist, the program will create it. This file is
maintained by the SURFCAM DNC program and should not
be manually edited. If this feature is used, the filename must
be fully qualified, that is, with the drive letter and directory
name.
[-m machinename]
Specify machine to be used. Not case sensitive. Blanks

ignored.
Examples: Assuming 2 machines in list:
"Lathe In Tool Room" and "Lathe In Production"
sdnc.exe -m latheint d:\ncdata\pgm1234.ncc

Download pgm1234.ncc to Lathe In Tool Room
sdnc.exe -m latheinp d:\ncdata\pgm444.ncc

Download pgm444.ncc to Lathe In Production
sdnc.exe -m lathe d:\ncdata\pgm1212.ncc

Download pgm1212.ncc to machine picked by user, since
lathe matches more than one entry in machine list. SURFCAM
DNC will ignore the -m parameter.
[-d]
Display a message box with the command line as received

by SURFCAM DNC. For debugging shortcuts, etc.
[downloadfilename]
Specify path & name of file to be downloaded.
21.4.2
Hardware Connections
The physical communication link between the computer and the NC controller will
normally be provided by RS-232 cables and connectors. The controller DNC
peripheral board may provide an option to use a straight-through cable (pin 1 to pin
1, pin 2 to pin 2, and so on) but, if not, a null modem connector or cable will be needed.
The following chart shows the pin wiring for both 25 pin and 9 pin connectors.
1264
Null Modem Connector
21.4.3
Control Character List

CODE
ASCII CODE
NAME
COMMENT
<SP>
32
Space
<NUL>
00
Null
<SOH>
01
Ctrl-A
<STX>
02
Ctrl-B
<ETX>
03
Ctrl C
<EOT>
04
Ctrl D
<ENQ>
05
Ctrl E
<ACK>
06
Ctrl F
<BEL>
07
Ctrl G
<BS>
08
Ctrl H
Backspace
<HT>
09
Ctrl I
Tab
<LF>
10
Ctrl J
Line feed
<VT>
11
Ctrl K
<FF>
12
Ctrl L
<CR>
13
Ctrl M
<SO>
14
Ctrl N
<SI>
15
Ctrl O
<DLE>
16
Ctrl P
<DC1>
17
Ctrl Q
<DC2>
18
Ctrl R
Carriage return
X On
CODE
21.4.4
ASCII CODE
NAME
<DC3>
19
Ctrl S
<DC4>
20
Ctrl T
<NAK>
21
Ctrl U
<SYN>
22
Ctrl V
<ETB>
23
Ctrl W
<CAN>
24
Ctrl X
<EM>
25
Ctrl Y
<SUB>
26
Ctrl Z
1265
COMMENT
X Off
ASCII to EIA Translation
The ASCII to EIA translation is built into the program. However, if you need other
translations, a table can be provided as filename sdnc.xte. This file should contain
alternating ASCII character arguments and their associated decimal equivalents.
Alternately, the ASCII argument can contain a D followed by a decimal value. To use
this option, create the file in the same folder as the executable. If used, the file must
contain an entry for every ASCII character possibility.
D12, 128
A,97
B,98
C,99
D,100
E,101
F,102
G,103
H,104
I,105
J,106
K,107
L,108
M,109
N,110
O,111
P,112
Q,113
0,48
1,49
2,50
3,51
4,52
5,53
6,54
7,55
8,56
9,57
%,37
.,46
-,45
1266
R,114
S,115
T,116
U,117
V,118
W,119
X,120
Y,121
Z,122
Post Processor
CHAPTER 22 POST PROCESSOR

PART 1: INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the following items.
1.
An Introduction to Post Processing
2.
A description of The MPOST Post Processor Package, page 1274
3.
A description of The Post Processor Configuration, page 1287
4.
A link to the Spost documents.
22.1
INTRODUCTION
In the final phase of an NC project, the NC operation toolpaths are processed to convert
them to the NC code needed by the machine that will cut the part. This conversion
process, called post processing, is accomplished with programs called post processors.
After NC code has been created for the specific machine that will do the cutting, it must
be transmitted to that machine. One common method of doing this is to make an RS-232
connection between a computer and the NC machine and then download the NC code
directly to the machine. This process is referred to as Direct Numerical Control or DNC
communications.
SURFCAM is shipped with two post processor systems and one DNC system.
22.2
POST PROCESSOR BASICS
Post processors are programs that take toolpath information from a file created by a CAM
program and machine information from a machine configuration file (often called a post)
to create the final NC code understood by the NC machines controller. Post processors
usually come in a package consisting of a processor for each general type of NC
machine (that is lathe, mill, and wire EDM) and files or programs that help you create
machine configuration files or posts for individual NC machines.
SURFCAM is shipped with two such post processor packages. One consists of three
separate post processors called MPOST, LPOST and EPOST. For convenience, this
package is referred to as MPOST. The other, called SPOST, has more powerful post
processors and a machine configuration utility for developing posts or machine
configuration files. Both packages contain a library of existing posts for a number of NC
machines.
1268
22.2.1
The Spost Post Processor
The SPost post processor system contains two post processors: SPOSTM.EXE used
with mills and wire EDM and SPOSTL.EXE used with lathes. These programs are
stored in the SURFCAM\Surf2002\Spost folder. The posts for the Spost system are
saved in the SURFCAM\PostLib\Spost folder as files with names in the form of either
UNCX01.Pnn for mill/wire EDM posts or UNCL01.Pnn for lathe posts. The nn in these
file names is the machine number that is assigned by the person who creates the
post.
22.2.1.1
Creating Spost Posts and FIL Files
Posts are created in the Spost system using a program called spostcfg.exe. This
post configuration program is stored in the SURFCAM\Surf2002\Spost folder.
For a detailed explanation of Spost, open the Spost Fil manual and the Spost
Reference manual.
Often a post has an accompanying FIL (Factory Interface Language) file whose
function is to handle special circumstances regarding the machine that cannot be
addressed by a post file alone. See the Spost Fil manual if you need to create your
own FIL file for a particular machine. FIL files are saved in the SURFCAM\PostLib\
Spost folder with names in a form that is similar to the names of posts:
UNCX01.Fnn for mill and wire EDM machines and UNCL01.Fnn for lathe
machines. The nn in a FIL file name is the same as the nn in its corresponding post
file name.
22.2.1.2
Running an Spost Post Processor
You run an Spost post processor from the NC Operations Manager dialog
box. To access the NC Operations Manager dialog box, either click the
button on the SURFCAM toolbar or press Ctrl+N.
1269
Several features of the NC Operations Manager dialog box are used in post
processing.
22.2.1.2.1
Operations Tree
First, the NC Operations Tree is used to select the operations for post
processing. You can process a single operation, all the operations in a single
Setup Section, or all the operations in the NC Project by clicking the
corresponding icon. If you post process the entire project, however, you get a
separate output file (an NCC file) for each Setup Section rather than a single
NCC file.
1270
22.2.1.2.2
Post List Box
Next, the post to be used in the post processing is

selected from the NC Post List box.
The Spost posts that are listed in the NC Post List
box are the ones that are available for the currently
active NC mode. If you choose a different mode, a
corresponding list will be displayed.
When you click an entry in the NC Post List box, a
comment related to that item will be displayed on the
NC Status Line.
The contents of the NC Post List box and NC Status Line are determined by the
contents of the SURFCAM.PST file. This file also contains commands required
to invoke the correct Spost post processor and to complete the post processing
cycle. When you need to add a new post to those already available, you will
have to make changes to the SURFCAM.PST file.
22.2.1.2.3
Starting Post Processing
To start the Spost post processing cycle, double-click the desired post name in
the NC Post List box (or click the post name once and click the Post button).
SURFCAM will create an NCD subfolder if one has not already been created.
See NCD Folders, page 877. All the files created during post processing will be
saved in the NCD subfolder. The NC Operations Manager then executes a
series of commands, stored in the SURFCAM.PST file, that lead to the creation
of the final NCC code.
22.2.1.2.4
Post Processing Details
From the ICD file, the NC Operations Manager extracts INC files of the
operations you selected from the NC Operations Tree. These INC files are
temporary and are deleted when you exit SURFCAM.
If you selected a single operation, its INC file is extracted and saved with the
Operation File Name shown on the Operation Properties dialog box. See
Properties, page 823.
If you selected a Setup Section, the INC files of each of its operations are
extracted, merged into one INC file and saved with the Section File Name on
the NC Section Information dialog box. See Edit a project or a setup section,
page 830.
1271
Next, the INC file is translated by the INC2APT translator into APT format, an
industry standard, and saved as a file with the APT extension and the same
name as the INC file. This APT file is temporary and is deleted as the last step
of post processing.
Next, the applicable Spost post processor (spostm.exe or spostl.exe) will take
input from the APT file and from the designated post file to create a file
containing the final NC code. This file is saved with either the Section File
Name or Operation File Name, mentioned previously, and the NCC extension.
At the same time, a process list file is created having the same name as the
NCC file and the LST extension. The LST file is a diagnostic tool used when
you are creating a new Spost post.
If the file names of any of the files created in the previous steps already appear
in the NCD subfolder, an NCPOST dialog box similar to the following one will
be displayed.
File Already Exists dialog box
If you click No, post processing will stop. You can choose not to have these
warning boxes displayed by checking the Dont warn if files already exist while
posting box on the NC Settings dialog box. See NC Settings, page 348.
Next, a dialog box will be displayed and you will be prompted to enter a program
number.
1272
Posting dialog box
Type in a program number and press Enter to continue. After you do so, the
Spost post processor will create the final NC code and save it as a file with an
NCC file extension.
Then the SURFCAM editor will be launched with the newly created NCC file
opened and displayed on the screen. You can view the NCC file and make any
necessary changes. Use the Save command to save your changes using the
SURFCAM-assigned file name or use the Save As command to save it with a
name of your choosing.
See Chapter 20 Editor, Part 2: Predator Editor, page 1054.
22.2.1.3
Summary Spost Post Processing
The following is a step by step summary of post processing using Spost.

1.
Before you start post processing, make sure you are in the correct NC
mode. Remember, the NC mode menu determines the posts that are
displayed on the Operations Manager dialog box.
2.
Click the Operations Manager button on the SURFCAM toolbar to display

the NC Operations dialog box.
3.
Click the icon in the NC Operations Tree that represents the operations for
which you want to produce NC code: the NC Project icon, one Setup
Section icon or one operations icon.
1273
4.
In the NC Post List box double-click the desired post name (or click it once
and click the Post button).
5.
Respond to any dialog boxes that may be displayed.
6.
When the NCC file is displayed in the SURFCAM editor, make any
modifications that are needed and use the Save or Save As command to
save it. You can also send your NCC file directly to your NC machine by
clicking the SURFCAM DNC icon on the SURFCAM editor toolbar to run
SURFCAM DNC.
1274
PART 2: MPOST
22.2.2
The MPOST Post Processor Package
The other post processor package shipped with SURFCAM contains three post
processors: MPOSTWIN used with mills, LPOSTWIN used with lathes, and
EPOSTWIN used with wire EDM. Each is an EXE file. (For simplicity we often refer
to all three as the MPost post processor.) These programs are stored in the
SURFCAM\Surf2002\MPost folder. The post files for this post processor package are
located in the SURFCAM\Postlib\Mpost folder. The name of each post indicates the
manufacturer, the model name and NC machine type. For example, CIN850.M3 is the
post for a 3 axis mill made by Cincinnati Milacron. The model number is 850M.
To get machine configuration data, the post processors MPOSTWIN, LPOSTWIN
and EPOSTWIN read the corresponding POSTFORM library files POSTFORM.M,
POSTFORM.L AND POSTFORM.E. These are text files that contain copies of
several posts that you want to have readily available. The post processors read the
POSTFORM files to get the post names and display them in a menu. You select the
post you want and the post processor goes to that part of the POSTFORM file to get
the machine data it needs.
By using a text editorsuch as the SURFCAM editoryou can add posts to, or delete
posts from, your POSTFORM library files to make them better fit your needs.
The first line in a post file contains the word name followed by the name of the post.
The file can be several pages long. The POSTFORM files consists of the contents of
several post files appended together. To add a post, append the contents of the post
file to the POSTFORM file. To delete a post from a POSTFORM file, delete the
name line for that post and all the following lines up to the next name line.
22.2.2.1
Creating an MPost Post File
IF the SURFCAM post library does not contain one of these earlier posts for your
machine, you can create one. SURFCAM is shipped with two post template
files: Generic.M and Generic.L. These files contain a set of quasi-standard
characteristics for mills and lathes. By taking the machine characteristics provided
by the manufacturer, you should be able to modify one of these generic post
template files with a text editor to produce a post for your machine.
22.2.2.2
1275
Running an MPOST Post Processor
These post processors are run from the NC Operations Manager dialog box.
From the NC Operations Tree, select the NC operation or set of operations you
want to post process. Then double-click List All in the NC Post List box. This will
display a menu of the available posts.
1276
Choose a Machine dialog box
Specify the machine tool by clicking on its name and number. Then click OK.
Depending on the post you select and the parameter values you enter in the Tool
Information dialog box, a series of additional dialog boxes may be displayed
prompting you to enter additional data. The following examples prompt you to
enter values for work offset number and program number.
Examples of dialog boxes requesting additional information
1277
Examples of dialog boxes requesting additional information
After you have responded to any prompts for additional information, the post
processor will create the final NC codeusing the data from the toolpath file(s)
and the postand save it as an NCC file with a file name that is automatically
assigned by the NC Operations Manager. This newly created NCC file will then
automatically be loaded into the SURFCAM editor and displayed on the screen.
An NCC file displayed in the SURFCAM editor
You can now modify the NCC file, if needed, and re-save it. If the assigned file
name is not acceptable, now is the best time to use the Save As command to
assign a more useful name.
1278
22.3
THE SURFCAM.PST FILE
The SURFCAM.PST file contains commands that are used by the NC Operations
Manager when performing functions related to post processing. It also contains other
commands, not related to post processing, that can be executed from the NC Operations
Manager dialog box.
To work with the SURFCAM.PST file you must become familiar with its structure and
contents. It is located in the C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002 folder. It would be helpful to obtain
a printed copy of the file to study. You can do this by opening the file in any text editor
or double-click on the file name to open it in the SURFCAM editorand printing it from
there.
We will first look at the structure of the PST file and then consider the meaning of the
commands contained in it.
# sign
The # sign placed at the beginning of some lines designates a comment line that will
be ignored when the file is read by the NC Operations Manager. The comment lines
at the beginning of the file form a heading while those at the end provide a file
description. Those used throughout the rest of the file act as separators.
Begin Post
See PST BeginPost Sections, page 1278.
Post Item
See PST PostItem Subsections, page 1279.
Commands
Execute the commands contained in the PST file using the NC Operations Manager
dialog box. Some are executed by clicking buttons located on the toolbar. Others are
executed by double-clicking on an entry in either the Post List box or the Filter List
box. Clicking once on an entry and clicking the Post button also works.
See PST File Commands, Variables and Switches, page 1280, and Special PST File
Commands, page 1282.
22.3.1
PST BeginPost Sections
The main commands in the PST file relate to post processing and are divided into six
NC mode sectionsEDM, Lathe, 2 Axis, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, and 5 Axis. The contents of
these mode sections determines what gets listed in the Post List box in the NC
Operations Manager dialog box. The NC Mode SURFCAM is in when the NC
Operations Manager is opened tells the Operations Manager which of these PST file
NC mode sections to read. Following are the first several lines in the 3 Axis mode
section.
1279
Begin Post 3 Axis with Post Item for MPost
Each NC mode section begins with a line that reads BeginPost <name> Default:<n>
where <name> is the name of the NC mode and <n> is a number designating which
post in the Post List box will be highlighted when the NC Operations Manager dialog
box is first opened. A 4 indicates the fourth post in the Post List box will be highlighted.
The highlighted post is referred to as the default post.
Because NC mode sections begin with the Begin command they will also be referred
to as BeginPost sections.
22.3.2
PST PostItem Subsections
BeginPost sections are divided into subsections which begin with the command
PostItem. Some PostItem subsections contain commands to run one of the Spost
post processorsSpostM or SpostLusing one of the Spost posts.
Post Item for Spost
1280
Such a PostItem subsection begins with a line that reads PostItem <name> where
<name> is the name of the Spost post as it appears in the Post List box of the NC
Operations Manager dialog box.
Other PostItem subsections contain commands to run MPost.
Post Item for MPost
The first PostItem subsection contains commands to run an MPost post processor
(which, by convention, means an MPOSTWIN, LPOSTWIN or EPOSTWIN post
processor).
The APT-CL PostItem subsection contains the commands to run the INC2APT
program which will convert the selected operations into the standard APT format used
by many other commercial post processors.
Post Item APT-CL
The PostItem APT-CL subsection will usually be the last in a BeginPost section.
The last command in each PostItem subsection is a Task command. This causes the
NCC or APT output file to be loaded into the SURFCAM editor and displayed on the
screen.
Each PostItem line is followed by several lines of commands that accomplish post
processing using that post.
22.3.3
PST File Commands, Variables and Switches
The function of the commands following a PostItem line are as follows:

Status
Designates one line of help to be printed on the Status line of the NC Operations
Manager dialog box.
1281
Command
Executes programs and Windows applications within SURFCAM using a
command expressed in the command line format.
ChDir
The change folder command.
Delete
Deletes a temporary file.
Rename
Renames a file.
CopyFile
Copies a file.
Task
Executes Windows applications for multi-tasking within SURFCAM.
The description of the variables appearing with the post commands is as follows:
%p
256 character folder path (for example, c:\SURFCAM\INC\).
%q
8 character folder path.
%n
256 character file name with extension.
%s
8 character file name with extension.
%N
256 file name without extension (for example, 2DRIBS).
%S
8 character file name without extension.
The description of the switches appearing with the post commands is as follows:
-I
Input path ( for example %p%n ).
-O
Output path ( for example c:\Surf2002\APT )
The order in which posts appear in each NC mode section is the order in which they
appear in the Post List box.
The most significant line in a post subsectionfor the task of adding a postis the
second Command line, such as in the following example:
Command C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\SPOST\SPOSTM C:\SURFCAM\APT\%N.apt 06
The first part of this command line (C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\SPOST\SPOSTM) tells
which Spost post processor will be usedin this case, Spostm.exe for mills. The
number at the end of this line tells which post will be used in the post processing. This
number corresponds to the machine number designated by the last two digits in the
file name for the postin this case, UNCX01.P06, which is the post for the Haas VF1 machine.
1282
22.3.4
Special PST File Commands
The following command is listed near the end of the PST file. It is executed from the
NC Operations Manager toolbar. It creates a Setup Sheet.
SetupSheet
C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\sview -m SSHEET.TXT
The next commands are executed from the Filter List box by clicking the appropriate
entry and clicking Filter Only or Post. See Tool Path Smoother with the ArcFltr feature,
page 1284 to ArcFltrMx Filter, page 1284 and to NURB Filter, page 1285.
22.4
IncFilter
C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\filters\ArcFltr.dll
#IncFilter
C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\FILTERS\ArcFltrMx.dll
IncFilter
C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\FILTERS\NurbFltr.dll
MODIFY THE PST FILE
22.4.1
Post Menu Wizard
Use the Post Menu Wizard to add or remove a Post or to modify one. To open the
wizard click Start > Programs > SURFCAM 2002 > SURFCAM Tools > Post Menu
Wizard. The Post Menu Wizard dialog box will be displayed. Follow the prompts to
make additions or modifications.
22.4.2
Change the Default Post
It is convenient to have your most frequently used posts pre-selected in the

Operations Manager Post List box. The post highlighted when you first open the NC
Operations Manager dialog box is the default post. See PST BeginPost Sections,
page 1278 for a description of how the default post is determined.
1283
To make your favorite post the pre-selected or highlighted one, first determine the
number of the position that your post holds in the Post List box. Then open
SURFCAM.PST, using a text editor such as the SURFCAM editor. Change the
number following Default: in the BeginPost line to that number. Remember to Save
the SURFCAM.PST file after you make the change.
22.5
FILTERS
The Filter List box on the NC Operations Manager dialog box contains the SURFCAM
filter options.
The Filter List Box
ArcFltr
See Tool Path Smoother with the ArcFltr feature, page 1284.
ArcFltrMx
See ArcFltrMx Filter, page 1284.
NurbFltr
See NURB Filter, page 1285.
ZRangeFltr
See Pattern Slicing with the Z Range filter, page 558.
1284
22.5.1
Tool Path Smoother with the ArcFltr feature
Use the ArcFltr option to convert a sequence of linear moves, which approximately
form an arc, to one arc move.
Run the SURFCAM ArcFltr option from the Operations Manager dialog box.
To move an operation through the ArcFltr,
1.
Click the operation in the Operations Tree.
2.
Click the ArcFltr option in the Filter List box.
3.
Click the Filter Only button.
4.
The Tool Path Smoother dialog box is displayed.
Filter Tolerance
The arc that replaces the line segments approximately fits the curve of a surface
at a location. The Filter Tolerance is the maximum distance that a point on the arc
can be from the curve of the surface.
Enter the Filter Tolerance and click the OK button. SURFCAM creates the optimized
toolpath and displays the Keep Operation dialog box. Click the Accept button. The
icon for the optimized toolpath appears in the Operations Tree.
You can move the operation through the filter when you post. A new operation is not
created. Click the operation and then click the Post button. The Arc Filter dialog box
is displayed. When you click the OK button, the operation is moved through the filter
and the post is completed.
22.5.2
ArcFltrMx Filter
The ArcFltrMx filter analyzes linear 5 axis moves in the NC output and translates them
into separate XY and UV arc moves if they lie within a specified tolerance. This utility
1285
is specifically useful for 4 axis wire EDM machines and 5 axis controls that support
arc interpolation. It is available on SURFCAM 4 Axis and above.
To use this, double-click the SURFCAM.PST file in the Explorer. The file will open in
the SURFCAM editor. Locate the INC Filters section, then the line:
#IncFilter
C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\FILTERS\ArcFltrMx.dll
The # symbol at the beginning of the line indicates that this line is a
comment only.
Delete the # symbol and save the file. Then open SURFCAM. When you
open the NC Operations Manager, you will see the ArcFltrMx listed.
22.5.3
NURB Filter
This section describes SURFCAMs NURB filter program that analyzes sequences of
linear moves in an NC file and converts them to NURB spline moves.
The SURFCAM NURB filter program is run from the Operations Manager dialog box.
The Filter List box contains the SURFCAM filter options. See The Filter List Box, page
1283. When the default option <None> is selected, no filtering will occur.
NURB Filter can be run in conjunction with performing a post processing operation.
To do so, click NurbFltr in the Filter List box before you proceed with post processing.
Immediately after you double-click the desired post (or click the POST button) to start
the post processing, SURFCAM will display the NURB Filter Options dialog box.
NURB Filter Options dialog box

1286
Do not check linear moves for tolerance

All lines will be fit to splines without checking the Surface/Curve Tolerance
parameter. This is the fastest method. It is best used when the tool path is known
to follow only NURB curves.
Check tolerance for each NURB spline
Lines are fit to splines and the Surface/Curve Tolerance parameter is checked only
when the spline is completed. The spline is completed when records other than
lines are encountered, such as an Arc or an end of row. This is the fastest method
to use when the toolpath is known to follow some NURB curves.
Check tolerance for every linear move
Check the Surface/Curve Tolerance parameter as each line is added to fit a spline.
This is the slowest method.
Surface / Curve Tolerance
The maximum deviation of the spline from the original line segments will be kept
to less than this value.
Specify the number of points along each span of the NURB curve to check the
distance against the tolerance value.
Note
The following parameters relate to optimizing splines. See Optimize,

page 428.
Do Not Optimize
NURB spline moves are created by interpolations that use the original data points
describing linear moves. No data points are discarded. This results in the fastest
time through the NURB filter but the most data sent on to the post processor.
Use SURFCAM Spline Optimization
Use the optimization method used by the Create > Spline > Optimize and the Edit
> Splines > Optimize commands. Optimization is achieved by discarding some of
the original linear data points resulting in fewer nodes and control points (that
describe spline moves) being sent to the post processor.
Use Total Least Squares Optimization
This usually results in the greatest number of data points being discarded, thus
providing maximum optimization. Due to the number of calculations required, this
method results in the slowest time through the NURB filter.
Optimize Deviation
This is the maximum deviation to be allowed between the original linear moves
and the resulting NURB spline moves.
1287
After you make the desired parameter settings, click OK. SURFCAM will display the
NURBS Optimizing Toolpath dialog box as it analyzes the tool path to convert linear
moves to arc moves.
When finished with the filter, SURFCAM will then perform the rest of the post
processing.
22.5.4
ZRange Filter
See Pattern Slicing with the Z Range filter, page 558.
22.6
THE POST PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION
With this section, we begin the main purpose of this chapter: a discussion of the post
processing package referred to as MPOST. This package consists of the following three
post processors:
MPOSTWIN.EXE
Mill machines
LPOSTWIN.EXE
Lathe machines
EPOSTWIN.EXE
Wire EDM machines
These post processors convert generic INC files into a variety of standard EIA / ISO,
conversational, and columnar style NC code formats.
The EIA standard requires that every address or word of the NC program language is a
letter followed by a number. This format usually uses G, X, Y, Z, or M codes for various
machine operations and functions. The output format can be Standard G code,
Conversational, or Columnar.
The following example program sections indicate the different code formats:
STANDARD EIA / ISO
CONVERSATIONAL
O1
BEGIN PGM 1 INCH
M6 T1 ( Tool Radius: 0.25 Tool Diam: 0.5 Tool

Corner: 0
0 TOOL DEF 8 L+0 R0.25
G0 G90 S760 M3 E1 X0.9417 Y-2.212 A0
1 TOOL CALL 8 Z S760.0
H1 M9 Z1.
2 L X+0.9417 Y-2.212 R F6000 M6
G0 Z0.5
3 L Z+1. R F6000 M13
G1 Z0 F4.
4 L Z+0.5 R F6000 M
X1.5638 F9.
5 L Z+0 R F40 M
Y-2.0875
6 L X+1.5638 Z+0 R F90 M

Standard G code / Conversational
1288
STANDARD EIA / ISO
CONVERSATIONAL
G2 X1.1215 Y-1.7203 I0 J0.45
7 L Y-2.0875 Z+0 R F M
X0.9209 Y-1.373 I0.7923 J0.689
8 CC Y-1.6375
Y-0.6896 I0.2929 J0.3417
9 C X+1.1215 Y-1.7203 DR- R F M
X1.1183 Y-0.346 I0.9929 J-0.3417
10 CC X+1.9138 Y-1.0313
G1 X0.9509 Y0.1139
11 C X+0.9209 Y-1.373 DR- R F M
G2 X0.9002 Y0.1494 I0.2322 J0.3855
12 CC X+1.2138 Y-1.0313
G1 X0.3196
13 C X+0.9209 Y-0.6896 DR- R F M
Y-2.212
14 CC X+1.9138 Y-1.0313
X0.9417
15 C X+1.1183 Y-0.346 DR- R F M
G0 Z1.
16 L X+0.9509 Y+0.1139 Z+0 R F M
M5 M9
17 CC X+1.183 Y+0.4994
G0 G49 G90 Z0
18 C X+0.9002 Y+0.1494 DR- R F M
E0 X0 Y0
19 L X+0.3196 Z+0 R F M
M2
20 L Y-2.212 Z+0 R F M
21 L X+0.9417 Z+0 R F M
22 L Z+1. R F6000 M
23 L Z+0 R F6000 M91
24 L X+0 Y+0 M2
25 END PGM 1 INCH
Standard G code / Conversational (Continued)
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
1289
1
0
90
9417
78
0
79
79
79
2
2
2
2
2
79
2
79
79
79
81
-22120
760
13
8
9417
9417
15638
15638
11215
9209
7638
9209
11183
9509
9002
3196
3196
9417
-22120
-22120
-22120
-20875
-17203
-13730
-10313
-6896
-3460
1139
1494
1494
-22120
-22120
15638
19138
12138
12138
19138
-16375
-10313
-10313
-10313
-10313
11830
4994
0
-7071
-7071
-9003
-8271
-10000
-8271
-9837
-7719
-3333
7071
7071
0
0
7071
-7071
-4353
-5620
0
5620
1800
-6357
-9428
-7071
7071
-10000
40
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
26
Columnar
Many different formats can be created and revised for each type of machine/control
combination. These formats are described in the user configurable POSTFORM file.
The post processor receives data from the POSTFORM library to create the NC code.
These files are completely user configurable for the machine format desired. The
POSTFORM libraries are listed below for the appropriate machine tool types.
POSTFORM.M
MPOSTWIN.EXE
Milling machines
POSTFORM.L
LPOSTWIN.EXE
Lathe machines
POSTFORM.E
EPOSTWIN.EXE
Wire EDM machines
Additional posts are available that can be added to the POSTFORM library files if you
need them.
See POST Sample Libraries, page 1422.
1290
22.6.1
Inc Files
Before the final NC code can be created, toolpaths for cutting operations on a part
must first be created. For the purposes of this chapter you can assume that each
separate toolpath is stored as an INC file within a larger file called an ICD file. The
letters INC refer to Intermediate Numerical Code. This is SURFCAM's version of the
traditional CL or cutter location file.
These INC files store instructions on how the tool is changed, how it is positioned,
how it cuts, and various other machining information such as spindle speeds and feed
rates. These files are machine tool independent so they must be converted into actual
CNC instructions (G codes) later.
The merged INC files from an ICD file provide data to the post processor on how the
part is to be cut. The data in the POSTFORM libraries provide it information about the
machine doing the cutting. With data from these two files the post processor creates
the final NC code.
With SURFCAM you can generate NC programs in a local coordinate system. Thus
you can machine different sections of the work with independent machining
orientationsa necessity with most parts. SURFCAM can be used to change the
machining orientation of the part by using construction views. This is accomplished
by setting the CView (construction view) parameter to the number of the view that
matches the machining orientation of the piece currently being cut.
Note
22.7
SURFCAM defaults to machining in CView:1 (Top View). Machining in

another view requires setting the CView parameter to the desired view
number and indicating VIEW for the coord parameter in the status area
before cutting.
POSTFORM STRUCTURE
You can configure the post processor for the desired NC code output format. This output
format is directed by the POSTFORM file used. These formats can be configured for
machine control types, output style, or variations of usage.
To create or modify machine code formats, edit the contents of the POSTFORM file with
a text editor. This can be accomplished using the SURFCAM editor.
When the POSTFORM file is edited for each machine format, the post processor should
generate the proper NC code. In addition to EIA / ISO formats, the post processor can
also create programs using a columnar or conversational format.
The following sections cover the general Post Processor structure for Mill, Lathe, and
Wire EDM machines. The machine type sections cover the specific structure for the
individual machine types.
22.7.1
1291
NC Code Format
The post expects to find the NC code formats in the POSTFORM file written in a
particular way. File modifications must be made according to the rules outlined in this
document. Following is the structure the post expects to find in the POSTFORM file:
1.
A command word, such as Name, followed by a semicolon (;).
2.
A single space separating the word from the instructions.
3.
A strictly formatted series of characters or lines instructing the post how to

process the command.
The POSTFORM file requires that each numerical designation be enclosed with the
Greater Than and Less Than signs, for example G0. You must bracket numerical
values because the post accepts not only numerical values, but also variables. You
can direct the post to a particular and significant numerical value assigned to a
particular address, but it is a value that changes. The brackets delimit the numbers or
variables that are in the POSTFORM file and are not output in the resultant NC code.
22.7.2
Comments
If there are two or more adjacent spaces on a line, the post will consider anything
following to be a comment. Put comments in the file in either of two ways:
1.
Move the cursor three or more spaces past the end of a command line, then
type the comment.
2.
Type any comment on its own line. Be sure that the line has two or more leading
spaces.
Note
Be careful not to accidentally comment out part of the actual formatting

information by entering two spaces instead of one.
22.7.3
Name
Multiple machine formats can be stored in the POSTFORM file. The Name line
indicates the name of the next machine or controller that will appear in the menu when
the post is run. The text following the word Name will appear on the screen as a menu
choice. The name line indicates the beginning of the format section for that particular
machine. The lines following the Name line describe the configuration of the post until
the next Name line appears. The examples below indicate a variety of names that can
be used. These names are listed when the Post is executed.
name Fanuc
name Fanuc Incremental
1292
name Fanuc Metric

name Heidenhein Conversational
22.7.4
Case Sensitivity
The case sensitivity of the entries made in the POSTFORM file is dependent upon the
data entered. The only entries that must be in upper case characters are those that
are required by the machine tool to be upper case. These are typically the Word
Address characters. Commands, sequences, and variables can be entered as either
upper or lower case characters.
Note
When lower case character output is desired, the entire POST file should be
in lower case characters. When a single letter code is required to be in lower
case characters, all entries for that letter code should be in lower case
characters.
This manual uses upper case characters for the first letter of each word of the
commands and sequences. All variable entries are in lower case characters.
22.7.5
Entry Types
The POSTFORM file consists of four separate entry types. These include the
following:
Word Address Formats
Commands
Sequences
Variables
Each of these types can be placed in different sections of the POSTFORM file. This
section describes each type in alphabetical order for ease of reference. The right
margin of the entry indicates the valid Post processor type for that entry. This is
indicated by the letter M for MPOSTWIN.EXE, L for LPOSTWIN.EXE, and E for
EPOSTWIN.EXE post processors.
22.8
STRUCTURED LOGIC
The post offers limited structured logic capabilities. This functionality allows logical
decisions when necessary. The following describes the format and required syntax.
22.8.1
1293
IF, ELSE, and ENDIF Statements
IF, ELSE and ENDIF statements can now be added to your machine format to either
allow or disallow any lines in the sequence.
The IF line must have 3 parameters: 2 VARIABLES (or a variable and a constant) with
a 1 or 2-character logical operator between themall items separated by a single
space.
The ELSE line (which is optional) and ENDIF line cannot have any parameters.
Following are some sample IF lines:
IF [Val1] = 2
IF [Tool] > 24
IF [Speed] <= 50
If [Cycle] = 19
22.8.1.1
Restrictions
1.
IF can only be used within a sequence or canned cycle.
2.
An ENDIF line is required (even if there are no more lines after ENDIF within
that sequence).
3.
The ELSE line is optional.
4.
The IF, ELSE and ENDIF lines must have at least 1 line of code between
them.
5.
IF statements cannot yet be nested.
6.
You are limited to fifty IF structures within each machine format area.
22.8.2
Operators
Legal operators are >, <, =, <> (not equal), <= and >=
Following is an example of a tool change sequence using logic to control dual-range
spindle speed (M41,M42) and suppression of the pre-indexing of the last tool. (Blank
lines were added for clarity to separate the logic sections from the rest of the
sequence):
Toolchange
M<9>
G<28> G<49> Z<0> S<100>
1294
N<Block> M<6>
This "IF" structure sets the "gear range" (M41 or 42):
IF [Speed]>500
G<0> G<40> G<80> G<Work> X<H> Y<V> M<42>
ELSE
G<0> G<40> G<80> G<Work> X<H> Y<V> M<41>
ENDIF
G<43> Z<D> H<Lcomp> M<Direct> S<Speed>
M<Cool>
Here the pre-indexing of the last Tool is suppressed:
IF [NextTool] <> [Tool1]
T<NextTool>
ENDIF
END
As you can see, either one or both of the 2 values must be a [variable]. It may be a
variable that is set from an ASK statementletting you give the operator a set of
processing options.
22.8.3
The Set Command
The SET command allows a variable to be set to any other variable or constant. Place
this within an IF structure, and you can set a variable to a number.
Following is an example of how to support spindle ranges:
1stToolchange
G0 G90 G80 G40 G17
T[Tool] M6
Set [Val2] to 65
This line sets the default spindle range.
If [Speed] > 1000
This is the IF line.
Set [Val2] to 66
Replace the line of code with a "SET"...
endif
If [Speed] > 2000
...and we do it againone If/Set structure for
Set [Val2] to 67
each range you want.
1295
endif
If [Speed] > 3000
Set [Val2] to 68
endif
If [Speed] > 4000
Set [Val2] to 69
endif
G[Val2] M[Direct] S[Speed]
This line will output the code you want.
G0 G[Work] X[H] Y[V]

G43 Z[D] H[Lcomp]
M[Cool]
End
22.9
WORD ADDRESS FORMATS: MILL, LATHE, EDM
This is a series of lines that each start with a specific character, usually a letter, followed
by some numbers and signs. It is a list of all the characters that the NC machine needs,
in the order they appear on any line of NC code. You can add, change, and delete lines
so that they are arranged in the order appearing in a line of NC code. The examples
below indicate the Word Address format and the output order.
These examples show a portion of the Word Address and Tool Change code with the
corresponding NC code that is output.
% 00
O>4
X ->3.>4
Y ->3.>4
Z ->3.>4
F >2
1296
G >2
S >4
M >2
ToolChange
M6 T[tool]
G0 G90 S[speed] M3 X[h] Y[v]
Z[h] G1 F[plunge]
End
The NC code for this POSTFORM.M excerpts is shown below. The letter output is
determined by the order of the Word Address Formats.
M6 T2
X1. Y2.5 G0 G90 S2000 M3
Z.1 F3.5 G1
The next example uses the same Tool Change sequence with the Word Address Format
order changed. The example indicates the NC code output change as it is effected by
the POSTFORM.M change.
% 00
O>4
G >2
S >4
M >2
X ->3.>4
Y ->3.>4
Z ->3.>4
F >2
ToolChange
M6 T[tool]
G0 G90 S[speed] M3 X[h] Y[v]
Z[h] G1 F[plunge]
End
The NC code for this POSTFORM.M excerpt is shown below. The letter output is
determined by the order of the Word Address Formats.
1297
M6 T2
G0 G90 S2000 M3 X1. Y2.5
G1 Z.1 F3.5
The Word Address characters are formatted according to the following information.
These entries are valid for all SURFCAM post processors.
/ 00
The 00 indicates that the character is output without numbers. This is normally used
for the block skip character as shown.
N >4
This outputs the letter N with up to 4 numerals. There is no minus sign or decimal point
output.
X ->3.>4
This format outputs the X address character with up to 3 numerals to the left and 4
numerals to the right of the decimal point. The decimal point is output. The minus sign
is output when applicable.
F >32
The F character is output with up to 3 numerals to the left and 2 numerals to the right
of the decimal point. The decimal point and the minus sign are not output. This format
will output trailing zeroes, for example, the code F200 is output for an F-2.0 value.
G2
The G character is always output with 2 numerals. Leading zeroes are output for
single digit numbers. The code G02 is output for a value of 2.
R +->24
The R address is output with a plus sign unless it is a minus value. The output has 2
numerals to the left and no less than 4 numerals to the right of the decimal point. The
decimal point is not output. Trailing zeroes are output to fill the 4 numerals to the right
of the decimal. The code of R+15000 is output for an R1.5 value.
COLUMNAR STYLE FORMATS:
T C27 S5 >4 T
The T address will appear with the T in column 27; the complete word will occupy 5
spaces (up to 4 of which will hold the actual numerical information).
K C14 S6 >32
The K address starts at column 14 (but NO K is output); it has no minus sign, and
occupies 6 spaces (up to 3 of which are before the invisible decimal).
When required by the machine tool, commas can be used instead of decimal points. The
MPOSTWIN accepts characters with the ASCII values between 33 (!) and 122 (z).
1298
DETAILS AND EXAMPLES OF LETTER FORMATS:
The maximum possible format is something like this:

? Caa Sb +->c.>d x Limit -40 40 Mult 25.4 Add 2.5 Inc
where ? is the character (usually a letter) to be formatted, each n can be any numeral,
and x is an optional character.
Caa
The number following the C denotes the column number at which this word starts.
Note
There is a space after the number to separate this information from the next
part. (Columnar only)
Sb
The numeral after the S determines how many spaces this word will take in the NC
block.
Note
The column number and spaces number are used only for columnar
programs. (Columnar only)
+ (plus sign)
This causes the post to output a plus sign on the number if it is not negative. It must
be the first formatting character in this line of the POSTFORM file, if used.
X +>3.>4
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
2.5
X+2.5
-1.3000
X-1.3
0.2135
X+.2135
When no sign is entered, the value is output without a sign.

X >3.>4
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
2.5
X2.5
-1.3000
X1.3
0.2135
X.2135
1299
- (minus sign)
This causes the post to output a minus sign on the number if it is indeed a negative
value. It must be the next formatting character if a minus sign is ever to be used for
this character address.
X ->3.>4
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
2.5
X2.5
-1.3000
X-1.3
0.2135
X.2135
When both the + and - signs are entered the appropriate sign is output with the value.
X +->3.>4
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
2.5
X+2.5
-1.3000
X-1.3
0.2135
X+.2135
> (greater than)

This symbol indicates the number of numerals to output for the letter code. When the
decimal is placed before this symbol it indicates the number of numerals after the
decimal. When it is placed before the decimal it indicates the number of numerals
before the decimal. This symbol causes no leading zeroes to be output in the address.
When this symbol is not used, the post will add leading zeroes so that the number of
digits will always be the number that follows the greater than sign.
X >3.>4
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
2.5
X2.5
-1.3000
X1.3
0.2135
X.2135
1300
This Word address without the first > symbol forces the output of leading zeroes.
X 3.>4
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
2.5
X002.5
-1.3000
X001.3
0.2135
X000.2135
This Word address without both > symbols forces the output of leading and trailing
zeroes.
X 3.4
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
2.5
X002.5000
-1.3000
X001.3000
0.2135
X000.2135
c (a numeral)
This is always a single digit that indicates the number of digits available. In this
example, it is the number of digits before the decimal point.
If the above > symbol is used, then this is the maximum number of digits that can
appear before the decimal point.
If the above > symbol is not used, then this is the number of digits that will always
G >2
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
01
G1
00
G0
G3
1301
G2
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
01
G01
00
G00
G03
. (decimal point)
The presence of the decimal point in the line indicates that the address outputs a
decimal point. If this character is not used, it will not be output in the NC code.
X >3.>4
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
2.5
X2.5
-1.3000
X1.3
0.2135
X.2135
When the decimal point is not placed in the Word address format, it is not output in
the NC code. The following example shows that this may not be suitable code for the
machine. When the decimal is not in the Word address the > symbols should be
removed to ensure proper NC code as displayed in the next example.
X >3>4
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
2.5
X25
-1.3000
X13
0.2135
X2135
X 34
INC FILE VALUE

2.5
NC CODE OUTPUT
X0025000
1302
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
-1.3000
X0013000
0.2135
X0002135
d (another numeral)
This is always a single digit that indicates the number of digits available. In this
example it is the number of digits before the decimal point.
If the above > symbol is used, then this is the maximum number of digits that can
If the above > symbol is not used, then this is the number of digits that will always
G>2
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
01
G1
00
G0
G3
G2
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
01
G01
00
G00
G03
x - OUTPUT character
This is used to replace a character described in the format with another character in
the NC program. This is useful when the same letter must be formatted differently
when used in different places. In some controls, any negative Z value with a minus is
usually below the Z0 point, but in the case of drilling cycles, no minus sign is required
for the Z. The example below shows that the letter Z is output when the letter A is used
in the POSTFORM file.
A >3.>4 Z
1303
Below is a sample line of a POSTFORM sequence using this output character.

G81 X[h] Y[v] A[d] F[frate]
This line shows the NC code output using the line in the POSTFORM file.
G81 X2.5 Y1.25 Z.5 F20.
In other words, the post formats for A, but outputs a Z word address.
Note
When the open parenthesis ( is used as the output character, as in the

case of the Dynapath conversational control, the closed parenthesis ")" is
automatically coded at the end of the character output. The following code
shows this use for G codes in the Dynapath post.
G 02 (
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
01
(01)
00
(00)
(03)
The output letter can be suppressed by placing empty quotes at the end of the letter
format. For example this can be used to suppress the letter N for line numbers. Below,
the letter N is suppressed while the line number is output.
N >4 ""
The examples use the following sequence line.
G0 G90 S[speed]
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
1 G0 G91 S1000
23
23 G0 G90 S1000
3237
3237 G0 G90 S1000
When the "" symbols are not placed in the Word address the output is as shown
below.
INC FILE VALUE

1
NC CODE OUTPUT
N1 G0 G91 S1000
1304
INC FILE VALUE
Note
NC CODE OUTPUT
23
N23 G0 G90 S1000
3237
N3237 G0 G90 S1000
The Output character can be used to get around many common formatting
problems.
Columnar style
The output character for columnar style programs works slightly differently when
formatting a columnar style program. The Spaces line designates a format as
columnar. If no output character is specified, a space will be output in place of the
letter, instead of the letter itself. In the examples with Columnar style formats, the T
is repeated at the end of the T format line. When the letter is not repeated at the end
of the line, the letter is not output in the NC code.
Note
The output letter must be placed on the line before any modifiers.
Limit
This format limits the acceptable value for the word address. When this limit is
reached an error message is output to the screen for you to make a correction. The
first numeral indicates the minimum value for the output and the second numeral
indicates the maximum value. The example below indicates that the value of the S
word can be between 0 and 5000. When the file is post processed, the Word address
is error checked for the limit set in the format.
S 4 Limit 0 5000
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
S1
6000
ERROR Message
3237
S3237
When the lower limit is above zero, the output uses this value when the INC file value
is less than the limit.
S 4 Limit 250 5000
INC FILE VALUE

1
NC CODE OUTPUT
ERROR Message
INC FILE VALUE
1305
NC CODE OUTPUT
6000
ERROR Message
3237
S3237
Note
Limit checking is not performed on Replace statements.
Note
Limit values are absolute. When the output is incremental, the absolute
value of the letter is checked for the limit.
Mult
The value after this command is used as a multiplier for all the values that will output
for this word. The value entered can be either a number value or a Word Address
Letter. The current value of the Word Address letter is used for the Mult function. The
following example will output metric values.
X ->3.>4 Mult 25.4
INC FILE VALUE
Note
NC CODE OUTPUT
11
X279.4
2.5
X63.5
.2135
X5.4229
Division is accomplished by multiplying by the inverse. Mult .03937 converts

metric to inches.
DivBy
The value after this command is the denominator used to divide into all the values that
will output for this word. The value entered can be either a number value or a Word
Address Letter. The current value of the Word Address letter is used for the DivBy
function.
The following example will divide all X values by Pi (3.14159).
X ->3.>4 DivBy 3.14159
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
12
X3.8197
2.5
X.7957
1306
INC FILE VALUE

.2135
NC CODE OUTPUT
X.0679
DivInto
The value after this command is the numerator used in all the divisions by the values
that will output for this word. The value entered can be either a number value or a
Word Address Letter. The current value of the Word Address letter is used for the
DivInto function.
Division by zero will display a warning, leave the letter value un-modified and the post
will continue.
DivInto can be used to produce reciprocals. The following example will output
reciprocals for pitch.
Q ->3.>4 DivInto 1
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
Q[20]
Q.05
Q[28]
Q.0357
Q[14]
Q.0714
Add
The value after this command will be added to all the output for this word. The value
entered can be either a number value or a Word Address Letter. The current value of
the Word Address letter is used for the Add function. The example below can be used
to shift the output location of any character. Add a negative number to subtract.
X ->3.>4 Add 10
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
11
X21.
-2.5
X7.5
.2135
X10.2135
Abs/Inc
All output for this word will be incremental. The default is absolute. It can be coded
although it is not necessary. The example below outputs the Y values incrementally.
1307
The examples below indicate the Y incremental move values based on the starting
point of Y0. The INC file values are absolute locations output by SURFCAM from Y0.
Y ->3.>4 Inc
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
11
Y11.
-2.5
Y-13.5
.2135
Y2.7135
IncSign
Used as a qualifier for rotary axis positioning. When added to the Word address
format, it causes the sign of the output to designate the direction of rotation.
These example A axis motions are within the 118 degree to 350 degree marks of the
rotary table and begin at 260 degrees.
A ->3.>3 Limit -359.999 0 Incsign
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
270
A+270.
118
A-118.
350
A+360.
A ->3.>3 Limit -359.999 0
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
270.
A+270.
118.
A+118.
350.
A+360.
IncFrom
This is used to define the Word address as incremental from the letter entered. This
is typically used for 4 axis Wire EDM programming. The example below outputs the
U value incrementally from the last absolute value of X. The INC file values are the
successive absolute X axis values.
1308
U ->3.>4 IncFrom X
INC FILE VALUE

X VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
U VALUE
1.
2.
U1.
2.5
-3.2
U-5.7
.2135
.125
U.0995
Modal
The Modal modifier prevents the post from repeating the same values on later lines
when the value has not changed. The INC file values are successive lines.
F >2 Modal
The following sequence line is used for this example.
X[h] Y[v] F[frate]
INC FILE VALUE

X
Note
NC CODE OUTPUT
1.
X0 Y0 F1.
1.5
2.5
1.
X1.5 Y2.5
2.
3.
1.
X2. Y3.
1.3
2.
2.
X1.3 Y2. F2.
Modal Word address letters can also be specified with the ModalLetters
command.
Force
This modifier requires the post to output the letter on each line. When the letter is
required on each line without the value, use the Modal modifier with the Force
modifier.
F >2 Force
1309
X[h] Y[v] F[frate]F >2 Modal Force
INC FILE VALUE

X
NC CODE OUTPUT
1.
X0 Y0 F1.
1.5
2.5
1.
X1.5 Y2.5 F1.
2.
3.
1.
X2. Y3. F1.
1.3
2.
2.
X1.3 Y2. F2.

X[h] Y[v] F[frate]
INC FILE VALUE

X
NC CODE OUTPUT
1.
X0 Y0 F1.
1.5
2.5
1.
X1.5 Y2.5 F
2.
3.
1.
X2. Y3. F
1.3
2.
2.
X1.3 Y2. F2.
The order in which these modifiers are placed on the line is not important. The order in
which they are performed is not dependent upon the order in the line. The performance
order is as follows:
1.
The original value is multiplied with Mult.
2.
Addition is accomplished after Mult.
3.
The result of these two is checked for defined limits.
4.
The result is then converted to incremental when Inc or IncFrom is used.
22.10
COMMANDS
Commands are used by the post processor to identify information necessary to format
the program correctly. These commands can be placed in any order. They should be
1310
placed before the sequence section of the machine file. These commands are generally
grouped by their prospective function.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
2ndCircleCode p. 1311
ArcPlane p. 1311
ArcWithLine? p. 1311
ArcWithSame? p. 1312
Ask p. 1312
ByDiameter? p. 1314
ByQuadrants? p. 1314
CCW p. 1315
CDC p. 1315
CircDir p. 1315
Comment p. 1315
Coolant p. 1316
CtrCode p. 1316
CtrCode>180 p. 1317
CtrCode360 p. 1317
CtrIncremental? p. 1317
CW p. 1318
DCode p. 1318
DCode2 p. 1318
DComp p. 1319
Drive p. 1319
Dummy p. 1319
Each p. 1319
EOB p. 1320
Feed p. 1320
FeedCode p. 1320
FeedType p. 1320
First#? p. 1321
HCode p. 1321
HCode2 p. 1321
Helical? p. 1322
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
Incremental? p. 1322
Last#? p. 1323
LComp p. 1323
Leading0s? p. 1323
MaxRad p. 1323
MinRad p. 1323
Mod p. 1323
Modality
ModalGs p. 1324
ModalLetters p. 1324
Force p. 1324
42. Rapid p. 1325
43. RenumSubs? p. 1325
44. Replace p. 1326
45. ReturnPlane p. 1325
46. RevSigns p. 1326
47. RevTurret2? p. 1327
48. Sequence#s p. 1327
49. Spaces p. 1330
50. Spaces? p. 1330
51. SpeedCode p. 1330
52. SpeedType p. 1331
53. Spindle p. 1331
54. Subs1st? p. 1331
55. Tolerance p. 1331
56. Tools p. 1331
57. UpperCaseComments? p. 1332
58. VCode p. 1332
59. VCode2 p. 1332
60. VRapid p. 1332
61. Work p. 1333
Post Processor Commands
1311
62. WorkDefault p. 1333

63. ZRestart? p. 1333
Commands that are used in the POSTFORM files followed by a question mark (such as
Spaces?) are called switches. These switches refer to various conditions required by the
NC machine that can be turned on or off with a YES or NO indication. This is
accomplished by placing a Y or N after that word.
32.
33.
Inc/Abs p. 1322
Inch/MM p. 1322
1. 2ndCircleCode Mill, Lathe, EDM

Some NC machines cannot process a circular move in just one block of program
information. For these machines a second line is used to indicate whatever information
could not be given on the first line. 2ndCircleCode is used to describe the NC word that
initiates this second line of information. Some machines require a code to identify the
second line of the arc information. This is sometimes an M99 code.
2ndCircleCode M99
Related Commands: CtrCode, ByDiameter?, ByQuadrants?, CtrIncremental?
2. ArcPlane Mill Only
This command sets the plane for Circular interpolation in XY, YZ, XZ planes. This
command must be placed before the CtrCode Command. Example: ArcPlane G 17 18
19 # Arc Plane Selection
To use this feature of MPOST, the CtrCode needs to have the K letter added after I J.
Example: CtrCode I J K
See CtrCode Mill, Lathe, EDM, page 1316.
3. ArcWithLine? EDM
This command is used for 4 axis EDM only. It is used to break G2 and G3 arc moves into
G1 linear moves. It is used in conjunction with the MaxRad command that defines the
chordal breakdown value of the G1 linear moves.
This command defines whether the machine tool can accept arcs and lines for 4 axis
cuts. When the command is entered with the Y, the EDM machine can accept an arc on
one path with a line on the other. When the N is entered the arcs are broken into line
segments based on the MaxRad values entered.
With the example below the output is with arcs and lines.
ArcWithLine? Y
With this example the arcs are broken into line segments based on the MaxRad
command.
MaxRad 99 .001
ArcWithLine? N
1312
Related Commands: ArcWithSame, MaxRad

4. ArcWithSame? EDM
This command is used for 4 axis EDM only. It is used to break G2 and G3 arc moves into
G1 linear moves. It is used in conjunction with the MaxRad command that defines the
chordal breakdown value of the G1 linear moves.
This command defines whether the machine tool can accept arcs on both cut paths for
4 axis cuts. When the command is entered with the Y the EDM machine can accept an
arc on both cut paths. When the N is entered the arcs are broken into line segments
based on the MaxRad values entered.
With the example below the output is with arcs.
ArcWithSame? Y
With this example the arcs are broken into line segments based on the MaxRad
command.
MaxRad 99 .001
ArcWithSame? N
Related Commands: ArcWithLine, MaxRad
5. Ask Mill, Lathe, EDM
You can set the value of a variable by responding to a prompt. The prompt is configured
by the user to be displayed prior to the post generating the code or the number of times
a sequence is executed. You can enter a default value that can be accepted by pressing
the Enter key. You can define any question for the prompt desired. The response to the
question, either the default or entered value, assigns a numeric value to the any variable
name. These variables can be placed in the POSTFORM file for any letter.
When the Ask statement is placed outside a sequence, it is only displayed one time for
each tool motion file. The value of the variable defined is used for the entire file.
The example below indicates the format for the Ask statement. This example is used for
a lathe cutoff cycle. The first quoted string is the prompt question, and the second is the
optional default value.
Ask [z] What is the Z value for cutoff? -3
Ask [val2] What is the X value (Radius) position for cutoff> 2
Ask [speed] What is the cutoff spindle speed? 200
The prompts above are used to enter the values for the cutoff sequence. These values
can be accessed in the EndCode sequence as follows:
EndCode
G0 Z.2
1313
G28 U0 W0 M9 T[lasttool]
/0 M0
G50 X0 Z0
T1200 M[cool]
G96 S[val3] M[direct]
# Cutoff spindle speed
G0 Z[val1] X[val2] T1212
# Cutoff Z, X values
G0 X[val2]
# Clear to diameter
G28 U0 W0 T1200
M30
End
The NC code below uses the default values for the Ask statements.
G0 Z.2
G28 U0 W0 M9 T1100
/ M0
G50 X0 Z0
T1200 M8
G96 S200 M3
G0 Z-3. X2. T1212
G0 X2.
G28 U0 W0 T1200
M30
When the Post Processor is activated, the Ask prompts are displayed as follows:
ENTER a single SPACE to abort, or
What is the Z value for cutoff? (-3)
You can abort the post operation by pressing the space bar, then pressing the Enter key.
To accept the default value in parentheses, press the Enter key. To enter a value, key in
the new value and press the Enter key.
The Ask statement can also be placed within a sequence. You can prompt for
information each time the sequence is used by the post processor. In the example below
you are prompted for a work offset at each tool change.
ToolChange
Ask [val1] What is the work offset number? 54
1314
M6 T[tool]
G0 G[val1] X[h] Y[v]
S[speed] M[direct]
G43 Z[d] H[lcomp]
End
The output code using the default value for the Ask statement:
M6 T1
G0 G54 X0 Y0
S2000 M3
G43 Z.1 H1
6. ByDiameter? Lathe
This switch specifies that all X values are multiplied by 2 for global diameter output.
Some machines require a diameter output for turning. Enter a Y to output diameters.
ByDiameter? Y
Related Commands: 2ndCircleCode, CtrCode, ByQuadrants?, CtrIncremental?
7. ByQuadrants? Mill, Lathe, EDM
Many NC machines do not allow program arcs of more than 90 degrees in a single block
of code. The program must code the circular moves by quadrants. This is accomplished
by breaking arcs at the quadrant boundaries. To create a full circular move, you must
program one block for each quarter of the arc, and even break it into 5 arcs if the starting
point of the arc is not on a quadrant boundary. If the machine has this limitation, enter a
Y after the ByQuadrants? command. When the machine allows full circle programming
in one block, enter N.
The following example uses a circle of radius 2.5, and a center at X0 Y0 being cut
counter clockwise from X2.5 Y0. The following lines will be produced depending on the
ByQuadrants option.
ByQuadrants? N
# Outputs G3 Y0 I-2.5 J0
ByQuadrants? Y
# Outputs the following:

G3 X0 Y2.5 I-2.5 J0
X-2.5 Y0 I0 J-2.5
X0 Y-2.5 I2.5 J0
X2.5 Y0 I0 J2.5
Related Commands: 2ndCircleCode, CtrCode, ByDiameter?, CtrIncremental?

1315
8. CCW Mill, Lathe, EDM

This is the letter and number for counterclockwise arcs.
CCW G3
Related Commands: CW, CircDir
9. CDC Mill
This command is used to identify the two letters (usually P and Q) to be included on all
movement lines for the Cincinnati style DComp vectors.
CDC P Q
Related Commands: DComp, LComp
10. CircDir Mill, Lathe, EDM
Machines that have one event code for an arc move must also specify the direction of
rotation. This command must be followed by a letter and two numbers, the first for
clockwise and the second for counterclockwise moves.
CircDir D01 # There are no spaces between the numbers.
This places D0 on circular moves in the clockwise direction and D1 on the
counterclockwise moves.
Related Commands: CCW, CW
11. Comment Mill, Lathe, EDM
Comment indicates the CNC style comment start and end characters that the machine
uses to allow comments in the NC code. On some machines, comments must be
enclosed in parentheses.
The post processor will automatically output several lines of end user comments after the
StartCode sequence, providing additional shop floor documentation. These automatic
comments list the NCC file, INC file, date, time, company name, and address. There are
several methods to control the output of comments in the POSTFORM file including:
There should be a single space before the beginning and ending comment characters.
Some machines do not need an end comment character; in this case, just indicate the
comment start character:
UpperCaseComments? Y # Comments are output in upper case
UpperCaseComments? N # Comments are output in upper and lower case
Comment (
# Comments are preceded by an open parenthesis
Comment !(
# Comments are preceded by an open parenthesis and no N

numbers
Comment ( )
# Comments are surrounded by parentheses

1316
Comment !( )
# Comments are surrounded by parentheses and no N

numbers
Comment ( )$
# Comments are surrounded by parentheses for Dynapath

controls
Machines that use only a comment start character will ignore after the comment
character.
Note
When the machine tool does not support comments, do not enter the
Comment command in the POSTFORM file.
Notes:
# Beginning of Post notes Lines between Notes: and EndNotes are treated
as comments and are not posted to the NCC file.
EndNotes # End of Post notes
Related Commands: UpperCaseComment?
12. Coolant Mill, Lathe, EDM
Similar to the Spindle command, Coolant can be followed by up to 8 numerical values for
the M codes for flood coolant On, Off, and Mist and 5 additional user defined codes.
Coolant 8 9 7 61 62 63 64 # On, Off, Mist, flood lo, flood hi, thru lo, thru hi
Note
The same value for flood On and Mist can be used.

Coolant 8 9 8 61 62 63 64 # On, Off, Mist, ...........
13. CtrCode Mill, Lathe, EDM

This command should be followed by one or two letters*, depending on which method of
arc center point designation you want in the NC code. The two letters are usually I and
J for milling; the first letter is the horizontal center designation and the second is the
vertical. The one letter center configuration is used for radius designation. When only
one letter is entered after CtrCode, then the radius value is coded.
* If ArcPlane is used, you will need the letter K after I J. See ArcPlane Mill Only, page
1311.
For the following examples, a 90 deg. arc of radius 2.5, center at X1. Y1., starting at X3.5
Y1. and ending at X1. Y3.5 is cut in the counterclockwise direction.
Mill, Lathe
CtrCode I J
CtrCode R
EDM
CtrCode I J K L
# Outputs G3 X1. Y3.5 I-2.5 J0

# Outputs G3 X1. Y3.5 R2.5
# Outputs K and L for 4 Axis Wire Aux. plane

# Circle center codes.
1317
Note
The formats for the letters K, and L must be set in the letter format section
of the POSTFORM.E file.
Note
The programming mode must be absolute for 4 Axis: INCREMENTAL? Y

line is not allowed in the POSTFORM.E file.
Arc center codes for UV, typically K and L, are assumed to be incremental from the start
of the UV plane arc. When the K and L values must be incremental from the I and J
values of the XY plane enter another Y after the CtrIncremental? parameter.
Related Commands: 2ndCircleCode, ByDiameter?, ByQuadrant?, CtrIncremental?
14. CtrCode>180 Mill, Lathe, EDM
With this command you can use the R letter designation to code arc moves greater than
180 degrees and less than a full circle. This can be accomplished by coding the following
letter address and command sequence. The letter format used is the same as the
CtrCode command.
r ->3.>4 R Mult -1
This outputs a -R for the arc center to break arcs greater than 180 degrees.
CtrCode>180 R# Outputs G3 X1. Y3.5 R-3.5
Related Commands: CtrCode, CtrCode360
15. CtrCode360 Mill, Lathe, EDM
When the CtrCode>180 command is used, this command is used to code full circle arcs.
This command also requires the Word Address format as described above. The letter
format used is the same as the CtrCode command.
Related Commands: CrtCode, CtrCode>180
16. CtrIncremental? Mill, Lathe, EDM
The information after this command is only used if the two letter CtrCode is used to
indicate the center point of the arc. Enter a Y or N after the CtrIncremental? command to
define whether the machine measures the center of the arcs incrementally from the start
point of the arc. The numerical values of the two Center addresses will be taken as
absolute from the program origin when an N is entered.
This example uses a 90 deg. arc of radius 2.5, center at X1. Y1. starting at X3.5 Y1. and
cutting to X1.0 Y3.5 in a counterclockwise direction.
Mill, Lathe
CtrIncremental? Y
CtrIncremental? N
# Outputs G3 X1. Y3.5 I-2.5 J0

# Outputs G3 X1. Y3.5 I1. J1.
EDM
CtrIncremental? Y N
# Y Y causes K & L to be incremental from I & J.
1318
# Y N causes K & L to be incremental from the

# arc start.
Note
The formats for the letters K and L must be set in the letter format section of
the POSTFORM.E file.
Note
The programming mode must be absolute; the INCREMENTAL? Y line is

not allowed in the POSTFORM.E file. When incremental output is desired,
use the individual Word address method instead. See Incremental Output,
page 1397.
Note
UV plane axis positioning values for Wire EDM are absolute values unless
otherwise indicated in the letter format section of the POSTFORM.E file.
When the U and V values for Wire EDM are to be incremental from the X
and Y values on the same line, format the U and V letters as follows:
Note
U ->3.>4 IncFrom X
Note
V ->3.>4 IncFrom Y
Note
Arc center codes for UV, typically K and L, are assumed to be incremental
from the start of the UV plane arc. When the K and L values must be
incremental from the I and J values of the XY plane, enter another Y after
the CtrIncremental? parameter.
CtrIncremental? Y Y
Related Commands: 2ndCircleCode, CtrCode, ByDiameter?, ByQuadrants?

17. CW Mill, Lathe, EDM
This command identifies the letter and number for clockwise arcs.
CW G2
Related Commands: CCW, CircDir
18. DCode Mill, Lathe
These are followed by the character that corresponds to their function. The DCode
command corresponds to the depth moves of the INC file. This is typically the Z word.
DCode Z
Related Commands: DCode2, HCode, HCode2, VCode, VCode2, FeedCode
19. DCode2 Lathe
This word format specifies the letter address to use to move the second turret depth.
DCode2 W
Related Commands: DCode, HCode, HCode2, VCode, VCode2, FeedCode
1319
20. DComp Mill, Lathe

The three values following the DComp command correspond to the machines three
diameter offset directions: Left, Right, and Cancel, respectively.
DComp 41 42 40 # Left, Right, Cancel
Related Commands: CDC, LComp
21. Drive Mill, Lathe, EDM
You can assign a path name (drive and folder name) that will determine where the
finished NC program will be created. Simply add a line like the one below to route the
code to the desired folder:
Drive \mill\
There must be a trailing back slash (\).
It is recommended that the Drive line be added after the Name line. Each different
machine format can have a different Drive line, which enables you to automatically route
NC programs for each machine into its own folder.
In addition to (or instead of) having a separate Drive line for each machine, you can place
a Drive line at the very top of the POSTFORM file. All NC programs can be routed to this
folder unless the machine chosen has its own Drive line, in which case the machine's
drive designation will be used.
22. Dummy for Columnar Style Mill
The character input after Dummy is a character that will appear at the end of each line
of a columnar style program to indicate the end of the line. The Dummy line is not used
when the format is not columnar.
Note
The items Spaces and Dummy are used only in columnar style programs.
Related Commands: EOB, Each, Spaces

23. Each Mill, Lathe, EDM
Some machines require a particular word, a letter followed by a number, on each line.
The machine may require a dollar sign ($) character at the end of each line, in addition
to the standard CR/LF end of block characters.
Therefore, enter this line in the POSTFORM file for that machine:
Each $0
In this example, to output just the dollar sign without the 0 following it, format the dollar
sign to output no digits by giving it the format:
$ 00
1320
Note
This needs to be entered in the Word Address Formats section and the
POSTFORM it gets output from is determined by the Word Address Format
section.
Related Commands: Dummy, EOB

24. EOB Mill, Lathe, EDM
EOB stands for End Of Block. Some NC machines require a character other than a
standard line feed / carriage return combination between each line of code. The EOB line
can be used to change the End Of Block code to any ASCII character. For instance, if a
machine requires a number sign character (#), then place the number 35 after EOB in
the POSTFORM file. The number 35 is the ASCII value of the number sign character:
EOB 35# ASCII Value
This will cause the post to use the number sign instead of the standard carriage return /
line feed combination at the end of each line of NC code.
You can enter as many as twenty numbers for EOB characters. These twenty characters
are output for each line.
EOB 13 10
This outputs a carriage return and line feed at the end of each block.
Related Commands: Dummy, Each
25. Feed Mill, Lathe, EDM
The following lines indicate the linear Feed Rate movement codes:
Feed G1
Here a G1 indicates that a move at the specified feed rate is going to be programmed in
this block.
Related Commands: FeedCode, FeedType, Rapid, SpeedType, VRapid
26. FeedCode Mill, Lathe, EDM
This function specifies the character to use for Feedrate output.
FeedCode F
Note
SURFCAM requires tool motion to be present before outputting a

FeedCode.
Related Commands: Feed, FeedType, DCode, DCode2, HCode, HCode2, VCode,

VCode2
27. FeedType Mill, Lathe, EDM
This command specifies the appropriate G codes for IPR and IPM output.
FeedType 95 94
1321
This entry will output a G95 for IPR and G94 for IPM codes.
Related Commands: Feed, FeedCode, SpeedType, VRapid
28. First#? Mill, Lathe, EDM
This switch determines whether the Block number is output on the first line of the
program or omitted. Enter Y or N for the desired output. The example below will omit a
number on the first line of the NC program.
First#? N
Related Commands: Last#?, Sequence#s
29. HCode Mill, Lathe, EDM
These commands are followed by the character that corresponds to their function (the
H, V, and D in the first 3 stand for Horizontal, Vertical, and Depth, respectively). For
standard milling, these characters are almost always X, Y, Z.
Mill, Lathe
HCode X
EDM
HCode X U
The letter U indicates the auxiliary horizontal plane movement for Wire EDM.
Note
The formats for the letter U must be set in the Letter Format section of the
POSTFORM.E file.
Note
UV plane axis positioning values for Wire EDM are absolute values unless
otherwise indicated in the letter format section of the POSTFORM.E file.
When the U and V values are to be incremental from the X and Y values on
the same line, format the U and V letters as follows:
U ->3.>4 IncFrom X
V ->3.>4 IncFrom Y
Related Commands: DCode, DCode2, HCode2, VCode, VCode2, FeedCode

30. HCode2 Lathe
This word format specifies the letter address to use to move the second turret
horizontally.
HCode2 U
Related Commands: DCode, DCode2, HCode, VCode, VCode2, FeedCode
1322
31. Helical? Mill

This switch defines whether or not the machine tool allows helical move. When the
machine tool accepts helical moves this command should be entered as Y. The output
code would then utilize the designated axis for the helical moves.
Helical? Y# Outputs Z axis helical moves.
Helical? N# Outputs point to point linear moves.
Linear moves are at a tolerance set by the MaxRad command.
Related Commands: CW, CCW, CtrCode, CtrIncremental?, MaxRad
32. Inc/Abs Mill, Lathe, EDM
The Inc/Abs line indicates the numerical values of the G code that set the incremental or
absolute programming mode on the NC machine. The post processor issues a warning
message when a mode change command is processed. For most machines it is G91 and
G90:
Inc/Abs G 91 90
Note
Referto Incremental? Mill, Lathe, EDM, page 1399.
Related Commands: Incremental?

33. Inch/MM Mill, Lathe, EDM
The Inch/MM line indicates the numerical values of the G code that set inch or millimeter
programming mode on the NC machine. For most machines it is G70 and G71. When
this command is not used, the G70 or G71 code is the default. This command is not
required when the G70 / G71 codes are used by the machine tool. The example below
is entered in the POSTFORM file for a machine tool that uses G20 and G21 for inch and
millimeter mode.
Inch/MM 20 21 # Inch Metric
34. Incremental? Mill, Lathe, EDM
This switch is used to set the machine output to the Incremental, or Absolute, mode.
Incremental? Y
This will cause the code to be output in Incremental. The machine may also require a
G91. Ensure that a G91 code is placed in your StartCode or 1stToolChange sequence.
Note
The Y can easily be changed to an N to result in absolute programs.

Remember to remove the G91 in your StartCode or 1stToolChange
sequence. When absolute and incremental programs are both used
regularly, create two appropriate posts within the POSTFORM file.
Note
See Inc/Abs Mill, Lathe, EDM, page 1399.
Related Commands: Inc/Abs

1323
35. Last#? Mill, Lathe, EDM

This switch determines whether a Block number is output on the last lines of the program
or omitted. Enter a Y or N for the desired output. The example below will output a block
number on the last line of the program.
Last#? Y
Related Commands: First#?, Sequence#s
36. LComp Mill, EDM
Similar to DComp, the two values following the LComp command indicate the values
used for the words that activate and deactivate the machine's tool length compensation
function, respectively.
LComp 43 49# On, Off
Related Commands: CDC, DComp
37. Leading0s? Mill, Lathe, EDM
By default, the post puts a leading zero on any number whose absolute value is less
than one. For instance: X0.1 instead of X.1 and Z-0.5 instead of Z-.5. If your
machine does not require the leading zeroes, then use this switch with a Y to eliminate
them (thereby producing somewhat more compact code).
38. MaxRad Mill, Lathe, EDM
This command sets the limit size of the arcs the machine can perform. When an arc is
larger than the limit size, the post breaks the arc into linear moves. The second
parameter is the amount of chordal deviation from the original arc.
MaxRad 99 .001# Limit Tolerance
This command directs the post to process all arcs with a radius of 99 inches or less.
Those arcs larger than the 99 inch radius are broken into linear moves with a chordal
deviation of .001 from the original arc.
Related Commands: ArcWithLine, ArcWithSame, MinRad
39. MinRad Mill, Lathe, EDM
This command sets the minimum size of the arcs the machine can perform. When an arc
is smaller than this value it is output as lines. The default value is .001.
MinRad .001 # Tolerance
Related Commands: MaxRad
40. MOD
This command is a MODULO function in that it returns the remainder when one number
is divided by another. It is useful in working with rotary tables to insure that the code is
never greater than 360 (or -360).
1324
The format of the command is number1 MOD number2. Such an expression will always
return a value x in the range of -number2 < x < number2. Some examples are:
45 mod 360 = 45
390 mod 360 = 30
30 is remainder when 390 is divided by 360
720 mod 360 = 0
360 divides evenly into 720
-370.2 mod 360 = -10.2

41. Modality
ModalGs Mill, Lathe, EDM
This is simply a list of all the G values that are modal. This means that any G code in
the list will remain in effect, and not be repeated, until another G code from the list is
called. This prevents, for instance, a G1 from being output on every line when there
are consecutive linear moves. G values that should appear on this line are G codes
for any movement commands: linear, rapid, circular, and canned cycle G values.
ModalGs 0 1 2 3 73 74 76 80 81 82 83 84 85
Related Commands: ModalLetters
ModalLetters Mill, Lathe, EDM
This line contains a list of all the letters that typically indicate modal values. On most
machines this should be:
ModalLetters X Y Z F
If the ModalLetters line is not placed, then the above defaults are used. The letters
used in conjunction with the RotAngle and VClear variables are also assumed to be
modal when the ModalLetters line is not used.
ModalLetters
Related Commands: ModalGs
Force?
The FORCE? modifier can now be added to all sequences (except Point to point
cycles [DRILL, REAM, BORE, BACK, TAP, LTAP, PECK]). You can use this option
to tell the post to suppress unchanged values (by using Force? N) within the
sequence, or to force all words to be output (Force? Y). For instance, if you want all
arc letters to be output, use the Force modifier on the CWCode and CCWCode lines
like this:
CwCode Force? Y
...
CCwCode Force? Y
1325
...
Although this modifier cannot be added to the drilling cycles, it CAN be added to the
CANCEL, INDEX, UPON and UPONREC sequences. If added to sequences that use
other parameters, it must be placed AFTER the other parameters as in these
examples:
Index X Z Force? Y
Upon [tool] Force? Y
Notes:
1.
The default state of these sequences is Forced: StartCode, 1stToolChange,

ToolChange, SubStart, SubEnd, SubCall, Index, Cancel, EndCode.
2.
All canned cycles (Drill, etc.) Force Y the 1st hole, but then are modal for the
subsequent holes (the equivalent of Force? N).
3.
All other sequences are modal (the equivalent of Force? N)Rapid, Linear
moves, In/Outfeed, Arcs.
42. Rapid Mill, Lathe, EDM

The following lines indicate the Feed rate and Rapid movement codes:
Rapid G0
The G0 indicates that a rapid move is to be programmed in this block.
Related Commands: Feed, FeedType, SpeedType, VRapid
43. ReturnPlane Lathe, Mill
The ReturnPlane command sets the value for the [RetPlane] variable. This controls the
Z level Return Plane between holes when drilling. (Typically G98, G99)
ReturnPlane 98 99
Related Variables: RetPlane
44. RenumSubs? Mill
You can reset the line numbers at the beginning of each Subprogram and the main
program. When this command is not used, the line numbers are not reset at the
beginning of each Subprogram and the main program.
RenumSubs? Y
Note
When this command is entered as Y, the Subline variable should not be

used.
Related Commands: Subs1st?

Note
See Subprogram Output, page 1403 and Block Number Output, page 1408.
1326
45. Replace Mill, Lathe, EDM

Up to 50 Replace commands can be added to the POSTFORM file to search and replace
certain phrases with others. The following are example lines within the POSTFORM file.
Replace G2 with DR-
Replace "G3 with "DR+
Replace T with TOOL DEF
Notice that both the phrase to be replaced and the new phrase are enclosed in quotes.
This is necessary in order to be able to search and replace phrases with embedded
spaces, such as TOOL DEF. Unlike all other areas of the POSTFORM file, phrases with
quotes are always case sensitive. Do not use g3 when you really want to search for
G3. The commands Replace and With can be upper or lower case.
Each line of outgoing NC code will be scanned for each Replace line in the machine
format. Only the first occurrence of the Replace phrase is replaced in each line. Using
the example above, the line G2 T1 G2 X0 would end up as DR- TOOL DEF 1 G2 X0.
Notice that the second G2 is not replaced because it was found earlier in the line.
Note
Spaces within the search phrase can be used to prevent unwanted

replacements. In the first example, if we had used a G2 and DR-, without the
trailing spaces, it would cause all G28 words to end up as DR-8.
Also, if more than one Replace line are used in a format, they are performed in the order
that you specify. This means that there is a possibility that code can be inadvertently
replaced twice. In the following example, Replace lines are used in the following order:
Replace T with TOOL DEF
Replace D with DIAM.
The D in TOOL DEF will be replaced with DIAM. like this:
T1 will be changed to: TOOL DIAM. EF 1" instead of TOOL DEF 1"
To prevent this from happening, just reverse the order of the Replace lines so the D is
replaced before the T.
Note
Limits are not checked on phrases that are the result of a Replace
command. In other words, if code is inadvertently replaced with another
phrase that is beyond a particular limit, then no warning will appear. The size
of the search phrase in a Replace line is limited to 10 characters, and the
replace phrase is limited to 40 characters.
46. RevSigns Mill, Lathe, EDM

This is a list of characters that need to have their signs reversed. Some machines require
the Z+ direction to be toward the spindle. The example below reverses the sign of the
letters Z and X.
1327
RevSigns Z X
An indefinite number of letters can be placed on this line.
Related Commands: RevTurret2?
47. RevTurret2? Lathe
This word format globally reverses all X values when the second turret is active. You can
enter a Y for yes or N for no to reverse the X values for the second turret.
RevTurret2? Y
Related Commands: RevSigns
48. Sequence#s Mill, Lathe, EDM
This line defines the Block numbers output in the NC program. There are four parameters
required and placed in order on this line:
CHARACTER
The first character after the command is the 1st character of the block number. These
examples show the code and output for the commands using the letter N and the :
symbol.
Note
The letter or symbol used must be in the Word Address format.
SEQUENCE#S N 1 1 1
THE OUTPUT
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
N1 M6 T1
G0 G90 S[Speed] M[Direct]
N2 G0 G90 S2000 M3
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
N3 E1 X0 Y0
H[Lcomp] M[Cool] Z[D]
N4 H1 M7 Z.1
End
The following example uses the letter C with the Replace command to output the :
symbol for each block number.
: >2
SEQUENCE#S : 1 1 1
THE OUTPUT
1stToolChange
1328
SEQUENCE#S : 1 1 1
THE OUTPUT
M6 T[Tool]
:1 M6 T1
:2 G0 G90 S2000 M3
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
:3 E1 X0 Y0
:4 H1 M7 Z.1
End
FREQUENCY
A number here indicates how often a block number is placed on a line. To output a
number on every line, enter a 1. To output a number on every other line enter a 2.
Entering the number 10 will output a block number every ten lines. The following
examples show the code and output for the parameter.
SEQUENCE#S N 1 1 1
THE OUTPUT
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
N1 M6 T1
N2 G0 G90 S2000 M3
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
N3 E1 X0 Y0
N4 H1 M7 Z.1
End
The following example indicates a Frequency of 2 to output block numbers on every
other line.
SEQUENCE#S N 2 1 1
THE OUTPUT
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
N1 M6 T1
G0 G90 S2000 M3
SEQUENCE#S N 2 1 1
1329
THE OUTPUT
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
N2 E1 X0 Y0
H1 M7 Z.1
End
Note
Use a frequency of 0 not to output the block numbers on each line. The post
will only put them where they are requested.
INCREMENT
This is the value by which the block number is incremented before the next output. Using
the value of 10 will create block numbers in the block address itself as 10 greater than
the last block number.
SEQUENCE#S N 1 10 10
THE OUTPUT
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
N10 M6 T1
N20 G0 G90 S2000 M3
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
N30 E1 X0 Y0
N40 H1 M7 Z.1
End
START VALUE
This is simply the value of the very first block number that appears in the code; numbers
after the first are determined by the start value plus a multiple of the Increment.
THE OUTPUT
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
N100 M6 T1
N102 G0 G90 S2000 M3
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
N104 E1 X0 Y0
1330
THE OUTPUT
N106 H1 M7 Z.1
End
Note
See Block Number Output, page 1408.
49. Spaces for Columnar Style Mill, Lathe, EDM

The number on the Spaces line is used only in columnar style programs and determines
the length of every line of the program. This line must appear in the POSTFORM file
before the letter formats for each format that uses this programming style, otherwise the
words will not be placed correctly in the NC program.
Note
Do not confuse this setting with the Spaces? switch.
Related Commands: Dummy

50. Spaces? Mill, Lathe, EDM
This switch is used to suppress the insertion of space characters between each word of
the NC program. When using communication software that does not strip out spaces
automatically, use the following line to prevent the post from putting spaces between
each word:
SPACES? N
THE OUTPUT
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
M6T1
G0G90S2000M3
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
E1X0Y0
H1M7Z.1
End
Note
Do not confuse this line with the Spaces setting mentioned above in the
Letter Formats section.
51. SpeedCode Mill, Lathe, EDM

This command specifies the character to use for Spindle Speed output.
SpeedCode M
Note
1331
SURFCAM requires tool motion to be present before outputting a

FeedCode.
Related Commands: SpeedType

52. SpeedType Lathe
This command specifies the appropriate G code for RPM and CSS output.
SpeedType 97 96 # RPM and CSS
This entry will output a G97 for RPM and G96 for CSS codes.
Related Commands: Feed, FeedType, Rapid, VRapid
53. Spindle Mill, Lathe
The Spindle command is followed by 3 numbers that correspond to clockwise,
counterclockwise and spindle stop. Most machines use M3, M4, and M5 for these codes.
The following line indicates these functions.
Spindle 3 4 5# CW CCW Stop
54. Subs1st? Mill
This command defines the location of the Subprograms in relation to the main program.
Enter a Y for the Subprograms to be output before the main program. An N outputs the
Subprograms after the main program. This command is only entered in the POSTFORM
file when Subprograms are desired. When this command is not used, the Subprograms
are automatically placed before the main program.
Subs1st? Y
Related Commands: RenumSubs?
55. Tolerance Mill, Lathe, EDM
This command is used to set the value to round off the output.
Tolerance .0002
The example above causes only even numbers to be output in the 1/10,000ths column.
56. Tools Mill, Lathe
This line is used only with tool indexers that require incremental T numbers. In other
words, the value of the T number is the number of indexes required to reach the desired
tool, not the tool number.
Note
Make sure there is no Tools line in any section of a POSTFORM that

describes a machine not having this incremental tool change. This could
cause the machine to work improperly.
1332
57. UpperCaseComments? Mill, Lathe, EDM

You can output either all upper case letters or upper and lower case letters for
comments. Enter the command with the letter Y to convert all comment letters to upper
case letters.
UpperCaseComments? Y
Related Commands: Comment
58. VCode Mill, Lathe, EDM
These commands are followed by the character that corresponds to their function. The
h, v, and d in the first 3 commands stand for Horizontal, Vertical, and Depth, respectively.
For standard milling, these characters are almost always X, Y, Z, and F.
EDM
VCode Y V
Mill, Lathe
VCode Y
The letter V indicates the auxiliary vertical plane movement.

Note
The formats for the letter V must be set in the letter format section of the
POSTFORM.E file.
Note
UV plane axis positioning values are absolute values unless otherwise

indicated in the letter format section of the POSTFORM.E file. When the U and
V values are to be incremental from the X and Y values on the same line, format
the U and V letters as follows:
U ->3.>4 IncFrom X
V ->3.>4 IncFrom Y
Related Commands: DCode, DCode2, HCode, HCode2, VCode2, FeedCode

59. VCode2 Lathe
This word format specifies the letter address to use to move the second turret vertically.
VCode2 V
Related Commands: DCode, DCode2, HCode, HCode2, VCode, FeedCode
60. VRapid Mill
This command is used to output additional code before the VRapid letter output. This can
be used for some Bandit controls.
VRapid /0
The example above outputs a slash before the letter for all rapid moves.
Related Commands: Feed, FeedType, Rapid, SpeedType
1333
61. Work Mill, Lathe

This line is used to identify the letter designation of work offsets. Typically the letter G is
used for work offset designation. Machine tools may use different letters to identify the
work offset. When this is the case change the Work command to indicate the proper work
offset letter. The example below is for a FANUC style control.
Work G
This example can be used for a FADAL control.
Work E
Related Commands: WorkDefault
62. WorkDefault Mill, Lathe
This line is used to identify the number of the default work offset. The FANUC control
begins with number 54 while the FADAL control begins with the number 1. When this
command is not entered the default number used by the post processor is 54.
WorkDefault 1
Related Commands: Work
63. ZRestart? Mil
This switch allows for machine formats that do not require the canned cycles to be
restarted for each change in the depth or clearance plane values. If this parameter is not
used in the POSTFORM file, and the Z or R values change during a cycle, the cycles will
be cancelled if necessary, then restarted. To prevent this from occurring, enter the
following line in the POSTFORM file:
ZRestart? N# The N means No
Leaving this line out or using the line 'ZRestart? Y' will cause the following type of output
on a sample where the holes are all the same incremental depth, but start at different
levels.
Notice both the R and Z values change:
G81 X-1.834 Y0.4503 Z0.4079 R1.0079 F4.0
G80
G81 X-1.1283 Y0.6773 Z0.1177 R0.7177 F4.0
G80
Placing 'ZRestart? N' in the format will suppress the cancel and restart codes and result
in this output:
G81 X-1.834 Y0.4503 Z0.4079 R1.0079 F4.0
X-1.1283 Y0.6773 Z0.1177 R0.7177
1334
X0.4427 Y0.9409 Z-0.1445 R0.4555

G80
Note
Some machines can handle changing Z and R values when in incremental

mode but not in absolute.
22.11
SEQUENCES
Sequences are used to describe the actual NC code output. They are a series of program
blocks that appear in specific places in the NC program and for specific reasons.
Each sequence is described in the POSTFORM file by giving its name, on its own line,
then the line(s) for the formatted NC description. The word END on its own line, which
marks the END of the sequence, is then entered. Each line is limited to 15 words. The
total of all sequence lines is limited to 150 lines.
The output is defined by entering the Letter format desired with the variable required for
the output code. The NC code is output with the letter entered and the data from the
variable used.
Note
The sequence examples in this section were written for a standard Fanuc
control. They are incorporated in the post libraries displayed in this section.
The post processor contains three basic sequence types. These are the Canned cycles,
Standard, and Optional sequences.
The Standard sequences appear in all POSTFORM files. They perform the operations
that are required for every machine. In addition to the standard sequences, there are
optional sequences you can define. Optional sequences are denoted with an * in the
Standard and Optional Sequences figure.
1.
1stToolChange p. 1336
20.
EndRow p. 1340
2.
BeginLeadin* p. 1337
21.
EndSideStep* p. 1340
3.
BeginLeadout* p. 1337
22.
EndZLevel* p. 1340
4.
BeginPlunge* p. 1337
23.
Index * p. 1341
5.
BeginRetract* p. 1337
24.
InFeed p. 1341
6.
BeginRow p. 1337
25.
LineCode * p. 1341
7.
BeginSideStep* p. 1337
26.
OutFeed p. 1342
Standard and Optional Sequences
8.
BeginZLevel* p. 1337
27.
RapidCode * p. 1342
9.
Between * p. 1338
28.
StartCode p. 1342
10.
CcwCode * p. 1338
29.
Stop p. 1343
11.
CwCode * p. 1338
30.
SubCall * p. 1343
12.
EdmCut* p. 1339
31.
SubEnd * p. 1344
13.
EdmPreDrillThread* p. 1339
32.
SubmergeTank* p. 1344
14.
EdmThread* p. 1339
33.
SubStart * p. 1344
15.
EndCode p. 1339
34.
Thread G33 p. 1344
16.
EndLeadin* p. 1340
35.
ToolChange p. 1345
17.
EndLeadout* p. 1340
36.
Unwind p. 1345
18.
EndPlunge* p. 1340
37.
UponVariable p. 1346
19.
EndRetract* p. 1340
1335
Standard and Optional Sequences
These sequences are described in alphabetical order, followed by a description of the

canned cycles.
Note
When coding sequences, you must place a single space character between
each output letter on the line. Subsequent letters are not output for the line
when the single space is not present. If you either leave out a space or insert
an extra space, you will get incorrect results. The following example shows the
correct coding and the incorrect codingtwo spaces are inserted.
CORRECT
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
T[tool] M6
T1 M6
M[direct] S[speed]
M3 S2000
G0 G[work] X[h] Y[v]
G0 G54 X1. Y2.5
1336
CORRECT
THE OUTPUT CODE
Z[d] H[Lcomp]
Z.1 G43
M[cool]
M7
End
INCORRECT
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
T[tool] M6
T1
M[direct] S[speed]
M3
G0
Z[d] H[Lcomp]
Z.1
M[cool]
M7
End
22.11.1 Standard and Optional Sequences

1. 1stToolChange Mill, Lathe
This sequence describes the format for the program's FIRST tool change. This differs
from the subsequent tool changes in that it is assumed that the machine is in the tool
change position.
MILL
LATHE
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
1stToolChange
T[tool] M6
T[tool] M6
T1 M6
M[direct] S[speed]
M[direct] S[speed]
M3 S2000
G0 G54 X1. Y0
MILL
LATHE
1337
THE OUTPUT CODE
Z[d] H[Lcomp]
Z[d] H[Lcomp]
Z.1 H43
M[cool]
M[cool]
M7
End
End
Related Sequences: ToolChange

2. BeginLeadin Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code before the leadin moves.
3. BeginLeadout Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code before the leadout moves.
4. BeginPlunge Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code before the plunge moves.
5. BeginRetract Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code before the retract moves.
6. BeginRow Mill
This sequence describes the format for the beginning of each pass of a pocket cut or
the beginning of each pass on a bi-directional surface cut.
This can be used for water jet or laser machine tools. It can also be used for the high
speed machining function of a machine tool.
BeginRow
G91.1
F[Frate]
End
Related sequences: EndRow
7. BeginSideStep Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code before the side step moves.
8. BeginZLevel Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code before the Z level moves.
1338
9. Between Mill
This sequence defines any special code desired between the Subprogram and the
main program. This could be used to enter the code for the end of all subroutines on
the FADAL.
Between
M17
M30
End
The output code for this example:
X0 Y0
G91 G28 Z0
Subprogram end
M17
M30
O1234
Note
Main program beginning
See Subprogram Output, page 1403.
Related sequences: SubCall, SubStart, SubEnd

10. CcwCode Mill, Lathe, EDM
This code is used to format counterclockwise arcs that cannot be processed by the
CtrCode and CtrIncremental? commands. The ByQuadrants command is still
applicable to this sequence.
CcwCode
G3 X[h] Y[v] I[ival] J[jval] F[frate]
G299
End
The output code:
G3 X1. Y1. I-1. J0 F5.
G299
Related sequences: CwCode
11. CwCode Mill, Lathe, EDM
This code is used to format clockwise arcs that cannot be processed by the CtrCode
and CtrIncremental? commands. The ByQuadrants command is still applicable to this
sequence.
1339
CwCode
G2 X[h] Y[v] I[ival] J[jval] F[frate]
G199
End
The output code:
G3 X1. Y1. I-1. J0 F5.
G199
Related sequences: CcwCode
12. EdmCut EDM
This sequence adds G code to cut the wire in EDM operations.
13. EdmPreDrillThread EDM
This sequence adds G code that will predrill thread points in EDM operations.
14. EdmThread EDM
This sequence adds G code that will thread the wire in EDM operations.
15. EndCode Mill, Lathe
The EndCode sequence is used to format the end of the program. It can be used to
code the tool clearance move and a tool change to the program's first tool. It will also
contain the program end code, either an M2 or M30.
MILL
THE OUTPUT CODE
EndCode
G0 G90 G49
G0 G90 G49
M6 T[tool1]
M6 T1
X0 Y0
X0 Y0
M30
M30
%0
End
1340
LATHE
THE OUTPUT CODE
EndCode
M6 T[tool1]
M6 T1
G0 G90 G49
G0 G90 G49
E0 X0 Y0
E0 X0 Y0
M30
M30
16. EndLeadin Mill, Lathe, EDM

This sequence adds G code after the leadin moves.
17. EndLeadout Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code after the leadout moves.
18. EndPlunge Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code after the plunge moves.
19. EndRetract Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code after the retract moves.
20. EndRow Mill
This sequence describes the format for the end of each pass of a pocket cut or the
end of each pass on a bi-directional surface cut.
This can be used for water jet or laser machine tools. It can also be used for the high
speed machining function of a machine tool.
EndRow
G91.2
F[plunge]
End
Related sequences: BeginRow
21. EndSideStep Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code after the side step moves.
22. EndZLevel Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence adds G code after the Z level moves.
1341
23. Index Mill

The Index sequence replaces rapid moves whenever the CView changes for the cut.
Since this sequence replaces rapid motion, the example below indicates the three
functions that should be placed in the sequence.
INDEX
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 G28 G49 Z0
G0 G28 G49 Z0
G[work] X[h] Y[v] A[rotangle]
G54 X1. Y1. A90.
G43 H[lcomp] Z[d]
G43 H1 Z.1
End
Related sequences: UnWind
24. InFeed Mill, Lathe, EDM
The InFeed sequence is used to define the format for tool motion into the part. This
is usually used to define the moves to initiate cutter compensation.
InFeed
InFeed
G[side] X[h] Y[v] H[dcomp] F[frate] G[side] X[h] Y[v] H[dcomp] F[frate]
End
End
The output code for these examples:

G41 X1. Y1. H1 F5.
Note
The InFeed sequences can only be 1 block long for 4 axis Wire EDM.
Related sequences: OutFeed

25. LineCode Mill, Lathe
This sequence can be used to create non-standard linear moves.
LINECODE
THE OUTPUT CODE
G1 X[h] Y[v] Z[d]
G1 X1. Y1. Z.1
G499
G499
End
1342
26. OutFeed Mill, Lathe, EDM

This sequence is used to define the tool motion away from the part. This usually
consists of the moves to deactivate cutter compensation.
MILL
LATHE
OutFeed
OutFeed
G1 G40 X[h] Y[v] G1 G40 X[h] Y[v]

End
The output code for these examples:
G1 G40 X0 Y0
Note
The OutFeed sequences can only be 1 block long for 4 axis Wire EDM.
Related sequences: InFeed

27. RapidCode Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence is used to define a non-standard rapid code.
RapidCode
G0 X[h] Y[v] Z[d]
G399
End
The output code:
G0 X1. Y1. Z.1
G399
28. StartCode Mill, Lathe, EDM
This sequence is used to define the beginning lines of the program. They usually
contain a percent sign followed by the program number. The initializing modal G
codes can also be added.
MILL
StartCode
%0
# Output '%'
O[program#]
# Output an O and program #
G90 G80 G40 G17
# Output initializing G codes
End
1343
The output code:

%
O1234
G90 G80 G40 G17
LATHE
StartCode
%0
# Output '%'
O[Program#]
# Output an O and program #
G90 G80 G40 G17
# Output initializing G codes
End
The output code:
%
O1234
G90 G80 G40 G17
29. Stop EDM
This sequence is used to post the Stop variable, M00 or M01.
Stop
M[Stop]
End
30. SubCall Mill
This sequence defines the details of the Subprogram call in the main program.
SubCall
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
M98 P[sub] L[times]
End
The output code for this example follows. The P word is the Subprogram number
called. The L word is the number of repetitions for the Subprogram.
G1 X1. Y1.
M98 P1 L5
Note
Related sequences: Between, SubEnd, SubStart

1344
31. SubEnd Mill

This sequence defines the end of the Subprogram.
SubEnd
M99
End
The output code for this example follows. This code is placed at the end of the
Subprogram code by the post processor.
M99
Note
Related sequences: Between, SubCall, SubStart

32. SubmergeTank EDM
This sequence adds G code to fill the tank in EDM operations.
33. SubStart Mill
This sequence defines the beginning of the Subprogram.
SubStart
O[sub]
End
The output code for this example follows. This code is placed at the beginning of the
Subprogram by the post processor.
O1
Note
Related sequences: Between, SubCall, SubEnd

34. Thread G33 Lathe
For lathes that do NOT support AutoThread (G76 style) automatic threading cycles,
LPost calculates individual threading passes and output them (typically with G33
codes).
If the post contains THREAD G33 line AND an AutoThread sequence, AutoThread
will take precedence (LPost will output the AutoThread cycle and ignore the G33).
G33 X-1.44 Z-1.75 I0 F0.0625
X-1.4151
X-1.3961
X-1.38
1345
X-1.3658
X-1.353
X-1.3413
35. ToolChange Mill, Lathe
This sequence describes the format for all subsequent tool changes after the first tool
change. It usually contains the same format as the first tool change with the addition
of the move to the tool change position.
Mill
TOOLCHANGE
THE OUTPUT CODE
G49 G0 Z0 M9
G49 G0 Z0 M9
T[tool] M6
T1 M6
M[direct] S[speed] G0 X[h] Y[v]
M3 S2000 G0 X1. Y1.
G43 Z[d] H[lcomp]
G43 Z.1 H1
M[cool]
M7
End
Lathe
TOOLCHANGE
THE OUTPUT CODE
N[block] T[tool] M6
N100 T1 M6
M[direct] S[speed] G0 X[h] Y[v]
M3 S2000 G0 X1. Y1.
G43 Z[d] H[lcomp]
G43 Z.1 H1
M[cool]
M7
End
Related sequences: 1stToolChange
36. UnWind Mill
When the rotary axis is limited in travel, it may become necessary to unwind the axis
before continuing machining. This is accomplished with the Unwind sequence. It is
1346
used to lift the tool, unwind the axis, plunge into the part, and continue movement. The
sequence can be described as follows:
UNWIND
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 G28 G49 Z0
G0 G28 G49 Z0
G0 G90 A0
G0 G90 A0
G43 H[lcomp] Z[d]
G43 H1 Z.1
G0 X[lasth] Y[lastv] A[lastrotangle]
G0 X0 Y0 A90.
G1 Z[lastd]
G1 Z.1
End
Related sequences: Index
37. Upon Variable Mill
This sequence can be used to output specific code whenever a variable changes.
Each time the variable changes, the Upon sequence is called. It can also be used to
output a specific set of codes every time the variable is encountered. The example
below indicates the sequence to use when the Work variable is changed.
UPON [WORK]
THE OUTPUT CODE
G91 G28 Z0
G91 G28 Z0
G[work]
G55
X[h] Y[v] Z[d]
X1. Y1. Z.1
G90
G90
End
Note
When the variable does not change and the next line or sequence uses the
variable, this sequence is not output.
The example below is used every time the Tool variable is encountered by the post
processor.
Upon Every [tool]
G91 G28 Z0
G90
1347
End
The output code:
G91 G28 Z0
G90
22.11.2 Canned Cycles

You can create a series of blocks that will be repeated to do the same operation at
each point of the cycle. The definable canned cycles are listed below. These cycles
can be used as a Machine cycle, an Emulated cycle, or an Advanced cycle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
AutoThread p. 1349
Back p. 1350
Bore p. 1351
Cancel p. 1353
CanThread p. 1354
Custom1 p. 1354
Custom2 p. 1354
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Custom3 p. 1354
Drill p. 1355
LTap p. 1357
Peck p. 1358
Ream p. 1361
Tap p. 1363
Thread G33 p. 1364
The three Custom cycles can be used to modify an existing machine tool cycle to
enhance the machine capabilities. These cycles are user defined and can be single
or multiple line sequences.
Machine cycles
Canned cycles can be used to access the machine's built-in canned cycles or to
create user defined cycles. When a machine canned cycle is accessed, the Cancel
code should be used to stop execution of the machine cycle.
Note
This is accomplished by entering Cancel at the end of the End line in the
canned cycle sequence. See Cancel Mill, Lathe, page 1353.
This example uses the Drill sequence to access a machine drill cycle.
Drill
G81 X[h] Y[v] Z[d] R[vclear] F[frate]
End Cancel
The output code:
G81 X1. Y1. Z-.5 R.1 F5.
X2. Y3.
X3. Y4.
1348
G80
Emulated cycles
When built-in machine code is not used, the cycles can include any desired code that
is to be repeated at each location. Since these cycles are not built-in canned cycles,
the machine tool does not require a Cancel code. Define a straight drilling cycle by
describing the Drill sequence as follows:
Drill
G0 X[h] Y[v] Z[rplane]
# Rapid to position RPlane.
Z[vclear]
# Rapid down to clearance.
G1 Z[d] F[plunge]
# Feed down to bottom.
G0 Z[rplane]
# Rapid out to Rplane level.
End
The output code:
G0 X1. Y1. Z.2
Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
G0 Z.2
G0 X2. Y3. Z.2
Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
G0 Z.2
G0 X3. Y4. Z.2
Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
G0 Z.2
Advanced cycles
You can control the number of lines to output for the first location and subsequent
locations. You can output setup moves for the cycles and repeat only the moves
necessary at each location. This is accomplished by placing a number after the cycle
sequence name.
1349
This example uses the Advanced cycle method to define a specific output for the first
drill location while outputting less code for the subsequent locations.
Back 3
# Initial Cycle.
F[frate]
G306 Z0
G308 Z[d]
G323 P.5
# Secondary cycles.
G85 X[h] Y[v]

End Cancel
The output code:
F5.
G306 Z0
G308 Z-.5
G323 P.5
G85 X1. Y1.
G323 P.5
G85 X2. Y3.
G323 P.5
G85 X3. Y4.
G80
1. AutoThread Lathe
This cycle is used for the Lathe automatic threading cycles.

AutoThread
G76 A[tparams] Q[vbite] R0
G76 X[v] Z[h] P[peck1] Q[vleave] R0 F[frate]
End
The sequence below is for the Fanuc OT control.
p[v] Z[h] R[startang] P[depth] q[peck1] F[frate]
End
1350
These cycles require the use of additional letter formats. Listed below are samples of
the letter formats required for these cycles.
I->3.>4
# Arc centers and <taper> value.
A010360
# Used for <tparams> in G76 cycle.
P ->34
# Depth of first threading pass.
Q ->3.>4
# Used for minimum depth of threading pass.
F >3.>6
# Check number of places of trailing

# decimal for accurate threading.
2. Back bore Mill

This cycle is used to feed the boring tool in and out of the hole.
Machine cycle
BACK
THE OUTPUT CODE
G87 X1. Y1. Z-.5 R.1 F5.
End Cancel
X2. Y3.
X3. Y4.
G80
Emulated cycle
BACK
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 X[h] Y[v]
G0 X1. Y1.
Z[rplane]
Z.1
G1 Z[d]F[plunge]
G1 Z-.5 F5.
G0 Z[rplane]
G0 Z.1
End Cancel
G0 X2. Y3.
Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
BACK
1351
THE OUTPUT CODE

G0 Z.1
G0 X3. Y4.
Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
G0 Z.1
Advanced cycle
BACK 4
# INITIAL CYCLE.
THE OUTPUT CODE
F[frate]
F5.
G306 Z0
G306 Z0
G308 Z[d]
G308 Z-.5
G323 P.5
# Secondary cycles.
G323 P.5
G85 X[h] Y[v]
G85 X1. Y1.
End Cancel
G85 X2. Y3.

G85 X3. Y4.
G80
3. Bore Mill, Lathe

This cycle is used for a standard boring cycle. The tool is feed to the hole depth, then
rapids to the clearance plane.
Machine cycle
BORE
THE OUTPUT CODE
G86 X1. Y1. Z-.5 R.1 F5.
End Cancel
X2. Y3.
1352
BORE
THE OUTPUT CODE

X3. Y4.
G80
Emulated cycle
BORE
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 X[h] Y[v]
G0 X1. Y1.
Z[rplane]
Z.1
G1 Z[d]F[plunge]
G1 Z-.5 F5.
Z[rplane]
Z.1
End Cancel
G0 X2. Y3.
Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
Z.1
G0 X3. Y4.
Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
Z.1
Advanced cycle
BACK 4
# INITIAL CYCLE.
THE OUTPUT CODE
F[frate]
F5.
G306 Z0
G306 Z0
G308 Z[d]
G308 Z-.5
G323 P.5
# Secondary Cycles.
G323 P.5
G85 X[h] Y[v]
G85 X1. Y1.
End Cancel
G85 X2. Y3.
BACK 4
# INITIAL CYCLE.
1353
THE OUTPUT CODE

G85 X3. Y4.
G80
4. Cancel Mill, Lathe

This command is used to describe how a canned cycle is canceled. Usually a single
line with a G80 is used.
Cancel
G80
End
Drill
G81 G99 R[vclear] Z[d] X[h] Y[v] F[frate]
End Cancel
The output code for this example follows when a machine cycle is used. The Cancel
code is entered on the End line of the canned cycle sequence.
G81 G99 R.1 Z-.5 X1. Y1. F5.
X2. Y3.
X3. Y4.
G80
When the Cancel code is not entered on the End line of the single line sequence, the
line is repeated for each location.
This example shows the same code without the Cancel sequence used.
Drill
G81 G99 R[vclear] Z[d] X[h] Y[v] F[frate]
End
The output code:
G81 G99 R.1 Z-.5 X1. Y1. F5.
G81 G99 R.1 Z-.5 X2. Y3. F5.
G81 G99 R.1 Z-.5 X3. Y4. F5.
1354
5. CanThread Lathe
You can put this sequence in your template instead of the AutoThread sequence.
CanThread 1
G92 Z[H] X[V] I[Taper] F[FRate]
X[V]
End
Note
The 1 means 1 line starts the cycle.
6. Custom1 Mill, Lathe

The above commands are used to describe a machine's canned cycle that is not
defined by the other available canned cycles. The example used, is a standard Peck
cycle for the FADAL machine tool while the G83 cycle is a deep hole cycle.
When the Custom cycles are coded, you can enter a comment on the sequence name
line to identify the cycle type. This comment must be a minimum of three spaces after
the sequence name.
Machine cycle
CUSTOM1
THE OUTPUT CODE
G73 X[h] Y[v] Z[d] Q[vbite] R[vclear]

F[frate]
G73 X1. Y1. Z-.5 Q.2 R.1 F5.
End Cancel
X2. Y3.
X3. Y4.
G80
Emulated cycle
CUSTOM1
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 X1. Y1. Z.2
Z[vclear]
Z.1
G1 Z[d] F[plunge]
G1 Z-.5 F5.
CUSTOM1
1355
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 Z[rplane]
G0 Z.2
End
G0 X2. Y3. Z.2

Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
G0 Z.2
G0 X3. Y4. Z.2
Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
G0 Z.2
Advanced cycle
CUSTOM1
# INITIAL CYCLE.
G83 G99 R[vclear] Z[d] X[h] Y[v]

F[frate]
Z[d] R[vclear] X[h] Y[v].
THE OUTPUT CODE

G83 G99 R.1 Z-.5 X1.
Y1. F5.
# Secondary
Cycles.
End Cancel
Z-.5 R.1 X2. Y3.

Z-.5 R.1 X3. Y4.
G80
9. Drill Mill, Lathe

The Drill sequence describes the straight drilling cycle the machine tool uses. This
code is usually coded as a G81 cycle.
Machine cycle
DRILL
THE OUTPUT CODE

G81 X1. Y1. Z-.5 R.1 F5.
1356
DRILL
End Cancel
THE OUTPUT CODE

X2. Y3.
X3. Y4.
G80
Emulated cycle
DRILL
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 X1. Y1. Z.2
Z[vclear]
Z.1
G1 Z[d] F[plunge]
G1 Z-.5 F5.
G0 Z[rplane]
G0 Z.2
End
G0 X2. Y3. Z.2

Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
G0 Z.2
G0 X3. Y4. Z.2
Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
G0 Z.2
Advanced cycle
DRILL 1
# INITIAL CYCLE.

Z[d] R[vclear] X[h] Y[v]
THE OUTPUT CODE

G81 X1. Y1. Z-.5 R.1
F5.
# Secondary Cycles. Z-.5 R.1 X2. Y3.
End Cancel
Z-.5 R.1 X3. Y4.

G80
10. LTap Mill

This cycle is used for left hand threading.
Machine cycle
LTAP
THE OUTPUT CODE
G74 X[h] Y[v] Z[d] R[vclear] F[speed] Q[vbite]
G74 X1. Y1. Z-.5 R.1 F5. Q.2
End Cancel
X2. Y3.
X3. Y4.
G80
1357
Emulated cycle
LTAP
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 X1. Y1. Z.4
G1 Z[d] F[frate]
G1 Z-.5 F5.
Z[rplane]
Z.4
End
G0 X2. Y3. Z.4

G1 Z-.5 F5.
Z.4
1358
LTAP
THE OUTPUT CODE

G0 X3. Y4. Z.4
G1 Z-.5 F5.
Z.4
Advanced cycle
LTAP 6
# INITIAL CYCLE.
THE OUTPUT CODE
F[frate]
F5.
G300 P[rplane]
G300 P.1
G306 Z0
G306 Z0
G308 Z[d]
G308 Z-.5
G323 P.5
G323 P.5
G84
G84
X[h] Y[v]
X1. Y1.
End Cancel
X2. Y3.
X3. Y4.
G80
11. Peck Mill, Lathe

This cycle is used to break the drill chips. It is often referred to as a deep hole drilling
cycle. It can be either a G73 or G83 code. Check the machine tool specification for
the proper cycle codes.
1359
Machine cycle
PECK
THE OUTPUT CODE
G83 X[h] Y[v] Z[d] Q[vbite] R[vclear]

F[frate]
G83 X1. Y1. Z-.5 Q.2 R.1 F5.
End Cancel
X2. Y3.
X3. Y4.
G80
Emulated Cycle
When the machine tool does not have a Peck drilling cycle, the following example can
be used to create this cycle. The post processor will automatically output the Feed
and Rapid moves to synthesize a Peck drilling cycle. The moves output by this cycle
are defined by the FeedCode, Feed, and Rapid commands in the POSTFORM file.
Typically the FeedCode command identifies the feedrate moves with the letter F. The
Feed command identifies the feed move as being a G1 and the Rapid identifies the
rapid moves as being G0. These can be changed by you as the machine tool requires.
During the cycle the tool is moved at rapid motion to .05 of the last drill depth. Then
the feed motion begins.
Peck
None
End
The output below shows this cycle output for two holes .375 deep with a .125 Peck
increment.
%
O1
M6 T1 ( Tool Diam: 0.0625
G0 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X3.4875 Y5.3
H1 M7 Z1.
G0 Z0.1
G1 Z-0.025 F20.
G0 Z0.1
Z0.025
1360
G1 Z-0.15
G0 Z0.1
Z-0.1
G1 Z-0.275
G0 Z0.1
Z-0.225
G1 Z-0.375
G0 Z1.
X4.8875 Y5.1875
Z0.1
G1 Z-0.025 F20.
G0 Z0.1
Z0.025
G1 Z-0.15
G0 Z0.1
Z-0.1
G1 Z-0.275
G0 Z0.1
Z-0.225
G1 Z-0.375
G0 Z1.
X4.9 Y4.425
Z0.1
G1 Z-0.025 F20.
G0 Z0.1
Z0.025
G1 Z-0.15
G0 Z0.1
Z-0.1
G1 Z-0.275
G0 Z0.1
1361
Z-0.225
G1 Z-0.375
G0 Z1.
M5 M9
G0 G49 G90 Z0
E0 X0 Y0
M6 T1
M2
%
Advanced cycle
PECK 6
# INITIAL CYCLE.
THE OUTPUT CODE
F[frate]
F5.
G300 P[rplane]
G300 P.1
G306 Z0
G306 Z0
G307 U[vbite]
G307 U.125
G308 Z[d]
G308 Z-.5
G83
G83
X[h] Y[v]
# Secondary cycles.
End Cancel
X1. Y1.
X2. Y3.
X3. Y4.
G80
12. Ream Mill, Lathe

This cycle is used for a standard reaming cycle. The tool feeds in and out of the hole.
1362
Machine cycle
REAM
THE OUTPUT CODE
G85 X1. Y1. Z-.5 R.1 F5.
End Cancel
X2. Y3.
X3. Y4.
G80
Emulated cycle
REAM
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 X1. Y1. Z.1
G1 Z[d] F[frate]
G1 Z-.5 F5.
Z[rplane]
Z.1
End
G0 X2. Y3. Z.1

G1 Z-.5 F5.
Z.1
G0 X3. Y4. Z.1
G1 Z-.5 F5.
Z.1
1363
Advanced cycle
REAM 4
# INITIAL CYCLE.
THE OUTPUT CODE
F[frate]
F5.
G306 Z0
G306 Z0
G308 Z[d]
G308 Z-.5
G323 P.5
G323 P.5
G85 X[h] Y[v]
# Secondary cycles
End Cancel
G85 X1. Y1.

G85 X2. Y3.
G85 X3. Y4.
G80
13. Tap Mill, Lathe

This cycle is used for the tapping sequence. It can be used for a self-reversing or
tension compression tap holder.
Machine cycle
TAP
THE OUTPUT CODE
G84 X[h] Y[v] Z[d] R[vclear] F[speed]

Q[vbite]
G84 X1. Y1. Z-.5 R.1 F5. Q.2
End Cancel
X2. Y3.
G80
Advanced cycle
TAP 6
# INITIAL CYCLE.
THE OUTPUT CODE
F[frate]
F5.
G300 P[rplane]
G300 P.1
1364
TAP 6
# INITIAL CYCLE.
THE OUTPUT CODE
G306 Z0
G306 Z0
G308 Z[d]
G308 Z-.5
G323 P.5
G323 P.5
G84
G84
X[h] Y[v]
# Secondary cycles
End Cancel
X1. Y1.
X2. Y3.
G80
14. Thread G33 Lathe

Use this command to get the long-hand code. With the long-hand code, the post
calculates all of the separate movements for the threads.
Thread G33
Note
22.12
The Thread G33 command is not a sequence and does not need an End
line.
VARIABLES
In many of the sample sequences, variables must be used to indicate numerical values
for the post to insert into the NC program. These variables can be used in the same way
the Feed, Rapid, Cw, and Ccw lines are described above.
A variable is a word or letter that takes the place of a number. These variables indicate
information that is pertinent to machine motion. An X value on a mill generally indicates
a horizontal position so we simply abbreviate it as the letter h. The letter h is the variable
that indicates horizontal position. The code X[h] indicates that you want the X to appear
followed by the value of the current horizontal position.
1365
The following is a list of the variable names, and the values to which they refer, that can
be used instead of numbers when describing the sequences. Remember to enclose any
values or variables between square bracket symbols, for example R[arcrad]. These
symbols act as delimiters and are not output in the NC code.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
arcrad p. 1366
block p. 1367
chams p. 1367
comp p. 1367
cool p. 1367
coolantoff p. 1368
d p. 1368
dcomp p. 1368
ddist p. 1368
depth p. 1369
direct p. 1369
dwell p. 1369
endang p. 1369
feedtype p. 1370
flood p. 1370
frate p. 1370
gauge p. 1370
h p. 1370
h2 p. 1371
hcdc p. 1371
hctr p. 1371
hdist p. 1371
homeh p. 1371
homev p. 1372
hvector p. 1372
incmode p. 1372
inidep p. 1373
initpower p. 1373
invtime p. 1373
ival p. 1373
47. peck1 p. 1378

48. pecks p. 1379
49. pitch p. 1379
50. plunge p. 1379
51. pointd p. 1379
52. power p. 1379
53. retplane p. 1379
54. rigid p. 1380
55. rotangle p. 1380
56. rotaxdir p. 1381
57. rplane p. 1381
58. sbite p. 1381
59. sclear p. 1381
60. side p. 1381
61. sleave p. 1382
62. sparkgap p. 1382
63. speed p. 1382
64. speedtype p. 1382
65. startang p. 1382
66. stop p. 1383
67. sub p. 1383
68. subline p. 1383
69. sweep p. 1383
70. taper p. 1384
71. thickness p. 1384
72. times p. 1384
73. tipang p. 1384
74. tool p. 1384
75. tool1 p. 1385
76. tparams p. 1385
Global Variables
1366
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
ivect p. 1374
jval p. 1373
jvect p. 1374
kvect p. 1374
lastd p. 1375
lasth p. 1375
lasthole p. 1375
lastrotang p. 1376
lasttool p. 1376
lastv p. 1377
lcomp p. 1377
lowerdist p. 1378
movelength p. 1378
movetime p. 1378
nexttool p. 1378
passes p. 1378
turret p. 1385
unitmode p. 1386
upperdist p. 1386
v p. 1386
v2 p. 1386
val1 - 10 p. 1386
vbite p. 1387
vcdc p. 1387
vclear p. 1387
vctr p. 1387
vdist p. 1388
vgauge p. 1388
vleave p. 1388
vvector p. 1388
wirefeed p. 1389
Global Variables
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
endh p. 1389
endv p. 1389
maxrpm p. 1389
program# p. 1390
toold p. 1390
toolh p. 1390
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
toolv p. 1391
work p. 1391
workd p. 1391
workh p. 1391
workv p. 1392
Prompted Variables
1.
corner p. 1392
22.13
2.
tooldiam p. 1392
Tool Comment Variables
3.
GLOBAL VARIABLES
1. arcrad Mill, Lathe, EDM

This variable outputs the radius of the arc.
CwCode
G11 I[ival] J[jval] R[arcrad] C[startang]
G12 C[endang]
toolrad p. 1392
1367
End
Related Variables: endang, startang
2. block Mill, Lathe, EDM
A Block number is output for this variable. It is incremented according to the Sequence#s
line. See Block Number Output, page 1408.
N[block] T[tool] M6
G0 G90 S[speed] M[direct]
X[h] Y[v]
3. chams Lathe
This variable identifies the number of thread to cut for the taper out move.
Related Variables: passes, tipang, tparams
4. comp Lathe
This variable outputs a Lathe compensated T number.
1stToolChange
O[comp] G90 S[speed] M42
G[feedtype] M31
G92 S[maxrpm]
G0 X.4 Z.4
M[direct]
V77 T[tool] M6
G0 X[v] Z[h] M32
G[speedtype] R[v] S[speed]
End
5. cool Mill, Lathe, EDM
The Coolant value, defined by the Coolant command for on, off, or mist is output for this
variable.
ToolChange
M5 M9
M6 T[tool]
G0 G90 S[speed] M[direct] E[work] X[h] Y[v]
H[lcomp] M[cool] Z[d]
1368
End
Related Variables: coolantoff
6. coolantoff Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs a coolant off command as defined by the Coolant command.
ToolChange
M5 M[coolantoff]
G0 G49 G90 Z0
E0 X0 Y0
M6 T[tool1]
M2
Related Variables: cool
7. d Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs the current depth value.
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
End
Related Variables: h, v, endh, endv, homeh, homev, lastd, lasth, lastv
8. dcomp Mill, Lathe
This outputs the Diameter compensation offset number. It is used when cutter
compensation is desired in the NC program.
Infeed
H[lcomp] D[dcomp] Z[d]
G1 G[side] X[h] Y[v] F[frate]
End
Related Variables: hcdc, vcdc, lcomp
9. ddist Mill
This variable outputs the distance the depth axis moves during the current move. This
variable is not specifically coded in the POSTFORM file.
Related Variables: hdist, vdist.
1369
10. depth Mill, Lathe, EDM

This variable outputs the depth of the upcoming cycle for milling machines and the total
depth of thread for lathes.
AutoThread
G76 X[v] Z[h] R[startang] P[depth] q[peck1] F[frate]
End
11. direct Mill, Lathe, EDM
The M code value of the Spindle direction is output with this variable. The value is defined
by the CW and CCW commands.
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
End
12. dwell Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs the Dwell value.
Drill 3
S0
Z[d]
X[h] Y[v] G81
L2 M61
G4 P[dwell]
L2 M62
G4 P[dwell]
End
13. endang Mill, Lathe, EDM
The ending angle of an arc is output for this variable.
CwCode
G11 I[ival] J[jval] R[arcrad] C[startang]
G12 C[endang]
1370
End
Related Variables: arcrad, lastrotang, rotangle, startang
14. feedtype Mill, Lathe, EDM
The G code for IPR and IPM output that is set with the FeedType command is output for
this variable.
1stToolChange
G[feedtype] M31
G92 S[maxrpm]
G0 X.4 Z.4
M[direct]
V77 T[tool] M6
G0 X[v] Z[h] M32
End
Related Variables: frate, plunge.
15. flood EDM
This variable is similar to the cool variable. The options are low, off, medium, and high.
16. frate Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs the Feed Rate value.
Drill
G81 G99 R[vclear] Z[d] F[frate] X[h] Y[v]
End Cancel
Related Variables: feedtype, plunge
17. gauge Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the Z axis gauge length for both mills and lathes.
18. h Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs the current horizontal value.
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
1371

End
Related Variables: d, v, endh, ednv, homeh, homev, lastd, lasth, lastv
19. h2 EDM
This variable outputs the current horizontal value for the auxiliary second plane.
Related Variables: v2
20. hcdc Mill
This variable outputs the horizontal component of the cutter diameter compensation
vector for older machine tools.
Linecode
G79 X[h] Y[v] E0 H0 P[hcdc] Q[vcdc] F[frate]
End
Related Variables: dcomp, lcomp, vcdc
21. hctr Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs the absolute horizontal center value of an arc.
CwCode
c0 I[hctr] J[vctr] K[d]
I0.0 J0.0 K1.0
x[h] y[v] z[d]
End
Related Variables: vctr.
22. hdist Mill
This variable outputs the horizontal distance the axis moves during the current move.
This variable is not specifically coded in the POSTFORM file.
Related Variables: ddist, vdist
23. homeh Mill, Lathe
The horizontal home position for Lathes is output for this variable.
EndCode
G0 X[homeh] Z[homev] T[tool] t0 M5
M30
%0
1372
End
Related Variables: d, h, v, endh, endv, homev, lastd, lasth, lastv
24. homev Mill, Lathe
The vertical home position for Lathes is output for this variable.
EndCode
G0 X[homeh] Z[homev] T[tool] t0 M5
M30
%0
End
Related Variables: d, h, v, endh, endv, homeh, lastd, lasth, lastv
25. hvector Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs the horizontal vector direction of the first completely compensated
cutting move. It is used on machines that do not have look ahead ability to indicate
which way the tool is going to go on the move after the infeed.
Infeed
G1 X[h] Y[v] F[frate]
G91
G1 A[hvector] B[vvector]
G[side] I[hvector] J[vvector] D[dcomp]
G90
G86 R-.1 Z[d] F[plunge] D[lcomp]
F[frate]
End
The following example shows the use of this variable for the AGIE EDM machine tool.
Infeed
G1 x[hvector] y[vvector] G44
G1 X[h] Y[v] G40
End
Related Variables: vvector
26. incmode Mill, Lathe, EDM
The incremental code defined by the Inc/Abs command is output for this variable.
1373
ToolChange
M5 M9
G0 G49 G[incmode] Z0
M6 T[tool]
G0 G[incmode] S[speed] M[direct] E[work] X[h] Y[v]
End
27. inidep Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable is the initial depth where cutting begins.
ToolChange
M5 M9
G0 G49 G90 Z0
M6 T[tool]
G0 G90 S[speed] M[direct] X[h] Y[v]
G83 R[vclear] z[inidep] F[frate] Q[vbite] X[h] Y[v]
G80
End
Related Variables: plunge, rplane
28. initpower EDM
This is the value entered in the Init'l Power field.
29. invtime Lathe
This variable outputs the inverse time for 4 axis motion. Check the machine manual to
determine the correct letter format to use for the InvTime variable. Not all machine tools
use the letter F. Some machine tools may also require the use of the G93 code.
LineCode
G1 X[h] Y[v] Z[d] F[InvTime]
End
Related Variables: movelength, movetime
30. ival Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs the X axis coordinates of the center of an arc. The incremental or
absolute output is determined by the CtrIncremental? command.
1374
CcwCode
F[frate]
X[h] Y[v] I[ival] J[jval]
End
Related Variables: ivect, jval, jvect, kvect
31. ivect Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable is used to describe the normal X axis vectors for 3D cutter compensation
used by some machines. They can be added to a LineCode sequence as follows:
LineCode
G1 X[h] Y[v] Z[d] I[ivect] J[jvect] K[kvect] F[frate]
End
Related Variables: ival, jval, jvect, kvect
Note
Requires SURFCAM 5 axis.
32. jval Mill, Lathe, EDM

This variable outputs the Y axis coordinates of the center of an arc. The incremental or
absolute output is determined by the CtrIncremental? command.
CcwCode
F[frate]
X[h] Y[v] I[ival] J[jval]
End
Related Variables: ival, ivect, jvect, kvect
33. jvect Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable is used to describe the normal Y axis vectors for 3D cutter compensation
LineCode
G1 X[h] Y[v] Z[d] I[ivect] J[jvect] K[kvect] F[frate]
End
Related Variables: ival, ivect, jval, kvect
Note
Requires SURFCAM 5 axis.
34. kvect Mill, Lathe, EDM

This variable is used to describe the normal Z axis vectors for 3D cutter compensation
LineCode
G1 X[h] Y[v] I[ivect] J[jvect] K[kvect] F[frate]
End
Related Variables: ival, ivect, jval, jvect.
Note
Requires SURFCAM 5 axis
35. lastd Mill, Lathe, EDM

The position of the last depth move is output for this variable.
UnWind
G0 G49 G90 Z0
A0
E[work]
G0 X[lasth] Y[lastv] A[lastrotang]
G1 Z[lastd]
End
Related Variables: d, h, v, endh, endv, homeh, homev, lasth, lastv
36. lasth Mill, Lathe, EDM
The position of the last horizontal move is output for this variable.
UnWind
G0 G49 G90 Z0
A0
E[work]
G1 Z[lastd]
End
Related Variables: d, h, v, endh, endv, homeh, homev, lastd, lastv
37. lasthole Mill, Lathe
Some controls require a M99 at the end of a drilling cycle rather then a G80.
1375
1376
Heidenhain 2500B is similar to a Fanuc G80 but the M99 must be on the same line as
the last X, Y, or it drills the hole twice. The [LastHole] variable that gets set to 1 if the hole
currently being processed is the last one in the cycle. (Otherwise, it's set to 0.)
This variable can be used inside any canned cycle to differentiate between the last hole
and all others.
Following is an example of the changes needed in the postform file:
Drill 2
# Drilling canned/manual cycle
if [LastHole] = 1
G<81> X<H> Y<V> Z<D> R<Vclear> F<FRate>
M99
else
G<81> X<H> Y<V> Z<D> R<Vclear> F<FRate>
endif
if [LastHole] = 1
X<H> Y<V> Z<D> R<Vclear> F<FRate> M99
else
X<H> Y<V> Z<D> R<Vclear> F<FRate>
Endif
38. lastrotang Mill
This variable outputs the previous rotary axis position.
UnWind
G0 G49 G90 Z0
A0
E[work]
G1 Z[lastd]
End
Related Variables: arcrad, endang, rotangle, startang, sweep
39. lasttool Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the tool number of the previous tool.
UnWind
G0 G49 G90 Z0
A0
E[work]
G1 Z[lastd]
M6 T[lasttool]
End
Related Variables: nexttool, tool, tool1.
40. lastv Mill, Lathe, EDM
The position of the last vertical move is output for this variable
UnWind
G0 G49 G90 Z0
A0
E[work]
G1 Z[lastd]
End
Related Variables: d, h, v, endh, endv, homeh, homev, lastd, lasth
41. lcomp Mill
This variable outputs the length compensation offset number. It is output for milling
machines only.
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
End
Related Variables: dcomp, hcdc, vcdc
1377
1378
42. lowerdist EDM

This is the distance from the bottom of the part to the lower guide.
43. movelength Lathe
This variable outputs the total chordal length of the current move. It does not consider
the 4 axis motion, it is the difference in location from the start location to the end location
of the axis position. This code is not specifically coded in the POSTFORM file.
Related Variables: movetime, InvTime
44. movetime Lathe
This variable determines the amount of time the machine should require to execute the
current movement. It is equal to the movelength value divided by the frate value. This
code is not specifically coded in the POSTFORM file.
Related Variables: movelength, InvTime
45. nexttool Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the tool number of the next tool to be used. This can be used to
index the tool changer before the next tool change.
1stToolChange
M6
X[h] Y[v]
G43 H[lcomp] Z[d] T[nexttool]
M[cool]
End
Related Variables: lasttool, tool, tool1
46. passes Lathe
This variable identifies the number of spring passes for thread cutting.
Related Variables: chams, tipang, tparams
47. peck1 Lathe
This is the depth of the first thread pass for the G76 cycle. It is used for Lathes only.
AutoThread
End
1379
Related Variables: pecks

48. pecks Mill
This variable outputs the number of pecks to use.
Drill
G81 Y[h] T[v] Z[d] z[pecks]
End Cancel
Related Variables: peck1
49. pitch Mill, Lathe
This is the number of threads per unit.
50. plunge Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the plunge feed rate value.
1stToolChange
G90 M[direct] S[speed]
G80 T[tool] M06
G86 R-0001 Z[d] F[plunge] D[lcomp]
End
Related Variables: inidep, rplane
51. pointd Mill
This variable is used when the machine tool requires the hole depth to be described from
the surface of the part.
Drill
G81 X[h] Y[v] Z[pointd] R[vclear] F[frate]
End Cancel
Related Variables: d
52. power EDM
This is the value entered in the Power Setting field.
53. retplane Lathe, Mill
Return Plane Variable sets the value defined by the RetractPlane command for output
in the NCC code (Drilling Cycles).
Drill
1380
G81 G[RetPlane] X[H] Y[V] ...

end
- G98 when the tool should rapid at the (higher) initial plane (the post's [RPlane] level),
or
- a G99 when the tool should rapid at the (lower) rapid level (the post's [VClear] level).
54. rigid Mill, Lathe
SURFCAM posts sets to the value of 1 during a rigid tapping cycle. During any other
cycle, [Rigid] is set to 0. Use an IF line to detect rigid tapping and output the appropriate
code(s) in the TAP and CANCEL sequences.
Tap
If [Rigid] > 0
G93 G93 to lock Z to spindle rotation.
G84 X[H] Y[V] Z[D] K[VBite] J0 R[VClear] F[FRate]
else
G84 X[H] Y[V] Z[D] R[VClear] F[FRate]
Normal (non-rigid) tap.
endif
end cancel
Note
The [Rigid] variable is not reset until the start of the next cycle, it can be used
in the CANCEL sequence as well as the TAP sequence.
cancel
G80
if [Rigid] > 0
G94
Unlock Z if w/ rigid tap.
endif
end
55. rotangle Mill
The rotary angle position in degrees is output for this variable.
Index X
G0 G49 G90 Z0
X[h] Y [v] E[val1] A[rotangle]
H[comp] M[cool] Z[d]
End
1381
Related Variables: arcrad, endang, lastrotang, startang, sweep

56. rotaxdir Mill
This variable reports the direction of 4 axis moves, CCW motion reports '1' & CW motion
reports '-1'.
57. rplane Mill
This variable outputs the Z dimension of the Rapid Plane for milling machines only.
Drill 3
H[lcomp] M[cool] Z[rplane]
G81 Z[d] R[vclear] F[frate]
X[h] Y[v]
End
Related Variables: inidep, rplane
58. sbite Mill, Lathe
This is the Side cut amount output.
Peck
G74 R[depth]
G74 Z[h] Q[sbite] F[frate]
End
Related Variables: sclear, sleave, vbite, vclear, vleave
59. sclear Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the Side Clearance amount.
Back
G76 G99 R[vclear] z[d] F[frate] Q[sclear] X[h] Y[v]
End Cancel
Related Variables: sbite, sleave, vbite, vclear, vleave
60. side Mill, Lathe, EDM
The Cutter compensation side value is output for this variable. It is determined by the
DComp command entered in the POSTFORM file.
Infeed
G1 G[side] X[h] Y[v] F[frate]
End
1382
61. sleave Mill, Lathe

This variable outputs the Side Leave amount.
Outfeed
G1 G40 X[sleave] Y[sleave] F[frate]
End
Related Variables: sbite, sclear, vbite, vclear, vleave
62. sparkgap EDM
This is the value entered in the Spark gap field.
63. speed Mill, Lathe, EDM
The Spindle speed value is output for this variable.
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
End
Related Variables: speedtype
64. speedtype Lathe
This is the Speed code defined by the SpeedType command. This variable is for Lathe
machines only.
1stToolChange
G[feedtype] M31
G92 S[maxrpm]
G0 X.4 Z.4 M[direct]
V77 T[tool] M6
G0 X[v] Z[h] M32
End
Related Variables: speed, maxrpm
65. startang Mill, Lathe
This outputs the Starting Angle of an arc.
1383
AutoThread
End
Related Variables: arcrad, endang, lastrotang, rotangle, sweep
66. stop EDM
Stop codes, M0 or M1, are placed at the end of the first cutting pass and at the end of
the tab cutting pass.
67. sub Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the Subprogram number.
SubCall
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
M[98] P[sub] L[times]
End
Related Variables: subline, times
68. subline Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the N number for the Subprogram.
SubCall
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
M98 P[subline] L[times]
End
Related Variables: sub, times
69. sweep Mill, Lathe, EDM
This is used to output the span of an arc. It is measured in degrees. This is typically used
with the CcwCode and CwCode sequences. The value output for clockwise arcs is
negative; use the MULT modifier or RevSign to reverse the output when required.
CwCode
I[hctr] J[vctr]
C2 A[sweep]
End
Related Variables: arcrad, endang, lastrotang, rotangle, startang
1384
70. taper Lathe, EDM

This is the value entered in the Taper field.
It is the difference in height at the start and end of the thread. It is usually an I value.
Lathe example:
AutoThread
G76 A[tparams] Q[vbite] I[taper] R0
End
EDM example:
LineCode
G1 X[H] Y[V] A[taper]
End
71. thickness EDM
This is the thickness of the material being cut.
72. times Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the number of repetitions for the Subprogram.
SubCall
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
End
Related Variables: sub, subline
73. tipang Lathe
This variable identifies the angle on the cutting tool.
Related Variables: passes, chams, tparams
74. tool Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the current Tool number.
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
End
1385
Related Variables: lasttool, nexttool, tool1

75. tool1 Mill, Lathe
This is the tool number of the first tool in the program. It is usually referenced in the
EndCode section to return the turret to tool position number one at the end of the
program.
EndCode
M5 M9
G0 G49 G90 Z0
E0 X0 Y0
M6 T[tool1]
M2
%0
End
Related Variables: lasttool, nexttool, tool
76. tparams Lathe
This is a six digit code containing three parameters that consist of two digits each. These
digits are defined in the following example:
A010360
A
Identifies the axis letter designation.
01
Identifies the number of spring passes.
03
Identifies the number of threads to cut for the taper out move.
60
Identifies the angle on the cutting tool. This is a 60 degree tool.

AutoThread
End
Related Variables: chams, passes, tipang

77. turret Lathe
The number of the currently active turret. This variable is for Lathe only.
ToolChange
G0 T[lasttool] t0 Z[h] M5
D[turret]
1386
T[tool] t0
G[feedtype] G[speedtype] S[speed] M[direct]
G0 X[v] Z[h] T[tool] t[lcomp] M[cool]
End
78. unitmode Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs the value for the G code defined by the Inch/MM command.
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]([0] d[toolrad] e[tooldiam] f[corner]
G0 G[unitmode] G90 S[speed] M[direct]
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
End
79. upperdist EDM
This is the distance from the top of the part to the upper guide.
80. v Mill, Lathe, EDM
The current Vertical value is output.
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
End
Related Variables: d, h, endh, endv, homeh, homev, lastd, lasth, lastv
81. v2 EDM
This variable outputs the current vertical value for the auxiliary second plane.
Related Variables: h2
82. val1 - 10 Mill, Lathe, EDM
These values are defined by the Ask command.
Index X
Ask [val1] "Enter the fixture offset number?" "1"
G0 G49 G90 Z0
X[h] Y[v] E[val1] A[rotangle]
1387

End
83. vbite Mill, Lathe
This is the Vertical cut amount for vmilling machines. This variable also describes the
minimum depth of the G76 threading cycle for Lathe.
LTap
G74 G99 R[vclear] Z[d] F[frate] Q[vbite] X[h] Y[v]
End Cancel
Related Variables: sbite, sclear, sleave, vclear, vleave
84. vcdc Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the vertical component of the cutter diameter compensation vectorv
in older Cincinnati formats.
Linecode
G79 X[h] Y[v] H0 P[hcdc] Q[vcdc] F[frate]
End
Related Variables: dcomp, hcdc, lcomp
85. vclear Mill
This variable outputs the Vertical Clearance amount for milling machines only.
LTap
G74 G99 R[vclear] Z[d] F[frate] Q[vbite]
X[h] Y[v]
End
Related Variables: sbite, sclear, sleave, vbite, vleave
86. vctr Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs the absolute Vertical Center value of an arc.
CwCode
c0 I[hctr] J[vctr] K[d]
I0.0 J0.0 K1.0
x[h] y[v] z[d]
End
Related Variables: hctr
1388
87. vdist Mill

This variable outputs the vertical distance the axis moves during the current move. This
variable is not specifically coded in the POSTFORM file.
Related Variables: ddist, hdist
88. vgauge Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the X axis gauge length for lathes, 0 for mills.
89. vleave Mill, Lathe
The Vertical Leave amount is output for this variable.
AutoThread
G76 X[v] Z[h] P[peck1] Q[vleave] R0 F[frate]
End
Related Variables: sbite, sclear, sleave, vbite, vclear
90. vvector Mill, Lathe, EDM
This variable outputs the vertical vector direction of the first completely compensated
cutting move. It is used on machines that do not have look ahead ability to indicate
which way the tool is going to go on the move after the infeed.
Infeed
G91
G1 A[hvector] B[vvector]
G[side] I[hvector] J[vvector] D[dcomp]
G90
G[86] R-.1 Z[d] F[plunge] D[lcomp]
F[frate]
End
The example below shows the use of this variable for the AGIE EDM machine tool:
Infeed
G1 x[hvector] y[vvector] G44
G1 X[h] Y[v] G40
End
Related Variables: hvector
1389
91. wirefeed EDM

This is the value entered in the Wirefeed field.
22.14
PROMPTED VARIABLES
The following variables are called prompted variables because they refer to values that
are entered by you. They are not based on values that are within the incoming tool
motion. When these variables are used in the format, the post prompts you for the value
when the post starts reading the format.
1. endh Mill, Lathe
This variable prompts you for the horizontal position for the tool at the end of the
program.
EndCode
G0 X[endv] Z[endh]
M30
End
Related Variables: d, h, v, endv, homeh, homev, lasth, lastv
2. endv Mill, Lathe
This variable prompts you for the vertical position for the tool at the end of the program.
EndCode
G0 X[endv] Z[endh]
M30
End
Related Variables: d, h, v, endh, homeh, homev, lasth, lastv
3. maxrpm Mill, Lathe
This variable prompts you for the maximum spindle speed.
1stToolChange
G[feedtype] M31
G92 S[maxrpm]
G0 X.4 Z.4
M[direct]
V77 T[tool] M6
1390
G0 X[v] Z[h] M32

End
Related Variables: speed
4. program# Mill, Lathe, EDM
You are prompted for the program number to use at the beginning of the program. The
Post Processor does not display a prompt for this variable when the program number is
specified in the SURFCAM Program Information dialog box.
StartCode
%0
O[program#]
End
5. toold Mill, Lathe
You are prompted for the Tool change position Depth.
ToolChange
G0 Z[toold] T[tool] t0 M9
M1
T[tool]
G0 X[v] Z[d] T[tool] t[lcomp] M[cool]
End
Related Variables: toolh, toolv
6. toolh Mill, Lathe
This variable prompts you for the Horizontal Tool change position.
ToolChange
G0 Z[toolh] T[tool] t0 M9
M1
T[tool]
G0 X[v] Z[h] T[tool] t[lcomp] M[cool]
End
1391
Related Variables: toold, toolv

7. toolv Mill, Lathe
This variable prompts you for the Vertical Tool change position.
ToolChange
T0
X[toolv] Z[toolh] A0.1
S9 T[tool]
X[v] Z[h]
End
Related Variables: toold, toolh
8. work Mill, Lathe
You are prompted for the Work offset number. The Post Processor does not display a
prompt for this variable when the program number is specified in the SURFCAM
Program Information dialog box.
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
End
Related Variables: workd, workh, workv
9. workd Mill, Lathe
You are prompted for the Work origin offset coordinate of the Spindle Axis.
StartCode
G90 G94 G0 G17
G92 X[workh] Y[workv] Z[workd]
End
Related Variables: work, workh, workv
10. workh Mill, Lathe
You are prompted for the Work origin offset coordinate of the Horizontal Axis.
StartCode
G90 G94 G0 G17
1392

End
Related Variables: work, workd, workv
11. workv Mill, Lathe
You are prompted for the Work origin offset coordinate of the Vertical Axis.
StartCode
G90 G94 G0 G17
End
Related Variables: work, workd, workh
22.15
TOOL COMMENT VARIABLES
These variables can be used to automatically comment tool changes.

1. corner Mill, Lathe
The tool corner radius is output for this variable. It is typically used for comments.
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool] ([0] d[toolrad] e[tooldiam] f[corner]
End
Related Variables: style, tooldiam, toolrad
2. tooldiam Mill
This is the diameter of the current tool. It is typically used for tool comments.
1stToolChange
End
Related Variables: corner, style, toolrad
3. toolrad Mill, Lathe
This variable outputs the radius of the current tool.
1393
1stToolChange
End
Related Variables: corner, style, tooldiam.
22.16
4 AXIS WIRE EDM CUTTING
EPOSTWIN.EXE requires two incoming INC files, the first for the Program (XY) plane,
and the second for the Auxiliary (UV) plane. The two INC files are created with NC 2 Axis
Contour under the following guidelines.
Geometry
Create geometry for both the Program plane and the Auxiliary plane. The contours
should be oriented parallel to the XY plane. The Z position of each contour is not
important, since the post processor ignores any Z information.
Surface
Create a Synchronized cross section surface to verify the synchronization of the XY
and UV contours. If SURFCAM does not prompt for Synchronize before creating a
surface, you should break, trim, or increment the geometry until the XY and UV
contours have the same number of elements.
Cut
NC 2 Axis Contour the XY and UV contours with the infeed type set to With C-Comp
and the tool number greater than zero, even though tool numbers are not required in
the actual NC code. The INC filename for the UV contour must be the same as the
XY INC file with an X appended to the filename.
EDM.INC for the XY contour
EDMX.INC for the UV contour
Note
Both INC files must be the same size and the tool motion must be in the
same order. This may preclude the use of splines within the contours
because the number of linear moves required to cut a spline may not be the
same.
Note
The post processor will automatically merge the XY and UV INC files without
having to specify the UV filename.
Note
When offsetting for the wire thickness and cutting outside corners, additional
moves may be created and cause synchronization to fail.
1394
Note
22.17
SURFCAM defaults to optimizing contours which may cause

synchronization to fail. Set the curve tolerance to zero and SURFCAM will
not optimize the contours.
ENGLISH / METRIC OUTPUT
SURFCAM can be configured to output NC code in either English (inch) or Metric

(millimeter) units. The output is affected by the system settings and the Post Processor
word address, commands and variables.
To produce the NC code SURFCAM uses the INC file created when the geometry is cut.
This INC file can be in either English or Metric units. This output is effected by the system
settings when the geometry is created. The INC file values are defined by the input
values when the geometry is created. When the system setting is in Inch mode for the
geometry creation, the INC file output values are the same as those entered by the user.
SURFCAM does not convert the geometry values to metric when the system setting is
switched to MM units.
Note
The INC file output unit is not the determining factor for the NC code output
units.
The Post Processor uses INC file, Word Address, Inch/MM command, and unitmode
variable to determine the NC code output units.
22.17.1 INC File

The INC file output units are determined by the Inches / MM command on the Options
menu. The system default is for Inch output. When this option is selected the system
uses millimeter input for all dialog boxes and the INC file is output in metric units.
22.17.2 Word Address

The Word Address can be used to convert an Inch INC file to millimeters by using the
Mult modifier. This modifier only affects the Word Address for which it is coded. It
must be used for each Word Address that requires the conversion.
Mult
The value after this command is used as a multiplier for all the values that will
output for this word. The following example will output metric values:
X ->3.>4 Mult 25.4
INC FILE VALUE

11.
NC CODE OUTPUT
X279.4
INC FILE VALUE
Note
1395
NC CODE OUTPUT
2.5
X63.5
.2135
X5.4229

metric to inches.
22.17.3 Inch/MM
The Inch/MM line indicates the numerical values of the G code that set the inch or
millimeter programming mode on the NC machine. The code selected by the Post
Processor is determined by the INC file output units. When the system is set to Inch,
the Inch code is used. When the system is set to MM, the Metric code is used. For
most machines, it is G70 and G71. The example below is entered in the POSTFORM
file for a machine tool that uses G20 and G21 for inch and millimeter mode.
Inch/MM 20 21
The default for this command is 70 71 for mills and 20 21 for lathes.
22.17.4 Unitmode
This variable outputs the value for the G code defined by the Inch/MM command.
1stToolChange
G0 G[unitmode] G90 S[speed] M[direct] E[work] X[h] Y[v]
End
Note
When the Mult modifier is used to convert the Word Address, this variable
must not be used. The machine code for the units must be hard coded.
22.17.5 POSTFORM Formatting

The examples below show a variety of methods to output English or Metric unit NC
code.
This example uses the system default of Inch units to create the geometry and the
INC file. The NC code output units is Inches.
Inch/MM 70 71
1396
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
End
The output code:
M6 T1
G0 G70 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X1. Y1.
H1 M7 Z.1
This example uses the system MM units to create the geometry and the INC file. The
NC code output units is Millimeters.
Inch/MM 70 71
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
End
The output code:
M6 T1
G0 G71 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X25.4 Y25.4
H1 M7 Z2.54
This example uses the system default Inch units to create the geometry and the INC
file. The NC code output units is Millimeters for the X and Y axis. The Mult modifier is
used in the Word Address. The machine G code for the metric mode must be hard
coded into the sequences.
X ->3.>4 Mult 25.4
Y ->3.>4 Mult 25.4
Inch/MM 70 71
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
G0 G71 G90 S[speed] M[direct] E[work] X[h] Y[v]
1397
End
The output code:
M6 T1
0 G71 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X25.4 Y25.4
H1 M7 Z.1
This example uses the system default MM units to create the geometry and the INC
file. The NC code output units is Inches for the X and Y axis. The Mult modifier is used
in the Word Address. The machine G code for the metric mode must be hard coded
into the sequences.
X ->3.>4 Mult .03937
Y ->3.>4 Mult .03937
Inch/MM 70 71
1stToolChange
M6 T[tool]
G0 G70 G90 S[speed] M[direct] E[work] X[h] Y[v]
End
The output code:
M6 T1
G0 G70 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X1. Y1.
H1 M7 Z2.54
22.18
INCREMENTAL OUTPUT
Incremental output is determined by the use of word address modifiers, commands and
variables.
WORD ADDRESS MODIFIERS:
Inc
Mult
Sub
COMMANDS:
Incremental?
Inc/Abs
VARIABLES:
incmode
1398
22.18.1 Abs/Inc
All output for this word will be incremental. The default is absolute. It can be coded
although it is not necessary. The examples below output the Y values incrementally.
The examples below also indicate the Y incremental move values based on the
starting point of Y0.
Y ->3.>4 Inc
INC FILE VALUE
NC CODE OUTPUT
11.
Y11.
-2.5
Y-13.5
.2135
Y2.7135
22.18.2 Mult
The value after this command is used as a multiplier for all the values that will output
for this word. The following example will output metric values.
X ->3.>4 Mult 25.4
INC FILE VALUE
Note
NC CODE OUTPUT
11.
X279.4
2.5
X63.5
.2135
X5.4229

metric to inches.
22.18.3 Sub
Subtraction modifier added to the functionality of the post.
Example:
Z ->4.>3 sub 1
Will subtract 1 from every value that uses the Z address.
1399
22.18.4 Incremental? Mill, Lathe, EDM

This switch is used to set the machine output to the Incremental or Absolute mode.
Incremental? Y
This will cause the code to be output in Incremental. The machine can also require a
G91. Ensure that a G91 code is placed in your StartCode or 1stToolChange
sequence.
Note
The Y can easily be changed to an N to result in absolute programs.

Remember to remove the G91 in your StartCode or 1stToolChange
sequence. When absolute and incremental programs are both used
regularly, create two appropriate posts within the POSTFORM file.
When incremental output is desired, the Incremental? command should be entered

as Y. This allows the post processor to output incremental code for the program.
Note
When incremental output is desired, the POSTFORM file must recognize

the motion letters as modal. This can be accomplished with the
ModalLetters command.
22.18.5 Inc/Abs Mill, Lathe, EDM

The Inc/Abs line indicates the numerical values of the G code that set the incremental
or absolute programming mode on the NC machine. The post processor issues a
warning when a mode change command is processed. The default is shown below.
Inc/Abs G 91 90
The letter defines the NC code letter for these modes. The first number indicates the
incremental code and the second indicates the absolute code. This NC code
information is used by the incmode variable.
When these codes are hard coded into the POSTFORM file, the output code remains
in the coded mode until changed. The example below shows a Subprogram that is
incremental with an absolute main program.
SubStart
O[sub]
G91
End
SubEnd
G90
M99
1400
End
The SubStart sequence hard codes the incremental mode for the subprogram. The
subprogram remains in the incremental mode until the SubEnd sequence is used.
This returns the program to the absolute mode for the main program.
When an absolute G code is hard coded, the Incremental? command has no effect
on the output code. The incremental G code must be hard coded to ensure proper NC
code output.
22.18.6 Incmode Mill, Lathe, EDM

The incremental code defined by the Inc/Abs command is output for this variable.
ToolChange
M5 M9
G0 G49 G[incmode] Z0
M6 T[tool]
G0 G[incmode] S[speed] M[direct] E[work] X[h] Y[v]
End
The incmode variable can be used to output the appropriate NC code defined by the
Inc/Abs command. This variable will output a G90 when the Incremental? command
is entered as N and the Inc/Abs command is entered as shown above. When Y is
entered for the Incremental? command, the output is G91.
Note
When the POSTFORM file encounters a hard coded mode, either G90 or
G91, the Post uses that code for the remainder of the file. Use the incmode
variable instead of hard coded variables to ensure the proper incmode
variable output.
The examples below show the NC code output determined by the word address
modifiers, commands and variables coded in the POSTFORM file.
This example used the Incremental? command as Y, yet hard codes the G90 for
absolute mode.
INCREMENTAL? Y
THE OUTPUT CODE
Inc/Abs G 91 90
ToolChange
INCREMENTAL? Y
1401
THE OUTPUT CODE
M6 T[tool]
M6 T1
G0 G90 S2000 M3
X[h] Y[v]
X1. Y1.
H[lcomp] Z[d] M[cool]
H1 Z.1 M7
End
This example sets the Incremental? command at N, yet hard codes a G91 for the
incremental mode.
INCREMENTAL? N
THE OUTPUT CODE
Inc/Abs G 91 90
ToolChange
M6 T[tool]
M6 T1
G0 G91 S2000 M3
X[h] Y[v]
X0 Y0
H1 Z.1 M7
End
This example uses the incmode variable to output the incremental set in the Inc/Abs
command.
INCREMENTAL? Y
Inc/Abs G 91 90
THE OUTPUT CODE

The G91 code is determined by the Inc/
Abs command line above.
ToolChange
M6 T[tool]
M6 T1
1402
INCREMENTAL? Y
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 G[incmode] S[speed] M[direct]
G0 G91 S2000 M3
X[h] Y[v]
X0 Y0
H1 Z.1 M7
End
This example shows the absolute output using the incmode variable.
INCREMENTAL? N
THE OUTPUT CODE
Inc/Abs G 91 90
ToolChange
M6 T[tool]
M6 T1
G0 G[incmode] S[speed] M[direct]
G0 G90 S2000 M3
X[h] Y[v]
X1. Y1.
H1 Z.1 M7
End
This example shows a sequence that toggles between absolute and incremental
output.
INCREMENTAL? N
THE OUTPUT CODE
Inc/Abs G 91 90
ToolChange
G0 G91 G28 Z0
G0 G91 G28 Z0
M6 T[tool]
M6 T1
INCREMENTAL? N
1403
THE OUTPUT CODE
G0 G90 S2000 M3
X[h] Y[v]
X1. Y1.
H1 Z.1 M7
End
22.19
SUBPROGRAM OUTPUT
Subprograms are individual programs that define the tool motion for each tool in the INC
file. The Subprograms can be used for multiple part fixturing. These programs differ from
Subroutines in that they can be run separately in the machine control. A Subroutine
requires a main program for them to be executed in the machine control.
SURFCAM's post processor will output a separate Subprogram for each tool identified
in the INC file. The post then creates a Main Program that calls the appropriate number
of Subprograms.
The following Commands, Sequences, and Variables are used to define and call the
Subprograms.
COMMANDS
SEQUENCES
VARIABLES
RenumSubs?
SubStart
sub
Subs1st?
SubEnd
subline
SubCall
times
Between
22.19.1 RenumSubs? Mill

program. When it is not used, the line numbers are not reset at the beginning of each
Subprogram and main program.
RenumSubs? Y
Note

used.
1404
22.19.2 Subs1st? Mill

This command defines the location of the Subprograms in relation to the main
program. Enter a Y for the Subprograms to be output before the main program. An N
outputs the Subprograms after the main program. This command is only entered in
the POSTFORM file when Subprograms are desired. When this command is not
used, the Subprograms are automatically placed before the main program.
Subs1st? Y
22.19.3 SubStart Mill

This sequence defines the beginning of the Subprogram.
SubStart
O[sub]
End
The output code for this example follows. This code is placed at the beginning of the
Subprogram by the post processor.
O1
22.19.4 SubEnd Mill

This sequence defines the End of the Subprogram.
SubEnd
M99
End
The output code for this example follows. This code is placed at the end of the
Subprogram code by the post processor.
M99
22.19.5 SubCall Mill

This sequence defines the details of the Subprogram call in the main program.
SubCall
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
M98 P[sub] L[times]
End
1405
The output code for this example follows. The P word is the Subprogram number
called. The T word is the number of repetitions for the Subprogram.
E1 X1. Y1.
M98 P1 L5
22.19.6 Between Mill

This sequence defines any special code desired between the Subprogram and the
main program. This could be used to enter the code for the end of all subroutines on
the FADAL.
Between
M17
M30
End
The output code:
X0 Y0
G91 G28 Z0
M17
M30
O1234
# Subprogram end
# Main program beginning
22.19.7 Sub Mill

This variable identifies the Subprogram number and is usually entered in the SubStart
and SubCall sequences. In the example below the variable sub identifies the
Subprogram number and is used to call the Subprogram in the main program.
SubStart
O[sub]
End
SubEnd
M99
End
SubCall
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
M98 P[sub] L[times]
End
1406
The output code for this example follows. The Subs1st? command is entered as Y.
When the INC file is post processed, you are prompted for the Times variable. For this
example, your input was a value of 5.
O621
X1. Y1.
X2.
Z.1 G0
M99
O1234
G0 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X0 Y0
H1 M7 Z.1
E1 X1. Y1.
M98 P621 L5
22.19.8 Subline Mill

This variable is used to call the Subprogram using the block numbers. When the INC
file is post processed, the block number of the first line of the Subprogram is output
for this variable. When the variable is used, the RenumSubs? command must not be
used.
The following example uses this variable instead of the subline variable. The block
numbers for this example begin at 1 and are incremented by 1.
SubStart
O[sub]
End
SubEnd
M99
End
SubCall
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
End
When the INC file is post processed, you are prompted for the Times variable. For this
example, your input was a value of 5.
1407
N1 O1
N2 X1. Y2.
N3 X2.
N4 Z1. G0
N5 M99
N6 G0 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X0 Y0
N7 H1 M7 Z.1
N8 E1 X1. Y1.
N9 M98 P1 L5
22.19.9 Times Mill

This variable is used to identify the number of repetitions for the Subprogram. When
the INC file is post processed, you are prompted for the times variable value. The
default for this prompt is 0. The following examples show the SubCall sequence and
NC code with and without the Times variable.
SubCall
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
M98 P[sub] L[times]
End
The output code for this example follows. When the INC file is post processed, you
are prompted for the Times variable. For this example, your input was a value of 5.
G0 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X0 Y0
H1 M7 Z.1
E1 X0 Y0
M98 P621 L5
SubCall
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
M98 P[sub] L[times]
End
The output code for this example follows. When the INC file is post processed, you
are prompted for the Times variable. For this example, the default value was used.
G0 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X0 Y0
1408
H1 M7 Z.1
E1 X0 Y0
M98 P621 L0
In this example, the Times variable is not used.
SubCall
E[work] X[h] Y[v]
M98 P[sub]
End
The output code:
G0 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X0 Y0
H1 M7 Z.1
E1 X0 Y0
M98 P621
22.20
BLOCK NUMBER OUTPUT
NC code can be output with a number at the beginning of each line of code. This can be
referred to as a Block number, Sequence number or Line number. Block numbers must
be defined within the POSTFORM file with the use of word addresses, commands, and
variables.
22.20.1 Word Address

Block numbers are typically output with the letter N. This letter must be entered in the
Word Address section of the POSTFORM file. The number of digits output for the
character should be determined by the machine tool control. Most machine tools use
four digits maximum for the block numbers. The example below shows the Word
address format for block numbers using the letter N.
N >4
The example uses the following command and sequence line.
Sequence#s N 1 1 1
G0 G90 S[speed]
INC FILE VALUE
1409
NC CODE OUTPUT
N1 G0 G91 S1000
23
N23 G0 G90 S1000
3237
N3237 G0 G90 S1000
When a block number is only desired at the first line of a tool change, use the following
code in the POST file.
N >4
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
N[block] T[tool] M6
N100 T1 M6
G0 G90 S2000 M3
G[work] X[h] Y[v]
G54 X0 Y0
M[cool] G[lcomp] Z[d]

End
ToolChange
N[block] T[tool] M6
N200 T2 M6
G0 G90 S2000 M3
G[work] X[h] Y[v]
G54 X1. Y1.

End
1410
22.20.2 Commands Mill, Lathe, EDM

The following commands are used to define block numbers:
First#
Last#
RenumSubs?
Sequence#s
1. First#? Mill, Lathe, EDM
This switch determines whether a Block number is output on the first line of the
program or omitted. Enter Y or N for the desired output. The example below will omit
a number on the first line of the NC program.
First#? N
This is typically coded when the first line that is output for the NC code is a percent
symbol.
2. Last#? Mill, Lathe, EDM
This switch determines whether a Block number is output on the last line of the
program or omitted. Enter a Y or N for the desired output. The example below will
output a block number on the last line of the program.
Last#? Y
This is typically coded when the last line that is output for the NC code is a percent
symbol.
3. RenumSubs? Mill
program. When this command is not used, the line numbers are not reset at the
beginning of each Subprogram and main program.
RenumSubs? Y
Note

used.
The output code:

N1 O1
N2 G91
N3 X1.
N4 M99
1411
N1 O2
N2 G91
N3 Y1.
N4 M99
N1 O1234
N2 G0 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X0 Y0
N3 H1 M7 Z.1
4. Sequence#s Mill, Lathe, EDM
This line defines the Block numbers output in the NC program. There are four
parameters required and placed in order on this line:
Character
The first character after the command is the 1st character of the block number. These
examples show the code and output for the commands using the letter N and the :
symbol.
Note
The letter or symbol used must be formatted in the Word Address format.
SEQUENCE#S N 1 1 1
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
N1 M6 T1
N2 G0 G90 S2000 M3
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
N3 E1 X0 Y0
N4 H1 M7 Z.1
End
This example uses the letter C with the Replace command to output the : symbol for
each block number.
: >2
SEQUENCE#S : 1 1 1
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
1412
SEQUENCE#S : 1 1 1
THE OUTPUT CODE
M6 T[Tool]
:1 M6 T1
:2 G0 G90 S2000 M3
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
:3 E1 X0 Y0
:4 H1 M7 Z.1
End
Frequency
A number here indicates how often a block number is placed on a line. To output a
number on every line, enter a 1. To output a number on every other line, enter a 2.
Entering the number 10 will output a block number every ten lines. The following
examples show the code and output for the parameter.
SEQUENCE#S N 1 1 1
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
N1 M6 T1
N2 G0 G90 S2000 M3
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
N3 E1 X0 Y0
N4 H1 M7 Z.1
End
This example indicates a Frequency of 2 to output block numbers on every other line.
SEQUENCE#S N 2 1 1
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
N1 M6 T1
G0 G90 S2000 M3
SEQUENCE#S N 2 1 1
1413
THE OUTPUT CODE
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
N2 E1 X0 Y0
H1 M7 Z.1
End
Note
Use a frequency of 0 to not output the block numbers on each line. The post
will only put them where they are requested.
Increment
This is the value by which the block number is incremented before the next output.
Using the value of 10 will create block numbers in the block address itself to be 10
greater than the last block number.
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
N10 M6 T1
N20 G0 G90 S2000 M3
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
N30 E1 X0 Y0
N40 H1 M7 Z.1
End
Start Value
This is simply the value of the very first block number that appears in the code;
numbers after the first are determined by the start value plus a multiple of the
Increment.
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
M6 T[Tool]
N100 M6 T1
N102 G0 G90 S2000 M3
1414
THE OUTPUT CODE
E[Work] X[H] Y[V]
N104 E1 X0 Y0
N106 H1 M7 Z.1
End
Note
See Block Number Output, page 1408.
22.20.3 Variables
The block variable is the only variable available for Block numbers. When it is coded
in a POSTFORM sequence, the output number is determined by the Sequence#s
command. This variable is typically used when block numbers are only desired for the
tool change lines. The following example shows the post file entries for the output of
block numbers at tool changes only.
N >4
THE OUTPUT CODE
1stToolChange
N[block] T[tool] M6
N100 T1 M6
G0 G90 S2000 M3
G[work] X[h] Y[v]
G54 X0 Y0
M8 G43 Z.1
End
ToolChange
N[block] T[tool] M6
N200 T2 M6
G0 G90 S2000 M3
G[work] X[h] Y[v]
G54 X1. Y1.
1415
THE OUTPUT CODE

M8 G43 Z.1
End
When Block numbers are required for each program block, the block variable is not
used. This is accomplished by changing the Sequence#s command to indicate the
frequency of 1 as the following example indicates:
Sequence#s N 1 1 1
22.20.4 Suppressing Block Numbers

Block numbers can be suppressed for the entire NC program or for specific lines of
the program. You can also output blank lines within the NC code if desired.
Suppression of block numbers is accomplished with the use of Word Address
formatting or Commands.
When block numbers must be suppressed on only the first or last line of the NC
program, use the First# and Last# commands described above.
When no block number output is desired, the Sequence#s command is used with a
frequency of zero. This is shown in the following example. This example outputs no
block numbers for the entire program.
Sequence#s N 0 1 1
This command, with the use of the block variable, can be used to output block
numbers at specific NC code lines only.
The exclamation symbol ! can be used to suppress a line number at any NC code
line. It can also be used to output a blank line in the NC code.
This symbol must be entered in the Word Address format section of the post file. It
should be entered as indicated by the following example.
! 00
When used in a POSTFORM sequence, the symbol is followed by a variable of 0. The
following example shows the ! symbol being used to suppress the line number for the
program number line.
SEQUENCE#S N 1 1 1
Start
THE OUTPUT CODE
1416
SEQUENCE#S N 1 1 1
THE OUTPUT CODE
!0 O[program#]
End
1stToolChange
O1234
M6 T[tool]
N1 M6 T1
G0 G90 S[speed] M[direct] E[work] X[h]

Y[v]
N2 G0 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X0 Y0
N3 H1 M7 Z.1
End
The following example indicates the use of the ! symbol to insert a blank line in the
NC code.
Sequence#s N 1 1 1
RenumSubs? Y
First# N
Last# Y
Start
%0
O[program#]
End
SubStart
O[sub]
End
SubEnd
M99
!0
End
EndCode
M5 M9
G0 G49 G90 Z0
E0 X0 Y0
M6 T[Tool1]
M2
%0
End
The output code
%
N1 O1
N2 G91
N3 X1.
N4 M99
N1 O2
N2 G91
N3 Y1.
N4 M99
N1 O1234
N2 G0 G90 S2000 M3 E1 X0 Y0
N3 H1 M7 Z.1
N4 M98 P1 L1
N5 M98 P2 L1
N6 M5 M9
1417
1418
N7 G0 G49 G90 Z0
N8 E0 X0 Y0
N9 M6 T1
N10 M2
N11 %
22.21
CONFIGURING THE POST
22.21.1 Configuration Files

The post processor files, MPOSTWIN.EXE, LPOSTWIN.EXE and EPOSTWIN.EXE,
have a configuration file associated with them: Post.ini. This file identifies the path and
name of the POSTFORM file. The following lines are the contents of the Post.ini file:
POST.INI - GROUND SUPPORT POST-PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION FILE.
COPYRIGHT 1989 - 1999 GROUND SUPPORT
NOTE: COMMENTS MAY BE PLACED IN THIS FILE BY SIMPLY PLACING
THEM AFTER 2 OR MORE SPACE (NOT TAB!) CHARACTERS
[MPOST]
Format C:\SURFCAM\POSTLIB\PostForm.m
[LPOST]
Format C:\SURFCAM\POSTLIB\PostForm.l
[EPOST]
Format C:\SURFCAM\POSTLIB\PostForm.e
Post.ini File
22.21.2 SURFCAM.LOG Files

You can create a post log file for a post if you insert the Logging? Y command in the
correct section of the POST.INI file. This example shows how to create a
SURFCAM.LOG file for MPOST.
POST.INI - GROUND SUPPORT POST-PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION FILE.
COPYRIGHT 1989 - 1999 GROUND SUPPORT
NOTE: COMMENTS MAY BE PLACED IN THIS FILE BY SIMPLY PLACING
THEM AFTER 2 OR MORE SPACE (NOT TAB!) CHARACTERS
[MPOST]
Format C:\SURFCAM\POSTLIB\PostForm.m
Logging? Y
1419
[LPOST]
Format C:\SURFCAM\POSTLIB\PostForm.l
[EPOST]
The SURFCAM.LOG file is created in the \SURFCAM\Surf2002\Mpost folder.
The log file contains three types of information.
1.
The INC record type number, size and the numeric and text parameters.
2.
The posts internal TM record into which the INC data is converted.
3.
The actual lines of NC code output.
The log file is over written when the post runs. Do not delete the previous log files.
22.21.3 Foreign Language Support

The post processor provides foreign language support through the POST.DEF file.
This file is an ASCII text file that lists all messages and prompts used by the post
processor. The numbers at the beginning of each line must not be changed. These
are internal addresses for the post processor. Wording after these numbers can be
translated into virtually any language.
Note
Some words may be sequence names and should not be translated for
clarity between the messages and the POSTFORM file.
22.21.4 Machine Specific Output Folders

You can output a post processed file to any folder. This can be accomplished using
two methods. You can specify the output folder in the SURFCAM.PST file or in the
POSTFORM files.
22.21.4.1
PST File
In the example belowfrom the SURFCAM.PST filethe Copyfile command is

used to place the output file in the subfolder C:\MyProjects. Use the subfolder
name in the Task command, also, and another Delete command after the Copyfile
command.
PostItem Fanuc
Status
ChDir
Delete
Command
Copyfile
Fanuc 15M-B
c:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\MPOST
%p%N.NCC
c:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\MPOST\MPOSTWIN %p%N 1
%p%N.NCC c:\MyProjects\%N.NNC
1420
Delete
Task
22.21.4.2
%p%N.NCC
c:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\sedit\sedit c:\MyProjects\
POSTFORM File
To save an .ncc file in the subfolder C:\MyProjects, add a Drive command like the
one below to a POSTFORM filelike Postform.m.
Drive \C:\MyProjects\
Note: There must be a trailing back slash (\).
It is recommended that you place a separate Drive command after each Name
command so that all the NCC programs run on a specific machine will be saved in
their own folder.
You can, however, place a Drive command at the very top of the POSTFORM file.
All NCC programs will then be routed to this folder unless the machine chosen has
its own Drive command, in which case that one will be used.
22.22
ACCESSING THE POST PROCESSOR
SURFCAMs post processors are accessed using the NC Operations Manager

dialog box. To open this dialog box, either click its icon on the SURFCAM toolbar
or press Ctrl+N.
1421
You must first select the operations to be post processed from the NC Operations Tree.
You can process all the operations in a single Setup Section, by clicking its icon, or a
single operation, by clicking its icon.
You will then select a post processor from the NC Post list boxto the right of the
Operations Tree. You can display another list by changing the entry in NC Mode box
for example, to 2 Axis. The posts displayed in the NC Post list box are those listed in that
section of the SURFCAM.PST file set aside for the mode shown in the NC Mode list box.
Changing the entry in the NC Mode box will display the posts listed in another section of
the PST file. The PST file contains commands to run both MPOST (consisting of
MPOSTWIN, LPOSTWIN and EPOSTWIN) and Spost post processors. Spost is the
other post processor package shipped with SURFCAM. To begin post processing click
a post name in the NC Post box and click the Post button.
You can also display all of the currently available MPOST post processorsfor all NC
modesby double-clicking the List all entry in the NC Post list box. When you do this,
SURFCAM will search the SURFCAM.PST file for a PostItem corresponding to List all,
such as the following.
PostItem List all
Status Display all posts in postform.m
ChDir C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\MPOST
Delete %p%N.NCC
Command "C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\MPOST\MPOSTWIN"
"%p%n"
Task
"C:\SURFCAM\Surf2002\sedit\sedit" "%p%N.ncc"
The Command line in this example will run the MPOSTWIN post processor in such a way
as to first bring up a menu of available post processors stored in the current POSTFORM
filePOSTFORM.M, POSTFORM.l OR POSTFORM.E.
A POSTFORM file contains the actual code for each of the current MPOST post
processors. SURFCAM accesses this file to run a post processor. You can run a post
from the displayed menu by double-clicking it.
22.22.1 Adding Posts

All of the post processors shipped with SURFCAM are stored in the SURFCAM\
PostLib\MPOST or Spost subfolders. You can add any of these post processors to
your current version of SURFCAM by using the Post Menu Wizard utility.
To run the Post Menu Wizard, click Start > Programs > SURFCAM 2002> SURFCAM
Tools > Post Menu Wizard. The Post Menu Wizard dialog box will be displayed.
Follow the prompts to add or remove a post processor.
1422
If you select an Spost post processor it will be copied from the PostLib\Spost
subfolder to the SURFCAM.PST file.
If you select an MPOST post processor it will be copied from the PostLib\MPOST
subfolder to the SURFCAM.PST file and to the end of the applicable POSTFORM file.
See The MPOST Post Processor Package, page 1274 and to Post Menu Wizard,
page 1282.
22.22.2 SURFCAM File

See The SURFCAM.PST File, page 1278.
22.23
POST SAMPLE LIBRARIES
The POST sample libraries below are included as samples of the POSTFORM file.
These files are included in the SURFCAM\POSTLIB\MPOST folder. The list below
indicates the post processors and filenames that can be appended in the
POSTFORM.M, POSTFORM.L, or POSTFORM.E files. The filename extension
indicates the type of post processor.
M2
M3
M4
M5
L2
E2
E4
2 Axis Mill
3 Axis Mill
4 Axis Mill
5 Axis Mill
Lathe
2 Axis Wire EDM
4 Axis Wire EDM
See the figure Post Processors and File Names, page 1422.
MILLING POSTS
FILENAME
MILLING POSTS
FILENAME
Aciera
aciera.m3
Bridgeport w/BOSS 8
bos8.m3
ACL
acl.m3
Bridgeport w/BOSS 9
boss.m3
Acroloc GN-6M
acr6.m3
Bridgeport w/BOSS 10
boss.m3
Acroloc GN-6M w/rotary

table
acr6.m4
Bridgeport Heidenhain TNC

151
bri151.m3
Post Processors and File Names
MILLING POSTS
FILENAME
MILLING POSTS
1423
FILENAME
Allen Bradley 4500
ab4500.m3
Bostomatic
bostomat.m
3
Allen Bradley 8400
ab8400.m3
Centurion 4
cnt4.m3
Anilam Crusader Series M

EIA
anilame.m3
Centurion 5
cnt5.m3
Anilam Crusader Series M

Event
anilamc.m3
Cincinnati Milacron 850M
cin850.m3
APTCL 2 and 3 Axis
aptcl.m3
Cincinnati Milacron 950M
cin950.m3
APTCL 5 Axis
aptcl.m5
Cincinnati Milacron Tab Seq cin-tab.m3
Bandit 1
ban1.m3
Cintimatic AC-8
cnt8.m3
Bandit 2
ban2.m3
Compact II 2 and 3 Axis

support
compact2.
m3
Bandit 3
ban3.m3
Deckel
deckel.m3
Bandit 4
ban4.m3
Deckel Dialog 4 G17
dlg4g17.m3
Bridgeport w/BOSS 4
bos4.m3
Deckel Dialog 4 G18
dlg4g18.m3
Bridgeport w/BOSS 5
bos5.m3
Devlieg
devlieg.m3
Dyna Myte 2400
dmt2400.m
3
Fanuc 16M
fan16.m3
Dyna Myte 2400 w/rotary

table
dmt2400.m
4
Fanuc 16M w/preselect
fan16p.m3
Dyna Myte Conversational
dmt2400c.
m3
GE Mark Century w/
Monarch
monarch.m
3
Dyna Myte 4400
dmt4400.m
3
ge550.m3
Post Processors and File Names (Continued)

1424
MILLING POSTS
FILENAME
MILLING POSTS
FILENAME
Dyna Myte 4400 w/rotary

table
dmt4400.m
4
ge1050.m3
Dynapath 20 EIA format
dyn20e.m3
ge2000.m3
Dynapath 20 Conv. Style
dyn20c.m3
Haas
haas.m3
Dynapath 30 Conv. Style
dyn30c.m3
Haas w/rotary table
haas.m4
Fadal Format 1
fadal.m3
Heidenhain TNC 151 ISO
hei151.m3
Fadal Format 1 w/rotary

table
fadal.m4
Heidenhain TNC 151 Conv.
Hei151c.m
3
Fadal Format 1 w/sub

programs
fadals.m3
Heidenhain TNC 151 w/sub
hei151s.m3
Fagor
fagor.m3
Heidenhain TNC 155 ISO
hei155.m3
Fanuc 3000
fan3000.m
3
Hei155c.m
3
Fanuc 0M
fan0.m3
hei155s.m3
Fanuc 6M
fan6.m3
Hei355c.m
3
Fanuc 10M
fan10.m3
hei355s.m3
Fanuc 10M w/Incr. Output
fan10i.m3
Hei355c.m
3
Fanuc 10M w/rotary table
fan10.m4
hei355s.m3
fan10p.m3
Hurco
hurco.m3
Fanuc 10M w/sub programs fan10s54.m Hurco BX

G54
3
maxbx.m3
MILLING POSTS
FILENAME
MILLING POSTS
1425
FILENAME
Fanuc 10M w/sub programs fan10s92.m Hurco Ultimax 1

G92
3
ult1.m3
Fanuc 11M
fan11.m3
Hurco Ultimax 2
ult2.m3
fan11p.m3
Hurco Ultimax 2 ver 8
ult2v8.m3
Fanuc 15M
fan15.m3
Hurco Ultimax 3
ult3.m3
fan15p.m3
Hurco Ultimax 3 ver 8
ult3v8.m3
K & T 600MM
k&t600.m3
OKK w/Fanuc
okkfan.m3
K & T 600MM w/rotary table k&t600.m4
OKK w/Fanuc rotary
okkfan.m4
Kitamura MC-86
kit86.m3
Okuma w/Bandit 2
okuban2.m
3
Kitamura MC-86 w/rotary

table
kit86.m4
Okuma OSP5000
osp5000.m
3
LeBlond Makino w/Fanuc
leblond.m3
Okuma OSP5020
osp5020.m
3
Maho G17 mode
mahg17.m3
Pratt & Whitney Tapematic
p&wtap.m3
Maho G17 mode w/rotary
mahg17.m4
ProtoTrak
prototrk.m3
Maho G18 mode
mahg18.m3
Roland CAMM-3
roland.m3
Maho G18 mode w/rotary
mahg18.m4
Servo
ser2.m3
Makino w/Fanuc 15M
makfan15.
m3
Sharnoa Tiger 4
tig4.m3
1426
MILLING POSTS
FILENAME
MILLING POSTS
FILENAME
Mazak M2
mzk2.m3
Sharnoa Tiger 5
tig5.m3
Mazak M2 w/tool preselect
mzk2p.m3
Shizuoka 13-5V
shi13.m3
Mazak M2 w/rotary table
mzk2.m4
Siemens 6M
sie6.m3
Mazak M2 horiz. w/
tombstone
mzk2h.m3
Siemens 810M
sie810.m3
Mazak M32 ISO
mzk32.m3
SURFCAM Digitize Format
digitiz.m3
Mazak M32 w/vertical

bridge
mzk32v.m3 Thermwood Model 70
thr70.m3
Mitsubishi M0
mit0.m3
tredy20.m3
Monarch 45B w/Dynapath

20
mondy20.m Yasnac MX-3

3
yas3.m3
Mycenter
mycentr.m3 Yasnac 2000G
yas2000.m
3
Mycenter w/rotary table
mycentr.m4
Cincinnati
cincinat.12
Tree w/Dynapath 20
Charmilles 2 Axis wire EDM
charmill.e2
Citizen F10 Screw Machine citizen.12
Charmilles 4 Axis wire EDM
charmill.e4
Fanuc OT
fan0.12
Elox 4 Axis wire EDM
elox.e4
Fanuc 5T
fan5.12
Japax 2 Axis wire EDM
japax.e2
Fanuc 6T
fan6.12
Japax 4 Axis wire EDM
japax.e4
Fanuc 10T
fan10.12
Mitsubishi 2 Axis wire EDM
mitsub.e2

Absolute
ge550.12
Sodick 2 Axis wire EDM
sodick.e2
MILLING POSTS
FILENAME

Incremental
ge550i.12
Generic 2 axis
generic.12
Ikegai 5T
ike5.12
Mitsubishi L0
mit0.12
Mori-Seiki
moriseik.12
Yasnac 2000B
yas2000.12
MILLING POSTS
1427
FILENAME
The sample POSTFORM files in The Generic 3 Axis Mill Postform file figure, The Generic
Lathe Postform file figure, and The Generic EDM Postform file figure are the Generic
POSTFORM files that are included.
22.23.1 Generic.M3
NAME
GENERIC 3 AXIS MILL
% 00
! 00
O4
N >4
G2
g2G
X ->3.>4
Y ->3.>4
Z ->3.>4
I ->3.>4
J ->3.>4
R ->3.>4
The Generic 3 Axis Mill Postform file
1428
NAME
GENERIC 3 AXIS MILL
Q ->3.>4
F >3.1
H2
D2
T2
M2
S >4
ModalLetters X Y Z F R
# List of letters that are modal
ModalGs 0 1 2 3 73 74 76 80 81 82 83 84 85
# List of g codes that are modal
Sequence#s N 1 1 1
# Char, freq, incr & start
First#? N
# Y or N 'Output 1st sequence no.
Last#? N
# Y or N 'Output last sequence
HCode X
# X or X U 'Horizontal char.
VCode Y
# Y or Y V 'Vertical char.
Dcode Z
# Depth char.
FeedCode F
# Feed rate char.
Comment ( )
# Begin End comment char.
Spindle 3 4 5
# Cw, ccw & stop m codes
Coolant 8 9 7
# On, Off & Mist m codes
DComp 41 42 40
# Left, Right & Cancel m codes
LComp 43 49
# On & Off codes

The Generic 3 Axis Mill Postform file (Continued)
NAME
1429
GENERIC 3 AXIS MILL
Feed G1
# Linear move
Rapid G0
# Rapid positioning word
Cw G2
# Circular move clockwise
Ccw G3
# Circular move counter
Inc/Abs G 91 90
# Inc & Abs char. & values
Inch/MM 70 71
# Inch & Metric g codes
CtrCode I J
# I J or R or I J K L
CtrIncremental? Y
# Y or N 'Inc or abs I & J
ByQuadrants? N
# Y or N 'Break arcs at quadrants
Spaces? Y
# Y or N 'Spaces between words
Incremental? N
# Y or N 'Inc or abs output
Work G
# Work offset register
UppercaseComments? Y
# Y or N 'Require uppercase
StartCode
# Start of the program
%0
!0 O[Program#]
End
1stToolChange
# First tool change
G0 G90 G80 G40 G17

1430
NAME
GENERIC 3 AXIS MILL
T[Tool] M6
M[Direct] S[Speed]
G0 G[Work] X[H] Y[V]
G43 Z[D] H[Lcomp]
M[Cool]
End
Infeed
# Enable cutter comp
G[Side] X[H] Y[V] D[DComp] F[FRate]

end
Outfeed
# Disable cutter comp
G1 G40 X[H] Y[V]

end
ToolChange
# Secondary tool changes
M[CoolantOff]
T[Tool] M6
M[Direct] S[Speed]
G0 X[H] Y[V]
G43 Z[D] H[Lcomp]
M[Cool]
End
EndCode
# End of the program
G0 G91 G28 Z0
M30
NAME
1431
GENERIC 3 AXIS MILL
%0
End
#LineCode
#G1 X[H] Y[V] Z[D] F[FRate]
#End
#RapidCode
#G0 X[H] Y[V] Z[D]
#End
#CwCode
#G2 X[H] Y[V] I[IVal] J[JVal] F[FRate]
#End
#CcwCode
#G3 X[H] Y[V] I[IVal] J[JVal] F[FRate]
#End
Drill
G81 X[H] Y[V] Z[D] R[Vclear] F[FRate]

end cancel
Peck
# Pecking canned/manual cycle
G83 X[H] Y[V] Z[D] Q[VBite] R[Vclear] F[FRate]

end cancel
1432
NAME
GENERIC 3 AXIS MILL
Tap
# Tapping canned/manual cycle

end cancel
LTap
# Left handed tapping cycle

end cancel
Ream
# Reaming canned/manual cycle

end cancel
Bore
# Boring canned/manual cycle

end cancel
Back
# Back boring canned/manual

end cancel
#Custom1
#G81 X[H] Y[V] Z[D] R[Vclear] F[FRate]
#end cancel
#Custom2
#end cancel
NAME
1433
GENERIC 3 AXIS MILL
#Custom3
#end cancel
Cancel
# Cancel a canned/manual cycle
G80
end
#SubStart
#O[Sub]
#End
#SubEnd
#M99
#End
#SubCall
#G[Work] P[Sub] M98
#End
#Between
#M9
#G91 G80 G30 Y0 Z0
#G0 G40 G80 G90
#M30
#End
1434
NAME
GENERIC 3 AXIS MILL
#Index X
#G0 G28 G91 Z0
#G90 G[Work] X[H] Y[V] A[RotAngle]
#G43 H[Lcomp] Z[D]
#End
#UnWind
#G0 G28 G91 Z0
#A0
#G43 Z[D] H[Lcomp] M[Cool]
#X[LastH] Y[LastV] A[LastRotAng]
#G1 Z[LastD]
#End
#Upon RPlane
#Ask "Val1" " Enter 98 or 99 for canned cycles"
#End
22.23.2 Generic.L
NAME
GENERIC LATHE
% 00
! 00
O4
N3
G2
The Generic Lathe Postform file
NAME
1435
GENERIC LATHE
X ->3.>4
x ->3.>4 X
Z ->3.>4
D2
I ->3.>4
K ->3.>4
U ->3.>4
W ->3.>4
P ->3.>4
A 60 P
Q ->3.>4
q ->3.>4 Q
R ->3.>4
F >3.>3
T2
t2
S >4
M2
ModalLetters X Z F
# List of letters that are modal
ModalGs 0 1 2 3 73 76 80 81 82 83 84 85 # List
Sequence#s N 0 1 1
First#? N
# Y or N 'Output 1st sequence
Last#? N

The Generic Lathe Postform file (Continued)
1436
NAME
GENERIC LATHE
Comment ( )
HCode Z
VCode X
FeedCode F
# Feed rate char.
Spindle 3 4 5
# Cw, ccw & stop m codes
Coolant 8 9 7
# On, Off & Mist m codes
DComp 41 42 40
LComp 43 49
# On & Off codes
SpeedType 97 96
# CSS and RPM g codes
FeedType 95 94
# IPR & IPM g codes
ByDiameter? Y
# Y or N 'Output X val. by
CtrIncremental? Y
ByQuadrants? N
# Y or N 'Break arcs at
CtrCode R
Inc/Abs G 91 90
Inch/MM 20 21
Spaces? Y
Incremental? N
Feed G1
# Linear move
Rapid G0

NAME
1437
GENERIC LATHE
Cw G2
Ccw G3
RevSigns X x
# List of letters to reverse signs
UppercaseComments? Y # Y or N 'Require
StartCode
%0
!0 O[Program#]
end
1stToolChange
# First tool change
G50 x[ToolH] Z[ToolV]

G0 T[Tool] t[Tool] M42
G[SpeedType] S[Speed] M[Direct]
X[V] Z[H] M[Cool]
End
Infeed
G1 G[Side] X[V] Z[H] D[Dcomp] F[FRate]

end
Outfeed
G1 G40 X[V] Z[H] F[FRate]

end
1438
NAME
GENERIC LATHE
ToolChange
M[CoolantOff]
T[LastTool] t0
G50 x[ToolH] Z[ToolV]
G0 T[Tool] t[Tool] M42
G[SpeedType] S[Speed] M[Direct]
X[V] Z[H] M[Cool]
End
EndCode
G0 x[ToolV] Z[ToolH] M[CoolantOff]

T[Tool] t0 M5
M2
End
#LineCode
#G1 X[V] Z[H] F[Frate]
#End
#RapidCode
#G0 X[V] Z[H]
#End
#CcwCode
#G3 X[V] Z[H] R[ArcRad]
#End
NAME
1439
GENERIC LATHE
#CwCode
#G2 X[V] Z[H] R[ArcRad]
#End
Drill
G74 Z[Depth] F[Frate]

end
Peck
# Pecking canned/manual cycle
G74 Z[Depth] K[VBite] F[Frate]

end
#Tap
#G78 Z[H] F[FRate]
#end cancel
#LTap
#G78 Z[H] F[FRate]
#end cancel
AutoThread
# Automatic thread canned cycle
G76 A[TParams] Q[VBite] R0

G76 X[V] Z[H] R[StartAng] P[Depth] q[Peck1]
end
Ream
# Reaming canned/manual cycle
G1 Z[H] F[FRate]
1440
NAME
GENERIC LATHE
G1 Z[VClear]
end
Bore
# Boring canned/manual cycle
G1 Z[H] F[FRate]
G1 Z[VClear]
end
Back
# Back boring canned/manual
G1 Z[H] F[FRate]
G1 Z[VClear]
end
#Custom1
#End
#Custom2
#End
#Custom3
#End
Cancel
# Cancel a canned/manual cycle
G80
end
#Upon Turret
NAME
1441
GENERIC LATHE
#M13
#End
Replace " t" with ""
22.23.3 Generic.E
NAME
GENERIC EDM
% 00
! 00
O4
N >4
G2
X ->3.>4
Y ->3.>4
I ->3.>4
J ->3.>4
F >3.2
D2
M2
ModalLetters X Y Z F R # List of letters that are
ModalGs 0 1 2 3
# List of g codes that are modal
Sequence#s N 0 1 1
First#? N
# Y or N 'Output 1st sequence

The Generic EDM Postform file
1442
NAME
GENERIC EDM
Last#? N
HCode X
VCode Y
FeedCode F
# Feed rate char.
Comment ( )
DComp 41 42 40
LComp 43 49
# On & Off codes
Feed G1
# Linear move
Rapid G0
Cw G2
Ccw G3
Inc/Abs G 91 90
Inch/MM 70 71
CtrCode I J
CtrIncremental? Y
ByQuadrants? N
# Y or N 'Break arcs at quadrants
Spaces? N
Incremental? N

The Generic EDM Postform file (Continued)
NAME
GENERIC EDM
#Work G
UppercaseComments? Y # Y or N 'Require
StartCode
%0
!0 O[Program#]
End
1stToolChange
# First tool change
G0 G92 X0 Y0
X[H] Y[V]
End
Infeed
G[Side] X[H] Y[V] D[Dcomp]

end
Outfeed
G1 G40 X[H] Y[V]

end
ToolChange
M1
G0 X[H] Y[V]
End
1443
1444
NAME
GENERIC EDM
EndCode
M30
%0
End
#LineCode
#G1 X[H] Y[V] F[Frate]
#End
#RapidCode
#G0 X[H] Y[V]
#End
#CcwCode
#G3 X[H] Y[V] I[Ival] J[Jval] F[Frate]
#End
#CwCode
#G2 X[H] Y[V] I[Ival] J[Jval] F[Frate]
#End
#Upon
#End
1445
PART 3: SPOST
22.24
SPOST FIL
Click the link to open the Spost Fil document.
22.25
SPOST REFERENCE
Click the link to open the Spost Reference document.
1446
Index
INDEX
Press CTRL+P to print the Index.
Use page range 1447 to 1476.
NUMERICS
2 Axis 567634
Advanced Procedures 631634
Contour 589596
Contour 3D 596599
Cut Control Tab See Control Tab
Face Mill 604
Hole Processing 509541
Options 619
Pilot Hole 600634
Pocket 581589
Rest Material 605610
Thread Mill 610
Tool Information 462488
2 Axis XY 789804
2 Points 146
2 Points / Diameter 178
2 Points Diameter 181
2 Points Radius 181
2 Surface Blending 285
2D Cross Sections 236, 243
2D part design 84
2D Rest Material 605610
3 Axis
Auto Rough 674677
Contour 3D 596599
Options 636697
Pencil Cut 681685
Pilot Hole 600634
Plunge Rough 685695
Project 542546
Z Finish 656663
Z Rough 638656
3 Points 177, 181, 298
3D Cross Section 237
3D Rest 678680
4 and 5 Axis 699736

Contour 711719
Cut 700
Options 728734
Project 542546
Set Axis 722728
Swarf 705
Trim 719
4 Axis EDM 805806
4 Axis UV Trim 815818
4 Axis Wire EDM Cutting 1393
A
A3DS 53, 161
Accurate Mode 540
ACIS 369
Add / Remove 266
Add a New Setup Section 838
Add a Post 1274
Add a Tool Table 481483
Add Material To Material Library 485
Add NC Operation 838
Add Node 437
Add Z Values 546
Adding Command Line Options 1057
Additional User Information 830
Advanced 399
Align 433
Create / Text/Dimension Menu 304
Align Edges 439
All Depths 627
Alternate 786
Alternate Tool Path Colors 346
Ambient Light 341
Amount To Remove 573, 787
Analysis Menu 1220
1448
SURFCAM Index
Analyze 422
Analyze Dialog Boxes 883
Analyze Menu 325338
Angle 327
Curvature 337
Distance 328
Elements 330
Location 333
Min / Max 328
Surface Points 335
Tangency 333
Angle 501, 578, 701, 798
Analyze 327
Create / Line 173
Polar Coordinates 144
Tolerance 287, 440, 442
Chain Options 136
True 327
Angle at the Reference Point 215
Angle From Tangent Plane 499
Angle on Tangent Plane 499
Angle Tolerance 458
Angular
Anilam Crusader 1126
Animated Tool Display 882
Annotation 323
APT-CL 876
Arc 177180, 622
Arc / Helix 864
Arc Center 347
Arc Filter 1284
Arc On All 578
Arc On Final 577
ArcFltr 1284
ArcFltrMx Filter 1284
Area Least Squares 180
Arrow 885
Corner 429
Direction 429
Side 429
Visible / Invisible 430
ASCII 372, 1194
ASCII Chart 1194
ASCII Code 1092, 1194
ASCII to EIA Translation 1265

Attachment Points 243245
Auto 629
Chain Menu 135
Trim Plane Menu 291
Auto Break 420
Auto Rough 674677
Control Tab 676
Options 636697
Auto Save 881
Auto Trim 418
Available Buttons 836
Available Materials 484
Available Tools 743
Axes
Direction 891, 893, 894, 895
Order 891, 892, 893, 895
Axis Dialog Box 146
Axis Mapped To Angle 858
Axis of Rotation 722
Axonometric View 41
B
Back View 41
Background Color 1118
Backlash 393
Backplot 1077
Backplot Menu 1081
Backplot toolpath 113
Backplot Toolpaths 871
Backup Files 1119
Band Width 536
Basic Calculator 1214
Basic Operators 1095
Baud Rate 1120
Before Material 580
Beyond Material 580
Bezier Knots 189
Bicubic (4 Surface Blending) 288
Bidirectional 536
3 Axis and 5 Axis 491
4 Axis 494
Blend 212
SURFCAM Index
Four Surfaces 288

Surface Menu 283289
Two Surfaces 285
Blend Example 289
Blend Options 284
Blended 264
Blended Surface Dialog Box 285
Block Number Output 14081418
Commands 1410
Supressing Block Numbers 1415
Variables 1414
Word Address 1408
Block Skip Lines 1098
Block Skips 1092
Block Spacing 310
Block Variable 1414
Bore 528
Bore Side Clearance 529, 784
Both (Horizontal & Vertical Lines) 172
Bottom 571
Bottom Profile 641
Bottom View 41
Bottom Z 572
Boundary 266
Boundary Choice 197
Boundary Curves 196
Boundary Curves (Color) 435
Bounding Curve 659, 668
Box 640
Branch Points 138
Break
Edit / Trim/Break 406420
Bridgeport BOSS 3, 4, 5 and 6 1129
Bridgeport BOSS 8, 9 and 10 1131
Brown and Sharpe 374
BTR Setups 11901193
Burn to Thread Point on Exit 798
C
Cable Installation 1121
Cable Lengths 1124
Cabling 1121
CADKEY 365, 367, 371
CADL 365, 367
Calcs Menu 1214

Calculate Bounding Box 640
Calculate Speeds 466, 532
Calculators
Basic 1214
Programming 1215
Trig 1214
Cam Profile Data Files 374403
Cap 290
Surface of Extrusion 283
Case Sensitivity 1292
CDL 365, 367
CDL Files 379
Center / Diameter 178
Center / Radius 177, 181
Center / Start / End 178
Center Alternate 777
Center Drill 602
Center Location 854
Center Mark 318
Center Of Arcs 875
Center Sequential 777
Centering Dimension 301
Centurion 5 1132
Chain 134, 452
Branch Points 138
Chaining Direction 136, 137
Closed Curves 137
Direction 240
Tolerance 347
Trim Plane Chain Menu 290
Chain Menu 134136
Auto 135
Chain 134
Chain Option 136
Material 135
Part 135
Plunge 135
Single 134
Trim Curve 816
Vector 135
Chain Option Dialog Box 136
Chain Tolerance Default 905
Chaining Direction 240
Chaining Elements 134
1449
1450
SURFCAM Index
Chamfer 186, 786

Chamfer Distance Default 886
Change
Chamfer 186
Radius 183
Change Offset 450
Change Spindle Speeds 1102
Change Style 325
Change to Feed Arc 865
Change to Plunge Arc 865
Change Tool Axis Vector 731
Check 436
Check Clearance 497
Check Points 329, 334
Check Points Per Span 180, 1286
Check Surfaces 666
Check Tolerance For Each Nurb
Spline 1286
Check Tolerance For Every Linear
Move 1286
Chip Load 745
Chip Load Factor 467, 486, 531
Chip Load Per Flute 476
Chordal Measurement 394
Chords Between Breaks 421
Chrysler Standard Format 379
Circle 86
Circular Array 854
Clean Up Stock 787
Clear the Screen 84
Clearance 504, 667, 783
CLF 486
Climb 570, 647
Clipboard 386
Closed Contours 591
Closed Curves 137
CNC Setups 11831190
Color
Analyze Surface Points 336
Color Schemes 74
Color Selection 40
Default 886
Dimension Lines 315
Edit 71
Edit Menu 405
Extension Lines 317

New 72
Pens 897
Rainfall Color 435
Shade 342
Surfaces 435
Color Selection 514
Columnar Style 1287
Commands
2ndCircleCode 1311
ArcPlane 1311
ArcWithLine? 1311
ArcWithSame? 1312
Ask 1312
ByDiameter? 1314
ByQuadrants? 1314
CCW 1315
CDC 1315
CircDir 1315
Comment 1315
Coolant 1316
CtrCode 1316
CtrCode>180 1317
CtrCode360 1317
CtrIncremental? 1317
CW 1318
DCode 1318
DCode2 1318
DComp 1319
Drive 1319
Dummy 1319
Each 1319
EOB 1320
Feed 1320
FeedCode 1320
FeedType 1320
First#? 1321
Force? 1324
HCode 1321
HCode2 1321
Helical? 1322
Inc / Abs 1322
Inch / MM 1322
Incremental? 1322
Last#? 1323
SURFCAM Index
LComp 1323
MaxRad 1323
MinRad 1323
ModalGs 1324
Modality 1324
ModalLetters 1324
Rapid 1325
RemunSubs? 1325
Replace 1326
RevSigns 1326
RevTurret2 1327
Sequence#s 1327
Spaces 1330
Spaces? 1330
SpeedCode 1330
SpeedType 1331
Spindle 1331
Subs1st? 1331
Tolerance 1331
Tools 1331
UpperCaseComments? 1332
VCode 1332
VCode2 1332
VRapid 1332
Work 1333
WorkDefault 1333
ZRestart? 1333
Comment 794, 808, 1291
Comments 470, 519
Comments Follow 875
Common Menus 131147
Common NC Parameters 461505
Control Tab 488505
Leadin / Leadout 497499
Plunge Parameters 500505
Communicate with the NC machine 64
Communications 64
Compensation Side 796
Complement 406
Complex Expressions 1095
Composite 265268
Composite Example 267
Cone 271
Configuration Files (Post) 1418
1451
Configuration Tools 879908

Default Paths Tab 904
Display Options Tab 884887
File Options Tab 899901
Input Device Tab 908
NC Default Paths Tab 906
NC Options Tab 888896
Plotter Options Tab 896897
System Files Tab 902903
System Options Tab 881883
Tolerances Tab 905906
Configure Menu 1260
Constant 730
Between Same Radius 264
Between Similar Cross Sections 226, 294
Constant fillet radius 93
Construction View 84, 302, 854
Context-sensitive help 51
Continue 1091
Contour 589596, 711719
Cut Control 569578
Material Tab 579581
Contour 3D 596599
Cut Control 597599
Options 636697
Contour Cut 607, 654
Contour Order 659
Contouring Examples 590, 591, 592
Control 752
Control Points 188192
Control Polygon 191
Control Tab 488505
2 Axis 569578
2 Axis Contour 569578
3 Axis Cut 488505
4 and 5 Axis 711719
4 and 5 Axis Cut 488505
Auto Rough 676
Contour 3D 597599
EDM 795799, 812815
Face 748759
Face Mill 569578
Face Off 773
1452
SURFCAM Index
Groove 776777
Lathe Drill 781784
Partoff 785787
Pencil Cut 682685
Pilot Drill 601603
Planar 488505, 665674
Pocket 569578
Project 544546
Swarf 488505
Thread 778781
Thread Mill 614??
Trim 720
Turn 748759
Z Finish 657662
Z Rough 646650
Conventional 570, 647
Conversational Style 1287
Convert Operations 872876
Convert to Feedrate Arc / Helix 865
Coolant 465, 523, 1316
Coord 43
Coordinates 157, 301
Copy
Magnitude 428
Tangent Vector 428
Corner 429
Corner Angle 620, 651, 760, 803
Corner Clearance 623, 653, 763
Corner Type 786
Corrupt .mdb File 483
Countersink 529
Create 336, 355
Create Curves
Boundary Curves 196
Flow Curves 197
Pencil Curves 205
Rest Curves 201
Steep/Shallow Curves 203
Create Menu 217295, 297325
Arc 177180
Chamfer 186
Circle 181183
Fillet 183185
Line 171177
Point 164
See also Select Point Menu

Points 165171
Spline 187216
Surface
Blend 283289
Composite 265268
Cross Section 223232
Drive Curve 232256
Extrude 281283
Fillet 258265
Offset 257258
Options 292295
Points 219223
Primitives 268278
Revolution 279281
Trim Plane 290
Surfaces 217295
Text / Dimension 300325
View 297299
Create Normals 334
Create Points 329
Create Rationals 356
Create Setup Sheet 841
Create Surface Options dialog box 292
Create the part design 53
Create the toolpaths 54
Create View Menu 297
Creation Choice 196
Cross Product 175
Cross reference 46
Cross Section 206
Create / Spline Menu 206
Surface Menu 223232
Cross Section Blending 255
Cross Section Geometry 235
Cross Section Orientation 233, 294
Cross Section Surface 88
Cross Sections Options Dialog Box 226
CSF (Chrysler Standard Format) 379
CSF (Crysler Standard Format) 365
CTRL+1 through CTRL+8 40
CTRL+A 43, 90
CTRL+C 42
CTRL+D 39
CTRL+F 69
SURFCAM Index
CTRL+L 42
CTRL+M 43
CTRL+N 39
CTRL+P 69
CTRL+Q 70
CTRL+R 69
CTRL+U 68
CTRL+V 40
CTRL+Z 68
Cuboid 276
Current 299
Curvature 337
Curve 307, 703
Curve Error 885
Curve Smoothness 680
Curve Tolerance 545, 571, 714, 753, 814
Custom Cycles 528
Customize the display 35
Customize Toolbar 835
Cut 635, 758
3 Axis 636
4 and 5 Axis 700
Cut Angle 785
Cut Control Tab 59
Cut Display 888
Cut Strategy 799
Cut Waterfall Ends 671
Cutter Comp at Top 627, 653
Cutter Compensation 572, 653, 750
Cutter Diameter 671
Cutter Information 865
Cutter Intersect Spline 209
Cutter Radius 671, 730
Cutting Method 598, 607, 647, 813
Cutting Tool 338, 344
CView 42, 84, 158
CView Indicator 37, 112, 347, 887
Cycle
Bore 528
Custom 528
Drill 527
Left Tap 528
Peck 527
Ream 528
Rigid Left Tap 528
Rigid Tap 528

Tap 527
Cycle Type 602, 776, 782
Cylinder 270
Cylinder Radius 215
D
Data Bits 1120
Data Exchange Format 365
Database RAM 882
Decimal Precision 348, 351
Decitek Tape Punch 1135
Decompose 430
Default
Chamfer Distance 886
Color 886
Coolant 476
File Format Type 899
Fillet Evaluation Step 905
Fillet Radius 886
Number of Pens 389
Post Processor 1282
Restore 734
Tolerance 906
Tool Animation Speed 885
Default Editor 1049
Default Installation 909
Default Settings 879908
Display Options 884887
File Options 899901
Input Device 908
NC Default Paths 906
NC Options 888896
Paths 904
Plotter Options 896897
System Files 902903
System Options 881883
Tolerances 905906
Default System Tolerances 905
Default Version 909
Define Other Axis 856
Define Other Plane 851
Defining
Block Skips 1093
1453
1454
SURFCAM Index
Comments 1093
End Of Block 1094
Spaces 1097
Degree of Spline 189
Degree of Surface 190
Delete > Duplicate 457
Delete button 39
Delete Menu 457460, 1098
Delete Node 438
Delete Segment 417
Delete Styles 459
Depth 44, 158, 160, 628
Depth Dialog Box 160
Depth Finishing Step Size 624, 662
Depth First 627, 653
Depth of Thread 780
Depth Roughing Step 624, 653
Depth Step Size 676
Depth To 525, 782
DES 365, 380
Device Information 386
Diameter 305, 466, 530
Diameter Offset 463, 476, 793, 808
Digitizer
Digtab 933
FaroArm 916, 917
Digtab 933
Dimension 300325
Dimension Line Gap 320
Dimension Lines 312, 322
Dimension Style 310
Dimensions 79
Direct 733
Direct Numerical Control 64
Directing Curves 246, 294
Direction 197, 240, 429
Disable for finish passes 576
Display 432
Options Tab 884887
RAM 882
Display a Warning 350
Display buttons 66
Display Curves 293
Display CView Indicator 112

Display Lead Move Changes 697
Display Menu 339
Display Options 111, 293
Display Plunge Changes 629, 654
Display Text/Dimensions 346
Display the Cylinder 216
Display Thread Point Changes 803
Display Tool Path 345
Distance 166
Analyze Menu 328
Edit > Transform Menu 446
Points Menu 166
Distance From Boundary 580
Distance Tolerance 458
DNC 64
DNC Restart 1105
DNC Setup
Decitek Tape Punch 1135
Facit Tape Punch 4046 - 4047 1142
Fanuc 6 and 9 / GN 6 and 9 1150
DNC Setup and Reference 1120
RS-232 Basics 1120
DNC Setups 11251176
Anilam Crusader 1126
Bridgeport BOSS 3, 4, 5 and 6 1129
Bridgeport BOSS 8, 9 and 10 1131
Centurion 5 1132
DSI Tape Punch 1136
Dyna Mechtronics 2200 - 4400 1138
Dynapath Delta 20 and 30 1140
Fadal CNC 88, HS and MP-32 1144
Fanuc 0 1146
Fanuc 10, 11, 12, and 15 1151
Fanuc 16, 18, 160 and 180 1154
Fanuc 3 / GN 3 1148
Haas Mill and Lathe 1158
Heidenhain 145 - 412 1160
Maho 432 - 532 1163
Mazak M2 and T2 1166
Mazak M-32 and T-32 1164
Okuma OSP 500 - 5000 1167
Siemens 810 1169
Yasnac LX-1, MX-1 and MX-2 1171
Yasnac LX-3 and MX-3 1173
SURFCAM Index
Download 1257
Download NC Program 1252
Draft Angle 283
Drafted Surface 283
Draw Borders 387
Draw Rapid Moves 346
Draw the Tool 344, 476
Drawing Files 476, 745, 811
Drawing window 36
Drill 527, 602
Lathe 781784
Lathe Drill Control 781784
Lathe Options 760764
Lathe Tool Information 462488, 740
748
See also Hole Processing 509
Drill Included Angle 783
Drive Curve 232256
Drive Curve Options 294
Drive curve surface 90
DSI Tape Punch 1136
DSN 364, 379
DSN file 55
DSN Fix Files 364
DSN V7.1 379
DSN.TMP 882
Dwell Time 529, 784
DXF 365, 380
Dyna Mechtronics 2200 - 4400 1138
Dynapath Delta 20 and 30 1140
E
Edge Tangency 439, 442
Edit
Control Points 445
Edit > Delete Menu
Single, Within, Intersect, Visible 457
Styles 459
Undelete All 460
Distance 446
Location 446
Mirror 449
Offset 450455
Rotate 447
Scale 447
Scale XYZ 448
To View 449
Edit Geometry 87
Edit Material Library 485
Edit Menu 405460, 515, 1087, 1201
Color 405
Control Points 445
Delete 457460
Extend 443444
Flip Element 406
Increment 420
Join 440442
Polylines 437438
Splines 421428
Surfaces 428437
Tangency 438440
Text/Dim 444
Transform 445455
Trim/Break 406420
Edit or Add a Tool
EDM 810812
Lathe Drill Tool 747
Lathe Tool 743
Edit or Add a Tool using SURFCAM
Mill and Drill 475
Edit Text 444
Edit Toolpaths 861871
Delete 870
Done 871
Edit 863
Insert 869870
Select the Instruction 862
Edit toolpaths 63
Editing
using marks 1204
Editor
Context-Sensitive Help 1065
Defaults 1049
Menus 1061
Predator 1054
Status Bar 1065
SURFCAM NC Editor 1198
Editor Menus 1065
1455
1456
SURFCAM Index
Editor Shortcuts 1193

EDM 789818
2 Axis XY 789804
4 Axis 805806
4 Axis UV Trim 815818
Contour 789804
Cut Control 795799, 812815
Options 802804
Skim Cut 800
Tool Information 792794, 807812
Educational version of SURFCAM 32
EIA 1287
Element 146, 193, 413
Element Selection 514
Ellipse 193
Enable High Speed Machining 575, 673
Enable Integrated Verification 353
End of Block 1320
End Of Blocks 1093
English / Metric 13941395
Engrave 444, 570
Entity Plot 387
Entry Types 1292
EOB 1320
EPOST 12741277, 12871444
Error 165
Curve 885
Events 1113
Exact 285
Examples
4 Axis Contour 714
5 Axis Contour 717
Auto Chaining 227
Blended Surface 289
Clearance Distance 505
Climb Cutting 570
Composite 267
Contour Toolpath 791
Contouring 590, 591, 592
Conventional Cutting 570
Cross Section 234
Cross Section Surface 224
Cut Command Toolpath 637
Depth to Tip vs. Depth To Center 526
Dimensioning 300306
EDM Surfaces 805

Extruding 281
Gouge Checking 755
Helical Plunge Showing Pitch 503
ID Face 770
Interpolated Spline 191
Intersectional Line Moves 621
Knots 189
Limit Angle at Ends 468, 469, 576, 673
OD Face 770
OD Turning 766768
Parting Curve 213
Pencil Cut 681
Pocketing 583, 587
Ramp Plunge Showing Pitch 503
Retrace Types 491495
Surface Arrow Orientation 644
Synchronized Nodes 367
Tool Motion 701
Trimming Curve 719
Undercut 753
Use Centerline 525
Waterfall Ends 671
Wtih Text 309310
Explode 428, 438
Exponential Functions 1177
Expression 1094
Expression Variables 1094
Extend 443
Extend Type 443
Extension 316
Extension Lines 313, 315
Extents Box 638
Extrude 281283
F
Face 769772
Control 748759
Options 760764
Face Mill
Cut Control 569578
Material Tab 579581
SURFCAM Index
Face Off 773775

Control 748759, 773
Options 760764
Facemill See Face Mill
Facit Tape Punch 4046 - 4047 1142
Fadal CNC 88, HS and MP-32 1144
Fanuc 0 1146
Fanuc 10, 11, 12, and 15 1151
Fanuc 16, 18, 160 and 180 1154
Fanuc 3 / GN 3 1148
Fanuc 6 and 9 / GN 6 and 9 1150
FARO Arm
Definition Dialog Box 927
Faro Digitizer Dialog Box 917
File Menu 919
Operating with SURFCAM 929930
Options Menu 920927
Setting Up Faro 916
FaroArm 916
Digitize Menu 916, 917, 930
FastSurf ASCII File 368
Feed Between
4 Axis 495
Feed Between Clearance 730
Feed Between Rate 627, 653, 730
Feed Chip Load 467, 469, 531
Feed Rate 466, 499, 504, 530, 578, 793,
808, 866
Feeds and Speeds 1206
File
Format Management 901
Format Type Defaults 899
Options Tab 899901
File > Open 363
File Association 909
File buttons 38
File Formats 1240
File Menu 362389, 938, 1065
New 362
Open 363
Plot 388
Print 386387
Print Setup 387
Save 377
Save As 378
Send To 385
File Version 909
Files of Type 364
Open
ASCII 371
Brn 371
CADL 365
Cam Profile Data 374403
Catia 374
CSF 365
DES 365
DSN 364
DSN Fix Files 364
DXF 365
FST 365
Gear Data 374394
IGS 365
Involute Data 374
MESH 367
NCAL 368
Ncc 371
PAR 369, 370
Parasolid 368
SAT 369
Shn 371
SolidEdge 4.0 369
SolidEdge 5.0 370
SolidWorks 370
SPAC 371
SUP 371
VDA 371
Save As
CDL Files 379
CSF 379
DES 380
DSN 379
DSN V7.1 379
DXF 380
FST 381
IGS 381, 382
SAT 383
STL 383
VDA 384
1457
1458
SURFCAM Index
Fillet 258265
Evaluation Step Default 905
Radius Default 886
Trim Surface 262
Fillet Dialog Box 262
Fillet Surface 93
Filter List 1283
Filter Only 820
Filters 1283
Final Cut Only 627
Final Depth 676
Final Offset Curves 203
Finding CNC Codes 1090
Finish Cut 754
Finish Cut On 627
Finish Cycle 777
Finish Depth of Cut 758
Finish Inside Only 662
Finish Passes 574, 759, 780, 787, 814
Finish Spacing 574, 815
First Cut Depth 780
Fit 69
Fit Area Least Squares 180
Fitting Tolerance 385
Fixed Angle 498
Flat DXF 388
Flip Arc 185
Flip Element 406
Flow Control 1120
Flow Curves 197
Flow Surface 670
Flow Type 197
Flushing 793, 801
Follow 764
Follow Edge 732
Font 444, 1119
Font Path 904
Font Type 308
Force Line Inside 314
Ford Standard Tape 365
Foreign Language Support 1419
Four Surfaces Blending 288
French Automotive 371
Front View 41
FST 365, 381
G
G and M Codes 1179
G Codes Milling 1179
G Codes Turning 1182
Gap Tolerance 226
Gear Data Files 374394
Gear File 390
Gear Type 390
General Motors 365
Geometry 311
Geometry Type 571
German Automotive 371
Global Variables 13661389
See also Tool Comment Variables

or Prompted Variables
arcrad 1366
block 1367
chams 1367
comp 1367
cool 1367
coolantoff 1368
d 1368
dcomp 1368
ddist 1368
depth 1369
direct 1369
dwell 1369
endang 1369
feedtype 1370
frate 1370
gauge 1370
h 1370
h2 1371
hcdc 1371
hctr 1371
hdist 1371
homeh 1371
homev 1372
hvector 1372
incmode 1372
inidep 1373
initpower 1373
InvTime 1373
ival 1373, 1374
SURFCAM Index
ivect 1374
jvect 1374
kvect 1374
lastd 1375
lasth 1375
lasthole 1375
lastrotang 1376
lasttool 1376
lastv 1377
lcomp 1377
movelength 1378
movetime 1378
nexttool 1378
passes 1378
peck1 1378
pecks 1379
plunge 1379
pointd 1379
power 1379
rigid 1380
rotangle 1380
rotaxdir 1381
rplane 1381
sbite 1381
sclear 1381
side 1381
sleave 1382
sparkgap 1382
speed 1382
speedtype 1382
startang 1382
sub 1383
subline 1383
sweep 1383
taper 1384
times 1384
tipang 1384
tool 1384
tool1 1385
tparams 1385
turret 1385
unitmode 1386
v 1386
v2 1386
val1 - 10 1386
vbite 1387
vcdc 1387
vclear 1387
vctr 1387
vdist 1388
vgauge 1388
vleave 1388
vvector 1388
wirefeed 1389
Goto 1091
Gouge Check 496, 578, 627, 803
Graphic Tool Display 734
Graphics card 37
Grid Auto Chain Options 227
Grid Tolerance 658, 668
Groove 775777
Control 748759, 776777
Options 760764
Groove Side Step 763, 777
Groove To Center 777
Groove To Face 777
H
Haas Mill and Lathe 1158
Hardware Flow Control 1122
Heidenhain 145 - 412 1160
Helical 501
Help 4751
SURFCAM 902
Help Menu 947
Hide CView Indicator 112
Hide the toolpath 113
Hide Toolpaths 871
High Speed Machining 575, 673
Holders 904
Hole Depth 526, 603, 782
2, 3, 4 and 5 Axis 509541
Hole Start 864
Horizontal Line 172
Hyperbolic Functions 1178
1459
1460
SURFCAM Index
I
I, J, and K 727
ICD Extract as Text 872
ICD Extract to INC File 871
IF, ELSE and ENDIF Statements 1293
IGS 365, 381, 382
Implied Decimal Places 875
Import APT file 873
Import Files 872876
Import NCC file 874
INC Files 1290, 1394
INC to CADL 872
INC to Geometry 872
INC Transformations 844861
Circular Array 854
Indexed Array 856
Mirror 850
Rectangular Array 852
Reverse 861
Rotate 846
Scale Uniform 848
Scale XYZ 849
Translate 845
Wrap Cylinder 858
INC2APT 911916
Inch / MM 1395
Increment 198, 420, 502, 786
Incremental Output 13971403
Indexed Array 856
Indexing 632, 725
Infeed Angle 780
Information Dialog Box 823, 827, 828
INI File 879, 880
Initial Depth 676
Initial Feed Rate 793
Initial Power 793, 808
Initial Power Setting 793, 808
Initial Rapid 523, 603, 783
Inline Text 486488
Inline Text Commands 487
Insert Text Options 488
Input Device Tab 908
Input Devices 933
Digitizer Tablet (Digtab) 933
FaroArm 916, 917

Spaceball 933
SpaceMouse 933
Insert Bookmark 1093
Insert Comments 1093
Insert Date 1093
Insert Menu 516
Insert Post Processor Commands 470,
486, 519
Insert Text Options 488
Insert Tool Record 486488
Inspect Menu 945
Installation 31, 909
Integrated Verify 63
Intermediate Offset Curves 203
Intermediate Points 307
Interpolate 188, 192, 219
Intersect
Edit > Delete Menu 457
Select Menu 132
Select Point Menu 142
Involute Data Files 374
Island 625
Isometric View 41
J
Join 440
Join Method 442
Jump To 1206
Jump to Bookmark 1092
K
Keep All Toolpaths 350
Keep Original Toolpaths 854, 856
Keep Segment 416
Keyboard 146
Select Point Menu 145
Knots 189
L
Lag 701
Last View 70
SURFCAM Index
Lathe 737787
Drill 781784
Face 769772
Face Off 773775
Groove 775777
Options 760764
Partoff 784787
Thread 778781
Turn 765768
Lathe Axis Display Defaults
Diameter 894
Radius 891
Lathe Coordinate Systems 738
Lathe Diameter 348, 738
Lathe Drill Tool Library 746
Edit or Add a Tool 747
Select a Tool 746
Lathe Input Defaults
Diameter 893
Radius 890
Lathe Operation 749
Lathe Radius 348, 738
Lathe Tool Library 741
Select a Tool 741
Lathe Tool Parameters 743
Lathe View 738
Layer 42
Layered Plates 558
Layers 153157
Lead / Lag 701
Lead Angle 701, 703
Lead In 759
Lead In Length 780
Lead In Out Type 797
Lead Length 315, 499
Lead Move 498
Lead On Feed Between 730
Lead Out 759
Lead Out Length 780
Lead Type 498, 577, 701, 798
Leader 306
Leadin / Leadout 497499, 576578
Leadin / Leadout Speed 764
Leading0s? 1323
Leave Clearance 603
Left Side View 41
Left Tap 528
Length 502, 578
Edit / Extend 443
Length Offset 463, 476, 522
Libraries 1422
License file 32
Light Source 341
Limit Angle at Ends 672
Limit Rotary Motion 729
Line 622, 1100
Create / Line Menu 171177
Line Interval 545
Line Mesh 221
Line Number See Block Number Output
Line On All 577
Line On Final 577
Line Tangent 425
Linear 264, 303
Linear Moves for Tolerance 1286
Linear Sorting 534
Location 413
Analyze Menu 333
Fillet Menu 184
Location Menu 515
Locations tab 532
Logarithmic Functions 1177
Loop 797
Lower Guide Distance 799
Lower Left Corner 640
LPOST 12741277, 12871444
M
M Codes Milling - Fanuc 1181
Machine Left-over Material 575
Machine List 1260
Machining
Multiple surface 103
1461
1462
SURFCAM Index
Single surface 99
Z Rough 107
Machining methods 99
Machining modes 99
Magnitude 426
Maho 432 - 532 1163
Mail 386
Main Menu 131, 11991239
Main menu 38
Main Program 1403
Major Diameter 775, 785
Major Direction 535
Manual Sorting 534
Maps to Angle 859
Maps To Radius 859
Mark Length 319
Mask 43
Example 160
Mask Selection Settings 158, 513
Material 102, 119, 135, 463, 521, 793, 808
Material Cut Mode 580, 654
Material Description 486
Material Height 645
Material Information Dialog Box 485, 638
Material Library
Add Material 485
Select Material 484
Material Library DLL 902
Material Tab
Pocket, Contour and Face Mill 579581
Material Type 638
Math Functions 1095, 1177
Math Operations 1103
Max Error 674
Maximum Angle 658, 668
Maximum Chordal Deviation 849, 859
Maximum Cut Angle 672
Maximum Evaluation Step 356
Maximum Feed Between 619, 730, 802
Maximum Radius 576
Maximum Z Value 647
Mazak M2 and T2 1166
Mazak M-32 and T-32 1164
MDB files 471
Memory Allocation Settings 882
Menus in DNC
DNC 1107
Menus in Editor
Analysis 1220
Backplot 1081
Calcs 1214
Compare 1069
Delete 1098
Edit 1087, 1201
File 1065, 1199
Global 1206
Help 1176, 1239
Insert 1092
Options 1117, 1231
Search 1205
Window 1119, 1239
Menus In SURFCAM
Analyze 325338
Create 297325
Display 339
Edit 405460
Edit > Transform 445455
File 362389
Main 131
Options 343362
Select 132
Select Chain 134
Select Point 140
Vector 145
Menus In Verify
File 938
Help 947
Inspect 945
Model 939
Options 946
Verify 943
View 942
Merge Setup 839
MESH 367
Method 440
Mill Axis 348, 738
Mill Tool 101
Mill/Turn 507509
Min / Max 328
Minimum 502
SURFCAM Index
Minimum Angle 658, 668

Minimum Cut Depth 780
Minimum Radius 576
Minimum Tilt 706
Minimum Z 496, 599, 648, 714
Minor Diameter 774, 786
Mirror 449, 850
Mirror Plane 851
Modality 1324
Model Menu 939
Mouse As 309
Mouse Text / Style Text 325
Move Node 422, 437
MPOST 12741277, 12871444
Multi Surface 497
Multiple 413
Multiple surface machining 103
MultSelOn 133
N
Name 1291
NC 2 Axis 567634
NC 4 Axis 699736
NC 5 Axis 699736
NC Code 373
NC Code Format 1291
NC Default Paths Tab 906
NC Dialog Options 353
NC Edit See Edit Toolpaths
NC File Is For Lathe 875
NC Lathe 737787
NC Menu 1100
NC Mode 870
NC Operations Manager ??876, 1269
Commands / Toolbar 834876
Add a New Setup Section 838
Add NC Operation 838
Backplot Toolpaths 871
Create Setup Sheet 841
Edit NC Toolpaths 861871
Hide Toolpaths 871
ICD Extract as Text 872
ICD Extract to INC File 871
1463
INC Transformations 844861

Merge Setup 839
Show Toolpaths 871
Transformations 844
Information Dialog Box 823, 827, 828
Operations Tree 821
Toolbar 819
NC Operations Manager Dialog Box 819
NC Operations Tree 62
NC Options Tab 888896
NC Settings 348
NC Setup Section Information 830
NC Wire EDM 789818
NCA 368
NCAL 368
NCC File 1277
Negative Z 659, 661
Nested 629
Network 471
New 362
Next Tool Change 1100
Next View 70
Node 165
Node / Tangent Vector 422
Non-Uniform Knots 189
Normal 299, 498
Normal Fillet 261
Normal Vector Display 345
Normals 334
Normals Used For Tool Offset 203
Northrop 368
Nose Radius 741
Number Keys 345
Number of Copies 856
Number of Flutes 467, 476, 531
Number of Rotary Axis 730
Number of Skim Passes 800
Number of Splines 198
Number of Teeth 391
Numerical Values 149
NURB Curve 188
NURB Filter 12851287
NURB Fit 12851287
NURB Spline 189, 421
1464
SURFCAM Index
NURB Surface 190, 191

NURB Surface dialog box 219
NURB Surface Line Mesh 221
O
Offset 175, 183, 257258, 572, 640
Chain 452
Chained Geometry 452
Change 450
Distance 451
Lines, Arcs, Circles 451
Location 451
Splines 455
Tangent 452
Offset Curve Overlap 798
Offset Dialog Box 257
Offset Distance 257
Offset Register 793, 800
Offset Side 257
Offset with Clearance 572
Offset with Compensation 572
Offset Z Coordinate 865
Okuma OSP 500 - 5000 1167
On 570, 580
On Contour 598
On Top 598
Open Contours 592, 659
Open File 363
See also Files of Type

Operation 749, 758, 779
Operation Description 824
Operation Name 822, 824
Operations Manager ??876
Operations Manager button 39
Operations Tree 62, 821, 1269
Operators 1293
Opposite Orientation as Duplicate 458
OPSTOP 799
Optimize 193, 428
Options 226, 292, 413
2 Axis 619
3 Axis 636697
4 and 5 Axis 728734
EDM 802804
Lathe 760764
Shade 340
Z Finish 662
Z Rough Pocket 651656
Options > Axis Menu
Mill Axis / Lathe Radius / Lathe
Diameter 348
Options > Units Menu
Inch / Metric 348
Options Menu 343362, 946, 1117, 1231
Axis 348
Create 355
Display 344347
NC Settings 348??
Password 355
Snap & Grid 356
Tolerances 347
Units 348
Options tab 60
Order 560
Orientation 722
Cross Section 233, 246
Orientation as Duplicate 458
Original Undercut Boundaries 203
Other 185, 187
Outer Diameter 392
Overlap 658, 668, 680, 797
Overline 309
P
Pan 69
Paper Selection 897
Paper Size 389
PAR Files 369, 370
Parametric Spline 421
Parametric Surface 431
Parasolid Files 368
Parity 1120
Part 135
Part Off See Partoff
Part Thickness 799
Part/Edge 572
Part/Edge with Clearance 572
Part/Edge with Compensation 573
SURFCAM Index
Parting Line 213

Parting Type 786
Partoff 784787
Control 748759, 785787
Options 760764
Path Island Depths 625
Paths Defaults 904
Pause 884
Peck 501, 527, 602, 786
Peck Increment 529, 784
Pen
Color Assignments 897
Plotter 388
Pencil Curves 205
Pencil Cut 681685
Cut Control 682685
Options 636697
Pencil Pointer 357
Perp. Element 147
Perpendicular Element 147
Pilot Drill Control Tab 601603
Pilot Hole 600634
Drill Control Tab 601603
Pilot Holes 694
Pin/Ball Measurement 394
Pitch 502
Pitch Diameter 391
Planar 104
Cut Control Tab 488505, 665674
Options 636697
Planar (Chain Options) 136
Plane 277
Plot 386, 388
See also Print

Plotter File 902
Plotter Options 896897
Plotter Paper Size 389
Plotter Selection 897
Plotter Tolerance 389
PLT Path 904
Plunge 135, 501
1465
Plunge Chip Load 469

Plunge Clearance 496, 523, 571, 603, 624,
649, 734, 753, 783
Plunge Distance 861
Plunge Parameters 500505
Plunge Point Selection 649
Plunge Rate 467, 575, 866
Plunge Rough 685695
Plunge Side 599
Plunge Type 500505
Pocket 581589
Cut Control 569578
Material Tab 579581
Pocket Cut 607
Pocket Cut Mode 654
Pocket Nesting Depth 628
Pocketing Examples 583, 587
Pocketing Mode 570
Pocketing Options Tab 651656
Point 702
Point / Angle 146
Point / Line 299
Point On Cylinder Axis 859
Point See Select Point Menu
Pointer coordinates 37
Pointers 356
Points
Create Menu 165171
Dialog Box 219
Spline Menu 188
Surface Menu 219223
Points on Existing Geometry 357
Polygon 191, 428, 431
Polyline 172, 437
Position 445, 503
Post 820
Post Configuration Files 1418
Post Defaut 1282
Post List 1270
Post Processor 1267, 12871444
ArcFltrMx 1284
LPOST / MPOST / EPOST 12741277
NURB Filter 12851287
SPost Processor 12681273
1466
SURFCAM Index
SURFCAM.PST 12781282
Post Processor Command Button 486
See Commands
POST Sample Libraries 1422
Post.ini 1418
POSTFORM 1274, 1395
POSTFORM Libraries 1289
POSTFORM Structure 1290
Power Setting 793, 801, 808
Predator Editor 1054
Pre-drill Thread Points 798
Pressure Angle 392
Preview 516
Primitives 268278
Print 386387
Device Information 386
Entity Plot 387
Scale 387
Screen Bitmap 386
Printer 387
Process Menu 515
Process tab 517
Product Notes 30
Program Number 469, 793, 808
Program To Tool 463
Programming Calculator 1215
Project 166, 211, 542546
See also NC Project Basics

Cut Control 544546
Options 728734
Project Direction 198
Project Spline Direction 413
Prompt line 37
Prompted Variables 13891392
See also Global Variables

or Tool Comment Variables
endh 1389
endv 1389
maxrpm 1389
program# 1390
toold 1390
toolh 1390
toolv 1391
work 1391
workd 1391
workh 1391
workv 1392
Properties 445, 1112
PST See SURFCAM.PST
PST Wizard 1282
R
Radius 304, 502, 578, 786, 798
Polar Coordinates 144
Rainfall Color 435
Ramp 501
Ramp Angle 501, 503
Range 618
Rapid Frequency 732
Rapid Plane 545, 571, 599, 647, 714
3 and 5 Axis 496
4 Axis 496
Rapid Plane Clearance 624, 734
Rationals 356
Ream 528
Receive from CNC 1108
Rectangle 84, 176
Rectangular Array 168, 852
Rectangular Grid 853
Reference Location 855
Reference Number 485
Reference Point 215
Reference Point Angle 215
Relative Plane
4 Axis 493
Relative Plunge Clearance 496
Remaining Stock Overlap 607
Repaint 70
Repaint Timer 346
Repositioning 562
Reseq 1206
Resequence 1103
Rest Curves 201
Rest Material
2D 605610
SURFCAM Index
3D 678680
Restore Defaults 734
Retain Orientation 855
Retrace 670
Retrace Type
4 Axis 492
Retract 502, 786
Retract Angle 780
Retract Clearance 753, 780
Retract Distance 796
Reverse 185, 861
Reverse Hyperbolic Functions 1178
Revolution 279281
Right Side View 41
Right-click menu 35, 36
Rigid Left Tap 528
Rigid Tap 528
Rolling Ball 263
Rolling Ball Fillet 261
Root Diameter 391
Rotary 4 Axis 888
Rotary 5 Axis 889
Rotary Axis Zero 724
Rotate 69, 447, 846
Rotate Around Z Axis 339
Rotation Angle 846, 856
Rotation Axis 856
Rotation Increment 886
Rotation Wait 346
Rough and Skim each, then All Tabs 799
Rough Cut 754
Rough Depth of Cut 758
Rough Spacing 573
Rough, Skim, Tab each profile 799
Rough, Tab, Skim each profile 799
Round 797
RS-232 Properties 1112
Rubber-band 301
Ruled 706
Ruled (Blended Surface Type) 286
S
Sample Expressions 1096
Sampling Curves 436

SAT 369, 383
Save 377
Save As 378
See also Files of Type

Save as Type 378
Save Automatic 881
Save Curves 680
Save File 87
Save In 378
Save Z Slices To Layer 697
Scale 45
Dimension 312
Edit >Transform Menu 447
Print 387
Text Height 324
Scale About Location 848
Scale Uniform 848
Scale XYZ 448, 849
Scallop 490
Scallop Limit Angle 697
Scallop Minimum Step 666
Scallop Sample Distance 697
Screen Elements 1061
Screen Size 885
Search Menu 1205
Section Description 830
Section File Name 830
Sections 223
Sections Auto Chain Options 227
Select Drill Tool 521
Select Material 102, 484
Select Menu 132133
Intersect 132
MultSelOn 133
SelMode / DeselMode 133
Single 132
Visible 133
Within 132
Select Mill Tool 101
Select Point Menu 85, 140145
Center 141
Endpoint 141
Intersect 142
Keyboard 145
1467
1468
SURFCAM Index
Midpoint 142
Point 141
Quadrant 145
Relative 143
Sketch 140
Select To Bookmark 1089
Select Tool 1089
Select Tool dialog box 473
Selectable
Surfaces 346
SelMode / DeselMode 133
Send To 385
Send to CNC 1107
Sequence Numbers 1096, 1099, 1408
1418
Sequences 13341364
Canned Cycles 13471366
AutoThread 1349
Back bore 1350
Bore 1351
Cancel 1353
Custom 1354
Drill 1355
LTap 1357
Peck 1358
Ream 1361
Tap 1363
Standard and Optional 13361347
1stToolChange 1336
BeginRow 1337
Between 1338
CcwCode 1338
CwCode 1338
EndCode 1339
EndRow 1340
Index 1341
InFeed 1341
LineCode 1341
OutFeed 1342
RapidCode 1342
StartCode 1342
SubCall 1343
SubEnd 1344
SubStart 1344
ToolChange 1345
UnWind 1345
Upon Variable 1346
Sequential 777
Set Axis 722728
4 Axis 723
5 Axis 727
Set Command 1294
Setup Section Information Dialog Box 830
Setup Sheet 841
Shade 43
Shallow Cutting 667
Shallow Cutting Options 668
Shank Orientation 727
Sharnoa 373
Sharp 796, 797
Sharp Corner Angle 804
Sharp Corner Type 796
Loop 797
Round 797
Sharp 796, 797
Shelf Plane 545, 676
Shortcut keys 46
Shortcuts
CTRL+1 through CTRL+8 40
CTRL+A 90
CTRL+C 42
CTRL+D 39
CTRL+F 69
CTRL+L 42
CTRL+M 43
CTRL+N 39
CTRL+P 69
CTRL+Q 70
CTRL+R 69
CTRL+U 68
CTRL+V 40
CTRL+Z 68
Editor 1193
Shortest Distance 534
Show Advanced Analyze Dialogs 883
Show CView Indicator 347
Show the toolpath 113
Show Toolpaths 871
Side 429
Side Angle 708, 713
SURFCAM Index
Side Clearance 529, 572, 623, 784, 803,

814
Side Clearance Amount 814
Side Clearance Value 650
Side Finishing Step 803
Side Finishing Step Size 624
Side Roughing Step 653
Side Roughing Step Size 623
Side Step 786
Side Step Mode 732
Siemens 810 1169
SIM 32
Simulation Mode 937
Simultaneous Axis Motion 726
Simultaneous Motion Option
3 Axis 727
4 Axis 727
Single 134
Chain Menu 134
Select Menu 132
Single Entity 266
Single Surface 496
Single surface machining 99
Skim Cut Tab 800
Snap 357
Snap & Grid 356
Software Interface Module (SIM) 32
SolidEdge 4.0 369
SolidEdge 5.0 370
SolidWorks Files 370
Sort Order 534
Sort Toolpaths By Tool 853
Sort Type 608, 628, 803
Sorting 563
SPA 371
SPAC 371
Spaceball 933
SpaceMouse 933
Spaces 1097, 1099
Spans 189
Spark Gap 793, 808
Special PST File Commands 1282
Speed of Tool Path Animation 346
Sphere 272
1469
Spin 748
Spindle Speed 466, 530, 741
Spiral 570, 580, 583, 654
Spiral Helix 194
Spline 421
Spline Menu 187216
Points 187
Spline Mesh 367
Spline to Arc 179
Splines 266
Split Operation 840
SPost Post Processor 1268??, 1270, ??
1273
Creating SPost Posts and FIL Files 1268
NC Operations Manager 1269
Running 1268
Spring Passes 759, 780
Square 786
SRM 38
SS 486
Standard G Code Style 1287
Standard Views 41
Start
INC2APT 911
SURFCAM 33
SURFCAM DNC 1243
SURFCAM Solids 33
Start Canned Cycle 868
Start the Editor 1055
Automatically Open a CNC Program 1060
Command Line Options 1055
From the Command Prompt 1055
Multiple Command Line Options 1056
When Starting Windows 1059
Start Z Angle 706
Starts 780
Status bar 3945
Status Menu
Coordinates 157
Depth 158, 160
Steep Cutting 658
Steep Cutting Options 658
Steep/Shallow Curves 203
Step Direction 535
Step Size 490
1470
SURFCAM Index
Step Type 490

STL 383
Stock To Leave 545, 574, 599, 754, 815
Stock To Leave at Bottom Surfaces 713
Stock To Leave on Guide Surface 713
STOP 799
Stop Bits 1120
Straight 786
Straight Line 798
Straight Plunge On Islands 631
String 172
Structured Logic 12921295
Style 310
Style Number 445
Styles
Delete 459
Submenu bar 35
Submerge Tank 793
Subprogram Output 14031408
Summary Information 1071
SUP 371
Super - Patch 371
Supress Dimension Lines 313
Surface arrow 77, 79
Surface Blend Angle 287
Surface Display Options Dialog Box 255,
292
Surface Edge 413
Surface Editing 218
Surface Fillet Maximum Evaluation
Step 356
Surface Generation Tolerance 293
Surface Intersect and Fillet Tolerance 355
Surface Intersect Spline 208
Surface Intersection Tolerance 905
Surface Menu
Blend 283289
Composite 265268
Cross Section 223232
Drive Curve 232256
Extrude 281283
Fillet 258265
Offset 257258
Options 292295
Points 219223
Primitives 268278
Revolution 279281
Trim Plane 290
Surface of Revolution 280
Surface Parametric Tolerance 293, 906
Surface Points 335
Surface Section Splines Dialog Box 206
Surface Speed 465, 466, 469, 486, 530,
531, 532
Surface Spline 195
Surface Tolerance 490, 545, 649
Surface Trimming 406420
See also Trim/Break

Surface/Curve Tolerance 1286
Surfaces 217295
Surfaces Selectable By 346
SURFCAM DNC 12431266
Communicate 12571259
Download 1252, 1257
Terminal Mode 12571259
Upload 1257
Configure 1260
Add Machine 1244, 1260
Add/Edit
Communication Tab 1247
Data Specifications Tab 1249
Files Specifications Tab 1245
Filters Tab 1251
Delete Machine 1260
Edit Machine 1260
Connect 1261
Download 1261
Other Considerations 12621266
ASCII to EIA Translation 1265
Configuration Options 1262
Control Character List 1264
Hardware Connections 1263
Procedure
1. Gather Information 1243
2. Add the Machine 1244
3. Configure Machine Entry 1245
4. Download NC Program 1252
Receive 1261
Reference 12541262
SURFCAM Index
Start SURFCAM DNC

Access SURFCAM DNC 1243
Transmit 1261
SURFCAM NC Editor 1198
SURFCAM Solids 53, 161
Install 32
Start 33
SURFCAM Verify 63
SURFCAM.INI File 879, 880
SURFCAM.PST 12781282
BeginPost Section 1278
Commands, Variables, Switches 1280
PostItem Section 1279
Swap All Delete 459
Swarf 705
Control Tab 488505
Options 728734
Sweep 184
Switches 1311
See also Commands

Synchronize 228
Synchronize with Connecting Lines 230,
231
System Files Tab 902903
System Options Tab 881883
T
Tab Stop Code 799
Tab Width 798
Table 481483
Tables 11771193
Tangent 452, 498
Analyze 333
Chain Options 136
Edit / Join 441
Edit / Tangency 438440
Edit / Tangency Method 440
Tangent 2 178, 182
Tangent 3 179, 182
Tangent Vector 423
Transform / Offset Menu 452
Tangent + Angle 498
Tangent 2 178, 182
Tangent 3 179, 182

Tap 527
Taper Angle 572, 808
Tapered Tools 708
Tapered Walls 631
Teardrop 798
Temp Directory 904
Templates 1073
Arcs 1077
Commands 1076
Registers 1074
Strings 1075
Terminal 1110
Terminal Mode 12571259
Text 307
Alignment 320
Edit / Text/Dim Menu 444
Position 321
Spacing 310
Text/Dimension 300
Text Along Curve 307
Text Color 1119
Text Labels 36
Text Page Size 883
Text Style 445
Thread 778781
Control 778781
Options 760764
THREAD G33 1344
Thread Mill 610
Cut Control 614??
Thread Milling See Thread Mill
Thread Pitch 779
Thread Wire 793
Threadmill See Thread Mill
Threshold Angle 205, 673, 683
Tilt
2D Cross Sections 246
3D Cross Sections 251
Time 1097
Time Delay 884
1471
1472
SURFCAM Index
Time Pop-Ups are Displayed 346

Tip 525
Tip Diameter 391
Tip Radius 465, 527
TLE File Extension 745, 812
To View 449
Tolerance 216, 347
Analyze Max / Min 329
Analyze Surface Points 335
Angle 136, 287, 442
Blended Surface Type 285
Chain 347
Dimension 324
Gap Between Intersecting Splines 226
Plotter 389
Surface Fillet Maximum Evaluation
Step 356
Surface Intersect and Fillet 355
Surface Paramentric 293
User 348
View 348
Tolerance Comparison 680
Tolerance Default 906
Tolerances 202, 680
Tab 905906
Tool 463, 520, 741, 792, 807
Animation Speed 885
Directory 904
Display Size 882
Tool Animation Wait 346
Tool Bar See Toolbar
Tool Center 579
Tool Change Information 867
Tool Color 345
Tool Comment Variables 1392
See also Global Variables

Corner 1392
Tooldiam 1392
Toolrad 1392
Tool Containment 489, 546
Tool Description 476
Tool dialog box 473
Tool Diameter 465, 527, 874
Tool Display 734
Tool Information
2 Axis EDM Contour 792794
2 Axis Thread Mill 612613
2, 3, 4 and 5 Axis 462488
EDM 807812
Lathe 462488, 740748
Tool Information tab 58
Tool Library
EDM 809
Select a Tool 809
Lathe 741
Select a Lathe Tool 741
Select a Tool 746
Mill and Drill 470483
Add a Tool Table 481483
Edit or Add a Tool using Microsoft
Access 477481
Edit or Add a Tool using SURFCAM 475
Select a Tool 471, 473
Tool Library DLL 902
Tool Material 476, 745
Tool Number 463, 476, 522, 808
Tool Path 345
Tool Path Smoother 1284
Tool Speed 346
Tool Table 481483
Tool Tip Radius 874
Tool Vector 498
Tool Vertical For Rapid (4 and 5 Axis) 732
Toolbars
Editor 1063
Backplot 1079
SURFCAM
EDM Tool Dialog Box 809
Hole Processing 516
Lathe Drill Tool Dialog Box 746
Lathe Tool Dialog Box 742
NC Operations Manager 819, 834876
SURFCAM Main 38
Delete button 39
SURFCAM Index
Display buttons 66
File buttons 38
Operations Manager button 39
Transform button 39
Verify 947
ToolLib Gauge Length 629, 734, 764
Toolpath INC Edit Size 883
Toolpath information 113
Toolpath shortcut keys 102
Tooth Thickness 392
Top 571
Top Plane
4 Axis 493
Top Profile 642
Top View 41, 79
Top Z 571
Torus 273
Total Least Squares 180
Transform button 39
Transform Menu 446
Offset 450454
Transformations 844
Translate 845, 1115
Trig Calculator 1214
Trigonometric Functions 1177
Trim 178, 184, 186, 443
4 and 5 Axis 719
Create / Chamfer 186
Create / Fillet 184
Cut Control 720
Edit / Trim/Break Menu 406420
EDM 815818
Options 728734
Trim Curve Chaining Menu 816
Trim Plane 290
Trim Surface 262, 265, 406420
Fillet 262
Trim/Break 406420
Boundaries 407
Definitions 407
Element 413
Extending an Element 407
Lines, Splines, Arcs 409
1473
Lines, Splines, Arcs to a Location 411

Location 413
Multiple 413
Options 413
Project an Element 408
Surface Edge 413
Surface to another Surface 414
Surface to Line, Spline, Surface Edge,
Arc 412
Surface to Location 415
True Angle 327
Truncate Comments 1098
Truncate Line 1100
Turn 765768
Control 748759
Options 760764
Turn on Repaint Timer 346
Tutorial
Challenge designs 98
Complete 2D NC project 117
Create 2 fillet surfaces 93
Create a 2D part design 84
Create a cross section surface 88
Create a drive curve surface 90
Create the dimensions 79
Multiple surface machining 103
NC Operations Manager tools 110
Single surface machining 99
Use the SURFCAM Display buttons 66
Work with colors 71
Work with the Color Schemes 74
Z Rough machining 107
Twist Vectors 430
Two Surfaces Blending 285
Type
Blended Surface 285
U
U and V Splines 885
Undelete Last 460
Undercut 753
Undercut (Shade) 340
Undercut 2D 499
1474
SURFCAM Index
Undercut 3D 498
Underline 309
Undo 185, 187, 266
Uniform Knots 189
Unitmode 1395
Units 348, 883
Unsupported Entities 873
Untrim 179, 266, 428, 433
Upgrade 32
Upload 1257
Upper Guide Distance 799
Upper Right Corner 640
Use Centerline 524
Use Construction View Coordinates 873
Use Cylindrical Cam 859
User Interface 34
User Tolerance 348
Values 561
Variable Fillet Information Dialog Box 264
Variable fillet radius 95
Variable Radius 263
Variable Radius Fillet 261
Variables 1364??, 13641389
Variables See Global Variables
or Tool Comment Variables
VDA 371, 384

Vector 135
Chain Menu 135
Vector Display 345
Vector Keyin 146
Vector Menu 145147
Verify
File Menu 938
Help Menu 947
Inspect Menu 945
Integrated Verify 63
Model Menu 939
Options Menu 946
Simulation Mode 937
Stand-alone Verify 63
Verify Menu 943
Verify Menu Toolbar 938

View Menu 942
Wireframe Mode 936
Verify Menu 943
Version 909
Vertical Gap 322
Vertical Line 172
Vertical Surface Check 697
View 40, 297
View Coordinates 157
View Indicator 37, 110
View Menu 942
View Tolerance 348
View Tolerance Default 906
Views 41
Visible
Select Menu 133
Wait 884
Warning 350
Waterfall 671
Wedge 275
Wide Lines 887
Window Menu 1119, 1239
Wire Compensation 795
Wire EDM 789818
Wire Feed 808
Wireframe Mode 936
With Cutter Comp 814
Within
Select Menu 132
Word Address 1394
Word Address Formats 1295
Work Offset 464, 522, 793
Worksheets 1195
Workspace 36
World Coordinates 157
World Dialog Box 85
Cartesian 144
Polar 144
Wrap Coordinate 859
SURFCAM Index
Wrap Curve 214

Wrap Cylinder 858
Wrap Mapping 859
Wrapping Angle Direction 858
Write Normal 733
X
X Gauge Length 464, 523
XY Step Size 649
XYZ Axes 146
Y
Yasnac LX-1, MX-1 and MX-2 1171
Yasnac LX-3 and MX-3 1173
Z Finish 656663
3 Axis Options 636697
Cut Control Tab 657662
Options 662
Z Gauge Length 464, 523
Z Level 659, 661
Z Range Filter 558
Z Rough 107, 638656
3 Axis Options 636697
Cut Control Tab 646650
Pocket Options 651656
Z Step Size 649
Zig 570, 580
Zig Zag 570, 580, 654, 659
Zoom In 68
Zoom Out 68
Z Coordinate 859
1475
1476
Index
SHORTCUT KEYS
FUNCTION
F1
Context-sensitive Help.
ALT+F4
Close SURFCAM.
ALT+TAB
Switch to another application.
ARROWS
1.
Double-click the Rotate button on the toolbar. Then continue to

press the arrow keys to rotate the image in 5 increments around
the vertical or the horizontal axis.
2.
Double-click the Pan button on the toolbar. Then press an arrow

key to move the image.
BACKSPACE ()
Display the previous menu.
CTRL+1...CTRL+8
Display one of the eight standard Views.
CTRL+0
Increase the number of the current View by 1. If the View is at its highest
number, CTRL+0 sets the View to 1.
CTRL+9
Decrease the number of the current View by 1. If the View is at 1, CTRL+9

sets the View at the highest number.
CTRL+ESC
Display the Start menu.
CTRL+A
Toggle the Shade function.
CTRL+C
Display the CView dialog box.
CTRL+D
Display the Delete menu.
CTRL+F
Fit the geometry to the screen.
CTRL+L
Display the Layers dialog box.
CTRL+M
Display the Mask Selection Settings dialog box.
CTRL+ALT+M
Toggle the Mask function.
CTRL+N
Display the NC Operations Manager dialog box.
CTRL+O
Display the Color Selection bar.
SHORTCUT KEYS
FUNCTION
CTRL+P
Pan.
CTRL+Q
Repaint.
CTRL+R
Rotate.
CTRL+S
Save As.
CTRL+T
Open the Tap and Drill Chart.
CTRL+U
Scale the view by 1/2.
CTRL+V
Display the Views dialog box.
CTRL+Z
Zoom In.
ESC
Display the previous dialog box, or go to the previous menu.
+ OR -
Double-click the Rotate button on the toolbar. Then continue to press the +
or - keys to rotate the image in 5 increments around Z axis.
TOOLPATH
SHORTCUT KEYS
The Tab key
TOOL DISPLAY DURING THE CUT OPERATIONS

1st press of the tab key
Display the tool holder with the tool.
2nd press of the tab key
No display of the tool or the holder. (Fastest method of display.)
3rd press of the tab key
Display the tool without the holder.
The Number Keys
0 through 9
Change the speed of the tool. 0 is fastest speed. 9 is slowest
speed.
The Enter Key
Toggle between start the tool motion and stop the tool motion if the
tool is visible.
The Space bar
Move the tool one step at a time after the tool motion is stopped.

SURFCAMmanual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SURFCAMmanual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Welcome to SURFCAM

How to Use the Acrobat Reader

How to Use the Acrobat Reader

HOW TO USE THE ACROBAT READER

OPEN the Manual

FROM THE START BUTTON

Click the Start button.

MOVE the pointer

Make sure to select the current page or a range of pages.

How to Use the Acrobat Reader

Enter the word.

Press CTRL+G to repeat the search.

COPY text to the clipboard.

Click the Text Select button on the toolbar.

Select the text.

SEE the page and the bookmarks

Click the Show/Hide Navigation pane button to switch between a

GET More Help

Click Help on the Adobe Acrobat Reader menu.

Click Reader Guide.

Copyright 2002 by Surfware, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

How to Use the Acrobat Reader

Copyright 2002 by Surfware, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

THE SURFCAM MANUAL

Chapter 2 How To Use SURFCAM

SURFCAM Table of Contents

The Cut Control tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Chapter 3 The SURFCAM Tutorial

Part 2: Design a Part with SURFCAM

SURFCAM Table of Contents

Two challenge designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Part 3: Machine the Part

Part 4: A Complete Project

SURFCAM Table of Contents

The Select Point Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Part 2: Dialog Boxes

Chapter 5 Create the Designs

Chapter 6 Create the Surfaces

SURFCAM Table of Contents

3D Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Chapter 7 Design Utilities

SURFCAM Table of Contents

Chapter 8 Edit the Designs

SURFCAM Table of Contents

SURFCAM Table of Contents

Edit or Add a Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485

Chapter 10 Common NC Operations

SURFCAM Table of Contents

Material Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

SURFCAM Table of Contents

Tool Information Tab Planar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664

Chapter 13 4 Axis and 5 Axis

SURFCAM Table of Contents

The Contour Cut Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712

Copyright 2002 by Surfware, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

SURFCAM Table of Contents

Chapter 15 Wire EDM

Chapter 16 NC Operations Manager

SURFCAM Table of Contents

Rectangular Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

Chapter 18 Miscellaneous Utilities

SURFCAM Table of Contents

Definition Dialog Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .927